2013 Nissan Note E12 SM

Edition: April 2013 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
A
Revision: April 2013
Pub. No. SM14E00E12X0
A GENERAL INFORMATION
B ENGINE
GI
EM
LU
General Information
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication System
A
CO Engine Cooling System
EC
FL
EX
Engine Control System
Fuel System
Exhaust System
B
STR Starting System
C
ACC Accelerator Control System
C
D
D TRANSMISSION & DRIVE-
LINE
CL
TM
Clutch
Transaxle & Transmission
D
DLN Driveline
FAX
RAX
Front Axle
Rear Axle
E
E SUSPENSION FSU Front Suspension
RSU
SCS
WT
Rear Suspension
Suspension Control System
Road Wheels & Tires
F
F BRAKES BR Brake System
G STEERING
PB
BRC
ST
Parking Brake System
Brake Control System
Steering System
G
H RESTRAINTS
STC
SB
SBC
Steering Control System
Seat Belt
Seat Belt Control System
H
SRS SRS Airbag
I VENTILATION, HEATER &

AIR CONDITIONER
SRC
VTL
HA
SRS Airbag Control System
Ventilation System
Heater & Air Conditioning System
I
HAC Heater & Air Conditioning Control System
J BODY INTERIOR INT
IP
Interior
Instrument Panel
J
SE Seat
K BODY EXTERIOR,
DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE
ADP
DLK
SEC
Automatic Drive Positioner
Door & Lock
Security Control System
K
SECURITY
GW Glass & Window System
PWC
RF
Power Window Control System
Roof
L
EXT Exterior
L DRIVER CONTROLS
BRM
MIR
EXL
Body Repair Manual
Mirrors
Exterior Lighting System
M
INL Interior Lighting System
WW
DEF
HRN
Wiper & Washer
Defogger
Horn
N
All rights reserved. No part M ELECTRICAL & POWER
of this Service Manual may
be reproduced or stored in a
CONTROL
PWO
BCS
LAN
Power Outlet
Body Control System
LAN System
O
PCS Power Control System
retrieval system, or transmit-
ted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechani- N DRIVER INFORMATION &
CHG
PG
MWI
Charging System
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
Meter, Warning Lamp & Indicator
P
cal, photo-copying, record- MULTIMEDIA WCS Warning Chime System
ing or otherwise, without the SN Sonar System
prior written permission of AV Audio, Visual & Navigation System
O CRUISE CONTROL CCS Cruise Control System
Nissan Mexicana S.A de C.V.
P MAINTENANCE MA Maintenance
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2014
NISSAN NOTE.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information

at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifi-
cations and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.
GETtheMANUALS.org
PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
NISSAN MEXICANA, S.A. DE C.V.
Technical Publications
Literatura@nissan.com.mx
FAX: (52) (55) 56-28-27-26
SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year:

PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ):
Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail:
Page number(s) Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer) YES NO
If no, what page number(s)? Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Please describe the issue or problem in detail:
Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer) YES NO
Please comment:
What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?
DATE: YOUR NAME: POSITION:

DEALER: DEALER NO.: ADDRESS:
CITY: STATE/COUNTRY: ZIP/POSTAL CODE:
GETtheMANUALS.org
QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE
2014

Engine Tune-up Data INFOID:0000000009725684
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine type HR16DE

Cylinder arrangement In-line 4
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 1,598 (97.51)
Bore and stroke mm (in) 78.0× 83.6 (3.071 ×3.291)
Valve arrangement DOHC
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Compression 2
Number of piston rings
Oil 1
Compression ratio 9.8:1
Standard 1,510 (15.4, 219)
Compression pressure
Minimum 1,270 (12.95, 184)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between cylinders 100 (1.0, 14.5)
Valve Timing
Unit: degree
Valve timing
: Intake valve
: Exhaust valve
JPBIA4228ZZ
a b c d e f
11 (−27) 59 (-21) -1 (49) 37 (-13)
216 228
ATDC ABDC ATDC BBDC
( ): Valve timing control “ON”
Drive Belt INFOID:0000000009725685
DRIVE BELT
Belt Deflection
Deflection adjustment * Unit: mm (in)

Location Used belt
New belt
Limit After adjusted
With A/C 10.0 (0.39) 4.9 - 5.2 (0.19 - 0.20) 4.1 - 4.4 (0.16 - 0.17)
Drive belt
Without A/C 9.1 (0.36) 4.3 - 4.7 (0.17 - 0.19) 3.7 - 3.9 (0.146 - 0.154)
Applied pushing force 98.1 N (10.0 kg-f, 22.0 lb-f)
*: When engine is cold.
GETtheMANUALS.org
2014
Belt Tension and Frequency
Unit: N (kg-f,
Tension adjustment * Frequency adjustment * Unit: Hz
lb-f)
Location
Used belt Used belt
New belt New belt
Limit After adjusted Limit After adjusted
881 - 951 1070 - 1138
With A/C (89.9 - 97.0, (109.1 - 116.1, 145.5 230.5 - 239.5 254 - 262
Drive belt 198.0 - 213.8) 240.5 - 255.8)
350 (35.7, 78.7)
876 - 964 1064 - 1152
Without A/C (89.4 - 98.3, (108.5 - 117.5, 162 256.5 - 268.5 282.5 - 293.5
196.9 - 216.7) 239.2 - 259.0)
Spark Plug INFOID:0000000009725686
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Make NGK
Standard type* PLZKAR6A-11
Gap (nominal) 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000009725683
Minimum −0° 50′ (−0.83°)
Camber Nominal −0° 05′ (−0.08°)

Degree minute (Decimal degree) Maximum 0° 40′ (0.67°)
(LH) and (RH) difference*2 –0° 45′ (–0.75°) - 0° 45′ (0.75°)

Minimum 3° 00′ (3.00°)
Caster Nominal 3° 45′ (3.75°)


Minimum 11° 00′ (11.00°)
Kingpin inclination
Nominal 11° 45′ (11.75°)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Maximum 12° 30′ (12.50°)
SFA234AC
Minimum 0 mm (0.00 in)

Distance (A - B) Nominal In 1 mm (In 0.04 in)
Maximum In 2 mm (In 0.08 in)
Total toe-in
Minimum 0° 00′ 00″ (0.00°)
Angle (LH and RH)
Degree minute Nominal In 0° 03′ 00″ (In 0.05°)
(Decimal degree)
Maximum In 0° 06′ 00″ (In 0.10°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
GETtheMANUALS.org
2014
*2: The difference when assuming the (LH) side is the standard.
Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000009725681
Minimum −1° 55′ (−1.92°)

Camber
Nominal −1° 25′ (−1.42°)
Maximum −0° 55′ (−0.92°)
SFA234AC
Minimum Out 2.0 mm (Out 0.079 in)

Distance (A - B) Nominal In 2.0 mm (In 0.079 in)
Maximum In 6.0 mm (In 0.236 in)
Total toe-in
Minimum Out 0° 45′ (Out 0.75°)
Angle (LH and RH)*2 Nominal In 0° 10′ (In 0.17°)
Maximum In 0° 35′ (In 0.58°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.
*2: Since an adjustment mechanism is not included, the value of the left and right wheels must be used as the standard value.
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000009725682
Unit: mm (in)
LEIA0085E
Tire size 185/65R15 195/55R16

Front (Hf) 690 (27.17) 687 (27.05)
Rear (Hr) 679 (26.73) 678 (26.69)
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.
Brake Specifications INFOID:0000000009725679
Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder bore diameter 54.025 (2.13)

Front brake Pad length × width × thickness 115.0 × 42.0 × 9.0 (4.53 × 1.654 × 0.354)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 260 × 22.0 (10.24 × 0.87)
Cylinder bore diameter 19.05 (3/4)
Trailing: 172 × 37 × 4.8 (6.77 × 1.46 × 0.19)
Rear brake Lining length × width × thickness
Leading: 155 × 37 × 4.8 (6.10 ×1.46 × 0.19)
Drum inner diameter - new 203.2 (8.00)
GETtheMANUALS.org
2014
Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter 22.23 (0.875)
Control valve Valve type Electric brake force distribution
Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 255 (10)
Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000009725680
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Brake pedal height 158 ±5 (6.22 ±0.20)
Clearance between brake pedal lever and the stop lamp switch threaded end 0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)
Brake pedal full stroke 128 (5.04)
Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000009725677
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.08)
Wear thickness 20.0 (0.787)
Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.013 (0.001)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.055 (0.002)
Rear Drum Brake INFOID:0000000009725678
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake lining Wear thickness 1.0 (0.04)
Brake drum Wear inner diameter- maximum 204.2 (8.04)
Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000009725676
Capacity
Description (Approximate)
Liter US measure Imp measure
Fuel 41.0 10-7/8 gal 9.0 gal
Engine oil With oil filter change 3.5 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt

Drain and refill Without oil filter change 3-3/8 qt 2-7/8 qt
3.2
Dry engine (Overhaul) 3.5 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt
CVT 7.3 7-3/4 qt 6-3/8 qt

Cooling system (with reservoir)
M/T 6.7 7-1/8 qt 5-7/8 qt
Reservoir tank 0.7 3/4 qt 5/8 qt
With oil cooler 7.1 7-1/2 qt 6-1/4 qt

CVT fluid
Without oil cooler 6.9 7-1/4 qt 6-1/8 qt
Manual transaxle fluid gear oil 2.67 5-5/8 pt 4-3/4 pt

Brake and clutch fluid — — —
Multi-purpose grease — — —
Windshield washer fluid 2.5 2-5/8 qt 2-1/4 qt
Air conditioner system refrigerant 0.4 0.88 lb 0.88 lb
Air conditioner system oil 110 - 130 3.9 - 4.6 fl oz 3.9 - 4.6 fl oz
GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE
ACC
A
ACC
SECTION
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 3 F
Inspection ................................................................. 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- (SDS) ............................................................. 5
SIONER" ................................................................... 2
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 3 (SDS) .................................................................. 5 H
Accelerator Control ................................................... 5
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM ............... 3
Exploded View .......................................................... 3 I

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACC-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000009452281
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of
this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACC-2 2014 Note
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000009015312
ACC
JSBIA1087GB
H
1. Accelerator pedal 2. Brake pedal bracket A. Locating hook
B. Locating pin
I
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009443948
REMOVAL J
1. Disconnect harness connector (A) from the accelerator pedal.
2. Remove bolts (B) and accelerator pedal (1).
CAUTION: K
• Do not disassemble accelerator pedal.
• Do not drop or impact accelerator pedal.
• Do not expose accelerator pedal to water.
L
M
ALBIA1149ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. N
NOTE:
• Insert locating pin into brake pedal bracket to position accelerator pedal.
• Perform accelerator pedal inspection. Refer to ACC-3, "Inspection". O
Inspection INFOID:0000000009443949
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION P

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACC-3 2014 Note
• Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the speci-
fied range.
Accelerator pedal stroke (A) : Refer to ACC-5, "Accel-

erator Control".
ALBIA1151ZZ
• Check the accelerator pedal height.
Accelerator pedal height : Refer to ACC-5, "Acceler-

ator Control".
CAUTION:
• Whenever the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor has been disconnected,
perform “ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING”. Refer to EC-113, "Work Proce-
dure".
• The accelerator pedal should return smoothly to the fully released position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACC-4 2014 Note
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A
Accelerator Control INFOID:0000000009443950
ACC
Unit: mm (in)
ALBIA1151ZZ
E
Accelerator pedal stroke (A) 49.8 - 52.6 (1.96 - 2.07)
Accelerator pedal height 113.0 - 123.0 (4.45 - 4.84)
F

GETtheMANUALS.org
ACC-5 2014 Note
DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AV
A
B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
BASE AUDIO DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 23 F
Work Flow ................................................................23
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 25 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 25
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
AUDIO UNIT ...............................................................25 H
SIONER" ................................................................... 5
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .......................25
Precaution for Work .................................................. 5
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 26
PREPARATION ............................................ 6 I
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26
PREPARATION ................................................... 6
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 28
Special Service Tools ................................................ 6
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................28 J
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 6
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 30
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 7
AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 30 K
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 7
Symptom Table .......................................................30
Component Parts Location ........................................ 7
Audio unit .................................................................. 7 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 32
Speaker ..................................................................... 7 L
Description ...............................................................32
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder
...... 8 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 33
M
SYSTEM .............................................................10 AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 33
System Description ................................................. 10 Exploded View .........................................................33
Removal and Installation .........................................33
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................11 AV
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 11 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 34
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 11 Removal and Installation .........................................34
O
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 14 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 35
AUDIO UNIT .......................................................14
Reference Value ..................................................... 14 ROD ANTENNA ................................................ 36 P
Exploded View .........................................................36
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 16 Removal and Installation .........................................36
BASE AUDIO .....................................................16 ANTENNA FEEDER .......................................... 37
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 16 Feeder Layout .........................................................37
DISPLAY AUDIO
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 23

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTION ............................................. 38 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 72
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 38 AUDIO UNIT .............................................................. 72

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 72
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT .............................. 72
SIONER" ................................................................. 38
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis ........................... 38
cedure ..................................................................... 72
Precaution for Harness Repair ............................... 38
Precaution for Work ................................................ 39 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 74
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
PREPARATION ........................................... 40
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 76
PREPARATION ................................................. 40 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76
Special Service Tools ............................................. 40
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 40 BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........ 78
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................ 41
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT... 80
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 41 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 80
Component Parts Location ..................................... 41
Audio Unit ............................................................... 42 REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR-
Speaker .................................................................. 42 CUIT ................................................................... 81
USB Interface ......................................................... 42 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
Bluetooth Control Unit ............................................ 43
Bluetooth Antenna .................................................. 43 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 83
Steering Switch ....................................................... 43 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 83
Microphone ............................................................. 43
Rear View Camera ................................................. 44 STEERING SWITCH .......................................... 85
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85
... 44 USB CONNECTOR ........................................... 87
SYSTEM ............................................................. 46 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87
System Description ................................................. 46
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 88
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ............... 48
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 88
Description .............................................................. 48
Symptom Table ....................................................... 88
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 48
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 91
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON-
Description .............................................................. 91
TROL UNIT) ....................................................... 53
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 53 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 93
Work Flow ............................................................... 53
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 93
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 54 Exploded View ........................................................ 93
Removal and Installation ......................................... 93
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 54
Reference Value ..................................................... 54 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 94
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ...................... 57
Reference Value ..................................................... 57 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 95
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 59
USB INTERFACE .............................................. 96
DISPLAY AUDIO ............................................... 59 Removal and Installation ......................................... 96
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 59
REAR VIEW CAMERA ...................................... 97
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 70 Removal and Installation ......................................... 97
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 70 BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ...................... 98
Work Flow ............................................................... 70 Removal and Installation ......................................... 98
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 72 BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA ................................ 99
GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-2 2014 Note
Removal and Installation ......................................... 99 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................. 121
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 121 A
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 100
Removal and Installation ....................................... 100 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 132
MICROPHONE ................................................. 101 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 132 B
Removal and Installation ....................................... 101 Work Flow .............................................................. 132
ROD ANTENNA ............................................... 102 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 134 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 102
Removal and Installation ....................................... 102 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 134
ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 103 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV D
Feeder Layout ....................................................... 103 CONTROL UNIT : Description ............................... 134
NAVIGATION ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV
CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure ....................... 134 E
PRECAUTION ............................................ 104
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ............... 134
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 104 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System scription ................................................................. 135 F
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work
SIONER" ............................................................... 104 Procedure .............................................................. 135
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 104 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con- G
Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 104 figuration List ......................................................... 136
Precaution for Work .............................................. 105
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 137
PREPARATION ......................................... 106 H
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 137
PREPARATION ................................................ 106 DTC Logic .............................................................. 137
Special Service Tools ............................................ 106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 137 I
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 106
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 138
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 107 DTC Logic .............................................................. 138
J
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 107 U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 139
Component Parts Location .................................... 107 DTC Logic .............................................................. 139
AV Control Unit ..................................................... 107 K
Speaker ................................................................. 108 U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 140
USB Interface and AUX In Jack ............................ 108 DTC Logic .............................................................. 140
Steering Switch ..................................................... 109 U122F AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 141 L
Microphone ........................................................... 109
DTC Logic .............................................................. 141
Rear View Camera ................................................ 109
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder U1244 GPS ANTENNA ................................... 142
.. 109 DTC Logic .............................................................. 142 M
GPS Antenna ........................................................ 110 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142
SD Card ................................................................ 110
U1263 USB ...................................................... 143 AV
SYSTEM ........................................................... 111 DTC Logic .............................................................. 143
System Description ............................................... 111 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 143
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 115 U1264 ANTENNA AMP. .................................. 144 O
Description ............................................................ 115 DTC Logic .............................................................. 144
On Board Diagnosis Function ............................... 115 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 144
CONSULT Function .............................................. 116 P
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR ................ 145
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 117 DTC Logic .............................................................. 145
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 145
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 117
Reference Value ................................................... 117 U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 146
DTC Index ............................................................. 120 DTC Logic .............................................................. 146
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 121 U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 147

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-3 2014 Note
DTC Logic ..............................................................147 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 166
U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 148 MULTI AV SYSTEM ......................................... 166
DTC Logic ..............................................................148 Symptom Table ..................................................... 166
U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 149 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 169
DTC Logic ..............................................................149 Description ............................................................ 169
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 150 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 178
DTC Logic ..............................................................150
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................150 AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 178
Removal and Installation ....................................... 178
U12B1 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE .............. 151
DTC Logic ..............................................................151 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 179
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................151 Removal and Installation ....................................... 179
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 152 REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 180
DTC Logic ..............................................................152 Removal and Installation ....................................... 180
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 153 USB INTERFACE ............................................. 181
AV CONTROL UNIT .................................................153
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..........153 AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ................................ 182
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 154
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................154 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 183
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 156
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................156 MICROPHONE ................................................. 184
REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT ................................................................. 158 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 185
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 160 GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 186

STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 162 ROD ANTENNA ................................................ 187

Diagnosis Procedure .............................................162 Exploded View ...................................................... 187
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 164
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................164 ANTENNA FEEDER ......................................... 188
Feeder Layout ....................................................... 188
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK ............................... 165
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................165

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-4 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [BASE AUDIO]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
WARNING: D
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni- H
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the I
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000009640320
J
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component K
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
L
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components: M
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
AV
- Oily dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. O
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner. P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-5 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [BASE AUDIO]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000009640321
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000009640322
Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-6 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [BASE AUDIO]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009509282
B
AWNIA3058ZZ
G
No. Component Function
1. Rod antenna
Refer to AV-8, "Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
2. Antenna base (antenna amp.) H
3. Rear door speaker RH
4. Front door speaker RH
Refer to AV-7, "Speaker". I
5. Front door speaker LH
6. Rear door speaker LH
7. Audio unit Refer to AV-7, "Audio unit".
J
Audio unit INFOID:0000000009509278
DESCRIPTION K
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD player, and auxiliary input jack
are integrated into the audio unit.
• The audio unit supports CD-R/CD-RW and provides the playback L
of MP3/WMA music files.
AV
JSNIA5416ZZ
Speaker INFOID:0000000009509279
O
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors. P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-7 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
• Sound signals are input from the audio unit to output high, mid and
low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the rear doors.
low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000009509280
RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into
the antenna base.
AWNIA3059GB
ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-8 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
H
AWNIA3114ZZ
1. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 2. Rod Antenna 3. M351

4. M67, M350 5. M106 I
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-9 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
System Description INFOID:0000000009460105
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ALNIA1522GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Antenna amp.
• Rod antenna
When the audio system is on, AM/FM signals received by the rod antenna are amplified by the antenna amp.
and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the front door speakers and rear door
speakers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-10 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000009460106
The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Description
The following information is available for the audio unit: C
• hardware version.
Hardware/Software Versions
• software version.
• EQ pin info.
Speaker Channel Check The connection of the speakers to the audio unit can be confirmed. D
Communication Diagnosis The AV communication (M-CAN) message history can be monitored.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000009460107 E
METHOD OF STARTING
Hardware/Software Versions and Speaker Channel Check F
1. Turn the ignition ON.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the preset 1 button, turn the volume control dial G
clockwise or counterclockwise 30 clicks or more.
AWNIA3042ZZ
J
4. Initially, all display segments will be illuminated.

K
ALNIA1382GB
AV
5. To exit hardware/software versions and speaker channel check, turn the ignition OFF.
Communication Diagnosis
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-11 2014 Note
3. While pressing the preset 6 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise 30 clicks or more.
ALNIA1516ZZ
4. Initially, the communication diagnosis mode is displayed.
ALNIA1387GB
5. To exit communication diagnosis, turn the ignition OFF.
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE

Hardware/Software Versions
1. Press the DISP button to enter versions display, and the audio
head unit software version is displayed.
ALNIA1383GB
2. With each additional press of the DISP button, the following information is available:
- HARD V###### (hardware version)
- EEP V###### (EEPROM version)
- @@@@ EQ1-4 # (EQ pin info)
If an EQ error is present, INVALID EQ is displayed
3. Hold the DISP button down to return to all display segments screen.
Speaker Channel Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-12 2014 Note
1. Press the RPT/DRM button to enter speaker channel check, and
the front left tweeter (front tweeter LH) is displayed. A
ALNIA1384GB
D
2. With each additional press of the RPT/DRM button, the following information is available:
- FR RIGHT TWEETER (front tweeter RH)
- FR RIGHT (front door speaker RH) E
- RR RIGHT (rear speaker RH)
- RR LEFT (rear speaker LH)
- FR LEFT (front door speaker LH)
3. Hold the RPT/DRM button down to return to all display segments screen. F
Communication Diagnosis
1. Press the DISP button, and the M-CAN message transmission
G
error history screen is displayed.
ALNIA1386GB
J
2. Press the DISP button again, and the TEL $$ nn (CMF message reception error history from M-CAN TEL)
screen is displayed. K
3. Press the DISP button again, and the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication his-
tory) screen is displayed. To retain the M-CAN message communication history and return to the commu-
nication diagnosis mode screen, press the DISP button.
4. To proceed to the M-CAN message communication history deletion screen, press the SEEK/TRACK L
button. The REC DEL-NO? (selection of M-CAN message communication history deletion) screen is dis-
played. To cancel M-CAN message communication history deletion, wait 6 seconds and you will be
returned to the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication history) screen. To proceed M
with M-CAN message communication history deletion, press the SEEK/TRACK button again.
5. The REC DEL-YES?@ (selection of M-CAN message communication history deletion) screen is dis-
played. To cancel M-CAN message communication history deletion, press the SEEK/TRACK button AV
and you will be returned to the REC DEL-NO? (selection of M-CAN message communication history dele-
tion) screen. To proceed with M-CAN message communication history deletion, wait 6 seconds and the
communication history deletion will be executed. After the communication history deletion has been exe-
cuted, you will be returned to the TROUBLE DEL. (deletion of M-CAN message communication history) O
screen. To return to the communication diagnosis mode screen, press the DISP button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-13 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000009460110
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3055ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation
Output switch
2 3 Sound signal front speaker

Output ON Sound output.
(GR) (P) LH
SKIA0177E
4 5 Sound signal rear speaker

(W) (R) LH
SKIA0177E
7
Ground ACC power supply Input ACC — Battery voltage
(W)
9
Ground Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON. Battery voltage
(LG/R)

(O) (V) RH
SKIA0177E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-14 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [BASE AUDIO]
Terminal
(Wire color) Reference value A
Output switch
B
13 14 Sound signal rear speaker C

(L) (Y) RH
SKIA0177E D
E
18 When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Vehicle speed signal Input ON
(LG) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH).
F
JSNIA0012GB
19
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage G
(Y)
21
Ground EQ1 Ground — ON — 0V
(B/W)
H
23
(B)
37 Audio unit ON, AM or FM
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output ON Battery voltage I
(B) selected.
38 Audio unit ON, AM or FM
Ground AM/FM antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) selected.
J
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-15 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [BASE AUDIO]
WIRING DIAGRAM
BASE AUDIO
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000009460112
AANWA0858GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-16 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AV
AANIA1704GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-17 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AANIA1705GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-18 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AV
AANIA1706GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-19 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AANIA1707GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-20 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AV
AANIA1708GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-21 2014 Note
BASE AUDIO
AANIA1709GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-22 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000009460113
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
AWNIA2404GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-30, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-23 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [BASE AUDIO]
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Was the repair confirmed?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-24 2014 Note
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO UNIT
B
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460114
C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-16, "Wiring Diagram".
D
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
E
Terminal No. Signal name Fuse No.
7 ACC power supply 18 (10A)
19 Battery power supply 29 (15A) F
Are the fuses blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M43.
3. Check voltage between audio unit connector M43 and ground.
I
Audio unit Voltage
Ground Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)
7 Ignition switch: ON J
M43 — Battery voltage
19 Ignition switch: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
K
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M101 and ground. M
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal AV
21
M101 — Yes
23
Is the inspection result normal? O
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-25 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460116
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminals or connectors.
2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Audio unit Front door speaker

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
2 1
D12 (LH)
3 2
M43 Yes
11 1
D112 (RH)
12 2
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and ground.
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M43 — No
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M43 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push audio unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of audio unit connector M43.
Audio unit connector M43

(+) (−) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-26 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
A
Audio signal output

11 12 B
SKIB3609E
C
YES >> Replace front door speaker. Refer to AV-34, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-33, "Removal and Installation".
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-27 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Audio unit Rear door speaker

Continuity
4 1
D207 (LH)
5 2
M43 Yes
13 1
D307 (RH)
14 2
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M43 — No
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M43 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-28 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

13 14 B
SKIB3609E
C
YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-35, "Removal and Installation".
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-29 2014 Note
AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [BASE AUDIO]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000009460123
RELATED TO AUDIO
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

Malfunction in audio unit.
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit Refer to AV-11, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-16, "Wiring Diagram".
• Audio unit power supply and ground cir-
No sound from all speakers.
cuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-25, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to:
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-26, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
sound is low. speaker).
- AV-28, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear door
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker
speaker).
LH, front door speaker RH, rear door
• Malfunction in speaker.
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH) does
Refer to:
not output sound.
- AV-34, "Removal and Installation" (front
door speaker).
- AV-35, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
Refer to AV-11, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-11, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
Refer to:
- AV-26, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
speaker).
speaker).
Noise comes out only from a certain speak-
er (front door speaker LH, front door speak-
Noise is mixed with audio. • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
er RH, rear door speaker LH, rear door
lash and looseness).
speaker RH).
Refer to:
door speaker).
door speaker).
Function".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad antenna feeder.
roads) Refer to AV-37, "Feeder Layout".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-30 2014 Note
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
• Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc-
• Any radio station cannot be received or tion.
poor reception is caused even after mov- Refer to AV-14, "Reference Value".
No radio reception or poor reception.
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or B
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- antenna feeder.
stacles generating external noises). Refer to AV-37, "Feeder Layout".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU- C
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-31 2014 Note
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description INFOID:0000000009460124
RELATED TO NOISE
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference,
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera-
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
Occurrence condition Possible cause

A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-32 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [BASE AUDIO]

AUDIO UNIT
B
AWNIA3121ZZ K
1. Audio unit bracket (LH) 2. Audio unit 3. Audio unit bracket (RH)
L
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove the negative battery cable. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the audio unit screws. AV
4. Partially remove the audio unit to gain access to the harness connectors.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
6. Remove the audio unit bracket screws from each side of the audio unit (if necessary). O
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-33 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from front door speaker.
3. Remove the front door speaker screws (A).
4. Remove the front door speaker (1).
AWNIA3062ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-34 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear door speaker.
C
3. Remove the rear door speaker screws (A).
4. Remove the rear door speaker (1).
D
F
AWNIA3089ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-35 2014 Note
ROD ANTENNA
ROD ANTENNA
AWNIA3124ZZ
1. Antenna rod 2. Antenna base A. Antenna nut
REMOVAL
1. Lower the rear portion of the headlining. Refer to INT-29, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the antenna (satellite radio model shown).
3. Remove the antenna nut (A) and remove the antenna.
AWNIA3115ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
If the antenna nut is tightened looser than the specified torque this will lower the sensitivity of the
antenna. If the antenna nut is tightened tighter than the specified torque this will deform the roof
panel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-36 2014 Note
ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
Feeder Layout INFOID:0000000009460134
I
AWNIA3114ZZ
1. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 2. Rod Antenna 3. M351 J

4. M67, M350 5. M106
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-37 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009640324
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000009640325
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-38 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
D
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. E
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped. F
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly. G
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area. H
- Oily dirt:
area. I
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline. J
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-39 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-40 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
AWNIA3091ZZ K
A. Luggage side lower finisher (RH) re- B. Front of headliner C. Center of back door
moved L

1. Rod antenna M
Refer to AV-44, "Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder".
2. Antenna base (antenna amp.)
AV
4. Front door speaker RH
Refer to AV-42, "Speaker".
6. Rear door speaker LH O
7. Audio unit Refer to AV-42, "Audio Unit".
8. Steering wheel audio control switches Refer to AV-43, "Steering Switch".
9. USB interface Refer to AV-42, "USB Interface".
P
10. Bluetooth® control unit Refer to AV-43, "Bluetooth Control Unit".
11. Bluetooth® antenna Refer to AV-43, "Bluetooth Antenna".

12. Microphone Refer to AV-43, "Microphone".
13. Rear view camera Refer to AV-44, "Rear View Camera".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-41 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Audio Unit INFOID:0000000009509284
Description
• AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD drive, auxiliary input jack, and
camera controller are integrated into the audio unit.
• The display can show audio status and rear view monitor images.
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the
separate USB connector.
JSNIA4722ZZ
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors.
low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
USB Interface INFOID:0000000009509289
• USB Interface is installed in the console.

• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the audio unit.
JPNIA1447ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-42 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Bluetooth Control Unit INFOID:0000000009509286
A
• Inputs the TEL voice signal from Bluetooth® antenna and outputs it
to the audio unit
• Connected to the audio unit via AV communication. B
D
JSNIA4236ZZ
Bluetooth Antenna INFOID:0000000009509287

E
Receives the TEL voice signal from cellular phone and outputs it to
the Bluetooth® control unit.
F
H
JSNIA4237ZZ
Steering Switch INFOID:0000000009509290

I
• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
• Switch is connected to the Bluetooth® control unit.
J
JSNIA4329ZZ
Microphone INFOID:0000000009509288 M
• The microphone is installed in the roof in front of the map lamp

assembly.
AV
• Power is supplied from the Bluetooth® control unit.
JPNIA1448ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-43 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000009509293
• The rear view camera is installed to the back door finisher.

• Power is supplied from the audio unit.
JPNIA1452ZZ
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000009509291
RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into
the antenna base.
AWNIA3059GB
AWNIA3114ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-44 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
1. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 2. Rod Antenna 3. M351 A

4. M67, M350 5. M108
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-45 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWNIA3105GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit
• Front door speakers
• Rear door speakers
• Steering switches
• USB interface
• Antenna amp.
• Rod antenna
When the audio system is on, AM/FM signals received by the rod antenna are amplified by the antenna amp.
and sent to the audio unit. The audio unit then sends audio signals to the front door speakers and rear door
speakers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
System Operation
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
The Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless
connection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth® control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone
calls can be sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth®
control unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth® control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired
with the Bluetooth® control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures, refer to
the cellular telephone operating manual.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
Bluetooth® Control Unit
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth® control unit will power up. During power up,
the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec-
onds. If a phone is present in the vehicle and paired with the Bluetooth® control unit, Nissan Voice Recognition
will then become active. Bluetooth® telephone functions can be turned off using the Nissan Voice Recognition
system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-46 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Steering Switches
When buttons on the steering switches are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio control switch cir- A
cuit changes, depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth® control unit uses this signal to perform
various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering switches: B
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
C
• Adjust the volume of calls
Microphone
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth® D
control unit. The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
Audio Unit
The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers. E

Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
F
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-47 2014 Note
The audio unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below:
Mode Description
• Audio unit diagnosis.
Self Diagnosis
• Diagnoses the connections across system components.
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color bar
Display Diagnosis
display and white display, light and shade check by gray scale display.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, lights, reverse,
Vehicle Signals
EQ pin, destination and camera type.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Confirmation/ Error History displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Adjustment that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Camera System Displayed but not used.
The communication condition of each unit of display audio system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Setting Initializes the audio unit memory.
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000009460152
METHOD OF STARTING
3. While pressing the preset 1 button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. Shifting
from current screen to previous screen is performed by pressing
BACK button.
AWNIA3086ZZ
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Self Diag-

nosis or Confirmation/Adjustment can be selected.
JSNIA0138GB
SELF DIAGNOSIS MODE

Audio Unit Self Diagnosis
1. Select Self Diagnosis.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-48 2014 Note
2. Self diagnosis screen is displayed. The bar graph visible in center of screen indicates progress of self
diagnosis. A
3. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self diagnosis is com-
pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color coded
according to the diagnostic results.
B
D
AWNIA2832GB
E
Diagnosis results Unit Connection line
Normal Green Green
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow F
Unit malfunction 1 Red Green
1: Control unit (audio unit) is displayed in red.

G
• Replace audio unit if Self Diagnosis did not run because control unit malfunction is indicated. The symptom is audio unit internal
error. Refer to AV-93, "Removal and Installation".
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray. H
4. Comments of self diagnosis results can be viewed in the diagno-
sis result screen.
I
K
JSNIA1870ZZ
Audio Unit Self Diagnosis Results

L
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red
Screen switch Description Possible cause
M
• Audio unit power supply or ground cir-
cuits.
Malfunction is detected in audio unit power sis Procedure". AV
Control unit
supply and ground circuits. • If no malfunction is detected in audio unit
power supply and ground circuits, re-
place audio unit. Refer to AV-93, "Re-
moval and Installation". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-49 2014 Note
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow

Area with yellow connection lines Description Possible cause
When one of the following is detected:
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
• malfunction is detected in Bluetooth®
ground circuits.
control unit power supply and ground cir-
Refer to AV-72, "BLUETOOTH® CON-
Control unit ⇔ BT HF Unit cuits.
TROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
• malfunction is detected in AV communi-
• AV communication circuits between au-
cation circuits between audio unit and
dio unit and Bluetooth® control unit.
Bluetooth® control unit.
Audio Unit Confirmation/Adjustment

1. Select Confirmation/Adjustment.
2. Select each switch on the Confirmation/Adjustment screen to
display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press the BACK
switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment screen.
AWNIA2631GB
Display Diagnosis
AWNIA2632GB
Vehicle Signals

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-50 2014 Note
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system. A
AWNIA2633GB
D
Speaker Test
Select Speaker Test to display the Speaker Diagnosis screen. Press
Start to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press Start again to gener-
ate a test tone in the next speaker. Press End to stop the test tones. E
G
AWNIA2634GB
Error History H
The self diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when Self Diagnosis is
selected until the self diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self diagnosis start. Check the Error Record to detect any error I
that may have occurred before the self diagnosis start because of this situation.
The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depending
on the error item. J
Count up method A
• The counter is set to 40 if an error occurs. 1 is subtracted from the counter if the condition is normal at a next
ignition ON cycle. K
• The counter lower limit is 1. The counter can be reset (no error record display) with the Delete log switch.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even L
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the Delete log switch. M
Display type of occurrence

Error history display item
frequency
AV
Count up method A AV communication line, control unit (AV)
Count up method B Other than the above
O
Error item
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-51 2014 Note
Error item Description Possible cause

Replace the audio unit if the malfunction
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) occurs constantly.
malfunction is detected.
Refer to AV-93, "Removal and Installation"
When one of the following is detected:
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply or
• malfunction is detected in Bluetooth®
ground circuits.
control unit power supply and ground cir-
Refer to AV-72, "BLUETOOTH® CON-
AV COMM CIRCUIT cuits.
• malfunction is detected in AV communi-
• AV communication circuits between au-
cation circuits between audio unit and
dio unit and Bluetooth® control unit.
Bluetooth® control unit.
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between audio unit (master
unit) and Bluetooth® control unit.
• The error counter displays OK if any malfunction was not detected
in the past and displays 0 if a malfunction is detected. It increases
by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if Reset is pressed.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
AWNIA2833GB
BUS OFF OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
C Rx(BTHF-H/U) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN.
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the
audio unit memory (clears the records of the unit that has been
removed).
AWNIA2637GB
Initialize Settings
Deletes data stored from the audio unit.
JSNIA0155GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-52 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
A
The Bluetooth® control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically B
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the techni-
cian using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis.
Bluetooth® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS C

• Internal control unit failure
• Bluetooth® antenna connection open or shorted
D
• Steering wheel audio control switches [ (PHONE/SEND), (PHONE/END)] stuck closed
• Vehicle speed pulse count
• Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
• Bluetooth® inquiry check E
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. F
2. Wait for the Bluetooth® system to complete initialization. This may take up to 20 seconds.
3. Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch
(PHONE/SEND) button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth® G
system will begin to play a verbal prompt.
AWNIA3082ZZ
J
4. While the prompt is playing, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch (PHONE/END) button until you hear the
“Diagnostics mode” prompt. The Bluetooth® system will sound a K
5-second beep.
5. While the beep is sounding, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch (PHONE/END) button again until you
L
hear prompts.
6. The Bluetooth® system has now entered into the diagnostic
mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the
technician. Refer to AV-53, "Work Flow". M
7. After the failure records are reported, an interactive microphone AWNIA3083ZZ
test will be performed. Follow the voice prompt. If the micro-

phone test fails, refer to AV-53, "Work Flow". AV
O
Failure Message Action
“Internal failure” Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, "Removal and Installation".
P
“Bluetooth® antenna open” 1. Inspect harness connection.
“Bluetooth® antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-99, "Removal and Installation".
“Phone/Send for Hands Free System is stuck” Check steering wheel audio control switches. Refer to AV-85, "Diagnosis Proce-
“Phone/End for the Hands Free System is stuck” dure".
“Microphone test” (failed interactive test) 1. Inspect harness between Bluetooth® control unit and microphone.
2. Replace microphone. Refer to AV-101, "Removal and Installation" .

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-53 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]

AUDIO UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3056ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Output switch
2 3 Sound signal front door

Output ON Sound output
(GR) (P) speaker LH
SKIB3609E
4 5 Sound signal rear door

(W) (R) speaker LH
SKIB3609E
Press SOURCE switch 0V
Press switch 1.0V

6 15
Steering switch signal A Input ON Press switch 2.0V
(BR) (GR)
Press switch 3.0V
Except above 5.0V

7
(W)
9
Ground Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(LG/R)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-54 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
B
11 12 Sound signal front door C

(O) (V) speaker RH
SKIB3609E D
E
13 14 Sound signal rear door
(L) (Y) speaker RH
F
SKIB3609E
Press switch 0V
G
16 15 Press switch 1.0V
Steering switch signal B Input ON
(V) (GR)
Press switch 2.0V H
Except above 5.0V

(LG) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
J
JSNIA0012GB
19 K
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(Y)
20
Ground Ground — ON — 0V L
(B/W)
M
25 24 During voice guide output
TEL voice signal Input ON
(G) (R) with switch pressed.
AV
SKIB3609E
26
— TEL voice signal shield — — — — O
(Shield)
31 Input/
— AV communication (H) — — —
(SB) Output
32 Input/ P
— AV communication (L) — — —
(LG) Output
33
Ground Camera ground — ON — 0V
(B)
34 Camera image displayed 6.0 V

Ground Camera power supply Output ON
(L) Except for above 0V

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-55 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
35 36
Camera image signal Input ON Camera image displayed
(Y) (Shield)
SKIB2251J
44
Ground Camera detection — ON — 0V
(B)
46
(B)
48
(B/W)
Selector lever in R (re-
Battery voltage
50 verse)
Ground Reverse signal Input ON
(Y) Selector lever in any posi-
0V
tion other than R (reverse)
53
— V BUS signal — — — —
(W)
54
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
55
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
56
— USB D− signal — — — —
(R)
57
— USB shield — — — —
(Shield)
58 Audio unit ON, FM-AM se-
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output ON Battery voltage
(B) lected.
59 Audio unit ON, FM-AM se-
Ground AM/FM antenna signal Input ON 5.0 V
(B) lected.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-56 2014 Note
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
AWNIA3057ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal F
(wire color) Reference value
output switch G
1
Ground Battery power Input OFF – Battery voltage
(Y/G)
2 H
Ground ACC power Input ACC – Battery voltage
(L/Y)
3
Ground IGN power Input ON – Battery voltage
(O) I
4
Ground Ground – ON – 0V
(B)
7 8 J
MIC in signal Input – – –
(P) (Shield)
K
ACC
9 10
Audio out Output or Bluetooth® control unit
(W) (B) sends audio signal
ON L
SKIB3609E
Press SOURCE switch 0V M
Press switch 1.0V

12 14
LAD IN 1 Input ON Press switch 2.0V AV
(R) (G)
Press switch 3.0V
Except above 5.0V

O
Press switch 0V

LAD IN 2 Input ON P
(P) (G)
Press switch 2.0V
Except above 5.0V

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-57 2014 Note
Terminal
(wire color) Reference value
output switch
Press switch 1.0V

17 19
LAD OUT 1 Output ON Press switch 2.0V
(BR) (GR)
Press switch 3.0V
Except above 5.0V
Press switch 0V

LAD OUT 2 Output ON
(V) (GR)
Press switch 2.0V
Except above 5.0V

20
Ground CONT1 Ground – ON – 0V
(B)
22
(B)
23
(B)
24
(B)
27
(B)
28 Vehicle speed signal (2- When vehicle speed is ap-

Ground Input ON
(Y) pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
PKIA1935E
29
Ground Microphone power Output ON – 5V
(L)
33
– AV communication (H) – – – —
(SB)
34
– AV communication (L) – – – —
(LG)
37 AV communication jumper
– – – – —
(LG) (H)
– – – – —
(LG) (H)
– – – – —
(SB) (L)
– – – – —
(SB) (L)
41
(B)
– Bluetooth® antenna – – – —
42
– Shield – – – —
(Shield)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-58 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
DISPLAY AUDIO
B
AV
AANWA0859GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-59 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AANWA0860GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-60 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AV
AANIA1710GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-61 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AANIA1711GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-62 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AV
AANIA1712GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-63 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AANIA1713GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-64 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AV
AANIA1714GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-65 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AANIA1715GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-66 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AV
AANIA1716GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-67 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AANIA1717GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-68 2014 Note
DISPLAY AUDIO
AV
AANIA1718GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-69 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWNIA2404GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
when the symptom is detected. Refer to AV-88, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-70 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 2.
B
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
C
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected. D
Was the repair confirmed?
NO >> GO TO 2. E
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-71 2014 Note
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460159
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown.

19 Battery power supply 29 (15A)
NO >> GO TO 2.
Audio unit Voltage

Ground Condition
7 Ignition switch: ON
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between audio unit connectors and ground.
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M45 20
44
— Yes
M40 46
48
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460160

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-72 2014 Note
A
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown. B

1 Battery power supply 29 (15A) C
3 Ignition signal 5 (10A)
D
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33. F
3. Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.
G
Bluetooth® control unit Voltage
Ground Condition
1 Ignition switch: OFF H

B33 2 — Ignition switch: ACC Battery voltage
3 Ignition switch: ON
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 3.
J
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground. K
Bluetooth® control unit

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal L
4
20
M
22
B33 — Yes
23
24 AV
27
O
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-73 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.
Audio unit Front door speaker

Continuity
2 1
D12 (LH)
3 2
M45 Yes
11 1
D112 (RH)
12 2
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M45 — No
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect audio unit connector M45 and suspect front door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-74 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
A
Audio signal output

11 12 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-75 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
Audio unit Rear speaker

Continuity
4 1
D207 (LH)
5 2
M45 Yes
13 1
D307 (RH)
14 2
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M45 — No
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M45 and suspect rear door speaker connector.

Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-76 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

13 14 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-77 2014 Note
BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Audio unit Bluetooth® control unit

Continuity
M40 25 B33 9 Yes
Audio unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M40 25 — No
Is inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
Audio unit Bluetooth® control unit

Continuity
M40 24 B33 10 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BLUETOOTH® VOICE SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M40 and Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
3. Press switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-78 2014 Note
Audio unit connector M40 A

Terminal Terminal
B
During voice guide output with C

25 24
switch pressed.
D
SKIB3609E

YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, "Removal and Installation". E
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-79 2014 Note
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and ground.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminals
20
22
B33 23 — Yes
24
27
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-80 2014 Note
REAR VIEW CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
B
C
1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse). D
Audio unit Ground E

Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F
M40 50 — Battery Voltage
verse)
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY H
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501. I
Audio unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
M40 34 D501 2 Yes
K
Audio unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground L
M40 34 No
YES >> GO TO 3. M
3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE AV
1. Connect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
3. Shift the selector lever to R (reverse).
O
Audio unit Ground

Voltage P
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M40 34 — Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-81 2014 Note
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501.

Continuity
M40 35 D501 4 Yes
Audio unit
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M40 35 No
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
Check continuity between audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector D501.

Continuity
M40 33 D501 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect audio unit connector M40 and rear view camera connector.
4. Check signal between audio unit connector M40 and ground.
Audio unit Ground

(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal
Camera image dis-

M40 35 —
played.
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-97, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-82 2014 Note
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
B
C
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15. D
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15.
E
Bluetooth® control unit Microphone
Continuity
7 1 F
B33 8 R15 2 Yes
29 4
G
Bluetooth® control unit H

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B33 — No I
29
Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Repair harness or connectors.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
K
1. Connect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and microphone connector R15.
3. Check voltage between microphone connector R15 and ground.
L
Microphone Ground
Voltage
(+)
(-) (Approx.) M
Connector Terminal
R15 4 — 5V
Is the voltage reading as specified? AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL O
Check signal between terminals of Bluetooth® control unit connector B33.

P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-83 2014 Note
Bluetooth® control unit connector B33

(+) (-) Condition Reference value
Terminal Terminal
7 8 Speak into microphone.
PKIB5037J
Were voltage readings as specified?

YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-98, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-101, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-84 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
B
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

D
2. Disconnect combination switch connector M88.
3. Check resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M88.
E
Combination switch connector M88 Resistance Ω
Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)
F
Depress SOURCE switch. 1
Depress switch. 121

14 G
Depress switch. 321
17 Depress switch. 723

H
Depress switch. 1

I
Depress switch. 321

YES >> GO TO 2. J
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-100, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND COMBINATION SWITCH
K
1. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and combination switch connector M30.
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and combination switch connector M30.
L
Bluetooth® control unit Combination switch
Continuity
12 24
M
B33 13 M30 31 Yes
14 33
AV
O
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
12 P
B33 13 — No
14
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-85 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
3.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH

Check continuity between combination switch connectors M88 and M30.
Combination switch
Continuity
14 24
M88 15 M30 31 Yes
17 33
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND AUDIO UNIT
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B33 and audio unit connector M45.
Bluetooth® control unit Audio unit

Continuity
17 6
Yes
B33 18 M45 16
19 15
®
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit connector B33 and ground.

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
17
B33 18 — No
19
YES >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-86 2014 Note
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
A
B
C
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect audio unit connector M44 and USB interface connector M72. D
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M44 and USB interface connector M72.
Audio unit USB interface E

Continuity
53 4
54 1
F
M44 55 M72 2 Yes

56 3 G
57 5
H
Audio unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
I
53
M44 Ground No
55
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-96, "Removal and Installation".
K
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-87 2014 Note
AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [DISPLAY AUDIO]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
RELATED TO AUDIO

The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit Refer to AV-48, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
• Audio unit power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
sis Procedure".
Refer to:
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-74, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
sound is low. speaker).
speaker).
Refer to:
not output sound.
door speaker).
door speaker).
Function".
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-48, "On Board Diagnosis Func-
tion".
Refer to:
- AV-74, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front door
speaker).
speaker).
speaker RH).
Refer to:
door speaker).
door speaker).
Function".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-88 2014 Note
AUDIO SYSTEM
A
poor reception is caused even after mov- Refer to AV-54, "Reference Value".
or trim section.
D
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE
• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is E
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone. F
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
G
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider. H
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers. I
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list: J
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible): K
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible): L
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location M

Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
AV
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established. Malfunction in audio unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-93, "Re-
O
formed, however, voice between each moval and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver-
sation.
P
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-83, "Diagnosis Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-89 2014 Note
AUDIO SYSTEM
• The voice recognition can be controlled. Steering switch malfunction.
• Steering switch’s , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-100,
switch works, but does not work. "Removal and Installation".
The system cannot be operated. Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.

Steering switch’s , , , and
switches do not work. Refer to AV-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.

All steering switches do not work.
RELATED TO REAR VIEW CAMERA

Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
Reverse signal circuit malfunction. BCM and audio unit.
Camera image signal circuit malfunction
Rear view camera is inoperative.
Camera image signal circuit malfunction. between rear view camera and audio unit.
Replace rear view camera.
Rear view camera malfunction.
Refer to AV-97, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-90 2014 Note
A
RELATED TO NOISE B
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or C
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the D
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera- E
NOTE:
components, one by one. F

G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches.
electrical components are oper- I
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction J
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when K

L
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized M

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-88, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
AV
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
O
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE: P
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-91 2014 Note
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-92 2014 Note
AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [DISPLAY AUDIO]

AUDIO UNIT
B
AWNIA3125ZZ K
1. Audio unit bracket (LH) 2. Audio unit 3. Audio unit bracket (RH)
L
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
3. Remove the audio unit screws. AV
4. Partially remove the audio unit to gain access to the harness connectors.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio unit and remove.
6. Remove the audio unit bracket screws from each side of the audio unit (if necessary). O
INSTALLATION
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-93 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
AWNIA3062ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-94 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
D
F
AWNIA3089ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-95 2014 Note
USB INTERFACE
USB INTERFACE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release the pawls (A) from the back of the center console
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the USB interface
(1).
AWNIA3069ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-96 2014 Note
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from rear view camera.
C
3. Remove the nuts (A) from the rear view camera and remove.
F
AWNIA3070ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-97 2014 Note
REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-32, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the Bluetooth® control unit.
3. Remove the Bluetooth® antenna screws (A) and the Bluetooth®
antenna (1).
AWNIA3095ZZ
4. Remove the Bluetooth® control unit bracket screws (A) and the
Bluetooth® control unit (1).
AWNIA3122ZZ
5. Remove the Bluetooth® control unit screws (A) and separate

the Bluetooth® control unit (1) from the bracket (2).
AWNIA3097ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-98 2014 Note
BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA
BLUETOOTH® ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-32, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
2. Disconnect the Bluetooth® antenna harness connector from the Bluetooth® control unit. C
3. Remove the Bluetooth® antenna screws (A) and the Bluetooth®
antenna (1).
D
F
AWNIA3095ZZ
INSTALLATION G
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-99 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the steering wheel rear finisher (1) by releasing pawls
(A).
AWNIA3063ZZ
3. Remove the steering wheel audio control switch screws (A) from
the back of the steering wheel.
AWNIA3064ZZ
4. Remove the steering wheel audio control switches from the steering wheel.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-100 2014 Note
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the microphone from the headlining by releasing pawls using a suitable tool.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from microphone and remove.
C
INSTALLATION
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-101 2014 Note
ROD ANTENNA
ROD ANTENNA
AWNIA3124ZZ
REMOVAL
AWNIA3115ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
panel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-102 2014 Note
ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
A
I
AWNIA3114ZZ
1. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 2. Rod Antenna 3. M351 J

4. M67, M350 5. M108
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-103 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009640343
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-104 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [NAVIGATION]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of A
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
D
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth. E
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped. F
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly. G
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area. H
- Oily dirt:
area. I
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline. J
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-105 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [NAVIGATION]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-106 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [NAVIGATION]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
AWNIA3092ZZ K
A. Front of headliner B. Center of back door

L
1. Rod antenna
Refer to AV-109, "Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder". M
2. Antenna base (antenna amp.)
4. Front door speaker RH AV
Refer to AV-108, "Speaker".
6. Rear door speaker LH
7. AV control unit Refer to AV-107, "AV Control Unit". O
8. GPS antenna Refer to AV-110, "GPS Antenna".
9. Steering wheel audio control switches Refer to AV-109, "Steering Switch".
P
10. USB interface and AUX in jack Refer to AV-108, "USB Interface and AUX In Jack".
11. Microphone Refer to AV-109, "Microphone".
12. Rear view camera Refer to AV-109, "Rear View Camera".
AV Control Unit INFOID:0000000009606268
Description
GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-107 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
• A 5.8-inch QVGA display, an AM/FM electronic tuner radio, CD
drive, audio amplifier, Bluetooth® module, USB interface, camera
controller and navigation unit are integrated into the AV control
unit.
• The 5.8-inch display is a high resolution monitor that includes
touch panel functions.
• Music files stored in iPod®*/USB memory can be played using the
separate USB interface.
ALNIA1524ZZ
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

• 16.5 cm (6.5 in) speakers are installed in the bottom of the front doors.
• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high, mid
and low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
REAR DOOR SPEAKER

• Sound signals are input from the AV control unit to output high, mid
and low range sounds.
JPNIA1454ZZ
USB Interface and AUX In Jack INFOID:0000000009606270
• USB Interface and AUX in jack is installed in the console.

• iPod® and USB memory can be connected to the AV control unit
through the USB interface.
• An external audio device can be connected to the AV control unit
through the AUX in jack.
ALNIA1523ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-108 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Steering Switch INFOID:0000000009606271
A
• Operations for audio and hands-free phone are possible.
• Switch is connected to the AV control unit.
B
D
JSNIA4329ZZ
Microphone INFOID:0000000009606272
E
• The microphone is installed in the roof in front of the map lamp
assembly.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit. F
H
JPNIA1448ZZ
Rear View Camera INFOID:0000000009606273

I
• The rear view camera is installed to the back door finisher.
• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.
J
JPNIA1452ZZ
Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000009606274 M
RADIO ANTENNA
AM/FM radio rod antenna and antenna base is located on the rear of the roof. The antenna amp. is built into AV
the antenna base.
AWNIA3059GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-109 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
AWNIA3114ZZ

4. M67, M350 5. M73
GPS Antenna INFOID:0000000009509301
• GPS antenna is installed in the instrument panel.

• Power is supplied from the AV control unit.
JSNIA3303ZZ
SD Card INFOID:0000000009509305
• Map data is memorized in the SD card.

• Map data is sent to the AV control unit from the SD slot.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-110 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
G
AWNIA3101GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
Refer to Owner’s Manual for navigation and audio system operating instructions. H
Audio function and display are built into AV control unit.
This navigation has the following functions.
• Map data on SD-card I
• Full support for playback of music from iPod® and USB device
• High resolution color 5.8-inch display with touch panel function
• FM/AM twin digital tuner J
• USB mass storage connection
• Hands-free phone system
iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
K
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Description
• The navigation system can be operated by control panel of the AV control unit and display (touch panel) of L
the AV control unit.
• Guide sound during the operation of the navigation system is output from AV control unit to front tweeters.
• AV control unit calculates the vehicle location based on the signals from GYRO (angle speed sensor), vehi- M
cle sensor, and GPS satellite, as well as the map data from map SD-card. The vehicle location is displayed
on the AV control unit.
POSITION DETECTION PRINCIPLE AV
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals:
• Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor
• Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) O
• Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna (GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map SD-card (map-matching), and indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate P
data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by
map-matching.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-111 2014 Note
SYSTEM
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
• Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed sen-
sor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become incorrect
as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance cor-
rection function has been adopted.
• Travel direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyro-
scope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS informa-
SEL684V
tion). They have both advantages and disadvantages.
Type Advantage Disadvantage

Gyroscope Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is
(angular velocity sensor) accurately. driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna Can detect the vehicle's travel direction Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle
(GPS information) (North/South/East/West). speed is low.
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
MAP-MATCHING
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method
in the “Location Detection Principle” with a road map data from map
SD-card.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map SD-card.
SEL685V
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be cor-
rected manually.
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been repo-
sitioned.
Alternative routes will be shown in different order of priority, and
the incorrect road can be avoided if there is an error in distance
and/or direction.
Routes are of the same priority if two roads are running in parallel.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alter-
nately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and con-
figuration of the road.
SEL686V

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-112 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which
the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map SD-card, A
or when road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road
pattern are different due to repair.
The map-matching function may find another road and position the
B
vehicle mark on it when driving on a road not present in the map.
Then, the vehicle mark may change to it when the correct road is
detected.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc- C
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the map SD-card is limited. Therefore, correction by
SKIA0613E
map-matching is not possible when there is an excessive gap D
between current vehicle position and the position on the map.
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) is developed for and is controlled E
by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS satel-
lites (NAVSTAR), transmitting out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km (13,049
mile). F
The receiver calculates the travel position in three dimensions (lati-
tude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the radio waves
that four or more GPS satellites transmit (three-dimensional position- G
ing). The GPS receiver calculates the travel position in two dimen-
sions (latitude/longitude) with the previous altitude data if the GPS
receiver receives only three radio waves (two-dimensional position-
ing). GPS position correction is not performed while stopping the
SEL526V H
vehicle.
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions: I

• In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position changes.
• The position of GPS satellite affects GPS detection precision. The position detection may not be precisely
performed. J
• The position detection is not performed if GPS receiver does not receive radio waves from GPS satellites.
(Inside a tunnel, parking in a building, under an elevated highway etc.) GPS receiver may not receive radio
waves from GPS satellites if any object is placed on the GPS antenna.
NOTE: K
• The detection result has an error of approximately 10 m (32.81 ft) even with a high-precision three dimen-
sional positioning.
• There may be cases when the accuracy is lowered and radio waves are stopped intentionally because the L
GPS satellite signal is controlled by the US trace control center.
REAR VIEW MONITOR
M
Camera Image Operation Principle
• The AV control unit supplies power to the rear view camera when receiving a reverse signal.
• The rear view camera transmits camera images to the AV control unit.
• The AV control unit combines a warning message and fixed guide lines with an image received from the rear AV
view camera.
USB INTERFACE
O
• iPod® or music files in USB memory can be played.
• Sound signals are transmitted from USB interface to the AV control unit and output to each speaker.
• iPod® is recharged when connected to USB interface.
P
AUX IN JACK
• Sound can be output from an external device by connecting a device to the AUX in jack.
• AUX sound signals are transmitted to each speaker via AV control unit.
• Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed.
• The control level can be selected by the customer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-113 2014 Note
SYSTEM
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
• Bluetooth® control is built into AV control unit.
• The connection between cellular phone and AV control unit is performed with Bluetooth® communication.
• The voice guidance signal is input from the AV control unit and output to the front speakers when operating
the cellular phone.
When A Call Is Originated
• Spoken voice sound output from the microphone (microphone signal) is input to AV control unit.
• AV control unit outputs to cellular phone with Bluetooth® communication as a TEL voice signal.
• Voice sound is then heard at the other party.
When Receiving A Call
• Voice sound is input to own cellular phone from the other party.
• TEL voice signal is input to AV control unit by establishing Bluetooth® communication from cellular phone,
and the signal is output to front speakers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-114 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
The AV control unit on board diagnosis performs the functions listed in the table below: B
Mode Item Content

Version data of the AV control unit is dis- C
Version —
played.
Allows correction of the position detec-
User Configuration Touch Display Calibration —
tion accuracy of the touch panel.
D
FM monitor — Monitors the dynamic values of the cur-
AM monitor — rent tuner
Radio XM monitor — Version data is displayed. E

• Clear XM Chipset NVM
• Reset All XM Settings
XM functions • Clear IGS Current status is displayed. F
• XM CBM Debug Mode
• External Diag Mode
• SD card slot Access
• Power Supply G
• Speed Signal
• Direction Signal
• Illumination Signal H
• GPS Antenna
• GPS Tracking
Running System Status • Satellites Visible The current system status is displayed.
• Satellites Tracked I
• Microphone Current
• Steering wheel key
• Radio Antenna
• USB Device J
System State • iPod® firmware version
Speaker Test 4kHz This activates a sequence of test tone
— outputs to the audio circuits one after the K
Speaker Test 100Hz other for 1 second.
This provides a test sequence where
test displays (plain colored display: e.g. L
white, black, red, blue, green) are shown
one after the other.
The respective color is shown for an in-
Display-Test —
dicated period of time (parameter). After M
the display test, the design of the display
previously available is stored. While the
screen shows a plain colored display, a
pixel malfunction may be detected. AV
• SD Card Access
• BT Module Access
A system self test is executed and the
Self Test • Radio Antenna O
results are stored into the error memory.
• GPS Antenna
• XM Antenna
Perform CONSULT diagnosis if the AV control unit on board diagnosis does not start or the screen does not
P
display anything.
METHOD OF STARTING

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-115 2014 Note
3. While pressing the SETUP button, turn the TUNE-SCROLL dial
counterclockwise 3 or more clicks, then clockwise 3 or more
clicks, then counterclockwise 3 or more clicks. Shifting from cur-
rent screen to previous screen is performed by pressing but-
ton.
ALNIA1473ZZ
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and Version,

User Config, Radio, System State or Self Test can be selected.
ALNIA1378ZZ
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000009460261
CONSULT FUNCTIONS
CONSULT performs the following functions via communication with the AV control unit.
Direct Diagnostic Mode Description

Ecu Identification The AV control unit part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The AV control unit self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The AV control unit input/output data is displayed in real time.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing AV control unit.
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of AV communication is displayed.
CAN Diag Support Mntr
• The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description

Indicates vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on CAN communication
VHCL SPD SIG [On/Off]
line.
ILLUM SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of illumination signal for the AV control unit.
IGN SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of ignition signal.
REV SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of reverse signal received from BCM.
CONFIGURATION
Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR
Refer to LAN-12, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-116 2014 Note
AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [NAVIGATION]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
TERMINAL LAYOUT
C
AWNIA3087ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES F
Terminal
(Wire color) Reference value G
Output switch
H

(GR) (P) LH
Output ON Sound output I
SKIB3609E J
K
(W) (R) LH
L
SKIB3609E

M
Press switch 1.0V
6 15
Steering switch signal A Input ON Press switch 2.0V
(SB) (G)
3.0V
AV
Press switch
Except above 5.0V
7 O
(W)
8 Input/
— CAN (H) — — —
(L) Output
P
9 44
Illumination control signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(LG/R) (B)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-117 2014 Note
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch

(O) (V) RH
SKIB3609E

(L) (Y) RH
SKIB3609E
Press switch 0V

Steering switch signal B Input ON
(V) (G)
Press switch 2.0V
Except above 5.0V

17 Input/
— CAN (L) — — —
(P) Output

(LG) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
JSNIA0012GB
19
Ground Battery power supply Input OFF — Battery voltage
(Y)
20
Ground Ground — ON — 0V
(B/W)
23
— MR output Output — — —
(R)
Battery voltage
28 verse)
Ground Reverse signal Input ON
(Y) Selector lever in any posi-
0V
tion other than R (reverse)
30 Recieved audio signal

Ground AUX jack audio signal LH Input ON
(Y) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E
31
Ground AUX ground — ON — 0V
(G)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-118 2014 Note
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
B
32 Recieved audio signal C

Ground AUX jack audio signal RH Input ON
(L) (AUX input)
SKIB3609E D
33
Ground Camera ground — ON — 0V
(B)
E
34 When camera image is dis- F

Ground Camera image signal Input ON
(L) played
SKIB2251J
G
35 Camera image signal
— — — — —
(Shield) shield
H
When camera image is dis-
36 6.0 V
Ground Camera power supply Output ON played
(Y)
Except for above 0V
I
37
Ground Ignition power supply Input ON — Battery voltage
(O)
42
(L)
— MIC VCC Input ON — — J
K
43 41 While speaking into micro-
Microphone signal Input ON
(P) (Shield) phone.
L
SKIB3609E
53
— V BUS signal — — — — M
(W)
54
— USB ground — — — —
(G)
AV
55
— USB D+ signal — — — —
(L)
56
(R)
— USB D− signal — — — — O
57
— USB shield — — — —
(Shield)
P
58
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output ON — Battery voltage
(B)
59
Ground AM-FM main antenna Input ON — 5.0 V
(B)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-119 2014 Note
AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Output switch
61
Ground GPS antenna signal Input ON — 5.0 V
(B)
62
— GPS antenna shield — — — —
(Shield)
DTC Index INFOID:0000000009460263
CONSULT Display Reference Page

U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT AV-137, "DTC Logic"
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) AV-138, "DTC Logic"
U1217: BLUETOOTH MODULE AV-139, "DTC Logic"
U1229: iPod CERTIFICATION AV-140, "DTC Logic"
U122F: Digital broadcasting connection error AV-141, "DTC Logic"
U1244: GPS ANTENNA CONN AV-142, "DTC Logic"
U1263: USB OVERCURRENT AV-143, "DTC Logic"
U1264: ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL AV-144, "DTC Logic"
U12AA: Configuration Error AV-145, "DTC Logic"
U12AC: Display Temperature too High AV-146, "DTC Logic"
U12AD: ECU Temperature too High AV-147, "DTC Logic"
U12AE: Internal Amplifier temperature Warning AV-148, "DTC Logic"
U12AF: CD Mechanism Temperature Warning AV-149, "DTC Logic"
U12B0: Supply Voltage Goes below 9V > 20s AV-150, "DTC Logic"
U12B1: Supply Voltage Goes High > 16V for 20s AV-151, "DTC Logic"
U1310: CONTROL UNIT (AV) AV-152, "DTC Logic"

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-120 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [NAVIGATION]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
B
AV
AANWA0861GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-121 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AANWA0862GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-122 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
AANIA1720GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-123 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AANIA1721GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-124 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
AANIA1722GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-125 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AANIA1723GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-126 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
AANIA1724GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-127 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AANIA1725GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-128 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
AANIA1726GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-129 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AANIA1727GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-130 2014 Note
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
AANIA1728GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-131 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [NAVIGATION]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWNIA2982GB
DETAILED FLOW
>> GO TO 2.
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-132 2014 Note
2. Perform Self Diagnostic Result for MULTI AV.
Are any DTCs displayed? A
YES >> Refer to AV-120, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS B
Refer to AV-166, "Symptom Table".

C
>> GO TO 5
5.FINAL CHECK
D
Refer to symptom described by the customer in step 1.
Is the symptom still present?
YES >> GO TO 2 E
NO >> Inspection End.
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-133 2014 Note
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000009460266
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration” after replac-
ing AV control unit.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
• If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING AV CONTROL UNIT : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000009460267
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

-CONSULT
Enter “Re/Programming, Configuration” and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
ing AV control unit.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration".
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura-
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Pro-
cedure".
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines) are normal.
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-134 2014 Note
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000009460268
A
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing AV control
unit.
Configuration has three functions as follows: B
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
"Before Replace ECU" C
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. D
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU"
with CONSULT. E
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur.
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new AV control unit. F
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000009460269
G
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of AV control unit. H
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3. I
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST”
CONSULT J
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”.
K
>> Work End.
3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION” L
CONSULT
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to AV-136, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL M
UNIT) : Configuration List".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
AV
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION: O
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con-
figuration of brand new AV control unit is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration
which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model can not be memorized. P
5. When "Completed", select "End".
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Confirm that each function controlled by AV control unit operates normally.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-135 2014 Note
>> Work End.
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000009460270
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
MANUAL SETTING ITEM

Items Setting value
SOUND SYSTEM BASE ⇔ BOSE
CAMERA SYSTEM NONE/AVM ⇔ REAR CAMERA
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-136 2014 Note
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION]
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000009460271
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

C
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Possible Cause
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000] D
more.

F
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed? G
YES >> Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
H
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-137 2014 Note
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction oc-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) Error during CAN controller hardware initializa-
curs constantly.
[U1010] tion (VCAN).

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-138 2014 Note
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs C
BLUETOOTH MODULE Connection failure to the internal Blueooth® sub constantly.
[U1217] unit is detected. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-139 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
iPod CERTIFICATION
iPod authentication chip error. constantly.
[U1229]

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-140 2014 Note
U122F AV CONTROL UNIT
U122F AV CONTROL UNIT
A

Digital broadcasting connection Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs C
Communication error with digital audio broadcast
error constantly.
module internal to AV control unit.
[U122F] Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-141 2014 Note
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• GPS antenna disconnection.
GPS ANTENNA CONN Open or short to ground is detected in GPS an-
• Open or short to ground in GPS antenna signal
[U1244] tenna connection.
circuit.
1.GPS ANTENNA INSPECTION

Visually inspect the GPS antenna and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-186, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M80.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M80 and ground.
AV control unit Ground

Voltage
Connector Terminal
M80 61 — 5.0 V
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-186, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-142 2014 Note
U1263 USB
U1263 USB
A

• Device connected to USB interface. C
USB OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent in USB harness is detected. • Harness between the AV control unit and USB
[U1263]
interface.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE D

1. If there is a device connected to the USB interface, disconnect it. E
Is DTC U1263 displayed? F
YES >> Refer to AV-143, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460282 G
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS

Visually inspect USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation". H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation". I
2.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS

Check USB interface harness. Refer to AV-164, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace USB interface harness. Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation". K
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-143 2014 Note
U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
U1264 ANTENNA AMP.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Antenna amp. disconnection.
ANTENNA AMP TERMINAL Open or short to ground is detected in Antenna
• Open or short to ground in antenna amp. ON
[U1264] amp. connection.
signal circuit.
1.ANTENNA AMP. INSPECTION

Visually inspect the antenna base (antenna amp.) and antenna feeder. Refer to AV-188, "Feeder Layout".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND ANTENNA BASE
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M73 and antenna base connector M351.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M73 and antenna base connector M351.
AV control unit Antenna base

Continuity
M73 58 M351 1 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M73 and ground.
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M73 58 — No
YES >> GO TO 2.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M73.

Voltage
(+)
(–) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M73 58 — Battery voltage
YES >> Replace antenna base. Refer to AV-187, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-144 2014 Note
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
U12AA CONFIGURATION ERROR
A

Configuration data needs to be written. C
Configuration Error AV control unit is not properly configured or con-
Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CON-
[U12AA] figuration is corrupt.
TROL UNIT) : Work Procedure".

D
1.PERFORM CONFIGURATION
E
When U12AA is detected, configuration data must be written.
>> Write configuration data with CONSULT. Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL F
UNIT) : Work Procedure".
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-145 2014 Note
U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT
U12AC AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Display temperature has exceeded maximum Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
Display Temperature too High
temperature. Display is switched OFF to avoid ir- constantly.
[U12AC]
reversible damage. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-146 2014 Note
U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT
U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT
A

Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs C
ECU Temperature too High AV control unit temperature has exceeded maxi-
constantly.
[U12AD] mum temperature.
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-147 2014 Note
U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT
U12AE AV CONTROL UNIT
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Internal Amplifier temperature Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
Internal amplifier temperature has exceeded
Warning constantly.
maximum temperature.
[U12AE] Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-148 2014 Note
U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT
U12AF AV CONTROL UNIT
A

CD Mechanism Temperature CD drive temperature has exceeded maximum Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs C
Warning temperature. CD drive is switched OFF to avoid constantly.
[U12AF] irreversible damage. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-149 2014 Note
U12B0 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Supply Voltage Goes below 9V
AV control unit supply voltage exceeds lower lim- • Charging system malfunction.
> 20s
its. • AV control unit power supply or ground circuits.
[U12B0]
1.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM

Check the vehicle charging system. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or
CHG-13, "Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning components.
2.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Perform the AV control unit power supply and ground circuit diagnosis procedure. Refer to AV-153, "AV CON-
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-150 2014 Note
A

Supply Voltage Goes High > C
AV control unit supply voltage exceeds upper lim-
16V for 20s Charging system malfunction.
its.
[U12B1]

D
E
1.CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM
Check the vehicle charging system. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or
CHG-13, "Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)". F
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning components. G
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-151 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Replace AV control unit if malfunction occurs
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Error during CAN controller hardware initializa-
constantly.
[U1310] tion (MCAN).

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-152 2014 Note
A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009460296
B

C
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses are not blown. D

E
19 Battery power supply 29 (15A)

37 Ignition power supply 5 (10A)
F
NO >> GO TO 2. G
H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M70 and M71.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit connectors M70 and M71 and ground.
AV control unit Voltage I

Ground Condition

M70 J
7 — Battery voltage
Ignition switch: ON
M71 37
Is the inspection result normal? K
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT L

M
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
AV
M70 20 — Yes
YES >> Inspection End. O

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-153 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
AV control unit Front door speaker

Continuity
2 1
D12 (LH)
3 2
M70 Yes
11 1
D112 (RH)
12 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M70 — No
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect front door speaker connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M70.
AV control unit connector M70

Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-154 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
2 3
A
Audio signal output

11 12 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-155 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
AV control unit Rear door speaker

Continuity
4 1
D207 (LH)
5 2
M70 Yes
13 1
D307 (RH)
14 2
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M70 — No
13
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M70 and suspect rear door speaker connector.
3. Push AV control unit POWER switch.
4. Check signal between the terminals of AV control unit connector M70.

Terminal Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-156 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
4 5
A
Audio signal output

13 14 B
SKIB3609E
C
D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-157 2014 Note
1.CHECK REVERSE INPUT SIGNAL


Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M71 34 — Battery Voltage
verse)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
AV control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
M71 34 D501 2 Yes
AV control unit
Continuity
M71 34 No
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMERA POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.

Voltage
(+) Condition
(−) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M71 36 — Selector lever is in “R”. 6.0 V
YES >> GO TO 4.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-158 2014 Note
4.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY A

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
B
AV control unit Rear view camera

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
M71 36 D501 4 Yes
D
AV control unit
Continuity
E
M71 36 No
YES >> GO TO 5. F
5.CHECK CAMERA GROUND CIRCUIT CONTINUITY
G
Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector D501.
AV control unit Rear view camera H

Continuity
M71 33 D501 1 Yes
Is inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CAMERA IMAGE SIGNAL J
1. Connect AV control unit connector M71 and rear view camera connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
4. Check signal between AV control unit connector M71 and ground.
L
(+) Condition Reference value
(−)
Connector Terminal M
AV
Camera image dis-
M71 33 —
played.
O
SKIB2251J

P
NO >> Replace rear view camera. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-159 2014 Note
1.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and microphone connector R15.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and microphone connector R15.
AV control unit Microphone

Continuity
41 2
M71 42 R15 4 Yes
43 1
AV control unit
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
42
M71 — No
43
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE VCC VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector M71.
3. Check voltage between terminals of AV control unit connector M71.

Voltage
(+) (−)
(Approx.)
Terminal Terminal
42 41 5.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL
1. Connect microphone connector.
2. Check signal between terminals of AV control unit connector M71.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-160 2014 Note
AV control unit connector M71 A

Terminal Terminal
B
C
43 41 Speak into microphone.
D
PKIB5037J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-184, "Removal and Installation".
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-161 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

2. Disconnect combination switch connector M88.
3. Check resistance between the terminals of combination switch connector M88.
Combination switch connector M88 Resistance Ω

Condition
Terminal Terminal (Approx.)
Depress SOURCE switch. 1
Depress switch. 121

14
Depress switch. 321
Depress switch. 1
Depress switch. 321

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switches. Refer to AV-183, "Removal and Installation".
Check continuity between combination switch connectors M88 and M30.
Combination switch
Continuity
14 24
M88 15 M30 31 Yes
17 33
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace spiral cable. Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M70.
2. Check continuity between combination switch connector M30 and AV control unit connector M70.
Combination switch AV control unit

Continuity
24 6
M30 31 M70 16 Yes
33 15

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-162 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
3. Check continuity between combination switch connector M30 and ground.
A
Combination switch
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B
24
M30 31 — No
33 C
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. D
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-163 2014 Note
USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
1.CHECK USB INTERFACE HARNESS CONTINUITY

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M76 and USB interface connector M72.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M76 and USB interface connector M72.
AV control unit USB interface

Continuity
53 4
54 1
M76 55 M72 2 Yes
56 3
57 5
AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
53
M76 Ground No
55
YES >> Replace the USB interface. Refer to AV-181, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-164 2014 Note
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
A
B
C
1.CHECK AUX JACK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M71 and AUX jack connector M23. D
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and AUX jack connector M23.
AV control unit AUX jack E

Continuity
30 1
F
M71 31 M23 3 Yes
32 4
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M71 and ground. G
AV control unit
— Continuity
Connector Terminal H
30
M71 Ground No
32
I
YES >> Replace the AUX jack. Refer to AV-182, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. J
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-165 2014 Note
MULTI AV SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [NAVIGATION]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MULTI AV SYSTEM
RELATED TO AUDIO

Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-115, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-153, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
No sound comes out or the level of the - AV-154, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
sound is low. door speaker).
- AV-156, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
door speaker).
Refer to:
not output sound.
door speaker).
door speaker).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
Function".
Malfunction in AV control unit.
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-115, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
AV control unit and speaker.
Refer to:
- AV-154, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door speaker).
- AV-156, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
door speaker).
speaker RH).
Refer to:
door speaker).
door speaker).
Function".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-166 2014 Note
MULTI AV SYSTEM
A
poor reception is caused even after mov- Refer to AV-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
or trim section.
D
• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is E
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone. F
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
G
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider. H
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers. I
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list: J
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible): K
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible): L
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location M

Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
AV
• Hands-free phone operation can be
made, but the communication cannot be
established. Malfunction in AV control unit.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-178,
O
formed, however, voice between each "Removal and Installation".
other cannot be heard during the conver-
sation.
P
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-167 2014 Note
MULTI AV SYSTEM
• The voice recognition can be controlled. Steering switch malfunction.
• Steering switch’s , , and Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-183,
switch works, but does not work. "Removal and Installation".
The system cannot be operated. Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.

Steering switch’s , , , and
switches do not work. Refer to AV-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.

All steering switches do not work.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION

• Malfunction in SD card.
Navigation malfunction.
Function".
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
Navigation system is inoperative. Steering switches malfunction.
Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
Voice activated control malfunction.
Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
RELATED TO REAR VIEW CAMERA

Reverse signal circuit malfunction between
Reverse signal circuit malfunction. BCM and AV control unit.
Camera image signal circuit malfunction
between rear view camera and AV control
Rear view camera is inoperative. Camera image signal circuit malfunction.
unit.
Replace rear view camera.
Rear view camera malfunction. Refer to AV-185, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-168 2014 Note
A
RELATED TO NOISE B
etc.).
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or C
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the D
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera- E
NOTE:
components, one by one. F

G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
electrical components are oper- I
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction J
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when K

L
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized M

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-166, "Symptom Table".
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
AV
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
O
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE: P
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-169 2014 Note
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Basic Operation
Symptom Cause Remedy

No image is shown. Display brightness adjustment is set fully to DARK Adjust the display brightness.
side.
No guide sound is heard. Volume control is set to OFF, MIN or MAX. Adjust the audio guide volume.
Audio guide volume is too low or
Audio guidance is not available while the vehicle is System is not malfunctioning.
too high.
driving on a dark pink route.
Screen is too dark. Temperature inside the vehicle is low. Wait until the temperature inside the vehicle
Motion of the image is too slow. reaches the proper temperature.
Small black or bright spots appear Symptom peculiar to a liquid crystal display (dis- System is not malfunction.
on the screen. play unit).
Vehicle Mark

Map screen and BIRDVIEW™ Some thinning of the character data is done to pre- System is not malfunctioning.
Name of the place vary with the vent the display becoming to complex. In some
screen. cases and in some locations, the display contents
may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may not
be displayed every time on account of the data
processing.
Vehicle mark is not positioned cor- Vehicle is transferred by ferry or by towing after its Drive the vehicle for a while in the GPS sat-
rectly. ignition switch is turned to OFF. ellite signal receiving condition.
Screen will not switch to nighttime The daytime screen is selected by the “SWITCH Perform screen dimming and select the
mode after the lighting switch is SCREENS” when the last time the screen dim- nighttime screen by “SWITCH SCREENS”.
turned ON. ming setting is done.
Switching between daytime/nighttime screen may
be inhibited by the automatic illumination adjust-
ment function.
Map screen will not scroll in accor- Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
dance with the vehicle travel. cation.
Vehicle mark will not be shown. Current location is not displayed. Press “MAP” button to display the current lo-
cation.
Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite GPS satellite signal is intercepted because the ve- Move the vehicle out to an open space.
mark) on the map screen stays hicle is in or behind a building.
gray.
GPS satellite signal cannot be received because Do not place anything on top of the meter dis-
an obstacle is placed on top of the instrument pan- play (instrument panel).
el.
GPS satellites are not visible from current location. Wait until GPS satellites are visible by mov-
ing the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-170 2014 Note
A
Vehicle location accuracy is low. Accuracy indicator (GPS satellite mark) on the Current location is not determined.
map screen stays gray.
Vehicle speed setting by the vehicle speed pulse Drive the vehicle for a while [for approx. 30
has been deviated (advanced or retarded) from minutes at approx. 30 km/h (19 MPH)] and B
the actual vehicle speed because tire chain is fit- the deviation will be automatically adjusted. If
ted or the system has been used on another vehi- advancement or retard still occur, perform
cle. the distance adjustment by CONFIRMA-
TION/ADJUSTMENT mode of diagnosis
C
function.
Map data has error or omission. (Vehicle mark is As a rule, an updated map DVD–ROM will be
always deviated to the same position.) released once a year. D
Destination, Passing Points and Menu Items Cannot be Selected/Set
E
Destination cannot be set. Destination to be set is on an expressway. Set the destination on an ordinary road.
Passing point is not searched The vehicle has already passed the passing point, To include the passing points that have been F
when re-searching the route. or the system judged so. passed into the route again, set the route
again.
Route information will not be dis- Route searching has not been done. Set the destination and perform route
played. searching. G
Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
H
Route information is not available on the dark pink System is not malfunctioning.
route.
After the route searching, no guide Vehicle mark is not on the recommended route. Drive on the recommended route. I
sign will appear as the vehicle (On the display, only guide signs related to the rec-
goes near the entrance/exit to the ommended route will be shown.)
toll road.
Automatic route searching is not Vehicle is driving on a highway (gray route), or no Drive on a road to be searched. Or re–search J
possible. recommended route is available. the route manually. In this case, however, the
whole route will be searched.
Performed automatic detour Performed search with every conditions consid- System is not malfunctioning. K
search (or detour search). Howev- ered. However, the result is the same as that of the
er, the result is the same as that of previous search.
the previous search.
L
Passing points cannot be set. More than five passing points were set. Passing points can be set up to five. To stop
at more than five points, perform sharing in
several steps.
When setting the route, the starting The current vehicle location is always set as the System is not malfunctioning.
M
point cannot be selected. starting point of a route.
Some menu items cannot be se- The vehicle is being driven. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and then op-
lected. erate the system. AV
Voice Guide

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-171 2014 Note

Voice guide will not operate. Note: Voice guide is only available at intersections System is not malfunctioning.
that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by z on
the map). Therefore, guidance may not be given
even when the route on the map changes direction.
The vehicle is not on the recommended route. Return to the recommended route or re-
search the route.
Voice guide is turned OFF. Turn voice guide ON.
Route guide is turned OFF. Turn route guide ON.
Voice guide does not match the ac- Voice guide may vary with the direction to which Drive in conformity to the actual traffic rules.
tual road pattern. the vehicle is turn and the connection of the road to
other roads.
Route Search

No route is shown. No road to be searched is found around the des- Find wider road (orange road or wider) near-
tination. by and reset the destination and passing
points onto it. Take care of the traveling direc-
tion when there are separate up and down
roads.
Starting point and the destination are too close. Set the destination at more distant point.
Conditional traffic regulation (day of the week/ Turn the time-regulating search conditions
time of the day) is set at the area around the cur- OFF. Turn “Avoid regulation time” in the
rent location or the destination. search conditions OFF.
Indicated route is intermittent. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search(Note)Therefore, the route to
the current location or the passing points may be
intermittent.
When the vehicle has passed the A recommended route is controlled by each sec- System is not malfunctioning.
recommended route, it is deleted tion. When the vehicle has passed the passing
from the screen. point 1, then the map data from the starting point
up to the passing point 1 will be deleted. (The data
may remain undeleted in some area.)
Detouring route is recommended. In some areas, highways (gray routes) are not Set the route closer to the basic route (gray
used for the search. (Note). Therefore, detour route).
route may be recommended.
A detour route may be shown when some traffic Slightly move the starting point or the destina-
regulation (one-way traffic, etc.) is set at the area tion, or set the passing point on the route of
around the starting point or the destination. your choice.
In the area where highways (gray routes) are System is not malfunctioning.
used for the search, left turn has priority around
the current location and the destination (passing
points). For this reason, the recommended route
may be detouring.
Landmarks on the map do not This can be happen due to omission or error in As a rule, an updated map DVD-ROM will be
match the actual ones. the map data. released once a year. Wait until the latest
map has become available.
Recommended route is far from Starting point, passing points, and destination of Reset the destination onto the road nearby. If
the starting point, passing points, the route guide were set far from the desired this road is one of the highways (gray routes),
and destination. points because route searching data around an ordinary road nearby may be displayed as
these area were not stored. the recommended route.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities. (Malfunctioning areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
Examples of Current-Location Mark Displacement

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-172 2014 Note
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location A
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-173 2014 Note
Cause (condition) –: While driving ooo: Display Driving condition Remarks (correction, etc.)
Y–intersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual divi-

sion of roads, an error in the direction of
travel deduced by the sensor may result in
the current-location mark appearing on the
wrong road.
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
When driving on a large, continuous spiral

road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
When driving on a long, straight road and
slow curve without stopping, map-matching
does not work effectively enough and dis-
tance errors may accumulate. As a result,
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location when the vehicle is turned at a
If after travelling about 10 km (6
corner.
miles) the correct location has
Road config- ELK0194D
not been restored, perform lo-
uration Zigzag roads cation correction and, if neces-
sary, direction correction.
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the simi-
lar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern

When driving where roads are laid out in a
grid pattern, or where many roads are run-
ning in the similar direction nearby, the map
may be matched to them by mistake and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect location.
ELK0196D
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel

(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mis-
take and the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location.
ELK0197D

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-174 2014 Note
A
In a parking lot When driving in a parking lot, or other loca-
tion where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to B
the road, the vehicle mark may have devi-
ated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steer-
ing wheel repeatedly, direction errors accu- C
SEL709V
mulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable D
When the ignition switch is OFF, the navi-
gation system cannot get the signal from
the gyroscope (angular speed sensor).
Place Therefore, the displayed direction may be E
wrong and the correct road may not be eas-
ily returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition OFF.
SEL710V
F
Slippery roads On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark If after travelling about 10 km (6
to deviate from the correct road. miles) the correct location has G
not been restored, perform lo-
Slopes When parking in sloped garages, when
cation correction and, if neces-
travelling on banked roads, or in other cas-
sary, direction correction. H
es where the vehicle turns when tilted, an
error in the turning angle will occur, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the road.
Road not displayed on the map screen I
When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road. J
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
SEL699V
K
Map data Different road pattern
(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data
and the actual road pattern are different, L
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the cor-
rect road. M
ELK0201D
Drive the vehicle for a while. If AV

the distance still deviates, ad-
When tire chains are used, the mileage is
just it by using the distance ad-
Vehicle Use of tire chains not correctly detected, and the vehicle mark
justment function. (If the tire
may deviate from the correct road.
chain is removed, recover the O
original value.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-175 2014 Note
If the vehicle is driven just after the engine
is started when the gyroscope (angular
Wait for a short while before
Just after the engine is started speed sensor) correction is not completed,
driving after starting the engine.
the vehicle can lose its direction and may
have deviated from the correct location.
Continuous driving without stopping When driving long distances without stop-
Precautions ping, direction errors may accumulate, and
Stop and adjust the orientation.
for driving the current-location mark may deviate from
the correct road.
Abusive driving Spinning the wheels or engaging in other If after travelling about 10 km (6
kinds of abusive driving may result in the miles) the correct location has
system being unable perform correct detec- not been restored, perform lo-
tion, and may cause the vehicle mark to de- cation correction and, if neces-
viate from the correct road. sary, direction correction.
Position correction accuracy
Enter in the road displayed on
If the accuracy of location settings is poor, the screen with an accuracy of
accuracy may be reduced when the correct approx. 1mm.
road cannot be found, particularly in places Caution: Whenever possible,
where there are many roads. use detailed map for the correc-
tion.
How to cor- SEL701V
rect location Direction when location is corrected
If the accuracy of location settings during

correction is poor, accuracy may be re- Perform direction correction.
duced afterwards.
SEL702V
Location Correction by Map-Matching is Slow

• The map-matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive some
distance for the function to work.
• Because map-matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions
in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until
some special feature is found.
Name of Road is Not Displayed
The current road name may not be displayed if there are no road names displayed on the map screen.
Contents of Display Differ for Birdview™ and the (Flat) Map Screen
Difference of the BIRDVIEW™ screen from the flat map screen are as follows.
• The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
• The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
• The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for more
distant areas.
• Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming too complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
• The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
Vehicle Mark Shows a Position Which is Completely Wrong
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
• When location correction has not been done
- If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it may
move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The position will
be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
• When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-176 2014 Note
- Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example
when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location A
can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
Vehicle Mark Jumps
In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current B
location.
• When map matching has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark may C
seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to the wrong road or to a location which is not on
a road.
• When GPS location correction has been done
- If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measure- D
ments, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be “corrected” to a location which
is not on a road.
Vehicle Mark is in a River or Sea E
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehi-
cle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
Vehicle Mark Automatically Rotates F
The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
When Driving on Same Road, Sometimes Vehicle Mark is in Right Place and Sometimes it is in Wrong Place G
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the H
vehicle mark to deviate.
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-177 2014 Note
AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [NAVIGATION]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
1. Perform read configuration using CONSULT. Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) :
Description".
2. Remove the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
4. Remove the AV control unit screws (A) and partially remove the
AV control unit (1).
AWNIA3071ZZ
AWNIA3072ZZ
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the AV control unit and remove.
6. Remove the AV control unit bracket screws (A) and the AV con-
trol unit bracket (1) from each side of the AV control unit (if nec-
essary).
AWNIA3073ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Perform AV control unit configuration after replacement. Refer to AV-135, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL
UNIT) : Work Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-178 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
D
F
AWNIA3062ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-179 2014 Note
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
AWNIA3089ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-180 2014 Note
USB INTERFACE
USB INTERFACE
A
REMOVAL B
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the USB interface C
(1).
AWNIA3069ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-181 2014 Note
REMOVAL
assembly (2) using a suitable tool and remove the auxiliary input
jack (1).
AWNIA3069ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-182 2014 Note
STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the steering wheel rear finisher (1) by releasing pawls
(A). C
AWNIA3063ZZ
F
3. Remove the steering wheel audio control switch screws (A) from
the back of the steering wheel.
G
AWNIA3064ZZ
J
4. Remove the steering wheel audio control switches from the steering wheel.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-183 2014 Note
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the microphone from the headlining by releasing pawls using a suitable tool.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from microphone and remove.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-184 2014 Note
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from rear view camera.
C
3. Remove the nuts (A) from the rear view camera and remove.
F
AWNIA3070ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-185 2014 Note
GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the AV control unit in order to disconnect the GPS antenna harness connector. Refer to AV-178,
"Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the GPS antenna screw (A) from the GPS antenna.
4. Disconnect the harness clip (B) and remove the GPS antenna.
AWNIA3076ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-186 2014 Note
ROD ANTENNA
ROD ANTENNA
A
AWNIA3124ZZ
G

H
REMOVAL
I
J
AWNIA3115ZZ
M
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: AV
panel.
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-187 2014 Note
ANTENNA FEEDER
ANTENNA FEEDER
AWNIA3114ZZ

4. M67, M350 5. M73

GETtheMANUALS.org
AV-188 2014 Note
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
BCS
A
B
SECTION
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - F
DOOR LOCK) ..........................................................17
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System REAR DEFOGGER ....................................................17
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 REAR DEFOGGER) ................................................17
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 BUZZER .....................................................................18 H

BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....18
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
INT LAMP ...................................................................18
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 4 INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT I
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts LAMP) ......................................................................18
Location ..................................................................... 4
HEADLAMP ...............................................................19
J
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 4 HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : LAMP) ......................................................................19
WIPER ........................................................................20 K
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5 WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) .......20
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 5 FLASHER ...................................................................20

FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASH- L
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description...... 5
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ..................... 6 ER) ..........................................................................21
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ........... 7 AIR CONDITIONER ...................................................21 BCS

COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
System Description ................................................... 7 AIR CONDITIONER) ...............................................21
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ...................................... 12 INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................21 N

SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description.... 13 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................................21
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ....... 13
COMB SW ..................................................................23 O
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................. 13 COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB
SW) ..........................................................................23
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................16 P
BCM ...........................................................................24
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 16 BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) ...............24
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 16 IMMU ..........................................................................24
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) ............24
DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 16
BATTERY SAVER .....................................................25

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-1 2014 Note
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 57
BATTERY SAVER) ................................................. 25
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 57
THEFT ALM .............................................................. 26 Description .............................................................. 57
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - DTC Logic ............................................................... 57
THEFT) ................................................................... 26 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57
RETAINED PWR ....................................................... 26 U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 58
RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - DTC Logic ............................................................... 58
RETAINED PWR) ................................................... 26 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58
SIGNAL BUFFER ...................................................... 27 U0415 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 59
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59
SIGNAL BUFFER) .................................................. 27 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 59
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 28 B2562 LOW VOLTAGE ..................................... 60
BCM ................................................................... 28 DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Reference Value ..................................................... 28
Fail-safe .................................................................. 44 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 61
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 46 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 61
DTC Index .............................................................. 46
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ....... 62
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 62
BCM ................................................................... 48 COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT ... 64
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 54 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 66
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 54 COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMP-
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING TOMS ................................................................. 66
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) ............................................ 54 Symptom Table ....................................................... 66
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 67
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description .................... 54
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) .................. 67
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure ............ 54 Removal and Installation ......................................... 67
CONFIGURATION (BCM) ......................................... 55 COMBINATION SWITCH .................................. 68
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description ................. 55 Removal and Installation ......................................... 68
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure ......... 55
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list ........ 56

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-3 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009567507
AWMIA1424ZZ
1. BCM
A. View with instrument panel removed
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000009567509
AWMIA1437ZZ
1 Combination meter 2 IPDM E/R 3 BCM

Refer to MWI-5, "METER SYSTEM : Refer to PCS-4, "Component Parts Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL
Component Parts Location". Location". SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-4 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009567510
B
OUTLINE
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to
the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor. C
• BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light,
turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical com-
ponents. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving con- D
trol function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF.
• BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT and various set-
tings.
E
BCM CONTROL FUNCTION LIST
System Reference
F
BCS-7, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM :
Combination switch reading system
System Description"
Signal buffer system BCS-13, "SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description" G
BCS-13, "POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
Power consumption control system
System Description"
Headlamp system EXL-8, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" H
EXL-9, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System De-
Daytime light system
scription"
EXL-10, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP I
Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system
SYSTEM : System Description"
EXL-10, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
Parking, license plate and tail lamps system
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" J
EXL-12, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Front fog lamp system
tion"
Exterior lamp battery saver system

EXL-13, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : K
System Description"
INL-7, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : Sys-
Interior room lamp control system
tem Description" L
INL-7, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : Sys-
Interior room lamp battery saver system
tem Description"
WW-8, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System BCS
Front wiper and washer system
Description"
WW-11, "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Rear wiper and washer system
Description"
N
Rear window defogger system DEF-5, "System Description"
Manual air conditioning system HAC-13, "System Description"
Warning chime system WCS-5, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description" O
Power door lock system DLK-17, "System Description"
SEC-13, "NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) P
tion"
SEC-15, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Vehicle security system
tion"

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-5 2014 Note
SYSTEM
System Reference
Door lock function DLK-20, "DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description"
Warning function DLK-24, "WARNING FUNCTION : System Description"
Intelligent Key system/engine start system DLK-24, "KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
Key reminder function
tion"
SEC-10, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START
Engine start function
FUNCTION : System Description"
Power window system PWC-7, "System Description"
BCS-26, "RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RE-
RAP (retained accessory power) system
TAINED PWR)"
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009654074
BCM performs fail-safe control when the following DTCs are detected.
CONSULT Display Fail-safe Cancellation

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC
B2195: ANTI SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC
When the following CAN signal status (vehicle speed signal) becomes
consistent
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED —
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• Vehicle speed signal (Meter)
500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent
B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL — • Park position switch signal
• P range signal (CAN)
5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch is in the ON position
B2602: SHIFT P DIAG — • Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or ex-
cept P position (9 – 16 V)
• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
500 ms after any of the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Status 1
- Ignition switch is in the ON position
- Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or ex-
B2603: SHIFT POSITION — - P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
• Status 2
- Park position switch signal: P position (release selector button) (0 –
1.5 V)
- P/N position signal: P or N positions (9 – 16 V)
• Status 1
- P/N position signal: P or N position (9 – 16 V)
B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN — - Shift position signal (CAN): P or N position
• Status 2
- P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
- Shift position signal (CAN): Except P and N position

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-6 2014 Note
SYSTEM
A
• Status 1
B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM — - P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V) B
• Status 2
500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes con-
C
sistent
B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) D
When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
B260F: ECM CAN COMM Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)
E
When the following conditions are fulfilled
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
F
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
When the following conditions are fulfilled G
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON Inhibit engine cranking • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
When the following conditions are fulfilled H
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF Inhibit engine cranking • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
Inhibit engine cranking
I
B26F7: BCM by Intelligent Key sys- When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
tem
U0415: VDC CAN CIR2 — When vehicle speed signal (Meter) (CAN) is received normally
J
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009567512
K
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Combination Switch Circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers) L
BCS
AWMIA1427GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-7 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Combination Switch Circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
AWMIA1428GB
OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.
• BCM has a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a
maximum of 20 switch states.
COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX (WITH VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)
Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)
AWMIA1429GB
Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list

System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5
OUTPUT 1 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LOW TURN LH TURN RH
OUTPUT 2 FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEADLAMP 1
OUTPUT 3 INT VOLUME 1 RR WASHER — HEADLAMP 2 HI BEAM
OUTPUT 4 RR WIPER INT INT VOLUME 3 — — TAIL LAMP
OUTPUT 5 INT VOLUME 2 RR WIPER ON — FR FOG —
COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX (WITHOUT VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-8 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Combination Switch Circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
A
AWMIA1430GB F
Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list

System INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 G
OUTPUT 1 — FR WASHER FR WIPER LOW TURN LH TURN RH
OUTPUT 2 FR WIPER HI — FR WIPER INT PASSING HEADLAMP 1
OUTPUT 3 — — — HEADLAMP 2 HI BEAM
H
OUTPUT 4 — — — — TAIL LAMP
OUTPUT 5 — — — — —
I
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
Description
J
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms intervals normally.
BCS
JPMIA0609GB
NOTE: O
BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms intervals when BCM is controlled at low power
consumption control mode.
• BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch. P
- It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5, and outputs
voltage waveform.
- The voltage waveform of OUTPUT corresponding to the formed circuit is input into the interface on INPUT
side if any (1 or more) switches are ON.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-9 2014 Note
SYSTEM
- It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch.
JMMIA0326GB
Operation Example
In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced
as follows: INPUT 1 - 5 to “1 - 5” and OUTPUT 1 - 5 to “A - E”.
Example 1: When a switch (TAIL LAMP) is turned ON
• The circuit between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 is formed when the TAIL LAMP switch is turned ON.
Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers)
AWMIA1431GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-10 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Combination switch circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
A
AWMIA1432GB F
• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5D” when the signal of OUTPUT 4 is input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TAIL LAMP switch is ON when the signal “5D” is detected.
Example 2: When some switches (TURN RH, TAIL LAMP) are turned ON G
• The circuits between OUTPUT 1 and INPUT 5 and between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 are formed when the
TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are turned ON.
Combination switch circuit (With Variable Intermittent Wipers) H
BCS
AWMIA1433GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-11 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Combination switch circuit (Without Variable Intermittent Wipers)
AWMIA1434GB
• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5AD” when the signals of OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 4 are
input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are ON when the signal “5AD” is detected.
WIPER INTERMITTENT DIAL POSITION (WITH VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPERS)
BCM judges the wiper intermittent dial 1 - 7 by the status of INT VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
Wiper intermittent Switch status

dial position INT VOLUME 1 INT VOLUME 2 INT VOLUME 3
1 ON ON ON
2 ON ON OFF
3 ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF OFF
5 OFF OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON
7 OFF ON OFF
NOTE:
For details of wiper intermittent dial position, refer to WW-8, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description".
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-12 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009567514
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWMIA1275GB F
OUTLINE
BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit.
G
Signal transmission function list
Signal name Input Output Description H

Inputs the push-button ignition
switch (push switch) signal and
• Ignition switch ON signal
Engine switch (push switch) IPDM E/R (CAN) transmits the ignition switch sta-
• Ignition switch signal
tus judged with BCM via CAN
I
communication.
Inputs the door switch signal
• Combination meter (CAN) J
Door switch signal Any door switch and transmits it via CAN com-
• IPDM E/R (CAN)
munication.
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM

K
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009567516
SYSTEM DIAGRAM L
BCS
ALCIA0030GB
OUTLINE
• BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the
vehicle status.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-13 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep
request to each unit (IPDM E/R and combination meter) that operates with the ignition switch OFF.
Normal mode (wake-up)
- CAN communication is normally performed with other units
- Each control with BCM is operating properly
CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep)
- CAN transmission is stopped
- Control with BCM only is operating
Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep)
- Low power consumption control is active
- CAN transmission is stopped
LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM
BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode.
• The reading interval of each switch changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval.
Sleep mode activation
• BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R and combination meter via CAN communica-
tion.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are ful-
filled.
• Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wakeup signal. BCM is in CAN com-
munication sleep mode.
• BCM is in the low power consumption mode and performs the low power consumption control when all of the
BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition.
Sleep condition
CAN sleep condition BCM sleep condition
• Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units
• Ignition switch: OFF
• Vehicle security system alarm: No operation
• Warning lamp: Not operation
• Interior room lamp battery saver: Time out
• Intelligent Key system buzzer: No operation
• RAP system: OFF
• Brake switch: OFF
• Push-button ignition switch (push switch) illumination: OFF
• Turn signal indicator lamp: No operation
• NATS: No operation
• Exterior lamp: OFF
• Remote keyless entry receiver communication status: No com-
• Door lock status: No change
munication
• CONSULT communication status: No communication
• Meter display signal: Non-transmission
• Door switch status: No change
• Rear window defogger: OFF
Wake-up operation
• BCM changes from the low power consumption mode to the CAN communication sleep mode when the any
of the BCM wake-up conditions are fulfilled. Only the control with BCM is activated.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any of the CAN wake-up conditions
are fulfilled. It changes from the low power consumption mode or the CAN communication sleep mode to the
normal mode.
• Each unit starts the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. In addition, the com-
bination meter transmits the wake up signal to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communica-
tion start.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-14 2014 Note
SYSTEM
BCM wake-up condition CAN wake-up condition
A
• Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units
• Push-button ignition switch (push switch): OFF→ON
• Hazard switch: OFF→ON
• PASSING switch: OFF→ON, ON→OFF B
• Door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch): Lock or unlock
• TAIL LAMP switch: OFF→ON
• Door lock switch: OFF→ON
• Driver door switch: OFF→ON, ON→OFF
• Door unlock switch: OFF→ON
• Passenger door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
• Remote keyless entry receiver: Receiving valid keyfob
• Driver door request switch: OFF→ON C
• Passenger door request switch: OFF→ON
• Stop lamp switch 2 signal: ON
• Remote keyless entry receiver: Receiving valid keyfob
D
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-15 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000009567517
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.

ECU identification The BCM part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The BCM self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output data is displayed in real time.
Active Test The BCM activates outputs to test components.
Work support The settings for BCM functions can be changed.
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM.
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions.
Direct Diagnostic Mode

Self Diagnostic Result
System Sub System

ECU identification
Configuration
Work support
Data Monitor
Active Test
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × × ×

Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × ×
Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × ×
Air conditioner AIR CONDITIONER ×
Intelligent Key system INTELLIGENT KEY × × × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
BCM BCM × × × × ×
Immobilizer IMMU × × ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
Vehicle security system THEFT ALM × × ×
RAP system RETAINED PWR × ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER ×
DOOR LOCK

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-16 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000009567518
A
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description B

REQ SW-DR [On/Off] Indicates condition of door request switch LH.
REQ SW-AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of door request switch RH.
C
REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off] Indicates condition of back door request switch.
DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch LH.
DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch RH. D
DOOR SW-RR [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear door switch LH.
E
DOOR SW-BK [On/Off] Indicates condition of back door switch.
CDL LOCK SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of lock signal from door lock and unlock switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch. F
KEY CYL LK-SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch.
KEY CYL UN-SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch.
G
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item Description

H
This test is able to check door lock operation [OTR ULK/AS UNLK/DR UNLK/ALL UNLK/ALL
DOOR LOCK
LOCK].
WORK SUPPORT I
Support Item Setting Description

On* Automatic door locks function ON. J
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET
Off Automatic door locks function OFF.
Lock/Unlock* Automatic door locks function operates in lock and unlock.
K
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK Lock Only Automatic door locks function operates in lock only.
SELECT Unlock Only Automatic door locks function operates in unlock only.
Off Automatic door locks function OFF. L
P RANGE Doors lock automatically when shifted out of Park (P).
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT
VH SPD* Doors lock automatically when vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 mph).
BCS
MODE6* Drivers door unlocks automatically when key is removed.
MODE5 Drivers door unlocks automatically when shifted into Park (P).
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK MODE4 Drivers door unlocks automatically when ignition is switched from ON to OFF. N
SELECT MODE3 Doors unlock automatically when key is removed.
MODE2 Doors unlock automatically when shifted into Park (P).
MODE1 Doors unlock automatically when ignition is switched from ON to OFF. O
*: Initial setting
REAR DEFOGGER P
REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) INFOID:0000000009567519
DATA MONITOR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-17 2014 Note

PUSH SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.
REAR DEF SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear window defogger switch.
ACTIVE TEST

REAR DEFOGGER This test is able to check rear window defogger operation [Off/On].
BUZZER
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER) INFOID:0000000009567520
DATA MONITOR

PUSH -SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch.
UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.
VEH SPEED 1 [km/h] Indicates vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN communication line.
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of combination switch.
FR FOG SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of front fog lamp switch.
ACTIVE TEST

LIGHT WARN ALM This test is able to check light warning chime operation [On/Off].
INT LAMP
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000009567521
DATA MONITOR

REQ SW -DR [On/Off] Indicates condition of door request switch LH.
REQ SW -AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of door request switch RH.
DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch RH.
CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch.
RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key.
RKE-UNLOCK [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from Intelligent Key.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-18 2014 Note
ACTIVE TEST
A
INT LAMP This test is able to check interior room lamp operation [On/Off].
B
WORK SUPPORT

C
MODE 2 Interior room lamp timer activates with all doors.
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET
MODE 1* Interior room lamp timer activates with the driver door only.
On* Interior room lamp timer function ON. D
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
Off Interior room lamp timer function OFF.
MODE 4 30 sec.
E
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET MODE 3* 15 sec. Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time).
MODE 2 7.5 sec.
*: Initial setting F
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP) INFOID:0000000009567522
G
DATA MONITOR
H
ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] Indicates engine status received from ECM on CAN communication line. I
TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off]
J
TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off]
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]
HI BEAM SW [On/Off] K
Indicates condition of combination switch.
HEAD LAMP SW 1 [On/Off]
L
PASSING SW [On/Off]
FR FOG SW [On/Off]
DOOR SW-DR [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch LH. BCS
DOOR SW-RL [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear door switch LH. N
ACTIVE TEST O

FR FOG LAMP This test is able to check front fog lamp operation [On/Off]. P
HEAD LAMP This test is able to check head lamp operation [Hi/Low/Off].
ILL DIM SIGNAL This test is able to check head lamp illumination dimming operation [On/Off].
TAIL LAMP This test is able to check tail lamp operation [On/Off].
WORK SUPPORT

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-19 2014 Note

On* Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.
BATTERY SAVER SET
Off Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.
MODE 8 180 sec.
MODE 7 150 sec.
MODE 6 120 sec.
MODE 4 60 sec. Sets delay timer function operation time
ILL DELAY SET
MODE 5 90 sec. (All doors closed).
MODE 3 30 sec.
MODE 2 OFF
MODE 1* 45 sec.
*: Initial setting
WIPER
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) INFOID:0000000009567523
DATA MONITOR

FR WIPER HI [On/Off]
FR WIPER LOW [On/Off]
Indicates condition of wiper operation of combination switch.
FR WASHER SW [On/Off]
FR WIPER INT [On/Off]
Indicates front wiper auto stop signal received from IPDM E/R on CAN communication
FR WIPER STOP [On/Off]
line.
INT VOLUME [1 − 7] Indicates condition of intermittent wiper operation of combination switch.
RR WIPER ON [On/Off]
RR WIPER INT [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear wiper operation of combination switch.
RR WASHER SW [On/Off]
RR WIPER STOP [On/Off] Indicates rear wiper motor auto stop input from rear wiper motor.
ACTIVE TEST

FR WIPER This test is able to check front wiper operation [INT/Lo/Hi/Off].
RR WIPER This test is able to check rear wiper operation [On/Off].
WORK SUPPORT

On Front wiper intermittent time linked with vehicle speed and wiper dial position.
WIPER SPEED SETTING
Off* Front wiper intermittent time linked with wiper dial position.
* : Initial setting
FLASHER

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-20 2014 Note
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) INFOID:0000000009567524
A
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] B

Description

REQ SW -AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of door request switch RH. C
Indicates condition of turn signal function of combination switch. D
HAZARD SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of hazard switch.
RKE-LOCK [On/Off] Indicates condition of lock signal from Intelligent Key. E
ACTIVE TEST F

FLASHER This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [Off/LH/RH]. G
WORK SUPPORT
Support Item Setting Description H

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked with
Lock/Unlock*
Intelligent Key.
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent
I
Unlock Only
Key.
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent
Lock Only J
Key.
No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked
Off
with Intelligent Key.
* : Initial setting K
AIR CONDITIONER
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) INFOID:0000000009567525 L
DATA MONITOR
BCS
FAN ON SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of fan switch.
AIR COND SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of A/C switch.
N
INTELLIGENT KEY
O
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000009567526

P
Refer to BCS-46, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Main Description

REQ SW -DR [On/Off] × Indicates condition of door request switch LH.
REQ SW -AS [On/Off] × Indicates condition of door request switch RH.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-21 2014 Note
Monitor Item [Unit] Main Description
REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off] × Indicates condition of back door request switch.
BRAKE SW 1 [On/Off] × Indicates condition of brake switch.
CLUTCH SW [On/Off] × Indicates condition of clutch interlock switch.
BRAKE SW 2 [On/Off] Indicates condition of brake switch.
DETE/CANCL SW [On/Off] × Indicates condition of P (park) position.
SFT PN/N SW [On/Off] × Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position.
UNLK SEN -DR [On/Off] × Indicates condition of door unlock sensor.
Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch received from IPDM E/R on
PUSH SW -IPDM [On/Off]
CAN communication line.
Indicates condition of ignition relay 1 received from IPDM E/R on CAN commu-
IGN RLY1 -F/B [On/Off]
nication line.
Indicates condition of detent switch received from TCM on CAN communication
DETE SW -IPDM [On/Off]
line.
Indicates condition of P (park) or N (neutral) position from TCM on CAN com-
SFT PN -IPDM [On/Off]
munication line.
SFT P -MET [On/Off] Indicates condition of P (park) position from TCM on CAN communication line.
Indicates condition of N (neutral) position from IPDM E/R on CAN communica-
SFT N -MET [On/Off]
tion line.
ENGINE STATE [Stop/Start/Crank/Run] × Indicates condition of engine state from ECM on CAN communication line.
Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from ABS on CAN commu-
VEH SPEED 1 [mph/km/h] ×
nication line.
Indicates condition of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter on
VEH SPEED 2 [mph/km/h] ×
CAN communication line.
DOOR STAT -DR [LOCK/READY/UNLK] × Indicates condition of driver side door status.
DOOR STAT -AS [LOCK/READY/UNLK] × Indicates condition of passenger side door status.
ID OK FLAG [Set/Reset] Indicates condition of Intelligent Key ID.
PRMT ENG STRT [Set/Reset] Indicates condition of engine start possibility.
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while oper-
RKE OPE COUN1 [0-19] ×
ating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while oper-
RKE OPE COUN2 [0-19] ×
ating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing.
RKE-MODE CHG [On/Off] Indicates condition of mode change signal from Intelligent Key.
ACTIVE TEST

This test is able to check combination meter warning chime operation [Take Out/Knob/Key/
INSIDE BUZZER
Off].
This test is able to check combination meter display information [Off/LK WN/OUTKEY/NO
LCD
KY/BATT/INSRT/SFT P/ROTAT/ID NG/B&P I/B&P N].
BATTERY SAVER This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].
ENGINE SW ILLUMI This test is able to check push-button ignition switch START indicator operation [On/Off].
PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR This test is able to check back door lock actuator operation [On/Off].
INDICATOR This test is able to check combination meter warning lamp operation [KEY ON/KEY IND/Off].
FLASHER This test is able to check hazard lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-22 2014 Note
A
OUTSIDE BUZZER This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation [On/Off].
HORN This test is able to check horn operation [On].
P RANGE This test is able to check CVT shift selector illumination operation [On/Off]. B
WORK SUPPORT
Support Item Setting Description C

On* Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key ON.
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
Off Door lock/unlock function from Intelligent Key OFF.
D
On* Anti lock out setting ON.
ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI
Off Anti lock out setting OFF.
Off No buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch. E
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
On* Buzzer reminder when doors are unlocked with request switch.
Horn Chirp Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with request switch.
F
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK Buzzer* Buzzer reminder when doors are locked with request switch.
Off No reminder when doors are locked with request switch.
Off Horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key. G
HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK
On* No horn chirp reminder when doors are locked with Intelligent Key.
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
Lock/Unlock*
with Intelligent Key or request switch. H
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intel-
Unlock Only
ligent Key or request switch.
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelli- I
Lock Only
gent Key or request switch.
No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked/unlocked
Off
with Intelligent Key or request switch. J
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS — This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis.
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID — Intelligent Key ID code can be checked.
K
70 msec
Start 100 msec Starter motor operation duration time setting.
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
200 msec L
End —
On* Intelligent Key low battery warning ON.
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN
Off Intelligent Key low battery warning OFF. BCS
MODE7 5 min
MODE6 4 min
N
MODE5 3 min
AUTO LOCK SET MODE4 2 min Auto door lock time setting.
MODE3* 1 min O
MODE2 30 sec
MODE1 Off
P
*: Initial Setting
COMB SW
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SW) INFOID:0000000009567527
DATA MONITOR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-23 2014 Note

FR WIPER HI [On/Off]
FR WIPER LOW [On/Off]
Indicates condition of wiper operation of combination switch.
FR WASHER SW [On/Off]
FR WIPER INT [On/Off]
INT VOLUME [1 - 7] Indicates condition of intermittent wiper operation of combination switch.
RR WIPER ON [On/Off]
RR WIPER INT [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear wiper operation of combination switch.
RR WASHER SW [On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL R [On/Off] Indicates condition of right turn signal operation of combination switch.
TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] Indicates condition of left turn signal operation of combination switch.
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of tail lamp switch operation of combination switch.
HI BEAM SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of Hi beam switch operation of combination switch.
HEAD LAMP SW 1 [On/Off] Indicates condition of head lamp switch 1 operation of combination switch.
HEAD LAMP SW 2 [On/Off] Indicates condition of head lamp switch 2 operation of combination switch.
PASSING SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of passing switch operation of combination switch.
FR FOG SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of front fog lamp switch operation of combination switch.
BCM
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) INFOID:0000000009567528
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The BCM part number is displayed.
WORK SUPPORT

Reset Returns BCM to initial value in factory shipment.
RESET SETTING VALUE
Cancel Cancels the reset function.
CONFIGURATION
Refer to BCS-55, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description".
Refer to LAN-11, "CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT".
IMMU
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) INFOID:0000000009567529

DATA MONITOR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-24 2014 Note
Monitor Item [Unit] Description A

CONFIRM ID ALL [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID4 [Yet/DONE]
CONFIRM ID3 [Yet/DONE] Switches to DONE when an Intelligent Key is registered.
B
CONFIRM ID2 [Yet/DONE]

CONFIRM ID1 [Yet/DONE] C
TP 4 [Yet/DONE]
TP 3 [Yet/DONE]
DONE indicates the number of Intelligent Key ID which has been registered.
TP 2 [Yet/DONE] D
TP 1 [Yet/DONE]
E
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item Description F

THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator operation [On/Off].
BATTERY SAVER G
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000009567530
DATA MONITOR H

I

PUSH SW [On/Off] Indicates condition push-button ignition switch. J
DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch RH. K
L
CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch. BCS
N
ACTIVE TEST O
Test item Description

BATTERY SAVER This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off]. P
WORK SUPPORT

ON* Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.
BATTERY SAVER SET
OFF Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-25 2014 Note
MODE 3* 10 min.
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET MODE 2 60 min. Sets interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time.
MODE 1 15 min.
*: Initial setting
THEFT ALM
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - THEFT) INFOID:0000000009567532
DATA MONITOR
Monitored Item Description

REQ SW -BD/TR [On/Off] Indicates condition of back door request switch.
ACTIVE TEST

VEHICLE SECURITY HORN This test is able to check vehicle security horn operation [On].
FLASHER This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [LH/RH/Off].
THEFT IND This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation [On/Off].
HEADLAMP(HI) This test is able to check vehicle security lamp operation [On].
WORK SUPPORT

THEFT ALM TRG — Displays status of components that can trigger the theft alarm.
On Security alarm ON.
SECURITY ALARM SET
Off Security alarm OFF.
RETAINED PWR
RETAINED PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) INFOID:0000000009567533
DATA MONITOR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-26 2014 Note
Monitor Item [Unit] Description A

B
SIGNAL BUFFER
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER) INFOID:0000000009567534
C
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item [Unit] Description D

PUSH SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of the push-button ignition switch.
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-27 2014 Note
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
BCM
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item Condition Value/Status

A/C switch OFF Off
AIR COND SW
A/C switch ON On
When the brake pedal is released On
BRAKE SW 1
When the brake pedal is depressed Off
Brake pedal released Off
BRAKE SW2
Brake pedal depressed On
Door lock/unlock switch does not operate Off
CDL LOCK SW
Press door lock/unlock switch to the LOCK side On
Door lock/unlock switch does not operate Off
CDL UNLOCK SW
Press door lock/unlock switch to the UNLOCK side On
The key ID does not match any key ID registered to BCM. Yet
CONFRM ID ALL
The key ID matches any key ID registered to BCM. DONE
The key ID does not match the fourth key ID registered to BCM. Yet
CONFIRM ID4
The key ID matches the fourth key ID registered to BCM. DONE
The key ID does not match the third key ID registered to BCM. Yet
CONFIRM ID3
The key ID matches the third key ID registered to BCM. DONE
The key ID does not match the second key ID registered to BCM. Yet
CONFIRM ID2
The key ID matches the second key ID registered to BCM. DONE
The key ID does not match the first key ID registered to BCM. Yet
CONFIRM ID1
The key ID matches the first key ID registered to BCM. DONE
When selector lever is in P position Off
DETE SW -IPDM
When selector lever is in any position other than P On
When selector lever is in P position Off
DETE/CANCL SW
When selector lever is in any position other than P On
Passenger door LOCK status LOCK
DOOR STAT-AS Passenger door UNLOCK status UNLK
Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (5 seconds) READY
Driver door LOCK status LOCK
DOOR STAT-DR Driver door UNLOCK status UNLK
Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (5 seconds) READY
Front door RH closed Off
DOOR SW-AS
Front door RH opened On
Back door closed Off
DOOR SW-BK
Back door opened On
Front door LH closed Off
DOOR SW-DR
Front door LH opened On
Rear door LH closed Off
DOOR SW-RL
Rear door LH opened On

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-28 2014 Note
BCM
A
Rear door RH closed Off
DOOR SW-RR
Rear door RH opened On
Engine stopped Stop B
While the engine stalls Stall
ENGINE STATE
At engine cranking Crank
Engine running Run C
Blower motor fan switch OFF Off
FAN ON SIG
Blower motor fan switch ON On
D
Front fog lamp switch OFF Off
FR FOG SW
Front fog lamp switch ON On
Front washer switch OFF Off E
FR WASHER SW
Front washer switch ON On
Front wiper switch OFF Off
FR WIPER LOW F
Front wiper switch LO On
FR WIPER HI
Front wiper switch HI On G
FR WIPER INT
Front wiper switch INT On
H
Any position other than front wiper stop position Off
FR WIPER STOP
Front wiper stop position On
When hazard switch is not pressed Off I
HAZARD SW
When hazard switch is pressed On
Headlamp switch OFF Off
HEAD LAMP SW 1 J
Headlamp switch 1st On
Headlamp switch OFF Off
HEAD LAMP SW 2
Headlamp switch 1st On
K
High beam switch OFF Off
HI BEAM SW
High beam switch HI On
Ignition switch ACC or ON Reset L
ID OK FLAG
Ignition switch OFF Set
Ignition switch OFF or ACC Off
IGN RLY1 F/B BCS
Ignition switch ON On
INT VOLUME Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7 1-7
Door key cylinder LOCK position Off N
KEY CYL LK-SW
Door key cylinder other than LOCK position On
Door key cylinder UNLOCK position Off
KEY CYL UN-SW O
Door key cylinder other than UNLOCK position On
Other than lighting switch PASS Off
PASSING SW
Lighting switch PASS On P
When the engine start is prohibited Reset
PRMT ENG STRT
When the engine start is permitted Set
Return ignition switch to LOCK position Off
PUSH SW
Press ignition switch On

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-29 2014 Note
BCM
When engine switch (push switch) is not pressed Off
PUSH SW-IPDM
When engine switch (push switch) is pressed On
Rear window defogger switch OFF Off
REAR DEF SW
Rear window defogger switch ON On
When passenger door request switch is not pressed Off
REQ SW-AS
When passenger door request switch is pressed On
When back door request switch is not pressed Off
REQ SW-BD/TR
When back door request switch is pressed On
When driver door request switch is not pressed Off
REQ SW-DR
When driver door request switch is pressed On
When LOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed Off
RKE-LOCK
When LOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed On
When LOCK/UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed and
Off
held simultaneously
RKE-MODE CHG
When LOCK/UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed and held
On
simultaneously
RKE OPE COUN1 Operation frequency of Intelligent Key 0-19
RKE OPE COUN2 Operation frequency of Intelligent Key 0-19
When UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is not pressed Off
RKE-UNLOCK
When UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed On
Rear washer switch OFF Off
RR WASHER SW
Rear washer switch ON On
Rear wiper switch OFF Off
RR WIPER INT
Rear wiper switch INT On
Rear wiper switch OFF Off
RR WIPER ON
Rear wiper switch ON On
Any position other than rear wiper stop position Off
RR WIPER STOP
Rear wiper stop position On
When selector lever is in any position other than N Off
SFT N-MET
When selector lever is in N position On
When selector lever is in any position other than P Off
SFT P-MET
When selector lever is in P position On
When selector lever is in any position other than P or N Off
SFT PN -IPDM
When selector lever is in P or N position On
When selector lever is in any position other than P or N Off
SFT PN/N SW
When selector lever is in P or N position On
Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND Off
TAIL LAMP SW
Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND On
The ID of fourth key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 4
The ID of fourth key is registered to BCM DONE
The ID of third key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 3
The ID of third key is registered to BCM DONE
The ID of second key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 2
The ID of second key is registered to BCM DONE

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-30 2014 Note
BCM
A
The ID of first key is not registered to BCM Yet
TP 1
The ID of first key is registered to BCM DONE
Turn signal switch OFF Off B
TURN SIGNAL L
Turn signal switch LH On
Turn signal switch OFF Off
TURN SIGNAL R
Turn signal switch RH On C
Driver door UNLOCK status Off
UNLK SEN-DR
Driver door LOCK status On
D
VEH SPEED 1 While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading mph, km/h
VEH SPEED 2 While driving, equivalent to speedometer reading mph, km/h
E
TERMINAL LAYOUT
BCS
JMMIA1063ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-31 2014 Note
BCM
Terminal No. Description

(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
Signal name (Approx.)
+ − Output
Rear window OFF Battery voltage
1 Rear window
Ground defogger relay Input
(GR) defogger switch ON 0 – 0.5 V
control
OFF 0V
TURN RH
HEADLAMP 1
2 Combination HI BEAM
Ground INPUT 5 signal Input
(BR) switch
TAIL LAMP
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
OFF 0V
TURN LH
PASSING
3 Combination HEADLAMP 2
(Y) switch
FR FOG
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
OFF 0V
FR WIPER LO
4 Combination
(L) switch
FR WIPER INT
(any intermittent position)
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
OFF 0V
FR WASHER
Wiper intermittent dial 1
5 Combination Wiper intermittent dial 5
(G) switch

PKIB4958J
1.0 V
OFF 0V
FR WIPER HI
6 Combination Wiper intermittent dial 2
(R) switch Wiper intermittent dial 3
PKIB4958J
1.0 V

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-32 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value A
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
7 Key cylinder unlock Key cylinder N position C

Ground Input
(W) sw signal switch
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V D
UNLOCK position 0V
8 Key cylinder lock sw Key cylinder N position F

Ground Input
(GR) signal switch
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V G
LOCK position 0V
OFF (Brake pedal
0V H
9 Stop lamp released)
Ground Stop lamp switch 1 Input
(LG) switch ON (Brake pedal
Battery voltage
depressed)
I
J
12 Central door lock sw Door lock and NEUTRAL position
Ground Input
(GR) signal unlock switch
K
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
LOCK position 0V
L
BCS
13 Central door unlock Door lock and NEUTRAL position
Ground Input
(BR) sw signal unlock switch
N
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
UNLOCK position 0V
O
P
15 Rear defogger Rear window Not pressed
Ground Input
(G) switch signal defogger switch
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
Pressed 0V

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-33 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
18 Keyless tuner
Ground Input Push-button ignition switch ON 0V
(V) ground
19 Keyless tuner power Push-button ignition switch OFF

Ground Output
(LG) supply
JMKIA3838GB
Push-button ignition switch ACC or ON 5V
Waiting
Push-button ig-
20 JMKIA3838GB
Ground Keyless tuner signal Input nition switch
(G)
OFF
When operating either

button on Intelligent Key
JMKIA3841GB
Brake pedal depressed

NOTE:
Immobilizer one way Intelligent Key Waveform varies each
21 Input/
Ground communication battery is re- time when brake pedal is
(P) Output
(CLOCK) signal moved depressed
JMKIA6232JP
Brake pedal released Battery voltage
Waiting
Push-button ig-
22 Keyless tuner RSSI JMKIA5952GB
Ground Input nition switch
(W) signal
OFF
When pressing and hold-

ing either button on Intelli-
gent Key
JMKIA5953GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-34 2014 Note
BCM
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
ON 0 – 0.5 V
B
C
23 Security indicator Security indica- Blinking (push-button igni-
Ground Output
(R/Y) output tor lamp tion switch OFF)
D
JPMIA0590GB
12.0 V
OFF Battery voltage
E
Brake pedal depressed

NOTE: F
Immobilizer two way Waveform varies each
25 Input/
Ground communication sig- During waiting time when brake pedal is
(LG) Output
nal depressed
G
JMKIA6233JP
Brake pedal released Battery voltage

Push-button ig- A/C switch OFF Battery voltage H
27 nition switch ON
Ground Air con sw signal Input
(W) and blower fan A/C switch ON 0V
switch ON
I
OFF 0V
J
28
Ground Blower fan sw signal Input Fan switch
(SB) ON
K
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
L
29 OFF Battery voltage
Ground Hazard sw signal Input Hazard switch
(O) ON 0 – 1.5 V
BCS
N
31 Driver door lock sta- LOCK status
Ground Input Front door LH
(Y) tus
JPMIA0011GB O
11.8V
UNLOCK status 0V
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-35 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF
PKIB4960J
32 Combination 7.0 - 8.0 V

Ground OUTPUT 5 Output
(P) switch FR FOG
Wiper intermittent dial 7 PKIB4956J
1.0 V
OFF
PKIB4960J

(V) switch TAIL LAMP

PKIB4958J
1.2 V
OFF
PKIB4960J

(W) switch HEADLAMP 2
HI BEAM
Wiper intermittent dial 3 PKIB4958J
1.2 V

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-36 2014 Note
BCM
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
OFF C
PKIB4960J
35 Combination 7.0 - 8.0 V D

(GR) switch HEADLAMP 1
PASSING
E
FR WIPER HI
FR WIPER INT F
(any intermittent position)
PKIB4958J
1.2 V
G
H
OFF
PKIB4960J
I
(LG) switch TURN RH
J
TURN LH
FR WIPER LO
K
FR WASHER
PKIB4958J
1.2 V L
P (Park) position 0 – 1.5 V
37 Park position switch
Ground Input Selector lever Any position other than P
(R) signal Battery voltage
(Park) BCS
39 Input/
Ground CAN-H — —
(L) Output
40 Input/ N
Ground CAN-L — —
(P) Output
43 Door switch (Back) Back door OFF (back door closed)

Ground Input P
(P) signal switch
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (back door open) 0V

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-37 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Rear wiper stop position Battery voltage
44 Rear wiper autostop Push-button ig-
Ground Input Any position other than
(LG) switch nition switch ON 0V
rear wiper stop position
OFF (front RH door

45 Door switch (AS) Front door closed)
Ground Input
(O) signal switch RH
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (front RH door open) 0V
OFF (rear RH door

46 Door switch (RR) Rear door closed)
Ground Input
(BR) signal switch RH
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (rear RH door open) 0V
OFF (front LH door

47 Door switch (DR) Front door closed)
Ground Input
(SB) signal switch LH
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (front LH door open) 0V
48 Door switch (RL) Rear door OFF (rear LH door closed)

Ground Input
(W) signal switch LH
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (rear LH door open) 0V
49 Back door is closed (cargo lamp turns OFF) Battery voltage

Ground Cargo lamp control Output
(L) Back door is opened (cargo lamp turns ON) 0–1V
UNLOCK (Actuator is acti-
50 Door unlock output Battery voltage
Ground Output Back door vated)
(G) (back)
Actuator is not activated 0V
51 Request sw (back Back door re- ON (Pressed) 0 – 1.5 V

Ground Input
(W) door) signal quest switch OFF (Not pressed) Battery voltage
54 OFF (stopped) 0V
Ground Rear wiper output Output Rear wiper
(R) ON (activated) Battery voltage

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-38 2014 Note
BCM
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
55 Door unlock output Battery voltage B
Ground Output Rear doors vated)
(G) (RR, RL)
Interior room lamp battery saver timed out 0V
56 C
Ground Battery saver output Output Except when interior room lamp battery sav-
(W) Battery voltage
er timed out
57 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Push-button ignition switch OFF Battery voltage D
(Y) ply
58 Air bag deployment
— Input — — —
(O) information
E
Ground Output Front RH door vated)
(G) (AS)
F
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
G
60 Flasher output Push-button ig-
Ground Output
(V) (LEFT) nition switch ON Turn signal switch LH
H
PKIC6370E
6.5 V
I
Turn signal switch OFF 0V
J
61 Flasher output Push-button ig-
Ground Output
(W) (RIGHT) nition switch ON Turn signal switch RH
K
PKIC6370E
6.5 V L
63 Interior room OFF Battery voltage
Ground Room lamp control Output
(R) lamp ON 0 – 1.0 V
LOCK (Actuator is activat- BCS
65 Battery voltage
Ground Door lock output Output All doors ed)
(SB)
N
Ground Output Front LH door vated)
(G) (DR)
O
67
Ground Ground Output Push-button ignition switch ON 0V
(B)
68 Power window pow-
Ground Output Push-button ignition switch ON Battery voltage P
(L) er supply (IGN)
70 Battery power sup-
Ground Input Push-button ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(G) ply
75 Request sw (DR) Driver door re- ON (Pressed) 0 – 1.5 V

Ground Input
(GR) signal quest switch OFF (Not pressed) Battery voltage

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-39 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
76 Push-button ig- START pressed 0 – 1.5 V

Ground Engine start sw Input
(L) nition switch Not pressed Battery voltage
Intelligent Key not in an-

tenna detection area
(Approx. 2 m)
Push-button ig- JMKIA5954GB

nition switch ON
78
Ground Door antenna (DR) + Output Driver door re-
(P)
quest switch
pressed
Intelligent Key in antenna

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

(Approx. 2 m)

nition switch ON
79
Ground Door antenna (DR) - Output Driver door re-
(V)
quest switch
pressed

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

(Approx. 2 m)

nition switch ON
80
Ground Door antenna (AS) + Output Passenger door
(LG)
request switch
pressed

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-40 2014 Note
BCM
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

tenna detection area C
(Approx. 2 m)
81
nition switch ON D
Ground Door antenna (AS) - Output Passenger door
(Y)
request switch
pressed
E
detection area
(80 cm or less)
F
JMKIA5955GB
Intelligent Key not in an- H

(Approx. 2 m)

I
nition switch ON
82 Outside key antenna
Ground Output Back door re-
(W) (rear bumper) +
quest switch
pressed J

detection area
K
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB
L
BCS
(Approx. 2 m)
N
When the back JMKIA5954GB
door request
83 Outside key antenna
Ground Output switch is operat-
(B) (rear bumper) -
ed with push-
O
button ignition
switch ON
Intelligent Key in antenna P
detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-41 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB
84 Inside key antenna Push-button ig-

Ground Output
(P) (instrument center) + nition switch ON

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

Ground Output
(L) (instrument center) - nition switch ON

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

Ground Output
(G) (console) + nition switch ON

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-42 2014 Note
BCM
Input/ Condition
+ − Output

tenna detection area C
(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB

D
Ground Output
(R) (console) - nition switch ON
E
detection area
(80 cm or less)
F
JMKIA3839GB
Intelligent Key not in an- H

(Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5951GB
I
Ground Output
(V) (trunk room) + nition switch ON
J

detection area
K
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB
L
BCS
(Approx. 2 m)
N
JMKIA5951GB

Ground Output
(LG) (trunk room) - nition switch ON O
Intelligent Key in antenna P

detection area
(80 cm or less)
JMKIA3839GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-43 2014 Note
BCM
(Wire color) Value
Input/ Condition
+ − Output
Push-button ignition Push-button ig- ON Battery voltage
90
Ground switch illumination Output nition switch il-
(W) OFF 0 – 1.5 V
power supply lumination
91 ACC/ON indicator Push-button ig- OFF Battery voltage

Ground Output
(V) lamp nition switch ACC or ON 0 – 1.5 V
93 Intelligent Key warn- Intelligent Key Sounding 0 – 1.5 V

Ground Output
(R) ing buzzer warning buzzer Not sounding Battery voltage
96 Accessory relay Ignition Push- OFF 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Output
(SB) control button switch ACC or ON Battery voltage
Selector lever in P (Park)
Battery voltage
or N (Neutral) position
97 Push-button ig-
Ground Starter relay control Output Selector lever not in P
(R/Y) nition switch ON
(Park) or N (Neutral) posi- 0 – 0.5 V
tion
98 Ignition relay (IPDM Push-button ig- OFF or ACC Battery voltage

Ground Output
(O) E/R) control nition switch ON 0 – 0.5 V
99 Ignition relay (F/B) Push-button ig- OFF or ACC 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Output
(GR) control nition switch ON Battery voltage
100 Request sw (AS) Passenger door ON (Pressed) 0 – 1.5 V

Ground Input
(L) signal request switch OFF (Not pressed) Battery voltage
OFF (clutch pedal is not
0V
101 Clutch interlock Clutch interlock depressed)
Ground Input
(V) switch switch ON (clutch pedal is de-
Battery voltage
pressed)
Selector lever in P (Park)
Battery voltage
or N (Neutral) position
102
Ground P/N position Input Selector lever Selector lever not in P
(BR)
(Park) or N (Neutral) posi- 0 – 1.5 V
tion
CVT shift selector
104 (park position
Ground Output Push-button ignition switch ON 9 – 16 V
(V) switch) power sup-
ply
105
Ground Stop lamp switch 2 Input Push-button ignition switch OFF Battery voltage
(SB)
106 Push-button ig- OFF or ACC 0 – 0.5 V

Ground Blower relay control Output
(Y) nition switch ON Battery voltage
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009567537
BCM performs fail-safe control when the following DTCs are detected.

B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC
B2195: ANTI SCANNING Inhibit engine cranking Ignition switch ON → OFF
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP Inhibit engine cranking Erase DTC

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-44 2014 Note
BCM
A
When the following CAN signal status (vehicle speed signal) becomes
consistent
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED —
• Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
• Vehicle speed signal (Meter) B
500 ms after the following signal reception status becomes consistent
B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL — • Park position switch signal
• P range signal (CAN)
C
5 seconds after the following BCM recognition conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch is in the ON position
B2602: SHIFT P DIAG — • Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or ex-
cept P position (9 – 16 V) D
• Vehicle speed: 4 km/h (2.5 MPH) or more
• Status 1 E
- Park position switch signal: P position (push selector button) or ex-
B2603: SHIFT POSITION — - P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V) F
• Status 2
- Park position switch signal: P position (release selector button) (0 –
1.5 V) G
- P/N position signal: P or N positions (9 – 16 V)
• Status 1 H
B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN — - Shift position signal (CAN): P or N position
• Status 2 I
- P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V)
- Shift position signal (CAN): Except P and N position
J
• Status 1
B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM — - P/N position signal: Except P and N positions (0 – 1.5 V) K
• Status 2
L
500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes con-
sistent
B2608: STARTER RELAY Inhibit engine cranking
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN) BCS
When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
B260F: ECM CAN COMM Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN) N
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
O
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON Inhibit engine cranking • Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
P
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON Inhibit engine cranking • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF Inhibit engine cranking • Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-45 2014 Note
BCM
Inhibit engine cranking
B26F7: BCM by Intelligent Key sys- When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
tem
U0415: VDC CAN CIR2 — When vehicle speed signal (Meter) (CAN) is received normally
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000009567538
If more than one DTC is displayed at the same time, perform inspections based on the following priority chart.
Priority DTC
1 B2562: LOW VOLTAGE
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
• B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
3
• B2195: ANTI SCANNING
• B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
• B2555: STOP LAMP CIRCUIT
• B2556: ENG START SW
• B2557: VEHICLE SPEED
• B2562: LOW VOLTAGE
• B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL
• B2602: SHIFT P DIAG
• B2603: SHIFT POSITION
• B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN
• B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM
• B2608: STARTER RELAY
• B260F: ECM CAN COMM
• B2614: ACC RELAY REQ FB
• B2615: IGN RELAY3 REQ FB
4
• B261A: ENGINE SW
• B261F: ASCD CANCEL SW
• B2620: NEUTRAL SW
• B26E8: CLUTCH SW
• B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
• B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
• B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
• B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
• B26F6: BCM
• B26F7: BCM
• B26FB: CLUTCH SWITCH
• B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION
• U0415: VDC CAN CIR2
• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA 1
5 • B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA 2
• B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA 3
• B2626: OUTSIDE 1 ANTENNA
6 • B2627: OUTSIDE 2 ANTENNA
• B2628: OUTSIDE 3 ANTENNA
NOTE:
The details of time display are as follows.
• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.
• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.
IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-46 2014 Note
BCM
Freeze Frame Data
•Vehicle Speed Intelligent Key A
CONSULT display Fail-safe Reference page
•Odo/Trip Meter warning lamp ON
•Vehicle Condition
No DTC is detected. B
further testing — — — —
may be required.
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT — — — BCS-57
C
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN) — — — BCS-58
U0415: VDC CAN CIR2 × — × BCS-59
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM × — — SEC-65 D
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM × — — SEC-66
B2195: ANTI SCANNING × — — SEC-67
E
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP × — — SEC-68
B2555: STOP LAMP CIRCUIT — × × SEC-71
B2556: ENG START SW — × × SEC-74 F
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED × × × SEC-76
B2562: LOW VOLTAGE — × — BCS-60
G
B2601: SHIFT P SIGNAL × × × SEC-77
B2602: SHIFT P DIAG × × × SEC-79
B2603: SHIFT POSITION × × × SEC-82 H
B2604: SHIFT PN DIAG CAN × × × SEC-86
B2605: SHIFT PN DIAG IPDM × × × SEC-89
B2608: STARTER RELAY × × × SEC-91 I
B260F: ECM CAN COMM × × × SEC-93
B2614: ACC RELAY REQ FB — × × PCS-53
J
B2615: IGN RELAY3 REQ FB — × × PCS-55
B2616: IGN RELAY2 REQ FB — × × PCS-57
B2618: IGN RELAY1 REQ FB — × × PCS-59 K
B261A: ENGINE SW — × × PCS-61
B261F: ASCD CANCEL SW — × × SEC-94
L
B2620: NEUTRAL SW — × × SEC-97
B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA 1 — × — DLK-54
B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA 2 — × — DLK-56 BCS
B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA 3 — × — DLK-58
B2626: OUTSIDE 1 ANTENNA — × — DLK-60
N
B26E8: CLUTCH SW × × × SEC-100 O
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF × × × PCS-63
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON × × × PCS-65
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON × × × SEC-103 P
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF × × × SEC-104
B26F6: BCM — × × PCS-67
B26F7: BCM × × × SEC-105
B26FB: CLUTCH SWITCH — × × SEC-106
B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION — × × SEC-107

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-47 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
BCM
AAMWA0775GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-48 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BCS
AAMWA0776GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-49 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAMWA0777GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-50 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BCS
AAMIA1688GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-51 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAMIA1689GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-52 2014 Note
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BCS
AAMIA1690GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-53 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM)
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description
INFOID:0000000009567541
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replace-
ment.
NOTE:
ing BCM.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
• When replacing BCM, you must perform “After Replace ECU” with CONSULT.
- Complete the procedure of “After Replace ECU” in order.
- If you set incorrect “After Replace ECU”, incidents might occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS).
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Proce-
dure INFOID:0000000009567542
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

CONSULT
Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration" and perform “Before Replace ECU” to save or print current vehicle
specification.
NOTE:
If “Before Replace ECU” cannot be used, use the "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configuration" after replac-
ing BCM.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
CONSULT
1. Enter "Re/Programming, Configuration".
2. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was performed, automatically an "Operation Log Selection" screen will
be displayed. Select the applicable file from the "Saved Data List" and press “Confirm” to write vehicle
specification. Refer to BCS-54, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) :
Work Procedure".
3. If “Before Replace ECU” operation was not performed, select "After Replace ECU" or "Manual Configura-
tion" to write vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-54, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CON-
TROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 4.
4.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS)
Perform BCM initialization. (NATS)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-54 2014 Note
>> Work End.
CONFIGURATION (BCM) A
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description INFOID:0000000009567543
B
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing BCM.
Configuration has three functions as follows:
Function Description C
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current BCM.
"Before Replace ECU"
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
"After Replace ECU" Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
D
"Select Saved Data List" Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
CAUTION: E
• When replacing BCM, you must perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" with CON-
SULT.
• Complete the procedure of “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" in order.
• If you set incorrect “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU", incidents might occur. F
• Never perform “Select Saved Data List” or "After Replace ECU" except for new BCM.
G
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure INFOID:0000000009567544
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION H

CONSULT
Select “Reprogramming, Configuration” of BCM.
I
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.
When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “SAVED DATA LIST” J
CONSULT
Automatically “Operation Log Selection” window will display if “Before Replace ECU” was performed. Select
applicable file from the “Save Data List” and press “Confirm”. K
>> Work End. L
3.PERFORM “AFTER REPLACE ECU” OR “MANUAL CONFIGURATION”

CONSULT BCS
1. Select “After Replace ECU” or “Manual Configuration”.
2. Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to BCS-56, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configura-
tion list".
N
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct. O
4. Select “Next”.
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “Next”, confirm each setting value and press “OK” even if the indicated con- P
figuration of brand new BCM is same as the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is
set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
5. When "Completed", select "End".
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-55 2014 Note
Confirm that each function controlled by BCM operates normally.
>> Work End.

CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list INFOID:0000000009567545
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. Incorrect settings may result in abnormal
control of ECU.
SETTING ITEM
Items Setting value
TRANSMISSION AT with ABS ⇔ MT with ABS
BLOWE FAN SIG MODE1 ⇔ MODE2
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-56 2014 Note
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B
Refer to LAN-6, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description".
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000009567547 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
U1000 can be set if a module harness was disconnected and reconnected, perhaps during a repair. Confirm
that there are actual CAN diagnostic symptoms and a present DTC by performing the Self Diagnostic Result
procedure.
E
In CAN communication system, any item (or
items) of the following listed below is malfunc- F
tioning.
When any listed module cannot communicate • Transmission
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
with CAN communication signal continuously for • Receiving (ECM)
[U1000] G
2 seconds or more with ignition switch ON • Receiving (ABS)
• Receiving (METER/M&A)
• Receiving (TCM)
• Receiving (IPDM E/R) H
1. PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 second or more.

2. Check “SELF- DIAG RESULTS”.
J
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Perform CAN Diagnosis as described in DIAGNOSIS section of CONSULT Operation Manual.
K
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-57 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

CONTROL UNIT (CAN) BCM detected internal CAN communication cir-
BCM
[U1010] cuit malfunction.
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM.
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-58 2014 Note
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
A

NOTE:
• If DTC U0415 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-57, "DTC Logic". C
• If DTC U0415 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-58, "DTC Logic".
CONSULT Display DTC Detection Condition Probable Cause D

When the vehicle speed signal received from the • ABS system
VDC CAN CIR2
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) re- • Combination meter system
[U0415]
mains abnormal for 2 seconds or more. • CAN bus harness E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1. DTC CONFIRMATION F
1. Erase the DTC.
3. Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT, after the ignition switch has been turned ON for 2 G
seconds or more.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-46, "DTC Index". H
I
1. ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of ABS with CONSULT. Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT Function (ABS)".
J
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
K
2. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
CIRCUIT
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) power and ground. Refer to BRC-42, "Diagnosis Proce- L
dure".
YES >> GO TO 3. BCS
3. COMBINATION METER SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT N
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of METER M&A with CONSULT. Refer to MWI-15, "CONSULT Function".
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis related to the detected DTC. Refer to MWI-20, "DTC Index". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-59 2014 Note
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

LOW VOLTAGE When the power supply voltage to BCM remains • Harness or connector (power supply circuit)
[B2562] less than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or more • Vehicle battery

1. DTC CONFIRMATION
1. Erase DTC.
3. Perform the Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT, after the ignition switch has been turned ON
for 120 seconds or more.
YES >> Refer to BCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

Check battery voltage.
Is battery voltage less than 8.8V?
YES >> Charge battery and retest. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3. BCM SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Perform Self Diagnostic Result of BCM with CONSULT. Refer to BCS-24, "BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
BCM)".
Is DTC B2562 CRNT?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-60 2014 Note
A
B
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BCS-48, "Wiring Diagram".
C
1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not blown.
D
Terminal No. Signal name Fuses and fusible link No.
57 12 (10A)
Battery power supply E
70 G (40A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit. F
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector M99. G
2. Check voltage between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM
H
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
57
M99 — Battery voltage I
70
YES >> GO TO 3. J
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT K
Check continuity between BCM connector M99 and ground.
BCM L
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M99 67 — Yes
BCS
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-61 2014 Note
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
1.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and combination switch connector.
Combination switch BCM Combination switch

Continuity
signal Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
INPUT 1 36 11
INPUT 2 35 9
INPUT 3 M18 34 M28 7 Yes
INPUT 4 33 10
INPUT 5 32 13
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check for continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Combination switch BCM

Continuity
signal Connector Terminal
INPUT 1 36
INPUT 2 35 Ground
INPUT 3 M18 34 No
INPUT 4 33
INPUT 5 32
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-62 2014 Note
Terminals A
(+) (−)
BCM signal Voltage
BCM
B
Connector Terminal
OUTPUT 1 36
OUTPUT 2 35 Ground C
Refer to BCS-28, "Refer-
OUTPUT 3 M18 34
ence Value".
OUTPUT 4 33
D
OUTPUT 5 32
YES >> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-68, "Removal and Installation". E
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-63 2014 Note
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

2. Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and combination switch connector.
Combination switch BCM Combination switch

Continuity
signal Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
OUTPUT 1 6 12
OUTPUT 2 5 14
OUTPUT 3 M18 4 M28 5 Yes
OUTPUT 4 3 2
OUTPUT 5 2 8
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check for continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Combination switch BCM

Continuity
signal Connector Terminal
OUTPUT 1 6
OUTPUT 2 5 Ground
OUTPUT 3 M18 4 No
OUTPUT 4 3
OUTPUT 5 2
YES >> Repair harness or connectors.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM and combination switch connectors.
2. Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunctioning.
3. Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-64 2014 Note
Terminals A
(+) (−)
BCM signal Voltage
BCM
B
Connector Terminal
INPUT 1 6
INPUT 2 5 Ground C
Refer to BCS-28, "Refer-
INPUT 3 M18 4
ence Value".
INPUT 4 3
D
INPUT 5 2
Yes >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". E
No >> Replace combination switch. Refer to BCS-68, "Removal and Installation".
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-65 2014 Note
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
1. Perform the data monitor of CONSULT to check for any malfunctioning item.
2. Check the malfunction combinations.
Malfunction item: ×
Data monitor item
HEAD LAMP SW 1
HEAD LAMP SW 2
RR WASHER SW
FR WASHER SW
TURN SIGNAL R
TURN SIGNAL L
FR WIPER LOW
TAIL LAMP SW
RR WIPER INT
RR WIPER ON
FR WIPER INT
PASSING SW
FR WIPER HI
INT VOLUME
HI BEAM SW
FR FOG SW
Malfunction combination
A × × × ×
B × × × ×
C × × × ×
D × × ×
E × × ×
F × × ×
G × × × ×
H × ×
I × × × ×
J × × × ×
K All Items
L If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K
3. Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part.
Malfunction
Malfunctioning part Repair or replace
combination
A Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit
B Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit
Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning
C Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit
part. Refer to BCS-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit
E Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit
F Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit
G Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit
Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunction-
H Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit
ing part. Refer to BCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit
J Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit
K BCM Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
L Combination switch Replace the combination switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-66 2014 Note
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
B
REMOVAL
CAUTION: C
Before replacing BCM, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to BCS-55, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description".
1. Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
D
"Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove screws (A) and remove the BCM (1) from the steering E
member and position aside.
: Front
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the BCM.
F
5. Remove relays from relay bracket.
6. Remove relay bracket from BCM to transfer to new BCM.
G
ALMIA0656ZZ
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
• Perform “CONFIGURATION (BCM)” when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-54, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE
WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description".
• Make sure to perform the system initialization (NATS) when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-54, "ADDI-
TIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure". J
• When replacing BCM, if new BCM does not come with keyfobs attached, all existing keyfobs must be
re-registered.
K
BCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-67 2014 Note
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not use air or electric tools when removing or installing the combination switch.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
2. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, "Removal and Installation".
3. Rotate steering wheel clockwise to access first combination
switch screw (A) and remove.
ALMIA0648ZZ
4. Rotate steering wheel counter-clockwise to access second com-

bination switch screw (A) and remove.
5. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the combination
switch (1) and remove.
ALMIA0649ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
• In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset with the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory with CONSULT.
• If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunc-
tions. Refer to BCS-54, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work
Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BCS-68 2014 Note
BRAKES
BR
A
B
SECTION
BRAKE SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 DISC ROTOR .............................................................15 BR
DISC ROTOR : Inspection .......................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System REAR DRUM BRAKE ....................................... 17
G
BRAKE LINING ..........................................................17
SIONER" ................................................................... 3
BRAKE LINING : Inspection ....................................17
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3
BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing .........................17 H
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3
BRAKE DRUM ...........................................................17
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 BRAKE DRUM : Inspection .....................................17
I
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 19
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 19
J
Exploded View .........................................................19
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 7 Removal and Installation .........................................19
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Inspection and Adjustment ......................................20
K
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 7 BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 21
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 7
FRONT .......................................................................21
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8 FRONT : Exploded View .........................................21 L
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping .......................................22
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 8 FRONT : Removal and Installation ..........................22
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 8 FRONT : Inspection .................................................23 M
BRAKE FLUID ....................................................11 REAR .........................................................................23
Inspection ................................................................ 11 REAR : Exploded View ............................................24
Draining ................................................................... 11 REAR : Hydraulic Piping ..........................................24 N
Refilling ................................................................... 11 REAR : Removal and Installation ............................25
Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 12 REAR : Inspection ...................................................25
O
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................13 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 27
Inspection ................................................................ 13 Exploded View .........................................................27
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................14 P
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................28
Inspection ................................................................ 14
Inspection ................................................................28
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................15
BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE ........ 30
BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 15 Exploded View .........................................................30
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 15 Removal and installation .........................................30
BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing ............................. 15 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................31

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-1 2014 Note
VACUUM LINES ................................................ 32 REAR DRUM BRAKE ....................................... 40
Exploded View ........................................................ 32 Exploded View ........................................................ 40
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 Removal and Installation ......................................... 40
Inspection ............................................................... 32 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 42
Inspection and Adjustment ...................................... 42
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................ 34
BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 34
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 34
(SDS) .......................................................... 44
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 34 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 35 (SDS) ................................................................. 44
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 35 General Specifications ............................................ 44
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 35 Brake Pedal ............................................................ 44
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and In- Check Valve ............................................................ 44
stallation ................................................................. 36 Brake Booster ......................................................... 44
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Front Disc Brake ..................................................... 44
Assembly ................................................................ 37 Rear Drum Brake .................................................... 45

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
BR
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000009364984
J
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. to prevent damage to
windshield. K
M
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000009364985

N
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air. O
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off P
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, inspect the
brake pedal height and play. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the brake caliper and other components.
• Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause
improper operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crow-
foot (A) and torque wrench (B).
• Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction is
detected, replace part with a new one.
• Always connect the battery terminals when moving the vehicle.
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
disc brake rotors, after replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage.
JPFIA0001ZZ
- Front brake pad: Refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection".
- Front disc brake rotor: Refer to BR-15, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection".
- Rear brake lining: refer to BR-17, "BRAKE LINING : Inspection".
- Rear brake drum: BR-17, "BRAKE DRUM : Inspection".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-4 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000009364986
B
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
— Measuring brake pedal height
(J-46532) D
Brake height tool
LFIA0227E
BR
38-PFM92-GYX/5 Turning disc brake rotors
( — )
On-car brake lathe
G
H
ALFIA0092ZZ
Commercial Service Tool INFOID:0000000009364987

1. Flare nut crowfoot Removing and installing brake pipe and J
2. Torque wrench hose flare nuts
a:10 mm (0.39 in) / 12 mm (0.47 in)
NT360 L
Vacuum pump • Air tight
• Inspection of check valve
M
N
ZZC1313D

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-5 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Brake caliper wrench (front) Return the piston
NNFIA0040ZZ
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-6 2014 Note
Symptom
×: Applicable
Reference page
Possible cause and
BRAKE
SUSPECTED PARTS

Noise
Shake
Shimmy, Shudder
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Pads or lining damaged BR-15, BR-17
×
Pads or lining uneven wear BR-15, BR-17
×
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Shims damaged BR-15
×
Rotor imbalance BR-15
×
×
Rotor or drum damage BR-15, BR-17
BR-7
BR-15
×
Rotor runout
×
Rotor deformation BR-15
×
Rotor or drum deflection BR-15, BR-17
GETtheMANUALS.org
× BR-15, BR-17
×
Rotor or drum rust

Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
Rotor thickness variation BR-15
×
Drum out of round BR-17
FAX-6 (front axle)

RAX-4 (rear axle)
×
×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION

×
FSU-5 (front suspension)

RSU-4 (rear suspension)
×
×
WT-5 (wheel and tire)

×
TIRE
×
×
WT-4 (wheel and tire)

×
ROAD WHEEL
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
× × DRIVE SHAFT FAX-6 (front axle)
2014 Note
×
STEERING ST-7 (steering system)

×
×
INFOID:0000000009364988
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
C
O
G
M
BR
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INFOID:0000000009364989
INSPECTION
Brake Pedal Height
Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1) and the
brake pedal upper surface.
Brake pedal height : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Pedal".

CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
JPFIA0065ZZ
Stop Lamp Switch

Check the clearance (C) between the brake pedal (1) and the stop
lamp switch (2) threaded end.
Clearance : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Ped-

al".
CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.
JPFIA0866ZZ
ASCD Cancel Switch (if equipped)

Check the clearance (C) between the brake pedal (1) and the ASCD
cancel switch (2) threaded end.
Clearance : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Pedal".

CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.
JPFIA0866ZZ
Brake Pedal Play

Press the brake pedal. Check that brake pedal play does not exist.
Depressed Brake Pedal Height

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-8 2014 Note
BRAKE PEDAL
Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake
pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N A
(50.0 kg-f, 110.2 lb-f) while turning engine ON.
Depressed brake : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Ped- B

pedal height al".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim. C
JPFIA0068ZZ
D
ADJUSTMENT
Brake Pedal Height
1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation". E
2. Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch.
3. Loosen the stop lamp switch 45° counterclockwise.
4. Adjust the brake pedal height with the following procedure. BR
a. Loosen the input rod lock nut (1).
CAUTION:
The threaded end of the input rod (2) must project to the G
inner side (L) of the clevis (3).
JPFIA0003ZZ
b. Rotate the input rod, adjust the brake pedal to the specified J
height (H1).
Brake pedal : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Pedal". K

height
c. Tighten the lock nut. Refer to BR-30, "Exploded View".
L
5. Check the brake pedal play.
JPFIA0279ZZ
M
Stop Lamp Switch

1. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation". N
2. Disconnect the harness connector from stop lamp switch.
3. Loosen the stop lamp switch 45° counterclockwise.
4. Press-fit the stop lamp switch (2) until the stop lamp switch hits O
the brake pedal (1) then tighten 45° clockwise while pulling the
brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
P
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal and stop lamp
switch threaded and must be the specified value.

• The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0866ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-9 2014 Note
BRAKE PEDAL
ASCD Cancel Switch (if equipped)
2. Disconnect the harness connector from ASCD cancel switch.
3. Loosen the ASCD cancel switch 45° counterclockwise.
4. Press-fit the ASCD cancel switch (2) until the ASCD cancel
switch hits the brake pedal (1) then tighten 45° clockwise while
pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the brake pedal and ASCD can-
cel switch threaded and must be the specified value.

• The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0866ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-10 2014 Note
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
A
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL B

• Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified
range between the MAX – MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any brake fluid leaks around the reservoir tank. C
• Check the brake system for any leaks if the fluid level is extremely
low (lower than MIN).
• Check the brake system for fluid leaks if the warning lamp remains
illuminated even after the parking brake is released. D
• Check the reservoir tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust)
and oils other than brake fluid.
E
JPFIA0007ZZ
BRAKE LINE
BR
1. Check brake tubes and hoses for cracks, deterioration or other
damage. Replace any damaged parts.
2. Check for brake fluid leaks by fully depressing brake pedal while
G
engine is running.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part H
if any brake fluid leaks are present.
I
SBR389C
Draining INFOID:0000000009364991
J
CAUTION:
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe
it off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
K
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) or battery
negative terminal before performing work.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
L
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradu-
ally discharge brake fluid.
BRA0007D
O
Refilling INFOID:0000000009364992
CAUTION:
P
negative terminal before performing work.
• Monitor the brake fluid level in the reservoir while performing the air bleeding procedure.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-11 2014 Note
BRAKE FLUID
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank, and
refill with new brake fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubri-
cants".
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the
full stroke, and then release the pedal. Repeat this operation at
intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged.
Then close the bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed.
Repeat the same work on each wheel.
3. Perform the air bleeding procedure. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding
Brake System".
PFIA0403J
Bleeding Brake System INFOID:0000000009364993
CAUTION:
negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding.
• Always use new brake fluid for refilling. Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
3. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
5. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake: Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
• Rear drum brake: Refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 in the following order: Front (RH) brake → front (LH) brake → rear (RH) brake → rear
(LH) brake.
7. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR-
11, "Inspection".
8. Add brake fluid as necessary to keep the brake fluid level within the specified range. Refer to MA-12, "Flu-
ids and Lubricants".
9. Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to
BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-12 2014 Note
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
FLUID LEAKS B
Check for brake fluid leaks from the master cylinder, reservoir tank, and brake tube connections.
BR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-13 2014 Note
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
OPERATION
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a
normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
AIR TIGHT
1. Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine. Then
depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
2. Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 sec-
onds or more.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-14 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection INFOID:0000000009364996
B
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary. C
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-15, "BRAKE PAD : In-

spection". D
BRA0010D
BR
BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing INFOID:0000000009671178
BRAKE BURNISHING G
Burnish contact surfaces between disc brake rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after
refinishing disc brake rotors, replacing disc brake rotors, replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very
low mileage: H
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake pedal does not operate firmly/securely until pads and
disc brake rotor are securely seated.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution. I
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
J
3. Drive without depressing brake pedal for a few minutes to cool the brakes.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc brake rotor are securely seated.
DISC ROTOR K
DISC ROTOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000009364997
L
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc brake rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer M
to BR-15, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection".
Runout
1. Secure the disc brake rotor to the wheel hub with wheel nuts (2 N
points at least).
2. Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to FAX-7, "Inspection". O
3. Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
P
Runout : Refer to BR-44, "Front Disc Brake".
4. Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shift-
ing the disc brake rotor-to-wheel hub installation position by one BRA0013D
hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.

5. Refinish or replace the disc brake rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above
operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-15 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
CAUTION:
If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc brake rotor. Refer
to BR-36, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-44, "Front Disc Brake".

Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc brake rotor using a micrometer.
Replace the disc brake rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit.
Refer to BR-44, "Front Disc Brake".
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-44, "Front

Disc Brake".
Thickness variation (mea- : Refer to BR-44, "Front
sured at 8 positions) Disc Brake".
SBR020B

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-16 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
REAR DRUM BRAKE
A
BRAKE LINING
BRAKE LINING : Inspection INFOID:0000000009364998
B
INSPECTION
Brake Lining C
1. Remove plug from back plate. Refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".
2. Check brake lining wear thickness (A) from an inspection hole
on back plate. Check using a scale if necessary. D
Wear thickness : Refer to BR-45, "Rear Drum Brake".

E
BR
J
JSFIA1039ZZ
BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing INFOID:0000000009671191
K
BRAKE BURNISHING
Burnish contact surfaces between brake lining and brake drum according to the following procedure after
refinishing brake drum, replacing brake drum, replacing brake lining, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mile- L
age:
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake pedal does not operate firmly/securely until brake lin-
M
ing and brake drum are securely seated.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
N
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake pedal for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until brake lining and brake drum are securely seated. O
BRAKE DRUM
BRAKE DRUM : Inspection INFOID:0000000009364999
P
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of brake drum for uneven wear, cracks and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to
BR-40, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
• Make sure the parking brake control is fully released prior to removal of the brake drum.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-17 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
• The rear wheel hub is part of the brake drum.
Brake Drum Inner Diameter
Check inner diameter (B) of the brake drum.
Inner diameter : Refer to BR-45, "Rear Drum Brake".
JPFIA0113ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-18 2014 Note
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL
B
BR
AWFIA0875GB J
1. Snap pin 2. Brake pedal 3. Brake pedal pad

4. Stop lamp switch 5. Clip 6. Clevis pin
K
7. ASCD cancel switch (if equipped)
NOTE:
The CVT brake pedal is shown. The M/T brake pedal is similar. L
REMOVAL M
2. Remove knee bolster. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View". N
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the stop lamp switch.
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the ASCD cancel switch (if equipped).
5. Disconnect the harness connector from the accelerator pedal. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to O
ACC-3, "Removal and Installation".
6. Separate the harness from brake pedal.
7. Rotate the stop lamp switch counter clockwise to remove. P
8. Rotate the ASCD cancel switch (if equipped) counter clockwise to remove.
9. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from clevis.
10. Disconnect the power steering harness connector and position it aside.
11. Remove the brake pedal.
CAUTION:
Support the brake booster and master cylinder to prevent contact with other components.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-19 2014 Note
BRAKE PEDAL
12. Perform the inspection after removal. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the brake pedal if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
already applied)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
• Perform the adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

• Check the brake pedal for damage and cracks on the welded parts, and replace the brake pedal if neces-
sary.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
• Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-
8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform the accelerator pedal released position learning procedure. Refer to EC-113, "Work Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-20 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
BRAKE PIPING
A
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009365003
B
BR
ALFIA0217GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-21 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
1. Master cylinder brake tube (second- 2. Master cylinder brake tube (primary) 3. ABS actuator to brake tube connec-
ary) tor (LH)
4. ABS actuator to brake tube connec- 5. Brake tube connector 6. Front brake tube (RH)
tor (RH)
7. Front brake tube (LH) 8. Brake master cylinder 9. Brake booster
10. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 11. Lock plate 12. Front brake hose
trol unit)
13. Copper sealing washer A. To front brake hose B. To rear brake tube
Front
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000009365004
AWFIA0818GB
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 2. Front disc brake 3. Brake master cylinder
trol unit)
4. Brake booster 5. Brake tube connector 6. Rear drum brake
A. Brake tube B. Brake hose
Flare nut Union bolt
CAUTION:
• All hoses and tubes must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling.
• Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering clockwise and counter-
clockwise.
• The brake system is an important safety system. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble
the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary.
• Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
• When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets in.
FRONT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009365005
CAUTION:
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
ing.
REMOVAL

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-22 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the hose, and remove the A
brake tube.
CAUTION:
• Do not scratch the flare nut and the brake tube. B
• Do not bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and tubes.
3. Remove the union bolt, the copper sealing washers, and the brake hose from the brake caliper.
4. Remove the lock plate and brake hose. C
INSTALLATION
1. Assemble the union bolt (A) and the copper sealing washers (1)
to the brake hose and install it to the caliper. Align the brake D
hose L-pin with the brake caliper hole, and tighten the union bolt
(A) to the specified torque. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded
View". E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper sealing washers.
BR
AWFIA0795ZZ
G
2. Install the brake tube to the brake hose, temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate
further, and secure the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate.
CAUTION: H
• Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Make sure that interference does not exist between the brake hoses and other parts when turn-
ing the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise.
I
3. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
J
4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
5. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, "Exploded View". K
6. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-23, "FRONT : Inspection".
FRONT : Inspection INFOID:0000000009365006 L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interfer- M
ence with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections.
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen N
condition*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in desig-
nated positions.
O
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80.1 kg-f, 176.5 lb-f) and hold down the brake pedal for
approximately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leaks.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged, P
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leaks are present.
REAR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-23 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
REAR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009365007
AWFIA0820GB
1. Rear brake tube (RH) 2. Rear brake tube (LH) 3. Lock plate
4. Rear brake hose 5. Wheel cylinder brake tube A. To rear brake hose
B. To brake tube connector Front
REAR : Hydraulic Piping INFOID:0000000009365008
AWFIA0818GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-24 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 2. Front disc brake 3. Brake master cylinder A
trol unit)
4. Brake booster 5. Brake tube connector 6. Rear drum brake
A. Brake tube B. Brake hose
B
: Flare nut Union bolt
CAUTION:
• All hoses and tubes must be free from excessive bending, twisting and pulling. C
• Make sure there is no interference with other parts when turning steering clockwise and counter-
clockwise.
• The brake system is an important safety system. If a brake fluid leak is detected, always disassemble D
the parts. Replace applicable part with a new one, if necessary.
• Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
• When removing components, cover connections so that no dirt, dust, or other foreign matter gets in.
E
REAR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009365009
BR
CAUTION:
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank. G
NOTE:
ing. H
REMOVAL
I
2. Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the brake hose.
CAUTION:
• Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tube.
• Do not bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake hoses and brake tubes. J
3. Remove the lock plate and remove the brake hose from the vehicle.
4. Loosen the flare nut using a flare nut wrench and separate the brake tube from the wheel cylinder.
Remove the brake tube. K
INSTALLATION
1. Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder. Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not L
rotate further.
2. Connect the brake hose to the brake tube. Temporarily tighten the flare nut by hand until it does not rotate
further. Secure the brake hose to the bracket with the lock plate.
CAUTION: M
• Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Make sure that interference does not exist between the brake hoses and other parts when the
suspension moves. N
3. Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench. Refer to BR-24, "REAR :
Exploded View".
CAUTION: O
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tube.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
P
5. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, "Exploded View".
6. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-25, "REAR : Inspection".
REAR : Inspection INFOID:0000000009365010

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-25 2014 Note
BRAKE PIPING
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness
at connections.
CAUTION:
Clearance with brake hose and each parts being secured more than 10 mm (0.39 in) in unladen
condition*.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in desig-
nated positions.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80.1 kg-f, 176.5 lb-f) and hold down the pedal for approxi-
mately 5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leaks.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leaks are present.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-26 2014 Note
A
BR
I
AWFIA1021ZZ
1. Reservoir cap 2. Brake fluid strainer 3. Reservoir tank J

4. Grommet 5. Brake master cylinder 6. Brake fluid level switch
7. O-ring Apply brake fluid PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or
silicone-based grease
K
CAUTION: L
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
• Do not scratch the piston of brake master cylinder when installing/removing because the piston is M
exposed. Check for any dust on the piston, and wash with brake fluid if needed.
• Hold the brake master cylinder when handing the brake master cylinder. Do not hold the piston
because the piston might become detached if pulled strongly.
NOTE: N
ing.
REMOVAL O
1. Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-70, "Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)".
2. Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
P
3. Position the IPDM E/R aside to obtain access to the brake master cylinder. Refer to PCS-30, "Removal
and Installation".
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the brake fluid level switch.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes from the brake master cylinder using a flare nut wrench.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tubes.
6. Remove nuts and brake master cylinder.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-27 2014 Note
CAUTION:
• Do not bend sharply, twist, or strongly pull out the brake tubes.
• Do not depress the brake pedal after the brake master cylinder is removed.
• The piston of the brake master cylinder is exposed. Do not damage it when removing the brake
master cylinder.
7. Remove and discard the O-ring.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the seal.
• Do not reuse the O-ring.
• Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with new brake fluid
if necessary.
• Check that all brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
• Do not allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank and reser-
voir tank.
• Apply silicone grease to the brake booster (A) as shown when
installing the brake master cylinder to the brake booster.
JPFIA0013ZZ
• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the brake master cylinder by hand. Then tighten it to the spec-
ified torque using a crowfoot and torque wrench. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the flare nut or the brake tubes.
• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
• Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-28, "Inspection".
Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000009365013
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble the brake master cylinder.
• Remove the reservoir tank only when necessary.
Remove the reservoir tank and grommets from the brake master cylinder.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Do not use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and
assembly process.
• Do not drop the parts. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommets and install on brake master cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the grommets.
2. Install the reservoir tank to the brake master cylinder.
INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-28 2014 Note
Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BR-13, "Inspection".
A
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the brake master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection.
• Check for fluid leaks from connections. Refer to BR-23, "FRONT : Inspection". B
CAUTION:
If fluid leaks are present, retighten connections to the specified torque. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT :
Exploded View". Replace components if necessary. C
BR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-29 2014 Note
BRAKE BOOSTER AND CHECK VALVE
AWFIA1022ZZ
1. Brake master cylinder 2. Check valve 3. Brake booster

4. Lock nut 5. Clevis 6. Gasket
Removal and installation INFOID:0000000009365016
CAUTION:
Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
REMOVAL
1. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove battery tray. Refer to PG-70, "Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)".
3. Remove ECM. Refer to EC-338, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove TCM (if equipped). Refer to TM-235, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove vacuum hose from check valve. Refer to BR-32, "Exploded View".
7. Remove knee bolster. Refer to IP-14, "Exploded View".
8. Remove the snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2). Refer to BR-19,
"Exploded View".
9. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal. Refer to BR-
19, "Exploded View".
10. Remove brake booster from dash panel on engine room side.
CAUTION:
Do not deform or bend the brake tubes.
NOTE:
If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake
booster.
11. Remove check valve from brake booster. JPFIA0019ZZ
12. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-31, "Inspection and Adjustment".
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the gasket.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-30 2014 Note
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installa-
tion, the dash panel may damage the threads. A
• Check that all brake tubes are not excessively bent, kinked or twisted.
B
• Set check valve angle (A) as shown.
Check valve angle : 45°

C
• After installation, perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-12, "Bleed-
ing Brake System".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained brake fluid. D
• Perform the inspection after installation. Adjust the brake pedal
height and play if necessary. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and
Adjustment". E
JPFIA0871ZZ
BR
Check Valve Vacuum Inspection
G
1. Check the vacuum using a suitable tool.
When connected to the booster side : Refer to BR-44, "Check Valve".

H
When connected to the vacuum hose side : Refer to BR-44, "Check Valve".
2. If the vacuum still cannot be maintained, replace the check valve.
Input Rod Length Inspection I
1. Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the speci-
fied length (A).
J
Input rod : Refer to BR-44, "Brake Booster".
length
K
2. Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque. Refer to BR-30,
"Exploded View".
L
JPFIA0238ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION M

Inspect the brake booster operation. Refer to BR-14, "Inspection".
Inspect the brake pedal height and play. Adjust it if the measurement is not the standard. Refer to BR-8, N
"Inspection and Adjustment".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-31 2014 Note
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
JSFIA0997ZZ
1. Clamp 2. Vacuum hose 3. Vacuum piping

A. To brake booster B. Paint mark C. To intake manifold
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
INSTALLATION
• When installing vacuum hose, insert until tip reaches the back-end
of length (A) or further as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
Length : 24 mm (0.94 in) or more

- Face the paint mark of vacuum hose (intake manifold side) upward
to assemble.
- Face the other paint marks of vacuum hose to the vehicle front
side to assemble.
JPFIA0023ZZ

Appearance

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-32 2014 Note
VACUUM LINES
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
A
BR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-33 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
FRONT DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009365021
AWFIA1020ZZ
1. Cylinder body 2. Inner shim 3. Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)
4. Pad return spring 5. Pad retainer 6. Torque member
7. Outer pad 8. Outer shim Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent.
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009365022
WARNING:
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While removing caliper, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
• It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of front disc brake caliper. In this case, hang front disc brake caliper with a wire so as
not to stretch brake hose.
• Do not damage piston boot.
• Keep disc brake rotor and brake pads free from brake fluid and grease.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove sliding pin bolts.
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire in a position so that the brake hose will not stretch. Then
remove the pad return springs, brake pads, shims and pad retainers from the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Do not deform the pad return springs or pad retainers when servicing the brake pads.
• Note the position of the brake pads during removal to aid installation.
4. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection".
INSTALLATION
1. Install the pad retainers to the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Install the pad retainers so that they will not be lifted up from the torque member.
• Do not deform the pad retainers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-34 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
2. Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the to the mating surfaces between the shims and the brake
pads. A
3. Install the brake pads and shims to the torque member.
CAUTION:
• Replace the brake pads and shims if they have been dropped or sustained and impact. B
• If any shim is damaged by corrosion, replace it.
• Always replace shims and brake pads as a set.
4. Install the pad return springs to the brake pads. C
CAUTION:
• Do not deform the pad return springs.
• Correctly insert the pad return spring into the pad return spring hole on the brake pad.
D
5. Install cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION:
When installing new brake pads, check the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake
fluid returns to the reservoir tank when pressing piston in. E
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to press piston into the cylinder body.
6. Install the sliding pin bolts and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE PAD : Exploded BR
View".
7. Depress the brake pedal several times to verify that brake drag does not exist for the front disc brake.
Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". G
8. Install the front wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, "Exploded View".
9. Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection".
H
BRAKE PAD : Inspection INFOID:0000000009365023

I
If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
1. Check drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below: J
a. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
b. Press the piston.
c. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation". K
d. Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
e. Check drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-37, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly". L
2. Burnish the brake pads and disc brake rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
disc brake rotors, after replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-15,
"BRAKE PAD : Brake Burnishing". M
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009365024 N
REMOVAL
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-35 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
JPFIA0510GB
1. Brake caliper
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009365025
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the brake caliper and brake pads with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• While removing caliper, do not depress the brake pedal because the piston will pop out.
• Do not damage piston boot.
off immediately and wash with water if brake fluid spills on painted surfaces.
• Keep disc brake rotor free from brake fluid.
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove union bolt and disconnect brake hose from brake caliper. Discard the copper sealing washers.
3. Remove bolts and torque member including brake caliper.
4. Remove disc brake rotor. If reusing the disc brake rotor, apply matching marks on the wheel hub and disc
brake rotor to aid installation.
CAUTION:
Put matching marks on the wheel hub and disc brake rotor, if it is necessary to remove disc brake
rotor.
INSTALLATION
1. Install disc brake rotor, align the matching marks if installing the original disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
• Replace the disc brake rotor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
• Align the marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub at the time of installation when reusing disc
brake rotor.
2. Install the torque member including brake caliper to the steering knuckle and tighten the torque member
bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Replace the torque member if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-36 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
• Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and torque
member, and bolts. A
3. Install brake hose to brake caliper with new copper sealing
washers (1). Tighten union bolt (A) to the specified torque. Refer
to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View". B
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse copper sealing washers.
C
D
AWFIA0795ZZ
4. Refill reservoir tank with new brake fluid and bleed air from the brake hydraulic system. Refer to BR-12, E
"Bleeding Brake System".
5. Install the front wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, "Exploded View".
6. Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection". BR
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly INFOID:0000000009365026
DISASSEMBLY G
AWFIA1018ZZ
M
1. Cap 2. Bleeder valve 3. Cylinder body
4. Piston seal 5. Piston 6. Piston boot
7. Sliding pin 8. Sliding pin boot 9. Bushing N
10. Torque member Apply Syntheso® GLK 1 grease or Apply clean brake fluid
equivalent.
WARNING: O
Clean dust on brake caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of air-
borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: P
• While removing brake caliper, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
• Do not damage the piston boot.
NOTE:
• The front brake caliper (LH) is shown. The front brake caliper (RH) is similar.
• Do not remove the pad return springs, brake pads, and pad retainers from the torque member when disas-
sembling and assembling the brake caliper.
DISASSEMBLY

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-37 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
1. Remove the sliding pin bolts and the cylinder body from the torque member.
2. Remove the sliding pins and the sliding pin boots.
3. Remove the bushing from the sliding pin.
4. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt
mounting hole to remove piston and piston boot.
WARNING:
Do not get fingers caught between the piston and wooden
block.
MAA0272D
5. Remove piston seal from cylinder body using suitable tool.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
6. Remove bleeder valve and cap.
7. Perform inspection after disassembly.
JPFIA0738ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Brake Caliper
Check the inner wall of brake caliper for corrosion, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
CAUTION:
Clean the brake caliper using new brake fluid. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member
Check torque member for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace as necessary.
Piston
Check the piston surface for corrosion, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
CAUTION:
The piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pins, Sliding Pin Bolts, Sliding Pin Boot
Check the sliding pins, sliding pin bolts, and sliding pin boots for wear, damage, and cracks. Replace as nec-
essary.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal (1), and install to
groove in cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seal.
JPFIA0039ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-38 2014 Note
FRONT DISC BRAKE
3. Apply Syntheso® GLK 1 grease or equivalent to piston boot (1).
Cover the piston (2) end with new piston boot, and then install A
cylinder side lip on piston boot securely into a groove on cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
B
Do not reuse piston boot.
JPFIA0739ZZ
D
4. Push piston (1) into cylinder body by hand and push piston boot
(2) piston-side lip into the piston groove.
CAUTION:
E
Press the piston evenly and vary the pressing point to pre-
vent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
BR
G
JPFIA0034ZZ
5. Apply rubber grease to the mating surfaces (A) of the sliding pin
H
(1) and the bushing (2).
6. Install the bushing to the sliding pin.
I
JPFIA0836ZZ
K
7. Apply rubber grease to the mating surfaces of the sliding pins
(1) and the sliding pin boots (2).
8. Install the sliding pins and sliding pin boots to the torque mem- L
ber (3).
N
JPFIA0837ZZ
9. Install the cylinder body to the torque member with the sliding pin bolts. Refer to BR-34, "BRAKE PAD : O
Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-39 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
REAR DRUM BRAKE
AWFIA1019ZZ
1. Shoe hold pin 2. Back plate 3. Plug

4. Brake shoe 5. Retainer 6. Upper spring
7. Adjuster 8. Return spring 9. Brake drum
10. Boot 11. Piston 12. Piston cup
13. Spring 14. Wheel cylinder 15. Bleeder valve
16. Cap
1: Apply Syntheso® GLEP1 grease or equivalent.
2: Apply Molyguard GS 2039 grease or equivalent.
: Apply clean brake fluid
WARNING:
compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Do not depress the brake pedal while removing the brake drum because the pistons may pop out.
GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-40 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
• Do not drop the removed parts.
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on the brake drum. A
NOTE:
ing.
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the brake drum. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation". C
NOTE:
• Make sure the parking brake is fully released prior to removal of the brake drum.
• The rear wheel hub is part of the brake drum. D
3. Remove the retainers (1) by pushing them inward toward the
vehicle and rotating. This will release the shoe hold pins, brake
shoes, each retainer, and adjuster. E
CAUTION:
Do not damage the wheel cylinder boots.
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from operating lever.
CAUTION: BR
Do not bend the operating lever.
G
JSFIA0636ZZ
5. Disassemble the brake shoes, each spring, and adjuster. H

6. Remove the wheel cylinder using the following procedure:
a. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder.
b. Remove the two bolts and wheel cylinder from back plate. I
7. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-42, "Inspection
and Adjustment".
J
JSFIA1056ZZ K
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Replace the parts if they have been dropped or sustained an impact. L
• Do not damage the wheel cylinder.
Installation is in the reverse of removal. M
• Check the difference between left and right adjuster.
: Front
N
Adjuster Direction
Left side Left screw
Right side Right screw O
• Shorten the length of the adjuster by rotating it.
• For grease type and placement, refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".
P
JPFIA0904ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-41 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
• Check drum brake components for proper installation.
• Check the brake shoe linings and brake drum inner surface for
grease. Make sure that grease does not contact the lining material
or drum inner surface.
• Perform the air bleeding after installing a new or rebuilt wheel cyl-
inder. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Step on the brake pedal several times after installing the brake
drum.
• Perform the inspection after installation. Refer to BR-42, "Inspec-
tion and Adjustment".
JSFIA0637ZZ
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove boots from wheel cylinder. Refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".
2. Remove pistons, piston cups and spring from wheel cylinder.
CAUTION:
Pull the pistons out from the wheel cylinder to prevent the wheel cylinder inner wall from being
damaged.
3. Remove piston cups from pistons.
4. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-42, "Inspection and Adjustment".
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply clean brake fluid to the new piston cups (1) and pistons
(3).
2. Apply Syntheso® GLEP1 grease or equivalent to boots (2).
3. Install piston cups and new boots to pistons (3).
CAUTION:
• Do not mistake the direction of pistons.
• Do not reuse piston cups and boots.
4. Apply clean brake fluid to wheel cylinder inner wall, and install
spring and pistons into wheel cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the wheel cylinder inner wall. JPFIA0915ZZ
5. Install boots to wheel cylinder. Refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".

6. Perform inspection after assembly. Refer to BR-42, "Inspection and Adjustment".

• Check the brake shoe lining for excessive wear, damage, and peeling.
• Check each spring for settling, excessive wear, damage, and rust.
• Check the adjuster for smoothness, and check it for excessive wear, damage, and rust.
• Check the back plate for damage, cracks, and deformation.
• Check the wheel cylinder for cracks, damage, and leaks.
• Visually check the brake drum for excessive wear, cracks, and damage.
• Check the wheel cylinder inner wall for excessive wear, cracks, and damage.
• Check the pistons for excessive wear and damage.
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
Check that the pistons move smoothly.
1. Check that the drum brake component parts are installed properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-42 2014 Note
REAR DRUM BRAKE
2. Rotate the brake drum and check that there is no drag. Perform the following procedure if necessary:
a. Remove the brake shoes. Refer to BR-40, "Removal and Installation". A
b. Push the pistons.
CAUTION:
Push both side of the piston simultaneously. B
c. Install the brake shoes. Refer to BR-40, "Removal and Installation".
3. Inspect and adjust the parking brake. Refer to PB-4, "Inspection and Adjustment".
4. Check drag of rear drum brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the wheel cylinder and replace if C
necessary. Refer to BR-42, "Disassembly and Assembly".
5. Perform brake burnishing. Refer to BR-17, "BRAKE LINING : Brake Burnishing".
D
BR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-43 2014 Note
General Specifications INFOID:0000000009365031
Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder bore diameter 54.025 (2.13)

Front brake Pad length × width × thickness 115.0 × 42.0 × 9.0 (4.53 × 1.654 × 0.354)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness 260 × 22.0 (10.24 × 0.87)
Cylinder bore diameter 19.05 (3/4)
Trailing: 172 × 37 × 4.8 (6.77 × 1.46 × 0.19)
Rear brake Lining length × width × thickness
Leading: 155 × 37 × 4.8 (6.10 ×1.46 × 0.19)
Drum inner diameter - new 203.2 (8.00)
Master cylinder Cylinder bore diameter 22.23 (0.875)
Control valve Valve type Electric brake force distribution
Brake booster Diaphragm diameter 255 (10)
Recommended brake fluid Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000009365032
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Brake pedal height 158 ±5 (6.22 ±0.20)
Clearance between brake pedal lever and the stop lamp switch threaded end 0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.077)
Brake pedal full stroke 128 (5.04)
Check Valve INFOID:0000000009641742
Vacuum applied at intake manifold side. 0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg)

Vacuum leakage
[at vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) applied at Within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds.
booster side.]
Brake Booster INFOID:0000000009365033
Unit: mm (in)
Item Standard
Input rod length 125 (4.92)
Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000009365034
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake pad Wear thickness 2.0 (0.08)
Wear thickness 20.0 (0.787)
Disc rotor Thickness variation (measured at 8 positions) 0.013 (0.001)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle) 0.055 (0.002)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-44 2014 Note
Rear Drum Brake INFOID:0000000009365035
A
Unit: mm (in)
Item Limit
Brake lining Wear thickness 1.0 (0.04) B
Brake drum Wear inner diameter- maximum 204.2 (8.04)
BR

GETtheMANUALS.org
BR-45 2014 Note
BRAKES
BRC
A
B
SECTION
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
ABS ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 22 BRC
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
(CONTROL UNIT) ............................................. 22 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Reference Value ......................................................22
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Fail-safe ...................................................................24
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................25
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 H
DTC Index ...............................................................26
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3
Precaution for Brake Control System ........................ 4 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 27
Precaution for Harness Repair .................................. 4 I
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................... 27
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 Wiring Diagram ........................................................27
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 34 J

Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 34
Work Flow ................................................................34 K
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................35
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 36

Component Parts Location ........................................ 6 L
Component Description ............................................. 7 C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SEN-
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ........... 7 SOR ................................................................... 36
Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor .............................. 7 DTC Logic ................................................................36 M
Stop Lamp Switch ..................................................... 8 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
Brake Fluid Level Switch ........................................... 8
Parking Brake Switch ................................................ 8 C1105, C1106, C1107, C1108 WHEEL SEN-
SOR ................................................................... 40 N
SYSTEM .............................................................. 9 DTC Logic ................................................................40
ABS .............................................................................. 9 O
ABS : System Diagram ............................................. 9 C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM ........ 42
ABS : System Description ......................................... 9 DTC Logic ................................................................42
ABS : ABS Function ................................................ 14 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................42
ABS : EBD Function ................................................ 15 P
ABS : Fail-safe ........................................................ 16 C1110 CONTROL FAILURE ............................. 44
DTC Logic ................................................................44
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................44
AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)] ........19
CONSULT Function (ABS) ...................................... 19 C1111 PUMP MOTOR ...................................... 45
DTC Logic ................................................................45

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-1 2014 Note
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45 EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION
FREQUENCY ..................................................... 63
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]... 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63
DTC Logic ............................................................... 47
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47 UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION .................. 64
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE
SYSTEM ............................................................. 49 THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG ............... 65
DTC Logic ............................................................... 49 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 65
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .......... 66
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 66
VALVE SYSTEM ................................................ 51
DTC Logic ............................................................... 51 PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51 SOUND OCCURS .............................................. 67
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL ................................... 53
DTC Logic ............................................................... 53 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 68
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 Description .............................................................. 68
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM ............... 54 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 69

DTC Logic ............................................................... 54
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54 WHEEL SENSOR .............................................. 69
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 56 FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ........................................ 69

FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ........... 69
DTC Logic ............................................................... 56
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Instal-
lation ....................................................................... 69
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 57
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ........................................... 70
Description .............................................................. 57
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View ............. 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 57
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa-
tion .......................................................................... 70
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH .............................. 58
SENSOR ROTOR .............................................. 72
Component Function Check ................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58 FRONT SENSOR ROTOR ........................................ 72
Component Inspection ............................................ 59 FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Instal-
lation ....................................................................... 72
ABS WARNING LAMP ...................................... 60
Component Function Check ................................... 60 REAR SENSOR ROTOR ........................................... 72
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60 REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installa-
tion .......................................................................... 72
BRAKE WARNING LAMP ................................. 61
Component Function Check ................................... 61 ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61 (CONTROL UNIT) .............................................. 73
Exploded View ........................................................ 73
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 62 Removal and Installation ......................................... 73
ABS .................................................................... 62
Symptom Table ...................................................... 62

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [ABS]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
BRC
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Brake System INFOID:0000000009619484
J
WARNING:
Clean any dust from the front brake and rear brake using a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow by
compressed air. K
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Do not spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off L
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each
item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value. M
• Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench. N
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crow-
foot (A) and torque wrench (B).
• Always connect the battery terminal when moving the vehicle.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and O
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work.
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the P
parts.
JPFIA0001ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [ABS]
Precaution for Brake Control System INFOID:0000000009619485
• Just after starting vehicle after ignition switch is ON, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noise may
be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal condition.
• When an error is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from customer
(what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnostic
servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check brake booster operation, brake fluid level and oil
leaks.
• If tire size and type are used in an improper combination or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts, stop-
ping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
• ABS might be out of order or malfunctions by putting a radio (wiring inclusive), an antenna and a lead-in wire
near the control unit.
• If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
- When replacing the following parts with parts other than genuine parts or making modifications: Suspension-
related parts (shock absorber, spring, bushing, etc.), tires, wheels (other than specified sizes), brake-related
parts (pad, rotor, caliper, etc.), engine-related parts (muffler, ECM, etc.) and body reinforcement-related parts
(roll bar, tower bar, etc.).
- When driving with worn or deteriorated suspension, tires and brake-related parts.
• Solder the repair part, and wrap it with tape. [Twisted wire fray
must be 110 mm (4.33 in) or less.]
SKIB8766E
• Do not bypass the repair point with wire. (If it is bypassed, the turn-
out point cannot be separated and the twisted wire characteristics
are lost.)
SKIB8767E

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-4 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [ABS]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
KV991J0080 Checking operation of ABS active wheel sen-
(J-45741) sors D
ABS active wheel sensor tester
WFIA0101E
BRC
G
1. Flare nut crowfoot Removing and installing brake piping
2. Torque wrench a: 10mm (0.39 in)/12mm (0.47 in)
H
S-NT360
Power Tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts J
PIIB1407E L

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-5 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALFIA0360ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-6 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
A Parking brake switch B Combination meter C IPDM E/R A

(view with console removed)
D Brake fluid level switch E ABS actuator and electric unit (con- F Front wheel sensor
(view with IPDM E/R removed) trol unit)
B
G Stop lamp switch H Rear wheel sensor
Component Description INFOID:0000000009365050
No. Component Reference/Function

1 Parking brake switch BRC-8, "Parking Brake Switch" D
2 Combination meter MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter"
3 IPDM E/R PCS-4, "Component Parts Location"
E
4 Brake fluid level switch BRC-8, "Brake Fluid Level Switch"
ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
5 BRC-7, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"
trol unit)
BRC
6 Front wheel speed sensor BRC-7, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor"
7 Stop lamp switch BRC-8, "Stop Lamp Switch"
8 Rear wheel speed sensor BRC-7, "Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor" G
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) INFOID:0000000009365051
H
Electric unit (control unit) is integrated with actuator and comprehensively controls ABS function and EBD
function.
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) I
• Brake fluid pressure is controlled according to signals from each sensor.
• If malfunction is detected, the system enters fail-safe mode.
ACTUATOR J
The following components are integrated with ABS actuator.
Pump
Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure. K
Motor
Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
L
Motor Relay
Operates the motor ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Actuator Relay (Main Relay) M
Operates each valve ON/OFF according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
ABS IN Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according to signals from control unit. N
ABS OUT Valve
Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according to signals from control unit.
O
Return Check Valve
Returns the brake fluid from brake caliper and wheel cylinder to master cylinder by bypassing orifice of each
valve when brake is released.
P
Reservoir
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from brake caliper, so that pressure efficiently decreases when
decreasing pressure of brake caliper and wheel cylinder.
Wheel Sensor and Sensor Rotor INFOID:0000000009365052
NOTE:
• Wheel sensor of front wheel is installed on steering knuckle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-7 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
• Sensor rotor of front wheel is integrated in wheel hub assembly.
• Wheel sensor of rear wheel is installed on back plate of rear brake.
• Sensor rotor of rear wheel is installed on rear brake drum.
• Never measure resistance and voltage value using a tester because sensor is active sensor.
• Downsize and weight reduction is aimed. IC for detection portion
and magnet for sensor rotor are adopted.
• Power supply is supplied to detection portion so that magnetic field
line is read. Magnetic field that is detected is converted to current
signal.
• When sensor rotor rotates, magnetic field changes. Magnetic field
change is converted to current signals (rectangular wave) and is
transmitted to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Change
of magnetic field is proportional to wheel speed.
JPFIC0131GB
Stop Lamp Switch INFOID:0000000009365053
Detects the operation status of brake pedal and transmits converted electric signal to ABS actuator and elec-
tric unit (control unit).
Brake Fluid Level Switch INFOID:0000000009365056
Detects the brake fluid level in reservoir tank and transmits converted electric signal from combination meter to
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
Parking Brake Switch INFOID:0000000009365057
Detects the operation status of parking brake switch and transmits converted electric signal from combination
meter to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-8 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
ABS
ABS : System Diagram INFOID:0000000009365058
B
BRC
I
ALFIA0392GB
ABS : System Description INFOID:0000000009365059 J
• The system switches fluid pressure of each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder to increase, to hold, or to
decrease according to signals from control unit in ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). This control
K
system is applied to ABS and EBD functions.
• Fail-safe function is available for each function and is activated by each function when system malfunction
occurs.
L
INPUT SIGNAL AND OUTPUT SIGNAL
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
Component Signal description M

Transmits the following signals to ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN commu-
nication.
• Brake fluid level switch signal N
• Parking brake switch signal
Combination meter
Receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
munication.
• ABS warning lamp signal O
• Brake warning lamp signal
VALVE OPERATION (ABS AND EBD FUNCTIONS)

P
The control unit built into the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) controls fluid pressure of the brake
calipers by operating each valve.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-9 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Brake Pedal Applied or ABS Function Operating (Pressure Increases)
JSFIA0679GB
Name Not activated During pressure increases

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
Suction valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close)
Each brake caliper and each wheel cylinder
— Pressure increases
(fluid pressure)
Front RH brake caliper

• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front RH brake caliper from
the master cylinder through the ABS IN valve. Brake fluid does not flow into the reservoir because the ABS
OUT valve is closed.
Front LH brake caliper
• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the front LH brake caliper from
Rear RH wheel cylinder
• When the cut valve 2 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear RH wheel cylinder from
Rear LH wheel cylinder
• When the cut valve 1 and the ABS IN valve opens, brake fluid is supplied to the rear LH wheel cylinder from

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-10 2014 Note
SYSTEM
ABS Function Starts Operating (Pressure Holds)
A
BRC
H
JSFIA0680GB
Name Not activated During pressure holds

Cut valve 1 Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is not supplied (open) I
J
ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is not supplied (close) K
— Pressure holds
(fluid pressure)
L

• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front RH brake caliper, master cylinder, and M
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front RH brake caliper.
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the front LH brake caliper, master cylinder, and N
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the front LH brake caliper.
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear RH wheel cylinder, master cylinder, and O
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear RH wheel cylinder.
• Since the ABS IN valve and the ABS OUT valve are closed, the rear LH wheel cylinder, master cylinder, and P
reservoir are blocked. This maintains fluid pressure applied on the rear LH wheel cylinder.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-11 2014 Note
SYSTEM
ABS Function Operating (Pressure Decreases)
JSFIA0681GB
Name Not activated During pressure decreases

ABS IN valve Power supply is not supplied (open) Power supply is supplied (close)
ABS OUT valve Power supply is not supplied (close) Power supply is supplied (open)
— Pressure decreases
(fluid pressure)

• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front RH
brake caliper is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
sent to the master cylinder by the pump.
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the front LH
brake caliper is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear RH
wheel cylinder is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
• Since the ABS IN valve is closed and the ABS OUT valve is opened, fluid pressure applied on the rear LH
wheel cylinder is supplied to the reservoir through the ABS OUT valve. This fluid pressure decreases when
Component Parts and Function

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-12 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Component Function A
Pump Returns the brake fluid reserved in reservoir to master cylinder by reducing pressure.
Motor Activates the pump according to signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
ABS IN valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase or hold according to signals from control unit.
B
ABS OUT valve Switches the fluid pressure line to increase, hold or decrease according to signals from control unit.
Returns the brake fluid from brake caliper and wheel cylinder to master cylinder by bypassing orifice C
Return check valve
of each valve when brake is released.
Temporarily reserves the brake fluid drained from brake caliper, so that pressure efficiently decreas-
Reservoir
es when decreasing pressure of brake caliper and wheel cylinder.
D
CONDITIONS FOR WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION
Turns ON when ignition switch turns ON and turns OFF when the system is normal, for bulb check purposes.
E
Condition (status) ABS warning lamp Brake warning lamp
Ignition switch OFF OFF OFF
For approx. 1 second after the ignition switch BRC
ON ON
is turned ON
Approx. 1 second after ignition switch is
turned ON (when the system is in normal op- OFF OFF G
eration)
After engine starts OFF OFF
When parking brake operates (parking brake H
OFF ON
switch ON)
When brake fluid is less than the specified
OFF ON
level (brake fluid level switch ON) I
ABS function is malfunctioning ON OFF
EBD function is malfunctioning ON ON
J

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-13 2014 Note
SYSTEM
ABS : ABS Function INFOID:0000000009365062
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWFIA0808GB
• By preventing wheel lock through brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is electronically controlled by
detecting wheel speed during braking, stability during emergency braking is improved so that obstacles can
be easily bypassed by steering operation.
• During braking, control units calculate wheel speed and pseudo-vehicle speed, and transmit pressure
increase, hold or decrease signals to actuator portion according to wheel slip status.
• The following effects are obtained by preventing wheel lock during
braking.
- Vehicle tail slip is prevented during braking when driving straight.
- Understeer and oversteer tendencies are moderated during brak-
ing while cornering.
- Obstacles may be easily bypassed by steering operation during
braking.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in ABS
function, the control is suspended for ABS function. However, EBD
function operates normally. Refer to BRC-16, "ABS : Fail-safe".
JPFIC0140GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-14 2014 Note
SYSTEM
A
Component Signal description
Receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN com-
Combination meter munication. B
• ABS warning lamp signal
ABS : EBD Function INFOID:0000000009667732

C
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D
BRC
AWFIA0808GB K
• By preventing rear wheel slip increase through rear wheel brake force (brake fluid pressure) control that is
electronically controlled when slight skip on front and rear wheels are detected during braking, stability dur- L
ing braking is improved.
• EBD function is expanded and developed from conventional ABS function and corrects rear wheel brake
force to appropriate level by electronic control according to load weight (number of passengers).
M
JPFIC0142GB
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-15 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• During braking, control unit portion compares slight slip on front
and rear wheels by wheel speed sensor signal, transmits drive sig-
nal to actuator portion when rear wheel slip exceeds front wheel
slip for the specified value or more, and controls rear wheel brake
force (brake fluid pressure) so that increase of rear wheel slip is
prevented and slips on front wheel and rear wheel are nearly
equalized. ABS control is applied when slip on each wheel
increases and wheel speed is the threshold value of ABS control or
less.
• CONSULT can be used to diagnose the system.
• Fail-safe function is adopted. When a malfunction occurs in EBD
function, the control is suspended for ABS function and EBD func-
tion. Refer to BRC-24, "Fail-safe".
JPFIC0143GB

Component Signal description

Mainly receives the following signals from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN
Combination meter communication.
• Brake warning lamp signal
ABS : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009365064
ABS FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS functions. However, EBD functions operate nor-
mally.
EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in sys-
tem [ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS and EBD functions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-16 2014 Note
SYSTEM
DTC Malfunction detected condition Fail-safe condition A

C1101 When an open circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
C1102 When an open circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
C1103 When an open circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
B
C1104 When an open circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.

• When a short circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit. C
• When power supply voltage of rear RH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear RH wheel sensor pow-
er supply voltage
C1105
• When distance between rear RH wheel sensor and rear RH wheel sensor rotor is D
large.
• When installation of rear RH wheel sensor or rear RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.
E
• When a short circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear LH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Rear LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear LH wheel sensor power
supply voltage The following functions are sus-
C1106 BRC
• When distance between rear LH wheel sensor and rear LH wheel sensor rotor is pended:
large. • ABS
• When installation of rear LH wheel sensor or rear LH wheel sensor rotor is not nor- • EBD (only when both rear wheels
mal. are malfunctioning) G
• When a short circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front RH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Front RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front RH wheel sensor H
power supply voltage
C1107
• When distance between front RH wheel sensor and front RH wheel sensor rotor
is large.
• When installation of front RH wheel sensor or front RH wheel sensor rotor is not I
normal.
• When a short circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front LH wheel sensor is in following state.
J
- Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front LH wheel sensor pow-
er supply voltage
C1108
• When distance between front LH wheel sensor and front LH wheel sensor rotor is
large. K
• When installation of front LH wheel sensor or front LH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.
• When ignition power supply voltage is in following state.
The following functions are sus- L
C1109 - Ignition power supply voltage: 10 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage.
- Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage. pended:
• ABS
When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control • EBD
C1110 M
unit).
The following functions are sus-
C1111 When a malfunction is detected in motor or motor relay. pended:
• ABS N
When difference in wheel speed between any wheel and others is detected when pended:
C1115
the vehicle is driven, because of installation of tires other than specified. • ABS
O
• EBD

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-17 2014 Note
SYSTEM
DTC Malfunction detected condition Fail-safe condition
C1120 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN valve.
C1121 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT valve.
C1122 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN valve.
C1123 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT valve. pended:
C1124 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN valve. • ABS
• EBD
C1125 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT valve.
C1126 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN valve.
C1127 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT valve.
C1130 When a CAN signal malfunction is detected.
pended:
C1140 When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.
• ABS
• EBD
When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for 2
U1000
seconds or more.
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator
U1010
and electric unit (control unit).

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-18 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM [ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL
UNIT)]
A
UNIT)]
CONSULT Function (ABS) INFOID:0000000009365065
B
APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the following direct diagnostic modes.
C
ECU identification The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number is displayed.
D
Self Diagnostic Result The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) input/output data is displayed in real time.
Active Test The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) activates outputs to test components. E
ECU IDENTIFICATION
BRC
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number is displayed.
Operation Procedure G
1. Before performing the self-diagnosis, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for
approximately 1 minute.
H
How To Erase Self Diagnostic Result
1. After erasing DTC memory, start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately
1 minute as the final inspection, and make sure that the ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp turn
I
OFF.
CAUTION:
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicable diagnosis.
NOTE: J
• When the wheel sensor malfunctions, after inspecting the wheel sensor system, the ABS warning lamp
and brake warning lamp will not turn OFF even when the system is normal, unless the vehicle is driven
at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute. K
• Brake warning lamp will turn ON in case of parking brake operation (when switch is ON) or of brake fluid
level switch operation (when brake fluid is insufficient).
Display Item List L
Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
M
Data monitor item selection

Item N
ECU INPUT MAIN SELECTION Remarks
(Unit)
SIGNALS SIGNALS FROM MENU
FR LH SENSOR Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by front wheel
× × × O
(km/h, mph) sensor LH signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by front wheel
× × ×
(km/h, mph) sensor RH signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by rear wheel P
× × ×
(km/h, mph) sensor LH signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR Wheel speed (km/h, mph) calculated by rear wheel
× × ×
(km/h, mph) sensor RH signal is displayed.
FR RH IN SOL Front RH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is dis-
– × ×
(On/Off) played.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-19 2014 Note
UNIT)]
Data monitor item selection
Item
ECU INPUT MAIN SELECTION Remarks
(Unit)
SIGNALS SIGNALS FROM MENU
FR RH OUT SOL Front RH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is dis-
– × ×
(On/Off) played.
FR LH IN SOL
– × × Front LH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
FR LH OUT SOL Front LH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is dis-
– × ×
(On/Off) played.
RR RH IN SOL
– × × Rear RH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
RR RH OUT SOL Rear RH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is dis-
– × ×
(On/Off) played.
RR LH IN SOL
– × × Rear LH IN ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
RR LH OUT SOL Rear LH OUT ABS solenoid (On/Off) status is dis-
– × ×
(On/Off) played.
EBD WARN LAMP
– – × Brake warning lamp (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
STOP LAMP SW
× × × Stop lamp switch (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
MOTOR RELAY
– × × ABS motor relay signal (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ACTUATOR RLY
– × × ABS actuator relay signal (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS WARN LAMP
– × × ABS warning lamp (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
BATTERY VOLT Voltage (V) supplied to ABS actuator and electric unit
× × ×
(V) (control unit) is displayed.
ENGINE SPEED × × × Engine speed status is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
– – × EBD operation (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS SIGNAL
– – × ABS operation (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
EBD FAIL SIG
– – × EBD fail signal (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
ABS FAIL SIG
– – × ABS fail signal (On/Off) status is displayed.
(On/Off)
CRANKING SIG The input state of the key SW START position signal
– – ×
(On/Off) is displayed.
×: Applicable
–: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST MODE

CAUTION:
• Do not perform active test while driving vehicle.
• Make sure to completely bleed air from brake system.
• The active test cannot be performed with the ABS warning lamp or brake warning lamp on.
• ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp turn on during active test.
NOTE:
• When active test is performed while depressing the pedal, the pedal depression amount will change. This is
normal.
• “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed 10 seconds after operation start.
• After “TEST IS STOPPED” is displayed, to perform test again, touch BACK.
Test Item

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-20 2014 Note
UNIT)]
ABS SOLENOID VALVE
• Select “Up”, “Keep” and “Down”. Then use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as shown in A
the table below.
Display (Note)
Test item Display item B
Up Keep Down
FR RH IN SOL Off On On
FR RH SOL
FR RH OUT SOL Off Off On* C
FR LH IN SOL Off On On
FR LH SOL
FR LH OUT SOL Off Off On*
D
RR RH IN SOL Off On On
RR RH SOL
RR RH OUT SOL Off Off On*
RR LH IN SOL Off On On E
RR LH SOL
RR LH OUT SOL Off Off On*
*: On for 1 to 2 seconds after the select, and then Off.
NOTE: BRC
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an
operation for checking.
G
ABS MOTOR
• Select “On” and “Off”. Make sure motor relay and actuator relay operates as shown in table below.
H
Display
Test item Display item
On Off
MOTOR RELAY On Off I
ABS MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY (Note) On On
NOTE:
A brief moment of On/Off condition occurs every 20 seconds after ignition switch turned ON. This is not malfunction because it is an J
operation for checking.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-21 2014 Note
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [ABS]


CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short-circuited.
Data monitor
Monitor item Display content Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
0 [km/h, mph] Vehicle stopped
FR LH SENSOR Wheel speed Nearly matches the speed meter display Vehicle running
(± 10% or less) (Note 1)
FR RH SENSOR Wheel speed Nearly matches the speed meter display Vehicle running
RR LH SENSOR Wheel speed Nearly matches the speed meter display Vehicle running
RR RH SENSOR Wheel speed Nearly matches the speed meter display Vehicle running
Actuator (solenoid valve) is active (“AC-
TIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator On
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode)
FR RH IN SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
When the actuator (solenoid valve) is not
active and actuator relay is active (igni- Off
tion switch ON)
FR RH OUT SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON)
FR LH IN SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON)
FR LH OUT SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON)
RR RH IN SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-22 2014 Note
Data monitor
Monitor item Display content A
Reference value in
Condition
normal operation
TIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator On B
RR RH OUT SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
active and actuator relay is active (igni- Off C
tion switch ON)
TIVE TEST” with CONSULT) or actuator On D
RR LH IN SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON) E
relay is inactive (in fail-safe mode) BRC
RR LH OUT SOL Operation status of all solenoid valves
tion switch ON) G
EBD warning lamp When EBD warning lamp is ON On
EBD WARN LAMP
(Note 2) When EBD warning lamp is OFF Off
When brake pedal is depressed On H
STOP LAMP SW Brake pedal operation
When brake pedal is not depressed Off
When the motor relay and motor are op-
erating
On I
MOTOR RELAY Motor and motor relay operation
When the motor relay and motor are not
Off
operating
J
When the actuator relay is operating On
ACTUATOR RLY Actuator relay operation
When the actuator relay is not operating Off
ABS warning lamp When ABS warning lamp is ON On K

ABS WARN LAMP
(Note 2) When ABS warning lamp is OFF Off
Battery voltage supplied to the ABS actuator
BATTERY VOLT Ignition switch ON 10 – 16 V
and electric unit (control unit) L
Engine stopped 0 RPM
ENGINE SPEED Engine speed status
Almost same read-
Engine running M
ing as tachometer
EBD is active On
EBD SIGNAL EBD operation
EBD is inactive Off
N
ABS is active On
ABS SIGNAL ABS operation
ABS is inactive Off
In EBD fail-safe On O
EBD FAIL SIG EBD fail-safe signal
EBD is normal Off
In ABS fail-safe On
ABS FAIL SIG ABS fail-safe signal P
ABS is normal Off
Crank is active On
CRANKING SIG Crank operation
Crank is inactive Off
Note 1: Confirm tire pressure is normal.
Note 2: On and off timing for warning lamps and indicator lamps.
• Refer to BRC-14, "ABS : ABS Function".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-23 2014 Note
• Refer to BRC-15, "ABS : EBD Function".
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009365067
ABS FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON when a malfunction occurs in system [ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS functions. However, EBD functions operate nor-
mally.
EBD FUNCTION
ABS warning lamp, brake warning lamp in combination meter turn ON when a malfunction occurs in system
[ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)]. The control is suspended for ABS and EBD functions.

C1101 When an open circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
C1102 When an open circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
C1103 When an open circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.
C1104 When an open circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When a short circuit is detected in rear RH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear RH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Rear RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear RH wheel sensor pow-
er supply voltage
C1105
• When distance between rear RH wheel sensor and rear RH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of rear RH wheel sensor or rear RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.
• When a short circuit is detected in rear LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear LH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Rear LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Rear LH wheel sensor power
supply voltage The following functions are sus-
C1106 pended:
• When distance between rear LH wheel sensor and rear LH wheel sensor rotor is
large. • ABS
• When installation of rear LH wheel sensor or rear LH wheel sensor rotor is not nor- • EBD (only when both rear wheels
mal. are malfunctioning)
• When a short circuit is detected in front RH wheel sensor circuit.

• When power supply voltage of front RH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Front RH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front RH wheel sensor
power supply voltage
C1107
• When distance between front RH wheel sensor and front RH wheel sensor rotor
is large.
• When installation of front RH wheel sensor or front RH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.
• When a short circuit is detected in front LH wheel sensor circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front LH wheel sensor is in following state.
- Front LH wheel sensor power supply voltage: 7.2 V ≥ Front LH wheel sensor pow-
er supply voltage
C1108
• When distance between front LH wheel sensor and front LH wheel sensor rotor is
large.
• When installation of front LH wheel sensor or front LH wheel sensor rotor is not
normal.
• When ignition power supply voltage is in following state.
C1109 - Ignition power supply voltage: 10 V ≥ Ignition power supply voltage. The following functions are sus-
- Ignition power supply voltage: 16 V ≤ Ignition power supply voltage. pended:
• ABS
When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control • EBD
C1110
unit).
C1111 When there is a failure on the pump motor The following functions are sus-
pended:
When difference in wheel speed between any wheel and others is detected when • ABS
C1115
the vehicle is driven, because of installation of tires other than specified. • EBD

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-24 2014 Note
A
C1120 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN valve.
C1121 When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT valve.
C1122 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN valve. B
C1123 When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT valve. pended:
C1124 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN valve. • ABS
• EBD C
C1125 When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT valve.
C1126 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN valve.
C1127 When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT valve.
D
C1130 When a CAN signal malfunction is detected..
pended: E
C1140 When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay.
• ABS
• EBD
When CAN communication signal is not continuously transmitted or received for 2
U1000
seconds or more. BRC
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator
U1010
and electrical unit (control unit).
G
When multiple DTCs are displayed simultaneously, check each one using the following priority list. H
Priority Detected item (DTC)

• U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT I
1
• U1010 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
2 • C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE
• C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1 J
3
• C1144 ST ANG SEN SIGNAL
• C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL]
4 • C1111 PUMP MOTOR
K
• C1140 ACTUATOR RLY
• C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1
• C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1
• C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1 L
• C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1
• C1105 RR RH SENSOR-2
• C1106 RR LH SENSOR-2
• C1107 FR RH SENSOR-2 M
• C1108 FR LH SENSOR-2
5 • C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
• C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL
N
• C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL
• C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL
• C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL
• C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL O
• C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL
• C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL
• C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-25 2014 Note
DTC Items (CONSULT screen terms) Reference

C1101 RR RH SENSOR-1
C1102 RR LH SENSOR-1
BRC-36, "DTC Logic"
C1103 FR RH SENSOR-1
C1104 FR LH SENSOR-1
BRC-40, "DTC Logic"
C1109 BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] BRC-42, "DTC Logic"
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE BRC-44, "DTC Logic"
C1111 PUMP MOTOR BRC-45, "DTC Logic"
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL] BRC-47, "DTC Logic"
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-49, "DTC Logic"
C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-51, "DTC Logic"
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-49, "DTC Logic"
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-51, "DTC Logic"
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL BRC-49, "DTC Logic"
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL BRC-51, "DTC Logic"
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL BRC-49, "DTC Logic"
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL BRC-51, "DTC Logic"
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1 BRC-53, "DTC Logic"
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY BRC-54, "DTC Logic"
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT BRC-56, "DTC Logic"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT [CAN] BRC-57, "DTC Logic"

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-26 2014 Note
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [ABS]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
BRC
AAFWA0103GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-27 2014 Note
AAFWA0104GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-28 2014 Note
BRC
AAFIA0166GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-29 2014 Note
AAFIA0167GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-30 2014 Note
BRC
AAFIA0168GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-31 2014 Note
AAFIA0169GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-32 2014 Note
BRC
AAFIA0170GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-33 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [ABS]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWFIA0208GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
incident/malfunction occurred) using the diagnostic worksheet. Refer to BRC-35, "Diagnostic Work Sheet".
>> GO TO 2.
Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT Function (ABS)".
Are any DTCs displayed?
YES >> Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SYMPTOM OPERATING CONDITION
Check that the symptom is a normal operating condition. Refer to BRC-68, "Description".
Is the symptom a normal operating condition?
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK WARNING AND INDICATOR LAMPS OPERATION
Check ABS and brake warning lamps. Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : System Description".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-34 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [ABS]
Is ON/OFF timing normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. A
NO >> Perform warning lamp diagnosis. Refer to BRC-60, "Component Function Check" (ABS warning
lamp), BRC-61, "Component Function Check" (brake warning lamp).
5.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS APPLICABLE TO THE SYMPTOM B
Perform diagnosis applicable to the symptom. Refer to BRC-62, "Symptom Table".
C
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
Perform self diagnostic result again, and check that the malfunction is repaired. After checking, erase the self D
diagnosis memory. Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT Function (ABS)".
>> Inspection End. E
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000009365072
BRC
SFIA3265E
M

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-35 2014 Note
C1101, C1102, C1103, C1104 WHEEL SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display Item Malfunction detected condition Possible causes

• When power supply voltage of rear wheel sensor
RH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in rear
wheel sensor RH circuit.
• When power supply voltage of rear wheel sensor
LH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in rear • Harness or connector
wheel sensor LH circuit. • Wheel sensor
• When power supply voltage of front wheel sensor • ABS actuator and electric unit
RH is low. (control unit)
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in front
wheel sensor RH circuit.
• When power supply voltage of front wheel sensor
LH is low.
• When an open or shorted circuit is detected in front
wheel sensor LH circuit.

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 21 km/h (13 MPH) or more for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Perform self-diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1101, C1102, C1103 or C1104 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to BRC-27, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CONFIRM DTC
With CONSULT
1. Perform self-diagnostic result of ABS and record all active DTCs.
2. Clear all DTCs.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to BRC-36, "DTC Logic".
Does DTC C1101, C1102, C1103 or C1104 reset?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECT WHEEL SENSOR
Inspect the suspect wheel sensor for damage or deformation.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace as necessary.
3.HARNESS AND CONNECTOR INSPECTION
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-36 2014 Note
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor connector of
suspect wheel. A
2. Check harness, connectors and terminals for corrosion, deformation, disconnection, looseness or dam-
age.
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL C
1. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter.
2. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE: D
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel E
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash ON and OFF to indicate an output signal.
NOTE:
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest. BRC
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa- G
tion" or BRC-70, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO VOLTAGE H
2. Check voltage between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel and ground.
I
Wheel Sensor
Ground Voltage
Wheel Connector Terminal
1 J
Front LH E51
2
1
Front RH E52 K
2
— 0V
1
Rear LH B22
2 L
1
Rear RH B35
2
M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair the circuit.
N
6.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT TO GROUND
2. Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel and ground. O
Wheel Sensor
Ground Continuity
Wheel Connector Terminal P

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-37 2014 Note
1
Front LH E51
2
1
Front RH E52
2
— No
1
Rear LH B22
2
1
Rear RH B35
2
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT BETWEEN CIRCUITS
Check continuity between wheel sensor harness connector terminals of suspect wheel.
Wheel Sensor (+) (-)

Continuity
Wheel Connector Terminal Terminal
Front LH E51
Front RH E52
1 2 No
Rear LH B22
Rear RH B35
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E33 and harness
connector of suspect wheel sensor.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor Continuity
Wheel sensor
37 1
Front LH E51
36 2
26 1
Front RH E52
27 2 Yes
E33
30 1
Rear LH B22
29 2
33 1
Rear RH B35
34 2
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E33 terminal and
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-38 2014 Note
ABS actuator and electric unit A

(control unit) Voltage
Ground Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage B
E33 6 —
Ignition switch OFF 0V
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check the following:
• 10A fuse No. 50 located in the IPDM E/R
D
• Harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and IPDM E/R
10.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals and
ground.
BRC
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13 G
E33 Ground Yes
38
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE I
1. Connect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33.
3. Check voltage between suspect wheel sensor harness connector terminals. J
Wheel Sensor (+) (-) Voltage

Wheel Connector Terminal Terminal (Approx.) K
Front LH E51
Front RH E52
1 2 Battery voltage L
Rear LH B22
Rear RH B35
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> Replace wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation"
or BRC-70, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Then, GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa- N
tion".
12.CONFIRM REPAIR
O
With CONSULT
1. Clear all DTCs.
P
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-39 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• When distance between rear wheel sensor RH and
rear wheel sensor RH rotor is large.
• When installation of rear wheel sensor RH or rear
wheel sensor RH rotor is not normal.
• When distance between rear wheel sensor LH and
rear wheel sensor LH rotor is large.
• When installation of rear wheel sensor LH or rear • Wheel sensor
wheel sensor LH rotor is not normal. • ABS actuator and electric unit
• When distance between front wheel sensor RH (control unit)
and front wheel sensor RH rotor is large. • Sensor rotor
• When installation of front wheel sensor RH or front
wheel sensor RH rotor is not normal.
• When distance between front wheel sensor LH and
front wheel sensor LH rotor is large.
• When installation of front wheel sensor LH or front
wheel sensor LH rotor is not normal.

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 21 km/h (13 MPH) or more for approximately 5 minutes.
2. Perform self-diagnostic result.
1.CONFIRM DTC
With CONSULT
1. Perform self-diagnostic result of ABS and record all active DTCs.
2. Clear all DTCs.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE AND TIRE WEAR
Check tires for excessive wear and proper inflation. Refer to WT-4, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR
Check wheel sensor for the following:
• Proper installation
GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-40 2014 Note
• Physical damage
• Contamination A
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace as necessary. B
4.CHECK SENSOR ROTOR
Check sensor rotor for the following:
C
• Contamination
• Physical damage (missing teeth, cracks, etc.)
• Foreign material
• Looseness D
YES >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa-
tion" or BRC-70, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation". Then, GO TO 5. E
5.CONFIRM REPAIR
BRC
With CONSULT
1. Clear all DTCs.
G
tion".
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-41 2014 Note
C1109 POWER AND GROUND SYSTEM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• Harness or connector
• ABS actuator and electric unit
BATTERY VOLTAGE • When ignition voltage is 10 V or less. (control unit)
C1109
[ABNORMAL] • When ignition voltage is 16 V or more. • Fuse
• Ignition power supply system
• Battery

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
With CONSULT.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Perform self diagnostic result.
Is DTC C1109 detected?
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
3. Check connectors and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) IGNITION POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminal 28 and ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) Ground Condition Voltage
Connector Terminal
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
E33 6 —
Ignition switch OFF 0V
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-42 2014 Note
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) A

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E33 Ground Yes B
38
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa- C
tion".
D
BRC

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-43 2014 Note
C1110 CONTROL FAILURE
C1110 CONTROL FAILURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC Display item Malfunction detected condition Possible cause

When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator • ABS actuator and electric unit
C1110 CONTROLLER FAILURE
and electric unit (control unit). (control unit)

1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the self-diagnosis results.
Self-diagnosis results
CONTROLLER FAILURE
EMERGENCY BRAKE
VARIANT CODING
Is above displayed on the self-diagnosis display?
1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)

CAUTION:
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) when self diagnostic result shows items other
than those applicable.
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-44 2014 Note
C1111 PUMP MOTOR
C1111 PUMP MOTOR
A

• Harness or connector C
• When a malfunction is detected in motor or motor • ABS actuator and electric unit
relay. (control unit)
C1111 PUMP MOTOR
• When a low pressure malfunction is detected in ac- • Fusible link
cumulator. • Battery power supply system D
• Motor/accumulator assembly

E
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. BRC
2. Depress brake pedal 20 times or more.
3. Start the engine and wait for 3 minutes or more.
4. Perform self diagnostic result. G
NO >> Inspection End. H
I
J
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors. K
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK ABS MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY BATTERY POWER SUPPLY M
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) N

— Voltage
Connector Terminal
E33 1 Ground Battery voltage
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
P
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 terminals 13, 38 and
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-45 2014 Note
C1111 PUMP MOTOR

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E33 Ground Yes
38
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-46 2014 Note
C1115 ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
A

• Harness or connector C
When difference in wheel speed between any wheel • Wheel sensor
ABS SENSOR
C1115 and others is detected while the vehicle is driven, be- • Sensor rotor
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
cause of installation of tires other than specified. • ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) D

1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E
With CONSULT.
1. Start engine and drive vehicle at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
2. Perform self diagnostic result. BRC
NO >> Inspection End. G

I
CAUTION:
Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION J
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor connector of
wheel with DTC.
2. Check terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage. K
YES >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect ABS active wheel sensor tester (J-45741) to wheel sensor using appropriate adapter. M
2. Turn on the ABS active wheel sensor tester power switch.
NOTE:
The green POWER indicator should illuminate. If the POWER indicator does not illuminate, replace the
N
battery in the ABS active wheel sensor tester before proceeding.
3. Spin the wheel of the vehicle by hand and observe the red SENSOR indicator on the ABS active wheel
sensor tester. The red SENSOR indicator should flash on and off to indicate an output signal.
NOTE: O
If the red SENSOR indicator illuminates but does not flash, reverse the polarity of the tester leads and
retest.
Does the ABS active wheel sensor tester detect a signal? P
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installa-
tion" (front) or BRC-70, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation" (rear).
3.CHECK TIRES
Check the inflation pressure, wear and size of each tire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-47 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Adjust tire pressure, or replace tire(s).
4.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between wheel sensor connector terminals and ground of wheel with DTC.
Wheel Sensor
Ground Continuity
Wheel Connector Terminal
1
Front LH E51
2
1
Front RH E52
2
— No
1
Rear LH B22
2
1
Rear RH B35
2
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK WIRING HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector E33 and wheel sensor con-
nector of wheel with DTC.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Wheel sensor Continuity
Wheel sensor
37 1
Front LH E51
36 2
26 1
Front RH E52
27 2 Yes
E33
30 1
Rear LH B22
29 2
33 1
Rear RH B35
34 2
YES >> Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-48 2014 Note
C1120, C1122, C1124, C1126 ABS IN VALVE SYSTEM
A

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS IN C
C1120 FR LH IN ABS SOL
valve.
When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS IN • Harness or connector
C1122 FR RH IN ABS SOL • ABS actuator and electric unit
valve. D
(control unit)
When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS IN • Fusible link
C1124 RR LH IN ABS SOL
valve. • Battery power supply system
When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS IN E
C1126 RR RH IN ABS SOL
valve.

BRC
With CONSULT.
1. Turn ignition switch ON. G
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-49, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I

J
K
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
3. Check connector and terminals for deformation, disconnection, looseness or damage.
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
N
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Voltage
—

O

YES >> GO TO 3. P
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-49 2014 Note

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E33 Ground Yes
38
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-50 2014 Note
C1121, C1123, C1125, C1127 ABS OUT VALVE SYSTEM
A

When a malfunction is detected in front LH ABS OUT C
C1121 FR LH OUT ABS SOL
valve.
When a malfunction is detected in front RH ABS OUT • Harness or connector
C1123 FR RH OUT ABS SOL • ABS actuator and electric unit
valve. D
(control unit)
When a malfunction is detected in rear LH ABS OUT • Fusible link
C1125 RR LH OUT ABS SOL
valve. • Battery power supply system
When a malfunction is detected in rear RH ABS OUT E
C1127 RR RH OUT ABS SOL
valve.

BRC
With CONSULT.
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-51, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I

J
K
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
N
—

O

YES >> GO TO 3. P
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-51 2014 Note

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E33 Ground Yes
38
tion".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-52 2014 Note
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL
A

• ECM C
When a CAN signal malfunction is detected in ECM • ABS actuator and electric unit
C1130 ENGINE SIGNAL 1
system. (control unit)
• CAN communication line
D
1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT E
With CONSULT.
2. Perform self diagnostic result. BRC
NO >> Inspection End. G
1.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR ENGINE SYSTEM H
With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to EC-53, "CONSULT Function".
I
Are any ECM DTCs detected?
YES >> Refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
With CONSULT.
1. Perform self diagnostic result and erase DTCs. K
3. Start engine and drive vehicle for a short period of time.
4. Check that malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) turns OFF. L
5. Stop vehicle and perform self diagnostic result.
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa- M
tion".
NO >> Check pin terminals and connection of connectors for abnormal conditions. Repair or replace mal-
functioning components.
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-53 2014 Note
C1140 ACTUATOR RELAY SYSTEM
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

• ABS actuator and electric unit
C1140 ACTUATOR RLY When a malfunction is detected in actuator relay. (control unit)
• Fusible link
• Battery power supply system

With CONSULT.
YES >> GO TO 2.

—

YES >> GO TO 3.
ground.

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
E33 Ground Yes
38

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-54 2014 Note
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installa- A
tion".
B
BRC

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-55 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When CAN communication signal is not continuously CAN communication system mal-
received for 2 seconds or more function
1.CHECK DTC DETECTION

With CONSULT.
Is DTC U1000 detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-56 2014 Note
A
Initial diagnosis of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C
Items
DTC DTC detection condition Possible cause D
(CONSULT screen terms)
When detecting error during the initial diag-
ABS actuator and electric unit
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) nosis of CAN controller of ABS actuator and
(control unit)
electric unit (control unit). E

1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS BRC
With CONSULT.
2. Perform self diagnostic result. G
Is DTC U1010 detected?
NO >> Inspection End. H
1.REPLACE ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) I
Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal and Installation".
J
>> Inspection End.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-57 2014 Note
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009365116
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OPERATION

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when parking brake is actuated.
NO >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to BRC-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2. Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-59, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL
With CONSULT.
1. Connect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connectors.
3. In “DATA MONITOR” select “PARK BRAKE SW” and check parking brake switch signal.
Condition DATA MONITOR

Actuate parking brake On
Release parking brake Off
YES >> Refer to BRC-34, "Work Flow".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect combination meter and parking brake switch connectors.
3. Check continuity between combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector M17 terminal
1.
Combination meter Parking brake switch

Continuity
M24 10 M17 1 Yes
4. Check continuity between combination meter connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-58 2014 Note
Combination meter A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M24 10 Ground No
B
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning components. C
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000009365118
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH D

2. Disconnect parking brake switch connector.
3. Check continuity between parking brake switch terminal 1 and ground. E
Parking brake switch terminal — Condition Continuity

Parking brake actuated Yes BRC
1 Ground
Parking brake released No
G
NO >> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-59 2014 Note
ABS WARNING LAMP
ABS WARNING LAMP
1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP FUNCTION

Check that ABS warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approximately 2 seconds after ignition switch
is turned ON.
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result.
Are any DTCs detected?
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check if indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Sys-
tem Description".
tion".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-60 2014 Note
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
BRAKE WARNING LAMP
A
1.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LAMP FUNCTION (1) B

Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON for approximately 2 seconds after ignition
switch is turned ON.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BRAKE WARNING LAMP FUNCTION (2) D
Check that brake warning lamp in combination meter turns ON/OFF when parking brake is operated.
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check parking brake switch system. Refer to BRC-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".
BRC
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS

G
With CONSULT.
Perform self diagnostic result.
Are any DTCs detected? H
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER I
Check if indication and operation of combination meter are normal. Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Sys-
tem Description".
tion".
NO >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation". K

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-61 2014 Note
ABS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [ABS]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
ABS
If ABS warning lamp turns ON, perform self-diagnosis.
Symptom Check item Reference

Brake force distribution
Excessive ABS function operation fre- BRC-63, "Diagno-
Looseness of front and rear axle
quency sis Procedure"
Wheel sensor and rotor system
Brake pedal stroke BRC-64, "Diagno-
Unexpected pedal reaction
Make sure the braking force is sufficient when the ABS is not operating. sis Procedure"
BRC-65, "Diagno-
The braking distance is long Check stopping distance when the ABS is not operating.
sis Procedure"
BRC-66, "Diagno-
ABS function does not operate (Note 1) ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
sis Procedure"
Pedal vibration or ABS operation sound Brake pedal BRC-67, "Diagno-

occurs (Note 2) ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) sis Procedure"
NOTE:
• 1: The ABS does not operate when the speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or less.
• 2: Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly depressed (just place a foot on it).
However, this is normal.
- When shifting gears
- When driving on slippery road
- During cornering at high speed
- When passing over bumps or grooves [approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
- When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher]

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-62 2014 Note
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
EXCESSIVE ABS FUNCTION OPERATION FREQUENCY
A
1.CHECK START B
Check front and rear brake force distribution using a brake tester.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check brake system.
2.CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE D
Make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. Refer to front: FSU-6, "Inspection", rear:
RSU-5, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR BRC
Check the following:
• Wheel sensor installation for damage
• Sensor rotor installation for damage G
• Wheel sensor connector
• Wheel sensor harness
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> • Replace wheel sensor BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation" (front)
or BRC-70, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation" (rear). I
• Replace sensor rotor BRC-72, "FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation" (front) or
BRC-72, "REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation" (rear).
• Repair harness.
J
4.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp is turned off after the ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.
NO >> Perform self diagnostic result. Refer to BRC-19, "CONSULT Function (ABS)".
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-63 2014 Note
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION
UNEXPECTED PEDAL REACTION
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE

Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Is the stroke too big?
YES >> • Bleed air from brake line and hose. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system
fluid leakage, etc. Refer to brake pedal: BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment" or brake booster
assembly BR-14, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS FUNCTION
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS.
2. Check if braking force is normal in this condition.
3. Reconnect connector after inspection.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-64 2014 Note
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
THE BRAKING DISTANCE IS LONG
A
CAUTION: B
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer with the ABS operating than when
the ABS is not operating.
1.CHECK ABS FUNCTION C
2. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS.
3. Check stopping distance. D
4. After inspection, reconnect connector.
YES >> Inspection End. E
BRC

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-65 2014 Note
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
ABS FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
CAUTION:
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h (6 MPH) or lower.
1.CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY
Make sure that the ABS warning lamp turns OFF after ignition switch is turned ON or when driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-66 2014 Note
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
PEDAL VIBRATION OR ABS OPERATION SOUND OCCURS
A
CAUTION: B
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
• When shifting gears
• When driving on slippery road C
• During cornering at high speed
• When passing over bumps or grooves [approximately 50 mm (1.97 in) or more]
• When pulling away just after starting engine [at approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH) or higher] D
1.SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check that there are pedal vibrations when the engine is started.
E
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Inspect the brake pedal.
BRC
2.SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check that there are ABS operation noises when the engine is started.
Do symptoms occur? G
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.SYMPTOM CHECK 3 H
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur? I
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NO >> Inspection End. J

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-67 2014 Note
Symptom Result
Slight vibrations are felt on the brake pedal and operation noises occur when ABS is activated. This is a normal condi-
Stopping distance is longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough, gravel, or tion due to the ABS acti-
snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads. vation.
This is normal, and it is

The brake pedal vibrates and motor operation noises occur from the engine room after the engine starts and
caused by the ABS op-
just after the vehicle starts.
eration check.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-68 2014 Note
WHEEL SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [ABS]

WHEEL SENSOR
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
B
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009619489
BRC
J
AWFIA0865GB
1. Front wheel sensor 2. Harness connector Front K
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009619490
L
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage front wheel sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the front wheel hub, first remove the front wheel sensor from the steering knuckle.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the front wheel sensor, making the front wheel sensor inop- M
erative.
• Pull out the front wheel sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the front
wheel sensor harness. N
• Before installation, check if foreign objects, such as iron fragments, are adhered to the pick-up part
of the front wheel sensor or to the inside of the hole in the steering knuckle for the front wheel sen-
sor, or if a foreign object is caught in the surface of the sensor rotor. Fix as necessary and then
install the front wheel sensor. O
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front wheel sensor.
4. Remove bolt and front wheel sensor from steering knuckle.
5. Release front wheel sensor harness clips from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-69 2014 Note
WHEEL SENSOR
CAUTION:
Do not twist front wheel sensor harness when installing front
wheel sensor. Check that grommet (2) is fully inserted to
bracket (1). Check that front wheel sensor harness is not
twisted after installation.
JPFIC0209ZZ
REAR WHEEL SENSOR

REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009619491
AWFIA0866GB
1. Rear wheel sensor 2. Harness connector Front
REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009619492
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage rear wheel sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
• When removing the rear wheel hub, first remove the rear wheel sensor from the back plate. Failure to
do so may result in damage to the rear wheel sensor, making the rear wheel sensor inoperative.
• Pull out the rear wheel sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible. Do not pull on the rear
wheel sensor harness.
• Before installation, check if foreign objects, such as iron fragments, are adhered to the pick-up part
of the rear wheel sensor or to the inside of the hole in the back plate for the rear wheel sensor, or if a
foreign object is caught in the surface of the sensor rotor. Fix as necessary and then install the rear
wheel sensor.
REMOVAL

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-70 2014 Note
WHEEL SENSOR
1. Remove bolts (A) and support bracket (1) (LH side only).
A
ALFIA0391ZZ
D
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear wheel sensor.
3. Release rear wheel sensor harness clips from the vehicle.
4. Remove bolts and rear wheel sensor from back plate. E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: BRC
Do not twist rear wheel sensor harness when installing rear
wheel sensor. Check that grommet (2) is fully inserted to
bracket (1). Check that rear wheel sensor harness is not twisted G
after installation.
I
JPFIC0209ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-71 2014 Note
SENSOR ROTOR
SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR
FRONT SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009619493
REMOVAL
Remove sensor rotor from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-9, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
REAR SENSOR ROTOR
REAR SENSOR ROTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009619494
REMOVAL
Remove sensor rotor from brake drum. Refer to BR-40, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Do not reuse rear sensor rotor.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-72 2014 Note
A
BRC
I
AWFIA1025ZZ
1. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 2. ABS actuator and electric unit (con- 3. Bracket J
trol unit) trol unit) harness connector
4. Bushing 5. Insulating clip 6. Bolt
A. To master cylinder secondary side B. To rear brake tube (RH) C. To front brake tube (LH)
K
D. To front brake tube (RH) E. To rear brake tube (LH) F. To master cylinder primary side

L
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, disconnect the battery cable from negative terminal. M
• Do not remove acuator by holding harness.
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill- N
ing.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Disconnect vacuum hose from intake manifold. Refer to BR-32, "Exploded View". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-73 2014 Note
3. Remove ground harness bolt (A) and ground harness from radi-
ator core support.
ALKIA3174ZZ
4. Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.
5. Remove low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-27, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and
Installation".
6. Loosen flare nut from brake tubes using a flare nut wrench, then remove brake tubes from ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Exploded View".
7. Disconnect the harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
8. Remove ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) bracket bolts.
9. Remove the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and bracket as an assembly.
10. Remove bracket and bushing from ABS actuator and electric unit (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
• Bleed the brake system. Refer to BR-12, "Bleeding Brake System".
CAUTION:
• Replace the ABS actuator and electric until (control unit) if it has been dropped or sustained an
impact.
• Do not install actuator by holding harness.
• After installing harness connector in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), make sure har-
ness connector is securely locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRC-74 2014 Note
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
BRM
A
B
SECTION
BODY REPAIR C
E
CONTENTS
VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................. 2 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS F
(SDS) ............................................................. 4
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR ..................... 2
Body Exterior Paint Color ....................................... 2 BODY ALIGNMENT ........................................... 4 G
Body Center Marks ................................................. 4
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 Description ................................................................ 5
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Engine Compartment ............................................... 5 H
Underbody ................................................................ 7
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Passenger Compartment ........................................10
Rear End Panel .......................................................11
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 I
BRM

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-1 2014 Note
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
VEHICLE INFORMATION
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color INFOID:0000000009654082
AWKIA2519ZZ
Color code B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
Description Blue Green White Black Silver Gray Red Blue
Component
Paint type M M 3P 2S M M M M
Hard clear coat t t t t t t t t
1 Door outside handles Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
2 Fuel filler lid Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
3 Back door outer finisher Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
4 Rear bumper fascia Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
5 Door mirror
Black KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3
6 Front bumper fascia Body color B17 FAK QAC KH3 K23 K36 NAC RBE
7 Front grille Black KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3 KH3
M = Metallic, 2S = Solid and Clear, 3P = 3-Stage pearl, t = Primerless Diamond Clear coat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
BRM

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-3 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
BODY ALIGNMENT
Body Center Marks INFOID:0000000009654084
A mark has been placed on each part of the body to indicate the vehicle center. When repairing parts dam-
aged by an accident which might affect the vehicle frame (members, pillars, etc.), more accurate and effective
repair will be possible by using these marks together with body alignment specifications.
AWKIA2546ZZ
Front
Point Portion Mark

A Cowl top extension Hole
B Front roof position mark for alignment Raised dimple
C Rear roof position mark for alignment Raised dimple
D Rear panel upper Cut out

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-4 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
A
• All dimensions indicated in the figures are actual.
• When using a tracking gauge, adjust both pointers to equal length. Then check the pointers and gauge itself
to make sure there is no free play. B
• When a measuring tape is used, check to be sure there is no elongation, twisting or bending.
• Measurements should be taken at the center of the mounting holes.
• An asterisk (*) following the value at the measuring point indicates that the measuring point on the other side
is symmetrically the same value. C
• The coordinates of the measurement points are the distances measured from the standard line of ″X″, ″Y″
and ″Z″.
D
PIIA0104E
Engine Compartment INFOID:0000000009654086 I
MEASUREMENTS
J
BRM

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-5 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
ALKIA3123ZZ
Unit: mm (in)
Position Description Measurement
A. Center of rear hood hinge hole to center of rear hood hinge hole 12 (0.47) 1407.0 (55.39)
B. Center shock hole to the center of the shock hole 52 (2.05) 1132.0 (44.57)
C. Center of front shock tower hole to the center of the front shock tower hole 12 (0.47) 1228.0 (48.35)
D. Hole for hood locator to the hole for hood locator 12 (0.47) 1346.0 (53.99)
E. Rear hole for radiator support to rear hole for radiator support 7 (0.28) 893.0 (35.16)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-6 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
F. Upper hole for front bumper reinforcement to upper hole front bumper reinforcement 8.2 (0.32) 948.0 (37.32)
G. Lower hole front radiator support to lower hole front lower radiator support 11 (0.43) 987.0 (38.86) A
H. Rear hinge hole 12 (0.47) to front hole upper radiator support 12 (0.47) 1312.0 (51.65)
J. Rear hinge hole 12 (0.47) to hood locator hole 7 (0.28) 345.0 (13.58)
B
Underbody INFOID:0000000009654087
MEASUREMENT C
BRM
ALKIA3128ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-7 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
Unit:mm (in)
Front LH side
Points Measurement Points Measurement

A-a 904.0 (35.59) B-b 820.0 (32.28)
C-c 797.0 (31.38). D-d 1134.0 (44.65)
E-e 797.0 (31.38) F-f 1220.0 (48.03)
G-g 746.0 (29.37) H-h 951.0 (37.44)
J-j 952.0 (37.48) A-b* 1835.5 (72.26)
A-c* 1192.2 (46.94) A-d* 1619.6 (63.76)
A-e* 1665.0 (65.55) E-f* 1362.1 (53.63)
F-g* 1038.5 (40.89) F-h* 1214.5 (47.81)
F-j* 1379.2 (54.30)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-8 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
MEASURMENT POINTS
A
BRM
N
AWKIA2547ZZ
Front O
Unit: mm (in)
Coordinates
Points Remarks P
X Y Z
A, a ± 299.0 (±11.77) ±±452.0 (17.80) 293.6 (11.56) Hole 16.0 (0.63)
B, b 1305.0 (51.38) ± 410.0 (16.14) 63.0 (2.48) Hole 14.0X12.0 (0.55X0.47)
C, c 507.0 (19.96) ± 398.5 (15.69) 73.5 (2.89) Hole 14.0X12.0 (0.55X0.47)
D, d 950.0 (37.40) ± 567.0 (22.32) 136.0 (5.35) Hole 12.0 (0.47)
E, e 1107.0 (43.58) ± 398.5 (15.69) 25.0 (0.98) Hole 12.0 (0.47)

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-9 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
Coordinates
Points Remarks
X Y Z
F, f 2022.5 (79.63) ± 610.0 (24.02) 32.8 (1.29) Hole 16.0 (0.63)
G, g 2305.0 (90.75) ± 373.0 (14.69) 213.0 (8.39) Hole 16.0 (0.63)
H, h 2535.0 (99.80) ± 475.5 (18.72) 217.5 (8.56) Hole 18.0x16.0 (0.71x0.63)
J, j 2850.0 (112.20) ± 476.0 (18.74) 227.5 (8.96) Hole 18.0x16.0 (0.71x0.63)
Passenger Compartment INFOID:0000000009654088
MEASURMENTS
ALKIA3130ZZ
Unit: mm (in)
Position Description Measurement
A. Front door upper hinge forward bolt hole to rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole. 1166.4 (45.92)
B. Front door upper hinge forward bolt hole to rear door lower hinge rear bolt hole. 1189.9 (46.85)
C. Front door lower hinge forward bolt hole to rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole. 1219.7 (48.02)
D. Front door lower hinge forward bolt hole to rear door lower hinge rear bolt hole. 1142.0 (44.96)
E. Rear door upper hinge upper bolt hole to rear door body side upper notch. 755.7 (29.75)
F. Rear door upper hinge upper bolt to rear door body side lower notch. 681.5 (26.83)
G. Rear door lower hinge rear hole to rear door upper body side notch. 844.3 (33.24)
H. Rear door rear hinge hole to rear door lower body side notch. 620.5 (24.43)
The vehicle is symmetrically identical dimensions on both LH and RH sides of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-10 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
Rear End Panel INFOID:0000000009654089
ALKIA3132ZZ
Unit: mm (in) I
Point Measurement Point Measurement
A-D 853.7 (33.61) A - C* 871.0 (34.29)
C* - b* 1121.7 (44.16) C-c 1055.0 (41.5) J
* The vehicle is symmetrically identical dimensions on both RH and LH sides of the vehicle.
MEASUREMENT POINTS BRM

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-11 2014 Note
BODY ALIGNMENT
ALKIA3133ZZ
Front
Point Description Point Description

A. Roof flange end of center positioning mark B. Back pillar main joggle
Edge of rear panel between back door striker installing
C. Upper rear panel joggle D.
holes

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRM-12 2014 Note
CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE
CCS
A
B
SECTION
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
ASCD SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 3 F
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE

(ASCD) ............................................................... 3 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Information ................................................................ 3
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 H
CCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
CCS-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [ASCD]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CCS-2 2014 Note
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [ASCD]
Information INFOID:0000000009472909
B
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) system is controlled by ECM.
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) : System Description". C
CCS

GETtheMANUALS.org
CCS-3 2014 Note
CHG
A
B
SECTION
CHARGING SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 17 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 17

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Description ...............................................................17 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17
SIONER" ................................................................... 2
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) ........................ 18
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 Description ...............................................................18 H
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ..................... 20 I
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 Description ...............................................................20
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 21 J
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4 Description ...............................................................21
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5 K
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 22
System Description ................................................... 5
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 22
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 6 Symptom Table .......................................................22 L
CHARGING SYSTEM .......................................... 6 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 23

Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 6
GENERATOR .................................................... 23 CHG
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 10 Exploded View .........................................................23
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........10 N
Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI) ...... 10 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI).... 13 (SDS) ............................................................ 25
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY IN- SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS O
SPECTION ..........................................................16 (SDS) ................................................................. 25
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 16 Generator ................................................................25
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
— Tests batteries, starting and charging sys-
(—) Model GR8-1200 NI tems and charges batteries. D
Multitasking battery and electrical di- Operating instructions, refer to diagnostic sta-
agnostic station tion instruction manual.
AWIIA1239ZZ
F
— Tests batteries and charging systems.
(—) Model EXP-800 NI Operating instructions, refer to diagnostic an-
Battery and electrical diagnostic ana- alyzer instruction manual.
lyzer G
H
JSMIA0806ZZ

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts J
PIIB1407E L
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-3 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALMIA0653GB
A. Inside motor room (right) B. Combination meter
No. Component part Description

”B” terminal Refer to: CHG-17, "Description".
1. Generator ”S” terminal Refer to: CHG-21, "Description".
”L” terminal Refer to: CHG-18, "Description".
The IC voltage regulator warning function activates to illuminate
the charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur
2. Combination meter (Charge warning lamp) while generator is operating:
• Excessive voltage is produced.
• No voltage is produced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-4 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
ALMIA0652GB
The generator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged. I
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-5 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
CHARGING SYSTEM
AAMWA0758GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-6 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
CHG
AAMIA1655GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-7 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAMIA1656GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-8 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
CHG
AAMIA1657GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-9 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI) INFOID:0000000009446782
CHARGING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS WITH EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI

To test the charging system, use the following special service tools:
• EXP-800 NI Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer
• GR8-1200 NI Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station
NOTE:
Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for proper charging system diagnosis procedures.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-10 2014 Note
OVERALL SEQUENCE
A
CHG
AWMIA1202GB
P
DETAILED FLOW
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, stater and generator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-11 2014 Note
>> GO TO 2.
2.DIAGNOSIS WITH EXP-800 NI OR GR8-1200 NI
Perform the charging system test using Multitasking battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI or
Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer EXP-800 NI. Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for proper
testing procedures.
Test result
NO PROBLEMS>>Charging system is normal and will also show “DIODE RIPPLE” test result.
NO VOLTAGE>>GO TO 3.
LOW VOLTAGE>>GO TO 11.
HIGH VOLTAGE>>GO TO 13.
EXCESSIVE RIPPLE, OPEN PHASE, OPEN DIODE or SHORTED DIODE>>Replace the generator. Refer
to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation". Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Multitasking
battery and electrical diagnostic station GR8-1200 NI or Battery and electrical diagnostic analyzer
EXP-800 NI to confirm repair.
3.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON)
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) INSPECTION
Check “L” terminal circuit (open). Refer to CHG-18, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair as needed.
5.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)
Start the engine and run it at idle.
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION
Check “L” terminal circuit (short). Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
8.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 3,000 RPM)
Increase and maintain the engine speed at 3,000 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp remain off?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.INSPECTION OF GENERATOR PULLEY
Check generator pulley. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation".
Is generator pulley normal?

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-12 2014 Note
10.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION A
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-17, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Is “B” terminal circuit normal? B
11.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION C
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
D
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.INSPECTION OF GENERATOR PULLEY E
Check generator pulley. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation".
Is generator pulley normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation". F
G
Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation". H
Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI) INFOID:0000000009446783
I
OVERALL SEQUENCE
Before performing a generator test, make sure that the battery is fully charged. A 30-volt voltmeter and suit-
able test probes are necessary for the test. J
• Before starting, inspect the fusible link.
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-13 2014 Note
• Use fully charged battery.
ALMIA0657GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS TURNED ON)
When ignition switch is turned ON.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 9.
3.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)
Start the engine and run it at idle
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 2,500 RPM)
Increase and maintain the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-14 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Inspection End. A
5.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION
Check terminal “L” circuit for (short). Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
B
YES >> GO TO 6.
C
Check terminal “S” circuit. Refer to CHG-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.MEASURE “B” TERMINAL VOLTAGE E
Start engine. With engine running at 2,500 rpm, measure “B” terminal voltage.
What voltage does the measurement result show? F
Less than 13.0 V>>GO TO 8.
More than 16.0 V>>Replace generator. Refer to CHG-23, "Removal and Installation".
8.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION G
9.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON) I
1. Disconnect generator connector and apply ground to “L” terminal.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate? J
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) K
Check “L” terminal circuit (OPEN). Refer to CHG-18, "Diagnosis Procedure".

L
>> Repair as needed.
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-15 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION

Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair battery terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for
proper testing procedures.
2.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuse and fusible link.
Unit Power source (Power supply terminals) Fuse or Fusible Link

Battery (terminal 3) Fuse 24
Generator
Battery (terminal 1) Fusible Link A
Combination meter Ignition switch ON (terminal 2) Fuse 3
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
3.CHECK GENERATOR GROUND TERMINAL CONNECTION
Check if connector F4 terminal 5 is clean.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair connection.
4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION
Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-115, "Drive Belt".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-16 2014 Note
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
B
“B” terminal circuit supplies power to charge the battery and to operate the vehicles electrical system.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009446808 C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, "Wiring Diagram". D
1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION E

2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair terminal “B” connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using the EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for G
2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between generator “B” terminal and ground. H
(+)
Voltage I
Generator (-)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 1 Ground Battery voltage
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness for open between generator and fusible link. K
3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1. Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.
2. Check voltage between battery positive terminal and generator connector “B” terminal. L
(+)
Voltage CHG
Generator (-)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F2 1 Battery positive terminal Less than 0.2V
N
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)"
or CHG-13, "Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)". O
NO >> Check harness between battery and generator for continuity.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-17 2014 Note
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp turns ON when the igni-
tion switch is set to ON or START. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp turns OFF. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunc-
tion is indicated.
Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION

2. Check if “L” terminal is clean and tight.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to applicable Instruction Manual for proper
testing procedures.
2.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
1. Disconnect the generator connector.
2. Apply ground to generator harness connector terminal.
3. Check condition of the charge warning lamp with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Generator Condition
Connector Terminal Ground Ignition switch position Charge warning lamp
F1 2 ON Illuminate
Does it illuminate?
YES >> “L” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
2. Disconnect the combination meter connector.
3. Check continuity between generator harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Generator Combination meter

Continuity
F1 2 M24 38 Yes
is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the harness or connectors.
1. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.
2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-18 2014 Note
(+) A
Voltage
Combination meter (-) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
When the ignition
M24 28 Ground Battery voltage
switch is in ON position
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".
D
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-19 2014 Note
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
The terminal “L” circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp turns ON when the igni-
tion switch is set to ON or START. When the generator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp turns off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunc-
tion is indicated.
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to CHG-6, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)

2. Disconnect generator connector.
Does charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or CHG-13, "Work Flow (With-
out EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)".
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
3. Disconnect generator connector.
4. Check continuity between the generator harness connector and ground.
Generator
Continuity
F1 2 No
YES >> Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-20 2014 Note
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
A
The output voltage of the generator is controlled by the IC regulator at terminal “S” detecting the input voltage B
from battery.
The “S” terminal circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the generator output voltage with the IC voltage
regulator.
C
D
Regarding Wiring Diagram information. Refer to CHG-6, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION E

2. Check if “S” terminal is clean and tight. F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Charging system test G
using EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI (if available). Refer to the applicable Instruction Manual for
2.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT H
Check voltage between generator harness connector and ground.
(+) I
Voltage
Generator (-) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
J
YES >> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)" or CHG-13, "Work Flow (With- K
out EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)".
NO >> Check harness for open between generator and fuse.
L
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-21 2014 Note
CHARGING SYSTEM
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom Reference
Battery discharged
The charge warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition
switch is set to ON.
Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow (With EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)"
The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine or CHG-13, "Work Flow (Without EXP-800 NI or GR8-1200 NI)".
starts.
The charging warning lamp turns ON when increasing the engine
speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-22 2014 Note
GENERATOR
GENERATOR
B
H
AWGIA0293ZZ
1. Generator bracket 2. Tensioner Idler pulley 3. Generator

4. “B” terminal harness 5. Generator harness connector I
J
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the radiator core support upper. DLK-122, "RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal K
and Installation".
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect generator harness connector. L
5. Remove “B” terminal nut and disconnect “B” terminal harness.
6. Remove the generator bolts.
CHG
7. Remove the generator.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage surrounding parts when removing generator from the vehicle.
N
8. Remove bolts and remove generator bracket if necessary.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the generator bracket (if removed), using the following O
procedure.
a. Temporarily tighten bolt (1).
b. Temporarily tighten bolt (2). P
c. Tighten bolts to specification in numerical order as shown.
JMMIA0463ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-23 2014 Note
GENERATOR
2. Install the generator using the following procedure.

a. Temporarily tighten the generator bolts in order from the lower to the upper.
b. Tighten the generator bolts to the specification starting with the top bolt.
c. Install “B” terminal harness and "B" terminal nut.
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten "B" terminal nut carefully.
Installation of the remaining components is the reverse order of removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-24 2014 Note
Generator INFOID:0000000009385613
B
Model* A002TJ1791ZC
C
Manufacturer Mitsubishi
Nominal rating 13.5V - 110A
Ground polarity Negative D
Minimum revolution under no-load 1,000 rpm
More than 27A/1,300 rpm
Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied) More than 95A/2,500 rpm E
More than 116A/5,000 rpm
* : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
F
CHG

GETtheMANUALS.org
CHG-25 2014 Note
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
CL
A
B
SECTION
CLUTCH C
CL
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................11 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ........................ 12

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................12
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .........................................12
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................13
General Precautions ................................................. 2
CLUTCH PIPING ............................................... 14 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 Exploded View .........................................................14
Hydraulic Layout ......................................................14
PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................14 I
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 Inspection and Adjustment ......................................15
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4 UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 16

J
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER) ....... 16
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4 Exploded View .........................................................16
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................16 K
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................17
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER ............ 18
CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................. 5 Exploded View .........................................................18 L
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 5 Removal and Installation .........................................18
Inspection ................................................................19
CLUTCH FLUID ................................................... 6
M
Inspection .................................................................. 6 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Draining ..................................................................... 6 (SDS) ............................................................ 21
Refilling ..................................................................... 7
Air Bleeding ............................................................... 8 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS N
(SDS) ................................................................. 21
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 10 General Specifications .............................................21
CLUTCH PEDAL ................................................10 Clutch Pedal ............................................................21 O
Clutch Disc ..............................................................21
Exploded View ........................................................ 10
Clutch Cover ............................................................21
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000009417548
WARNING:
After cleaning clutch disc, wipe it with a dust collector. Do not use compressed air.
CAUTION:
• Always use recommended clutch fluid. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
• Keep painted surface on the body and other parts free of clutch fluid. If fluid spills, wipe up immedi-
ately and wash the affected area with water.
• Do not use mineral oils, such as gasoline or kerosene. It will ruin the rubber parts of the hydraulic
system.
• Do not reuse CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
when removing transaxle assembly. At this time, dust on the sliding parts may damage the seal of
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leakage. Refer to CL-16, "Removal and Installation".
• Do not disassemble clutch master cylinder and CSC.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B

C
Clutch aligner Installing clutch disc
CL
E
MCIB0404E
PIIB1407E
ST20050240 Adjusting unevenness of diaphragm spring le- H

( — ) ver
Diaphragm adjusting wrench
ZZA0508D J

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-3 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000009417551
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If nec-
essary, repair or replace these parts.
EM-85
CL-17
CL-19
CL-18
CL-5
CL-8
Reference page
CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) (Worn, dirty or damaged)

CLUTCH PEDAL (Inspection and adjustment)
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Out of tip alignment)

CLUTCH DISC (Lack of spline grease)
CLUTCH DISC (Runout is excessive)
DIAPHRAGM SPRING (Damaged)

CLUTCH DISC (Dirty or burned)
PRESSURE PLATE (Distortion)

CLUTCH DISC (Lining broken)
SUSPECTED PARTS (Possible cause)
ENGINE MOUNTING (Loose)
CLUTCH DISC (Out of true)
CLUTCH DISC (Hardened)

CLUTCH DISC (Worn out)
CLUTCH LINE (Air in line)
FLYWHEEL (Distortion)
CLUTCH DISC (Oily)
Clutch grabs/chatters 1 2 2 2 2 2
Clutch pedal spongy 1 2
Symptom Clutch noisy 1
Clutch slips 1 2 2 3 4 5
Clutch does not disengage 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 5

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-4 2014 Note
CLUTCH PEDAL
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE A
CLUTCH PEDAL
B
1. Check to see if the master cylinder rod end ( ) moves freely. It

should not be bound by the clutch pedal. C
a. If the master cylinder rod end ( ) does not move freely, remove
the master cylinder rod end ( ) and check for deformation or
damage on the master cylinder rod end ( ). Leave the master CL
cylinder rod end ( ) removed.
PCIB1491E
F
2. Check the clutch pedal stroke for free range of movement.
a. With the master cylinder rod end removed, manually move the pedal up and down to determine if it moves
freely.
G
b. If any sticking is noted, replace the clutch pedal assembly. Re-verify that the master cylinder rod end
moves freely.
3. Adjust clutch interlock switch (1) position so that clearance H

between clutch pedal (2) and thread end of clutch interlock
switch (1), with clutch pedal fully depressed, is within specifica-
tion (C). I
Clearance (C) : Refer to CL-21, "Clutch Pedal".

J
PCIB1493E
4. Check the clutch hydraulic system components (clutch master cylinder, clutch pedal and CSC (Concentric O
Slave Cylinder) for sticking or binding.
a. If any sticking or binding is noted, repair or replace the related parts as necessary.
b. If any hydraulic system repair was necessary, bleed the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-8, "Air P
Bleeding".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-5 2014 Note
CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID LEAKS

• Check clutch line for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged parts.
• Check for clutch fluid leaks by fully depressing clutch pedal while engine is running.
CAUTION:
If leaks occur around connections, reinstall the lines or replace damaged parts, if necessary.
CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL
• Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the
specified range, between the MAX and MIN lines as shown.
• Visually check for any clutch fluid leaks around the reservoir tank.
• Check the clutch system for any leaks if the clutch fluid level is
extremely low (lower than MIN).
JPFIA0007ZZ
Draining INFOID:0000000009417554
CAUTION:
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
affected area with water.
1. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding con-
nector (1).
JPDIB0144ZZ
2. Press the lock pin (1) into the bleeding connector (2), and main-
tain the position.
PCIB1495E

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-6 2014 Note
CLUTCH FLUID
3. Slide clutch tube (1) for the specified distance (A) in the direction
of the arrow ( ) as shown. A
(2) : Bleeding connector

B
Dimension (A) : 5 mm (0.20 in)
CAUTION:
Do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the bleed- C
ing connector.
JPDIB0147ZZ
CL
4. Depress clutch pedal to gradually discharge clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
E
bleeding connector.
F
CAUTION:
G
1. Check that there is no foreign material in reservoir tank and then fill with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding con- H
nector (1).
JPDIB0144ZZ
K
tain the position. L
PCIB1495E

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-7 2014 Note
CLUTCH FLUID
of the arrow ( ) as shown.
JPDIB0147ZZ
5. Slowly depress clutch pedal to the full stroke position and then release the pedal.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the clutch tube to disconnect from the
bleeding connector.
6. Repeat step 5 at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new clutch fluid is discharged.
CAUTION:
Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
7. Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions while clutch pedal is depressed.
8. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-8, "Air Bleeding".
Air Bleeding INFOID:0000000009417556
CAUTION:
• Monitor clutch fluid level in reservoir tank so as not to empty the tank.
• Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If clutch fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash
the affected area with water.
1. Fill reservoir tank with new clutch fluid.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse drained clutch fluid.
2. Connect a transparent vinyl hose to air bleeder of bleeding con-
nector (1).
3. Depress and release the clutch pedal slowly and fully 15 times
at an interval of 2 to 3 seconds and release the clutch pedal.
JPDIB0144ZZ
tain the position.
CAUTION:
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector.
PCIB1495E

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-8 2014 Note
CLUTCH FLUID
of the arrow ( ) as shown and immediately depress the clutch A
pedal and hold it, to bleed the air from the system.

B

CAUTION: C
Clutch tube is under hydraulic pressure; do not allow the
clutch tube to disconnect from the bleeding connector. JPDIB0147ZZ
CL
6. Return clutch tube and lock pin in their original positions.
7. Release clutch pedal and wait for 5 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until no bubbles are observed in the clutch fluid. E
9. Check that the clutch fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer
to CL-6, "Inspection".
F

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-9 2014 Note
CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH PEDAL
AWDIA0944GB
1. Clutch pedal 2. Pedal stopper rubber 3. Pedal pad

4. Clutch interlock switch 5. Clip 6. ASCD cancel switch
7. Clip Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect master cylinder rod end ( ) from clutch pedal.
PCIB1491E
3. Disconnect ASCD cancel switch and clutch interlock switch harness connector
4. Remove harness clip from clutch pedal.
5. Remove clutch pedal nuts and remove clutch pedal.
6. Remove pedal pad from clutch pedal.
7. Remove clutch interlock switch and clip from clutch pedal.
8. Remove pedal stopper rubber from clutch pedal using a suitable tool.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Press master cylinder rod end into clutch pedal until it stops.
GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-10 2014 Note
CLUTCH PEDAL
A
• Check clutch pedal for bend, damage, or a cracked weld. If bend, damage, or a cracked weld is found,
replace clutch pedal. B
• Check pedal stopper rubber. If damage or deformation is found, replace pedal stopper rubber.
• Check pedal pad. If wear or damage is found, replace pedal pad.
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION C
Inspect the clutch interlock switch position and adjust as necessary. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjust-
ment".
CL

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-11 2014 Note
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
JPDIB0222ZZ
1. Reservoir hose 2. Master cylinder
CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble clutch master cylinder.
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Remove battery. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove air cleaner and air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove ECM bracket nuts (A).
: Front
JPDIB0233ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-12 2014 Note
5. Remove master cylinder rod end ( ) from clutch pedal.
6. Use one of the following methods to remove reservoir hose from A
master cylinder.
• Drain clutch fluid from reservoir tank and remove reservoir
hose. Refer to CL-6, "Draining". B
• Remove hose from master cylinder.
PCIB1491E
CL
7. Pull up the lock pin (1) from connector of master cylinder (2) and
separate clutch tube (3).
8. Rotate master cylinder clockwise by 45 degrees and then E
remove master cylinder from the vehicle.
G
JPDIB0169ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
Do not spill clutch fluid onto painted surfaces. If fluid spills, wipe up immediately and wash the
1. With the nipple (1) rotated clockwise by 45 degrees, insert clutch I
master cylinder into the mounting hole. Rotate the clutch master
cylinder counterclockwise by 45 degrees (A) as shown to secure
it. At this time, nipple is in the upward (B). J
2. Install master cylinder rod end to clutch pedal.
CAUTION:
Press master cylinder rod end into clutch pedal until it
stops. K
3. Install reservoir hose to master cylinder.
4. Press down the lock pin into connector of master cylinder until it
L
stops. JPDIB0114ZZ
5. Install clutch tube into connector of master cylinder until it stops.

6. Fill with clutch fluid and bleed clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-7, "Refilling". M
7. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
N
Check for clutch fluid leaks and check the fluid level. Refer to CL-6, "Inspection".
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-13 2014 Note
CLUTCH PIPING
CLUTCH PIPING
JPDIB0181ZZ
1. CSC (Concentric Slave Cylinder) 2. Clip 3. Clutch tube

4. Clutch damper 5. Bracket 6. Master cylinder
Hydraulic Layout INFOID:0000000009417564
PCIB1499E
1. Clutch tube 2. Lock pin 3. CSC (concentric slave cylinder)

4. Clutch damper 5. Master cylinder 6. Clutch pedal
CAUTION:
NOTE:
ing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-14 2014 Note
CLUTCH PIPING
REMOVAL
1. Remove the battery. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)". A
2. Use one of the following methods to remove hose from clutch master cylinder.
• Drain clutch fluid from reservoir tank and remove hose. Refer to CL-6, "Draining".
• Remove hose from clutch master cylinder. B
3. Remove clutch tube lock pin from clutch master cylinder.
4. Remove clutch tube lock pin at clutch housing.
C
5. Remove clutch tube lock pins (2) from clutch damper (3).
6. Remove clutch tube (1) from clutch damper (3).
7. Remove clutch damper (3) from bracket (4). CL
F
WCIA0597E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not damage clutch tube.
• Insert each clutch tube into the CSC bleeding connector, the clutch damper connector, and the clutch master
cylinder connector until it contacts the end of each connector. H
• Install each lock pin into the clutch damper connector and the clutch master cylinder connector until it con-
tacts the end of each connector.
• After installation, bleed the air from the clutch hydraulic system. Refer to CL-8, "Air Bleeding". I
J
• Check the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the clutch tube has cracks or damage, replace it with a new
one.
• Check the O-ring of the clutch tube for cracks and damage. If the O-ring of the clutch tube has cracks or K
damage, replace clutch tube with a new one.
• Check the clutch damper for cracks and damage. If the clutch damper has cracks or damage, replace it with
a new one. L
Check for clutch fluid leaks and check the clutch fluid level. Refer to CL-6, "Inspection".
M

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-15 2014 Note
CSC (CONCENTRIC SLAVE CYLINDER)
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
JPDIB0146GB
1. Transaxle assembly 2. CSC (concentric slave cylinder)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC (concentric slave cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leaks.
• Do not disassemble CSC.
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove CSC bolts and the CSC from clutch housing.
PCIB1498E
INSTALLATION
1. Install CSC to clutch housing and then tighten CSC bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-16 2014 Note
• Do not insert and operate CSC when transaxle is removed. Piston and stopper of CSC compo-
nents may fall off. A
2. Install engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, "Removal and Installation".
B
Check for clutch fluid leaks and clutch fluid level. Refer to CL-6, "Inspection".
C
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to CL-8, "Air Bleeding".
CL

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-17 2014 Note
CLUTCH DISC AND CLUTCH COVER
AWDIA0948GB
1. Flywheel 2. Clutch disc 3. Clutch cover

4. Input shaft A. First step B. Final step
: Apply lithium-based grease including molybdenum disulphide.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse CSC (concentric slave cylinder). CSC slides back to the original position every time
CSC and may cause clutch fluid leaks.
• Do not allow any grease to contact the clutch disc facing, pressure plate surface and flywheel sur-
face.
• Do not clean clutch disc using solvent.
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, "Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen clutch cover bolts evenly. Then remove clutch cover and clutch disc.
INSTALLATION
1. Clean clutch disc and input shaft splines to remove grease and dust caused by abrasion.
2. Apply recommended grease to clutch disc and input shaft splines.
CAUTION:
Be sure to apply grease to the points specified. Otherwise, noise, poor disengagement, or damage
to the clutch may result. Excessive grease may cause slip or shudder. If grease adheres to seal of
CSC, it may cause clutch fluid leaks. Wipe off excess grease. Wipe off any grease oozing from the
parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-18 2014 Note
3. Install clutch disc, using suitable tool (A).
4. Install clutch cover and then temporarily tighten clutch cover A
bolts.
5. Tighten clutch cover bolts to the specified torque evenly in two
steps in the numerical order as shown. B
6. Install engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23,
C
PCIB1503E
CL
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL E

Clutch Disc
• Measure clutch facing runout. If it is outside the specification,
replace clutch disc. F
Runout limit/diameter of the area : Refer to CL-21,

to be measured "Clutch Disc".
G
• Measure spline backlash at outer edge of clutch disc. If it is outside
the specification, replace clutch disc.
H
Maximum allowable spline back- : Refer to CL-21,
lash (at outer edge of disc) "Clutch Disc".
SCL221
I
• Measure the depth (A) to clutch disc facing rivet heads, using suit-
able tool. If it exceeds the allowable wear limit, replace clutch disc.
J
Facing wear limit (depth to the : Refer to CL-21,
rivet head) (A) "Clutch Disc".
K
L
JPDIB0026ZZ
Clutch Cover
• Check clutch cover thrust ring for wear or damage. If wear or damage is found, replace clutch cover. M
NOTE:
• Worn thrust ring will generate a beating noise when tapped at the rivet using suitable tool.
• Broken thrust ring will make a clinking sound when cover is shaken up and down. N
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the clutch cover pressure plate to clutch disc contact surface,
repair the surface with sandpaper. If surface is damaged or distorted, replace clutch cover.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION O
Clutch Cover

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-19 2014 Note
Check diaphragm spring levers for unevenness with the clutch cover
installed on the engine. If they exceed the tolerance, adjust dia-
phragm spring lever height, using suitable tool (A).
Tolerance for diaphragm spring : Refer to CL-21,

lever unevenness "Clutch Cover".
JPDIB0160ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-20 2014 Note
General Specifications INFOID:0000000009417573
B
Unit: mm (in)
Engine type HR16DE C

Type of clutch control Hydraulic
Clutch disc Facing size (Outer dia. × Inner dia. × Thickness) 200 × 140 × 3.1 (7.87 × 5.51 × 0.122)
Recommended clutch fluid Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants". CL
Clutch Pedal INFOID:0000000009417574
E
Unit: mm (in)
Engine type HR16DE

Clearance between clutch pedal and clutch interlock switch F
0.2 – 1.96 (0.01 – 0.08)
threaded end while clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Clutch Disc INFOID:0000000009417575

G
Unit: mm (in)
Engine type HR16DE

H
Clutch facing runout limit / diameter of the area to be measured 1.0 (0.039) / 190 (7.48) dia.
Maximum allowable spline backlash (at outer edge of disc) 0.8 (0.031)
Clutch facing wear limit (depth to the rivet head) 0.3 (0.012) I
Clutch Cover INFOID:0000000009417576
Unit: mm (in) J
Engine type HR16DE
Tolerance for diaphragm spring lever unevenness 0.7 (0.028) or less
K

GETtheMANUALS.org
CL-21 2014 Note
ENGINE
CO
A
CO
SECTION
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
HR16DE RADIATOR CAP ........................................................12 F
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection ..................................12
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
RADIATOR .................................................................12
G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 RADIATOR : Inspection ...........................................12
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 14
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 H
RADIATOR ........................................................ 14
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 Exploded View .........................................................14
I
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 COOLING FAN .................................................. 17
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................17
Removal and Installation .........................................17 J
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................18
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 4 WATER PUMP .................................................. 19

Exploded View .........................................................19 K
Engine Cooling System ............................................. 4
Engine Cooling System Schematic ........................... 5 Removal and Installation .........................................19
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 6 THERMOSTAT .................................................. 21 L

Exploded View .........................................................21
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 6 Removal and Installation .........................................21
Troubleshooting Chart ............................................... 6
WATER OUTLET .............................................. 24 M
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8 Exploded View .........................................................24
ENGINE COOLANT ............................................ 8 N
Inspection .................................................................. 8 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Draining Engine Coolant ........................................... 8 (SDS) ............................................................ 26
Refilling ..................................................................... 9
Flushing Cooling System ........................................ 11 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS O
(SDS) ................................................................. 26
RADIATOR .........................................................12 Standard and Limit ..................................................26
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [HR16DE]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [HR16DE]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
CO
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may from those of special service tools illustrated here.
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
KV991J0070 Refilling engine cooling system
(J-45695) D
Coolant refill tool
LMA053
F
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
(J-33984-A) and radiator filler neck
Radiator cap tester adapter a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia. G
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
H
S-NT564

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts J
PIIB1407E L
Radiator cap tester Checking radiator and radiator cap
N
PBIC1982E

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-3 2014 Note
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [HR16DE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System INFOID:0000000009444912
M/T models
JSBIA1096GB
CVT models
JSBIA1297GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-4 2014 Note
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System Schematic INFOID:0000000009444913
A
M/T models
CO
AWBIA1141GB
I
CVT models
AWBIA1142GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-5 2014 Note
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000009444914
Symptom Check items

Water pump malfunction Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed Thermostat
Dust contamination or pa-
Poor heat transfer Damaged fins per clogging —
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling Excess foreign material
tube (rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not oper-
ate
Reduced air flow High resistance to fan rota- Fan assembly —
tion
Damaged fan blades
Damaged radiator shroud — Radiator shroud —
Improper engine coolant
Cooling sys- — Engine coolant viscosity —
mixture ratio
tem parts
malfunction Poor engine coolant quality — Periodic maintenance —
Loose clamp
Cooling hose
Cracked hose
Water pump Poor sealing
Loose
Radiator cap
Poor sealing
Engine coolant leaks
O-ring for damage, deterio-
Insufficient engine coolant ration or improper fitting
Radiator
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank Cracked reservoir tank
Cylinder head deterioration
Exhaust gas leaking into
Overflowing reservoir tank Cylinder head gasket deteri-
cooling system
oration

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-6 2014 Note
Symptom Check items
A
High engine rpm under no
load
Driving in low gear for ex-
Abusive driving CO
tended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
— Overload on engine C
Power train system mal-
function
Except cool- Installed improper size

wheels and tires — D
ing system
parts mal- Dragging brakes
function
Improper ignition timing
E
Blocked bumper Installed front bumper fas-
cia cover
Blocked radiator grille Mud contamination or paper
Blocked or restricted air clogging F
—
flow
Blocked radiator
Blocked condenser Blocked air flow
G
Installed large fog lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-7 2014 Note
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE > [HR16DE]
ENGINE COOLANT
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES

Check hoses for the following:
• Improper attachment
• Leaks
• Cracks
• Damage
• Loose connections
• Chafing
• Deterioration
CHECKING RESERVOIR LEVEL
• Check that the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the
MAX (A) to MIN (B) range when the engine is cool.
• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.
CAUTION:
Refill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant or
equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
JPBIA0102ZZ
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS

WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt.
To check for leaks, apply pressure to the cooling system using suit-
able tool (A) and Tool (B).
Tool number (B) : EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Testing pressure : Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
PBIC5121J
Draining Engine Coolant INFOID:0000000009515750
WARNING:
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly push down and
turn it a quarter turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by pushing it down
and turning it all the way.
1. Remove front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-8 2014 Note
ENGINE COOLANT
2. Connect a suitable hose to the radiator drain plug.
• Use a suitable hose with the dimensions as shown. A
Diameter (A) : 0.8 mm (0.31 in)

Length (B) : 300 mm (11.81 in) CO
JPBIA4770ZZ
D
3. Open radiator drain plug (A) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
(A): Suitable hose
: Front E
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when engine is cold.
• Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt. F
G
ALBIA1140ZZ
4. It is necessary to drain the cylinder block when draining all of engine coolant in the system. To drain the
cylinder block, open the water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant". H
5. Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
6. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated, I
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-11, "Flushing Cooling System".
J
1. Install the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank and cylinder block drain plug, if removed for a total
system drain or for engine removal or repair.
• The radiator must be completely empty of engine coolant and water. K
• Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
L
Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
2. If disconnected, reattach the upper radiator hose at the engine side.
M
3. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition ON with
the engine OFF as necessary to activate the heater mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-9 2014 Note
ENGINE COOLANT
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the
radiator neck opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly
with the refill tube and the venturi assembly to the radiator cap
adapter.
Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695)

5. Insert the refill hose into the engine coolant mixture container
that is placed at floor level. Make sure the ball valve is in the
closed position.
• Use recommended engine coolant or equivalent.
Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Engine coolant capacity : Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and

(with reservoir tank) Lubricants".
CAUTION:
Do not use any cooling system additives such as radiator
sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause
damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must
be within specification.
LLIA0058E
Compressed air : 549 - 824 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2,
supply pressure 80 - 119 psi)
CAUTION:
The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open
the ball valve on the refill hose slightly. Engine coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill
hose is full of engine coolant, close the ball valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches

of vacuum. The gauge may not reach 28 inches in high altitude
locations, use the vacuum specifications based on the altitude
above sea level.
Altitude above sea level Vacuum gauge reading

0 - 100 m (328 ft) : 28 inches of vacuum
300 m (984 ft) : 27 inches of vacuum
500 m (1,641 ft) : 26 inches of vacuum
1,000 m (3,281 ft) : 24 - 25 inches of vacuum LLIA0057E
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20 seconds
to see if the system loses any vacuum. If the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the
system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the engine coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the radia-
tor. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so the engine coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling sys-
tem. The cooling system is full when the vacuum gauge reads zero.
CAUTION:
Do not allow the engine coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being drawn
into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening.
12. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level and install the radiator cap. Run the engine to
warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary.
13. Install the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-10 2014 Note
ENGINE COOLANT
Flushing Cooling System INFOID:0000000009509391
A
1. Install radiator drain plug and reservoir tank, if removed.
Radiator drain plug : Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View". CO

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
2. If water drain plugs on cylinder block were removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded C
View".
3. Remove air duct from between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-26,
"Removal and Installation". D
4. Disconnect heater hose (1) at location ( ) as shown.
• Position heater hose as high as possible.
: Front E
G
JSBIA0616ZZ
5. Fill radiator until engine coolant flows out of the disconnected heater hose and then reconnect the heater H
hose.
6. Finish filling the engine and reservoir tank with water and reinstall the radiator cap.
7. Install air duct in between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-26, "Removal I
and Installation".
8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load. J
10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator. K

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-11 2014 Note
RADIATOR
RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection INFOID:0000000009444919
• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.
(B) : Metal plunger

- Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the
edge of the black rubber gasket.
- Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign mate-
rial are on the black rubber gasket or the metal retainer.
NOTE:
Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy
residue or foreign material.
JPBIA0108ZZ
• Pull negative-pressure valve to open it, and check that it closes

completely when released.
- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
- Check that there are no abnormalities in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.
SMA967B
• Check radiator cap relief pressure using suitable tool (A) and Tool
(B).
Tool number : EG17650301 (J-33984-A)
Standard and Limit : Refer to CO-26, "Standard and

Limit".
- When connecting the radiator cap to Tool (B), apply water or
engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
- Replace the radiator cap if there is an abnormality in the negative- PBIC5122J
pressure valve, or if the open-valve pressure is outside of the stan-
dard values.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection INFOID:0000000009509402
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts in order to access the radia-
tor core. Then tape harness and harness connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Spray water to the back side of the radiator core using a side to side motion from the top down.
2. Stop spraying when debris no longer flows from radiator.
3. Blow air into the back side of radiator core using side to side motion from the top down.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81
in).
4. Continue to blow air until no water sprays out.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-12 2014 Note
RADIATOR
5. Check for engine coolant leaks. Repair if necessary.
A
CO

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-13 2014 Note
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HR16DE]

RADIATOR
AWBIA1144GB
1. Reservoir tank hose 2. Reservoir tank cap 3. Reservoir tank

4. Mounting rubber (lower) 5. O-ring 6. Drain plug
7. Radiator 8. Cooling fan assembly 9. Clamp
10. Radiator hose (lower) 11. Clamp 12. Oil cooler hose
13. Radiator hose to water outlet (upper) 14. Radiator cap adapter 15. Radiator cap
16. Radiator cap adapter bracket 17. Clamp 18. Radiator hose (upper) to radiator
19. Mounting rubber (upper) 20. CVT cooler hose 21. Clamp
21. Clamp 22. Clamp 23. CVT cooler hose
24. Clamp A. To water inlet B. To water outlet
C. To oil cooler
REMOVAL
WARNING:
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
NOTE:
ing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-14 2014 Note
RADIATOR
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
CAUTION: A
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". CO
3. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Exploded View".
4. Remove radiator hose (lower).
5. Remove radiator hose (upper) from water outlet. C
6. Remove the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
7. Remove the front grille. Refer toEXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
8. Disconnect reservoir tank hose, and remove reservoir tank. D
9. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor, and move harness aside.
10. Remove radiator core support (upper). Refer to DLK-122, "RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
E
11. Remove the condenser bolts and place aside. Refer to HA-29, "Exploded View".
12. Remove radiator hose (upper) from radiator.
F
13. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the radiator.
G
14. Disconnect CVT cooler lines.
15. Remove the radiator from bottom of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
When removing, do not damage or scratch radiator core or A/C condenser. H
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
• Insert the radiator hose (1) all the way to the stopper (2) or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper) as
shown. J
M
JPBIA4294GB
1. Radiator hose 2. Stopper

N
A. Radiator side B. Engine side
• The correct orientation of the hose clamps are as shown.

O
Radiator hose Hose end Paint mark Position of hose clamp*
Radiator side Upper A
Radiator hose (upper) P
Engine side Upper B
Radiator side Lower C
Radiator hose (lower)
Engine side Upper D
*: Refer to the illustrations for the specific position for each hose clamp tab.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-15 2014 Note
RADIATOR
JSBIA1299ZZ
A. View A B. View B C. View C

D View D E. View E f. 45°
: Vehicle upper
• The angle (b) created by the hose clamp pawl and the specified
line (A) must be within ±30° as shown.
JPBIA4295ZZ
• To install hose clamps (1), check that the dimension (A) from the
end of the hose clamp on the radiator hose to the hose clamp is
within the reference value.
Dimension (A) : 3 – 7 mm (0.12 – 0.28 in)
CAUTION:
• When installing do not damage or scratch radiator core or A/C
condenser.
• Replace water hose clamp if it is removed.
• Use only Genuine NISSAN bolts for the cooling fan assembly JPBIA3527ZZ
and strictly follow the tightening torque. Over tightening may

damage the radiator.
• Check for engine coolant leaks. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually inspect for engine coolant leaks. Repair as necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-16 2014 Note
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
A
CO
G
AWBIA1140GB
1. Fan shroud 2. Fan motor 3. Cooling fan

A. Cooling fan nut L. Genuine NISSAN high strength lock-
H
ing sealant

I
REMOVAL
WARNING: J
K
NOTE:
ing.
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant". L
CAUTION:
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt. M
2. Disconnect battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the front grille. Refer toEXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View". N
5. Disconnect harness connector from fan motor, and move harness aside.
6. Remove radiator core support (upper). Refer to DLK-122, "RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
Removal and Installation". O
7. Remove cooling fan assembly. Refer to CO-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch the radiator. P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Only use Genuine NISSAN parts for the fan shroud bolt.
NOTE:
Cooling fan assembly is controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-35, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description".
GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-17 2014 Note
COOLING FAN
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove cooling fan nut, and then remove the cooling fan.
2. Remove fan motor.
Cooling fan and shroud
Inspect cooling fan and shroud for nicks, cracks, breaks and warping. Replace if necessary.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Genuine NISSAN high strength thread locking sealant on fan motor shaft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-18 2014 Note
WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP
A
CO
G
JPBIA4104GB
1. Gasket 2. Water pump 3. Water pump pulley

H
WARNING: I
J
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
CAUTION: K
2. Remove front wheel and tire (RH) using power tool. Refer to WT-5, "Adjustment". L
3. Remove front fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
4. Loosen water pump pulley bolts before loosening belt tension of drive belt.
5. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, "Removal and Installation". M
6. Remove water pump pulley.
7. Remove water pump.
• Loosen water pump bolts in reverse order as shown. N
• Engine coolant will leak from cylinder block, so have a recep-
tacle ready below.
CAUTION: O
• Do not allow water pump vane to contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and must be
replaced as an assembly.
P
KBIA3393J

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-19 2014 Note
WATER PUMP
• Visually check for significant dirt or rust on the water pump body
and vane (A) and replace as necessary.
• Check that the vane shaft turns smoothly by hand and is not
excessively loose.
• Replace the water pump assembly if the water pump does not per-
form properly.
PBIC3808E
INSTALLATION
• Tighten water pump bolts in order as shown.
CAUTION:
• Do not allow the water pump vane to contact any other parts.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and must be replaced as
an assembly.
• Do not reuse gasket.
• Sealing surface must be clean and free of dents or flaws.
KBIA3393J

• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks
at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points.
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide
may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is normal. Noise will stop
after hydraulic pressure rises.
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids, including
engine oil and engine coolant.
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels, including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to spec-
ified level, if necessary.
• Summary of the inspection items:
Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped

Engine coolant Level Leaks Level
Engine oil Level Leaks Level
Transmission/ CVT Models Leaks Level/Leaks Leaks

transaxle fluid M/T Models Level/Leaks Leaks Level/Leaks
Other oils and fluids* Level Leaks Level
Fuel Leaks Leaks Leaks
Exhaust gas — Leaks —
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-20 2014 Note
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
A
CO
G
PBIC3810E
1. Radiator hose (lower) 2. Water inlet 3. Rubber ring

4. Thermostat A. To radiator
H
I
WARNING:
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a J
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant". K
CAUTION:
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belt. L
2. Remove air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet. Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
4. Remove water inlet, thermostat, and rubber ring. M
NOTE:
Engine coolant will leak from cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL N
Thermostat
• Place a thread (A) so that it is caught in the valves of thermostat
(1). Immerse fully in a container (B) filled with water. Heat while O
stirring.
• The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the
valve opens and falls from the thread. P
• Continue heating. Check the full open valve lift amount.
• After checking the maximum valve lift amount, lower the water
temperature and check the valve closing temperature.
Standard: Refer to CO-26, "Standard and

Limit". PBIC3314J
• If out of the standard specification range, replace the thermostat.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-21 2014 Note
THERMOSTAT
INSTALLATION
Thermostat
• Install thermostat making sure rubber ring (1) groove fits securely
to thermostat flange (A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse rubber ring.
JPBIA4229ZZ
• Install thermostat (2) into the cylinder block (1) with jiggle valve (A)
facing upward.
PBIC3812E
Water Inlet
After installation, attach the water inlet clip (A) on the oil level gauge
guide (1) positioned at location (B) as shown.
PBIC3755E

quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants".
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-22 2014 Note
THERMOSTAT
Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped A

CO
Other oils and fluids* Level Leaks Level C
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. D

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-23 2014 Note
WATER OUTLET
WATER OUTLET
M/T model
AWBIA1582ZZ
1. Engine coolant temperature sensor 2. Clamp 3. Gasket

4. Clamp 5. Bracket 6. Clamp
7. Water outlet 8. Clamp 9. Clamp
A. From electric throttle control actuator B. To radiator C. From heater core
D. To heater core E. To electric throttle control actuator D. To heater core
Front
CVT model
AWBIA1583ZZ
1. Engine coolant temperature sensor 2. Clamp 3. Gasket

4. Clamp 5. Bracket 6. Clamp
7. Water outlet 8. Clamp 9. Clamp
10. Clamp A. From electric throttle control actuator B. To radiator
C. To heater core / CVT oil warmer D. To CVT oil warmer E. To heater core
F. To electric throttle control actuator Front

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-24 2014 Note
WATER OUTLET
A
WARNING:
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator cap. Slowly turn it a CO
NOTE:
ing. C
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant". D
CAUTION:
E
2. Remove air ducts and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect radiator hose (upper). Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect harness connector from engine coolant temperature sensor. F
5. Disconnect water hoses and heater hoses from water outlet.
6. Remove water outlet.
7. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor from water outlet, if necessary. G
INSTALLATION
H
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to MA-12, "Fluids and Lubricants". I
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leaks at connection points. J
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide K
engine oil and engine coolant. L
ified level, if necessary. M

N
Transmission/ CVT Models Leaks Level/Leaks Leaks O

P

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-25 2014 Note
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [HR16DE]

Standard and Limit INFOID:0000000009444932
Engine coolant capacity (approximate)

Unit: (US qt, Imp qt)
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)* CVT models 7.3 (7-3/4, 6-3/8)
M/T models 6.7 (7-1/8, 5-7/8)
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity (At “MAX” level) 0.7 (3/4, 5/8)
*: Includes reservoir amount.
Radiator
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Cap relief pressure Standard 88 (0.90, 12.8)

Radiator leak test pressure 156 (1.59, 22.6)
Thermostat
Standard
Valve opening temperature 80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F)

Maximum valve lift 8.0 mm/95°C (0.315 in/203°F)
Valve closing temperature 77°C (171°F)

GETtheMANUALS.org
CO-26 2014 Note
DRIVER CONTROLS
DEF
A
B
SECTION
DEFOGGER C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ........... 16

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Description ...............................................................16 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Component Function Check ....................................16
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16
Component Inspection .............................................17
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 3 H
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ............. 18
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 3 Description ...............................................................18
Component Parts Location ........................................ 3 Component Function Check ....................................18 I
Rear window defogger .............................................. 4 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................18
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5
System Description ................................................... 5 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUP- J
PLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .......................... 20
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 6
Description ...............................................................20
COMMON ITEM ........................................................... 6 Component Function Check ....................................20 K
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20
COMMON ITEM) ....................................................... 6 Component Inspection .............................................21
DEF
REAR DEFOGGER ..................................................... 6 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 22
REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
REAR DEFOGGER) ................................................. 7 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 22 M
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............... 8 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22
BCM ..................................................................... 8 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES

N
List of ECU Reference .............................................. 8 NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WINDOW DEFOG-
GER OPERATES .............................................. 23
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 9 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23
O
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ............. 9 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 24
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 9
FILAMENT ......................................................... 24 P
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 13 Inspection and Repair ..............................................24
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........13 CONDENSER .................................................... 26
Work Flow ............................................................... 13 Removal and Installation .........................................26

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-2 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
B
DEF
M
ALLIA1294ZZ
A. Center of instrument panel B. Left side of instrument panel C. Back door lower finisher inside N

• Operates the rear window defogger with the operation of rear window defogger switch. O
• Performs the timer control of rear window defogger.
1. BCM
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed instal-
lation location.
P
2. Rear window defogger Refer to DEF-4, "Rear window defogger".
Front air control (rear window • The rear window defogger switch is turned ON.
3.
defogger switch) • Turns the indicator lamp ON when detecting the operation of rear window defogger.
4. Rear window defogger relay Operates the rear window defogger with the control signal from BCM.
5. Condenser Removes the noise that is generated when the rear window defogger turns ON/OFF.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-3 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Rear window defogger INFOID:0000000009499782
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up.
JMLIA2595GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-4 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
G
ALLIA1291GB
Operation Description H
• When rear window defogger switch is turned ON while ignition switch is ON, the front air control (rear win-
dow defogger switch) transmits rear window defogger switch signal to BCM.
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON when rear window defogger switch signal is received.
• Rear window defogger are supplied with power and operate when rear window defogger relay turns ON. I
• Rear window defogger ON is displayed when front air control receives signals.
Timer function J
• BCM turns rear window defogger relay ON for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch
is turned ON while ignition switch is ON. It makes rear window defogger operate.
• Timer is canceled after pressing rear window defogger switch again during timer operation. Then BCM turns
rear window defogger relay OFF. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation, if the ignition switch K
is turned OFF.
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART DEF
Switch Input signal to BCM BCM function Actuator

Rear window defogger switch Defogger switch signal M
Rear window defogger control Rear window defogger
Ignition switch Ignition signal

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-5 2014 Note
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION

System Sub System

ECU identification
Configuration
Work support
Data Monitor
Active Test

BCM BCM × × × × ×
REAR DEFOGGER

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-6 2014 Note
REAR DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) INFOID:0000000009567629
A
DATA MONITOR

REAR DEF SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear window defogger switch.
C
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item Description D

REAR DEFOGGER This test is able to check rear window defogger operation [Off/On].
DEF

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-7 2014 Note
BCM
BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000009477893
ECU Reference
BCS-28, "Reference Value"
BCS-44, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-46, "DTC Index"

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-8 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
DEF
AALWA0623GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-9 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1366GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-10 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DEF
AALIA1367GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-11 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1368GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-12 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DEF
JMKIA0101GB
DETAILED FLOW

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-13 2014 Note
1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2
2. CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out with CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Is any symptom described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5
3. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real time diagnosis results.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5
4. CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Connect CONSULT to the vehicle in “DATA MONITOR” mode and check real time diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 6
5. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected again.
At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included in Service Manual. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 8
6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform DEF-13, "Work Flow".
>> GO TO 7
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
Detect malfunctioning system according to DEF-5, "System Description" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
>> GO TO 8
GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-14 2014 Note
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE A
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection is also
B
required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure.
YES >> GO TO 9
C
NO >> Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT.
9. REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. D
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. E
>> GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK F
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check
again, and then check that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that G
the symptom is not detected.
Does the symptom reappear?
YES (DTC is detected)>>GO TO 8 H
YES (Symptom remains)>>GO TO 6
I
DEF

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-15 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
• The rear window defogger is operated by pressing the rear window defogger switch ON.
• The indicator lamp in the rear window defogger switch illuminates while the rear window defogger is ON.
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION

2. Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger illuminates with rear window defogger switch ON.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DEF-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK REAR DEFOGGER ON STATUS
1. Using CONSULT, select “BCM (REAR DEFOGGER)”, then “DATA MONITOR” mode.
2. Select “REAR DEF SW” and monitor while pressing the rear DEF switch ON and OFF.
Monitored Item Condition Status

Rear DEF switch ON (LED ON) On
REAR DEF SW
Rear DEF switch OFF (LED OFF) Off
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DEF-9, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL

2. Disconnect front air control connector.
3. Check voltage between front air control harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage (V)
Front air control (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front air control harness connector.
BCM Front air control

Continuity
M18 15 M33 10 Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-16 2014 Note
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
A
BCM
Continuity
M18 15 No B
C
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground. D
Front air control

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
M33 8 Yes
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH G
Refer to DEF-17, "Component Inspection".
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". H
NO >> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
I
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
3. Check continuity between front air control terminals.
Front air control

K
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Yes DEF
10 8 Rear window defogger switch
Released No
YES >> Inspection End. M

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-17 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Power is supplied to the rear window defogger with BCM control.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Check that an operation noise of rear window defogger relay can be heard when turning the rear window
defogger switch ON.
YES >> Rear window defogger relay function is OK.
NO >> Refer to DEF-18, "Diagnosis Procedure"
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect rear window defogger relay connector.
3. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage (V)
Rear window defogger relay (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 10A fuse (No. 5).
YES >> Check ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-22, "Wiring Diagram — Ignition Power Supply —
".
NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear window defogger relay harness connector.
BCM Rear window defogger relay

Continuity
M18 1 M14 2 Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-18 2014 Note
BCM A
Continuity
M18 1 No
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
NO >> Replace rear window defogger relay.
E
F
Check continuity between terminal 3 and 5.
Terminal Condition Continuity

G
12 V direct current supply between terminal 1
Yes
3 and 5 and 2
No current supply No H
I
SEF497Y
DEF

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-19 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window defogger relay to prevent the rear window
from fogging up.
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Check that the heating wire of rear window defogger is heated when turning the rear window defogger switch
ON.
YES >> Rear window defogger is OK.
1. CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses in fuse block (J/B) are blown.
COMPONENT PARTS AMPERE FUSE NO.

Fuse block (J/B) 20A 11
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector and ground.
Terminals
(+) Condition of rear
Voltage (V)
window defogger
Rear window (–) (Approx.)
switch
defogger relay Terminal
connector
ON Battery voltage
M14 5 Ground
OFF 0
YES >> GO TO 3
• Rear window defogger relay.
• Battery power supply circuit.
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-20 2014 Note
Terminals A
(+) Condition of rear
Voltage (V)
window
Rear window (–) (Approx.)
defogger Terminal
defogger switch B
connector
ON Battery voltage
B50 1 Ground C
OFF 0
YES >> GO TO 4 D
NO >> GO TO 5
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect rear window defogger.
3. Check continuity between rear window defogger connector and ground.
F
Rear window defogger connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
B51 2 Yes
G
YES >> GO TO 6
H
5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
2. Disconnect rear window defogger relay connector and condenser connector. I
3. Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector and condenser connector.
Rear window J
defogger relay Terminal Condenser connector Terminal Continuity
connector
M14 5 B42 1 Yes K
YES >> Replace condenser. Refer to DEF-26, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace or repair harness. DEF
6. CHECK FILAMENT
Check filament.
M
YES >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". N
NO >> Repair filament. Refer to DEF-24, "Inspection and Repair".
O
1. CHECK FILAMENT
Check the filament for damage or open circuits.
Refer to DEF-24, "Inspection and Repair". P
NO >> Repair filament. Refer to DEF-24, "Inspection and Repair".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-21 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

Check rear window defogger switch.
Refer to DEF-16, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Check rear window defogger relay.
YES >> GO TO 3
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check rear window defogger power supply and ground circuit.
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-22 2014 Note
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER OPERATES
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH DOES NOT LIGHT, BUT REAR WIN-
A
DOW DEFOGGER OPERATES
B
1. CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL (REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH)
Check that the front air control (rear window defogger switch) is operating normally.
C
YES >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Refer to DEF-16, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
DEF

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-23 2014 Note
FILAMENT
FILAMENT
Inspection and Repair INFOID:0000000009500277
INSPECTION
1. When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the neg-
ative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.
SEL122R
2. Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of

each filament.
SEL263
3. If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery

voltage.
4. To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along fil-
ament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
SEL265
REPAIR
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-24 2014 Note
FILAMENT
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
• Drawing pen A
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
B
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol. C
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
NOTE: D
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
E
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
PIIA0215E
F
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for conti-
nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited. G
CAUTION:
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
H
I
SEL012D
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area J

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet. K
NOTE:
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
DEF
M
SEL013D

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-25 2014 Note
CONDENSER
CONDENSER
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, "BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Instal-
lation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors (B), from the condenser (1).
: Front
3. Remove the condenser bolt (A) and the condenser (1).
ALLIA1295ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEF-26 2014 Note
DLK
A
B
SECTION
DOOR & LOCK C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock F
Switch ......................................................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Switch (Driver Side) .................................................15 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request
SIONER" ................................................................... 6 Switch (Passenger Side) .........................................15
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ....................... 6 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch .....................16
H
Precaution for Servicing Doors and Locks ................ 6 DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Request
Switch ......................................................................16
PREPARATION ............................................ 8
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) .... 17 I
PREPARATION ................................................... 8 System Diagram ......................................................17
Special Service Tools ................................................ 8 System Description ..................................................17
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ......... 19 J
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 10
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ....................................19
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................10 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip- DLK
tion ...........................................................................19
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ............................................. 10
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca- DOOR LOCK FUNCTION ..........................................20
tion .......................................................................... 10 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description ....20 L
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (In-
strument Center) ..................................................... 12 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................22
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
M
(Console) ................................................................. 13 tem Description ........................................................22
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................23
(Trunk Room) .......................................................... 13
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip- N
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna
tion ...........................................................................24
(Rear Bumper) ........................................................ 13
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna WARNING FUNCTION ..............................................24
(Driver Side) ............................................................ 13 WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ..........24 O
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna
(Passenger Side) .................................................... 14 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 27
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Lock Assem- P
bly (Driver Side) ...................................................... 14 BCM ................................................................... 27
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote Keyless Entry List of ECU Reference .............................................27
Receiver .................................................................. 14
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 28
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning
Buzzer ..................................................................... 14 DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 28
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assem-
bly ............................................................................ 15 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM ...............................28

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-1 2014 Note
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram BACK DOOR : Description ..................................... 72
... 28 BACK DOOR : Component Function Check ......... 72
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 73
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................... 36
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram ..... 37 BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY ....... 75
Description .............................................................. 75
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 51 Component Function Check ................................... 75
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 51
Component Inspection ............................................ 76
Work Flow ............................................................... 51
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 78
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 54 Component Function Check .................................. 78
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 54 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
DTC Logic ............................................................... 54 Component Inspection ............................................ 79
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................... 80
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 56 Component Function Check .................................. 80
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56 Component Inspection ............................................ 81
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 58 BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ................... 82

DTC Logic ............................................................... 58 Description .............................................................. 82
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58 Component Function Check .................................. 82
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 60 Component Inspection ............................................ 83
DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60 DOOR SWITCH ................................................. 84
Component Function Check .................................. 84
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 84
DTC Logic ............................................................... 62 Component Inspection ............................................ 85
HAZARD FUNCTION ........................................ 87
B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 64 Component Function Check .................................. 87
INTELLIGENT KEY ........................................... 88
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 66 Component Function Check .................................. 88
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88
COMBINATION METER BUZZER .................... 67 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ......... 89

Component Function Check ................................. 67 Component Function Check .................................. 89
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ................................ 68 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 93

DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 68 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 68 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 93
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 68
ALL DOOR ................................................................ 93
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 69 ALL DOOR : Description ......................................... 93
PASSENGER SIDE : ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 93
Component Function Check ................................. 69
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 69 DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 93
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 93
REAR LH ................................................................... 70 DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 93
REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 70
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 70 PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 93
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 94
REAR RH .................................................................. 71 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 94
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............. 71
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 71 REAR LH ................................................................... 94
REAR LH : Description ........................................... 94
BACK DOOR ............................................................. 72
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-2 2014 Note
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 94 ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ........ 107
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107 A
REAR RH ................................................................... 94
REAR RH : Description ........................................... 94 TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 94 ATE .................................................................. 108
B
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR DOOR INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
KEY CYLINDER .................................................96 ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 109 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 96 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 109
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ................................97 D
NOT OPERATE ............................................... 110
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .......................... 97
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.... 97 KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .... 111 E
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 111
Procedure ................................................................ 97
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............... 97 F
NOSES ............................................................ 112
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De-
Work Flow .............................................................. 112
scription ................................................................... 98 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ......... 113
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag- G
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 116
nosis Procedure ...................................................... 98
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ...... 98

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 118
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : H
HOOD .............................................................. 118
Description .............................................................. 98 Exploded View ....................................................... 118
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 98 HOOD ASSEMBLY .................................................. 118 I
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 118
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN- HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 119
TELLIGENT KEY ................................................99
HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 120 J
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 120
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
DOES NOT OPERATE ..................................... 100 HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 121 DLK
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100 HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 121
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 101 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ........................ 122 L
Exploded View ....................................................... 122
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER ................... 122
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK M
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE .............. 102 and Installation ...................................................... 122
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER .................. 123 N
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER : Removal
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 103 and Installation ...................................................... 123
FRONT FENDER ............................................. 125 O
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP- Exploded View ....................................................... 125
ERATE .............................................................. 104 Removal and Installation ....................................... 125
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104 P
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 127
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP- Exploded View ....................................................... 127
ERATE .............................................................. 105
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105 DOOR ASSEMBLY .................................................. 127
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 127
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER- DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 128
ATE ................................................................... 106
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106 DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 129

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-3 2014 Note
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........129 FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 145
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment ..............................129 Exploded View ...................................................... 145
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................130 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 145
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............130 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 145
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................130 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 146
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..130 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 146
REAR DOOR ................................................... 131 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 147
Exploded View .......................................................131 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 147
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................131 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 149

DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....131 Exploded View ...................................................... 149
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................133
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 149
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................134 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 149
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........134
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment ..............................134 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 150
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 150
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................134
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............134 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 151
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 151
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................135
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..135 BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 153
Exploded View ...................................................... 153
BACK DOOR ................................................... 136
Exploded View .......................................................136 BACK DOOR LOCK ................................................ 153
BACK DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ... 153
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY .......................................136
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 153
tion .........................................................................136 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 153
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................138
EMERGENCY LEVER ............................................. 154
BACK DOOR STRIKER ...........................................139 EMERGENCY LEVER : Removal and Installation. 154
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 155
tion .........................................................................139
Exploded View ...................................................... 155
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment ...................139
FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 155
BACK DOOR HINGE ...............................................140
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 155
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ..140
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................ 156
BACK DOOR STAY .................................................140
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation ....140
Installation ............................................................. 156
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ..............................140
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ........................................ 156
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP .............................141
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa-
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
tion ........................................................................ 157
Installation .............................................................141
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 158
HOOD LOCK ................................................... 142
Exploded View .......................................................142
HOOD LOCK ............................................................142

INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 159
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ...............142 INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 159
HOOD LOCK : Inspection ......................................143 INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa-
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE ............................143 tion ........................................................................ 159
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE : Removal and CONSOLE ............................................................... 159
Installation .............................................................143 CONSOLE : Removal and Installation .................. 159
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE ..........................144 LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 159
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE : Removal and LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 159
Installation .............................................................144

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-4 2014 Note
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 161 PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation .... 162
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 161 BACK DOOR ........................................................... 162
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 161 BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation ............... 162
REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 161 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ....... 163 B
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ......... 161 Removal and Installation ....................................... 163
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .............................. 162 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ....... 164
C
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 162
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation ............. 162 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ....................... 165
Removal and Installation ....................................... 165 D
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 162
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-5 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000009486703
the windshield.
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Servicing Doors and Locks INFOID:0000000009486704
WARNING:
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should
contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use,
• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operation.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-6 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly. A
B
- Oily dirt:
area. C
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline. D
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-7 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
— Locating the noise
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear
SIIA0993E
— Repairing the cause of noise

(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat-
tle Kit
ALJIA1232ZZ
— Used to test keyfobs

(J-43241)
Remote Keyless Entry
Tester
LEL946A
— • Check Intelligent Key relative signal

(J-50190) strength
Signal Tech II • Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna
signal strength
ALEIA0131ZZ

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-8 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name A
(J-39565) Locating the noise
Engine Ear
B
C
SIIA0995E
( — ) Loosening nuts, screws and bolts

Power Tool D
PIIB1407E
F
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-9 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009015758
ALKIA3191ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-10 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
A. View with instrument panel assembly B. View with glove box door removed C. View with front grill removed A
removed
D. View of LH door. (RH similar) E. View of LH door switch (RH similar) F. View with rear bumper cover re-
moved
B
G. View from rear of vehicle H. View with rear seat cushion removed I. View with center console removed

C
Combination meter transmits the vehicle speed sig-
nal to BCM via CAN communication.
BCM also receives the vehicle speed signal from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN D
communication. BCM compares both signals to de-
tect the vehicle speed.
Security indicator lamp is located on combination
1. Combination meter
meter.
E
Security indicator lamp blinks when ignition switch
is in any position other than ON to warn that NIS-
SAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS F
[NVIS (NATS)] is on board.
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Combination
Meter".
Push-button ignition switch has push switch inside G
which detects that push-button ignition switch is
pressed, and then transmits ON/OFF signal to
2. Push-button ignition switch BCM. BCM changes the ignition switch position with
H
the operation of push-button ignition switch. BCM
maintains the ignition switch position status while
push-button ignition switch is not operated.
BCM controls INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (EN- I
GINE START FUNCTION), NISSAN VEHICLE IM-
MOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS [NVIS (NATS)] and
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.
J
BCM performs the ID verification between BCM and
Intelligent Key when the Intelligent Key is carried
into the detection area of inside key antenna, and
push-button ignition switch is pressed. If the ID ver- DLK
3. BCM ification result is OK, ignition switch operation is
available.
Then, when the ignition switch is turned ON, BCM
performs ID verification between BCM and ECM. If L
the ID verification result is OK, ECM can start en-
gine.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location" for detailed installation M
location.
Door lock and unlock switch is integrated into the
power window main switch. N
4. Main power window and door lock/unlock switch Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/un-
lock operation signal to BCM.
Refer to PWC-6, "Power Window Main Switch".
Door key cylinder switch is integrated into front door
O
lock assembly (driver side).
Door key cylinder switch detects door LOCK/UN-
5. Front door lock assembly LH LOCK operation using mechanical key, and then P
transmits the operation signal to BCM.
Refer to DLK-14, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front
Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)".
Rear door lock actuator locks/unlocks the rear door
6. Rear door lock actuator LH
latch assembly.
Back door lock actuator locks/unlocks the back door
7. Back door lock actuator
latch assembly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-11 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects
whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or not,
8. Inside key antenna (instrument center) and then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-12, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside
Key Antenna (Instrument Center)".
Remote keyless entry receiver receives button op-
eration signal and key ID signal of Intelligent Key,
9. Remote keyless entry receiver and them transmits them to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-14, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote
Keyless Entry Receiver".
Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who
is outside the vehicle, of operation confirmation ac-
cording to Intelligent Key operation and door re-
10. Intelligent Key warning buzzer quest switch operation, or of an inappropriate
operation.
Refer to DLK-14, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelli-
gent Key Warning Buzzer".
Outside key antenna (LH) detects whether Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle or not, and then
11. Outside key antenna LH transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside
Key Antenna (Driver Side)".
Door request switch transmits door lock/unlock re-
12. Door request switch
quest signal to the BCM.
Door switch detects door open/close condition and
13. Door switch
then transmits ON/OFF signal to BCM.
Outside key antenna (Rear bumper) detects wheth-
er Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle or not, and
14. Outside key antenna (rear bumper) then transmits the signal to the BCM.
Refer to DLK-13, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside
Key Antenna (Rear Bumper)".
Back door request switch transmits door lock/unlock
15. Back door request switch
request signal to the BCM.
Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects whether In-
telligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and then
16. Inside key antenna (trunk room) transmits the signal to the BCM.
Key Antenna (Trunk Room)".
Inside key antenna (console) detects whether Intel-
ligent Key is inside the vehicle or not, and then
17. Inside key antenna (console) transmits the signal to the BCM.
Key Antenna (Console)".
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Instrument Center) INFOID:0000000009516557
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) detects that Intelligent Key

is within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM.
• Inside key antenna (instrument center) is installed in the rear of
cluster lid C of instrument center.
JMKIA8646ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-12 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Console) INFOID:0000000009516558
A
• Inside key antenna (console) detects that Intelligent Key is within
the inside detection area, and then transmits detection status to
BCM. B
• Inside key antenna (console) is installed underneath the center
console.
D
JMKIA8646ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Inside Key Antenna (Trunk Room) INFOID:0000000009516559

E
• Inside key antenna (trunk room) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the inside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM. F
• Inside key antenna (trunk room) is installed under the rear seat
cushion.
G
H
JMKIA8646ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Rear Bumper) INFOID:0000000009516560

I
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) detects that Intelligent Key is
within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelli- J
gent Key.
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is installed in the rear of rear
bumper. DLK
JMKIA8646ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000009516561 M
• Outside key antenna (driver side) detects that Intelligent Key is

within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection sta-
tus to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to Intelli- N
gent Key.
• Outside key antenna (driver side) is installed in driver side outside
handle. O
JMKIA8648ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-13 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Outside Key Antenna (Passenger Side) INFOID:0000000009516562
• Outside key antenna (passenger side) detects that Intelligent Key

is within the outside detection area, and then transmits detection
status to BCM. Request signal is transmitted simultaneously to
Intelligent Key.
• Outside key antenna (passenger side) is installed in driver side
outside handle.
JMKIA8648ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000009516563
• Door lock actuator and unlock sensor are Integrated in driver door
lock assembly.
• Door lock actuator receives lock/unlock signal from BCM, and then
locks/unlocks driver door.
• Only front door lock assembly (driver side) integrates unlock sen-
sor. Unlock sensor transmits lock/unlock status of driver seat to
BCM.
JMKIA8649ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Remote Keyless Entry Receiver INFOID:0000000009516564
• Remote keyless entry receiver receives button operation signal

and key ID signal of Intelligent Key, and then transmits them to
BCM.
• Remote keyless entry receiver is installed in the rear of glove box
lid.
JMKIA8647ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer INFOID:0000000009516565
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer warns the user, who is outside vehi-
cle, of operation confirmation according to Intelligent Key operation
and door request switch operation, or of an inappropriate opera-
tion.
• Intelligent Key warning buzzer is installed in the rear of front
bumper and underneath headlight RH.
JMKIA8650ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-14 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Lock Assembly INFOID:0000000009516566
A
• Back door lock assembly lock assembly integrates door lock actu-
ator and back door latch.
• Door lock actuator locks/unlocks the back door according to the B
door lock/unlock signal from BCM.
D
JMKIA8651ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Lock and Unlock Switch INFOID:0000000009516567

E
• Door lock and unlock switch transmits door lock/unlock signal
operation to BCM.
• Door lock and unlock switch (1) is integrated in the power window F
main switch and front power window switch (passenger side).
H
JMKIA9352ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request Switch (Driver Side) INFOID:0000000009516568
I
• Front door request switch (driver side) transmits door request
switch signal to BCM.
• Front door request switch (driver side) (1) is integrated in driver J
side outside handle.
DLK
L
JMKIA9353ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Front Door Request Switch (Passenger Side) INFOID:0000000009516569
M
• Front door request switch (passenger side) transmits door request
• Front door request switch (passenger side) (1) is integrated in pas- N
senger side outside handle.
JMKIA9353ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-15 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Door Switch INFOID:0000000009516570
Door switch detects open/close status of door and transmits door

JMKIA6526ZZ
DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Back Door Request Switch INFOID:0000000009516571
• Back door request switch transmits back door request switch sig-
nal to BCM.
• Back door request switch (1) is integrated in outside handle (back
door).
ALKIA3192ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-16 2014 Note
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000009516451
ALKIA3193GB F
Input Single Function Actuator

Door lock/unlock switch H
Door lock/unlock signal Door lock function
Door key cylinder switch
Each door switch Door open/close signal
Key reminder function • Each door lock actuator I
Warning buzzer signal
Combination meter. Automatic door lock/unlock
Vehicle speed signal
function
J
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
• The door lock and unlock switch (driver side) is built into power window main switch.
• The door lock and unlock switch (passenger side) is on door trim. DLK
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
unlocked. L
Door Key Cylinder

• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock door lock
M
actuator of all doors.
• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the
driver side door lock actuator; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within 60 seconds after the first unlock operation
unlocks all of the other doors. - (SELECTIVE UNLOCK OPERATION) N
Selective unlock operation mode can be changed using “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to BCS-17, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (LOCK OPERATION) O
The automatic door locks function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion.
P
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock*1
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
If a door is opened and closed at any time during one ignition cycle (OFF → ON), even after initial auto door
lock operation has taken place, the BCM will re-lock all doors when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15
MPH) or more again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-17 2014 Note
Setting change of Automatic Door Locks (LOCK) Function
The LOCK operation setting of the automatic door locks function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door locks (LOCK) function and the type selection of the automatic
door locks (LOCK) function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. Refer to BCS-17,
"DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Without CONSULT
The automatic door locks (LOCK) function can be switched ON/OFF by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON.
4. The switching is completed when the hazard lamp blinks.
OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink
5. The ignition switch must be turned OFF and ON again between each setting change.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (UNLOCK OPERATION)
The automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position
or shift position.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock*1
All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the power supply position is
changed from ignition switch ON to OFF.
Setting change of Automatic Door Locks (UNLOCK) Function
The UNLOCK operation setting of the automatic door locks function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function and the type selection of the automatic
door locks (UNLOCK) function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. Refer to BCS-
17, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Without CONSULT
The automatic door locks (UNLOCK) function can be switched ON/OFF by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is completed when the hazard lamp blinks.
OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink
5. The ignition switch must be turned OFF and ON again between each setting change.
*1
: This function is set to ON before delivery.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-18 2014 Note
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
A
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009516518
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
DLK
ALKIA3194GB
M
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica- N
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM).
NOTE:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT. O
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT. P
Function Description Refer

Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the request switch DLK-20
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the
Remote keyless entry DLK-22
Intelligent Key

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-19 2014 Note
Function Description Refer
The key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with the key left
Key reminder DLK-24
inside the vehicle
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning DLK-24
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key DLK-19
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state INL-7
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000009516519
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIA6137GB
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH OPERATION

When pressing the request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent Key.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna and inside
key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the Intelli-
gent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal and operates each door lock actuator. At the same time, BCM blinks
hazard warning lamp (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock:
2 times) as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the door request switch is
operated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-20 2014 Note
Each request switch operation Operation condition A

• All doors are closed
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Lock • Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
B
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• P position warning is not activated
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.
Door lock function can be changed using “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to
BCS-21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
E
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA
The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the F
driver, passenger door handles (1). However, this operating range
depends on the ambient conditions.
G
JMKIA4881ZZ
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION I

For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelli-
gent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by operation of
each door request switch. J
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
Refer to BCS-21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
DLK
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate. L
• Door switch is ON (door is open)

Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal M
• Push switch is pressed
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to BCS-
21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". N
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-21 2014 Note
Remote keyless entry receiver
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
CAN communication system
Push-button ignition switch

Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch
Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Door lock function
Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Door lock/unlock function × × × × × × × ×
Hazard and buzzer reminder function × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × × × × × ×
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000009516520
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ALKIA3195GB
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY OPERATION

The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
Remote keyless entry system controls operation of the following items.
• Auto door lock
• Door lock/unlock
• Hazard and buzzer reminder
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the opera-
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal is transmitted
from Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal to each door lock actuator and operates each door lock actuator,
when key ID matches. At the same time, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times)
and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-22 2014 Note
Remote controller operation Operation condition A

• All door are closed
Lock • Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
B
• Ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position
Unlock • Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
C
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
For the operation check, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) and sounds Intelli-
gent Key warning buzzer (lock: 1 time, unlock: 2 times) when door lock or unlock operates by each remote D
controller button operation of Intelligent Key.
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Mode
Refer to BCS-21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". E
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 30 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti- F
vate.
• Door switch is ON (door is open) G

Operating condition • BCM receives lock signal
• Push switch is pressed
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to BCS- H
21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation. I
Remote keyless entry receiver

Hazard warning lamp

Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Remote keyless entry functions DLK

Intelligent Key
Door switch
IPDM E/R
L
BCM
Horn
Door lock/unlock function by remote control button × × × × × ×
Hazard and buzzer reminder function × × × × × × × M
Auto door lock function × × × × × ×
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION N

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-23 2014 Note
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000009516521
System Diagram
ALKIA3196GB
BASIC OPERATION
Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.
Key reminder function Operation condition Operation

Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Driver side door closed* All doors unlock
• Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state
Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
• Door lock/unlock switch or driver side door lock knob are operated • All doors unlock
Door is open or closed • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• Any door is opened ing buzzer
• All doors are locked.
Right after Back door is closed under the following conditions
• Back door open
• Intelligent Key is inside luggage room
Back door is closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
ing buzzer
• All doors are locked
*:When closing the door if something comes into contact with the door lock switch it might activate the door locks accidentally, but the
unlock operation will override this.
NOTE:
The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be times when
the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intelligent Key is on the
instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system sometimes does not operate if the
Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
WARNING FUNCTION
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000009516522
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
warnings using combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, combination meter buzzer, KEY warning lamp,
shift P warning lamp and engine start operation indicator lamp.
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• OFF position warning
• P position warning
• ACC warning
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning
• Engine start information

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-24 2014 Note
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID warning A
OPERATION CONDITION
Operation condition of warning and information is as per the following table.
B
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure
Intelligent Key system malfunction A malfunction is detected on BCM and key warning lamp turns ON
C
When condition A, B or condition C is satisfied
• Condition A
- Ignition switch: ACC position
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open) D
• Condition B
OFF position warning - Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF while door is open
• Condition C
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch while E
brake pedal is depressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the
Intelligent Key battery is discharged)
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
F
• Shift position: Other than P
For internal
• Engine is stopped (Ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF)
P position warning • P position warning (For internal) operates
For external • Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close) G
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected inside the vehicle
• After P position warning operates, or when ignition switch is turned ON
ACC warning immediately after P position warning operates H
• Ignition switch: ACC
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
Door status changes
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door status changes from open to close) I
from open to close
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK and OFF
• Door switch: ON (Door is open)
Take away warning Door status is open
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key
J
ID verification for 5 seconds
• Ignition switch: Other than LOCK position
Push button-ignition DLK
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
switch operation
Door lock operation is requested while door lock operation condition of
Door lock operation warning
door request switch is not satisfied L
• Ignition switch: ON position
Ignition switch is ON po-
• Shift position: P
sition
• Engine is stopped
M
• Ignition switch: Other than ON
Ignition switch is other • Shift position: P
than ON position • Intelligent Key is in the passenger room after driver door is opened and
closed N
Engine start information
• Ignition switch: ON position to OFF position
• Shift position: P position
NOTE: O
Ignition switch is ON po-
Engine start information turns ON for several seconds and then turns OFF,
sition to OFF position
when ignition switch is turned to the ON position from the OFF position. En-
gine start information does not turn ON until opening and closing of driver
door is detected again. P
BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned
Intelligent Key low battery warning
ON
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
Key ID warning
WARNING METHOD
The following table shows the alarm or warning methods with chime.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-25 2014 Note
Warning chime
Shift P Engine start
“KEY” warning Intelligent
Warning/Information functions warning Combination operation in-
lamp Key warn-
lamp meter buzzer dicator lamp
ing buzzer
Intelligent Key system malfunction Indicate — — — —
For internal — — Activate — —
OFF position warning
For external — — — Activate —
For internal Indicate Activate — —
P position warning Blink (yellow)
For external — — Active —
ACC warning — — Activate — —
Door is open to close — Activate Activate —
Door is open — — — —
Take away warning Blink (yellow)
Push-ignition switch oper-
— Activate — —
ation
Door lock operation warning — — — Activate —
Engine start information — — — — Indicate
Intelligent Key low battery warning Blink (green) — — — —
Key ID warning Blink (yellow) — — — —

Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
Engine start operation indicator lamp


Combination meter buzzer

Function
Shift P warning lamp

Outside key antenna
“KEY” warning lamp

Door request switch
Inside key antenna

Intelligent Key
Door switch
BCM
Intelligent Key system malfunction × × ×

For internal × × × ×
OFF position warning
For external × × ×
P position warning × × × × × ×
ACC warning × × × ×
Door is open or close × × × × × × × ×
Door is open × × × × × ×
Take away warning
Push-button ignition
× × × × × × ×
switch operation
Door lock operation warning × × × × × × ×
Key ID warning × × × × ×
Engine start information × × × × × ×
Intelligent Key low battery warning × × × × ×

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-26 2014 Note
BCM
BCM
B
ECU Reference
C
BCS-44, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D
BCS-46, "DTC Index"
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-27 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000009567506
AAKWA0643GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-28 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKWA0644GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-29 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1294GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-30 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1295GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-31 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1296GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-32 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1297GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-33 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1298GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-34 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1299GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-35 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1300GB
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-36 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000009567505
DLK
AAKWA0636GB
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-37 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKWA0637GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-38 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKWA0638GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-39 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKWA0639GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-40 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1277GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-41 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1278GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-42 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1279GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-43 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1280GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-44 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1281GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-45 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1282GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-46 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1283GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-47 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AAKIA1284GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-48 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
DLK
AAKIA1285GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-49 2014 Note
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ABKIA4627GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-50 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
DLK
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-51 2014 Note
1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
- Erase DTC.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check intermittent incident.
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-52 2014 Note
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected? A
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check intermittent incident.
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART B

2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
C
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the E
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected. F
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4. G
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-53 2014 Note
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description
• Inside key antenna (instrument
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten- center)
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA 1
na (instrument center) is sent to BCM • Between BCM Inside key antenna
(instrument center)

1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS) on WORK SUPPORT of INTELLIGENT KEY.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent Key is in the an-

84 JMKIA3839GB
M98 Ground
85
When Intelligent Key is not in the

antenna detection area
JMKIA5951GB

NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-54 2014 Note
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT A
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
B
connector.
BCM Inside key antenna (instrument center)

Continuity C
84 1
M98 M95 Yes
85 2 D
BCM E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
84
M98 No F
85
Is the inspection result normal? G

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 H
1. Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. I
(+) J
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
DLK
When Intelligent Key is in the an- L

M
84 JMKIA3839GB
M98 Ground
85
N
When Intelligent Key is not in the
antenna detection area
O
JMKIA5951GB

P
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). Refer to DLK-159, "INSTRUMENT CENTER :

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-55 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Inside key antenna (console)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten-
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA 2 • Between BCM Inside key antenna
na (console) is sent to BCM
(console)

NO >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent Key is in the anten-

na detection area
86 JMKIA3839GB
M98 Ground
87
When Intelligent Key is not in the an-

JMKIA5951GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-56 2014 Note
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (console) harness connector.
A
BCM Inside key antenna (console)
Continuity
86 1 B
M98 M89 Yes
87 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground D
86
M98 No
87
E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. F

1. Replace inside key antenna (console). (New antenna or other antenna) G
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
H
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value) I
Connector Terminal
J
na detection area
DLK
86 JMKIA3839GB
M98 Ground
87 L

M
JMKIA5951GB N
YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console). Refer to DLK-159, "CONSOLE : Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-57 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Inside key antenna (trunk room)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten-
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA 3 • Between BCM Inside key antenna
na (trunk room) is sent to BCM
(trunk room)

NO >> Inside key antenna (trunk room) is OK.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

na detection area
88 JMKIA3839GB
M98 Ground
89

JMKIA5951GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-58 2014 Note
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) harness connec-
tor. A
BCM Inside key antenna (trunk room)

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
88 1
M98 B48 Yes
89 2
C
BCM
Continuity D
Connector Terminal
Ground
88
M98 No
89 E

YES >> GO TO 3. F
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 G
1. Replace inside key antenna (trunk room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (trunk room) connector.
H
(+)
BCM (–) Condition
Signal I
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

na detection area DLK
M98
88
Ground
JMKIA3839GB
L
89
M
N
JMKIA5951GB

YES >> Replace inside key antenna (trunk room). Refer to DLK-159, "LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and O
Installation".
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-59 2014 Note
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Outside key antenna (LH)
OUTSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from outside key
B2626 • Between BCM Outside key anten-
1 antenna (LH) is sent to BCM
na (LH)

2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> Outside key antenna (LH) is OK.
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
When the driver door cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
78 request switch is op-
M98 Ground
79 erated with ignition When Intelligent
switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be-
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (LH) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (LH) harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-60 2014 Note
BCM Outside key antenna (LH) A

Continuity
78 1
M98 D6 Yes B
79 2
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
78 D
M98 No
79
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 F
1. Replace outside key antenna (LH). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (LH) connector.
G
(+)
Signal H
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent I
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between J
Intelligent Key
and antenna: 80
When the driver cm or less)
78 door request switch
JMKIA5955GB
DLK
M98 Ground
79 is operated with igni- When Intelligent
tion switch OFF Key is not in the
antenna detec-
tion area (The
L
distance be-
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
M
antenna: Ap-

N
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (LH). Refer to DLK-161, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Instal-
lation".
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-61 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Outside key antenna (RH)
OUTSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from outside key
B2627 • Between BCM Outside key anten-
2 antenna (RH) is sent to BCM
na (RH)

2. Check Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
NO >> Outside key antenna (RH) is OK.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli-
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the passenger antenna: 80 cm
side door request or less) JMKIA5955GB
80
M98 Ground switch is operated
81 When Intelli-
with ignition switch
OFF gent Key is not
in the antenna
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-

NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (RH) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (RH) harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-62 2014 Note
BCM Outside key antenna (RH) A

Continuity
80 1
M98 D106 Yes B
81 2
C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
80 D
M98 No
81
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2 F
1. Replace outside key antenna (RH). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (RH) connector.
G
(+)
Signal H
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelli- I
gent Key is in
the antenna de-
tection area
(The distance J
between Intelli-
gent Key and
When the passenger antenna: 80 cm
80 side door request or less) JMKIA5955GB DLK
M98 Ground
81 switch is operated with When Intelli-
ignition switch OFF gent Key is not
in the antenna L
detection area
(The distance
between Intelli-
gent Key and M
antenna: Ap-
Is the inspection result normal? N

YES >> Replace outside key antenna (RH). Refer to DLK-161, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Instal-
lation".
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-63 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT display
description
• Outside key antenna (rear
OUTSIDE ANTENNA An excessive high or low voltage from outside key bumper)
B2628
3 antenna (rear bumper) is sent to BCM • Between BCM – Outside key an-
tenna (rear bumper)

2. Check Self Diagnostic Result mode of BCM using CONSULT.
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
NO >> Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is OK.
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key
When the back and antenna: 80
door request cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
M98 82,83 Ground switch is operat-

When Intelligent
ed with ignition
Key is not in the
switch OFF
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be-
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-

NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-64 2014 Note
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector. A
BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal B
82 1
M98 B49 Yes
83 2
C
BCM
Continuity
D
Connector Terminal
Ground
82
M98 No
83 E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. F
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna) G
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
H
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
I
Connector Terminal
When Intelligent
Key is in the an-
J
tenna detection
area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key DLK
When the back and antenna: 80
door request cm or less) JMKIA5955GB
M98 82,83 Ground switch is operat-

When Intelligent L
ed with ignition
Key is not in the
switch OFF
antenna detec-
tion area (The
distance be- M
tween Intelli-
gent Key and
antenna: Ap-
prox. 2 m) JMKIA5954GB N
YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). Refer to DLK-161, "REAR BUMPER : Removal and
Installation". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-65 2014 Note


57 12 (10A)
Battery power supply
70 G (40A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector M99.
BCM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
57
70
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M99 67 — Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-66 2014 Note
COMBINATION METER BUZZER
COMBINATION METER BUZZER
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select INSIDE BUZZER in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch Key, Knob or Take Out to check that it works normally. C
Yes >> Combination meter buzzer is OK.
No >> Refer to DLK-67, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT E
Refer to WCS-28, "Component Function Check".

Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT G
Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
H
>> Inspection End.
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-67 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009515849
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select DOOR LOCK of BCM using CONSULT.
2. Select DOOR LOCK in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch ALL LOCK or ALL UNLK to check that it works normally.
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-68, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009515850
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-28, "POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect front door lock actuator LH connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front door lock actuator Voltage
(–) Condition
LH (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
D14 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
2 Unlock
YES >> Replace front door lock actuator LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuator connectors.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator LH harness connector.
BCM Front door lock actuator LH

Continuity
66 1
M99 D14 Yes
65 2
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M99 No
66
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between front door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-68 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+) A
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
B
M99 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
66 Unlock
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
PASSENGER SIDE D
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009515851
1.CHECK FUNCTION E

F
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK. G
NO >> Refer to DLK-69, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009515852
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL I

2. Disconnect front door lock actuator RH connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground. J
(+)
Front door lock actuator Voltage DLK
(–) Condition
RH (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
L
2 Lock
1 Unlock
YES >> Replace front door lock actuator (RH).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock actuators.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock actuator RH harness connector.
O
BCM Front door lock actuator RH
Continuity
P
65 2
M99 D114 Yes
59 1

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-69 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M99 No
59
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between front door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
59 Unlock
REAR LH
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009515853
1.CHECK FUNCTION
NO >> Refer to DLK-71, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009515854
2. Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock actuator LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Lock
2 Unlock
YES >> Replace rear door lock actuator LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-70 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator LH harness connector.
A
BCM Rear door lock actuator LH
Continuity
65 1 B
M99 D205 Yes
55 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. C
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground D
65
M99 No
55
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL F

2. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator LH harness connector and ground. G
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition H
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
55 Unlock I
J
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009515855
DLK
1.CHECK FUNCTION
L
NO >> Refer to DLK-71, "REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
N
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009515856
O
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-71 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock actuator RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 Lock
1 Unlock
YES >> Replace rear door lock actuator RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock actuator RH harness connector.
BCM Rear door lock actuator RH

Continuity
65 2
M99 D305 Yes
55 1
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M99 No
55
YES >> GO TO 3.
2. Check voltage between rear door lock actuator RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
65 Lock
55 Unlock
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000009519658
Locks/unlocks the door with the signal from BCM.

BACK DOOR : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009519659
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Use CONSULT to perform Active Test (“DOOR LOCK”).
2. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-72 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> Back door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-73, "BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure". A
BACK DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009519660
B
1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL C
2. Disconnect back door lock actuator connector.
3. Check voltage between back door lock actuator harness connector and ground. D
(+)
Voltage (V)
Back door lock actuator (–) Condition E
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
1 Unlock 0 → Battery voltage → 0
D505 Ground Door lock and unlock switch
2 Lock 0 → Battery voltage → 0 F
YES >> Replace back door lock actuator. Refer to DLK-153, "Exploded View".
G
NO-1 >> GO TO 2 (lock signal).
NO-2 >> GO TO 3 (unlock signal).
2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR LOCK CIRCUIT H
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock actuator harness connector.
I
BCM Back door lock actuator
Continuity
M99 65 D505 2 Yes J
BCM DLK
Continuity
M99 65 No
L
M
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR UNLOCK CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect back door lock actuator relay connector.
2. Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and back door lock actuator N
harness connector.
Back door lock actuator relay Back door lock actuator O

Continuity
M41 3 D505 1 Yes
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. P
Back door lock actuator relay

Continuity
M41 3 No

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-73 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"
>> Inspection End.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-74 2014 Note
BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
A
Controls back door lock actuator lock/unlock operation. B

1.CHECK FUNCTION C
1. Use CONSULT to perform Active Test (“DOOR LOCK”).
2. Touch “ALL LOCK” or “ALL UNLK” to check that it works normally.
YES >> Back door lock actuator relay is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
F
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Check 10 A fuse, [No. 8, located in fuse block (J/B)].
H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY POWER CIRCUIT I
1. Remove back door lock actuator relay.
2. Check voltage between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and ground.
J
(+)
Voltage (V)
Back door lock actuator relay (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal DLK
1
M41 Ground Battery voltage
5
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
M
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY CIRCUIT 1
1. Install the back door lock actuator relay.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. N
(+)
Voltage (V)
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
O
Connector Terminal
Door lock and un- LOCK Battery voltage

M100 50 Ground P
lock switch UNLOCK 0
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 (when voltage is fixed at 12V)>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
NO-2 (when voltage is fixed at 0V)>>GO TO 4.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-75 2014 Note
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage (V)
BCM (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
NO >> GO TO 5.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock actuator relay harness connector.
Back door lock actuator relay BCM

Continuity
M41 2 M100 50 Yes

Continuity
M41 2 No
YES >> Replace back door lock actuator relay.
6.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay harness connector and ground.

Continuity
M41 4 Yes
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY
Check back door lock actuator relay.Refer to DLK-76, "Component Inspection"
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace back door lock actuator relay.
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident"
>> Inspection End.

1.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR RELAY

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-76 2014 Note
3. Check continuity between back door lock actuator relay terminals.
A
Back door lock actua-
tor relay Condition Continuity
Terminal B
12 V direct current supply between termi-
No
4 nals 1 and 2
No current supply Yes C
3
12 V direct current supply between termi-
Yes
5 nals 1 and 2
D
No current supply No
YES >> Inspection End E
NO >> Replace back door lock actuator relay.
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-77 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select CDL LOCK SW, CDL UNLOCK SW in DATA MONITOR mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Status

LOCK ON
CDL LOCK SW
Main power window and door UNLOCK OFF
lock/unlock switch LOCK OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW
UNLOCK ON
YES >> Main power window and door lock/unlock switch is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
3. Check signal between main power window and door lock/unlock switch harness connector and ground
using oscilloscope.
(+)
Signal
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
D7 6
Ground
D8 18
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and main power window and door lock/unlock switch
harness connector.
BCM Main power window and door lock/unlock switch

Continuity
12 D8 18
M18 Yes
13 D7 6
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-78 2014 Note
BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
12
M18 No B
13
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". C
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch harness connector and ground. D
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch

Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
D8 17 Yes
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH G
Refer to DLK-79, "Component Inspection".
H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to PWC-44, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I

J
>> Inspection End.
DLK
1.CHECK MAIN POWER WINDOW AND DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect main power window and door lock/unlock switch connector.
3. Check continuity between main power window and door lock/unlock switch terminals.
Main power window and door lock/unlock switch M

Terminal
LOCK No
6 N
Main power window UNLOCK Yes
17 and door lock/ unlock
switch LOCK Yes
18
UNLOCK No O
YES >> Inspection End
NO >> Replace main power window and door lock/unlock switch. Refer to PWC-44, "Removal and Instal- P
lation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-79 2014 Note
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of CM using CONSULT.
2. Select REQ SW-DR, REQ SW-AS in DATA MONITOR mode.

Pressed ON
REQ SW -DR Door request switch LH
Released OFF
Pressed ON
REQ SW -AS Door request switch RH
Released OFF
YES >> Front door request switch is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage
Front door request switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Left side D17
1 Ground 12 V
Right side D113
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and BCM harness
connector.
Front door request switch BCM

Continuity
Left side D17 75
1 M98 Yes
Right side D113 100
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
Front door request switch

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Left side D17
1 No
Right side D113
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-80 2014 Note
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
NO >> Repair or replace harness. A
3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.
B
Front door request switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground C
Left side D17
2 Yes
Right side D113
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH E

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.
H
>> Inspection End.
I
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector. J
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals.
Front door request switch DLK

Terminal
Pressed Yes
1 2 Door request switch L
Released No
YES >> Inspection End. M
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch. Refer to DLK-147, "OUTSIDE HANDLE :

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-81 2014 Note
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Transmits lock/unlock operation to BCM.

1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check (“REQSW-BD/TR”) in “Data Monitor” mode using CONSULT.

Pressed ON
REQSW-BD/TR Back door request switch
Released OFF
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect back door request switch connector.
3. Check voltage between back door request switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage (V)
Back door request switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
D506 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door request switch harness connector.
BCM Back door request switch

Continuity
M100 51 D506 1 Yes
BCM
Continuity
M100 51 No
3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door request switch harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-82 2014 Note
Back door request switch A

Continuity
D506 2 Yes
B
YES >> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door request switch. Refer to DLK-153, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Instal-
lation". E
F
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000009519955 G
1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

H
2. Disconnect back door request switch connector.
3. Check continuity between back door request switch terminals.
I
Back door request switch
Terminal
Pressed Yes
J
1 2 Back door request switch
Released No
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
NO >> Replace back door request switch. Refer to DLK-153, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Instal-
lation". L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-83 2014 Note
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
1.CHECK FUNCTION
2. Select DOOR SW-DR, DOOR SW-AS, DOOR SW-RL and DOOR SW-RR in DATA MONITOR mode.

Open ON
DOOR SW-DR Front door LH
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-AS Front door RH
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH
Closed OFF
Open ON
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed OFF
YES >> Door switch is OK.
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
(+)
Signal
Door switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Front door switch
B8 3
LH
Front door switch
B16 3
RH Ground
Rear door switch
B6 3
LH
Rear door switch PKIB4960J
B17 3
RH 7.0 - 8.0 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-84 2014 Note
DOOR SWITCH
Door switch BCM A

Continuity
Front door switch
B8 47
LH B
Front door switch
B16 45
RH
3 M100 Yes
Rear door switch C
B6 48
LH
Rear door switch
B17 46
RH D
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.
Door switch E
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Front door switch LH B8
Ground F
Front door switch RH B16
3 No
Rear door switch LH B6
Rear door switch RH B17 G
NO >> Repair or replace harness. H
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-85, "Component Inspection". I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch. Refer to DLK-158, "Removal and Installation". J
DLK
>> Inspection End.

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000009515865 L
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.
N
Door switch
Terminal
Front door switch Pressed No O

LH Released Yes
Front door switch Pressed No

RH
P
Ground part of door Released Yes
3 Door switch
switch Pressed No
Rear door switch
LH Released Yes
Rear door switch Pressed No

RH Released Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-85 2014 Note
DOOR SWITCH
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch. Refer to DLK-158, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-86 2014 Note
HAZARD FUNCTION
HAZARD FUNCTION
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
2. Select FLASHER in ACTIVE TEST mode.
3. Touch LH or RH to check that it works normally. C
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-87, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT E
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check".

YES >> GO TO 2.
H
>> Inspection End.
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-87 2014 Note
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY
NOTE:
The Signal Tech II Tool (J-50190) can be used to perform the following functions. Refer to the Signal Tech II
User Guide for additional information.
• Check Intelligent Key relative signal strength.
• Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna signal strength.
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Monitor item Condition

RKE OPE COUN1 Check that the numerical value is changing while operating on the Intelligent Key.
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK.
NOTE:
The Signal Tech II Tool (J-50190) can be used to perform the following functions. Refer to the Signal Tech II
User Guide for additional information.
• Check Intelligent Key relative signal strength.
• Confirm vehicle Intelligent Key antenna signal strength.
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA. Refer to DLK-165, "Removal
and Installation".
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0V

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery.
OCC0607D

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-88 2014 Note
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

RKE OPE COUN1 Checks whether value changes when operating Intelligent Key D
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-89, "Diagnosis Procedure". E
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to DLK-37, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : Wiring Diagram". G
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER OUTPUT SIGNAL H

2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground with oscilloscope.
I
Terminals
(+) Signal J
Condition
(–) (Reference value)
Remote keyless entry
Terminal
receiver connector
DLK
Waiting L
(All doors closed)
JMKIA0064GB
M
M90 2 Ground
N
When signal is received
(All doors closed)
O
JMKIA0065GB
Is the inspection result normal? P

YES >> GO TO 7
NO >> GO TO 2
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground with oscilloscope.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-89 2014 Note
Terminals
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless (–) (Reference value)
entry receiver Terminal
connector
M90 4 Ground
JMKIA0064GB

YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> GO TO 3
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 1
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.

BCM connector Terminal receiver Terminal Continuity
connector
M18 19 M90 4 Yes
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM connector Terminal Continuity

Ground
M18 19 No
YES >> Reconnect BCM, GO TO 4
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver.
4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between remote keyless entry receiver connector and ground.

receiver Terminal Continuity
connector Ground
M90 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 6
NO >> GO TO 5
5.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 2
Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.

BCM
Terminal receiver Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
M18 18 M90 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 6

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-90 2014 Note
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry receiver.
6.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 3 A
1. Check continuity between BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
B
BCM
Terminal receiver Terminal Continuity
connector
connector
C
M18 20 M90 2 Yes
2. Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
D
BCM connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
M18 20 No
E
YES >> GO TO 7
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry.
7.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL CIRCUIT F

2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector. G
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
M18 22 M90 3 Yes
I
BCM
Continuity
J
M18 22 No
YES >> GO TO 8 DLK
NO >> Repair or replace harness between BCM and remote keyless entry.
8.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER RSSI SIGNAL
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector. L
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-91 2014 Note
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
During waiting
JMKIA5952GB
M90 3 Ground
When pressing
and holding either
button on Intelli-
gent Key
JMKIA5953GB

YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace remote keyless entry receiver. Refer to DLK-164, "Removal and Installation".
>> Inspection End.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-92 2014 Note
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000009516182
C
All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516183
D
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Check door lock and unlock switch. E
YES >> GO TO 2. F
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side). G
Refer to DLK-145, "DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation".
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM I
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? J
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE DLK
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000009516184
Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. L
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516185
M
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-68, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
2.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. P
Is the result normal?
PASSENGER SIDE

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-93 2014 Note
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000009516186
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516187

Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-69, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR LH
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000009516188
Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516189

Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-70, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000009516190
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516191

Check rear door lock assembly RH.
Refer to DLK-71, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-94 2014 Note
Is the result normal? A
B
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-95 2014 Note
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK KNOB OR
DOOR KEY CYLINDER
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK
KNOB OR DOOR KEY CYLINDER
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION

Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Check unlock sensor.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-96 2014 Note
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000009516193
B
All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516194
C
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function. D
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-17, "System Description". E
2.CHECK LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
2. Select LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY in WORK SUPPORT mode. F
3. Check LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY setting in WORK SUPPORT.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “ON” in “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY”.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH H
Check door switch.

I
YES >> GO TO 4.
J
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, "DTC Logic". DLK
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
Check outside key antenna.
• Driver side: Refer to DLK-60, "DTC Logic".
• Passenger side: Refer to DLK-62, "DTC Logic". N
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-64, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 6. O
6.REPLACE BCM
P
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-97 2014 Note
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000009516195
All doors do not lock/unlock using driver side door request switch.
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516196
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check driver side door request switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (driver side).
Refer to DLK-60, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000009516197
All doors do not lock/unlock using passenger side door request switch.
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009516198
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Check passenger side door request switch.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-62, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-98 2014 Note
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
A
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION B

Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER D
Check remote keyless entry receiver.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY F
Check Intelligent Key.
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-84, "Component Function Check". I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. J
5.REPLACE BCM
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. DLK
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-99 2014 Note
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION

Does door lock/unlock with driver side door lock knob and door key cylinder?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-100 2014 Note
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK AUTO LOCK SET SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT B

2. Select AUTO LOCK SET in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check AUTO LOCK SET setting in WORK SUPPORT. C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set MODE 2, MODE 3, MODE 4, MODE 5, MODE 6 or MODE 7 in AUTO LOCK SET.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
F
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-101 2014 Note
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
1.CHECK AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

2. Select AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT setting in WORK SUPPORT.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set Lock Only or Lock/Unlock in WORK SUPPORT.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
2. Select AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT setting in WORK SUPPORT.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set VH SPD in AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT.
3.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-102 2014 Note
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK HAZARD ANSWER BACK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT B

2. Select HAZARD ANSWER BACK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check the HAZARD ANSWER BACK setting in WORK SUPPORT. C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set the Lock Only, Unlock Only or Lock/Unlock in HAZARD ANSWER BACK.
2.CHECK ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
E
2. Select ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check the ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set the Horn Chirp or Buzzer in ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK. G
3.CHECK ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM using CONSULT. H
2. Select ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check the ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK setting in WORK SUPPORT.
I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set the On in ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK.
J
4.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
Check hazard function.
Refer to DLK-87, "Component Function Check". DLK
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. L
5.REPLACE BCM
M
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-103 2014 Note
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT

2. Select ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI setting in WORK SUPPORT.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set On in ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 3.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-54, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Check unlock sensor.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-104 2014 Note
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B

Check that DTC is not detected with BCM
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER D
Check that DTC is not detected with combination meter
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
F
Check front door switch (driver side).
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER H
Check combination meter buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM J

DLK
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-105 2014 Note
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side).
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-106 2014 Note
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3. E
F
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.REPLACE BCM H
Is the result normal? I
J
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-107 2014 Note
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM

YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3.
• Trunk room: Refer to DLK-58, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-108 2014 Note
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN SETTING IN WORK SUPPORT
F
1. Select INTELLIGENT KEY of BCM.
2. Select LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN in WORK SUPPORT mode.
3. Check LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN setting in WORK SUPPORT.
Refer to BCS-21, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set ON in LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN. H
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent key. I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
Check inside key antenna. DLK
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-58, "DTC Logic". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. M
6.REPLACE BCM
N
YES >> Inspection End. O

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-109 2014 Note
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

Check door lock function.
Does door lock/unlock using door request switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REPLACE BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-110 2014 Note
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A

C
YES >> GO TO 2.
YES >> GO TO 3. E
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
F
Check Intelligent Key.
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA H
• Console: Refer to DLK-56, "DTC Logic". I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". DLK
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-111 2014 Note
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to DLK-116, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate
the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may judge
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-112 2014 Note
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
B
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on CVT and A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS D
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). F
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be G
broken or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only H
temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. I
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-113, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE J
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. DLK
- insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) is available through your authorized NISSAN Parts Depart-
ment. L
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M
• The materials contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) are listed on the inside cover of the
kit; and can each be ordered separately as needed.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles. N
- SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will
only last a few months.
- SILICONE SPRAY: Use when grease cannot be applied.
- DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement. O
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet. P
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting INFOID:0000000009671277
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-113 2014 Note
1. Cluster lid A and the instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by apply-
ing felt cloth tape or silicone spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring har-
ness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shift selector assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid bumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sun visor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (FRONT AND REAR)
Overhead console noises are often caused by the console panel clips not being engaged correctly. Most of
these incidents are repaired by pushing up on the console at the clip locations until the clips engage.
1. Loose harness or harness connectors.
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose.
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-114 2014 Note
3. Loose screws at console attachment points.
A
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise. B
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame C
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component D
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
E
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component installed to the engine wall F
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
G
4. Loose radiator installation pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment H
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine rpm or
load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
I
insulating the component causing the noise.
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-115 2014 Note
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000009671278
LAIA0072E

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-116 2014 Note
DLK
LAIA0071E

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-117 2014 Note
HOOD
HOOD
AWKIA2564ZZ
1. Hood 2. Bumper rubber (hood side) 3. Hood insulator (if equipped)

4. Hood rod clamp 5. Bumper rubber (body side) 6. Hood rod grommet
7. Hood hinge (LH) 8. Hood support rod 9. Hood hinge (RH)
A. Hood insulator clip
HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567330
CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing hood assembly due to its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloths to protect surrounding components from damage during removal
and installation of hood assembly.
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported properly when removing hood assem-
bly.
2. Remove hood hinge nuts and hood assembly.
3. Remove clips and hood insulator (if necessary) (if equipped).
INSTALLATION
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-118 2014 Note
HOOD
CAUTION: A
• Before installing hood assembly, apply anticorrosive agent to the surface of hood hinge.
• After installation, perform the hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, "HOOD
ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
B
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of hood hinge nuts.
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567331
DLK
AWKIA2565ZZ
N
1. Hood assembly 2. Bumper rubber (body side) 3. Hood hinge (LH)
4. Hood lock 5. Front grille finisher 6. Front combination lamp
7. Front fender
O
Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment proce-
dure. P
Unit: mm (in)
Section Item Measurement Standard Parallelism Equality

D Clearance 4.4 ± 2.0 (0.17 ± 0.08) 2.0 (0.08) —
A–A
E Surface height -0.5 +2.0, -1.5 (0.02 +0.08, -0.06) 2.0 (0.08) —
F Clearance 4.0 ± 2.0 (0.16 ± 0.08) 2.0 (0.08) 3.0 (0.12)
B–B
G Surface height — — —

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-119 2014 Note
HOOD
Section Item Measurement Standard Parallelism Equality
H Clearance 3.5 ± 1.0 (0.14 ± 0.04) 1.5 (0.06) 1.5 (0.06)
C–C
J Surface height 0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06) 1.5 (0.06) 1.5 (0.06)
CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen hood hinge nuts and bolts.
2. Loosen hood lock assembly bolts.
3. Adjust the hood lock assembly so the clearance measurements are within the specifications provided.
4. Tighten hood hinge nuts and bolts to specified torque.
5. Tighten hood lock assembly bolts to specified torque.
HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen hood lock assembly bolts.
2. Adjust the surface height of hood assembly to front upper grille, front fender and front combination lamp to
the specified values by rotating hood bumper rubber.
3. Temporarily tighten hood lock assembly bolts.
4. Adjust (A) as shown to the following value with hood’s own weight by dropping it from approximately 200
mm (7.87 in) height or by pressing hood lightly [approximately 29 N (3.0 kg, 6.5 lb)].
ALKIA3162ZZ
1. Hood striker 2. Secondary latch 3. Primary latch

A. 20.0 mm (0.79 in)
5. After adjustment, tighten hood lock assembly bolts to specified torque.

HOOD HINGE
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567332
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-118, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-125, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove cowl top side cover. Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
4. Remove hood hinge bolts and hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Before installing the hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-120 2014 Note
HOOD
• Check hood hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease. A
JMKIA7995ZZ
HOOD SUPPORT ROD D
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567333
E
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING: F
Bodily injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported properly when removing hood support
rod.
2. Rotate and remove hood support rod from grommet. G
3. Release tab and remove grommet from hood hinge (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
H
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-121 2014 Note
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
ALKIA3172ZZ
1. Upper air guide 2. Air guide (RH) 3. Front bumper reinforcement

4. Lower air guide 5. Air guide (LH) 6. Radiator core lower support
7. Lower grommet 8. Upper grommet 9. Radiator core upper support
Clip
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567335
REMOVAL
1. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove ground harness bolt (A).
ALKIA3174ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-122 2014 Note
3. Remove washer tube inlet clip (A).
A
AWKIA2567ZZ
D
4. Remove radiator cap adapter bracket bolt (A) and radiator reser-
voir tank bolt (B).
E
G
JMKIA8027ZZ
5. Remove horn. Refer to HRN-6, "Removal and Installation".

H
6. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-19, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove hood lock assembly. Refer to DLK-142, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Release hood lock release cable clips from radiator core support upper using a suitable tool. I
9. Remove upper air guide. Refer to DLK-122, "Exploded View".
10. Remove air guide (LH/RH). Refer to DLK-122, "Exploded View".
11. Release all harness connector clips from radiator core support upper using a suitable tool. J
12. Remove bolts (A) and radiator core support upper.
DLK
M
AWKIA2568ZZ
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
After installation, perform hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, "HOOD ASSEM- O
BLY : Adjustment".
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
P
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567336
REMOVAL
1. Remove radiator core support upper. Refer to DLK-122, "RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER :
2. Reposition the radiator and condenser.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-123 2014 Note
3. Using a suitable tool (A), suspend radiator and condenser to
prevent them from falling.
CAUTION:
Use care to avoid damaging radiator and condenser.
JMKIA8030ZZ
4. Remove bolts (A) and radiator core support lower (1).
ALKIA3181ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-124 2014 Note
FRONT FENDER
FRONT FENDER
A
DLK
L
AWKIA2569ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Cowl top side cover 3. Front fender insulator M

4. Front fender stiffener Pawl Clip

N
CAUTION:
Use a shop cloths to protect the body from being damaged during removal and installation.
O
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-108, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove cowl top side cover. Refer to DLK-125, "Exploded View". P
3. Remove front fender bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-125 2014 Note
FRONT FENDER
4. Remove front fender stiffener (2) by carefully pulling upper por-
tion of front fender (1) away from body.
: Front
CAUTION:
Use care when removing the front fender. The front fender
stiffener foam adheres the front fender to the body. Care-
fully release the stiffener foam or damage to front fender
may occur.
JMKIA5633ZZ
5. Remove front fender.

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of front fender bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following components as necessary:
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-119, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door assembly: Refer to DLK-128, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-126 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR
FRONT DOOR
A
J
AWKIA2492ZZ
1. Inside seal 2. Door sash front tape 3. Grommet (driver side only) DLK
4. Door upper hinge 5. Door lower hinge 6. Door check link
7. Front door panel 8. Lower grommet 9. Upper grommet
10. Door striker 11. Body panel plug 12. Door sash rear tape L
DOOR ASSEMBLY
M
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567340
CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing front door due to its heavy weight N
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support the door using a suitable tool.
• Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least three O
minutes.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery positive and negative terminals and wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69, P
2. Remove dash side finisher. Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the front door.
4. Remove door check link bolt (body side).
5. Remove door hinge nuts (door side) and front door assembly.
INSTALLATION
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-127 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform the front door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-128, "DOOR ASSEM-
BLY : Adjustment".
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the door hinge mating surface.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.
JMKIA8072ZZ
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567341
AWKIA2493ZZ
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door

4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. Striker bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door upper hinge 9. Rear door lower hinge

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-128 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR
Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment proce- A
dure.
Unit: mm (in)
Section Measurement Standard B

Clearance 4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)
A–A
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)
C
Clearance 4.6 ± 2.0 (0.18 ± 0.08)
B–B
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06)
Clearance 4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04) D
C–C
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)
E
2. Loosen front door hinge nuts (door side).
3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the specifications provided. F
4. Temporarily tighten front door hinge nuts (door side).
5. Loosen front door hinge bolts (body side).
6. Raise or lower the front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the specifica- G
tions provided.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION: H
Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose
grease.
8. Install front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-125, "Removal and Installation". I
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567342
J
REMOVAL
Remove bolts and door striker. DLK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: L
• Do not reuse door striker bolts.
• Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-127, "Exploded View".
• After installation, check front door open/close operation. If necessary, perform the door striker
M
adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-129, "DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment".
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567343
N
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen door striker bolts
2. Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with front door lock O
insertion direction.
PIIB2804J

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-129 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR
3. Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-127, "Exploded View".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567344
REMOVAL
2. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-127, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front door hinge bolts (body side) and front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the front door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-128, "DOOR ASSEM-
BLY : Adjustment".
JMKIA8072ZZ
DOOR CHECK LINK

DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567345
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door speaker. Refer to AV-34, "Removal and Installation" (BASE AUDIO), AV-94, "Removal
and Installation" (DISPLAY AUDIO) or AV-179, "Removal and Installation" (NAVIGATION).
3. Remove door check link bolts (door side) and remove.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After installation, check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door check link rotating point for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply a multi-purpose grease.
JMKIA8074ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-130 2014 Note
REAR DOOR
REAR DOOR
A
J
AWKIA2570ZZ
1. Door sash rear tape 2. Inside seal 3. Door sash front tape DLK
4. Door upper hinge 5. Door lower hinge 6. Door check link
7. Rear door panel 8. Door striker 9. Grommet
10. Body panel plug L
DOOR ASSEMBLY
M
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567347
CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing rear door due to its heavy weight. N
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door using a suitable tool.
REMOVAL
O
1. Remove rear door harness grommet (1) from body side outer
(2), then pull out rear door harness.
JMKIA8083ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-131 2014 Note
REAR DOOR
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from rear door.
JMKIA8084ZZ

4. Remove door hinge nuts (door side) and rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the rear door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-133, "DOOR ASSEMBLY
: Adjustment".
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of door hinge nuts.
JMKIA8072ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-132 2014 Note
REAR DOOR
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567348
DLK
AWKIA2493ZZ
L
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door
4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. Striker bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door upper hinge 9. Rear door lower hinge M
Check the clearance and surface height between rear door and each part by visual inspection and tactile feel.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment proce-
dure. N
Unit: mm (in)
Section Measurement Standard

Clearance 4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)
O
A–A
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)
Clearance 4.6 ± 2.0 (0.18 ± 0.08) P
B–B
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.5 (0.0 ± 0.06)
Clearance 4.6 ± 1.0 (0.18 ± 0.04)
C–C
Surface height 0.0 ± 1.0 (0.0 ± 0.04)
1. Remove center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-133 2014 Note
REAR DOOR
2. Loosen door hinge nuts (door side).
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the specifications provided.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge nuts (door side).
5. Loosen door hinge nuts and bolts (body side).
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the specifications provided.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of hinge bolts and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose
grease.
8. Install center pillar lower finisher. Refer to INT-23, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567349
REMOVAL
Remove bolts and rear door striker.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door striker bolts.
• Tighten door striker bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-131, "Exploded View".
• After installation, check front door open/close operation. If necessary, adjust the door striker. Refer
to DLK-134, "DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment".
DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567350

1. Loosen door striker bolts.
2. Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with rear door lock
insertion direction.
PIIB2804J

DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567351
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-131, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
and Installation".
3. Remove rear door hinge bolts and nuts (body side) and rear door hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-134 2014 Note
REAR DOOR
• Apply anticorrosive agent to the door hinge mating surface.
• After installation, perform the rear door adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-133, "DOOR ASSEMBLY A
: Adjustment".
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of door hinge bolts and nuts.
B
JMKIA8072ZZ
E
DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567352
F
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door speaker. Refer to AV-35, "Removal and Installation" (BASE AUDIO), AV-95, "Removal
and Installation" (DISPLAY AUDIO) or AV-180, "Removal and Installation" (NAVIGATION). G
3. Remove door check link bolts (door side) and remove. H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
• After installation, check rear door open/close operation.
• Check door check link rotating point for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.
J
DLK
JMKIA8074ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-135 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
AWKIA2571ZZ
1. Back door hinge (RH) 2. Back door hinge (LH) 3. Back door stay (RH)
4. Back door stay stud ball (RH) 5. Back door stay (LH) 6. Back door stay stud ball (LH)
7. Bumper rubber seal 8. Bumper rubber 9. Spacer
10. Back door outer finisher 11. Back door assembly
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567354
CAUTION:
• Use two people when removing or installing the back door due to its heavy weight.
• Use shop cloths to protect surrounding components from damage during removal and installation of
back door.
REMOVAL
lation".
2. Remove back door stay (LH/RH). Refer to DLK-140, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-136 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
3. Remove back door harness grommet (1), then pull harness from
the back door. A
ALKIA3187ZZ
D
4. Disconnect washer tube from rear wiper.
5. Remove washer tube grommet (1), then pull washer tube from
the back door. E
ALKIA3188ZZ
H
6. Support the back door assembly using a suitable tool.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if back door assembly is not supported properly when removing the back I
door spindle unit.
7. Remove back door hinge nuts (door side) and remove.
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface between hinge and door side. DLK
• When reusing stud ball, always apply locking sealant before installing stud ball to back door.
• After installation, perform the back door assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-138, "BACK
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment". L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-137 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567355
AWKIA2495ZZ
1. Back door panel 2. Roof panel 3. Rear combination lamp

4. Rear bumper fascia 5. Back door hinge 6. Bumper rubber
7. Bolt 8. Back door striker

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-138 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by visual inspection and tactile
feel. If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the adjustment A
procedure.
Unit: mm (in)
Portion Section Item Measurement Standard B

H Clearance 6.0 ± 1.0 (0.24 ± 0.04)
Back door panel – Roof panel A–A
I Surface height 0.0 +0.5, -1.5 (0.00 +0.02, -0.06)
C
J Clearance 5.0 ± 2.0 (0.20 ± 0.08)
Rear combination lamp – Back door panel B–B
K Surface height -2.0 ± 2.0 (-0.08 ± 0.08)
L Clearance 5.0 ± 2.0 (0.20 ± 0.08) D
C–C
Rear bumper fascia – Back-door panel M Surface height 0.0 +0.5, -2.0 (0.0 +0.02, -0.08)
D–D M Clearance 7.0 ± 2.0 (0.28 ± 0.08)
E
1. Loosen back door hinge nuts (door side).
2. Lift up back door approximately 100 – 150 mm (3.94 – 5.91 in) height then close it lightly and check that it
is engaged firmly with back door closed.
F
3. Check the clearance and surface height and adjust back door as necessary.
4. Tighten back door hinge nuts to specified torque.
CAUTION:
G
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check back door hinge rotating point for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-pur-
pose grease.
• After adjusting, apply touch-up paint (body color) to the head of rear door hinge bolts and nuts. H
BACK DOOR STRIKER
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567356 I
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door kicking plate using a suitable tool. J
2. Remove bolts and back door striker.
INSTALLATION
DLK
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse back door striker bolts.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation. L
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009567357
M

N
1. Loosen door striker bolts.
2. Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door
lock insertion direction.
O
PIIB2804J

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-139 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567358
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-136, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Partially remove back door weatherstrip. Refer to DLK-141, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal
and Installation".
3. Remove back door hinge nuts and bolts (body side) and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the surface between hinge and body side.
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
BACK DOOR STAY
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567359
REMOVAL
1. Support the back door with a suitable tool too prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Body injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
2. Remove the metal clip (3) located on the connection between
the back door stay (1) and the stud ball (2) (back door side) by
using a flat blade screwdriver (A).
3. Remove the back door stay (back door side).
JMKIA2255ZZ
4. In the same way, remove the back door stay from the body side.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check the back door open/close operation after installation.
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000009567360
BACK DOOR STAY DISPOSAL

WARNING:
When performing disposal procedure, wear protective gloves and glasses.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-140 2014 Note
BACK DOOR
1. Secure back door stay (1) using a vice (C).
CAUTION: A
When cutting back door stay, always cover suitable tool (A)
using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering metal fragments
or oil.
B
JMKIA3336ZZ
D
2. Slowly cut a hole in back door stay and drain the gas using a
hacksaw at position (B) as shown.
A: 20 mm (0.79 in)
E
G
JMKIA5421ZZ
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP H

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567361
I
REMOVAL
1. Support back door using a suitable tool.
2. Carefully remove back door weather-strip from opening door joint. J
INSTALLATION
1. Beginning with upper section, align weather-strip mark with vehicle center position mark and install
weather strip to the vehicle. DLK
2. For the lower section, align weather-strip seam with center of back door striker.
NOTE:
Pull weather-strip gently to make sure that there are no loose sections. L

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-141 2014 Note
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK
AWKIA2572ZZ
1. Hood lock/fuel filler lid release handle 2. Hood lock assembly 3. Hood lock release cable assembly
A. Clip
HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567363
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock bolts (A).
ALKIA3190ZZ
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the hood lock assembly (if equipped).
3. Disconnect hood lock release cable (2) from hood lock (1) and
remove.
AWKIA2497ZZ
INSTALLATION
GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-142 2014 Note
HOOD LOCK
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform hood assembly adjustment procedure. Refer to DLK-119, "HOOD ASSEM- A
BLY : Adjustment".
• After adjustment, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-143, "HOOD LOCK : Inspec-
tion".
B
HOOD LOCK : Inspection INFOID:0000000009567364
HOOD LOCK INSPECTION C

NOTE:
If hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it. Refer to DLK-142, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installa-
tion". D
1. Check that secondary latch is properly engage with secondary striker with hoods own weight.
2. While operating hood lock release lever, carefully check that the front end of hood assembly is raised by
approximately 20.0 mm (0.79 in). Also check that hood lock release lever returns to original position. E
3. Check that hood lock release lever operates at 49 N (5.0 kg-m, 11.0 ft-lb) or below.
4. Install so that static closing force of hood is 315-490 N (32.1-50.0 kg-m, 70.8-110.2 ft-lb).
5. Check hood lock assembly lubrication condition. If necessary, apply a suitable multi-purpose grease. F
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE
HOOD LOCK RELEASE CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567365 G
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock release cable from hood lock. Refer to DLK-142, "Exploded View". H
2. Remove radiator cap adapter bracket bolt (A) and radiator reser-
voir tank bolt (B).
I
DLK
JMKIA8027ZZ
3. Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation". L

4. Release hood lock control cable clips using a suitable tool.
5. Remove hood lock/fuel filler door release handle. Refer to DLK-144, "HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE :
Removal and Installation". M
6. Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation"
7. Remove grommet on the lower dash and pull the hood lock release cable into the passenger compart-
ment. N
CAUTION:
While pulling, be careful not to damage (peel) the outside of the hood lock release cable.
INSTALLATION O
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend cable too much, keep the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more. P
• Check that hood lock release cable is properly engaged with hood lock.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-143 2014 Note
HOOD LOCK
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark).
PIIB5801E
HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE

HOOD LOCK RELEASE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567366
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock/fuel filler door release handle bolts (A).
AWKIA2498ZZ
2. Disconnect hood lock release cable from hood lock/fuel filler door release handle and remove.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-144 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR LOCK
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
I
AWKIA2573ZZ
1. Key cylinder (driver side) 2. Outside handle bracket 3. Outside handle escutcheon J
(passenger side)
4. Front gasket 5. Outside handle 6. Inside handle
7. Door lock 8. Key cylinder rod (driver side) 9. Rear gasket
DLK
A. Clip B. Bolt Pawl
DOOR LOCK L
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567368
REMOVAL M
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-146, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-147, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
N
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the door lock actuator.
4. Remove front door glass rear run. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
5. Remove bolts and door lock. O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: P
• Do not reuse door lock bolts.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• Check door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle and outside handle bracket.
• When installing key cylinder on front door, be sure to rotate key cylinder rod holder until a click is
felt.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-145 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR LOCK
• Check door lock for poor lubrication. Apply a suitable multi-
purpose grease to door lock if necessary.
JMKIA8077ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567369
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Partially remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
3. Release lock knob (2) and inside handle cable (3) from clip (1)
using a suitable tool.
JMKIA8078ZZ
4. Remove inside handle bolt.

5. Release inside handle (1) from door panel using a suitable tool
and remove.
: Pawl
AWKIA2500ZZ
6. Release inside handle cable (3) and lock cable (2) from inside
handle (1) and remove.
JMKIA5885ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-146 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR LOCK
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, lock/unlock operation. A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567370
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation". C
2. Partially remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
3. Open rod holder (1) by pulling downward and separate key rod
(3) from door lock assembly (2) (driver side only). D
JMKIA8080ZZ
G
4. Release outside handle cable (1) from cable clip (A).
J
AWKIA2574ZZ
5. Remove door grommet (1) and bolt from grommet hole (2).
DLK
JMKIA5888ZZ
N
6. While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutch-
eon.
O
JMKIA0560ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-147 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR LOCK
7. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle.
JMKIA0524ZZ
8. Disconnect the harness connectors from the outside handle and remove.
9. Remove front gasket and rear gasket.
10. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
: Front
JMKIA5890ZZ
11. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2) as shown.
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-148 2014 Note
REAR DOOR LOCK
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
I
AWKIA2575ZZ
1. Outside handle bracket 2. Outside handle escutcheon 3. Front gasket J

4. Outside handle 5. Inside handle 6. Door lock
7. Door lock A. Clip B. Bolt
Pawl DLK
DOOR LOCK
L
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567372
REMOVAL
M
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-150, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove bolts (A) from rear door glass rear run (1). N
JMKIA8086ZZ
4. Disconnect the harness connector from door lock actuator.

5. Remove bolts and door lock.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-149 2014 Note
REAR DOOR LOCK
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse door lock assembly bolts.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with inside handle and outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. If necessary,
apply a suitable multi-purpose grease.
JMKIA8087ZZ
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567373
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper portion of vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, "Exploded View".
3. Release lock knob (2) and inside handle cable (3) from clip (1)
JMKIA5704ZZ
4. Remove inside handle bolt.

5. Release inside handle (1) from door panel using a suitable tool
and remove.
: Pawl
AWKIA2500ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-150 2014 Note
REAR DOOR LOCK
6. Release inside handle cable (3) and lock cable (2) from inside
handle (1) and remove. A
JMKIA5885ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: E
• Check that door lock cables are properly engaged to inside handle.
OUTSIDE HANDLE F
G
REMOVAL
1. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-150, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation"
2. Remove door grommet and bolt from grommet hole. H
JMKIA1467ZZ DLK
3. While pulling outside handle, remove outside handle escutch-
eon.
L
JMKIA5342ZZ
4. While pulling outside handle (1), slide towards rear of vehicle to O

remove.
JMKIA0524ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-151 2014 Note
REAR DOOR LOCK
5. Remove front gasket and rear gasket.
6. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.
: Front
JMKIA5890ZZ
7. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket

(2) as shown.
JMKIA5891ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-152 2014 Note
BACK DOOR LOCK
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
G
AWKIA2578ZZ
1. Outside handle 2. Back door lock cable 3. Back door lock actuator
4. Back door lock 5. Door striker
H
BACK DOOR LOCK

I
BACK DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567376
REMOVAL J
lation".
2. Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation". DLK
3. Disconnect lock rod from key cylinder (if equipped).
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the back door lock.
5. Disconnect door lock cable from handle. L
6. Remove back door lock bolts and back door lock.
INSTALLATION
M
CAUTION:
• Tighten back door bolts to specification.
• After installation, check back door open/close and lock/unlock operation. N
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567377 O
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Release the back door lock cable from the outside handle.
3. Remove outside handle bolts and outside handle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Tighten outside handle bolts to specification. Refer to DLK-153, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-153 2014 Note
BACK DOOR LOCK
• After installation, check back door open/close and lock/unlock operation.
EMERGENCY LEVER
EMERGENCY LEVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567378
UNLOCK PROCEDURE
NOTE:
If back door lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, perform the following proce-
dure to unlock back door assembly.
From inside the vehicle, using a suitable tool, rotate the emergency
lever (1) in a clockwise direction to unlock the back door assembly.
AWKIA2577ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-154 2014 Note
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
A
I
AWKIA2582ZZ
1. Fuel filler lid lock release cable 2. Fuel filler lid lock 3. Fuel filler lid bumper J
4. Fuel filler lid spring 5. Fuel filler lid A. Clip
B. Cable protector Pawl
DLK
FUEL FILLER LID
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567380
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove fuel cap pin (1).
M
ALKIA3198ZZ
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-155 2014 Note
2. Remove fuel filler lid screws (A) and fuel filler lid (1).
ALKIA3199ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close and lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567381
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock/fuel filler lid lock release handle. Refer to DLK-144, "HOOD LOCK RELEASE HAN-
DLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from hood lock/fuel
filler lid lock release handle (1).
JMKIA7999ZZ
3. Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove center pillar lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-23, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER :
5. Remove luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-32, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
6. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (1) by pulling downward
and then sliding cable end to the side to remove from fuel filler
lid lock assembly (2).
JMKIA8139ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-156 2014 Note
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567382
A
REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
B
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher (LH). Refer to INT-32, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the fuel filler lid lock assemby.
C
4. Release pawls (A) and remove fuel filler lid lock assembly (1).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gasket (2) when removing.
D
F
JMKIA8138ZZ
5. Disconnect fuel filler lid opener cable (1) by pulling downward

and then sliding cable end to the side to remove from fuel filler G
lid lock assembly (2).
JMKIA8139ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DLK
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-157 2014 Note
DOOR SWITCH
DOOR SWITCH
REMOVAL
1. Remove the door switch bolt (A).
2. Disconnect the harness connector and remove door switch (1).
JMKIA2173ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-158 2014 Note
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567384
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console lower. Refer to IP-20, "Removal and Installation".
C
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (instrument center).
3. Remove screws (A) and the inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter) (1).
D
JMKIA7948ZZ
INSTALLATION G
CONSOLE
H
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567385
REMOVAL I
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (console).
3. Release clips (A) and remove inside key antenna (console) (1). J
DLK
JMKIA7950ZZ
M
INSTALLATION
LUGGAGE ROOM
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567386
O
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, "SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation".
P
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the inside key antenna (luggage room).

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-159 2014 Note
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
3. Release clips (A) and remove inside key antenna (luggage
room) (1).
ALKIA3208ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-160 2014 Note
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
A
OUTSIDE HANDLE
B
REMOVAL
C
2. Remove screw (1) and outside handle finisher (1) from outside
handle (2).
D
F
ALKIA3209ZZ
3. Remove outside key antenna (outside handle) (1) from outside

handle (2). G
ALKIA3210ZZ
J
INSTALLATION
REAR BUMPER DLK
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009567388
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the outside key antenna (rear bumper) M
3. Release clips (A) and remove outside key antenna (rear
bumper) (1).
N
P
JMKIA7952ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-161 2014 Note
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009671358
The door request switch (driver side) is serviced as an assembly with the outside handle. Refer to DLK-147,
"OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009671359
The door request switch (passenger side) is serviced as an assembly with the outside handle. Refer to DLK-
147, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009671360
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove screws (A) and back door request switch (1) from back
door outer finisher (2).
AWKIA2584ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-162 2014 Note
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove front combination lamp (LH). Refer to EXL-108, "Removal and Installation"
2. Remove bolt (A) and Intelligent Key warning buzzer (1).
C
JMKIA7949ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-163 2014 Note
REMOVAL
1. Remove glove box assembly. Refer to IP-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove remote keyless entry receiver bolt (A).
3. Disconnect the harness connector and remove remote keyless
entry receiver (1)
JMKIA7947ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-164 2014 Note
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
A
1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. B
2. Insert a suitable tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and rotate it to separate the upper part from the lower
part.
CAUTION: C
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry. D
E
PIIB6221E
3. Replace the battery with new one. F
Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery

(CR2025)
G
4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION: H
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area.
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key I
functions work normally.
PIIB6222E
DLK

GETtheMANUALS.org
DLK-165 2014 Note
ENGINE
EC
A
EC
SECTION
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
HR16DE Fuel Pump ...............................................................19 F
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 ........................................20
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6 Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater ............................20
Ignition Coil With Power Transistor .........................20 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ...............................21
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ...........21
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Knock Sensor ..........................................................21
SIONER" ................................................................... 6 H
Mass Air Flow Sensor ..............................................22
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine Refrigerant Pressure Sensor ...................................22
and CVT .................................................................... 6 Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch....22
General Precautions ................................................. 7 Throttle Control Motor ..............................................22 I
Throttle Control Motor Relay ...................................22
PREPARATION ........................................... 10 Throttle Position Sensor ..........................................23
PREPARATION ..................................................10 J
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS ..................23
Special Service Tools .............................................. 10 WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Lamp ....................................23
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 11 K
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Mal-
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................11 function Indicator Lamp (MIL) ..................................24
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................... 11 STRUCTURE AND OPERATION ..................... 26 L

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Positive Crankcase Ventilation ................................26
Component Parts Location .................................... 11
ECM ........................................................................ 15
SYSTEM ............................................................ 27
M
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor .......................... 15 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................27
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 ........................................... 15 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater ............................... 15 tion ...........................................................................27
ASCD Steering Switch ............................................ 16 N
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail Safe ..............28
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) ....................... 16
Clutch Pedal Position Switch .................................. 16 MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ................29
Cooling Fan ............................................................. 16 MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : Sys- O
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) .......................... 17 tem Description ........................................................30
Electric Throttle Control Actuator ............................ 17
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM .................................32
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ...................... 17
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System De- P
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor .................................... 18
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor .............................. 18 scription ...................................................................32
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .......................33
Valve ....................................................................... 18 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor ....... 19 Description ...............................................................33
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve ........ 19
Fuel Injector ............................................................ 19 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)....33

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-1 2014 Note
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (AS- Test Value and Test Limit ....................................... 78
CD) : System Description ....................................... 34
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 86
CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 34
CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description ...... 34 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................... 86
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 86
COOLING FAN CONTROL ....................................... 34
COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description... 35 BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 107
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ....................... 35 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 107
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Work Flow ............................................................. 107
Description .............................................................. 36 Diagnostic Work Sheet ......................................... 109
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ........................ 36 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System De- ECM .................................................................. 111
scription .................................................................. 37 Description ............................................................ 111
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL .................... 37 Work Procedure .................................................... 111
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSI-
Description .............................................................. 38
TION LEARNING .............................................. 113
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW EN- Description ............................................................ 113
GINE OIL PRESSURE .............................................. 38 Work Procedure .................................................... 113
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW EN-
GINE OIL PRESSURE : System Description ......... 38
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING ....................................................... 114
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST ....................... 39 Description ............................................................ 114
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning Work Procedure .................................................... 114
lamps/Indicator lamps ............................................. 39
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ....................... 115
OPERATION ...................................................... 40 Description ............................................................ 115
Work Procedure .................................................... 115
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)... 40
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (AS- MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CD) : Switch Name and Function ........................... 40 CLEAR .............................................................. 117
Description ............................................................ 117
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ..... 42 Work Procedure .................................................... 117
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 42
GST (Generic Scan Tool) ....................................... 42 BASIC INSPECTION ........................................ 118
Work Procedure .................................................... 118
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM) ............................ 43
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK .............................. 122
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION ..................................... 43
Work Procedure .................................................... 122
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1st Trip Detection
Logic and Two Trip Detection Logic ....................... 43 HOW TO SET SRT CODE ................................ 124
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze Description ............................................................ 124
Frame Data ............................................................. 43 SRT Set Driving Pattern ........................................ 125
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System ..... 44 Work Procedure .................................................... 127
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern ....... 47
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 129
Test (SRT) Code .................................................... 48
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indica- TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
tor Lamp (MIL) ........................................................ 49 VALUE .............................................................. 129
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 49 Description ............................................................ 129
CONSULT Function ................................................ 53 Component Function Check ................................. 129
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 62
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 137
ECM ................................................................... 62 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 137
Reference Value ..................................................... 62
Fail Safe ................................................................. 73 U0101 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 140
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 74 DTC Description .................................................... 140
DTC Index .............................................................. 76 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-2 2014 Note
U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 141 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 174
Description ............................................................ 141 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 141 P0132 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 176
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 141 DTC Logic .............................................................. 176
EC
P0011 IVT CONTROL ...................................... 142
DTC Logic ............................................................. 142 P0133 A/F SENSOR 1 .................................... 179
Component Inspection .......................................... 144 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180 C
P0014 EVT CONTROL ..................................... 146 P0137 HO2S2 .................................................. 183

DTC Logic ............................................................. 146 DTC Logic .............................................................. 183
Component Function Check .................................. 184 D
Component Inspection .......................................... 148 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185
Component Inspection ........................................... 186
P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ......... 149 E
DTC Logic ............................................................. 149 P0138 HO2S2 .................................................. 188
Component Inspection .......................................... 150 Component Function Check .................................. 190
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 191 F
P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER ....................... 151 Component Inspection ........................................... 193
DTC Logic ............................................................. 151
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 151 P0139 HO2S2 .................................................. 196 G
Component Inspection .......................................... 152 DTC Logic .............................................................. 196
P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ..... 153 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 198
H
DTC Logic ............................................................. 153 Component Inspection ........................................... 199
Component Inspection .......................................... 154 P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
TION ................................................................ 201 I
P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .... 155 DTC Logic .............................................................. 201
DTC Logic ............................................................. 155 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 202
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 155 J
Component Inspection .......................................... 156 P0172 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNC-
TION ................................................................ 205
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 158 DTC Logic .............................................................. 205
DTC Logic ............................................................. 158 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 206 K
Component Inspection .......................................... 160 P0196 EOT SENSOR ...................................... 209
DTC Logic .............................................................. 209 L
P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 163 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210
Component Inspection .......................................... 164 P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR ......................... 211 M
DTC Logic .............................................................. 211
P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ........................... 165 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 211
DTC Logic ............................................................. 165 Component Inspection ........................................... 212 N
Component Inspection .......................................... 166 P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 213
DTC Logic .............................................................. 213
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................. 167 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 213 O
Component Inspection .......................................... 168 P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MIS- P
FIRE ................................................................. 216
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 170 DTC Logic .............................................................. 216
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171 P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 222
DTC Logic .............................................................. 222
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1 ...................................... 173 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222
DTC Logic ............................................................. 173
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-3 2014 Note
Component Inspection ...........................................223 P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR .. 257
DTC Description .................................................... 257
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ........................... 224 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 257
DTC Logic ..............................................................224 Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve Timing
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................224 Control Position Sensor) ....................................... 259
Component Inspection ...........................................226
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 260
P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ...................... 228 DTC Logic ............................................................. 260
DTC Logic ..............................................................228 Component Function Check ................................. 260
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................228 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 261
Component Inspection ...........................................230
P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................... 263
P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION . 232 DTC Logic ............................................................. 263
DTC Logic ..............................................................232 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 263
Component Function Check ..................................233
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................234 P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 264
DTC Logic ............................................................. 264
P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ....................... 237
DTC Logic ..............................................................237 P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .................. 265
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................237 DTC Logic ............................................................. 265
Component Inspection ...........................................238 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 265
Component Inspection .......................................... 267
P0500 VSS ....................................................... 240
Description .............................................................240 P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................ 268
DTC Logic ..............................................................240 DTC Logic ............................................................. 268
Component Function Check ..................................241 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 269
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................241 Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position
Switch) .................................................................. 271
P0520 EOP SENSOR ...................................... 242 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 272
DTC Logic ..............................................................242
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................242 P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....... 273
Component Inspection ...........................................243 Description ............................................................ 273
DTC Logic ............................................................. 273
P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE .................... 244 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 273
DTC Logic ..............................................................244
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................245 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR ....................... 275
Component Inspection ...........................................246 Description ............................................................ 275
DTC Logic ............................................................. 275
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 247 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 275
Description .............................................................247
DTC Logic ..............................................................247 P1720 VSS ........................................................ 276
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................247 Description ............................................................ 276
DTC Logic ............................................................. 276
P0605 ECM ...................................................... 249 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 276
DTC Logic ..............................................................249
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................249 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 278
DTC Logic ............................................................. 278
P0607 ECM ...................................................... 251 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 278
DTC Logic ..............................................................251 Component Inspection .......................................... 279
P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................. 252 TOR RELAY ..................................................... 280
DTC Logic ..............................................................252 DTC Logic ............................................................. 280
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................252 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 280
P0850 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 254 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Description .............................................................254 FUNCTION ........................................................ 283
DTC Logic ..............................................................254
DTC Logic ............................................................. 283
Component Function Check ..................................255

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-4 2014 Note
P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .......... 287 Component Inspection ........................................... 315
DTC Logic ............................................................. 287 A
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 287 FUEL PUMP .................................................... 316
Component Inspection .......................................... 288 Component Function Check .................................. 316
EC
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Component Inspection ........................................... 318
ACTUATOR ...................................................... 289
DTC Logic ............................................................. 289
IGNITION SIGNAL .......................................... 319
Component Function Check .................................. 319 C
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................... 291 Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power
DTC Logic ............................................................. 291 Transistor) ............................................................. 322
D
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 291 Component Inspection (Condenser) ...................... 323
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP .............. 324
P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................... 294 Component Function Check .................................. 324 E
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .......... 325
Component Function Check .................................. 325 F
P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................... 297 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 325
DTC Logic ............................................................. 297
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 297 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 327 G
Component Inspection .......................................... 298 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 327
P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................... 300 Symptom Table ..................................................... 327
H
DTC Logic ............................................................. 300 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 333
Description ............................................................. 333
I
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 334
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ............... 304
Component Function Check .................................. 304 IDLE SPEED ................................................... 334
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 304 Inspection .............................................................. 334 J
Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position
Switch) .................................................................. 305 IGNITION TIMING ........................................... 335
Inspection .............................................................. 335
ASCD INDICATOR ........................................... 306 K
Component Function Check .................................. 306 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 336
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 306 Inspection .............................................................. 336
L
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH ............. 307 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ....... 337
Component Function Check .................................. 307 Inspection .............................................................. 337
Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 338 M
Switch) .................................................................. 308
ECM ................................................................. 338
COOLING FAN ................................................. 309 Exploded View ....................................................... 338 N
Component Function Check .................................. 309 Removal and Installation ....................................... 338
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) ......... 310 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 339 O
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) ......... 311
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 312 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS

Description ............................................................ 312 (SDS) ............................................................... 339 P
Component Function Check .................................. 312 Idle Speed ............................................................. 339
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 312 Ignition Timing ....................................................... 339
Calculated Load Value .......................................... 339
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 314 Mass Air Flow Sensor ............................................ 339

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-5 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CVT INFOID:0000000009022412
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MI to light up.
• Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MI to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to GI-3, "Contents".
• Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with
a bracket, etc. may cause the MI to light up due to the short circuit.
• Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MI to light up due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
• Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and
TCM (Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-6 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
A
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.
• Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running. EC
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is C
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect battery ground cable. D
SEF289H
• Do not disassemble ECM. E

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. So, F
engine operation can vary slightly in this case. However, this
is not an indication of a malfunction. Do not replace parts
because of a slight variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related G
diagnostic information will be lost within 24 hours.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes H
PBIA9222J
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values I
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or
from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break). J
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin
terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt- K
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away L
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
PBIB0090E
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
of ICs, etc.
M
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and make sure ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-62, "Reference Value". N
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
O
• Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause serious
incidents.
• Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS). P
MEF040D

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-7 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function
Check. The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE if the repair is completed. The Component
Function Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
JSBIA1315ZZ
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
SEF348N
• Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
• Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unnecessar-
ily.
• Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-8 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to
observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic A
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
EC
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave C
ratio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-9 2014 Note
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure
Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
KV10120000
Fuel tube adapter
JSBIA0410ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-10 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
EC
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009022415
ENGINE ROOM COMPARTMENT C
ALBIA1138ZZ
L
ECM EC-15, "ECM"
IPDM E/R control the internal relays and the actuators. M
When CAN communication with ECM is impossible, IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R
performs fail-safe control.
PCS-4, "Component Parts Location".
N
Mass air flow sensor
EC-21, "Knock Sensor"
(with intake air temperature sensor)
Electric throttle control actuator
EC-17, "Electric Throttle Control Actuator" O
(with built in throttle position sensor and throttle control motor)
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-18, "EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve"
Cooling fan motor EC-16, "Cooling Fan" P

Refrigerant pressure sensor HA-11, "Component Parts Location"
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-11 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
JSBIA0592ZZ
Engine front right side Left view of the engine Engine rear right side

Ignition coil No.4
EC-20, "Ignition Coil With Power Transistor"
(with power transistor)
Ignition coil No.3
Ignition coil No.2
Ignition coil No.1
The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to
PCV valve
conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-21, "Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve"
Engine oil pressure sensor EC-18, "Engine Oil Pressure Sensor"
Engine oil temperature sensor EC-18, "Engine Oil Temperature Sensor"
Knock sensor EC-21, "Knock Sensor"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-17, "Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor"
Camshaft position sensor EC-16, "Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)"
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor EC-19, "Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor"
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve EC-19, "Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve"
Fuel injector No.1 (Front) EC-19, "Fuel Injector"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-12 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
A
Fuel injector No.1 (Rear) EC-19, "Fuel Injector"
Fuel injector No.2 (Rear) EC-19, "Fuel Injector" EC
Fuel injector No.3 (Rear) EC-19, "Fuel Injector" C

Fuel injector No.4 (Rear) EC-19, "Fuel Injector"

D
Crankshaft position sensor EC-17, "Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)"
EXHAUST COMPARTMENT
E
JSBIA0593ZZ
M
A/F sensor 1 EC-15, "Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-20, "Heated Oxygen Sensor 2" N
BODY COMPARTMENT
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-13 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
ALBIA1139ZZ
Left center side of undercarriage (fu- IPDM E/R area Brake pedal area
el tank)

ASCD steering switch EC-16, "ASCD Steering Switch"
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump EC-19, "Fuel Pump"
EVAP canister EC-36, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Description"
Brake pedal position switch EC-22, "Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch"
Stop lamp switch EC-22, "Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch"
Clutch pedal position switch (M/T models) EC-16, "Clutch Pedal Position Switch"
Accelerator pedal position switch EC-15, "Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-14 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
ECM INFOID:0000000009022416
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
EC
D
PBIA9222J
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor INFOID:0000000009022417

E
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end
of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM. F
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM.
The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal G
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM H
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
PBIB1741E
ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel cut.
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 INFOID:0000000009022418 I
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec- J
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
K
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocar- L
bon density in rich.
JMBIA0112GB
M
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of about 800°C N
(1,472°F).
P
PBIB3354E
Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1 Heater INFOID:0000000009022419
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-15 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
heater control heater
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element within the specified range.
ASCD Steering Switch INFOID:0000000009509471
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description" for the ASCD func-
tion.
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) INFOID:0000000009022421
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of

intake camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
PBIA9209J
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
JPBIA5503GB
Clutch Pedal Position Switch INFOID:0000000009509475
When the clutch pedal is depressed, the clutch pedal position switch turns OFF and the clutch pedal position
switch signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM judges the clutch pedal conditions via the signal (ON or OFF).
Cooling Fan INFOID:0000000009022422
Cooling fan operates at low and high speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor.
Refer to EC-35, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description" for cooling fan operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-16 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) INFOID:0000000009022423
A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder
block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolu- EC
tion.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change. C
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
PBIA9209J
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure. E
JPBIA5503GB H
Electric Throttle Control Actuator INFOID:0000000009022424
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. I
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor. J
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000009022425
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine K

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to L
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
M
SEF594K
N
<Reference data>
O
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)] Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
P
20 (68) 3.5 2.10 - 2.90
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-17 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000009022426
The engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor is detects engine oil pressure
and transmits a voltage signal to the ECM.
JSBIA0292ZZ
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000009022427
The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine oil temperature [°C (°F)] Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)

–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.10 - 2.90
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
110 (230) 0.6 0.143 - 0.153
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals. SEF012P
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000009022428
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
JSBIA0651ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-18 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor INFOID:0000000009022429
A
Exhaust valve timing control position sensor detects the protrusion of
the signal plate installed to the exhaust camshaft front end.
This sensor signal is used for sensing a position of the exhaust cam- EC
shaft.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change. C
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor D
changes.
PBIA9209J
Exhaust Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000009022430

E
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil F
amount and direction of flow through exhaust valve timing control
unit or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width retards valve angle.
The shorter pulse width advances valve angle. G
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the exhaust valve angle at the control
position. H
JSBIA0652ZZ
Fuel Injector INFOID:0000000009022431

I
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and J
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains K
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
L
JSBIA0742ZZ
Fuel Pump INFOID:0000000009022432 M
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

N
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
O
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for a few seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam- P
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-19 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Condition Fuel pump operation

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 INFOID:0000000009022433
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner con-
ditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater INFOID:0000000009022434
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Engine speed
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at idle for 1 minute
under no load
Ignition Coil With Power Transistor INFOID:0000000009022435
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-20 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Intake Air Temperature Sensor INFOID:0000000009022436
A
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor
. The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal
to the ECM. EC
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
C
D
PBIA9559J
<Reference data> E
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)

25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200 F
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
SEF012P H
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve INFOID:0000000009022437
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF I

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit J
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
K
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
L
PBIB1842E
Knock Sensor INFOID:0000000009022438
M
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine
knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM. N
P
JSBIA0284ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-21 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000009022440
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater
the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor INFOID:0000000009022442
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2657E
Stop Lamp Switch & Brake Pedal Position Switch INFOID:0000000009022443
Stop lamp switch and brake pedal position switch are installed to brake pedal bracket.
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
Brake pedal Brake pedal position switch Stop lamp switch

Released ON OFF
Depressed OFF ON
Throttle Control Motor INFOID:0000000009022444
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
Throttle Control Motor Relay INFOID:0000000009022445
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-22 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
Throttle Position Sensor INFOID:0000000009022446
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,
throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement. EC
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig- C
nals and controls the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor.
D
PBIB0145E
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS

E
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp
INFOID:0000000009022441
F
DESIGN/PURPOSE
When engine oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure warning
lamp informs the driver of low oil pressure to prevent damage to the
engine. G
JPNIA1881ZZ
BULB CHECK J
Not applicable
OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIG-
NAL K
For the operation for CAN communications blackout or abnormal signal reception, refer to MWI-19, "Fail-safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM L
JSBIA2846GB
O
SIGNAL PATH
ECM calculates an engine oil pressure according to a signal transmitted from the engine oil pressure sensor.
When the engine oil pressure is low, ECM transmits the engine oil pressure warning lamp signal to combina- P
tion meter via CAN communication. Then the engine oil pressure warning lamp illuminates.
SHUTOFF CONDITION
When any of the following conditions is satisfied:
• Engine oil pressure is the specified value or more.
LIGHTING CONDITION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-23 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
• Ignition switch: ON
• Engine oil pressure is less than specified value.
TIMING CHART
JPBIA6026GB
WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR LAMPS : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

INFOID:0000000009022439
DESIGN/PURPOSE
When a malfunction which increases exhaust gases is detected, ECM turns ON MIL and informs the driver of
the necessity of inspection and repair.
When a malfunction which causes damage to the catalyst is
detected, ECM immediately blinks MIL to alert the driver.
JSBIA1315ZZ
BULB CHECK
The bulb turns ON after turning ON the ignition switch (engine stop) and turns OFF after restarting the engine.
OPERATION AT COMBINATION METER CAN COMMUNICATION CUT-OFF OR UNUSUAL SIG-
NAL
For the operation for CAN communication blackout in the combination meter, refer to MWI-19, "Fail-safe".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JPBIA6021GB
SIGNAL PATH
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-24 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
• When the lighting conditions of the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) are satisfied, ECM transmits a malfunc-
tion indicator lamp (MIL) signal to the combination meter via CAN communication. A
• The combination meter turns ON or blinks the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), according to a signal
received from ECM.
LIGHTING CONDITION EC
When all of the following conditions are satisfied:
• DTC which influences on exhaust gasses is judged. C
For DTCs that the malfunction indicator lamp turns ON and the number of DTC diagnosis trips, refer to EC-76,
"DTC Index".
SHUTOFF CONDITION D
• Erase DTC
E
NOTE:
For the conditions of erasing DTC, refer to EC-43, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze Frame
Data".
F
TIMING CHART
JPBIA6022GB
K

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-25 2014 Note
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
STRUCTURE AND OPERATION
Positive Crankcase Ventilation INFOID:0000000009022447
PBIB2962E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes
through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover.
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-26 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009022448
EC
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
JPBIA5483GB
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-27 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Buttery current sensor is not apply.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls the engine by various functions.
Function Reference
EC-30, "MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System De-
Fuel injection control
scription"
Electric ignition control EC-32, "ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System Description"
Intake valve timing control EC-37, "INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description"
EC-38, "EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Descrip-
Exhaust valve timing control
tion"
EC-38, "ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE
Engine protection control (Low engine oil pressure)
OIL PRESSURE : System Description"
EC-33, "AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Descrip-
Air conditioning cut control
tion"
Cooling fan control EC-35, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description"
EC-36, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Descrip-
Evaporative emission
tion"
EC-39, "WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning lamps/In-
Warning/Indicator/Chime control
dicator lamps"
CAN communication EC-34, "CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description"
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail Safe INFOID:0000000009582428
NON DTC RELATED ITEM
Detected Engine operating condition

Remarks Reference page
items in fail-safe mode
Malfunction Engine speed will not rise When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
indicator more than 2,500 rpm due driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
lamp circuit to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related EC-324, "Compo-
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the nent Function
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open Check"
by means of operating fail safe function.
The fail safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
DTC RELATED ITEM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail safe mode
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function.
P0014 Exhaust valve timing control The signal is not energized to the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-28 2014 Note
SYSTEM
A
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following conditions.
P0118 sensor circuit CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition EC
(CONSULT display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F)
Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F)
C
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
D
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal E
P0223 condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
P0197 Engine oil temperature sensor Exhaust valve timing control does not function. F
P0198
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running.
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:) G
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a H
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
I
Vehicle condition Driving condition

When engine is idling Normal J
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring. K
P2101 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a L
P2119 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:) M
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 N
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the O
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in the Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P
P2122 Accelerator pedal position sen- The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-29 2014 Note
SYSTEM
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009022451
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSBIA3075GB
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor, camshaft position sen-
sor and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever position is changed from N to D (CVT models)
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-30 2014 Note
SYSTEM
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
A
EC
PBIB2793E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for drive ability and emission control. D
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sen-
sor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-15, "Air Fuel Ratio Sensor 1". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air- E
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching F
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
G
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation H
- Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of heated sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
- High engine coolant temperature I
- During warm-up
- After shifting from N to D (CVT models)
- When starting the engine
J
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally K
designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is L
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
M
includes “short-term fuel trim” and “long-term fuel trim”.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the-
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in N
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the “short-term fuel trim” from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differ-
O
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-31 2014 Note
SYSTEM
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals
of the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009022452
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSBIA3076GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Firing order: 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor signal. Comput-
ing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-32 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• During acceleration
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed A
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
EC
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000009022453
C
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D
JSBIA3077GB
K
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. L
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds. M
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low. N
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-33 2014 Note
SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description INFOID:0000000009509477
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSBIA3607GB
*1: M/T models

*2: CVT models
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM
• Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can be set the vehicle speed in the set speed range.
• ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
• Operation status of ASCD is indicated in combination meter.
• If any malfunction occurs in the ASCD system, it automatically deactivates the ASCD control.
Refer to EC-40, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Switch Name and Function" for ASCD
operating instructions.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION : System Description INFOID:0000000009022454
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-29, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart", about CAN com-
munication for detail.
COOLING FAN CONTROL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-34 2014 Note
SYSTEM
COOLING FAN CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000009022455
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC
JSBIA3078GB
*: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. G
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM controls cooling fan speed corresponding to vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure, air conditioner ON signal. Then control system has 3-step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. H
Cooling Fan Operation
PBIB2483E
N
Cooling Fan Relay Operation
The ECM controls cooling fan relays through CAN communication line.
Cooling fan relay O

Cooling fan speed
1 2 3
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
P
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
High (HI) ON ON ON
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-35 2014 Note
SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009022456
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSBIA0114GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB3039E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-36 2014 Note
SYSTEM
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000009022457
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC
JSBIA3079GB F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
G
JPBIA4884GB
L
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, engine oil tempera- M
ture and engine coolant temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve
timing (IVT) control solenoid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open
timing of the intake valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
N
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-37 2014 Note
SYSTEM
EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL : System Description INFOID:0000000009022458
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSBIA3080GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JPBIA4886GB
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the exhaust
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed and engine oil tem-
perature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the exhaust valve timing (EVT) control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the exhaust valve
to increase engine torque and output in a range of high engine speed.
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
ENGINE PROTECTION CONTROL AT LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE : System De-

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-38 2014 Note
SYSTEM
scription INFOID:0000000009022460
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
EC
D
JSBIA0704GB
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

E
Engine oil pressure sensor Engine pressure Engine protection control Combination meter F
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed • Oil pressure warning lamp signal • Oil pressure warning lamp
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• The engine protection control at low engine oil pressure warns the driver of a decrease in engine oil pres- G
sure by the oil pressure warning lamp a before the engine becomes damaged.
• When detecting a decrease in engine oil pressure at an engine speed less than 1,000 rpm, ECM transmits
an oil pressure warning lamp signal to the combination meter. The combination meter turns ON the oil pres- H
sure warning lamp, according to the signal.
Decrease in engine Combination meter I

Engine speed
oil pressure Oil pressure warning lamp
Less than 1,000 rpm ON*
Detection J
1,000 rpm or more ON
*: When detecting a normal engine oil pressure, ECM turns OFF the oil pressure warning lamp.
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST K
WARNING/INDICATOR/CHIME LIST : Warning lamps/Indicator lamps INFOID:0000000009022461
Regarding the arrangement. Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter". L

Name Design Arrangement/Function
Engine oil pressure warning Regarding the function. Refer to EC-23, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR M
lamp LAMPS : Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamp".
Regarding the function. Refer to EC-24, "WARNING LAMPS/INDICATOR N

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
LAMPS : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-39 2014 Note
OPERATION
OPERATION
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : Switch Name and Function
INFOID:0000000009582728
SWITCHES AND INDICATORS
JPBIA5485ZZ
CRUISE indicator SET indicator CANCEL switch

ACCEL/RES switch COAST/SET switch ASCD MAIN switch
On the combination meter On the steering wheel
(Information display)
SET SPEED RANGE

ASCD system can be set the following vehicle speed.
Minimum speed (Approx.) Maximum speed (Approx.)

30 km/h (19 MPH) 170 km/h (105 MPH)
SWITCH OPERATION
Item Function
CANCEL switch Cancels the cruise control driving.
ACCEL/RES switch • Resumes the set speed.
(ACCELERATE/RESUME) • Increases speed incrementally during cruise control driving.
• Sets desired cruise speed.
COAST/SET switch
• Decreases speed incrementally during cruise control driving.
ASCD MAIN switch Master switch to activate the ASCD system.
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD MAIN switch. (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) and 170 km/h (105
MPH), press COAST/SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the ACCEL/RES switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the switch is
released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed
• Clutch pedal is depressed or gear position is changed to neutral position. (M/T models)
• Selector lever is changed to N, P or R position (CVT models)
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-40 2014 Note
OPERATION
• TCS system is operated
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform A
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature, CRUISE indicator may
blink slowly.
EC
When the engine coolant temperature decreases to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE indicator will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by pressing SET/− switch or RES/+ switch.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET indicator will blink quickly.
• Speed limiter MAIN switch is pressed.(Set speed is cleared.) C
• ASCD MAIN switch is pressed.(Set speed is cleared.)
COAST OPERATION
When the COAST/SET switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the D
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
E
When the ACCEL/RES switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is performed,
vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet following
conditions.
• Brake pedal is released F
• Clutch pedal is released (M/T models)
• Selector lever is in other than P and N positions (CVT models)
• Vehicle speed is greater than 30 km/h (19 MPH) and less than 170 km/h (105 MPH) G

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-41 2014 Note
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
This system is an on board diagnostic system that records exhaust emission-related diagnostic information
and detects a sensors/actuator-related malfunction. A malfunction is indicated by the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) and stored in ECU memory as a DTC. The diagnostic information can be obtained with the diag-
nostic tool (GST: Generic Scan Tool).
GST (Generic Scan Tool) INFOID:0000000009022463
When GST is connected with a data link connector equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the
control unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests. Refer to EC-42, "Diag-
nosis Description".
NOTE:
Service $0A is not applied for regions where it is not mandated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-42 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
A
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : 1st Trip Detection Logic and Two Trip Detection Logic
INFOID:0000000009022464 EC
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in C
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time when the DTC is stored.
<2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is per-
formed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink D
the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC E

Items 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip 2nd trip
Blinking Illuminated Blinking Illuminated displaying displaying displaying displaying
F
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 – P0308 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst G
damage) — DTC: P0300 – P0308 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Refer
— × — — × — — —
H
to EC-76, "DTC Index".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
I
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : DTC and Freeze Frame Data INFOID:0000000009022465
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

J
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not K
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words, L
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or light up the MIL during the
1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory. M
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-76, "DTC Index". These items are required
by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored non-con-
tinuously are also displayed on CONSULT. N
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illu-
minating the MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-107, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC Confirma- O
tion Procedure or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA P
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-43 2014 Note
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 – P0308
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items
3 1st trip freeze frame data
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal-
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased.
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Counter System INFOID:0000000009022466
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS
• When a malfunction is detected for the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on.
• The MIL will turn OFF after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. The drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with-
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
SULT will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
COUNTER SYSTEM CHART
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other

MIL (turns OFF) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no display) 80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data (clear) *1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR
DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYS-
TEM”.
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MIS-
FIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
• *1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
• *2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality De-
terioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-44 2014 Note
EC
L
JMBIA1417GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn OFF after vehicle is driv- *3: When the same malfunction is de- M
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL en 3 times (pattern B) without any tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. malfunctions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
N
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM. O
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with- P
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC
is stored in ECM.
Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
Driving Pattern B
Refer to EC-47, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern".
Driving Pattern C

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-45 2014 Note
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F)
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 – 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 – 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than
70°C (158°F)
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire <Exhaust
Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
JMBIA1418GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-46 2014 Note
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn OFF after vehicle is driv- *3: When the same malfunction is de- A
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL en 3 times (pattern B) without any tected in two consecutive trips, the
will light up. malfunctions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.
*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi- EC
will not be displayed any longer after the first time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
C
still remain in ECM.)
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip D
freeze frame data will be cleared.
Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection
System” E
Driving Pattern A
Driving Pattern B F
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Driving Pattern INFOID:0000000009022467
G
DRIVING PATTERN A
Driving pattern A means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
• Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more. H
• Engine coolant temperature rises by 20°C (36°F) or more after starting the engine.
• Engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more.
• The ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF. I
NOTE:
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern
A.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving J
pattern A.
DRIVING PATTERN B
K
Driving pattern B means a trip satisfying the following conditions.
• Engine speed reaches 400 rpm or more.
• Engine coolant temperature reaches 70°C (158°F) or more.
• Vehicle speed of 70 – 120 km/h (44 – 75 MPH) is maintained for 60 seconds or more under the control of L
closed loop.
• Vehicle speed of 30 – 60 km/h (19 – 37 MPH) is maintained for 10 seconds or more under the control of
closed loop. M
• Under the closed loop control condition, the following state reaches 12 seconds or more in total: Vehicle
speed of 4 km/h (2 MPH) or less with idling condition.
• The state of driving at 10 km/h (7 MPH) or more reaches 10 minutes or more in total.
• A lapse of 22 minutes or more after engine start. N
NOTE:
• Drive the vehicle at a constant velocity.
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of driving conditions, reset the counter of driving pattern O
B.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern B.
P
DRIVING PATTERN C
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as per the following:
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ±375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1±0.1) [%]
Engine coolant temperature condition:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-47 2014 Note
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), engine coolant temperature should be lower
than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), engine coolant temperature should
be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).
NOTE:
• When the same malfunction is detected regardless of the above vehicle conditions, reset the counter of driv-
ing pattern C.
• When the above conditions are satisfied without detecting the same malfunction, reset the counter of driving
pattern C.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is
stored in ECM.
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness Test (SRT) Code INFOID:0000000009022468
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.
Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items.
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE:
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection.
SRT SET TIMING
SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2)
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-48 2014 Note
Example
Self-diagnosis result A
Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
EC
P0402 — — — —
NG
P1402 NG — NG
(Consecutive NG)
C
(1st trip) DTC
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
D
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out. E
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above F
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1) G
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons:
H
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT and the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from the ECM after repair. I
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out J
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) INFOID:0000000009022469
K
• When detecting a DTC that affects exhaust gas, the exhaust emis-
sion-related control module transmits a malfunction indicator lamp
signal to ECM via CAN communication line.
ECM prioritizes (MIL: ON/blink) the signal received from the L
exhaust emission-related control module and the ECM-stored DTC
that affects exhaust gas and transmits a malfunction indicator lamp
signal to the combination meter via CAN communication line. M
The combination meter turns ON or blinks the MIL, according to
the signal transmitted from ECM, and alerts the driver of malfunc-
tion detection.
N
• Control modules that a DTC of MIL ON/Blink is stored (Control
JSBIA1315ZZ
module varies among DTCs.):
- ECM
- TCM O
1. The MIL illuminates when ignition switch is turned ON (engine is not running).
NOTE:
Check the MIL circuit if MIL does not illuminate. Refer to EC-324, "Component Function Check".
P
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
NOTE:
If MIL remains ON or continues blinking, a DTC(s) that affects exhaust gas is detected. In this case, Self
diagnosis is required for performing inspection and repair.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-49 2014 Note
The on board diagnostic system has the following functions.
Diagnostic test mode Function

Bulb check MIL can be checked.
SRT status ECM can read if SRT codes are set.
Malfunction warning If ECM detects a malfunction, it illuminates or blinks MIL to inform the driver that a mal-
function has been detected.
Self-diagnostic results DTCs or 1st trip DTCs stored in ECM can be read.
Accelerator pedal released position learning ECM can learn the accelerator pedal released position. Refer to EC-113, "Description".
Throttle valve closed position learning ECM can learn the throttle valve closed position. Refer to EC-114, "Description".
Idle air volume learning ECM can learn the idle air volume. Refer to EC-115, "Description".
Mixture ratio self-learning value clear Mixture ratio self-learning value can be erased. Refer to EC-117, "Description".
BULB CHECK MODE

Description
This function allows damage inspection in the MIL bulb (blown, open circuit, etc.).
Operation Procedure
2. The MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON.
If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-324, "Component Function Check".
SRT STATUS MODE
Description
This function allows to read if ECM has completed the self-diagnoses of major emission control systems and
components. For SRT, refer to EC-48, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : System Readiness Test (SRT) Code".
Operation Procedure
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 20 seconds.
2. SRT status is indicated as shown blow.
• ECM continues to illuminate MIL if all SRT codes are set.
• ECM blinks MIL for about 10 seconds if all SRT codes are not set.
JMBIA1515GB
MALFUNCTION WARNING MODE

Description
In this function ECM turns on or blinks MIL when it detects a malfunction in the emission control system com-
ponents and/or the powertrain control components (which affect vehicle emissions) to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
Operation Procedure
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-50 2014 Note
2. Check that MIL illuminates. A
If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-324, "Component Function Check".
3. Start engine and let it idle.
• For two trip detection logic diagnoses, ECM turns on MIL when it detects the same malfunction twice in EC
the two consecutive driving cycles.
• For 1st trip detection logic diagnoses, ECM turns on MIL when it detects a malfunction in one driving
cycle.
C
• ECM blinks MIL when it detects a malfunction that may damage the three way catalyst (misfire).
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE
Description D
This function allows to indicate DTCs or 1st trip DTCs stored in ECM according to the number of times MIL is
blinking.
How to Set Self-diagnostic Results Mode E
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has a mal- F
function.
• After ignition switch is turned off, ECM is always released from the “self-diagnostic results” mode.
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds. G
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
• Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
• Fully release the accelerator pedal. H
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until the
MIL starts blinking.
NOTE:
Do not release the accelerator pedal for 10 seconds if MIL starts blinking during this period. This blinking I
is displaying SRT status and is continued for another 10 seconds.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to “Self-diagnostic results” mode. J
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
K
PBIB0092E
How to Read Self-diagnostic Results N

The DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL O
illuminates in “malfunction warning” mode, it is a DTC; if two or more codes are displayed, they may be either

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-51 2014 Note
DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These unidentified codes can be identified by
using the CONSULT or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a code.
PBIB3005E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes per the following.
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Flashes 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16
The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-sec-
onds) - OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. Refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results
By performing this procedure, ECM memory is erased and the following diagnostic information is erased as
well.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
NOTE:
Also, if a battery terminal is disconnected, ECM memory is erased and the diagnostic information as listed
above is erased. (The amount of time required for erasing may vary from a few seconds to several hours.)
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-52 2014 Note
5. Set ECM in “self-diagnostic results” mode. A
6. The diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
7. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed. EC
CONSULT Function INFOID:0000000009022471
C
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

D
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. E
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT unit.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also shifts F
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
ECU Identification ECM part number can be read.
DTC Work Support The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed. G
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes H
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
I
• Test values
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE
Self Diagnostic Item J
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
K
DTCs and 1st trip DTCs related to the malfunction are displayed in “self-diag results”.
• When ECM detects a 1st trip DTC, “1t” is displayed for “TIME”.
• When ECM has detected a current DTC, “0” is displayed for “TIME”.
• If “TIME” is neither “0” nor “1t”, the DTC occurred in the past and ECM shows the number of times the vehi- L
cle has been driven since the last detection of the DTC.
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
NOTE: M
If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 sec-
onds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
1. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT. N
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
3. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
O
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data item* Description

P
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One mode in the following is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX.
DTC RESULTS
(Refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-53 2014 Note
Freeze frame data item* Description
CAL/LD VALUE [%] The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C] or [°F] The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] schedule than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] fuel schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED [km/h] or [mph] The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
COMBUST CONDITION
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or [°F] The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE
NOTE:
• The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applica-
ble to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• For reference values of the following items, refer to EC-62, "Reference Value".
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
Monitor Item Selection Remarks

Monitored item Unit MAIN ECU INPUT Description
SIGNALS SIGNALS
• Accuracy becomes poor if
Indicates the engine speed engine speed drops below
computed from the signal of the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm × × the crankshaft position sensor • If the signal is interrupted
(POS) and camshaft position while the engine is running,
sensor (PHASE). an abnormal value may be
indicated.
• When the engine is
stopped, a certain value is
The signal voltage of the mass indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V × ×
air flow sensor is displayed. • When engine is running,
specification range is indi-
cated in “SPEC”.
“Base fuel schedule” indicates
the fuel injection pulse width When engine is running,
B/FUEL SCHDL ms × × programmed into ECM, prior specification range is indicat-
to any learned on board cor- ed in “SPEC”.
rection.
• When the engine is
stopped, a certain value is
indicated.
The mean value of the air-fuel • When engine is running,
A/F ALPHA-B1 % ratio feedback correction fac- specification range is indi-
tor per cycle is indicated. cated in “SPEC”.
• This data also includes the
data for the air-fuel ratio
learning control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-54 2014 Note
Monitored item Unit Description A
MAIN ECU INPUT
SIGNALS SIGNALS
When the engine coolant tem-
The engine coolant tempera- perature sensor is open or EC
ture (determined by the signal short-circuited, ECM enters
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F × × voltage of the engine coolant fail-safe mode. The engine
temperature sensor) is dis- coolant temperature deter-
played. mined by the ECM is dis-
C
played.
The A/F signal computed from
the input signal of the air fuel D
A/F SEN1 (B1) V × ×
ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is dis-
played.
The signal voltage of the heat- E
HO2S2 (B1) V × × ed oxygen sensor 2 is dis-
played.
Display of heated oxygen sen-
sor 2 signal:
F
RICH: means the amount of
oxygen after three way cata- When the engine is stopped, a
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) RICH/LEAN ×
lyst is relatively small. certain value is indicated. G
LEAN: means the amount of
oxygen after three way cata-
lyst is relatively large.
The vehicle speed computed
H
from the vehicle speed signal
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph × ×
sent from combination meter
is displayed.
I
The power supply voltage of
BATTERY VOLT V
ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 ACCEL SEN 2 signal is con- J
The accelerator pedal position
verted by ECM internally.
V sensor signal voltage is dis-
ACCEL SEN 2 Thus, it differs from ECM ter-
played.
minal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 × × TP SEN 2-B1 signal is con-
K
The throttle position sensor verted by ECM internally.
V
TP SEN 2-B1 × × signal voltage is displayed. Thus, it differs from ECM ter-
minal voltage signal. L
Indicates start signal status
[ON/OFF] computed by the After starting the engine,
START SIGNAL ON/OFF ECM according to the signals [OFF] is displayed regardless
of engine speed and battery of the starter signal. M
voltage.
Indicates idle position [ON/
OFF] computed by ECM ac- N
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF × ×
cording to the accelerator
pedal position sensor signal.
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition O
of the air conditioner switch as
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF × ×
determined by the air condi-
tioner signal.
[ON/OFF] condition of the P
power steering system (deter-
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF × ×
mined by the signal sent from
EPS control unit) is indicated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-55 2014 Note
SIGNALS SIGNALS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition
of the electrical lode signal.
ON: Rear window defogger
switch is ON and/or lighting
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF × ×
switch is 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defog-
ger switch and lighting switch
are OFF.
IGNITION SW ON/OFF × ×
from ignition switch signal.
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF × from the heater fan switch sig-
nal.
BRAKE SW ON/OFF from the stop lamp switch sig-
nal.
Indicates the actual fuel injec-
When the engine is stopped, a
tion pulse width compensated
INJ PULSE-B1 msec certain computed value is indi-
by ECM according to the input
cated.
signals.
Indicates the ignition timing
When the engine is stopped, a
IGN TIMING BTDC computed by ECM according
certain value is indicated.
to the input signals.
“Calculated load value” indi-
cates the value of the current
CAL/LD VALUE %
air flow divided by peak air
flow.
Indicates the mass air flow
computed by ECM according
MASS AIRFLOW g/s
to the signal voltage of the
mass air flow sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister
purge volume control sole-
noid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V % computed by the ECM ac-
cording to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larg-
er as the value increases.
Indicates [°CA] of intake cam-
INT/V TIM(B1) °CA
shaft advance angle.
Indicates [°CA] of exhaust
EXH/V TIM B1 °CA
camshaft retard angle.
• The control value of the in-
take valve timing control so-
lenoid valve (determined by
ECM according to the input
INT/V SOL(B1)
% signals) is indicated.
• The advance angle be-
comes larger as the value
increases.
The air conditioner relay con-
trol condition (determined by
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF
signals) is indicated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-56 2014 Note
MAIN ECU INPUT
SIGNALS SIGNALS
Indicates the fuel pump relay
control condition determined EC
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF
signals.
Indicates the throttle control C
motor relay control condition
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF
determined by the ECM ac-
cording to the input signals.
D
Indicates the condition of the
cooling fan (determined by
COOLING FAN HI/LOW/OFF signals). E
HI: High speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop
F
of heated oxygen sensor 2
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON/OFF
heater determined by ECM
according to the input signals. G
The control condition of the
power generation voltage
variable control (determined
H
signals) is indicated.
ALT DUTY SIG ON/OFF
ON: Power generation voltage
variable control is active.
I
OFF: Power generation volt-
age variable control is inac-
tive.
The vehicle speed computed J
VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph from the vehicle speed signal
sent from TCM is displayed.
Displays the condition of Idle K
Air Volume Learning
YET: Idle air volume learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT has not been performed yet.
CMPLT: Idle air volume learn- L
ing has already been per-
formed successfully.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile

Distance traveled while MIL is M
activated.
The engine oil temperature
(determined by the signal volt-
ENG OIL TEMP °C or °F N
age of the engine oil tempera-
ture sensor) is indicated.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control value com- O
puted by ECM according to
A/F S1 HTR(B1) % the input signals.
• The current flow to the heat-
er becomes larger as the
P
value increases.
Indicates the duty ratio of the
power generation command
ALT DUTY % value. The ratio is calculated
by ECM based on the battery
current sensor signal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-57 2014 Note
SIGNALS SIGNALS
The signal voltage of battery
BAT CUR SEN mV
current sensor is displayed.
The vehicle speed computed
from the vehicle speed signal
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph × ×
sent from combination meter
is displayed.
Indicates the correction of a
factor stored in ECM.
The factor is calculated from
the difference between the
A/F ADJ-B1 —
target air-fuel ratio stored in
ECM and the air-fuel ratio cal-
culated from A/F sensor 1 sig-
nal.
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF × × from the park/neutral position
(PNP) signal.
The intake air temperature
(determined by the signal volt-
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F × ×
age of the intake air tempera-
ture sensor) is indicated.
The signal voltage from the re-
AC PRESS SEN V frigerant pressure sensor is
displayed.
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph
displayed.
MAIN SW ON/OFF
from MAIN switch signal.
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
from CANCEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF from RESUME/ACCELER-
ATE switch signal.
SET SW ON/OFF from SET/COAST switch sig-
nal.
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF from brake pedal position
switch signal.
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
of stop lamp switch signal.
Indicates the vehicle cruise
condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is main-
tained at the ASCD set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT NON/CUT CUT: Vehicle speed de-
creased to excessively low
compared with the ASCD set
speed, and ASCD operation is
cut off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-58 2014 Note
MAIN ECU INPUT
SIGNALS SIGNALS
Indicates the vehicle cruise
condition. EC
NON: Vehicle speed is main-
LO SPEED CUT NON/CUT tained at the ASCD set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed de-
creased to excessively low,
C
and ASCD operation is cut off.
Indicates [On/Off] condition of
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF CVT O/D according to the in- D
put signal from the TCM.
Indicates [On/Off] condition of
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF CVT O/D cancel request sig- E
nal.
of CRUISE lamp determined
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF
by the ECM according to the
F
input signals.
of SET lamp determined by G
SET LAMP ON/OFF
the ECM according to the in-
put signals.
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition H
of kickdown determined by
KICKDOWN POS ON/OFF
the ECM according to the in-
put signals.
I
Models other than M/T mod-
CLUTCH P/P SW ON/OFF clutch pedal position switch
els always display OFF.
signals.
• The control value of the ex- J
haust valve timing control
solenoid valve (determined
by ECM according to the in-
VTC DTY EX B1 %
put signals) is indicated.
K
• The advance angle be-
comes larger as the value
increases. L
THRTL STK CNT B1 — Not used.
The signal voltage of EOP
EOP SENSOR mV
sensor is displayed. M
NOTE:
HO2 S2 DIAG2(B1) INCMP/CMPLT The item is indicated, but not
used.
N
NOTE:
A/F SEN1 DIAG2(B1) INCMP/CMPLT The item is indicated, but not
used.
O
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
WORK SUPPORT MODE P
Work Item

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-59 2014 Note
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE Fuel pump will stop by touching “START” during idling. When releasing fuel pressure from fuel line
Crank a few times after engine stalls.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN The idle air volume that keeps the engine within the When learning the idle air volume
specified range is memorized in ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT The coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio re- When clearing mixture ratio self-learning
turns to the original coefficient. value
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* Idle condition When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* Idle condition When adjusting target ignition timing
CLSD THL POS LEARN Ignition on and engine stopped. When learning throttle valve closed position
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Engine: Return to the original trouble con- • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT dition If trouble symptom disap- • Engine coolant temperature
TEMP • Change the engine coolant temperature pears, see CHECK ITEM. sensor
using CONSULT. • Fuel injector
• Engine: Return to the original trouble con-
• Harness and connectors
dition If trouble symptom disap-
FUEL INJECTION • Fuel injector
• Change the amount of fuel injection using pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
CONSULT.
• Engine: After warming up, run engine at
1,500 rpm. Engine speed changes ac-
PURG VOL CONT/V • Change the EVAP canister purge volume cording to the opening per-
• Solenoid valve
control solenoid valve opening percent us- cent.
ing CONSULT.
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped)
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” and “OFF” Fuel pump relay makes the • Harness and connectors
FUEL PUMP RELAY
using CONSULT and listen to operating operating sound. • Fuel pump relay
sound.
• Ignition switch: ON • Harness and connectors
COOLING FAN* • Turn the cooling fan “LOW”, “HI” and “OFF” Cooling fan moves and stops. • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relay)
CONSULT. • Cooling fan motor
• Engine: Return to the original trouble con-
dition If trouble symptom disap- Perform Idle Air Volume Learn-
IGNITION TIMING
• Timing light: Set pears, see CHECK ITEM. ing.
• Retard the ignition timing using CONSULT.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine.
• Compression
• A/C switch OFF
• Fuel injector
POWER BALANCE • Shift lever: Neutral Engine runs rough or dies.
• Power transistor
• Cut off each fuel injector signal one at a
• Spark plug
time using CONSULT.
• Ignition coil
• Engine: Return to the original non-stan-
If malfunctioning symptom • Harness and connectors
INT V/T ASSIGN dard condition
disappears, see CHECK • Intake valve timing control so-
ANGLE • Change intake valve timing using CON-
ITEM. lenoid valve
SULT.
• Engine: Return to the original non-stan-
If malfunctioning symptom • Harness and connectors
EXH V/T ASSIGN dard condition
disappears, see CHECK • Exhaust valve timing control
ANGLE • Change exhaust valve timing using CON-
ITEM. solenoid valve
SULT.
*: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-60 2014 Note
Test Item
A
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
HO2S2 (B1) P1146 P0138 EC-188, "DTC Logic"
HO2S2 HO2S2 (B1) P1147 P0137 EC-183, "DTC Logic" EC
HO2S2 (B1) P0139 P0139 EC-196, "DTC Logic"
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-179, "DTC Logic"
A/F SEN1 C
A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276 P0130 EC-170, "DTC Logic"
SRT & P-DTC MODE

D
SRT STATUS Mode
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed.
E
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-61 2014 Note
ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [HR16DE]

ECM

NOTE:
• The following table includes information (items) inapplicable to this vehicle. For information (items) applica-
ble to this vehicle, refer to CONSULT display items.
• Numerical values in the following table are reference values.
• These values are input/output values that ECM receives/transmits and may differ from actual operations.
Example: The ignition timing shown by the timing light may differ from the ignition timing displayed on the
data monitor.
This occurs because the timing light shows a value calculated by ECM according to signals received from
the camshaft position sensor and other sensors related to ignition timing.
• For outlines of following items, refer to EC-53, "CONSULT Function".
Monitor Item Condition Values/Status

Almost the same speed as
ENG SPEED • Run engine and compare CONSULT value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-129, "Description".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-129, "Description".
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-129, "Description".
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
• Revving engine from idle up to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions 0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1)
are met. 1.0 V
- Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at LEAN ←→ RICH
idle for 1 minute under no load
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT value with the speedometer indi- Almost the same speed as
VHCL SPEED SE
cation. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V

ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V

ACCEL SEN 2
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Shift lever: 1st Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V

TP SEN 2-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Shift lever:1st Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
• Engine: After warming up, idle Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
the engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-62 2014 Note
ECM
A
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting EC
OFF
switch: OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
Heater fan switch: ON ON C
HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON D
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Selector lever position: P or N E
INJ PULSE-B1 (CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
• Engine: After warming up 11°BTDC (CVT) F
Idle
• Selector lever position: P or N 10°BTDC (M/T)
IGN TIMING (CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45°BTDC G
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 10% - 35%
• Selector lever position: P or N
CAL/LD VALUE (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) H
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 10% - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0.8 - 4.0 g/s I
MASS AIRFLOW (CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 2.0 - 10.0 g/s
• No load J
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
PURG VOL C/V (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) K
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 0% - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA L
INT/V TIM(B1) (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0° - 40°CA
Quickly
• No load M
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
EXH/V TIM B1 (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
Approx. 0° - 40°CA N
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Quickly
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
• Selector lever position: P or N O
INT/V SOL(B1) (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) When revving engine up to 2,000rpm
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Approx. 0% - 90%
Quickly
• No load
P
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
• For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch: ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above OFF

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-63 2014 Note
ECM
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON
Engine coolant temperature is 98°C
OFF
(208°F) or less
• Engine: After warning up, idle the
Engine coolant temperature is between
COOLING FAN engine LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
Engine coolant temperature is 100°C
HIGH
(212°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up
HO2S2 HTR (B1) ON
- Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
idle for 1 minute under no load
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
VEHICLE SPEED
Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET
formed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: running
Idle air volume learning has already been
CMPLT
performed successfully.
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has turned 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
ON. (0 - 40,723 miles)
ENG OIL TEMP • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158F)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
• Engine speed: Idle
• Battery: Fully charged*
BAT CUR SEN • Selector lever position: P or N (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) Approx 2,500 - 3,500 mV
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load
VHCL SPEED SE
A/F ADJ-B1 • Engine running −0.330 - 0.330
Selector lever position: P or N (CVT) or
ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON Neutral (M/T)
Shift lever: Except above OFF
Indicates intake air tempera-
INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates.)
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF
COAST/SET switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
COAST/SET switch: Released OFF

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-64 2014 Note
ECM
A
BRAKE SW1 • Brake pedal: Fully released ON
(Brake pedal posi- • Ignition switch: ON
tion switch) • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF EC

BRAKE SW2
(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
VHCL SPD CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
C
LO SPEED CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
AT OD MONITOR • Ignition switch: ON OFF
AT OD CANCEL • Ignition switch: ON OFF D
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time → at
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON E
• When vehicle speed: Between
SET LAMP
30 km/h (19 MPH) and 170 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(105 MPH)
F
• Engine: After warming up Idle 0 - 2%
• Selector lever: P or N (CVT) or
VTC DTY EX B1 Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx 0- 90% G
• No load
Accelerator pedal: Fully released OFF
KICKDOWN POS • Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed ON H
Clutch pedal: Fully released OFF
CLUTCH P/P SW • Ignition switch: ON
Clutch pedal: Fully depressed ON
I
THRTL STK CNT B1 Not used. —
NOTE:
HO2 S2 DIAG2(B1) —
The item is indicated, but not used. J
• Engine: After warming up Idle Approx 1,000 - 2,000 mV
EOP SENSOR (CVT) or Neutral (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx 1,500 - 3,500 mV K
• No load
A/F SEN1 NOTE:
—
DIAG2(B1) The item is indicated, but not used. L
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM inter-
nally. Thus, they differ from ECM terminals voltage signal.
M
TERMINAL LAYOUT
P
PBIA9221J
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE:
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-65 2014 Note
ECM
• When disconnecting ECM harness connector , loosen it with
levers as far as they will go as shown in the figure.
: ECM
: Fasten
• Connect a break-out box and harness adapter between the ECM

and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
• Specification data are reference values and are measured JMBIA0029ZZ
between each terminals.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT.

Value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
2.6 V
[Ignition switch: ON]

1 108 Throttle control motor • Engine stopped
Output
(L) (B) (Open) • Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed
JMBIA0213GB
2 108 Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE

Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(L/W) (B) supply (11 - 14 V)
2.9 - 8.8 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
3 108
A/F sensor 1 heater Output • Idle speed
(G/W) (B)
(More than 140 seconds after start-
ing engine)
JSBIA0714GB
1.8 V

4 108 Throttle control motor • Engine stopped
Output
(P) (B) (Close) • Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
• Accelerator pedal: Fully released
JMBIA0215GB
[Engine is running] 10 V
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm af-
ter the following conditions are met
5
59 Heated oxygen sensor 2 - Engine: after warming up
(BR/ Output
(L/Y) heater - Keeping the engine speed between
W)
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no
load
JMBIA0214GB

• Engine stopped BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14 V)
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-66 2014 Note
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE
EC
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed C
D
9 108 EVAP canister purge volume JMBIA0039GB
Output
(SB) (B) control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
E
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: About 2,000 rpm
(More than 100 seconds after start-
ing engine.) F
JMBIA0216GB
G
10
— ECM ground — — —
(B)
11 H
(B/Y)
12 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 1 (Rear)
(L/W) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running] I
16
Fuel injector No. 3 (Rear) • Warm-up condition
(G)
• Idle speed
20 NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending
J
(O/W)
on rpm at idle
24
(R)
108 JMBIA0221GB
K
Output
25 (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 4 (Front)
(R) (11 - 14 V)
29 L
(G) [Engine is running]
30
Fuel injector No. 2 (Front) • Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
(O)
M
31
(L) JMBIA0222GB
BATTERY VOLTAGE N
15 108 [Ignition switch: OFF]
Throttle control motor relay Output (11 - 14 V)
(G/W) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-67 2014 Note
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
17 0 - 0.3 V
Ignition signal No. 1
(V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
18 NOTE:
Ignition signal No. 2 The pulse cycle changes depending
(Y/B)
on rpm at idle
108 JMBIA0219GB
Output
21 (B)
Ignition signal No. 4 0.2 - 0.5 V
(W)
[Engine is running]
22 • Engine speed: 2,500 rpm
Ignition signal No. 3
(BR)
JMBIA0220GB

• For 1 second after turning ignition
0 - 1.0 V
switch ON
23 108 [Engine is running]
Fuel pump relay Output
(GR) (B)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turning ig-
(11 - 14 V)
nition switch ON
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.0 V
• A few seconds after turning ignition
32 108 ECM relay switch OFF
Output
(P) (B) (Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after turn-
(11 - 14 V)
ing ignition switch OFF
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
• Shift lever: D (CVT), 1st (M/T)
33 36 • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 1 Input
(W) (R) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
• Engine stopped
Less than 4.75 V
34 36 • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Throttle position sensor 2 Input
(B) (R) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
More than 0.36 V
36 Sensor ground
— — — —
(R) (Throttle position sensor)
37 40 [Engine is running]
Knock sensor Input 2.5 V
(W) (L) • Idle speed
0 - 4.8 V
38 44 Engine coolant temperature
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with battery
(LG/B) (P) sensor
temperature.
40 Sensor ground
— — — —
(L) (Knock sensor shield circuit)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-68 2014 Note
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
Sensor ground
44 EC
— (Engine coolant temperature — — —
(P)
sensor)
[Ignition switch ON]
0.4V
• Engine stopped C
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.8 - 1.3 V
45 52
Mass air flow sensor Input • Idle speed D
(G/B) (L/G)
[Engine is running] 0.8 - 1.3 to 2.4 V
• Warm-up condition (Check for linear voltage rise in
• Engine is revving from idle to about response to engine being in-
4,000 rpm creased to about 4,000 rpm.) E
0 - 4.8 V
46 52 Intake air temperature sen-
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
(V) (LG) sor
air temperature. F
[Engine is running]
47 60 • Idle speed G
Engine oil pressure sensor Input
(Y) (L) [Engine is running]
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
H
4.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
I
NOTE:
on rpm at idle J
48 63 Exhaust valve timing control JSBIA0716GB
Input
(W/R) (W) position sensor
4.3 V
K
[Engine is running]
L
JSBIA0717GB
M
49 108
A/F sensor 1 Input [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2 V
(G) (B)
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 N
rpm quickly after the following condi-
tions are met
50 59
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Input - Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0 V
(L/R) (L/Y)
- Keeping the engine speed between
O
3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute
and at idle for 1 minute under no
load P
Sensor ground
52
— (Mass air flow sensor/Intake — — —
(LG)
air temperature sensor)
[Engine is running] 1.8 V
53 108
A/F sensor 1 Input • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
(L) (B)
• Engine speed: 2,500 rpm ratio.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-69 2014 Note
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
Sensor ground
54
— (Engine oil temperature sen- — — —
(BR)
sor)
Sensor ground
55
— (Intake air l temperature — — —
(G/L)
sensor)
0 - 4.8 V
57 54 Engine oil temperature sen-
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(P) (BR) sor
oil temperature.
59 Sensor ground
— — — —
(L/Y) (Heated oxygen sensor 2)
60 Sensor ground
— — — —
(L) (Engine oil pressure sensor)
4.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
on rpm at idle
61 62 Crankshaft position sensor JMBIA2185GB

Input
(L/O) (G) (POS)
4.0 V
[Engine is running]
JMBIA2186GB
Sensor ground
62
— [Crankshaft position sensor — — —
(G)
(POS)]
Sensor ground
63 [Camshaft position sensor
— — — —
(W) (PHASE), exhaust valve tim-
ing control position sensor]
4.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE:
on rpm at idle
65 63 Camshaft position sensor JSBIA0718GB

Input
(R/W) (W) (PHASE)
4.3 V
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
JSBIA0719GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-70 2014 Note
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE EC
• Shift lever: P or N (CVT), Neutral (M/
69 108 (11 - 14 V)
PNP signal Input T)
(BR) (B)
0V
• Shift lever: Except above position C
72 36 Sensor power supply
— [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(G) (R) (Throttle position sensor)
[Engine is running] D
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V E
73 108 Intake valve timing control
Output [Engine is running]
(P) (B) solenoid valve
• When revving engine up to F
2,000rpm quickly
JSBIA0720GB G
74 60 Sensor power supply
(O) (W) (Engine oil pressure sensor)
Sensor power supply H
75 62
[Crankshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(O) (G)
(POS)]
[Engine is running] I
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 10 V J
77 108 Exhaust valve timing control
Output [Engine is running]
(P/W) (B) solenoid valve
• When revving engine up to K
2,000rpm quickly
JSBIA0720GB L
Sensor power supply
78 63 [Camshaft position sensor
(BR) (W) (PHASE), exhaust valve tim-
M
ing control position sensor]
81 108 Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(V) (B) (Back-up) (11 - 14 V)
N
83 Input/
— CAN-L — —
(P) Output
84 Input/
— CAN-H — — O
(L) Output
[Engine is running]
85 98 • Warm-up condition
Refrigerant pressure sensor Input 1.0 - 4.0 V
(V) (LG) • Both A/C switch and blower fan P
switch: ON (Compressor operates)
88 Input/
— Data link connector — —
(GR) Output

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-71 2014 Note
ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
92 108 • Clutch pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14 V)
Clutch pedal position switch Input
(R) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
0V
• Clutch pedal: Fully released
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 108
Ignition switch Input BATTERY VOLTAGE
(L) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
(11 - 14 V)
4V
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
94 95 [Ignition switch: ON]
ASCD steering switch Input 1V
(Y) (B) • CANCEL switch: Pressed
2V
• COAST/SET switch: Pressed
3V
• ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed
95 Sensor ground
— — — —
(B) (ASCD steering switch)
Sensor ground
98
— (Refrigerant pressure sen- — — —
(LG)
sor)
0V
99 108 • Brake pedal: Fully released
Stop lamp switch Input
(LG) (B) [Ignition switch: OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly depressed (11 - 14 V)
0V
100 108 • Brake pedal: Slightly depressed
Brake pedal position switch Input
(G) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
101 98
(Refrigerant pressure sen- — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(W) (LG)
sor)
Sensor power supply
102 104
(Accelerator pedal position — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(BR) (Y)
sensor 2)
• Engine stopped 0.3 - 0.6 V
103 104 Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Input
(GR) (Y) sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped 1.95 - 2.4 V
Sensor ground
104
— (Accelerator pedal position — — —
(Y)
sensor 2)
105 108 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(G) (B) (11 - 14 V)
Sensor power supply
106 111
(Accelerator pedal position — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(V) (GR)
sensor 1)
108
(B)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-72 2014 Note
ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
• Engine stopped 0.6 - 0.9 V EC
110 111 Accelerator pedal position • Accelerator pedal: Fully released
Input
(SB) (P) sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped 3.9 - 4.7 V C
Sensor ground
111
— (Accelerator pedal position — — — D
(P)
sensor 1)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
Fail Safe INFOID:0000000009022473
E
NON DTC RELATED ITEM

F
Detected Engine operating condition
Remarks Reference page
items in fail-safe mode
Malfunction Engine speed will not rise When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the G
indicator more than 2,500 rpm due driver by lighting up MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
lamp circuit to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related EC-324, "Compo-
H
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the nent Function
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open Check"
by means of operating fail safe function.
The fail safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL I
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
DTC RELATED ITEM

J
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
control does not function. K
P0014 Exhaust valve timing control The signal is not energized to the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut. L
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant temperature Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following conditions.
P0118 sensor circuit CONSULT displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM. M
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON or START 40°C (104°F) N
Approx. 4 minutes or more after engine starting 80°C (176°F)
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time) O
When the fail safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in P
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0223 condition.
P0197 Engine oil temperature sensor Exhaust valve timing control does not function.
P0198
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-73 2014 Note
ECM
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control function ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control actuator (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the
engine stalls.
The engine can restart in the Neutral position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position sen- The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2128 condition.
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-74 2014 Note
ECM
Priority DTC Detected items A

U0101, U1001 CAN communication line
P0102, P0103 Mass air flow sensor
EC
P0112, P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
P0117, P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0122, P0123, P0222, P0223, P1225, P1226, P2135 Throttle position sensor C
P0197, P0198 Engine oil temperature sensor
P0327, P0328 Knock sensor
P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) D
1
P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
E
P0520 Engine oil pressure sensor
P0605, P0607 ECM
P0643 Sensor power supply F
P0850 Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
P1610 - P1615 NATS
G
P2122, P2123, P2127, P2128, P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
P0031, P0032 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
P0037, P0038 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater H
P0075 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0078 Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
I
P0130, P0131, P0132, P0133 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
P0137, P0138, P0139 Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve J
P0603 ECM
2
P0710, P0715, P0720, P0740, P0744, P0745, P0746,
CVT related sensors, solenoid valves and switches
P0776, P0778, P0840, P1740, P1777, P1778 K
P1078 Exhaust camshaft position sensor
P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
L
P1805 Brake switch
P2100, P2103 Throttle control motor relay
P2101 Electric throttle control function M
P2118 Throttle control motor
P0011 Intake valve timing control
P0014 Exhaust valve timing control N
P0171, P0172 Fuel injection system function
P0300 - P0304 Misfire
O
P0420 Three way catalyst function
P0524 Engine oil pressure
3
P1564 ASCD steering switch P
P1572 ASCD brake switch
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
P1715 Input speed sensor
P1720 Vehicle speed sensor
P2119 Electric throttle control actuator

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-75 2014 Note
ECM
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1
Items
CONSULT SRT code Trip MIL Reference page
ECM*3
GST*2
U0101 0101 LOST COMM (TCM) — 1 × EC-140
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-141
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 — — — —
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 — 2 × EC-142
P0014 0014 EXT/V TIM CONT-B1 — 2 × EC-146
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-149
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-149
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-151
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-151
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 — 2 × EC-153
P0078 0078 EX V/T ACT/CIRC-B1 — 2 × EC-155
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-158
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-158
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-163
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-163
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-165
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-165
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-167
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-167
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) × 2 × EC-170
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-173
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-176
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) × 2 × EC-179
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-183
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-188
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-196
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 — 2 × EC-201
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 — 2 × EC-205
P0196 0196 EOP SEN/CIR — 2 × EC-209
P0197 0197 EOP SEN/CIRC — 2 × EC-211
P0198 0198 EOP SEN/CIRC — 2 × EC-211
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-213
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-213
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × or — EC-216
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × or — EC-216
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — EC-222

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-76 2014 Note
ECM
DTC*1
Items A
CONSULT SRT code Trip MIL Reference page
ECM*3
GST*2
P0328 0328 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — EC-222 EC
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-224
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 × EC-228
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 × 2 × EC-232 C
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × EC-237
P0500 0500 VEHICLE SPEED SEN A*5 — 2 × EC-240
D
P0520 0520 EOP SENSOR/SWITCH — 2 — EC-242
P0524 0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE — 1 — EC-244
×
E
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT*6 — 2 EC-247
P0605 0605 ECM — 1 or 2 × or — EC-249
7 7
1* ×* F
P0607 0607 ECM — EC-251
2*8 —*8
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC — 1 × EC-252
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-254 G
P1078 1078 EXH TIM SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 × EC-257
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP — 1 × EC-260
H
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — EC-263
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — EC-264
P1564 1564 ASCD SW — 1 — EC-265 I
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW — 1 — EC-268
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN — 1 — EC-273
J
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE — 2 — SEC-62
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM — 2 — SEC-63
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU — 2 — SEC-64 K
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED — 2 — EC-275
P1720 1720 V/SP SEN (A/T OUT) — 2 — EC-276
L
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-278
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 — 1 × EC-280
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-283 M
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR — 1 × EC-280
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 — 1 × EC-287
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 — 1 × EC-289 N
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-291
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-291
O
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-294
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-294
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 — 1 × EC-297 P
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR — 1 × EC-300
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by SAE J1979/ ISO 15031-5.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-77 2014 Note
ECM
*6: This self-diagnosis is not for ECM power supply circuit, even though “ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT” is displayed on CONSULT screen.
*7: CVT models.
*8: M/T models.
Test Value and Test Limit INFOID:0000000009421403
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of SAE J1979/ISO 15031-5.
The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (e.g., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-78 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test A

limit
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
EC
TID Scaling
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH C
cycle
Maximum sensor output voltage for
P0131 84H 0BH
test cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
test cycle E
Response rate: Response ratio (lean
P0133 87H 04H
to rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (rich to F
P0133 88H 04H
lean)
The amount of shift in air fuel ratio (too
P2A00 or P2096 89H 84H
lean) G
P2A00 or P2097 8AH 84H
rich)
P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage H
P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 O2 sensor slow response - Rich to
HO2S 01H P014C 8DH 04H
(Bank 1) lean bank 1 sensor 1 I
O2 sensor slow response - Rich to
P014C 8EH 04H
lean bank 1 sensor 1
O2 sensor slow response - Lean to rich
J
P014D 8FH 84H
bank 1 sensor 1
P014D 90H 84H
bank 1 sensor 1 K
O2 sensor delayed response - Rich to
P015A 91H 01H
O2 sensor delayed response - Rich to L
P015A 92H 01H
O2 sensor delayed response - Lean to
P015B 93H 01H
rich bank 1 sensor 1 M
P015B 94H 01H
rich bank 1 sensor 1
Response rate: Response ratio (lean N
P0133 95H 04H
to rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
P0133 96H 84H
lean) O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-79 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
P0137 08H 0CH
test cycle
02H
(Bank 1) P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
Rear O2 sensor delay response diag-
P0139 82H 11H
nosis
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for

03H P0144 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) test cycle
P0146 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
P0151 84H 0BH
test cycle
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
test cycle
HO2S Response rate: Response ratio (lean

P0153 87H 04H
to rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (rich to
P0153 88H 04H
lean)
P2A03 or P2098 89H 84H
lean)
P2A03 or P2099 8AH 84H
rich)
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
05H
(Bank 2) P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
P014E 8DH 04H
P014E 8EH 04H
P014F 8FH 84H
bank 2 sensor 1
P014F 90H 84H
bank 2 sensor 1
P015C 91H 01H
P015C 92H 01H
P015D 93H 01H

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-80 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
P015D 94H 01H
C
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Response rate: Response ratio (lean
05H P0153 95H 04H
(Bank 2) to rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (rich to D
P0153 96H 84H
lean)
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle
E
P0157 08H 0CH
test cycle
HO2S 06H
(Bank 2) P0158 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
F
Rear O2 sensor delay response diag-
P0159 82H 11H
nosis
G
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 3 Maximum sensor output voltage for H

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) test cycle
P0166 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0165 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage I
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust in-
P0420 82H 01H J
Three way catalyst function dex value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output
P2423 83H 0CH
voltage
P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst K
CATA-
LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust in-
P0430 82H 01H L
Three way catalyst function dex value
22H
(Bank2) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output
P2424 83H 0CH
voltage
M
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst
Low flow faults: EGR temp change rate
P0400 80H 96H
(short term)
N
Low flow faults: EGR temp change rate
P0400 81H 96H
(long term)
EGR Low flow faults: Difference between
SYSTEM
31H EGR function
P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
O
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low flow faults: Max EGR temp
P
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-81 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0011 80H 9DH
alignment check diagnosis)
VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
P0014 81H 9DH
P0011 82H 9DH
drive failure diagnosis)
P0014 83H 9DH
35H VVT Monitor (Bank1)
P100A 84H 10H VEL slow response diagnosis
P1090 85H 10H VEL servo system diagnosis
VTC intake intermediate lock function
P0011 86H 9DH diagnosis (VTC intermediate position
VTC intake intermediate lock system
Advanced: P052A
87H 9DH diagnosis (VTC intermediate lock posi-
Retarded: P052B
VVT tion check diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
P0024 81H 9DH
P0021 82H 9DH
P0024 83H 9DH
36H VVT Monitor (Bank2)
P100B 84H 10H VEL slow response diagnosis
P1093 85H 10H VEL servo system diagnosis
VTC intake intermediate lock function
P0021 86H 9DH diagnosis (VTC intermediate position
VTC intake intermediate lock system
Advanced: P052C
87H 9DH diagnosis (VTC intermediate lock posi-
Retarded: P052D
tion check diagnosis)
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch)
Leak area index (for more than 0.02
P0456 80H 05H
inch)
EVAP
SYSTEM EVAP control system leak Maximum internal pressure of EVAP
3CH P0456 81H FDH
(Very small leak) system during monitoring
Internal pressure of EVAP system at
P0456 82H FDH
the end of monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control
valve close

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-82 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Low Input: P0031 Converted value of heater electric cur-
41H A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 1) 81H 0BH
High Input: P0032 rent to voltage
C
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input: P0037 Converted value of heater electric cur-
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input: P0038 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of heater electric cur- D
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) rent to voltage
SOR
HEATER Low Input: P0051 Converted value of heater electric cur-
45H A/F sensor 1 heater (Bank 2) 81H 0BH
High Input: P0052 rent to voltage
E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input: P0057 Converted value of heater electric cur-
46H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 2) High Input: P0058 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of heater electric cur-
47H
er (Bank 2)
P0063 80H 0CH
rent to voltage
F
Secondary air injection system incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect flow detected
G
Bank1: P0491 Secondary air injection system insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient flow
Secondary air injection system pump
P2445 82H 01H H
stuck off
SEC-
Secondary air injection system high
OND- 71H Secondary air system P2448 83H 01H
airflow
ARY AIR
Bank1: P2440 Secondary air injection system switch-
I
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing valve stuck open
Secondary air injection system switch-
P2440 85H 01H J
ing valve stuck open
Secondary air injection system pump
P2444 86H 01H
stuck on
P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim K
Fuel injection system function The number of lambda control
81H P0171 or P0172 81H 24H
(Bank 1) clamped
L
FUEL P117A 82H 03H Cylinder A/F imbalance monitoring
SYSTEM P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function The number of lambda control M
82H P0174 or P0175 81H 24H
(Bank 2) clamped
P117B 82H 03H Cylinder A/F imbalance monitoring

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-83 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H
the multiple cylinders
P0301 89H 24H
the first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple cylinder misfires
P0302 8AH 24H
the second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
the fourth cylinder
P0305 8DH 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
the sixth cylinder
P0307 8FH 24H
the seventh cylinder
P0308 90H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 92H 24H
the single cylinder
P0300 93H 24H
the multiple cylinders

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-84 2014 Note
ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
ing cycles
C
A2H No. 1 cylinder misfire
Misfire counts for last/current driving
P0301 0CH 24H
cycles
D
A3H No. 2 cylinder misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving E
P0302 0CH 24H
cycles
P0303 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv- F
P0303 0CH 24H
cycles G
H
P0304 0CH 24H
cycles
MISFIRE
I
P0305 0CH 24H J
cycles
A7H No. 6 cylinder misfire ing cycles K
P0306 0CH 24H
cycles
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving L
Misfire counts for last/current driving M
P0307 0CH 24H
cycles
ing cycles
N
A9H No. 8 cylinder misfire
P0308 0CH 24H
cycles
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-85 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [HR16DE]
WIRING DIAGRAM
ABBWA1067GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-86 2014 Note
EC
ABBWA1068GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-87 2014 Note
ABBWA1069GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-88 2014 Note
EC
ABBWA1070GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-89 2014 Note
ABBWA1071GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-90 2014 Note
EC
ABBWA1072GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-91 2014 Note
ABBIA1659GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-92 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1660GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-93 2014 Note
ABBIA1661GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-94 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1662GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-95 2014 Note
ABBIA1663GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-96 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1664GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-97 2014 Note
ABBIA1665GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-98 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1666GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-99 2014 Note
ABBIA1667GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-100 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1668GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-101 2014 Note
ABBIA1669GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-102 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1670GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-103 2014 Note
ABBIA1671GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-104 2014 Note
EC
ABBIA1709GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-105 2014 Note
ABBIA1710GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-106 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [HR16DE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JSBIA1228GB
DETAILED FLOW

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-107 2014 Note

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-109, "Diagnostic Work
Sheet".)
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT or GST.)
- Erase DTC.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-327, "Symptom Table".)
Is any symptom described and is any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-333, "Description" and EC-
73, "Fail Safe".
Diagnostic Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
>> GO TO 5.
Also study the normal operation and fail safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-333, "Description" and EC-
73, "Fail Safe".
Diagnostic Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then make sure that DTC is
detected again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-74, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to EC-76, "DTC Index".
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-118, "Work Procedure".
Do you have CONSULT?

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-108 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. A
7.PERFORM “SPEC” IN DATA MONITOR MODE
With CONSULT EC
Make sure that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL” and “A/F ALPHA-B1” are within the SP value in “SPEC”
of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Refer to EC-129, "Component Function Check".
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE D
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-130, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 11. E
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE
F
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-327, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
G
>> GO TO 10.
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system. H
NOTE:
The Diagnosis Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnosis Procedure. For details, refer to GI-44, "Circuit Inspec- I
tion".
YES >> GO TO 11. J
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check the voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT. Refer to EC-62, "Reference Value".
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART K
ment. L
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it.
>> GO TO 12. M
12.FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Component Function N
Check again, and then make sure that the malfunction have been repaired securely.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and make sure
that the symptom is not detected.
O
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to erase unnecessary DTC in ECM. If the P
completion of SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific “DRIVING PATTERN” in EC-125,
"SRT Set Driving Pattern".
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000009022479
DESCRIPTION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-109 2014 Note
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about an incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the WORKSHEET SAMPLE
below in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
MTBL0017

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-110 2014 Note
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM
A
When replacing ECM, perform additional service. EC

NOTE:
After replacing with a blank ECM, programming is required to write ECM information. To perform the opera-
tion, always follow the work instructions. Refer to EC-111, "Work Procedure".
C
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000009022481
1.CHECK ECM PART NUMBER D

Check ECM part number to see whether it is blank ECM or not.
NOTE:
• Part number of blank ECM is 23703 - ×××××. E
• Check the part number when ordering ECM or with delivered package label.
Is the ECM a blank ECM?
YES >> GO TO 2. F
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.SAVE ECM PART NUMBER
Read out the part number from the old ECM and save the number, following the programming instructions. G
Refer to “CONSULT Operation Manual”.
NOTE:
• The ECM part number is saved in CONSULT. H
• Even when ECM part number is not saved in CONSULT, go to 3.
>> GO TO 3. I
3.PERFORM ECM PROGRAMMING
After replacing ECM, perform the ECM programming. Refer to “CONSULT Operation Manual”.
J
NOTE:
• During programming, maintain the following conditions:
- Ignition switch: ON
- Electric load: OFF K
- Brake pedal: Not depressed
- Battery voltage: 12 - 13.5 V (Be sure to check the value of battery voltage by selecting “BATTERY VOLT” in
“Data monitor” of CONSULT.) L
>> GO TO 5.
4.REPLACE ECM M
Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, "Removal and Installation".
N
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NATS SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NATS IGNITION KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-61, "ECM : Work Procedure". O
>> GO TO 6.
P
6.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
Refer to EC-113, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 7.
7.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-111 2014 Note
>> GO TO 8.
8.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
>> END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-112 2014 Note
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
A
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully released position of the EC
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000009022483 C
1.START
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. D
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. E
>> END F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-113 2014 Note
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connec-
tor of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected or electric throttle control actuator inside is
cleaned.
1.START
With CONSULT
2. Select “CLSD THL POS LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Follow the instructions on the CONSULT display.
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Without CONSULT
1. Start the engine.
NOTE:
Engine coolant temperature is 25°C (77°F) or less before engine starts.
2. Warm up the engine.
NOTE:
Raise engine coolant temperature until it reaches 65°C (149°F) or more.
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
>> END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-114 2014 Note
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
A
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine idle speed EC
within the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
• Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
C
1.PRECONDITIONING D
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle) E
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
• Selector lever: P or N (CVT), Neutral (M/T)
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger) F
- For vehicles equipped with daytime light systems, perform one of the following procedures before
starting engine not to illuminate headlamps.
• Apply parking brake G
• Set lighting switch to the 1st position
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position) position
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up H
- CVT models
• With CONSULT: Drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “TRANSMISSION” sys-
tem indicates less than 0.9 V. I
• Without CONSULT: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
- M/T models
• Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
K
2.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
With CONSULT
1. Perform ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-113, "Work Proce- L
dure".
2. Perform THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-114, "Work Procedure".
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. M
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT screen?
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING O
Without CONSULT
NOTE:
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock. P
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
1. Perform ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-113, "Work Proce-
dure".
2. Perform THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING. Refer to EC-114, "Work Procedure".
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-115 2014 Note
5. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
6. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
- Fully release the accelerator pedal.
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
10. Wait 20 seconds.
PBIB0665E
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING
Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifi-
cations.
For specification, refer to EC-339, "Idle Speed" and EC-339, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
• Check PCV valve operation.
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
Engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of
the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-129, "Description".
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and
perform Idle Air Volume Learning all over again:
• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-116 2014 Note
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
A
This describes how to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc- EC
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
C
1.START
With CONSULT
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
With GST E
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
F
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST to erase the DTC P0102. G
>> END
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-117 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leaks
- Air cleaner clogging
- Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Headlamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF.
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no

load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT or GST.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
SEF977U
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no load.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-118 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute. A
3. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-334, "Inspection".
For specification, refer to EC-339, "Idle Speed".
EC
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
PBIA8513J
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING D
1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-113, "Work Procedure".
E
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING F
G
>> GO TO 6.
Perform EC-115, "Work Procedure". H
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow the instruction of IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING. Then GO TO 4. I
7.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. J
K
YES >> GO TO 10.
L
NO >> GO TO 8.
Check the Following. M
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-228, "DTC Logic".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-224, "DTC Logic".
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION O
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.)
2. Perform initialization and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to SEC-61, "ECM : Work Proce- P
dure".
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-119 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
For specification, refer to EC-339, "Ignition Timing".
: Timing indicator

YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 11.
MBIB1331E
11.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
12.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
>> GO TO 13.
Is idle air volume learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Follow the instruction of IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING. Then GO TO 4.
14.CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
: Timing indicator

YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 16.
MBIB1331E
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation. Then GO TO 4.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-120 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
17.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

Check the following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-228, "DTC Logic".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-224, "DTC Logic".
EC
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Repair or replace. Then GO TO 4.
C
18.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is a rare case.) D
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to SEC-61,
"ECM : Work Procedure".
E
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
F
If ECM is replaced during this BASIC INSPECTION procedure, perform EC-111, "Work Procedure".
>> INSPECTION END G

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-121 2014 Note
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

1.FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
Without CONSULT
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
>> INSPECTION END

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
1.FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
• Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
• The fuel hose connection method used when taking fuel pressure check must not be used for other
purposes.
• Be careful not to scratch or put debris around connection area when servicing, so that the quick
connector maintains seal ability with O-rings inside.
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical systems operating (i.e. lights, rear defogger, A/C,
etc.) Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine load and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because this models do not have fuel return system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Prepare fuel hose for fuel pressure check (B) and fuel tube
adapter [SST: KV10118400 or KV10120000] (D), then connect
fuel pressure gauge (A).
C : Hose clamp
: To quick connector
: To fuel tube (engine side)
CAUTION:
• Use suitable fuel hose for fuel pressure check (genuine
NISSAN fuel hose without quick connector). PBIB2982E
• To avoid unnecessary force or tension to hose, use mod-

erately long fuel hose for fuel pressure check.
• Do not use the fuel hose for checking fuel pressure with damage or cracks on it.
• Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
3. Remove fuel hose.
CAUTION:
Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-122 2014 Note
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
4. Connect fuel hose for fuel pressure check to fuel tube (engine
side) with clamp as shown in the figure. A
: No.2 spool
CAUTION: EC
• Wipe off oil or dirt from hose insertion part using cloth
moistened with gasoline.
• Apply proper amount of gasoline between top of the fuel C
tube and No.1 spool .
• Insert fuel hose for fuel pressure check until it touches
PBIB2983E
the No.1 spool on fuel tube.
D
• Use NISSAN genuine hose clamp (part number: 16439 N4710 or 16439 40U00).
• When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
• Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
• Install hose clamp to the position within 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in). E
Tightening torque : 1 - 1.5 N·m (0.1 - 0.15 kg-m, 9 - 13 in-lb)

• Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts. F
5. Connect fuel tube adapter to quick connector .
A : Fuel pressure gauge G

6. After connecting fuel hose for fuel pressure check, pull the hose
with a force of approximately 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) to confirm fuel
tube does not come off. H
7. Turn ignition switch ON and check for fuel leakage.
8. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
9. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. I
CAUTION:
• Do not perform fuel pressure check with system operat- ALBIA1073ZZ
ing. Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings.

• During fuel pressure check, confirm for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes. J
At idling : Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

K
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK FUEL HOSE AND FUEL TUBE
If result is unsatisfactory, check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. Refer to FL-6, "Exploded View".
NO >> Repair or replace.
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-123 2014 Note
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
OUTLINE
In order to set all SRTs, the self-diagnoses as in the “SRT ITEM” table must have been performed at least
once. Each diagnosis may require actual driving for a long period of time under various conditions.
SRT ITEM
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
SRT item* Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT” Corresponding DTC No.
(CONSULT indication)
CATALYST Three way catalyst function P0420
HO2S Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0130, P0133
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137
*: Though displayed on the CONSULT screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
SRT SERVICE PROCEDURE
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence, referring to the following flowchart.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-124 2014 Note
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
EC
JSBIA0399GB
K
SRT Set Driving Pattern INFOID:0000000009022493
L
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-125 2014 Note
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
Always drive the vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
JSBIA1318GB
NOTE:
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then release the accelerator pedal
and keep it released for more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h
(56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-126 2014 Note
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est. A
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:
EC
• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions. C
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
sis may also be performed.
D
1.CHECK DTC
E
Check DTC.
YES >> Repair malfunction(s) and erase DTC. Refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".
F
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SRT STATUS
With CONSULT G
Select “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
Perform “SRT status” mode with EC-49, "On Board Diagnosis Function". H
With GST
Select Service $01 with GST.
Is SRT code(s) set? I
YES >> END
NO-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 4. J
3.DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Select “SRT WORK SUPPORT” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
2. For SRT(s) that is not set, perform the corresponding “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” according to K
the “Performance Priority” in the “SRT ITEM” table. Refer to EC-48, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION : Sys-
tem Readiness Test (SRT) Code".
3. Check DTC. L
YES >> Repair malfunction(s) and erase DTC. Refer to EC-76, "DTC Index".
NO >> GO TO 7. M
4.PERFORM ROAD TEST
• Check the “Performance Priority” in the “SRT ITEM” table. Refer to EC-48, "DIAGNOSIS DESCRIPTION :
System Readiness Test (SRT) Code". N
• Perform the most efficient SRT set driving pattern to set the SRT properly. Refer to EC-125, "SRT Set Driv-
ing Pattern".
In order to set all SRTs, the SRT set driving pattern must be performed at least once. O
>> GO TO 5.
5.PATTERN 1 P
1. Check the vehicle condition;

- Engine coolant temperature is −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F).
- Fuel tank temperature is more than 0°C (32°F).
2. Start the engine.
3. Keep engine idling until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C (158°F)
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-127 2014 Note
HOW TO SET SRT CODE
ECM terminal voltage is follows;
• Engine coolant temperature
- −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F): 3.0 - 4.3 V
- 70°(158°F): Less than 1.4 V
• Fuel tank temperature: Less than 4.1 V
Refer to EC-62, "Reference Value".
>> GO TO 6.
6.PATTERN 2
1. Drive the vehicle. And depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH), then
release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for more than 10 seconds.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again
NOTE:
• Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
>> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK SRT STATUS
With CONSULT
Select “SRT STATUS” in “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
Perform “SRT status” mode with EC-49, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
With GST
Select Service $01 with GST.
Is SRT(s) set?
YES >> END
NO >> Call TECH LINE or take appropriate action.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-128 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [HR16DE]
EC
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” of “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC” of
“DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value C
in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one
or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the D
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion) E
• A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
F
1.START
G
Make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi) H
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Engine coolant temperature: 75 - 95°C (167 - 203°F)
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- CVT models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID I
TEMP SE” (CVT fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
- M/T models: After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
• Electrical load: Not applied J
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE L
With CONSULT
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display. M
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT.
N
3. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
YES >> END O
NO >> Go to EC-130, "Diagnosis Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-129 2014 Note
OVERALL SEQUENCE
PBIB2318E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-130 2014 Note
EC
PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE P
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-129, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-131 2014 Note
NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because it may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 6.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
the SP value.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".)
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace fuel filter and fuel pump assembly (Refer to FL-6, "Exploded
View"), and then GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
YES >> Replace fuel filter and fuel pump assembly (Refer to FL-6, "Exploded View"), and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace and then GO TO 8.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-132 2014 Note
8.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” A

1. Start engine.
the SP value.
EC
NO >> GO TO 9.
C
9. PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop. D
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10. E
Check the following. F
1. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-322, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".)
2. Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-315, "Component Inspection".)
3. Intake air leakage
4. Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-13, "Inspection".) G
YES >> Replace fuel injector (Refer to EM-40, "Removal and Installation"), and then GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 11. H

1. Start engine. I
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? J
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION K
Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, refer to EC-170, "DTC Logic".
• For DTC P0131, refer to EC-173, "DTC Logic". L
Is any DTC detected? M
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT N
Perform DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE according to corresponding DTC.
O
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine. P
the SP value.
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-133 2014 Note
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-327, "Symptom Table".
SP value.
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value: GO TO 21.
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
3. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and then reconnect it again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-134 2014 Note
>> GO TO 22.
22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” A
1. Start engine.
EC
the SP value.
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-158, "DTC
C
Logic". Then GO TO 29.
NO >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” D
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? E
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor (Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installa-
tion"), and then GO TO 29. F
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform EC-111, "Work Procedure". G
>> GO TO 29.
H
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts I
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
J
YES >> GO TO 27.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 26.
K
SP value. L
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27. M
27.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the N
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 28. O
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor (Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installa-
tion"), and then GO TO 30.
28.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM P
Check for the cause of air leak after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-135 2014 Note
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that
each indication is within the SP value.
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is
within the SP value.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-136 2014 Note
A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION EC

2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, "Circuit Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection.
2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.

2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground. E
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
10
F10
11 Ground Existed
G
E16 108
3. Also check harness for short to power.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART I
• Harness connectors E55, F55
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground J
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I K
1. Reconnect ECM harness connectors.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. L
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM M
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O

• 10 A fuse (No. 55) P
• Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
6.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-137 2014 Note
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery voltage will ex-
E16 105 Ground
ist for a few seconds, then drop to approximately 0 V.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
2. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
ECM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector F43.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F10 32 F43 50 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-138 2014 Note
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R
A
12.CHECK 20 A FUSE EC
1. Disconnect 20 A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace 20 A fuse.
13.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI D
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector E44.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. E
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity F
E16 105 E44 11 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short power in harness or connectors. H
I
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, "Exploded View".
J

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-139 2014 Note
DTC Description INFOID:0000000009418245
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
CONSULT screen terms

DTC No. DTC detecting condition
(Trouble diagnosis content)
LOST COMM (TCM) When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal of
U0101
(Lost communication with TCM) OBD (emission-related diagnosis) with TCM for 2 seconds or more.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
CAN communication line between TCM and ECM
FAIL-SAFE
Not applicable
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
Perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow
Chart".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-140 2014 Note
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication Harness or connectors
U1001 CAN communication line signal other than OBD (emission related diagnosis) for 2 seconds (CAN communication line
or more. is open or shorted) F

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? H
YES >> EC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
I
Proceed to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

J

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-141 2014 Note
P0011 IVT CONTROL
P0011 IVT CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0011 is displayed with DTC P0075, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0075. Refer to
EC-153, "DTC Logic".
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name Detecting condition Possible cause

• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
There is a gap between angle of
Intake valve timing control • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the
P0011 target and phase-control angle
performance camshaft
degree.
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for intake valve
timing control

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure
before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm

COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
P or N position (CVT)
Shift lever
Neutral position (M/T)
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-143, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
With CONSULT
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-142 2014 Note
P0011 IVT CONTROL
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) A

Shift lever 1st or 2nd position
EC
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
C
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
With GST D
YES >> Proceed to EC-143, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
F
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. G
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated? H
YES >> Proceed to LU-7, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
J
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

K
Refer to EC-144, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-226, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View". N
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection". O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View". P
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-143 2014 Note
P0011 IVT CONTROL
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60, "Removal
and Installation".
JSBIA0599ZZ

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Perform “Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove”. Refer to EM-68, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)]

1 and 2 7.0 - 7.7 Ω
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
2. Apply 12 V between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA2108ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-144 2014 Note
P0011 IVT CONTROL
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View". A
EC

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-145 2014 Note
P0014 EVT CONTROL
P0014 EVT CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0014 is displayed with DTC P0078, first perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0078. Refer to EC-
155, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis name

DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor
EXH/V TIM CONT-B1 There is a gap between angle of • Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
P0014 (Exhaust valve timing control target and phase-control angle • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of
performance) degree. the camshaft
• Timing chain installation
• Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for exhaust
valve timing control

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

Selector lever
4. Let engine idle for 10 seconds.
With GST
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-146 2014 Note
P0014 EVT CONTROL
ENG SPEED 1,700 - 2,950 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) A

Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
EC
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location uphill (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving
conditions required for this test.)
C
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
With GST D
YES >> Proceed to EC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
F
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. G
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warning lamp illuminated? H
YES >> Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
J
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

K
Check the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EC-148, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Replace exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
Check the crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EC-226, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View". N
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Check the exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection". O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View". P
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXHAUST)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-147 2014 Note
P0014 EVT CONTROL
YES >> GO TO 6.
and Installation".
JSBIA0600ZZ

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misaligned.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misaligned?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-68, "Inspection", “INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION”.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

+ − Resistance
Terminal
1 2 7.0 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 ∞Ω
Ground
2 (Continuity should not exist)

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
2. Provide 12 V DC between exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in exhaust valve
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when exhaust valve timing control


GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-148 2014 Note
P0031, P0032 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors C
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031
heater control circuit low (An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
D
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0032
heater control circuit high (An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
through the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater E

1.PRECONDITIONING F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. G
TESTING CONDITION:
H
idle.
I
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds. J
YES >> Proceed to EC-149, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
NG >> INSPECTION END
L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION
YES >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector. O
3. Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.
P
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-149 2014 Note

• IPDM E/R harness connector F42
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
F12 3 F10 3 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Refer to GI-44, "Circuit Inspection".
YES >> Perform GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

2. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as follows.
Terminal Resistance
3 and 4 1.80 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)

NO >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-150 2014 Note
P0037, P0038 HO2S2 HEATER
A

(Trouble diagnosis content) C
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
HO2 HTR (B1)
heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0037 (Heated oxygen sensor 2
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
heater control circuit low) D
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
HO2 HTR (B1)
heater circuit is out of the normal range. (Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
P0038 (Heated oxygen sensor 2
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.) E
heater control circuit high)
through the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

F
1.PRECONDITIONING
before conducting the next test. G
TESTING CONDITION: H
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2. I

With CONSULT J
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. K
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute.
With GST L
YES >> Proceed to EC-151, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
N
1.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and ground.
P
HO2S2
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-151 2014 Note
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK HO2S2 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
E63 3 F10 5 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER
Check the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater. Refer to EC-152, "Component Inspection".
NO >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

3. Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as per the following.

+ − Resistance
Terminal
2 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2
1 3
4 ∞Ω
4 2
3
NO >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-152 2014 Note
P0075 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
C
• Harness or connectors
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
Intake valve timing control (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
P0075 through intake valve timing control solenoid
solenoid valve circuit circuit is open or shorted.)
valve.
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. F
G
>> GO TO2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. H
YES >> Proceed to EC-153, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
2. Disconnect intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground.
L
IVT control solenoid valve

Ground Voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. N
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O
• Harness for open or short between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
P
3.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
AND SHORT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-153 2014 Note
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
IVT control solenoid valve ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as follows.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

+ − Resistance
Terminal
1 2 7.0 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 ∞Ω
Ground

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View"
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
2. Apply 12 V between intake valve timing control solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Make sure that the
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control


GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-154 2014 Note
P0078 EVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A

EX V/T ACT/CIRC-B1 An improper voltage is sent to the
(Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve
P0078 (Exhaust valve timing control ECM through exhaust valve timing
circuit is open or shorted.)
solenoid valve circuit) control solenoid valve. D
• Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING E
G
>> GO TO2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009022518 J
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY

2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing (EVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground. L
EVT control solenoid valve

Ground Voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT O
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between EVT control solenoid valve harness connector and IPDM E/R harness con- P
nector.
EVT control solenoid valve IPDM E/R

Continuity
4. Also check harness for short to ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-155 2014 Note
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between EVT control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
EVT control solenoid valve ECM

Continuity
4. Also check harness for short to ground and to power.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Check the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EC-156, "Component Inspection".
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check resistance between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve

+ − Resistance
Terminal
1 2 7.0 - 7.7 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
1 ∞Ω
Ground

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
2. Provide 12 V DC between exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
CAUTION:
Do not apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in exhaust valve
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when exhaust valve timing control

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-156 2014 Note
A
EC

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-157 2014 Note
P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor is (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
low input sent to ECM. • Intake air leakage
• Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0103 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
high input sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-158 2014 Note
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct A
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
Is the inspection result normal? EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
3.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION C
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT E
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. F
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage G
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
3. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM K

Continuity
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
M
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. N
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity O
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-159 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I

With CONSULT
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
4. Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication.
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) 0.5 - 0.6 V
MAS A/F SE-B1 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.7 - 1.3 V
Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about 4,000 rpm.
Without CONSULT
ECM
Terminal Condition Voltage
Connector
+ −
45
F11 (MAF sensor 52 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.7 - 1.3 V
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
2. Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
- Crushed air ducts
- Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
- Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
- Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-160 2014 Note
3. Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. A
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 EC

C
Without CONSULT D
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
E
ECM
Connector F
+ −
45
F11 (MAF sensor 52 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.7 - 1.3 V G
signal)
H
NO >> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
4. Connect CONSULT and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. K
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 L

Idle to about 4,000 rpm 0.7 - 1.3 V to Approx. 4.3 V* M
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground. O
ECM
Terminal Condition Voltage P
Connector
+ −
45
F11 (MAF sensor 52 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.7 - 1.3 V
signal)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-161 2014 Note
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-162 2014 Note
P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
A
Intake air temperature sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor C
P0112 • Harness or connectors
circuit low input is sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air temperature sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor • Intake air temperature sensor
P0113
circuit high input is sent to ECM. D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
G
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. H
J

YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
M
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ground.
N
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
F31 5 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-163 2014 Note
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Refer to EM-26, "Removal and
Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as follows.
Terminals Condition Resistance

1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200 kΩ
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor). Refer to EM-26, "Removal and
Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-164 2014 Note
P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
A
Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor C
sensor circuit low input is sent to ECM.
Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor • Engine coolant temperature sensor
P0118
sensor circuit high input is sent to ECM. D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
G
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds. H
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
J

YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
M
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and ground.
N
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 3. P
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-165 2014 Note
ECT sensor ECM

Continuity
F6 2 F11 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Refer to GI-44, "Circuit Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, "Exploded View"
4. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals Condition Resistance

20 (68) 2.10 - 2.90 kΩ
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA0080ZZ
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to
CO-24, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-166 2014 Note
P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
A

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-252, "DTC Logic". C
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors D
P0122
2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 (TP sensor 2)
2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. E
1.PRECONDITIONING F
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10 V at idle. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC. J
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END K
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION L

M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. N
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. O
3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.
Electric throttle control actuator P

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-167 2014 Note
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM

Continuity
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
F7 3 F11 34 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


5. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-168 2014 Note
ECM A
Connector
+ −
EC
33 Fully released More than 0.36 V
(TP sensor 1 signal) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
Accelerator
F11 36
pedal Fully released Less than 4.75 V C
34
(TP sensor 2 signal) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
D
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR E
>> INSPECTION END F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-169 2014 Note
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 sig-
nal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
The A/F signal computed by ECM from • Harness or connectors
P0130 the A/F sensor 1 signal is constantly (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit
approx. 2.2 V. • A/F sensor 1

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
3. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” indication.
Does the indication fluctuate around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Proceed to EC-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -I
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Touch “START”.
4. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT screen.

VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 mph)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
D position (CVT models)
Selector lever
4th position (M/T models)
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Is “TESTING” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Check A/F sensor 1 function again. GO TO 2.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -II
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-170 2014 Note
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
Which does “TESTING” change to? A
COMPLETED>>GO TO 5.
OUT OF CONDITION>>Retry DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION -III EC
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.

Which is displayed on CONSULT screen? C
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Proceed to EC-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION D
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-171, "Component Function Check".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a E
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
YES >> INSPECTION END F
G
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
With GST H
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Shift the selector lever to D position (CVT) or 5th position (M/T), then release the accelerator pedal fully
until the vehicle speed decreases to 50 km/h (30 MPH). I
CAUTION:
NOTE: J
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
K
8. Restart engine.
9. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for five times. L
10. Stop the vehicle and connect GST to the vehicle.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? M
N

O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-171 2014 Note
P0130 A/F SENSOR 1
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 20A fuse (No. 53)

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
F12 Ground Not existed
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 5.
Perform GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
YES >> Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-172 2014 Note
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
A

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately low.
C
circuit low voltage D
approx. 0 V. • A/F sensor 1

1.PRECONDITIONING E
TESTING CONDITION: G
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2. H
2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
I
Is the indication constantly approx. 0 V? J
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine. L
CAUTION:
3. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.
M
N
Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE: O
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1. P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-173 2014 Note
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1

YES >> GO TO 2.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 20A fuse (No. 53)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-174 2014 Note
P0131 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A
EC
C

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-175 2014 Note
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
circuit high voltage
approx. 5 V. • A/F sensor 1

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
Is the indication constantly approx. 5 V?
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-176 2014 Note
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
A
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, "Circuit Inspection". EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. C

1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. D
E
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F12 4 Ground Battery voltage F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3. G

Check the following. H
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
I

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT J
3. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector. K
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity L
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53 M
and ground.
N
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
O
2
P
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-177 2014 Note
P0132 A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 5.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-178 2014 Note
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
A

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com- C
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not.
D
(The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
• A/F sensor 1
The response of the A/F signal computed
• A/F sensor 1 heater E
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Fuel pressure
P0133 by ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes
circuit slow response • Fuel injector
more than the specified time.
• Intake air leaks
• Exhaust gas leaks F
• PCV
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure H
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
TESTING CONDITION:
Do you have CONSULT? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I K
With CONSULT
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. L
3. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. M
6. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
7. Touch “START”. N
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. O
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
P
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen?
1. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT screen.
- Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-179 2014 Note
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
- Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, refer to EC-129, "Component Function Check".
2. Wait for about 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CONSULT
screen.
3. Make sure that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, refer to EC-129, "Component Function Check".
4. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
5.CHECK AIR-FUEL RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of “Short term fuel trim” and “Long term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Exhaust gas leaks
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

2. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1minute under no
load.
4. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
5. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for about 1 minute.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
>> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-180 2014 Note
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK A

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst 1.
EC
PBIB1216E
Is exhaust gas leak detected? E

YES >> Repair or replace.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK F
Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leak detected?
YES >> Repair or replace. G
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE H
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, "Work Procedure".
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine? I
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-201, "DTC Logic" or EC-205,
"DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 6. J
A/F sensor 1 L
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
M
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7. N
• IPDM E/R harness connector F42 O
• 20A fuse (No. 53)
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-181 2014 Note
P0133 A/F SENSOR 1
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 12.
Check both mass air flow sensor.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning mass air flow sensor. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-337, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace PCV valve. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-182 2014 Note
P0137 HO2S2
P0137 HO2S2
A

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer C
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel-cut.
D
E
JSBIA0243GB
F
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted) G
Heated oxygen sensor 2 The maximum voltage from the sensor does not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0137
circuit low voltage reach the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector
H

1.INSPECTION START I

Do you have CONSULT? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING K
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
TESTING CONDITION: M
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3. N
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT. O
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. P
6. Make sure that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
9. Follow the instruction of CONSULT.
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-183 2014 Note
P0137 HO2S2
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
10. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED>>GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
>> GO TO 3.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I

Without CONSULT
3. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 The voltage should be above 0.78 V
F11 59 Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least 10 times
(HO2S2) at least once during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 The voltage should be above 0.78 V
F11 59 Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes
(HO2S2) at least once during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-184 2014 Note
P0137 HO2S2
A
ECM
Connector EC
Terminal Terminal
50 Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position (CVT), 4th The voltage should be above 0.78 V
F11 59
(HO2S2) gear position (M/T) at least once during this procedure.
C
NO >> Proceed to EC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
1.HECK GROUND CONNECTION E

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE G
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. H
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171. Refer to EC-201, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 3. I
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. J
K
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
L
E63 1 F11 59 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N
O
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
E63 4 F11 50 Existed P
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector ground or ECM harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E63 4 Ground Not existed

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-185 2014 Note
P0137 HO2S2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F11 50 Ground Not existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
NO >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “ENGINE” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
7. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)” as the monitor item with
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
JSBIA1202GB
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be above 0.78 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is +25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)” should be below 0.50 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is −25%.
NO >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-186 2014 Note
P0137 HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
The voltage should be above 0.78 V at
50 Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least once during this procedure.
F11 59
(HO2S2) least 10 times The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure. C
NO >> GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II

Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition. E
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage F
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 least once during this procedure. G
(HO2S2) The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III I
J
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal K
50 Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D po- least once during this procedure.
F11 59
(HO2S2) sition (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T) The voltage should be below 0.50 V at L
YES >> INSPECTION END M

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-187 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
P0138 HO2S2
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer switching time.
MALFUNCTION A
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during various driving condi-
tions such as fuel cut.
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during var-
ious driving conditions such as fuel cut.
JSBIA3141GB
An excessively high voltage from the sensor
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0138
circuit high voltage (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is not
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

1.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-188 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
load. A
YES >> Proceed to EC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
NO-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 12.
3.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B C
“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are com-
pleted.
TESTING CONDITION: D
• For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).
• Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from PERFORM
PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II. E
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-I F
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
G
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. H
>> GO TO 6.
I
6.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-III
2. Let engine idle for 1 minute. J
4. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START”.
6. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds. K
7. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm two or three times quickly under no load.
Is “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT screen?
L
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV M
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT screen.
Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”
N
ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 1.0 msec
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C O
CAUTION: P
Which displayed on CONSULT screen?
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 5.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 8.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: COMPLETED”>>GO TO 9.
8.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-189 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the above condition (PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR
COND1-III) until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will take
approximately 4 seconds).
CAUTION:
“COND2: COMPLETED”, “COND3: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 9.
“COND2: COMPLETED”, “COND3: COMPLETED”>>GO TO 10.
9.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-I
Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on CONSULT screen has turned to “COM-
PLETED”
>> GO TO 10.
10.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-II
Touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
“OK” >> INSPECTION END.
“NG” >> Proceed to EC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED”>>GO TO 11.
11.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-III
2. Turn ignition switch ON and select ENGINE using CONSULT.
3. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT
4. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT.
5. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
>> GO TO 6.
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
YES >> INSPECTION END.

Without CONSULT
ECM
Condition Voltage
+ –
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
F11 59
(HO2S2 signal) least 10 times least once during this procedure.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-190 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
YES >> INSPECTION END A
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II
EC
ECM C
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 The voltage should be below 0.50 V at D
(HO2S2 signal) least once during this procedure.
E
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III F
ECM G
Connector
Terminal Terminal
H
50 Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
F11 59
(HO2S2 signal) (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T) least once during this procedure.
I
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-188, "DTC Logic". K
Which malfunction is detected?
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 7. L

YES >> GO TO 3. N
O
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
P
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-191 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ground or ECM harness connector and
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check connectors for water.
Water should not exist.

YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172. Refer to EC-205, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 9.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-192 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. A
HO2S2 ECM EC
Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 10. D
1. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector. E
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity F
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground. G
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal H
I
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F11 50 Ground Not existed J
K
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 L
YES >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". M
N
1.INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT? O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. P
With CONSULT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-193 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%.
JSBIA1202GB
NO >> GO TO 5.
Without CONSULT
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
F11 59
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 least once during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-194 2014 Note
P0138 HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
F11 59
(HO2S2) sition (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T) The voltage should be below 0.50 V at
least once during this procedure. C
NO >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". D

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-195 2014 Note
P0139 HO2S2
P0139 HO2S2
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst (manifold) causes the
longer switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen
sensor 2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sen-
sor's voltage is faster than specified during the various driving condi-
tion such as fuel cut.
SEF302U
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
Heated oxygen sensor 2 It takes more time for the sensor to respond • Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0139
circuit slow response between rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
For better results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
10. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-196 2014 Note
P0139 HO2S2
11. Start engine and follow the instruction of CONSULT display.
NOTE: A
It will take at most 10 minutes until “COMPLETED” is displayed.
Is “COMPLETED” displayed on CONSULT screen?
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
NO >> GO TO 4.
C
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure again.
D
>> GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT E
Perform ECM self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “P0139” detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-198, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
6.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK G
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
H
I
J
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. K
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. L
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.
ECM M
Connector
+ −
50 Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at A change of voltage should be more than N
F11 59
(HO2S2 signal) least 10 times 0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.
YES >> INSPECTION END O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II P
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-197 2014 Note
P0139 HO2S2
ECM
Connector
+ −
50 A change of voltage should be more than
F11 59 Keeping engine speed at idle for 10 minutes
(HO2S2 signal) 0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.
ECM
Connector
+ −
50 Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D position A change of voltage should be more than
F11 59
(HO2S2 signal) (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T) 0.12 V for 1 second during this procedure.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0172 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0172. Refer to EC-201, "DTC Logic" or EC-205,
"DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 3.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-198 2014 Note
P0139 HO2S2
A
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
EC
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.
C
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E63 4 Ground Not existed D
ECM
Ground Continuity E
Connector Terminal
3. Also check harness for short to power. F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G

Refer to EC-199, "Component Inspection". H
NO >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 2. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View". I
1.INSPECTION START J

Do you have CONSULT? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 L
With CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode. M
5. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. N
CONSULT.
8. Check “HO2S2 (B1)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ±25%. O
JSBIA1202GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-199 2014 Note
P0139 HO2S2
NO >> GO TO 5.
Without CONSULT
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
F11 59
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
50 least once during this procedure.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
F11 59
(HO2S2) sition (CVT), 4th gear position (M/T) The voltage should be below 0.50 V at

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-200 2014 Note
P0171 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too lean.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
• Intake air leaks F
• A/F sensor 1
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• Exhaust gas leaks
P0171 Fuel injection system too lean • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
• Incorrect fuel pressure G
• Lack of fuel
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
I
2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
>> GO TO 2. K
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-117, "Work Procedure". L
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3. M
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too. N
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system may not start the engine. O
Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
YES >> Proceed to EC-202, "Diagnosis Procedure". P
NO >> Check exhaust and intake air leak visually.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-201 2014 Note
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
2. Start engine.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 MPH)

CAUTION:
1.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAK

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E
Is exhaust gas leak detected?

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE
1. Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
Intake air leak detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
5. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector or ECM harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-202 2014 Note
A/F sensor 1 A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
F12 Ground Not existed EC
2
ECM C
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
F11 Ground Not existed D
53
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE F
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
G
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUEL HOSES AND FUEL TUBES I
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
J
NO >> Repair or replace
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR K
With CONSULT
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. L
0.8 - 4.0 g/s: at idling

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm M
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST. N

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or P
grounds. Refer to EC-158, "DTC Logic".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-203 2014 Note
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.

YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR. Refer
to EC-314, "Component Function Check".
PBIB3332E
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
5. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
6. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
7. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray
out. Always replace O-ring with new ones. Refer to EM-
PBIA9666J

>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-204 2014 Note
A

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from the A/F sensor 1. The ECM calcu-
lates the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (The actual mixture ratio is too rich.), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and lights up the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
• A/F sensor 1 F
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
P0172 Fuel injection system too rich • The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leaks
large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
• Mass air flow sensor G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-1
K
2. Start engine.
Is it difficult to start engine?
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.RESTART ENGINE M
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal.
NOTE: N
When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system may not start the engine.
Do not depress accelerator pedal too much.
Does engine start?
O
NO >> Remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-2 P
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 minutes.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-205 2014 Note
2. Start engine.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 10 consecutive minutes.
VHCL SPEED SE 50 - 120 km/h (31 - 75 MPH)

CAUTION:

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK
NO >> GO TO 3.
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-206 2014 Note
ECM A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
F11 Ground Not existed EC
53
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE D

2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
E

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK FUEL HOSES AND FUEL TUBES G
H
NO >> Repair or replace
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR I
With CONSULT
2. Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. J

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm K
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST. L

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm M
YES >> GO TO 7.
N
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
grounds. Refer to EC-158, "DTC Logic".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR O
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT. P
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-207 2014 Note

YES >> GO TO 8.
PBIB3332E

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View".
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injectors.
6. Crank engine for about 3 seconds.
Make sure fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one. Refer
to EM-40, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-208 2014 Note
P0196 EOT SENSOR
P0196 EOT SENSOR
A

NOTE:
If DTC P0196 is displayed with P0197 or P0198, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0197 or
P0198. Refer to EC-211, "DTC Logic". C
Rationally incorrect voltage from the sensor D
Engine oil temperature sensor is sent to ECM, compared with the voltage
P0196 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
range/performance signals from engine coolant temperature
• Engine oil temperature sensor
sensor and intake air temperature sensor.
E
1.PRECONDITIONING
F
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I I

5. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes and 10 seconds.
6. Check 1st trip DTC. K
NO >> GO TO 3. L
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
M
2. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates above 60°C (140°F).
If it is above 60°C (140°F), go to the following steps.
If it is below 60°C (140°F), warm engine up until “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
Then perform the following steps. N
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and soak the vehicle in a cool place.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. O
NOTE:
Do not turn ignition switch OFF until step 10.
7. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. P
8. Check the following.
COOLAN TEMP/S Below 40°C (104°F)

INT/A TEMP SE Below 40°C (104°F)
Difference between “COOLAN TEMP/S” and “INT/A TEMP SE” Within 0°C (32°F)
If they are within the specified range, perform the following steps.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-209 2014 Note
P0196 EOT SENSOR
If they are out of the specified range, soak the vehicle to meet the above conditions. Then perform the fol-
lowing steps.
NOTE:
• Do not turn ignition switch OFF.
• If it is supposed to need a long period of time, do not deplete the battery.
9. Start engine and let it idle for 5 minutes.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
4. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.10 - 2.90
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA0080ZZ
NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92,
"Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-210 2014 Note
P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR
A

DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
EOT SEN/CIRC
An excessively low voltage from the engine
P0197 (Engine oil temperature
oil temperature sensor is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
sensor circuit low input)
(EOT sensor circuit is open or shorted.) D
EOT SEN/CIRC • Engine oil temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the engine
P0198 (Engine oil temperature
oil temperature sensor is sent to ECM.
sensor circuit high input)
E
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure F
>> GO TO 2. H
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds. I
YES >> Proceed to EC-211, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
K
1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor harness connector. L
4. Check the voltage between EOT sensor harness connector and ground.
M
EOT sensor Voltage
Ground
F25 1 Ground 5V
N

YES >> GO TO 3. O
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
3. Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EOT sensor ECM

Continuity

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-211 2014 Note
4. Also check harness for short to ground.
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
3.CHECK EOT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EOT sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check the engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EC-212, "Component Inspection".
NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".

2. Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
4. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.
Engine oil temperature sensor

+ − Condition Resistance (kΩ)
Terminal
20 (68) 2.10 - 2.90
Temperature
1 2 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
[°C (°F)]
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 JMBIA0080ZZ

NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-212 2014 Note
A

NOTE:
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor • Harness or connectors D
P0222
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223 (TP sensor 1)
1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. E
1.PRECONDITIONING F
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: G
>> GO TO 2. H
2. Check DTC. I
Is DTC detected?
J
K
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, "Circuit Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. M
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. N
O
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F7 2 Ground Approx. 5 V P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-213 2014 Note
nector.

Continuity
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
F7 1 F11 33 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END



GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-214 2014 Note
ECM A
Connector
+ −
EC
Accelerator
F11 36
34
D
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-215 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions.
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink.
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration)
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
light when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP sen-
sor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions.
A misfire malfunction can be detected on any one cylinder or on multiple cylinders.
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfire detected Multiple cylinder misfire. • Improper spark plug
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No.1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect fuel pressure
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
P0303 No. 3 cylinder misfire detected No. 3 cylinder misfires. • Fuel injector*
• Intake air leak
• The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted
• Lack of fuel
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • Signal plate
• A/F sensor 1
*: DTC is detected even where a malfunction occurs one side of the dual injector.
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
3. Restart engine and let it idle for about 15 minutes.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-216 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II A

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under the similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
EC
time. Refer to the table below.
The similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data means the vehicle operation that the following con-
ditions should be satisfied at the same time. C
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
D
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH) E
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), F
T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).
The time to driving varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
G
Engine speed Time
Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
H
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
3. Check 1st trip DTC. I
NO >> INSPECTION END J
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK AND PCV HOSE K
1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.

2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leak. L
3. Check PCV hose connection.
YES >> Discover air leak location and repair. M
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents. N
YES-1 >> With CONSULT: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 4. O
NO >> Repair or replace it.
3.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
P
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-217 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
4.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR

1. Start engine and let engine idle.

YES >> GO TO 5.
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I

CAUTION:
Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the combustible.
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following proce-
dure.
3. Start engine.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion.
Spark should be generated.

CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil
within 50 cm (19.7 in). Be careful not to get an electrical JMBIA0066GB
shock while checking, because the electrical discharge

voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is taken.
NOTE:
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), the spark might be generated even if the coil is mal-
functioning.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
3. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark plug and
the grounded metal portion.


GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-218 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-319, "Component Function A
Check".
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG
EC
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
C
spark plug type, refer to EM-116, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.
E
SEF156I
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs. F
the grounded portion.
G
YES >> INSPECTION END H
NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-116, "Spark
Plug".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE I
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-13, "Inspection".
J
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
10.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE K
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure". L

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

12.CHECK IGNITION TIMING P
Check the following items.
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Follow the EC-118, "Work Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-219 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 49
F12 F11 Existed
2 53
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
49
53
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> Replace A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
With CONSULT
Check “MASS AIRFLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm
With GST
Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.

2.0 - 10.0 g/s: at 2,500 rpm
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-158, "DTC Logic".
16.CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-327, "Symptom Table".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-220 2014 Note
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 MISFIRE
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair or replace. A
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
EC
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests.
>> GO TO 18.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-221 2014 Note
P0327, P0328 KS
P0327, P0328 KS
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detected condition Possible cause
Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
input sent to ECM.
Knock sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
P0328
high input sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Knock sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-222 2014 Note
P0327, P0328 KS
Knock sensor ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 4. C
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
D
YES >> GO TO 5. E
NO >> Replace knock sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR H

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminals as follows. I
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
J
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ
CAUTION: K
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Replace knock sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-223 2014 Note
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• The crankshaft position sensor
(POS) signal is not detected by the
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open
ECM during the first few seconds of
or shorted.]
engine cranking.
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
• The proper pulse signal from the
Crankshaft position sensor (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 circuit is
P0335 crankshaft position sensor (POS) is
(POS) circuit shorted.)
not sent to ECM while the engine is
running.
• Refrigerant pressure sensor
• The crankshaft position sensor
• Accelerator pedal position sensor 2
(POS) signal is not in the normal
• Signal plate
pattern during engine running.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-224 2014 Note
CKP sensor (POS) A

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3. C
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
CKP sensor (POS) ECM E

Continuity
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit. G
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
H
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal
I
F11 75 CKP sensor (POS) F15 1
101 Refrigerant pressure sensor E17 3
E16
102 Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 E12 5 J
YES >> GO TO 5.
K
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. L
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, "Component Function Check").
• Accelerator pedal position sensor (Refer to EC-292, "Component Inspection").
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
6.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N
O
CKP sensor (POS) ECM
Continuity
P
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-225 2014 Note
CKP sensor (POS) ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
9.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace the signal plate. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I

2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-
PBIA9210J
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II

Check resistance between crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminals as follows.
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 (+) - 2 (−)
1 (+) - 3 (−) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (−)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-226 2014 Note
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View". A
EC

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-227 2014 Note
P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent
(Camshaft position sensor circuit is open or shorted)
to ECM for the first few seconds
• Camshaft position sensor
during engine cranking.
Camshaft position sensor • The cylinder No. signal is not sent
P0340 • Intake camshaft
(PHASE) circuit to ECM during engine running.
• Exhaust camshaft
• The cylinder No. signal is not in
• Starter motor
the normal pattern during engine
• Starting system circuit
running.
• Dead (Weak) battery

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Keep engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-228 2014 Note
2. Check ground connection E15. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-44, "Circuit Inspection". A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. EC
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
C
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ground.
D
CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust valve
timing control position sensor Ground Voltage
Camshaft Connector Terminal
E
Intake F21 1
Ground Approx. 5 V
Exhaust F56 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G

3. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector. H
CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust

ECM I
valve timing control position sensor Continuity
Camshaft Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Intake F21 2
F11 63 Existed J
Exhaust F56 2
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT L
1. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
M
CMP sensor (PHASE) / exhaust
ECM
valve timing control position sensor Continuity
Camshaft Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
Intake F21 3 65
F11 Existed
Exhaust F56 3 48
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. O
YES >> GO TO 6.
P
6.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE). Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-229 2014 Note
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)

YES >> GO TO 8.
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60,
"Exploded View".
JSBIA0599ZZ
8.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)

YES >> GO TO 9.
rear end or replace camshaft. Refer to EM-60,
"Exploded View".
JSBIA0600ZZ

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR-I

2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
5. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor. Refer to EM-48,
"Exploded View".
PBIA9210J
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR-II

Check resistance camshaft position sensor terminals as follows.
Terminals (Polarity) Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)]

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-230 2014 Note
1 (+) - 2 (−)
A
1 (+) - 3 (−) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 (+) - 3 (−)
Is the inspection result normal? EC
NO >> Replace camshaft position sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
C

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-231 2014 Note
P0420 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 and heated
oxygen sensor 2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way
catalyst (manifold) malfunction is diagnosed.
SEF484YB
• Three way catalyst (manifold)
• Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
Catalyst system efficiency properly.
P0420 • Fuel injector
below threshold • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
• Fuel injector leaks
enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not hold engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT
5. Select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches to 70°C (158°F).
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT.
9. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the accelerator
pedal completely.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-232 2014 Note
10. Check the indication of “CATALYST”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT screen? A
CMPLT >> GO TO 6.
INCMP >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II EC
1. Wait 5 seconds at idle.

2. Rev engine up to 2,000 to 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to “CMPLT” (It
C
will take approximately 5 minutes).
Does the indication change to “CMPLT”?
YES >> GO TO 6. D
NO >> GO TO 5.
1. Stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F). E
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
>> GO TO 3. F
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
Check 1st trip DTC. G
NO >> INSPECTION END H
NOTE: I
Use component function check to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this
K
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK L

Without CONSULT
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. M
load.
5. Open engine hood. N
ECM O
+ – Condition Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
P
50 Keeping engine speed at 2500 rpm The voltage fluctuation cycle takes more than 5 seconds.
F11 59
(HO2S2) constant under no load • 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - 1.0

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-233 2014 Note
1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dent.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAK
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AND IDLE SPEED
Check the following items. Refer to EC-118, "Work Procedure".
For specification, refer to EC-339, "Ignition Timing"
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Follow the EC-118, "Work Procedure".
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
Cylinder ECM
Terminal Voltage
No. Front / Rear Connector
+ −
1 31
2 30
Front
3 29
4 25
F10 108 Battery voltage
1 12
2 20
Rear
3 16
4 24

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-234 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 6. A
NO >> Perform EC-314, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I
EC
CAUTION:
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure. C
NOTE:
dure. D
3. Start engine.
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils. E
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil. F
11. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and check whether spark is G
generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal por-
tion.
H
CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil I

voltage becomes 20 kV or more. J
NOTE:
functioning. K
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7. L
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II

2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a known-good spark plug.
the grounded metal portion.
N
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-319, "Diagnosis Procedure".
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-235 2014 Note
Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc. Refer to EM-21,
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-116, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-116, "Spark
Plug".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View".
Is the trouble fixed?
NO >> Replace three way catalyst assembly. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-236 2014 Note
P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
EVAP canister purge volume • Harness or connectors C
An excessively low voltage signal
P0444 control solenoid valve circuit (The solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
is sent to ECM through the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve

1.CONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure E
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
Is 1st trip DTC detected? I
J
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
K
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and L
ground.
EVAP canister purge volume M

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F22 1 Ground Battery voltage N
YES >> GO TO 3.
O
NO >> GO TO 2.
Check the following. P
• Harness connector E55, F55
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-237 2014 Note
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
EVAP canister purge volume

ECM
control solenoid valve Continuity
F22 2 F10 9 Existed
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 5.
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

With CONSULT
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
5. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-238 2014 Note
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP A
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.
EC
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL C/V value) between and
100% Existed C
0% Not existed
Without CONSULT JSBIA0653ZZ
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D

2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume E
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity F

Condition
between and
12 V direct current supply between
Existed
terminals 1 and 2 G
No supply Not existed
H
YES >> INSPECTION END JSBIA0653ZZ
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-239 2014 Note
P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” by CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM by CAN communi-
cation line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-251, "DTC Logic".
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) of vehicle
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor speed signal is sent to ECM even
(The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted)
when vehicle is being driven.
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR FUNCTION
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. The vehicle speed on CONSULT
should exceed 10 km/h (6 mph) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
YES >> GO TO 4.
2. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-240 2014 Note
P0500 VSS
1,300 - 6,000 rpm (CVT) A

ENG SPEED
1,600 - 6,000 rpm (M/T)
B/FUEL SCHDL 7.5 - 31.8 msec EC
Except P or N position (CVT)
Shift lever
Except Neutral position (M/T)
C
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Is 1st trip DTC detected? D
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK E
Use component function check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. F
NO >> Proceed to EC-241, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK H
With GST
1. Lift up drive wheels. I
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST.
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position. J
NO >> Proceed to EC-241, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L
1.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check DTC with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH COMBINATION METER N
Check DTC with combination meter. Refer to MWI-20, "DTC Index".

O
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-241 2014 Note
P0520 EOP SENSOR
P0520 EOP SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
ECM detects the following status continuously for
5 seconds or more: • Harness or connectors
EOP SENSOR/SWITCH
• A voltage signal transmitted from the engine oil (Engine oil pressure sensor circuit is
P0520 [Engine oil pressure sensor
pressure sensor is lower than 0.3 V. open or shorted.)
circuit]
• A voltage signal transmitted from the engine oil • Engine oil pressure sensor
pressure sensor is higher than 5.02 V.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check engine oil leak. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect engine oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector terminals.
Engine oil pressure sensor Voltage

Ground
F38 1 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 2

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-242 2014 Note
P0520 EOP SENSOR
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
1. Check the continuity between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Engine oil pressure sensor ECM EC

Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 3. D
3.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between engine oil pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. E
Engine oil pressure sensor ECM

Continuity F
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace error-detected parts. H
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR
I
NO >> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View". J
1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR K

3. Check resistance between engine oil pressure sensor connector terminals. L
Engine oil pressure sensor

Condition Resistance (kΩ) M
Terminal
2 4 – 10
1
3 2–8 N
1 4 – 10
2 None
3 1–3
1 2–8 O
3
2 1–3
P
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO >> Replace engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-243 2014 Note
P0524 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0524 is displayed with DTC P0520 or P0075, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0520 or P0075
first. Refer to EC-242, "DTC Logic" or EC-153, "DTC Logic".

DTC No. Detecting condition Possible cause
An engine oil pressure sensor signal • Decrease in engine oil pressure
voltage applied to ECM remains lower • Decrease in engine oil level
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
P0524 than the specified value continuously for • Engine oil condition
(Engine oil pressure too low)
10 seconds or more when the engine • Engine oil pressure sensor
speed is 1,000 rpm ore more. • Engine body

CAUTION:
If “Diagnosis Procedure” is unfinished, be sure to perform Step 3 and 4.
1.PRECONDITIONING-I
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is 11 V or more at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PRECONDITIONING-II
Is “Diagnosis Procedure” of DTC P0524 finished?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Proceed to EC-245, "Diagnosis Procedure"
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
With CONSULT
3. Start the engine and check that “EOP SENSOR” changes, according to engine speeds.
Value
(Approx.)
• Engine oil temperature: 80°C (176°F) Engine speed: 1,053 mV
• Selector lever: P or N position (CVT), 600 rpm or more
EOP SENSOR Neutral position (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine speed: 1,802 mV
• No load 2,000 rpm or more
Without CONSULT
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-244 2014 Note
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Proceed to EC-245, "Diagnosis Procedure"
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE EC

C
Selector lever
D
Engine coolant temperature 70°C (158°F) or more
Engine speed 1,000 rpm or more
NOTE: E
With engine speed set around 4,000 rpm, the phenomenon can be reproduced more easily.
3. Check DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? F
G

H
2. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 4.
2.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE J
With CONSULT
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ENGINE” using CONSULT. K
3. Start the engine and check that “EOP SENSOR” changes, according to engine speeds.
Value L
(Approx.)
• Engine oil temperature: 80°C (176°F) Engine speed: 1,053 mV
• Selector lever: P or N position (CVT), 600 rpm or more M
EOP SENSOR Neutral position (M/T)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine speed: 1,802 mV
• No load 2,000 rpm or more
N
Without CONSULT
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check oil pressure. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
3.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR P
Check engine oil pressure sensor. Refer to EC-243, "Component Inspection".
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE
Check engine oil leakage. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-245 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CAUSE OF ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
Check the following item.
Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference

1 PCV valve EC-337, "Inspection"
• No blocking
2 Exhaust front tube Visual —
• No abnormal sounds
• No blocking
3 Oil pump Visual —
• No damage
• Piston to piston pin oil clearance
EM-101, "Inspection"
• Piston
• Piston ring side clearance
4 • Piston pin
• Piston ring
• Piston ring end gap
• Cylinder block top surface distortion
5 Cylinder block
• Piston to cylinder bore clearance
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check the resistance between engine oil pressure sensor connector terminals.
Engine oil pressure sensor

+ − Resistance (kΩ)
Terminal
2 4 – 10
1
3 2–8
1 4 – 10
2
3 1–3
1 2–8
3
2 1–3

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-246 2014 Note
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
A
ECM has the memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio EC
feedback compensation value memory, the Idle Air Volume Learning
value memory, etc. even when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
C
PBIA9222J E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC F
G
ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT ECM back-up RAM system
P0603 [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is open or shorted.]
(ECM power supply circuit) does not function properly.
• ECM
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following procedure I
>> GO TO 2. K
1. Turn ignition switch ON wait at least 10 seconds. L
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5 minutes
3. Turn ignition switch ON, wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 for five times.
5. Check 1st trip DTC. M
NO >> INSPECTION END N
1.INSPECTION START O
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. P
See EC-247, "DTC Logic".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-247 2014 Note
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-248 2014 Note
P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
A
C
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B J
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
K
NO >> GO TO 4. L
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON. M
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? N
O
1.INSPECTION START
P
1. Erase DTC.
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-249, "DTC Logic".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-249 2014 Note
P0605 ECM
2.REPLACE ECM
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-250 2014 Note
P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
A

ECM When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of
P0607 ECM
(CAN communication bus) CAN controller of ECM.
D
1. Turn ignition switch ON. E
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Proceed to EC-251, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
G
1.INSPECTION START
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to EC-251, "DTC Logic".
4. Check DTC.
I
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
YES >> Replace ECM. Refer to EC-338, "Removal and Installation".
J

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-251 2014 Note
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
(Accelerator pedal position 1 circuit is shorted.)
(Throttle position sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
[Camshaft position sensor circuit is shorted.]
(Exhaust valve timing control position sensor circuit
Sensor power supply ECM detects a voltage of power source is shorted.)
P0643
circuit short for sensor is excessively low or high. (Engine oil pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
• Throttle position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor
• Engine oil pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-252 2014 Note
ECM Voltage
A
Ground
72
EC
F11 74
Ground 5V
78
E16 106 C
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3. D
2. Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM Sensor F
Connector Terminal Item Connector Terminal
72 Throttle position sensor 1 F7 2
74 Engine oil pressure sensor F38 1 G
F11 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) F21
78 Exhaust valve timing control posi- 1
F56 H
tion sensor
E16 106 Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 E12 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS J
• Throttle position sensor 1 (Refer to EC-214, "Component Inspection".)
• Engine oil pressure sensor (Refer to EC-243, "Component Inspection".) K
• Camshaft position sensor (Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection".)
• Exhaust valve timing control position sensor (Refer to EC-230, "Component Inspection".)
• Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 (Refer to EC-292, "Component Inspection".) L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-253 2014 Note
P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
When the selector lever position is P or N (CVT), Neutral position (M/T), park/neutral position (PNP) signal is
ON.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The park/neutral position (PNP) signal [The park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit is
P0850 Park/neutral position signal is not changed in the process of engine open or shorted.]
starting and driving. • Transmission range switch (CVT models)
• Park/neutral position (PNP) switch (M/T models)

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL FUNCTION
With CONSULT
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT. Then check “P/N POSI SW” signal
under the following conditions.
Shift lever position Known-good signal

N or P position (CVT)
ON
Except above position OFF
YES >> GO TO 4.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-254 2014 Note
P0850 PNP SWITCH
ENG SPEED 1,500 - 6,375 rpm A

B/FUEL SCHDL 4 (CVT) or 2.75 (M/T) - 31.8 msec
EC
Shift lever Suitable position
4. Check 1st trip DTC. C
NO >> INSPECTION END D
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-255, "Component Function Check". E
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit. During this
F
G
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK H

I
ECM
+ − Condition Voltage
J
69 P or N (CVT)
Shift Battery voltage
F11 (PNP E16 108 Neutral (M/T)
lever K
signal) Except above Approx. 0 V
YES >> INSPECTION END L
M
1.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT) OR PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH (M/T)
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
N
2. Disconnect transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector and O
ground.
Transmission range switch (CVT) / P

PNP switch (M/T) Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F52 (CVT) 7
Ground Battery voltage
F24 (M/T) 2
YES >> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-255 2014 Note
P0850 PNP SWITCH
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Harness connectors E7, M69 (M/T)
• IPDM E/R harness connector E45 (CVT)
• 10 A fuse (No. 3) (M/T)
• 10 A fuse (No. 49) (CVT)
• Harness for open or short between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) and fuse
3.CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T) harness connector
and ECM harness connector.
Transmission range switch (CVT) /

ECM
PNP switch (M/T) Continuity
F52 (CVT) 10
F11 69 Existed
F24 (M/T) 3
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH (CVT) OR PNP SWITCH (M/T)
Refer to TM-146, "Component Inspection (Transmission Range Switch)" (CVT) or TM-14, "PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION (PNP) SWITCH : Component Inspection" (M/T).
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace transmission range switch (CVT) or PNP switch (M/T). Refer to TM-250, "Removal and
Installation" (CVT) or TM-23, "Removal and Installation" (M/T).
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-256 2014 Note
P1078 EVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
A
DTC Description INFOID:0000000009418247
CONSULT screen terms

DTC No. DTC detecting condition
EXH TIM SEN/CIR-B1
P1078 (Exhaust valve timing control position sen- An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is sent to ECM.
sor circuit)
D
POSSIBLE CAUSE
- Exhaust valve timing control position sensor circuit is open or shorted E
- Sensor power supply 1 circuit is shorted.
• Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up portion of the camshaft
• One (or more) sensor in sensor power supply 1 circuit F
FAIL-SAFE
Not applicable G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
I
J
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 10 seconds. K
YES >> Proceed to EC-257, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
NO-1 >> To check malfunction symptom before repair: Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO-2 >> Confirmation after repair: INSPECTION END
M
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT - 1
N
2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ground. O
+
P
Exhaust valve timing control posi- Voltage
−
tion sensor (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
F56 1 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-257 2014 Note
NO >> GO TO 6.
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM
harness connector.
+ −
ECM Continuity
position sensor
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
+ −
ECM Continuity
position sensor
Also check harness for short to ground and to power.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR
Check exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EC-259, "Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve
Timing Control Position Sensor)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (EXH)
and Installation".
JSBIA0600ZZ
6.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT - 2
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-258 2014 Note
3. Check the continuity between exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector and ECM
harness connector. A
+ −
Exhaust valve timing control EC
ECM Continuity
position sensor
C

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY 1 CIRCUIT E
Check sensor power supply 1 circuit. Refer to EC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Component Inspection (Exhaust Valve Timing Control Position Sensor) INFOID:0000000009418249
G
1.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR - 1

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
2. Disconnect exhaust valve timing control position sensor harness connector.
3. Remove exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping. I
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. J
JMBIA0065ZZ
L
2.CHECK EXHAUST VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR - 2
Check resistance exhaust valve timing control position sensor terminals as follows.
M
Exhaust valve timing control posi-
tion sensor
+ −
Condition Resistance N
Terminal
1 2 O
1 3 Temperature 25°C (77°F) Except 0 or ∞ Ω
2 3
Is the inspection result normal? P
NO >> Replace exhaust valve timing control position sensor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-259 2014 Note
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
(Overheat). • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays -1, -2 and -3)
• Cooling fan system does not operate • Cooling fan motor
Engine over temperature properly (Overheat). • Radiator hose
P1217
(Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the • Radiator
system using the proper filling method. • Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Reservoir tank
range. • Water pump
• Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Refilling". Also,
replace the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Refilling".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-13, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.

WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-260 2014 Note
Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. A
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
YES >> Proceed to EC-261, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
NO >> GO TO 2
SEF621W
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II D
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.

Did customer fill the coolant? E
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III F
With CONSULT
G
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT
screen.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
Without CONSULT H
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed. I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Proceed to EC-261, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
4.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-IV
With CONSULT K
1. Touch “HI” on the CONSULT screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
Without CONSULT L
2. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
3. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
4. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector. M
5. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at higher speed than low speed.
YES >> INSPECTION END N
O
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

With CONSULT P
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT.
3. Make sure that cooling fan motor operate at each speed (LOW/HI).
Without CONSULT
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PCS-9, "Diagnosis
Description".
2. Make sure that cooling fan motor operate at each speed (Low/High).
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-261 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-I
Check cooling system for leak. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK-II
Check the following for leak.
• Hose (Refer to CO-25, "Removal and Installation".)
• Radiator (Refer to CO-14, "Removal and Installation".)
• Water pump (Refer to CO-19, "Removal and Installation".)
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace radiator cap. Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-21, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace thermostat. Refer to CO-21, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. Refer to CO-24, "Exploded View".
7.OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
If the cause cannot be isolated, check CO-6, "Troubleshooting Chart".
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-262 2014 Note
P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR
A
C
Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning value is excessively Electric throttle control actuator
P1225
performance low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
before conducting the next test. E
TESTING CONDITION:
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
4. Check 1st trip DTC. I
NO >> INSPECTION END J
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY K

2. Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View". L
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
: Vehicle front M

YES >> GO TO 2. N
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside, and then perform throttle valve
closed position learning. Refer to EC-114, "Work Proce-
dure". O
PBIB2974E

Replace electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View". P
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-263 2014 Note
P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position learning Closed throttle position learning is not performed Electric throttle control actuator
P1226
performance successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 32 times.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
and the housing.
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 2.
dure". PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-264 2014 Note
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
A

NOTE:
EC-249, "DTC Logic". C
• An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD D
steering switch is sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
• ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
P1564 ASCD steering switch
steering switch is out of the specified range. • ASCD steering switch
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is • ECM E
stuck ON.

1.PRECONDITIONING F
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always perform the following before conduct-
ing the next test. G
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. J
4. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press COAST/SET switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.
K
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-265, "Diagnosis Procedure".
L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION M

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT O
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. P
3. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check each item indication under the following conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-265 2014 Note
Monitor item Condition Indication

Pressed ON
MAIL SW MAIN switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL SW CANCEL switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ACCEL/RES switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET SW COAST/SET switch
Released OFF
Without CONSULT
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 1
94
E16 95 COAST/SET switch: Pressed Approx. 2
(ASCD steering switch signal)
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed Approx. 3
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
M88 16 E16 95 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-266 2014 Note
Combination switch ECM A

Continuity
M88 13 E16 94 Existed
EC
YES >> GO TO 7. C
NO >> GO TO 6.
D
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
E
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH F
YES >> GO TO 8. G
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
H
>> INSPECTION END I

1.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH J

Check resistance between combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector terminals under the following
conditions.
K
Combination switch
Condition Resistance (Ω)
Connector Terminals L
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 250
M88 13 and 16 COAST/SET switch: Pressed Approx. 660 M
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed Approx. 1,480
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4,000
N
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch. O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-267 2014 Note
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected
in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
When the vehicle speed is above • Harness or connectors
30 km/h (19 MPH), ON signals (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A) from the stop lamp switch and the • Harness or connectors
brake pedal position switch are (The brake pedal position switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ASCD brake switch sent to the ECM at the same time. • Stop lamp switch
Brake pedal position switch signal • Brake pedal position switch
is not sent to ECM for extremely • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
B) • Incorrect brake pedal position switch installation
long time while the vehicle is being
driven. • ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test.
NOTE:
The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B can
be detected.
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine (ESP switch OFF).
4. Press MAIN switch and make sure that CRUISE lamp illuminates.
5. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-268 2014 Note
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II A

1. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION:
EC
NOTE:
C
D
Depress the brake pedal for more than 5 seconds so as
Driving location
not to come off from the above-mentioned vehicle speed.
2. Check DTC. E
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END F
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I G

With CONSULT
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT. H
3. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
I
Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal J
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals as follows.
ECM L
Connector
Terminal Terminal
Slightly depressed Approx. 0 M
100 Brake
E16 108
(Brake pedal position switch signal) pedal Fully released Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II O
With CONSULT
Select “BRAKE SW2” and check indication under the following conditions.
P
Slightly depressed ON
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal
Fully released OFF
Without CONSULT
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-269 2014 Note
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
99 Brake Slightly depressed Battery voltage

E16 108
(Stop lamp switch signal) pedal Fully released Approx. 0
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect brake pedal position switch harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ground.
Brake pedal position switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Harness connectors E7, M69
• 10 A fuse (No. 5)
• Harness for open or short between brake pedal position switch and fuse
5.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.
Brake pedal position switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-271, "Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)"
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View".
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-270 2014 Note
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
A
Stop lamp switch
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC
E13 (CVT)
1 Ground Battery voltage
E57 (M/T)
C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D
• 10 A fuse (No. 30)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery E
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F

2. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
G
Stop lamp switch ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
E13 (CVT)
2 E16 99 Existed
E57 (M/T)
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
10.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-272, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)". K
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View". L
M
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch) INFOID:0000000009418255 N
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
3. Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.
P
Terminals Condition Continuity
Fully released Existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Not existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-271 2014 Note
2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II

1. Adjust brake pedal position switch installation. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment".

1 and 2 Brake pedal
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000009418256
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I

3. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.

Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment".

1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-272 2014 Note
P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina- EC
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-34, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) : System Description" for ASCD
functions.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D

NOTE:
E
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer F
G
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
The difference between the two vehicle • Combination meter
ASCD vehicle speed H
P1574 speed signals is out of the specified • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
sensor
range. • Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM
I
1.PRECONDITIONING J
ing the next test.
L
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF). M
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. N
NOTE:
3. Check DTC. O
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END P
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-111, "DTC Index".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-273 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Check DTC with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 3.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-274 2014 Note
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR
A
ECM receives input speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal for EC
engine control.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC UXXXX, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX. D
E
F
Input speed sensor signal is different G
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted)
Input speed sensor from the theoretical value calculated by
(TCM output) ECM from output speed sensor signal
(Input speed sensor circuit is open or shorted)
and engine rpm signal.
• TCM
H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
ing the next test.
K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and drive the vehicle at more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds. L
CAUTION:
2. Check 1st trip DTC. M
NO >> INSPECTION END N
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM O

P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to TM-235, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-275 2014 Note
P1720 VSS
P1720 VSS
ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is sent from “ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)” via combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module).
ECM uses these signals for engine control.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
(Wheel sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
The difference between two vehicle
Vehicle speed sensor • TCM
P1720 speed signals is out of the specified
(TCM output) • Secondary speed sensor
range.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for at least 5 seconds without depressing the brake
pedal.
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
Check DTC with “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”. Refer to BRC-26, "DTC Index".
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-276 2014 Note
P1720 VSS
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated. A
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Check combination meter function. Refer to MWI-20, "DTC Index".
EC
>> INSPECTION END

C

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-277 2014 Note
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
P1805 Brake switch for extremely long time while the vehicle is (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
driving. • Stop lamp switch

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase DTC.
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E13 (CVT)
E57 (M/T)
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply circuit.
3.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and stop lamp switch harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-278 2014 Note
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
ECM Stop lamp switch A

Continuity
E13 (CVT)
E16 99
E57 (M/T)
2 Existed EC

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair error-detected parts.
4.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH D
E
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. Refer to BR-19, "Removal and Installation".
F
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I

H
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed I
J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-8, "Inspection and Adjustment". K
Terminals Condition Continuity L

1 and 2 Brake pedal
M
NO >> Replace brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-19, "Removal and Installation".
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-279 2014 Note
P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for
P2100 (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open)
relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
• Throttle control motor relay
Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay is
P2103 (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted)
relay circuit short stuck ON.
• Throttle control motor relay

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected?
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
+ − Voltage
F10 15 E16 108 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-280 2014 Note
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II A

EC
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
E
• IPDM E/R connector F42 F
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
4.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 20 A fuse for blown. H
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace 20 A fuse. I
5.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

1. Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following conditions. J
ECM
+ − Conditions Voltage K
Ignition switch: OFF Approx. 0 V
F10 2 E16 108 L
Ignition switch: ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 8. M
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
N
4. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. O
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity P
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-281 2014 Note

• IPDM E/R connector F42

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-282 2014 Note
P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A

NOTE:
to EC-280, "DTC Logic". C
D
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not
P2101 (Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted)
performance operate properly.
• Electric throttle control actuator
E

1.PRECONDITIONING F
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION: H
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.
I
>> GO TO 2.
J
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? K
L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION M

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT O

P
ECM
+ − Condition Voltage
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F10 2 E16 108
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-283 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
+ − Voltage
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
6.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 20A fuse (No. 53) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 20A fuse for blown.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace 20A fuse.
7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 9.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-284 2014 Note
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

EC
C
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, "Removal and Installation".
10.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT E

2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. F
nector.
G
Continuity
H
1 Not existed
5
4 Existed
F7 F10
1 Existed I
6
4 Not existed
J
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors. K
11.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY
2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve L
and the housing.
: Vehicle front M
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle N
dure". PBIB2974E O
12.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Refer to EC-286, "Component Inspection". P
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 14.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-285 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 14.
Replace malfunction electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END


2. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as follows.

5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-286 2014 Note
P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
A
C
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
P2118
circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor) D
1.PRECONDITIONING E
ing the next test.
G
>> GO TO 2.
H
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? I
J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION K

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- N
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM O

Continuity
1 Not existed
5 P
4 Existed
F7 F10
1 Existed
6
4 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-287 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as follows.

5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-288 2014 Note
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
C
Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
P2119 Electric throttle control actuator Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is Electric throttle control actuator
B) D
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test. F
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B H

2. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds. I
3. Set selector lever to P (CVT) or Neutral (M/T) position.
6. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds. J
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC. K
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3. L
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
2. Set selector lever to D (CVT) or 1st (M/T) position and wait at least 3 seconds. M
5. Check DTC. N
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END O
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY P


GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-289 2014 Note
and the housing.
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 2.
dure". PBIB2974E

>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-290 2014 Note
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A

NOTE:
Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP • Harness or connectors D
P2122
sensor 1 circuit low input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP • Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2123 (APP sensor 1)
sensor 1 circuit high input sensor 1 is sent to ECM. E
1.PRECONDITIONING F
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
I
2. Check DTC. J
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END K

M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. N
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
APP sensor Voltage P

Ground
E12 4 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-291 2014 Note
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
Replace accelerator pedal assembly. Refer to ACC-3, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR


GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-292 2014 Note
ECM A
Connector
+ −
EC
110 Fully released 0.6 - 0.9 V
111
(APP sensor 1 signal) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7 V
Accelerator
E16
pedal Fully released 0.3 - 0.6 V C
103
104
D
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY E
>> INSPECTION END F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-293 2014 Note
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the • Harness or connectors
P2127
sensor 2 circuit low input APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
[Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 2)
P2128
sensor 2 circuit high input APP sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E12 5 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-294 2014 Note
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. A
APP sensor ECM EC

Continuity
C
YES >> GO TO 4.
D
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
E
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Item Connector Terminal
F
F11 75 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) F15 1
E16
102 APP sensor E12 5 G
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. I
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-226, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
J
YES >> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. L
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal M
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
APP sensor ECM
Continuity

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-295 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
+ −

111
Accelerator
E16
pedal Fully released 0.3 - 0.6 V
103
104
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-296 2014 Note
P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
A

NOTE:
EC-252, "DTC Logic". C
• Harness or connector D
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
Throttle position sensor (TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
P2135 compared with the signals from TP sensor
circuit range/performance • Electric throttle control actuator
1 and TP sensor 2.
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
E
1.PRECONDITIONING
F
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I

2. Check DTC.
J
Is DTC detected?
K

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT N

O

Ground Voltage P
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-297 2014 Note
P2135 TP SENSOR
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.

Continuity
F7 4 F11 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.

Continuity
1 33
F7 F11 Existed
3 34
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END



GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-298 2014 Note
P2135 TP SENSOR
ECM A
Connector
+ −
EC
Accelerator
F11 36
34
D
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END F

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-299 2014 Note
P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Rationally incorrect voltage (APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
is sent to ECM compared [Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position sensor
P2138 with the signals from APP (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is shorted.)
circuit range/performance
sensor 1 and APP sensor • Accelerator pedal position sensor (APP sensor 1 and 2)
2. • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

1.PRECONDITIONING
ing the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-300 2014 Note
P2138 APP SENSOR
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or shot to power in harness or connectors.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A
Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
EC
APP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E12 5 Ground Approx. 5 V C
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4. D
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

F
APP sensor ECM
Continuity
E12 5 E16 102 Existed G
YES >> GO TO 5.
H
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. I
ECM Sensor
Connector Terminal Item Connector Terminal J
F11 75 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) F15 1
E16 K
102 APP sensor E12 5
YES >> GO TO 6. L
6.CHECK COMPONENTS
M
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-226, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-325, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
O
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. P
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
1 104
E12 E16 Existed
2 111

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-301 2014 Note
P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector as follows.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
3 110
E12 E16 Existed
6 103
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
+ −

111
Accelerator
E16
pedal Fully released 0.3 - 0.6 V
103
104
NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-302 2014 Note
P2138 APP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END A
EC

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-303 2014 Note
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT
3. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.

Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT
2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
100 Slightly depressed Approx. 0
Brake
E16 (Brake pedal position 108
pedal Fully released Battery voltage
switch signal)
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check the voltage between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ground.
Brake pedal position switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Harness connector E7, M69
• 10A fuse (No. 5)
• Harness for open or short between brake pedal position switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground in harness or connectors.

3.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-304 2014 Note
3. Check the continuity between brake pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor. A
Brake pedal position switch ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal EC
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Harness for open or short between ECM and brake pedal position switch D
4.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-305, "Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch)"
E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace brake pedal position switch. Refer to BR-19, "Exploded View"
F
G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection (Brake Pedal Position Switch) INFOID:0000000009642609
H
1.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
J
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Not existed K
NO >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II

1. Adjust brake pedal position switch installation. Refer to BR-20, "Inspection and Adjustment". M
Terminals Condition Continuity N

1 and 2 Brake pedal
O
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-305 2014 Note
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
1.CHECK ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION

• MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON • ASCD: Operating ON
SET LAMP • When vehicle speed is between 30 km/h
(19 MPH) and 170 km/h (105 MPH) • ASCD: Not operating OFF

1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-306 2014 Note
CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
A
1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION EC

With CONSULT
2. Select “ENGINE” using CONSULT. C
3. Select “CLUTCH P/P SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Check “CLUTCH P/P SW” indication under the following conditions.
D
Fully released OFF
CLUTCH P/P SW Clutch pedal E
Fully depressed ON
Without CONSULT
F
ECM
G
92 Fully released Approx. 0V H

E16 E16 108 Clutch pedal
(Clutch pedal position switch signal) Fully depressed Battery voltage
I
1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch harness connector and ground.
L
Clutch pedal position switch
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E48 4 Ground Existed
M

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
2.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT O
2. Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor. P
Clutch pedal position switch ECM

Continuity

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-307 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH
Refer to EC-308, "Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace clutch pedal position switch. Refer to CL-10, "Exploded View".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Clutch Pedal Position Switch) INFOID:0000000009642394
1.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-I

2. Disconnect clutch pedal position switch harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.

Connector Terminals
Clutch Fully released Existed

E48 3 and 4
pedal Fully depressed Not existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION SWITCH-II
1. Adjust clutch pedal position switch installation. Refer to CL-5, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between clutch pedal position switch terminals under the following conditions.

Connector Terminals
Clutch Fully released Existed

E48 3 and 4
pedal Fully depressed Not existed
NO >> Replace clutch pedal position switch. Refer to CL-10, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-308 2014 Note
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
A
1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION EC
With CONSULT
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT. C
3. Touch “LOW” and “Hi” on the CONSULT screen.
4. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.
Without CONSULT D
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motor operation. Refer to PCS-9, "Diagnosis
Description".
2. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed. E
NO >> Refer to EC-309, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT G
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.

2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connector.
H
CVT models
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
7 E5 1
E43 Existed
5 E32 3
J
M/T models
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal K
7 2
E43 E31 Existed
5 1
L
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay harness connector and cooling fan motor harness connec-
tor.
CVT models M
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan motor
Continuity
E62 5 E32 4 Existed N
M/T models
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan motor O

Continuity
E62 5 E31 4 Existed
P
4. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor harness connector and ground.
CVT models
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E5 2 Ground Existed

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-309 2014 Note
COOLING FAN
M/T models
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect cooling fan relay harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan relay harness connector.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan relay

Continuity
65 1
E46 E62 Existed
59 2
4. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay harness connector and ground.
Cooling fan relay

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY
Refer to EC-311, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)".
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace cooling fan relay.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR
Refer to EC-310, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)".
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor. Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View".
YES or NO
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) INFOID:0000000009587165
1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
3. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-310 2014 Note
COOLING FAN
CVT models
Cooling fan motor A

+ − Operation
Connector
terminals
EC
E5 1 2
Cooling fan motor operates
E32 3 4
M/T models C
Cooling fan motor
+ − Operation
Connector D
terminals
2 3
E31 Cooling fan motor operates
1 4 E
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor. Refer to CO-17, "Exploded View". F
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) INFOID:0000000009587163
G
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY
2. Remove cooling fan relay. H
3. Check continuity between cooling fan relay terminals under the
following conditions.
I
Cooling fan relay
Conditions Continuity
terminals
12 V direct current supply between J
Existed
3 5 terminals 1 and 2
No current supply Not existed
JSBIA0671ZZ
NO >> Replace cooling fan relay.
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-311 2014 Note
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred to
ECM through the CAN communication line.
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.

ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-312, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident?
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Perform trouble diagnosis of rear window defogger system. Refer to DEF-13, "Work Flow".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-312 2014 Note
>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM A
Perform trouble diagnosis of headlamp system. Refer to EXL-70, "Work Flow".

EC
>> INSPECTION END
4.CHECK AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
C
Perform trouble diagnosis of air conditioning system. Refer to HAC-27, "Workflow".
>> INSPECTION END D

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-313 2014 Note
FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT
1. Let engine idle.

PBIB3332E
1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and ground.
Fuel injector
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Front / Rear Terminal
F17 Front
1 1
F53 Rear
F18 Front
2 1
F54 Rear
Ground Battery voltage
F19 Front
3 1
F29 Rear
F20 Front
4 1
F30 Rear
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-314 2014 Note
FUEL INJECTOR
• 10 A fuse (No. 55)
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse A
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Fuel injector ECM

Continuity D
Cylinder Connector Front / Rear Terminal Connector Terminal
F17 Front 31
1 2
F53 Rear 12 E
F18 Front 30
2 2
F54 Rear 20
F10 Existed F
F19 Front 29
3 2
F29 Rear 16
F20 Front 25 G
4 2
F30 Rear 24
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
I
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View"
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K

M

N
2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as follows.
O
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
P
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-315 2014 Note
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed

hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
NO >> EC-316, "Diagnosis Procedure".
ALBIA1074ZZ
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

ECM
+ − Voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector.
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
3. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector.
5. Check the voltage between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-316 2014 Note
FUEL PUMP
Fuel level sensor unit A

and fuel pump Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
Battery voltage should for exist 1 second EC
B44 1 Ground
after ignition switch is turn ON.
C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUSE D
3. Check 15 A fuse. E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace 15 A fuse. F
5.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. G
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
harness connector.
H
Fuel level sensor unit and
IPDM E/R
fuel pump Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal I
E44 9 B44 1 Existed
J
YES >> GO TO 6.
K
6.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”harness connector and ground. L
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump

Ground Continuity M
Connector Terminal
B44 3 Ground Existed
3. Also check harness for short to power. N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. O
7.CHECK FUEL PUMP
P
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”. Refer to FL-6, "Exploded View".
Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-317 2014 Note
FUEL PUMP
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP

2. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit (fuel pump)” harness connector.
3. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit (fuel pump)” terminals as follows.

1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω
NO >> Replace fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly. Refer to FL-6, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-318 2014 Note
IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
1.INSPECTION START EC
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Does the engine start?
C
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT: GO TO 3.
2.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION D
With CONSULT
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT. E
3.IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
Without CONSULT G
1. Let engine idle.
2. Check the voltage signal between ECM harness connector and ground with an oscilloscope.
H
ECM
+ − Voltage signal
I
17
18 J
21
F10 E16 108
K
22
JMBIA0219GB
NOTE: L
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle.
YES >> INSPECTION END M
N
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON. O
ECM
P
Terminal Voltage
Connector
+ −
E16 105 108 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-319 2014 Note
IGNITION SIGNAL
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
3. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
5.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F26 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-323, "Component Inspection (Condenser)"
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace condenser.
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-320 2014 Note
IGNITION SIGNAL
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground. A
Ignition coil
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal EC
1 F34 3
2 F35 3
Ground Battery voltage C
3 F36 3
4 F37 3
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E

2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
F
Ignition coil
Ground Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal G
1 F34 2
2 F35 2
Ground Existed H
3 F36 2
4 F37 2
3. Also check harness for short to power. I
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. J
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ignition coil harness connector. K
Ignition coil ECM

Continuity L
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
1 F34 1 17
2 F35 1 18 M
F10 Existed
3 F36 1 22
4 F37 1 21
N
YES >> GO TO 10. O
10.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-322, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)". P
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-321 2014 Note
IGNITION SIGNAL
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000009022680
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞ Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
1 and 3
Except 0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 and 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II
CAUTION:
3. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
dure.
4. Start engine.
7. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
10. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
12. Crank engine for about three seconds, and check whether spark
is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal
portion.

CAUTION:
• Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil

voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
NOTE:
functioning.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-322 2014 Note
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Inspection (Condenser) INFOID:0000000009022681
A
1.CHECK CONDENSER
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. EC
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as follows.
Terminals Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] C

1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ
NO >> Replace condenser.
E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-323 2014 Note
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION

2. Make sure that MIL lights up.
1.CHECK DTC
Check that DTC UXXXX is not displayed.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC UXXXX.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Perform troubleshooting relevant to DTC indicated.
NO >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-324 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
A
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION EC

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground. C
ECM
Terminal Voltage D
Connector
+ −
101
E16 98 1.0 - 4.0V E
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal)
G
1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
2. Stop engine. H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.

3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ground. K
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage L
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
O
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P
3. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-325 2014 Note
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and refrigerant pressure sensor harness connec-
tor.
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to HAC-49, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-326 2014 Note
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
EC
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

C
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
D
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

E
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE

F
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
H
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel EC-316, "Compo-
Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 nent Function
Check"
I
Fuel pressure regulator sys- EC-122, "Work Pro-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
tem cedure"
J
EC-314, "Compo-
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 nent Function
Check"
EC-36, "EVAPORA- K
Evaporative emission sys- TIVE EMISSION
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
tem SYSTEM : System
Description"
L
Air Positive crankcase ventila- EC-337, "Inspec-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
tion system tion"
3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjust- EC-118, "Work Pro- M
1 1 1 1 1
ment cedure"
EC-283, "DTC Log-
ic"
Electric throttle control actua- EC-287, "DTC Log- N
1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
tor ic"
EC-289, "DTC Log-
ic"
O
Igni- Incorrect ignition timing ad- EC-335, "Inspec-
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1
tion justment tion"
EC-319, "Diagnosis P
Ignition signal circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
Procedure"
Main power supply and ground circuit EC-137, "Diagnosis
2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
Procedure"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-327 2014 Note
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

EC-158, "DTC Log-
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2
ic"
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-165, "DTC Log-
3 3
circuit ic"
EC-170, "DTC Log-
ic"
3 EC-173, "DTC Log-
ic"
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit
EC-176, "DTC Log-
ic"
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-179, "DTC Log-
ic"
EC-167, "DTC Log-
ic"
EC-213, "DTC Log-
ic"
EC-263, "DTC Log-
Throttle position sensor circuit
ic"
EC-264, "DTC Log-
ic"
2 2 EC-297, "DTC Log-
ic"
EC-291, "DTC Log-
ic"
Accelerator pedal position sensor cir- EC-294, "DTC Log-
3 2 1
cuit ic"
EC-300, "DTC Log-
ic"
EC-222, "DTC Log-
Knock sensor circuit 2 3
ic"
EC-242, "DTC Log-
Engine oil pressure sensor circuit 4 2 3
ic"
EC-224, "DTC Log-
Crankshaft position sensor circuit 2 2
ic"
EC-228, "DTC Log-
Camshaft position sensor circuit 3 2
ic"
EC-240, "DTC Log-
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3
ic"
EC-247, "DTC Log-
ic"
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-249, "DTC Log-
ic"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-328 2014 Note
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL E

Intake valve timing control solenoid EC-142, "DTC Log- F
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3
valve circuit ic"
Exhaust valve timing control solenoid EC-146, "DTC Log-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3
valve circuit ic" G
EC-254, "DTC Log-
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3
ic"
EC-325, "Diagnosis H
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4
Procedure"
EC-312, "Diagnosis
Electrical load signal circuit 3
Procedure" I
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HAC-27, "Workflow"
ABS actuator and electric unit (con- BRC-34, "Work
4 J
trol unit) Flow"
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next table)
K
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-329 2014 Note
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Warranty symptom code A

AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL HA
M
Fuel Fuel tank FL-13, "Inspection"
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-5, "Inspection"
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
gasoline, Low octane)
Air EM-28, "Removal
Air duct
and Installation"
EM-28, "Removal
Air cleaner
and Installation"
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — EM-28, "Removal
5 5 5 5 5 5
electric throttle control ac- and Installation"
tuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control ac- EM-28, "Exploded
tuator View"
Air leakage from intake EM-28, "Exploded
manifold/Collector/Gasket View"
Crank- PG-60, "How to Han-
Battery
ing dle Battery"
CHG-10, "Work Flow
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (With EXP-800 NI or
GR8-1200 NI)"*,
Generator circuit
CHG-13, "Work Flow
(Without EXP-800 NI
or GR8-1200 NI)"*
1
STR-13, "Work Flow
(With GR8-1200
Starter circuit 3 NI)"*, STR-16, "Work
Flow (Without GR8-
1200 NI)"*
Signal plate 6 EM-101, "Inspection"
EC-255, "Diagnosis
PNP signal 4
Procedure"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-330 2014 Note
SYMPTOM
A

EC



C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

M F
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-79, "Inspection"
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
G
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring H
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-101, "Inspection"
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft I
Valve EM-51, "Removal
Timing chain
mecha- and Installation"
nism J
Camshaft EM-68, "Inspection"
EM-51, "Removal
Intake valve timing control
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 and Installation"
K
Exhaust valve timing con- EM-51, "Removal
trol and Installation"
Intake valve
3 EM-79, "Inspection" L
Exhaust valve
Ex- Exhaust manifold/Tube/ EM-31, "Removal
haust Muffler/Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 and Installation" M
Three way catalyst EX-4, "Inspection"
Lubri- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil

cation pump/Oil filter/Oil gallery/ LU-7, "Inspection" N
Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7, "Inspection"

O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-331 2014 Note
SYMPTOM




ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
Reference page
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

M
Cooling CO-12, "RADIATOR :
Radiator/Hose/Radiator Inspection"
filler cap CO-12, "RADIATOR
CAP : Inspection"
CO-21, "Removal
Thermostat 5
and Installation"
CO-19, "Removal
Water pump 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 and Installation"
CO-25, "Removal
Water gallery
and Installation"
CO-18, "Disassembly
Cooling fan
and Assembly"
5
Coolant level (Low)/Con-
CO-8, "Inspection"
taminated coolant
NATS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer SEC-61, "ECM :
1 1
System) Work Procedure"
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
*: For details about type, refer to CHG-3, "Commercial Service Tool".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-332 2014 Note
A
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED) EC

If the engine speed is above 2,400 rpm under no load (for example, the shift lever position is neutral and
engine speed is over 2,400 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed. C
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-30,
"MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM : System Description". D

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-333 2014 Note
IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
With GST
Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.
Without CONSULT
Check idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which installed between No.1 ignition coil and No.1 spark plug.
>> INSPECTION END

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-334 2014 Note
IGNITION TIMING
IGNITION TIMING
A
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING EC

1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
JSBIA0603ZZ
F
Loop wire
A. Timing light B. Timing indicator
G
2. Check ignition timing.
>> INSPECTION END H

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-335 2014 Note
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
2. Check EVAP canister as follows:
a. Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port .
b. Block port . Orally blow air through port .
3. Visually inspect the fuel check valve for cracks, damage, loose
connections chafing and deterioration.
JMBIA0443ZZ
4. Check fuel check valve as follows:

a. Blow air through connector on the fuel tank side. A considerable
resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow should be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
b. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side. Air flow
should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
c. If fuel check valve is suspected or not properly functioning in
step 1 and 2 above, replace it.
JSBIA0080GB
5. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick-
ing, etc.
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/

Pressure:
cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
Vacuum:
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-336 2014 Note
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
A
1.CHECK PCV VALVE EC

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is C
placed over valve inlet.
YES >> INSPECTION END D
NO >> Replace PCV valve. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
E
PBIB1589E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-337 2014 Note
ECM

ECM
JPBIA4276ZZ
ECM bracket ECM

: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Perform ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING ECM. Refer to EC-111, "Work Procedure".
REMOVAL
1. Remove fusible link bracket. Keep a service area.
3. Remove ECM mounting nuts, and then remove ECM.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-338 2014 Note

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000009022694
EC
Transmission Condition Specification

C
CVT No load* (in P or N position) 700 ± 50 rpm
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 650 ± 50 rpm
*: Under the following conditions D
• A/C switch: OFF
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position E
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000009022695
F
Transmission Condition Specification
CVT No load* (in P or N position) 11 ± 2°BTDC
G
M/T No load* (in Neutral position) 10 ± 2°BTDC
*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF
H
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000009022696 I
Condition Specification (Using CONSULT or GST) J

At idle 10 – 35%
At 2,500 rpm 10 – 35%
K
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000009022697
L
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
Output voltage at idle 0.8 – 1.3 V*
0.8 – 4.0 g/s at idle* M
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT or GST)
2.0 – 10.0 g/s at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EC-339 2014 Note
ENGINE
EM
A
EM
SECTION
ENGINE MECHANICAL C
E
CONTENTS
HR16DE Inspection ................................................................17 F
Adjustment ...............................................................17
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
AIR CLEANER FILTER ..................................... 19
G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Exploded View .........................................................19
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Removal and Installation .........................................19
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 SPARK PLUG ................................................... 21 H
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3 Exploded View .........................................................21
Draining Engine Coolant ........................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................21
Disconnecting Fuel Piping ......................................... 3 I
Removal and Disassembly ........................................ 3
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 24
Inspection, Repair and Replacement ........................ 4 DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY .......................... 24
Assembly and Installation ......................................... 4 Exploded View .........................................................24 J
Parts Requiring Angle Tightening ............................. 4 Removal and Installation .........................................24
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT ....................... 26
PREPARATION ............................................ 6 Exploded View .........................................................26 K
PREPARATION ................................................... 6
Special Service Tools ................................................ 6 INTAKE MANIFOLD ......................................... 28 L
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 7 Exploded View .........................................................28
EXHAUST MANIFOLD ...................................... 31 M
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE ...................10 Exploded View .........................................................31
Inspection and Adjustment ...................................... 10
COMPRESSION PRESSURE ............................13 N
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER ......................... 34
Inspection ................................................................ 13
Exploded View .........................................................34
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 14 Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan) ...............34
Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan) ...............37 O
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE ................ 40
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................14
Exploded View .........................................................40 P
NVH troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 14
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 16 IGNITION COIL ................................................. 47
DRIVE BELT .......................................................16 Exploded View .........................................................47
Exploded View ........................................................ 16 Removal and Installation .........................................47
Removal and Installation ......................................... 16 ROCKER COVER ............................................. 48

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-1 2014 Note
Exploded View ........................................................ 48 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 90
Removal and Installation ........................................ 48
ENGINE UNIT .................................................... 90
TIMING CHAIN .................................................. 51 Setting ..................................................................... 90
Exploded View ........................................................ 51 Disassembly ............................................................ 91
Removal and Installation ........................................ 51 Assembly ................................................................ 91
CAMSHAFT ....................................................... 60 CYLINDER BLOCK ........................................... 92
Exploded View ........................................................ 60 Exploded View ........................................................ 92
Removal and Installation ........................................ 60 Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 93
Inspection ............................................................... 68 Inspection .............................................................. 101
OIL SEAL ........................................................... 73 HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING .. 110
Description ............................................................ 110
VALVE OIL SEAL ..................................................... 73
Connecting Rod Bearing ....................................... 110
VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ......... 73
Main Bearing ........................................................ 112
FRONT OIL SEAL ..................................................... 74
FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation ........ 74 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ......................................................... 115
REAR OIL SEAL ....................................................... 74
REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation .......... 74 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................ 115
CYLINDER HEAD .............................................. 76 General Specification ............................................ 115
Exploded View ........................................................ 76 Drive Belt .............................................................. 115
Removal and Installation ........................................ 76 Spark Plug ............................................................ 116
Exploded View ........................................................ 77 Exhaust Manifold .................................................. 116
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 78 Camshaft ............................................................... 116
Inspection ............................................................... 79 Cylinder head ........................................................ 118
Cylinder Block ....................................................... 120
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ..... 85 Main Bearing ......................................................... 123
ENGINE ASSEMBLY ......................................... 85 Connecting Rod Bearing ....................................... 124
Exploded View ........................................................ 85
Removal and Installation ........................................ 86

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EM
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
J
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
K
M
PIIB3706J
Draining Engine Coolant INFOID:0000000009444824

N
Drain engine coolant and engine oil when the engine is cooled.
Disconnecting Fuel Piping INFOID:0000000009444825 O
• Before starting work, check no fire or spark producing items are in the work area.
• Release fuel pressure before disconnecting and disassembly.
• After disconnecting pipes, plug openings to stop fuel leakage. P
Removal and Disassembly INFOID:0000000009444826
• When instructed to use SST, use specified tools. Always be careful to work safely, avoid forceful or unin-
structed operations.
• Use care to avoid damage to mating or sliding surfaces.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
• Dowel pins are used for several parts alignment. When replacing and reassembling parts with dowel pins,
check that dowel pins are installed in the original position.
• Cover openings of engine system with a tape or equivalent, if necessary, to seal out foreign materials.
• Mark and arrange disassembly parts in an organized way for easy troubleshooting and reassembly.
• When loosening nuts and bolts, start with the one furthest outside, then the one diagonally opposite, and so
on. If the order of loosening is specified, do exactly as specified. Power tools may be used in the step.
Inspection, Repair and Replacement INFOID:0000000009444827
Before repairing or replacing, thoroughly inspect parts. Inspect new replacement parts in the same way, and
replace if necessary.
Assembly and Installation INFOID:0000000009444828
• Use torque wrench to tighten bolts or nuts to specification.

• Tighten nuts and bolts in order exactly as specified in the procedure. If a tightening order or procedure is not
specified, tighten nuts and bolts equally in several different steps. Start with the nuts or bolts in the center
and then tighten diagonally starting with the inside and moving to the outside in a spiral pattern.
• Replace with new gasket, packing, oil seal or O-ring.
• Thoroughly wash, clean, and air-blow each part. Carefully check engine oil or engine coolant passages for
restrictions and blockages.
• Avoid damaging sliding or mating surfaces. Before assembling, completely remove foreign materials such
as cloth lint or dust, and oil the sliding surfaces.
• After refilling engine coolant, bleed the air from the cooling system.
• After repairing, start the engine and increase engine speed to check for engine coolant leaks, fuel leaks,
engine oil leaks, and exhaust gas leaks.
Parts Requiring Angle Tightening INFOID:0000000009444829
• For the final tightening of the following engine parts use Tool:
Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)

- Camshaft sprocket (INT) bolt
- Cylinder head bolts
- Main bearing cap bolts
- Connecting rod cap bolts
- Crankshaft pulley bolt (Note an angle wrench is required as bolt flange is provided with notches for angle
tightening)
• Do not use a torque value for final tightening.
• The torque value for these parts are for a preliminary step.
• Ensure thread and seat surfaces are clean and coated with engine oil.
Precaution for Liquid Gasket INFOID:0000000009444830
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING

• After removing the bolts and nuts, separate the mating surface and
remove the liquid gasket using Tool (A).
Tool Number : KV10111100 (J-37228)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• In areas where the cutter is difficult to use, use a plastic hammer to
lightly tap (1) the cutter where the liquid gasket is applied. Use a
plastic hammer to slide (2) the cutter by tapping on the side.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the mating surfaces. AWBIA1249GB
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-4 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
1. Using suitable tool (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the
liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface. A
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating sur- EM
face with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.
C
JPBIA0053ZZ
D
3. Attach liquid gasket tube to the suitable tool.
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
EM-4, "Precaution for Liquid Gasket".
E
4. Apply liquid gasket without gaps to the specified location accord-
ing to the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for liquid gasket application, apply liquid
gasket to the groove. F
G
EMA0622D
• As for bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside the H
holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Check to read the text of this manual.
I
(A) : Groove
: Inside
• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mat- J

ing component.
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Do not retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
JPBIA0010ZZ K
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in the procedures contained in this manual concerning liquid gas- L
ket application, observe them.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-5 2014 Note
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10111100 Removing oil pan (lower and upper) etc.
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
S-NT046
KV10116200 Disassembling and assembling valve mecha-

(J-26336-B) nism
Valve spring compressor Part (1) is a component of KV10116200, but
1. KV10115900 Part (2) is not so.
(J-26336-20)
Attachment
2. KV10109220
( — )
Adapter PBIC1650E
KV10112100 Tightening bolts for main bearing cap, cylinder

(BT-8653-A) head, etc.
Angle wrench
S-NT014
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sen-

( — ) sor 1
Heated oxygen sensor wrench For 22 mm (0.87 in) width hexagon nut
NT379
KV10107902 Removing valve oil seal

(J-38959)
Valve oil seal puller
NT011
KV10115600 Installing valve oil seal

(J-PBIA0396ZZ) Use side A.
Valve oil seal drift a: 20 (0.79) dia. d: 8 (0.31) dia.
b: 13 (0.51) dia. e: 10.7 (0.421)
c: 10.3 (0.406) dia. f: 5 (0.20)
G: Side A H: Side B
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT603

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-6 2014 Note
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.) A
Tool name
EM03470000 Installing piston assembly into cylinder bore
(J-8037) EM
Piston ring compressor
S-NT044
ST16610001 Removing pilot converter D

(J-23907)
Pulley puller
E
S-NT045 F
KV11103000 Removing crankshaft pulley
( — )
Pulley puller G
H
NT676
KV11105210 Holding drive plate and flywheel static

(J-44716) I
Stopper plate
ZZA0009D
K
L
M
PIIB1407E
Quick connector release Removing fuel tube quick connectors in en- O

gine room
PBIC0198E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-7 2014 Note
PREPARATION
Spark plug wrench Removing and installing spark plug
a: 14 mm (0.55 in)
JPBIA0399ZZ
Pulley holder Crankshaft pulley removing and installing
NT035
Valve seat cutter set Finishing valve seat dimensions
S-NT048
Piston ring expander Removing and installing piston ring
S-NT030
Valve guide drift Removing and installing valve guide
PBIC4012E
Valve guide reamer (1): Reaming valve guide inner hole

(2): Reaming hole for oversize valve guide
PBIC4013E
(J-43897-18) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads

(J-43897-12) before installing a new air fuel ratio sensor
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner (Use with anti-seize lubricant shown below.)
A: [18 mm (0.71 in) dia.] for zirconia heated
oxygen sensor
B: [12 mm (0.47 in) dia.] for titania heated
oxygen sensor
C: Mating surface shave cylinder
JPBIA0238ZZ D: Flutes

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-8 2014 Note
PREPARATION
A
Acoustic tension gauge Checking drive belt tension
EM
C
PBIC3881E
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning

or equivalent meeting MIL specifica- tool when reconditioning exhaust system
tion MIL-A-907) threads D
AEM489
Manual lift table caddy Removing and installing engine F
ZZA1210D
H
1. Compression gauge Checking compression pressure
2. Adapter
J
ZZA0008D
Tube presser Pressing the tube of liquid gasket

K
S-NT052

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-9 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
BASIC INSPECTION
INSPECTION
Perform inspection as follows after removal, replacement or installation of camshaft or valve-related parts, or if
there are unusual engine conditions regarding valve clearance.
1. Remove rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation".
2. Measure the valve clearance with the following procedure:
a. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke.
• Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) clockwise and align TDC mark (no
paint) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front cover.
(B) : White paint mark (Not used for service)
PBIC3673E
• At the same time, check that both intake and exhaust cam
lobes of No. 1 cylinder face inside ( ) as shown.
(1) : Camshaft (INT)

(2) : Camshaft (EXH)
: Engine front
• If the lobes do not face inside, rotate the crankshaft pulley 360
degrees to align as shown.
JPBIA4738ZZ
b. Using suitable tool (A) measure the clearance between the valve
lifter and camshaft.
Valve clearance : Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
JPBIA4116ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-10 2014 Note
• Measure the valve clearances at locations marked “×” [loca-
tions indicated with ( )] as shown using suitable tool. A
(A) : No. 1 cylinder

(B) : No. 2 cylinder EM
(C) : No. 3 cylinder
(D) : No. 4 cylinder
C
JPBIA4117ZZ
Measuring position No. 1 CYL. No. 2 CYL. No. 3 CYL. No. 4 CYL.
EXH × × E
No. 1 cylinder at compression TDC
INT × ×
c. Set No. 4 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke. F

• Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) one revolution (360 degrees) and
align TDC mark (no paint) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front
cover.
G
(B) : White paint mark (Not use for service)
I
PBIC3673E
• Measure the valve clearances at locations marked “×” [loca- J

tions indicated with ( )] as shown using suitable tool.
(A) : No. 1 cylinder

K
(B) : No. 2 cylinder
(C) : No. 3 cylinder
(D) : No. 4 cylinder
L
JPBIA4118ZZ
M
Measuring position No. 1 CYL. No. 2 CYL. No. 3 CYL. No. 4 CYL.
N
EXH × ×
No. 4 cylinder at compression TDC
INT × ×
O
3. If out of the specifications, adjust as necessary. Refer to “ADJUSTMENT”.
ADJUSTMENT
P
NOTE:
Proper valve clearance is obtained by selecting the correct valve lifter head thickness.
1. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
2. Remove valve lifters from the locations that are out of the standard.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-11 2014 Note
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using
a suitable tool (A).
PBIC3195J
4. Use the equation below to calculate valve lifter thickness for replacement.
Valve lifter thickness calculation: t = t1 + (C1 – C2)

t = Valve lifter thickness to be replaced
t1 = Removed valve lifter thickness
C1 = Measured valve clearance
C2 = Standard valve clearance at 20°C (68°F):
Intake : 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Exhaust : 0.33 mm (0.013 in)
• Crown surface thickness of new valve lifter (B) can be identi-
fied by stamp mark (A) on the under side of the lifter.
NOTE:
Available thickness of valve lifter: 26 sizes range 3.00 to 3.50
mm (0.1181 to 0.1378 in) in increments of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
when manufactured at factory. Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
• Stamp mark “302” indicates 3.02 mm (0.1189 in) in thickness.
PBIC3196J
5. Install the correct thickness valve lifter.

6. Install camshaft. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
7. Install timing chain. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
8. Manually rotate crankshaft pulley a few rotations.
9. Check that valve clearances are within specification. Refer to “INSPECTION”.
10. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
11. Warm up the engine, and check for unusual noise and vibration.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-12 2014 Note
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
A
1. Warm up engine to full operating temperature and then turn it off. EM

2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
3. Remove ignition coil and spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
4. Connect engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT). C
5. Install compression gauge (B) with an adapter (A) into spark
plug hole.
D
F
JPBIA4119ZZ
G
• Use an adapter with a diameter (a) smaller than 20 mm (0.79
in). Otherwise, it may be caught by cylinder head during
removal.
H
(a) : Less than 20 mm (0.79 in)
J
JPBIA0171ZZ
6. With accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn ignition switch to »»» for cranking. When the gauge pointer
stabilizes, read the compression pressure and the engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylin- K
der.
Compression pressure : Refer to EM-115, "General Specification". L

CAUTION:
Always use a fully charged battery to obtain the specified engine speed.
• If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery. Check the engine speed again with a M
fully charged battery.
• If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the spark plug
hole to recheck the compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn or damaged. Check the N
piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains low despite the addition of engine oil, the valves may be malfunc-
tioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat as necessary. O
• If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression remains
low even after the addition of engine oil the head gasket may be leaking, or valves in adjacent cylinders
may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
• If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts associ- P
ated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore, cylinder head,
cylinder head gasket). After repairing, measure the compression pressure again.
7. After inspection is completed, install removed parts.
8. Start the engine, and ensure that the engine runs smoothly.
9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to EC-107, "Work Flow".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-13 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NVH troubleshooting Chart INFOID:0000000009444835
JPBIA4739GB
1. Locate the area where noise occurs.

2. Confirm the type of noise.
3. Specify the operating condition of engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-14 2014 Note
4. Check specified noise source.
If necessary, repair or replace these parts. A
Operating condition of engine

Location Type of Before After When Source of
Check item
Refer- EM
of noise noise When When While noise ence page
warm- warm- start-
idling racing driving
up up ing
Top of en- Ticking or Tappet C

C A — A B — Valve clearance EM-10
gine rock- clicking noise
er cover Camshaft Camshaft journal oil
cylinder Rattle C A — A B C bearing clearance EM-116
head D
noise Camshaft runout
Piston to piston pin oil
Slap or Piston pin clearance
— A — B B — EM-120 E
knock noise Connecting rod bushing
oil clearance
Piston to cylinder bore
clearance F
Crank- Piston ring side clear-
shaft pul- Slap or Piston
A — — B B A ance EM-120
ley rap slap noise
Piston ring end gap
cylinder Connecting rod bend G
block (side and torsion
of engine)
oil pan Connect- Connecting rod bushing
Knock A B C B B B
ing rod oil clearance EM-120 H
bearing Connecting rod bearing EM-124
noise oil clearance
Main bearing oil clear-
Main bear- EM-123 I
Knock A B — A B C ance
ing noise EM-120
Crankshaft runout
Timing
Timing chain cracks J
Front of chain and
Tapping or and wear EM-51
engine A A — B B B chain ten-
ticking Timing chain tensioner EM-51
front cover sioner
operation
noise
K
Drive belt
Squeak-
(Sticking
ing or fizz- A B — B — C Drive belt deflection
or slip-
ing EM-115 L
ping)
Front of
Drive belt Idler pulley bearing op-
engine Creaking A B A B A B
(Slipping) eration
Water M
Squall
A B — B A B pump Water pump operation CO-19
Creak
noise
A: Closely related B: Related C: Sometimes related —: Not related N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-15 2014 Note
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT
ALBIA1157ZZ
1. Generator 2. Water pump 3. Crankshaft pulley

4. A/C compressor (with A/C models) 5. Tensioner idler pulley 6. Drive belt
Idler pulley (without A/C models)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine undercover. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove wheel and tire (RH) using a power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation".
3. Partially remove the fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
4. Loosen the lock nut and then release the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt.
5. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION
1. Pull the idler pulley in the loosening direction, and then temporarily tighten the lock nut to the following
torque.
Lock nut : 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)

(Temporary tightening)
NOTE:
Do not move the lock nut from the temporary tightened position. Go to step 2.
2. Install the drive belt on each pulley.
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no engine oil, grease, or engine coolant, etc. in pulley grooves.
• Check that the belt seats securely inside the groove on each pulley.
3. Adjust drive belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to EM-17, "Adjustment".
CAUTION:
• Perform the belt tension adjustment with the lock nut temporarily tightened to the torque specifi-
cation listed in step 1 which prevents the idler pulley from tilting.
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflec-
tion between pulleys.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-16 2014 Note
DRIVE BELT
4. Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.
A
Lock nut (Final tightening) : 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
5. Check that belt tension is within the specification using suitable tool. Refer to EM-115, "Drive Belt".
EM
• Inspection should be done only when engine is cold or over 30 C

minutes after the engine is stopped.
(1) : Generator
(2) : Water pump D
(3) : Crankshaft pulley
(4) : A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models) E
(5) : Idler pulley
(6) : Drive belt
PBIC3642E
F
• Visually check belt for wear, damage, and cracks on inside and
edges.
• Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise twice, and check that the tension on all pulleys equalizes before testing.
• When measuring deflection, apply 98.1 N (10 kg, 22 lb) at the ( ) marked point. G
• Measure the belt tension and frequency using suitable tool at the ( ) marked point.
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after turning H
crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflection between
pulleys.
I
Belt deflection/belt tension and frequency : Refer to EM-115, "Drive Belt".
Adjustment INFOID:0000000009444839
J
Location Location of adjuster and tightening method

K
Drive belt Adjusting bolt on idler pulley
CAUTION:
• When belt is replaced with new one, adjust belt tension to the value for “New belt,” because new belt L
will not fully seat in the pulley groove.
• When tension of the belt being used exceeds “Limit,” adjust it to the value for “After adjusted.”
• When installing a belt, check it is correctly engaged with the pulley groove.
• Do not allow engine oil or engine coolant to get on the belt. M
• Do not twist or bend the belt strongly.
1. Partially remove the fender protector (RH) front side clip. Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen lock nut (A) and temporarily set to the following torque. N
Lock nut (A)

: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)
(Temporary tightening) O
(1) : Generator
(2) : Water pump P
(3) : Crankshaft pulley
(4) : A/C compressor (with A/C models)
Idler pulley (without A/C models)
PBIC3643E
(5) : Idler pulley
(6) : Drive belt
(B) : Adjusting bolt

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-17 2014 Note
DRIVE BELT
3. Adjust the belt tension by turning the adjusting bolt. Refer to EM-115, "Drive Belt".
CAUTION:
• When checking immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after
turning crankshaft two turns or more, readjust to the specified value to avoid variation in deflec-
tion between pulleys.
• When the tension adjustment is performed, the lock nut should be in the condition at Step 2. If
the tension adjustment is performed when the lock nut is loosened more than the temporary
tightening, the idler pulley tilts and the correct tension adjustment cannot be performed.
4. Tighten the lock nut to final tightening specification.
Lock nut (Final tightening) : 34.8 N·m (3.5 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-18 2014 Note
AIR CLEANER FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
A
EM
I
AWBIA1598ZZ
1. Air cleaner cover 2. Mass air flow sensor 3. Clamp J

4. Air duct 5. Clamp 6. Hose
7. Clamp 8. Grommet 9. Grommet insert
10. Grommet 11. Grommet insert 12. Air duct inlet K
13. Air cleaner body 14. Air cleaner filter A. To electric throttle control actuator
B. To rocker cover
L
REMOVAL M
1. Unhook clips (A) and pull the air cleaner cover (1) upward.
P
JSBIA1092ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-19 2014 Note
AIR CLEANER FILTER
2. Remove the air cleaner filter (1) from the air cleaner body.
JSBIA1093ZZ
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Check that the air cleaner filter is securely placed in the air cleaner body.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-20 2014 Note
SPARK PLUG
SPARK PLUG
A
EM
G
AWBIA1599ZZ
1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover

Front
H
I
REMOVAL
1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION: J
Do not drop or shock ignition coil.
2. Remove spark plug using a suitable tool.
K
Diameter (a) : 14 mm (0.55 in)
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock spark plug. L
JPBIA0030ZZ
N
• If the spark plug tip is covered with carbon, a spark plug cleaner may be used.
O
Cleaner air pressure : Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm2, 85 psi)
Cleaning time : Less than 20 seconds
CAUTION: P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-21 2014 Note
SPARK PLUG
Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
SMA773C
• Checking and adjusting spark plug gap is not required between

change intervals. Do not adjust the gap; replace the spark plug as
necessary if out of specification.
SMA806CA
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock the spark plug.
Make NGK
CAUTION:
Always tighten the spark plug to specified torque to align the orientation of electrodes. The ground
electrode of a genuine spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability by tightening to the
specified torque. When replacing spark plugs, use genuine spark plugs of which the ground electrode
is adjusted.
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-22 2014 Note
SPARK PLUG
The ground electrode of the spark plug is positioned in the area of maximum ignitability to improve combustion
eficiency in the cylinder, reduce CO2 (carbon dioxide) emission and improve fuel economy. A
EM
F
JPBIA5996GB
1. Ground electrode of spark plug A. Top view B. Air-fuel mixture flow

G
C. Poor ignitability region

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-23 2014 Note
DRIVE BELT IDLER PULLEY

AWBIA1618ZZ
1. Generator bracket 2. Plate 3. Tensioner idler pulley

4. Washer 5. Spacer 6. Center shaft
7. Adjusting bolt Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove the fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the air duct inlet assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-16, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the lock nut, and then remove the plate, tensioner idler pulley, and washer.
5. Remove the center shaft together with the spacer and the adjusting bolt.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-24 2014 Note
1. Insert the center shaft (1) into the slide groove of the spacer (2).
Fully screw in the adjusting bolt (3) in the belt loosening direc- A
tion ( ).
• At that time, place the flange (a) of the adjusting bolt and the
seat (b) of the center shaft on the spacer. EM
2. Place each surface (c/d) of the spacer on the generator bracket.
Install the washer, tensioner idler pulley, and plate, and then
temporarily tighten the lock nut.
C
Lock nut
: 4.4 N·m (0.45 kg-m, 39 in-lb)
(Temporary tightening)
D
G
PBIC3885E
3. Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.

H

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-25 2014 Note
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
AWBIA1598ZZ
1. Air cleaner cover 2. Mass air flow sensor 3. Clamp

4. Air duct 5. Clamp 6. Hose
7. Clamp 8. Grommet 9. Grommet insert
10. Grommet 11. Grommet insert 12. Air duct inlet
13. Air cleaner body A. To electric throttle control actuator B. To rocker cover
REMOVAL
NOTE:
Mass air flow sensor is removable as an assembly with the air cleaner cover.
1. Remove air duct (inlet) from the air cleaner body.
2. Disconnect PCV hose from the air duct.
3. Remove the air duct (between air cleaner case and electric throttle control actuator).
• Add matching marks if necessary for easier installation.
4. Remove air cleaner assembly with the following steps:
a. Disconnect the mass air flow sensor harness connector.
b. Remove the air cleaner body bolts.
c. Pull up on the air cleaner assembly to disengage it from the grommet and remove the air cleaner assem-
bly.
CAUTION:
• Do not shock the mass air flow sensor.
• Do not disassemble the mass air flow sensor.
• Do not touch the sensor of the mass air flow sensor.
Inspect air duct (inlet) and air duct for cracks, tears, or breaks.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-26 2014 Note
Replace air duct (inlet) and air duct if any problems are found.
A
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Align marks, attach each joint and screw clamps firmly. EM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-27 2014 Note
INTAKE MANIFOLD
INTAKE MANIFOLD
AWBIA1612ZZ
1. EVAP canister purge volume control 2. Hose clamp 3. Vacuum hose

solenoid valve
4. PCV hose 5. Hose clamp 6. Intake manifold gasket
7. Intake manifold 8. Electric throttle control actuator 9. Electric throttle control actuator
gasket
A. To air duct B. To centralized under-floor piping C. To air duct
D. To booster E. To PCV valve in rocker cover Engine front
REMOVAL
NOTE:
ing.
1. Remove air duct (inlet), air duct and air cleaner. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect water hoses from the electric throttle actuator (if necessary).
CAUTION:
• Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.
3. Remove electric throttle control actuator and position aside.
CAUTION:
• Handle carefully to avoid any shock to electric throttle control actuator.
• Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
4. Disconnect EVAP purge control solenoid valve harness connector and vacuum hose from EVAP purge
control solenoid valve.
CAUTION:
Handle EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve carefully and avoid impacts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-28 2014 Note
INTAKE MANIFOLD
5. Disconnect vacuum hose for brake booster from intake manifold.
6. Remove intake manifold bolts (A) at the rocker cover. A
EM
AWBIA1620ZZ
D
7. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.

CAUTION: E
Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
AWBIA1576ZZ
H
8. Remove intake manifold and intake manifold gasket.
9. Remove EVAP purge control solenoid valve from intake manifold (if necessary).
CAUTION: I
Handle EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve carefully and avoid impacts.
INSTALLATION
J
Intake Manifold
1. Install the new intake manifold gasket to the intake manifold. K
• Align the protrusions used for checking gasket installation con-
dition with the clearance grooves (A) of the intake manifold
groove.
L
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the intake manifold gasket.
NOTE:
New gasket for electric throttle control actuator can be installed M
when the electric throttle control actuator is installed.
N
JSBIA1220ZZ
2. Place the intake manifold into position.

O
CAUTION:
Check that the oil level gauge guide is not detached from the securing clip of the water inlet due to
interference of intake manifold.
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-29 2014 Note
INTAKE MANIFOLD
3. Tighten the bolts to specification in the numerical order as
shown.
AWBIA1576ZZ
4. Tighten the intake manifold bolts (A) to specification at the

rocker cover.
Intake manifold bolts (A) 25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m, 18 in-lb)
AWBIA1620ZZ
Electric Throttle Control Actuator

1. Install electric throttle control actuator gasket to intake manifold.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse electric throttle control actuator gasket.
2. Tighten bolts of electric throttle control actuator equally and diagonally in several steps.
NOTE:
After installation, it is necessary to re-calibrate the electric throttle control actuator as follows:
• Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after repair when removing harness connector of the elec-
tric throttle control actuator. Refer to EC-114, "Work Procedure".
• Perform “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” and “Idle Air Volume Learning” after repair when replacing
electric throttle control actuator. Refer to EC-115, "Work Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-30 2014 Note
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
A
EM
L
AWBIA1603ZZ
1. Exhaust manifold cover (upper) 2. Harness bracket 3. Air-fuel ratio sensor 1 M

4. Exhaust manifold stay 5. Heat insulator 6. Exhaust manifold
7. Exhaust manifold cover (lower) 8. Exhaust maifold gasket Engine front
N
REMOVAL
O
1. Remove air duct (inlet), air duct and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
2. Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".
3. Remove harness bracket from the cylinder head on the right rear side. P
4. Remove exhaust manifold upper and lower covers.
5. Disconnect air fuel ratio sensor 1 harness connector.
6. Remove exhaust manifold side bolt of exhaust manifold stay.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-31 2014 Note
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
7. Use Tool (A) to remove the air-fuel ratio sensor 1 with exhaust
manifold installed on vehicle (if necessary).
Tool number : KV10117100 ( — )

CAUTION:
• Handle air-fuel ratio sensor 1 carefully and avoid impacts.
• Before installing a new air-fuel ratio sensor 1, clean the
exhaust tube threads using suitable tool and approved
anti-seize lubricant.
• If air-fuel ratio sensor is dropped onto a hard surface,
such as a concrete floor, from a height of 0.5 m or more, JPBIA4126ZZ
discard the sensor and use a new one.
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner : — (J-43897-12)

8. Remove exhaust manifold.
• Loosen nuts in reverse order as shown.
JPBIA4127ZZ
9. Remove exhaust manifold gasket.

10. Remove stud bolt using suitable tool from cylinder head (if necessary).
Mounting Surface Distortion
• Using suitable tools (A) and (B), check the surface distortion of the
exhaust manifold mating surface as shown.
Limit : Refer to EM-116, "Exhaust Manifold".

• Replace exhaust manifold if it exceeds the limit.
PBIC3530J
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Note the following:
Exhaust manifold
1. Install new exhaust manifold gasket.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-32 2014 Note
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Do not reuse exhaust manifold gasket.
A
EM
JPBIA4127ZZ
D
2. Tighten nuts in numerical order as shown.
G
JPBIA4127ZZ
3. Tighten nuts in numerical order to the specified torque again.

H
Air-fuel ratio sensor 1

• Use Tool (A) to install the air-fuel ratio sensor 1 (if removed).
I
CAUTION: J
• Handle it carefully and avoid impacts.
• Before installing a new air-fuel ratio sensor 1, clean the
exhaust tube threads using suitable tool and approved anti-
seize lubricant. K
• Do not over-tighten the air-fuel ratio sensor 1. Doing so may
damage the air-fuel ratio sensor 1, resulting in the MIL com-
ing on. JPBIA4126ZZ
L

Oxygen sensor thread cleaner : — (J-43897-18) M
Installation of remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
N
Inspection
• Start engine and raise engine speed to check for exhaust leaks.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-33 2014 Note
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
AWBIA1595ZZ
1. Rear oil seal 2. O-ring 3. Oil pan (upper)

4. Oil pump chain tensioner (for oil 5. Oil pump drive chain 6. Crankshaft key
pump drive chain)
7. Crankshaft sprocket 8. Oil pump sprocket 9. Oil pump
10. O-ring 11. O-ring 12. Oil pan drain plug
13. Drain plug washer 14. Oil pan (lower) 15. Oil filter
16. Connector bolt 17. Oil cooler 18. O-ring
19. Relief valve A. Refer to EM-37, "Removal and In- B. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Instal-
stallation (Upper Oil Pan)" lation"
C. Oil pan (lower) side
Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan) INFOID:0000000009670758
REMOVAL
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burned, engine coolant and engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; avoid direct skin con-
tact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as
possible.
1. Drain engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-34 2014 Note
2. Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
A
: Engine front
EM
JSBIA1126ZZ
D
3. Insert Tool (A) between oil pan (upper) and oil pan (lower).
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)

E
CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surfaces.
• Do not insert a screwdriver. This damages the mating sur-
faces. F
4. Slide the Tool (A) by tapping on the side of tool with a suitable
tool to loosen the oil pan (lower).
G
5. Remove oil pan (lower). JPBIA0276ZZ

Clean debris from oil pan (lower) and from the strainer. H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers. I
1. Remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces using suitable
tool (A).
• Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan J
(upper).
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: K
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when clean-
ing off old liquid gasket.
L
JSBIA1127ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-35 2014 Note
2. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket (A) with a tube presser
as shown.
(1) : Oil pan (lower)

(a) : 7.5 - 9.5 mm (0.295 - 0.374 in)
(b) : 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) diameter
: Engine outside
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer

toGI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants"
CAUTION:
• Installation should be done within 5 minutes after apply-
ing liquid gasket.
• Do not fill the engine with oil for at least 30 minutes after
the components are installed to allow the sealant to cure.
JSBIA1128ZZ
3. Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
: Engine front
JSBIA1126ZZ
4. Install oil pan drain plug.

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse drain plug washer.
• Refer to exploded view installation direction of drain plug washer. Refer to EM-34.
5. Refill the engine with engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Refilling".

quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leak-
age at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
NOTE:
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to spec-

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-36 2014 Note
A
Engine coolant Level Leakage Level
Engine oil Level Leakage Level EM
Transmission/ CVT Models Leakage Level/Leakage Leakage

transaxle fluid M/T Models Level/Leakage Leakage Level/Leakage
C
Other oils and fluids* Level Leakage Level
Fuel Leakage Leakage Leakage
Exhaust gas — Leakage — D
Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan) INFOID:0000000009671305 E
NOTE:
The oil strainer is included in the oil pan (upper) and cannot be removed.
F
REMOVAL
1. Remove the oil pan (lower). Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation (Lower Oil Pan)".
2. Remove oil pump sprocket and crankshaft sprocket together with oil pump drive chain. Refer to EM-37, G
"Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)".
3. Remove oil pan (upper).
a. Loosen oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse of the order as H
shown.
: Engine front I
JPBIA4199ZZ
K
b. Insert a suitable tool into the position ( ) as shown and open up

a crack between the oil pan (upper) cylinder block. L
: Engine front
M
c. Insert the Tool between the oil pan (upper) and cylinder block.
Slide Tool by tapping on the side of Tool with a hammer.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228) N
CAUTION:
JPBIA4200ZZ
• Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
• The liquid gasket used at the factory is very strong. Pry only in the areas shown. O
• Do not remove oil pump and oil strainer from oil pan (upper).
4. Remove rear oil seal from crankshaft.
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers.
1. Install the oil pan (upper):
a. Remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces using a suitable tool.
• Remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of cylinder block.
• Remove old liquid gasket from the bolt holes and threads.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-37 2014 Note
CAUTION:
Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off liquid gasket.
b. Install O-ring to the cylinder block.
c. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to areas as shown
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
(1) : Cylinder block

(2) : Oil pan (upper)
(A) : 2 mm (0.07 in) protruded to outside
(B) : 2 mm (0.07 in) protruded to rear oil seal mounting side
(d) : 5.5 - 7.5 mm (0.217 - 0.295 in)
(e) : 4.0 - 5.0 mm (0.157 - 0.197 in) diameter
: Engine front
CAUTION:
• Attaching should be done within 5 minutes after coating.
• Allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before add-
ing oil to the engine.
JSBIA1301ZZ
d. Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.
: Engine front
CAUTION:
Install avoiding misalignment of both oil pan gasket and O-
ring.
• The bolts are different according to the installation position.
Refer to the numbers as shown.
M8×180 mm : No. 9, 10 25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m, JPBIA4199ZZ

(7.09 in) bolts 18 ft-lb)
M8×25 mm : No. 4, 7, 8 25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
M8×90 mm : No. 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
2. Install rear oil seal:

CAUTION:
• Installation of rear oil seal should be completed within 5 minutes after installing oil pan (upper).
• Do not reuse rear oil seal.
• Do not touch oil seal lip.
a. Wipe off any liquid gasket protruding to the rear oil seal mounting part of oil pan (upper) and cylinder block
b. Apply the liquid gasket lightly to entire outside area of new rear oil seal.
Use Genuine Liquid Gasket or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-38 2014 Note
c. Press-fit the rear oil seal using a suitable drift (A) with outer
diameter 113 mm (4.45 in) and inner diameter 90 mm (3.54 in). A
EM
PBIC3660E
D
• Press-fit to the specified dimensions as shown.
(1) : Rear oil seal E

(A) : Rear end surface of cylinder block
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the grease applied to the oil seal lip. F
• Be careful not to damage the rear oil seal mounting part
of oil pan (upper) and cylinder block or the crankshaft.
• Press-fit straight and check that oil seal does not curl or G
tilt.
PBIC3149J
d. After press-fitting the rear oil seal, completely wipe off any liquid
gasket protruding to rear end surface side. H
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels, including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required I
• Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leak- J
age at connection points.
• Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
NOTE: K
after hydraulic pressure rises. L
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
• After cooling down engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant. Refill to spec- M
N
Engine coolant Level Leakage Level
Engine oil Level Leakage Level O
Transmission/ A/T and CVT Models Leakage Level/Leakage Leakage

transaxle fluid M/T Models Level/Leakage Leakage Level/Leakage
P
Other oils and fluids* Level Leakage Level
Fuel Leakage Leakage Leakage
Exhaust gas — Leakage —

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-39 2014 Note
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
AWBIA1579ZZ
1. Stud bolt 2. O-ring (green) 3. Fuel injector (front)

4. Clip 5. Fuel injector (rear) 6. O-ring (black)
7. Fuel tube protector 8. Fuel tube 9. Clamp
10. Quick connector cap (engine side) 11. Fuel feed hose 12. Quick connector cap (floor piping-side)
13. Fuel connector protector 14. Fuel pipe A. To centralized under-floor piping
Front
CAUTION:
Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed.
WARNING:
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the workshop.
• Be sure to work in a well-ventilated area and furnish workshop with a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Do not smoke while servicing fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work area.
REMOVAL
1. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
2. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-40 2014 Note
3. Disconnect fuel feed hose from fuel tube. Disconnect quick con-
nector: A
(1) : Quick connector cap (engine side)

NOTE: EM
There is no fuel return path.
JPBIA4130ZZ
D
a. Remove quick connector cap (engine side) (1) from quick con-
nector connection.
b. Disconnect fuel feed hose from hose clamp. E
G
JPBIA4131ZZ
c. With the sleeve (B) side of quick connector release (A) facing H
quick connector (2), install quick connector release (A) onto fuel
tube (1) as shown.
d. Insert quick connector release (A) into quick connector (2) until I
sleeve (B) contacts and goes no further. Hold quick connector
release (A) in that position (D).
CAUTION:
Inserting quick connector release hard will not disconnect J
quick connector. Hold quick connector release where it
contacts and goes no further.
e. Draw and pull out quick connector (E) straight up from fuel tube JPBIA2255ZZ K
(1).
CAUTION:
• Pull quick connector up (E) from holding position (C) as shown. L
• Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
• Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
• Discard O-ring, do not reuse.
• Avoid fire and sparks. M
• Keep parts away from heat source. Be especially careful when welding is performed.
• Do not expose parts to battery electrolyte or other acids.
• Do not bend or twist connection between quick connector and fuel feed tube during installation N
or removal.
• Be sure to cover openings of disconnected fuel feed hose
(A) and fuel tube (C) with plug or plastic bag (B) to avoid
fuel leaks and entry of foreign material. O
JSBIA1295ZZ
4. Disconnect fuel feed hose from fuel pipe as follows:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-41 2014 Note
NOTE:
There is no fuel return path.
a. Remove quick connector cap (floor piping side) (1) from quick
connector connection.
JSBIA1291ZZ
b. Disconnect fuel feed hose from hose clamp (1).
JSBIA1292ZZ
c. Hold the quick connector (1) while pushing in tabs (F), and pull
out the hard tube (A).
(2) : Retainer
(B) : Connection (cross-section)
(C) : Resin tube
(D) : To under floor fuel line
(E) : To fuel tank
(G) : Disconnection
CAUTION:
• Inserting quick connector release hard will not disconnect
quick connector. Hold quick connector release where it
contacts and goes no further.
• The tube can be removed when the tabs are completely
depressed. Do not twist it more than necessary.
• Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
• Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the tube.
• Prevent acid such as battery electrolyte etc. from getting
on the resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist the tube during installation and
removal. JPBIA0130ZZ
• Remove the remaining retainer only when the tube is
replaced.
• When the tube is replaced, also replace the retainer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-42 2014 Note
• Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with
plug or plastic bag (B) to avoid fuel leaks and entry of for- A
eign material.
(A) :Fuel feed hose

EM
(C) :Fuel tube
JSBIA1295ZZ
D
5. Disconnect harness connectors from fuel injectors.
6. Disconnect harness connectors from intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.
7. Remove fuel tube protector. E
• Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
: Engine front
F
H
JPBIA4132ZZ
8. Remove fuel injector and fuel tube assembly:

I
: Engine front
J
a. Loosen two nuts in reverse order as shown.
b. Pull the fuel tube straight out until injector lower O-rings are
clear.
K
c. Remove the nuts and the fuel tube.
CAUTION:
• When removing, be careful to avoid interference with fuel
injectors. JPBIA4133ZZ
L
• Use a shop cloth to absorb any fuel leaks from fuel tube.
9. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube: M

a. Open and remove clip (1).
b. Remove fuel injectors (3) and (4) from fuel tube (2) by pulling straight out.
CAUTION: N
• Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak from fuel tube.
• Be careful not to damage fuel injector nozzle during removal.
• Do not bump or drop fuel injector. O
• Do not disassemble fuel injector.
• Do not reuse O-rings.
P
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
1. Install O-rings on the fuel injector.
CAUTION:
• Upper and lower O-rings are different. Be careful not to interchange them.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-43 2014 Note
Fuel tube side : Black

Nozzle side : Green
• Handle O-ring with bare hands. Do not wear gloves.
• Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
• Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
• Check that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
• When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it.
• Do not twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, allow it to
retract before inserting it into fuel tube.
• Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
2. Install fuel injector (4) to fuel tube (1):
a. Insert new clip (2) into clip groove (G) on fuel injector (4).
• Insert new clip (2) so that protrusion (F) of fuel injector
matches cut-out (D) of clip.
(3) : O-ring (black)

(5) : O-ring (green)
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
• Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If
interference occurs, replace O-ring.
b. Insert fuel injector (4) into fuel tube (1) with clip (2) attached.
• Insert fuel injector (4) while matching it to the axial center.
• Insert fuel injector (4) so that protrusion (B) of fuel tube
matches cut-out (C) of clip (2).
• Check that fuel tube flange (A) is securely located in flange
groove (E) on clip (2).
c. Check that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector
(4) does not rotate or come off.
JPBIA4530ZZ
3. Set fuel tube and fuel injector assembly in position for installation on cylinder head.
CAUTION:
For installation, be careful not to interfere with fuel injector nozzle.
• Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
: Engine front
JPBIA4133ZZ
4. Install fuel tube protector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-44 2014 Note
• Tighten bolts in numerical order as shown.
A
: Engine front
EM
JPBIA4132ZZ
D
5. Connect harness connectors to fuel injectors.
6. Connect harness connectors to intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.
7. Connect fuel feed tube (engine side): E
a. Check for damage or foreign material on the fuel tube and quick connector.
b. Apply new engine oil lightly to area around the top of fuel tube.
c. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. F
• Insert quick connector (1) to fuel tube until the top spool (C) on
fuel tube is inserted completely and the 2nd level spool (D) is
positioned slightly below quick connector bottom end. G
(B) : Upright insertion
(E) : Correctly connected
H
CAUTION:
• Hold in position (A) as shown when inserting fuel tube
into quick connector.
• Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to pre- I
vent damage to O-ring inside quick connector. JPBIA2256ZZ
• Insert until you hear a “click” sound and actually feel

the engagement. J
d. To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, pull quick connector hard by hand. Check it
is completely engaged (connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube.
e. Install quick connector cap (engine side) (1) to quick connector K
connection.
• Install quick connector cap (engine side) (1) with the side
arrow facing quick connector side (fuel feed tube side) as L
shown.
CAUTION:
• Check that the quick connector and fuel tube are
securely engaged with the quick connector cap (engine M
side) groove.
• If the quick connector cap (engine side) cannot be
installed easily the quick connector may not be con- N
JPBIA4131ZZ
nected correctly. Remove and reconnect.
f. Install fuel feed hose to hose clamp.

8. Connect fuel feed tube (floor piping side): O
a. Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
b. Align the quick connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight into the centralized under floor
piping until a click is heard. P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-45 2014 Note
c. After connecting, check that the connection is secure:
• Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs are connected to the
connector.
• With the fuel feed hose not fixed to the clamp, pull quick con-
nector (A) hard by hand to check that the quick connector (A)
is not disconnected from the centralized underfloor piping (1)
and that the quick connector (1) is securely connected.
9. Install remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
PBIC3795E

Check on Fuel Leaks
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with the engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check there
are no fuel leaks at connection points. Refer to.
NOTE:
Use mirrors for checking points out of clear sight.
2. Start the engine. With engine speed increased, check again that there are no fuel leaks at connection
points.
• Perform procedures for “Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning” after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-
114, "Work Procedure".
• If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for “Idle Air Volume Learning” after
finishing repairs. Refer to EC-115, "Work Procedure".
CAUTION:
Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as the engine becomes extremely hot.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-46 2014 Note
IGNITION COIL
IGNITION COIL
A
EM
G
AWBIA1599ZZ
1. Ignition coil 2. Spark plug 3. Rocker cover

Front
H
I
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
J
2. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove ignition coil.
CAUTION:
• Do not drop or shock ignition coil. K
• Do not disassemble ignition coil.
INSTALLATION L
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-47 2014 Note
ROCKER COVER
ROCKER COVER
AWBIA1474ZZ
1. Exhaust camshaft position sensor 2. Clip 3. Rocker cover

4. Clamp 5. Hose 6. PCV valve
7. O-ring 8. Rocker cover gasket 9. Oil filler cap
10. O-ring 11. Intake camshaft position sensor 12. O-ring
A. To intake manifold
REMOVAL
1. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-47, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fuel tube protector. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View".
3. Remove PCV hose from rocker cover.
4. Remove PCV valve (if necessary).
5. Remove rocker cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-48 2014 Note
ROCKER COVER
• Loosen bolts in reverse order as shown.
A
: Engine front
EM
JPBIA4135ZZ
D
6. Remove rocker cover gasket from rocker cover.
7. Remove all traces of liquid gasket from cylinder head and front cover using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
E
Do not scratch or damage the mating surface when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: F
1. Install the rocker cover:
a. Press gasket onto the bosses for the rocker cover bolt holes as G
shown to prevent the gasket from dropping off.
: Engine front
H
JPBIA4136ZZ J
b. Apply liquid gasket to the cylinder head (1) and front cover (2) as
shown.
K
(a) : 2.5 - 3.5 mm diameter
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". L
CAUTION:
• The components must be installed within 5 minutes of the
liquid gasket application. M
• Then allow 30 minutes for the liquid gasket to set before
putting oil in the engine. JPBIA4137ZZ
N
c. Install rocker cover to cylinder head.
CAUTION:
Check that the gasket has not slipped out of position. O
• Tighten bolts in numerical order in at least three separate
stages as shown.
: Engine front
P
JPBIA4135ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-49 2014 Note
ROCKER COVER

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-50 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
TIMING CHAIN
A
EM
L
AWBIA1609ZZ
1. Timing chain slack guide 2. Timing chain tensioner 3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH) M
4. Camshaft sprocket (INT) 5. Plug 6. Front oil seal
7. Crankshaft pulley 8. Crankshaft pulley bolt 9. Front cover
10. Crankshaft sprocket 11. Crankshaft sprocket key 12. Oil pump sprocket N
13. Oil pump drive chain 14. Oil pump drive chain tensioner 15. Timing chain
16. Timing chain tension guide A. Refer to INSTALLATION
O
CAUTION:
The rotation direction indicated in the text is as viewed from the engine front. P
NOTE:
• When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from
spilling.
• When removing the camshafts, the oil pump drive chain does not need to be removed.
REMOVAL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-51 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
1. Remove front wheel and tire (RH). Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
• Do not spill engine oil on drive belt.
4. Drain coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
5. Remove the drive belt. Refer to EM-16, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove the water pump pulley. Refer to CO-19, "Removal and Installation".
8. Support the bottom surface of engine (1) using a transmission jack (2), and then remove engine mounting
insulator (RH). Refer to EM-85, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Position a suitable jack under the engine and transaxle assembly as shown.
• Do not damage the front exhaust tube or transaxle oil pan
with the jack.
9. Set No. 1 cylinder at TDC of its compression stroke:
ALBIA0894GB
PBIC3673E
a. Rotate crankshaft pulley (2) clockwise and align TDC mark
(without paint mark) (A) to timing indicator (1) on front cover.
(B) : White paint mark (Not use for service)
PBIC3673E
b. Check the matching marks on each camshaft sprocket are posi-

tioned as shown.
(1) : Timing chain

(2) : Camshaft sprocket (EXH)
(3) : Camshaft sprocket (INT)
(A) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(B) : Pink link
(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
• If not, rotate crankshaft pulley one more turn to align matching JPBIA4138ZZ
marks to the positions.
10. Remove crankshaft pulley:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-52 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
a. Secure crankshaft pulley (1) using suitable tool (A) and loosen
crankshaft pulley bolt. A
CAUTION:
Do not remove the crankshaft pulley bolt as it will be used
as a supporting point for the pulley puller.
EM
PBIC3710E
D
b. Attach Tool (A) in the M 6 thread hole on crankshaft pulley, and
remove crankshaft pulley.
E
(B) : M6 bolt
Tool number : KV11123000 ( — ) F
G
PBIC3711E
11. Remove front cover: H

a. Loosen bolts in the reverse order as shown.
JPBIA4139ZZ
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-53 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
b. Cut liquid gasket by prying the position ( ) as shown, and then
remove the front cover.
JPBIA4140ZZ
12. Remove front oil seal from front cover using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the front cover.
13. Remove chain tensioner (1):
a. Fully push down the chain tensioner lever (A), and then push the
plunger (C) into the inside of tensioner.
• The tab (B) is released by fully pushing the lever down. Then
the plunger can be moved.
b. Pull up the lever to align its hole position with the body hole posi-
tion.
• When the lever hole is aligned with the body hole position, the
plunger is secured.
• When the protrusion parts of the plunger ratchet and the tab
face each other, both hole positions are not aligned. At that PBIC3713E
time, correctly engage them and align these hole positions by

slightly moving the plunger.
c. Insert the stopper pin (D) into the body hole through the lever hole, and then secure the lever at the upper
position.
NOTE:
A hexagonal wrench of 2.5 mm (0.098 in) is used as a stopper pin (D).
d. Remove chain tensioner.
14. Remove the timing chain tension guide (2) and the timing chain
slack guide (1).
JPBIA4141ZZ
15. Remove the timing chain (2).

• Pull the timing chain slack toward the camshaft sprocket
(EXH) (1), and then remove the timing chain and start the
removal from camshaft sprocket (EXH) side.
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft or camshaft while timing chain is
removed. It causes interference between valve and piston.
JPBIA4142ZZ
16. Remove the crankshaft sprocket and the oil pump drive:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-54 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
a. Remove oil pump drive chain tensioner (1).
• Pull out from the shaft (B) and spring attaching holes (A). A
EM
JPBIA4143ZZ
D
b. Hold the top of the oil pump shaft using the socket (size: E8),
and then loosen the oil pump sprocket nut and remove it.
c. Remove the crankshaft sprocket (1), the oil pump drive chain E
(2), and the oil pump sprocket (3) at the same time.
G
JPBIA4230ZZ
INSTALLATION H
CAUTION:
NOTE:
I
For installation follow the relationship between the matching mark on
each timing chain and that of the corresponding sprocket, with the
components installed.
J
(2) : Timing chain
(3) : Timing chain slack guide K
(4) :Timing chain tensioner
(5) : Crankshaft sprocket
(6) : Oil pump drive chain L
(7) : Oil pump sprocket
(8) : Timing chain tension guide
(9) : Camshaft sprocket (INT) M
(B) : Pink link
(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove) N
(D) : Orange link
(E) : Matching mark (stamp)
(F) : Crankshaft key (point straight up) O
JPBIA4223ZZ
P
1. Install the crankshaft sprocket and the oil pump drive related parts:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-55 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
a. Install the crankshaft sprocket (1), the oil pump drive chain (2),
and the oil pump sprocket (3) at the same time.
: Engine front
• Install the crankshaft sprocket so that its invalid gear area (A)
is toward the back of the engine.
• Install the oil pump sprocket so that its protrusion faces the
front of engine.
NOTE:
There is no matching mark in the oil pump drive related parts.
JPBIA5248ZZ
b. Hold the top of the oil pump shaft using the socket (size: E8),
and then tighten the oil pump sprocket nut.
(1) : Crankshaft sprocket

(2) : Oil pump drive chain
(3) : Oil pump sprocket
JPBIA4230ZZ
c. Install oil pump drive chain tensioner (1).

• Insert the body into the shaft (B) while inserting the spring into
the attaching hole (A) of cylinder block front surface.
• Check that the tension is applied to the oil pump drive chain
after installing.
JPBIA4143ZZ
2. Install timing chain:

(B) : Pink link
(C) : Matching mark (Peripheral groove)
(D) : Orange link
(E) : Matching mark (stamp)
(F) : Crankshaft key (point straight up)
• Install by aligning matching marks on each sprocket and tim-

ing chain.
• If these matching marks are not aligned, rotate the camshaft
slightly to correct the position.
CAUTION:
• After the matching marks are aligned, keep them aligned
by holding them.
• To avoid skipped teeth, do not rotate crankshaft and cam-
shaft until front cover is installed.
JPBIA4144ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-56 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
3. Install timing chain tension guide (2) and timing chain slack
guide (1). A
EM
JPBIA4141ZZ
D
4. Install chain tensioner (1).
• Secure the plunger at the most compressed position using a
stopper pin (A), and then install it.
E
• Pull out the stopper pin after installing the chain tensioner.
G
PBIC3722E
5. Check matching mark position of timing chain and each sprocket again.
H
6. Install the front oil seal to the front cover. Refer to EM-74, "FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation".
7. Install front cover with the following procedure:
a. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to the engine block joint locations (A) as shown. I
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants"
CAUTION:
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed. J
• Do not confirm torque after the 5 minutes have elapsed.
adding oil to the engine. K
(1) : Cylinder head

(2) : Cylinder block L
(3) : Oil pan (upper)
(A) : Liquid gasket application area [3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.12 - 0.16 in) diam-
eter]
M
JPBIA4145ZZ
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket to front cover as shown using suitable tool.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-57 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products
and Sealants".
CAUTION:
adding oil to the engine.
(1) : Front cover edge

(A) : Liquid gasket application area
(b) : 4.0 - 5.6 mm
: Liquid gasket application area [3.0 - 4.0 mm (0.12 - 0.16 in) diame-
(c)
ter]
JPBIA4146ZZ
c. Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.

NOTE:
Refer to the following for the installation position of bolts.
M6 bolt : No. 1 6.6 N·m (0.67 kg-m,

58 in-lb)
M10 bolts : No. 11, 12, 13 55.0 N·m (5.6 kg-m,
41 ft-lb)
M10 bolts : No. 14, 15 55.0 N·m (5.6 kg-m,
41 ft-lb)
M8 bolts : Except above 25.0 N·m (2.6 kg-m,
18 ft-lb)
d. After all bolts are tightened, retighten them to specified torque in
numerical order as shown.
CAUTION:
Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking to
surface.
JPBIA4139ZZ
8. Insert crankshaft pulley by aligning with crankshaft key.

• When inserting crankshaft pulley with a plastic hammer, tap on its center portion (not circumference).

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-58 2014 Note
TIMING CHAIN
CAUTION:
Do not damage front oil seal lip section. A
9. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt:
• Secure crankshaft pulley with a suitable tool and tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
a. Apply new engine oil to thread and seat surfaces of crankshaft pulley bolt. EM
b. Tighten crankshaft pulley bolt.
Crankshaft pulley bolt : 35.0 N·m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb) C

c. Put a paint mark (B) on crankshaft pulley, mating with any one of
six easy to recognize angle marks (A) on crankshaft bolt flange
(1). D
d. Turn another 60 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
• Check the tightening angle with movement of one angle mark.
E
PBIC3726E
10. Check that crankshaft turns smoothly by rotating by hand clockwise using suitable tool. G
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION H
• Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to fuel piping, check for fuel leaks I
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. J
NOTE:
after hydraulic pressure rises. K
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including
• Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system. L
M
N

transaxle fluid M/T Models Level/Leaks Leaks Level/Leaks O
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-59 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT
AWBIA1606ZZ
1. Camshaft bracket (No. 2 to 5) 2. Camshaft bracket (No. 1) 3. Camshaft sprocket (EXH)

4. Exhaust valve timing control sole- 5. O-ring 6. Camshaft sprocket (INT)
noid valve
7. Plug (EXH) 8. Washer (EXH) 9. Oil filter (for exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve)
10. Cylinder head 11. Oil filter (for intake valve timing 12. Washer (INT)
control solenoid valve)
13. Plug (INT) 14. O-ring 15. Intake valve timing control solenoid
valve
16. Bracket 17. Valve lifter (INT) 18. Valve lifter (EXH)
19. Camshaft (INT) 20. Camshaft (EXH) A. Refer to INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The rotation direction indicated in the procedure is as viewed from the engine front.
REMOVAL
1. Remove timing chain. Refer to EM-51, "Removal and Installation"

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-60 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
2. Remove camshaft sprocket (EXH) (1).
CAUTION: A
• Hold the camshaft hexagonal part (A), and then secure the
camshaft.
• Do not rotate crankshaft and camshaft separately, so as
EM
not to contact valve with piston.
NOTE:
The timing chain with the front cover installed is not disengaged
from the crankshaft sprocket and it is not dropped into the front C
cover. Therefore, the timing chain tension holding device is not
necessary.
JPBIA4160ZZ
3. Turn the camshaft sprocket (INT) to the most advanced position. D
CAUTION:
Installation and removal of the camshaft sprocket (INT) must be done in the most advanced posi-
tion. Make sure to follow the procedure exactly.
• The sprocket (C) and vane (camshaft coupling) (B) are E
designed to spin and move within the range of a certain
angle.
• With the engine stopped and the vane in the most F
retarded angle, it will not spin because it is locked to the
sprocket side by the internal lock pin (A).
• If the camshaft sprocket bolts are turned in the situation
described above, the lock pin will become damaged and G
cause malfunctions because of the increased horizontal
load (cutting force) on the lock pin.
H
PBIC3679E
• Put the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the most advanced position:

I
a. Remove camshaft bracket (No. 1) (1).
NOTE:
Timing chain is present only for illustration purposes. Timing
chain is to be removed during removal procedure. J
: Engine front
K
• Loosen the bolts in several steps, and then remove them.
PBIC3680E
M
b. Apply the following air pressure to the No. 1 journal oil hole (A)
of camshaft (INT) (1) shown using an air gun.
N
Air pressure : 300 kPa (3.1 kg/cm2, 44 psi) or more
: Engine front O
• Apply the air pressure into the oil hole on the second groove
from the front of camshaft thrust (B).
P
• Proceed all the way through step “e” with the air pressure on.
• Attach the rubber nozzle narrowed to the top of the air gun to JPBIA4150ZZ
prevent air leaks from the oil hole (A). Securely apply the air
pressure to the oil hole.
WARNING:
Eye protection should be worn as needed.
CAUTION:
• There are other oil holes in the side grooves. Do not use the incorrect oil holes.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-61 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
• Be sure not to damage the oil path with the tip of the air gun.
• Wipe all the oil off the air gun to prevent oil from being blown all over along with the air, and the
area around the air gun should be wiped with a rag when applying air pressure.
NOTE:
The air pressure is used to move the lock pin into the disengage position.
c. Hold the camshaft sprocket (INT) with hands, and then apply the power counterclockwise/clockwise alter-
nately.
(A) : Air gun

(B) : Rubber nozzle
• Finally rotate the sprocket of the camshaft sprocket (INT)

counterclockwise [the direction shown by the arrow ( )].
• Perform the work while continuously applying the air pressure
to the oil hole.
JPBIA4151ZZ
• If the lock pin is not released, tap the camshaft sprocket (INT)
lightly with a plastic hammer (A) using suitable tool.
• If the camshaft sprocket (INT) is not rotated counterclockwise
even if the above procedures are performed, check the air
pressure and the oil hole position.
JPBIA4152ZZ
d. While doing the above, once you hear a click (the sound of the
internal lock pin disengaging) from inside the camshaft sprocket
(INT), start turning the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the counter-
clockwise direction in the most advanced angle position.
(A/B) : Lock pin recess

(C) : Lock pin engaged
(D) : Most advanced angle
• Keep the air pressure on.

• If there is no click, as soon as the vane side (camshaft side)
PBIC3684E
starts moving independently of the sprocket, the lock pin has
become disengaged.
• Check that it is in the most advanced angle position by seeing if the stopper pin groove (A) and the stop-
per pin hole (B) are matched up as shown.
e. Stop applying air pressure and release the camshaft (INT).
f. Insert the stopper pin (A) into the stopper pin holes in the cam-
shaft sprocket (INT) and lock in the most advanced angle posi-
tion.
CAUTION:
No load is exerted on the stopper pin (spring reaction, etc.).
Since it comes out easily, secure it with tape (B) to prevent
it from falling out.
NOTE:
The stopper pin shows one example of a hexagonal wrench for
2.5 mm (0.098 in) [length of inserted section: approximately15
mm (0.59 in)].
JPBIA4153ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-62 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
4. Remove the camshaft sprocket (INT):
a. Keeping the camshaft hexagonal part (A) in place using suitable A
tool, loosen the bolts for the camshaft sprocket (INT) (2).
(1) Camshaft (INT) EM
D
JPBIA4154ZZ
CAUTION:
E
• Do not drop stopper pin.
• Tape (C) the stopper pin (B) so it does not come out.
• Do not subject it to impact by dropping.
• Do not disassemble. [Do not loosen the three bolts (A)]. F
NOTE:
While removing the camshaft sprocket (INT), if you have taken
out the stopper pin and the lock pin has been rejoined in the
G
most retarded angle, do the following to restore it.
i. Install the camshaft (INT) and tighten the bolts enough to pre-
vent air from leaking out.
CAUTION: H
The internal lock pin will get damaged, so keep the torque PBIC3691E
on the bolts to the minimum required to prevent air from
escaping. I
ii. Apply the air pressure, disengage the lock pin, and turn the vane to the most advanced angle position.
iii. Insert the stopper pin.
iv. Remove camshaft sprocket (INT) from the camshaft. J
5. Remove camshaft brackets (No. 2 to 5).

• Loosen bolts in several steps in the reverse order as shown. K
(A) : EXH side

(B) : INT side L
: Engine front
NOTE:
M
The camshaft bracket (No. 1) has been already removed.
PBIC3686E
N
6. Remove camshaft (EXH).

7. Remove camshaft (INT). O
8. Remove valve lifter (if necessary).
• Identify installation positions, and store lifters without mixing them up.
9. Remove the alternator and bracket. Refer to CHG-23, "Exploded View" P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-63 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
10. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve (1) and
the plug (2) securing the oil filter for intake valve timing control
solenoid valve.
11. Remove the exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve.
12. Remove the plug on the exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve.
13. Remove the oil filter for exhaust valve timing control solenoid
valve.
14. For component inspection after removal, refer to EM-68,
"Inspection". PBIC3692E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings or washers.
1. Install oil filter (1) for intake and exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valves.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse washers.
NOTE:
The intake side is shown as an example.
• The oil filter (1) and washer (2) are assembled to the plug (3),
and then install them in to the cylinder head. Refer to EM-60,
"Exploded View".
AWBIA1146GB
2. Install intake and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valves.

• Insert it straight into the cylinder head.
• Tighten bolts.
CAUTION:
3. Install valve lifters.

• If they are reused, install them in the original positions.
4. Put a matching mark for positioning the camshaft (INT) and the camshaft sprocket (INT):
NOTE:
This helps prevent the knock pin from engaging with the incorrect pin hole after installing the camshaft
(INT) and the camshaft sprocket (INT).
a. Put the matching marks (A) on a line extending from the knock
pin position of camshaft (INT) (1) front surface.
• Put the marks on the visible position with the camshaft
sprocket installed as shown.
b. Put the matching marks on a line extending from the knock pin
hole (B) position of camshaft sprocket (INT) (2) as shown.
• Put the marks on the visible position with it installed to the
camshaft.
PBIC3696E
5. Put a matching mark for positioning the camshaft (EXH) and the camshaft sprocket (EXH):
NOTE:
This helps prevent the knock pin from engaging with the incorrect pin hole after installing the camshaft
(INT) and the camshaft sprocket (EXH).

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-64 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
a. Put the matching marks (A) on a line extending from the knock
pin position of camshaft (EXH) (1) front surface. A
• Put the marks on the visible position with the camshaft
sprocket installed as shown.
b. Put the matching marks on a line extending from the knock pin EM
hole (B) position of camshaft sprocket (EXH) (2) as shown.
• Put the marks on the visible position with it installed to the
camshaft.
C
JPBIA4155ZZ
D
6. Install camshaft.

E
(A) : Identification mark
F
Indentification Color M1 (A)
Camshaft (EXH) Yellow - Green x 2
Camshaft (INT) White G
• Note that the camshafts (INT and EXH) have different shapes JPBIA4156ZZ
at the rear.
H
• Install camshafts to the cylinder head so that knock pins (A) on I

front end are positioned as shown.

J
: Upper side
NOTE: K
Though camshaft does not stop at the portion as shown for the
placement of cam nose, it is generally accepted camshaft is
placed for the same direction as shown. JPBIA4157ZZ L
7. Install camshaft brackets (2 to 5) and (A to D).

M
(A) : EXH side (2 to 5)
(B) : INT side (A to D)
: Engine front
N
PBIC3703E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-65 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
8. Tighten bolts of camshaft brackets in the following steps, in
numerical order as shown.
(A) : EXH side

(B) : INT side
: Engine front
a. Tighten No. 9 to 11 in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts : 1.96 N·m (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb)

PBIC3686E
b. Tighten No. 1 to 8 in numerical order.

c. Tighten all bolts in numerical order.

d. Tighten all bolts in numerical order.
Camshaft bracket bolts : 10.4 N·m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)

9. Install the camshaft sprocket (INT/EXH) to the camshaft (INT/EXH):
a. Refer to the matching mark (A) added in step 4. Securely align
the knock pin and the pin hole, and then install them.
NOTE:
The intake side is shown as an example.
PBIC3700E
10. Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt (INT/EXH).
CAUTION:
Hold the camshaft hexagonal part (A), using a suitable tool
to secure the camshaft.
JPBIA4158ZZ
11. Align the matching mark (peripheral groove) (A/C) and the pink
link (B) on the timing chain.
(1) : Timing chain

• If the positions of knock pin and pin groove are not aligned,
move the camshaft (EXH) slightly to correct these positions.
JPBIA4159ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-66 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
12. Pull out the stopper pin (A), and then apply the tension to the
timing chain by rotating the crankshaft pulley clockwise slightly. A
(1) : Plunger
(2) : Chain tensioner EM
(B) : Lever
(C) : Lever hole
(D) : Front cover has been removed for clarity. C
PBIC3772E
D
13. Pull out the stopper pin of chain tensioner.
14. Install front cover.
15. Return the camshaft sprocket (INT) in the most retarded position: E
a. Remove the stopper pin (A) from the camshaft sprocket (INT).
(B) : Tape F
H
PBIC3685E
b. Turn the crankshaft pulley (1) slowly clockwise (A) and return I
the camshaft sprocket (INT) to the most retarded angle position.
PBIC3704E L
• When first turning the crankshaft, the camshaft sprocket (INT)

will turn. Once it is turned more, and the vane (camshaft) also M
turns, then it has reached the most retarded angle position.
(B) : Stopper pin hole

N
(C) : Most advanced angle
(D) : Lock pin engaged
• The most retarded angle position can be checked by seeing if O

the stopper pin groove (A) is shifted clockwise.
• After spinning the crankshaft slightly in the counterclockwise
PBIC3705E
direction, you can check the lock pin has joined by seeing if
P
the vane (camshaft) and the sprocket move together.
16. Install the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) to the rear end of cylinder head.
• Tighten bolts with it completely inserted.
17. Check and adjust valve clearance. Refer to EM-10, "Inspection and Adjustment".
GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-67 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
NOTE:
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including



Oil Filter
• Check that there is no foreign material on the oil filter (1) and check
it for clogging.
• Check the oil filter for damage.
• If there is some damage, replace the oil filter, the plug, and the
washer as a set.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the washer.
PBIC3693E
Camshaft Runout
1. Put V-block on a precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 5 jour-
nals of camshaft.
CAUTION:
Do not support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft
sprocket) because it has a different diameter from the other
four locations.
2. Set a suitable tool vertically to No. 3 journal.
3. Turn camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft
runout using suitable tool. (Total indicator reading)
PBIC2499E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-68 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
Standard and Limit A

: Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
4. If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft. EM
Camshaft Cam Height
1. Measure the camshaft cam height using suitable tool (A).
C
Standard and Limit
Intake
: Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft". D
Exhaust
Cam wear limit:
: Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft". E
2. If wear exceeds the limit, replace camshaft.
PBIC3178J
Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance F

CAMSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal using suitable tool
(A). G
Standard: : Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".

H
PBIC3179J
J
CAMSHAFT BRACKET INNER DIAMETER
• Tighten camshaft bracket bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "INSTALLATION" for the tightening proce-
dure. K
• Measure inner diameter (b) of camshaft bracket using suitable tool
(A).
L
Standard : Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
N
JPBIA4192ZZ
O
CAMSHAFT JOURNAL OIL CLEARANCE
• (Oil clearance) = (Camshaft bracket inner diameter) – (Camshaft journal diameter)
P
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
• If it exceeds the limit, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE:
Camshaft brackets cannot be replaced as single parts, because they are machined together with cylinder
head. Replace whole cylinder head assembly.
Camshaft End Play

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-69 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
1. Install camshaft in cylinder head. Refer to EM-60, "Removal and Installation" for tightening procedure.
2. Install a suitable tool (A) in thrust direction on front end of cam-
shaft. Measure the camshaft end play using suitable tool when
camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction of axis).
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-116, "Camshaft".
PBIC3694E
• Measure the following parts if out of the standard.

- Dimension “A” for cylinder head No. 1 journal bearing
Standard : 4.000 - 4.030 mm (0.1574 - 0.1586 in)

- Dimension “B” for camshaft thrust
Standard : 3.877 - 3.925 mm (0.1526 - 0.1545 in)

• Refer to the standards above, and then replace camshaft and/
or cylinder head.
KBIA3345J
Camshaft Sprocket Runout

1. Put V-block on precise flat table, and support No. 2 and 5 journals of camshaft.
CAUTION:
Do not support No. 1 journal (on the side of camshaft sprocket) because it has a different diameter
from the other four locations.
2. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout using suitable tool (A).
(Total indicator reading)
Limit : 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

• If it exceeds the limit, replace camshaft sprocket.
JPBIA4193ZZ
Valve Lifter
Check if surface of valve lifter has any wear or cracks.
• If anything above is found, replace valve lifter. Refer to EM-116,
"Camshaft".
KBIA0182E
Valve Lifter Clearance

VALVE LIFTER OUTER DIAMETER

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-70 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
• Measure the outer diameter of valve lifter using suitable tool (A).
A
EM
PBIC3185J
D
VALVE LIFTER HOLE DIAMETER
Measure the diameter of valve lifter hole of cylinder head using suit-
able tool (A). E

F
PBIC3184J
H
VALVE LIFTER CLEARANCE
• (Valve lifter clearance) = (Valve lifter hole diameter) – (Valve lifter outer diameter)
I
• If out of the standard, referring to the each standard of valve lifter outer diameter and valve lifter hole diame-
ter, replace either or both valve lifter and cylinder head. J
Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket Oil Groove
CAUTION: K
• Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 or P0014 is detected in self-diagnostic results of CON-
SULT and it is directed according to inspection procedure of EC section. Refer to EC-143, "Diagnosis
Procedure" (P0011) or EC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure" (P0014). L
• Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from the splashing engine oil.
NOTE:
This section provides the inspection method of oil passage of cam sprocket on the intake side. For oil passage
M
on the exhaust side, the inspection procedure must be changed as instructed below:
· Step 3 : Remove exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
: Crank engine, and then check that engine oil comes out from exhaust valve timing control solenoid N
· Step 4
valve hole (A). End crank after checking.
Perform the following inspection if engine oil does not come out from exhaust valve timing control
solenoid valve oil hole of the cylinder head. O
·Step 5 • Remove oil filter, and then clean it. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to
EM-60, "Exploded View".
: Remove components between exhaust valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket P
·Step 6
(EXH), and then check each oil groove for clogging.
1. Check engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started while
checking.
a. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
b. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-71 2014 Note
CAMSHAFT
c. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors.
4. Crank engine, and then check that engine oil comes out from
intake valve timing control solenoid valve hole (A). End crank
after checking.
(1) : Plug
:Engine front
WARNING:
Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pul-
ley, and crankshaft pulley, etc.).
CAUTION: JPBIA4194ZZ
• Prevent splashing by using a shop cloth to prevent injury
from splashing engine oil and so as to prevent engine oil contamination.
• Use a shop cloth to prevent engine oil from being splashed to engine and vehicle. Especially be
careful not to spill engine oil to rubber parts of drive belts, engine mounting insulator, etc. Wipe
engine oil off immediately if it is splashed.
5. Perform the following inspection if engine oil does not come out from intake valve timing control solenoid
valve oil hole of the cylinder head.
• Remove oil filter, and then clean it. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation".
• Clean oil groove between oil strainer and intake valve timing control solenoid valve. Refer to EM-60,
"Exploded View".
6. Remove components between intake valve timing control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT),
and then check each oil groove for clogging.
• Clean oil groove if necessary. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
7. After inspection, installation of components is in the reverse order of removal

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-72 2014 Note
OIL SEAL
OIL SEAL
A
VALVE OIL SEAL
VALVE OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009444863
EM
REMOVAL
1. Remove camshafts. Refer to EM-60, "Removal and Installation".
C
2. Remove valve lifters. Refer to EM-60, "Removal and Installation".
3. Rotate crankshaft, and set piston with valve oil seal to be removed to TDC. This will prevent the valve
from dropping into cylinder.
D
CAUTION:
When rotating crankshaft, be careful to avoid scarring front cover with timing chain.
4. Remove valve collet, valve spring retainer, and valve spring
using Tools. E
Tool number (A) : KV1016200 (J-26336-A)

Tool number (B) : KV10109220 ( — ) F
Tool number (C) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
JPBIA1365ZZ
H
CAUTION:
• Do not damage valve lifter holes.
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to I
press it.
(1) : Valve spring retainer

J
(A) : Attachment
Tool number : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) K
AWBIA1422ZZ L
5. Remove valve spring retainer, valve spring and valve spring seat. Refer to EM-78, "Disassembly and
Assembly".
M
6. Remove valve oil seal with Tool (A).
Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959)

N
P
PBIC3728E
INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil to valve oil seal joint surface and seal lip.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-73 2014 Note
OIL SEAL
2. Press in valve oil seal to the height “H” shown with Tool (A).
Height “H” : 13.2 - 13.8 mm (0.520 - 0.543 in)
Tool number : KV10115600 (J-38958)
PBIC3211J

FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009444864
REMOVAL
3. Remove crankshaft pulley. Refer to EM-51, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage front cover and crankshaft.

INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil to new front oil seal joint surface and seal lip.
2. Install front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
(A) : Dust seal lip

(B) : Oil seal lip
: Engine outside
: Engine inside
PBIC3485J
• Press-fit front oil seal using a suitable drift.

CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage front cover and crankshaft.
• Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.

REAR OIL SEAL
REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009444865
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine and transaxle assembly. Refer to EM-86, "Removal and Installation" (M/T models) and
EM-86, "Removal and Installation" (CVT models).
2. Remove clutch cover and clutch disk (M/T models). Refer to CL-18, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (CVT models). Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assem-
bly".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-74 2014 Note
OIL SEAL
4. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: A
Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply the liquid gasket lightly to entire outside area of new rear oil seal. EM
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
2. Install rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
C
(A) : Dust seal lip
(B) : Oil seal lip
: Engine outside D
: Engine inside
PBIC3485J
F
• Press-fit rear oil seal with a suitable drift (A) outer diameter
113 mm (4.45 in) and inner diameter 90 mm (3.54 in).
CAUTION: G
• Be careful not to damage crankshaft and cylinder block.
• Press-fit oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilt-
ing. H
• Do not touch grease applied onto oil seal lip.
PBIC3660E
J
• Press in rear oil seal (1) to the position as shown.
(A) : Rear end surface of cylinder block

(b) : 0 - 0.5 mm (0 - 0.020 in)
K
M
PBIC3149J

N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-75 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
Cylinder Head Bolts
JPBIA4097ZZ
1. Cylinder head assembly 2. Cylinder head bolt 3. Washer

4. Cylinder head gasket A. INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
NOTE:
ing.
2. Remove the following components and related parts.
• Air duct. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
• Fuel tube and fuel injector. Refer to EM-40, "Removal and Installation".
• Water outlet. Refer to CO-25, "Removal and Installation".
• Exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
• Front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
• Camshaft. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
3. Remove cylinder head loosening bolts in reverse order as
shown.
(A) : EXH side

(B) : INT side
: Engine front
PBIC3732E
4. Remove cylinder head gasket.

INSTALLATION
1. Install new cylinder head gasket.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-76 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
2. Install cylinder head, and tighten cylinder head bolts in order as shown using Tool (A).
• Clean threads and seating surfaces of bolts. A
• Apply new engine oil to threads and seating surface of bolts.
CAUTION:
• If cylinder head bolts are reused, check their outer diameters before installation. Refer to EM-79,
EM
"Inspection".
• Check and confirm the tightening angle by using Tool. Do
not judge by visual inspection without the tool.
C
Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
E
AWBIA1426ZZ
F
Step 1 : 40.0 N·m (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)
Step 2 : 100° clockwise in order
Step 3 : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb) G
Step 4 : 40.0 N·m (4.1 kg-m, 30 ft-lb)
Step 5 : 100° clockwise in order H
Step 6 : 100° clockwise in order
: Engine front AWBIA1425ZZ

I

Exploded View INFOID:0000000009670527 J
Valve Components
K
JPBIA4098GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-77 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
1. Spark plug 2. Valve collet 3. Valve spring retainer

4. Valve spring 5. Valve spring seat 6. Valve oil seal
7. Valve guide (INT) 8. Valve guide (EXH) 9. Valve seat (EXH)
10. Valve (EXH) 11. Valve (INT) 12. Valve seat (INT)
A. ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
2. Remove valve lifter.
• Identify installation positions, and store lifters without mixing them up.
using Tools.

Tool number (B) : KV10109220 ( — )
Tool number (C) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
JPBIA1365ZZ
CAUTION:
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to
press it.

(A) : Attachment
Tool number : KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
AWBIA1422ZZ
4. Remove valve spring retainer and valve spring.

5. Push valve stem to combustion chamber side, and remove valve.
• Identify installation positions, and store without mixing them up.
6. Remove valve oil seal using Tool (A).
Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959)
PBIC3728E
7. Remove valve spring seat.

8. When valve seat must be replaced, refer to EM-79, "Inspection" for removal.
9. When valve guide must be replaced, refer to EM-79, "Inspection" for removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-78 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
ASSEMBLY
1. Install valve guide if removed. Refer to EM-79, "Inspection". A
2. Install valve seat if removed. Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".
3. Install valve oil seal.
• Install with Tool (A) to match dimension as shown. EM
Height “H” : 13.2 - 13.8 mm (0.520 - 0.543 in)

C
Tool number : KV10115600 (J-38958)
PBIC3211J
E
4. Install valve spring seat.
5. Install valve.
• Install larger diameter to intake side. F
6. Install valve spring.
NOTE:
It can be installed in either direction. G
7. Install valve spring retainer.
using Tools. H

Tool number (B) : KV10109220 ( — ) I
Tool number (C) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20)
JPBIA1365ZZ
K
CAUTION:
• Install Tool (A) in the center of valve spring retainer to L
press it.

(A) : Attachment M
Tool number : KV10115900 (J-26336-20)

N
AWBIA1422ZZ
O
9. Install valve lifter.
10. Install spark plug with a suitable tool.
P

Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-79 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
• Cylinder head bolts are tightened by plastic zone tightening
method. Whenever the size difference between “d1” and “d2”
exceeds the limit, replace them with a new one.
Limit (“d1”–“d2”): 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)

• If reduction of outer diameter appears in a position other than “d2”,
use it as “d2” point.
PBIC3717E
Cylinder Head Distortion

NOTE:
When performing this inspection, cylinder block distortion should be also checking. Refer to EM-101, "Inspec-
tion".
1. Wipe off engine oil and remove water scale (like deposit), gasket, sealant, carbon, etc. using scraper.
CAUTION:
Use utmost care not to allow gasket debris to enter passages for engine oil or engine coolant.
2. At each of several locations on bottom surface of cylinder head,
measure the distortion in six directions using suitable tools (A/
B).
Limit : Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder head.
PBIC3207J

VALVE DIMENSIONS
• Check the dimensions of each valve. For the dimensions, refer to EM-79, "Inspection".
• If dimensions are out of the standard, replace valve and check valve seat contact. Refer to “VALVE SEAT
CONTACT”.
VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE
Valve Stem Diameter

• Measure the diameter of valve stem using suitable tool (A).
Standard : Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".
Valve Guide Inner Diameter

• Measure the inner diameter of valve guide using suitable tool (A).
Standard : Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".
Valve Guide Clearance

• (Valve guide clearance) = (Valve guide inner diameter) – (Valve
stem diameter) PBIC3213J
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".

• If the calculated value exceeds the limit, replace valve and/or valve guide. Refer to EM-78, "Disassembly
and Assembly".
VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
When valve guide is removed, replace with oversized [0.2 mm (0.008 in)] valve guide.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-80 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
1. To remove valve guide, heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230
to 266°F) by soaking in heated oil. A
EM
SEM008A
D
2. Drive out valve guide with a press [under a 20 kN (2 ton, 2.2 US
ton, 2.0 lmp ton) force] or suitable tool.
WARNING: E
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.
F
G
SEM931C
3. Ream cylinder head valve guide hole with a suitable tool.

H
Valve guide hole diameter (for service parts):
Intake and exhaust
I
: 9.175 - 9.201 mm (0.3612 - 0.3622 in)
SEM932C
K
4. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in
heated oil.
L
N
SEM008A
5. Using a suitable tool, press valve guide (1) from camshaft side O
of cylinder head (2) to dimensions as shown.
Projection “H”: : 11.4 - 11.8 mm (0.448 - 0.464 in)

P
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective
equipment to avoid getting burned.
PBIC3217J

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-81 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
6. Apply reamer finish to valve guide with a suitable tool.
Standard
5.000 - 5.018 mm (0.1968 - 0.1975 in)
SEM932C
VALVE SEAT CONTACT

• After confirming that the dimensions of valve guides and valves are within the specifications, perform this
procedure.
• Apply prussian blue (or white lead) onto contacting surface of valve seat to check the condition of the valve
contact on the surface.
• Check if the contact area band is continuous all around the circum-
ference.
(A) : OK
• If not, grind to adjust valve fitting and check again. If the contacting
surface still has “NG” conditions (B) even after the recheck,
replace valve seat. Refer to EM-79, "Inspection".
JPBIA0187ZZ
VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT

When valve seat is removed, replace with oversized [0.5 mm (0.020 in)] valve seat.
1. Bore out old seat until it collapses. Boring should not continue beyond the bottom face of the seat recess
in cylinder head. Set the machine depth stop to ensure this.
CAUTION:
Prevent scoring cylinder head by excessive boring.
2. Ream cylinder head recess diameter for service valve seat.
Oversize [0.5 mm (0.020 in)]

Intake : 32.500 - 32.527 mm (1.2795 - 1.2805 in)
Exhaust : 26.400 - 26.427 mm (1.0393 - 1.0404 in)
• Be sure to ream in circles concentric to the valve guide center.
This will enable valve seat to fit correctly.
SEM795A
3. Heat cylinder head to 110 to 130°C (230 to 266°F) by soaking in

heated oil.
SEM008A
4. Provide valve seats cooled well with dry ice. Press-fit valve seats into cylinder head.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-82 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD
WARNING:
Cylinder head contains heat; when working, wear protective equipment to avoid getting burned. A
CAUTION:
Avoid directly touching cold valve seats.
5. Using a suitable tool finish valve seat to the specified dimen- EM

sions. For dimensions, refer to EM-118, "Cylinder head".
CAUTION:
When using a valve seat cutter, firmly grip the cutter handle C
with both hands. Then, press the contacting surface evenly
around the valve seat to cut in a single attempt. Improper
pressure or cutting several times may result in wavy valve
D
seat.
E
SEM934C
6. Using compound, grind to adjust valve fitting.

7. Check again for normal contact. Refer to "VALVE SEAT CONTACT". F
VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS
• Set a tri-square (A) along the side of valve spring and rotate spring.
Measure the maximum clearance between the top of spring and G
tri-square.
(B) : Contact H
Limit : Refer to EM-118, "Cylinder head".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace valve spring. I
PBIC3219J
J
VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD
• Check valve spring pressure with valve spring seat installed at the
specified spring height.
K
CAUTION:
Do not remove valve spring seat from valve spring.
Standard : Refer to EM-118, "Cylinder head". L
• If the installation load or load with valve open is out of the stan-
dard, replace valve spring (with valve spring seat).
M
SEM113
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION N

• Use procedure below to check for fuel leaks. O
• Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration. P
NOTE:
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-83 2014 Note
CYLINDER HEAD



GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-84 2014 Note
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
< UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [HR16DE]
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
EM
AWBIA1586ZZ K
1. Engine mounting (RH) stay 2. Engine mount (RH) stay 3. Engine mounting insulator (RH)
4. Rear engine mounting bracket 5. Rear torque rod 6. Engine mounting bracket (LH) L
7. Engine mounting bracket (LH) 8. Engine mounting insulator (LH) 9. Mass damper
A. Front mark B. Transaxle (lower) C. CVT models
CAUTION: M
Check that the stud bolt (*2) is tight at the specified torque before tightening the nut (*1) shown. [Stud
bolt (*2) may be loosened after loosening the nut (*1)]
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-85 2014 Note
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
AWBIA1587ZZ
1. Engine mounting (RH) stay 2. Engine mount (RH) stay 3. Engine mounting insulator (RH)
4. Rear engine mounting bracket 5. Rear torque rod 6. Engine mounting bracket (LH)
7. Mass damper 8. Engine mounting insulator (LH) 9. Engine mounting bracket (LH)
10. Engine mount bracket (LH) A. Front mark B. Transaxle (upper)
C. Transaxle (lower) D. M/T models
CAUTION:
Check that the stud bolt (*2) is tight at the specified torque before tightening the nut (*1) shown. [Stud
bolt (*2) may be loosened after loosening the nut (*1)]
WARNING:
• Position the vehicle on a flat and solid surface.
• Place chocks at front and back of rear wheels.
• Attach proper slingers and bolts described in PARTS CATALOG if engine is not already equipped.
CAUTION:
• Always be careful to work safely.
• Do not start working until exhaust system and coolant are cool enough.
• If items or work required are not covered by the engine section, refer to the applicable sections.
• Always use the support point specified for lifting.
• Use either 2-pole lift type or separate type lift. If board-on type must be used, support the rear axle
jacking point with a transmission jack or similar tool before starting work, in preparation for the
backward shift of center of gravity.
• For supporting points for lifting and jacking point at rear axle, refer to GI-29, "2-Pole Lift".
NOTE:
• When removing components such as hoses, tubes/lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from
spilling.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-86 2014 Note
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
• Remove the engine and the transaxle assembly from the vehicle downward. Separate the engine and the
transaxle. A
REMOVAL
EM
2. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
CAUTION:
• Do not spill engine coolant on drive belts. C
3. Front fender protector (RH/LH). Refer to EXT-24.
4. Drive belt: Refer to EM-16, "Removal and Installation".
D
5. Battery and battery tray. Refer to CHG-23.
6. Air duct (inlet), air duct, and air cleaner case assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
7. Radiator hose (upper and lower). Refer to CO-14. E
8. Exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-5.
9. Disconnect engine room harness connector at the ECM and CVT (if equipped).
CAUTION: F
Protect connectors against foreign materials during the operation by wrapping in a plastic bag.
10. Disconnect heater hoses. Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
11. Disconnect fuel feed hose at engine side. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View". G
12. Disconnect control linkage cable from transaxle. Refer to TM-19, "Exploded View" (M/T models) and CL-
14, "Exploded View" (CVT models).
13. Disconnect clutch tube on transaxle side from clutch damper. Refer to CL-14, "Exploded View". H
14. Remove alternator. Refer to CHG-23, "Exploded View".
15. Disconnect vacuum hose at engine side.
16. Remove EVAP hoses at engine side. I
17. Remove a/c compressor from the engine with the piping connected. Temporarily position the a/c compres-
sor on the vehicle side with a rope without placing a heavy load on the piping.
18. Remove ground cable at transaxle side. J
19. Remove drive shafts (RH/LH). Refer to FAX-19, "Removal and Installation".
20. Remove rear torque rod (1).
K
(2) : Rear engine mounting bracket
: Front
L
JSBIA0643ZZ
N
21. When engine can be hoisted, install engine slinger to cylinder
head front left side (A) and rear right side (B) and support the
engine position with a suitable tool. O
: Engine front
P
Slinger (A) bolts : 65 N·m (6.6 kg-m, 48 ft-lb)
Slinger (B) bolts : 25 N·m (2.6 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
AWBIA1134GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-87 2014 Note
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
22. Use a suitable jack (A) to securely support the bottom of the
engine and the transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Put a piece of wood or an equivalent as the supporting sur-
face and secure in a stable condition.
PBIC3223J
23. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH) (1).
(2) : Engine mounting insulator (LH)

(A) : Engine front side
(B) : Transaxle side
24. Remove engine through bolt-securing nut (C).
JSBIA1223ZZ
25. Carefully lower suitable jack, or raise lift to remove the engine and the transaxle assembly. Observe the
following cautions:
CAUTION:
• Check that no part interferes with the vehicle side.
• Before and during lifting, always check if any harnesses are left connected.
• During removal, always be careful to prevent the vehicle from falling off the lift due to changes in
the center of gravity.
• If necessary, support the vehicle by setting jack or suitable tool at the rear.
26. Remove starter motor. Refer to STR-23, "Exploded View".
27. Lift with a hoist and separate the engine from the transaxle assembly. Refer to TM-23, "Exploded View"
(M/T models) and TM-250, "Exploded View" (CVT models).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not allow engine oil to get on engine mounting insulator. Be careful not to damage engine mount-
ing insulator.
• Check that each mounting insulator is seated properly, and tighten nuts and bolts.
• When installation directions are specified, install parts according to the direction marks on them,
referring to the figure of components. Refer to EM-85, "Exploded View".
Engine Mounting Insulator (RH)
• Tighten bolts in the numerical order as shown.
: Front
JPBIA2809ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-88 2014 Note
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
• Before starting engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If less than required
quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection". A
EM
NOTE:
If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack in the guide C
• Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there are no leaks of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids including D
ified level, if necessary. E
Item Before starting engine Engine running After engine stopped F

CVT Models Leaks Level/Leaks Leaks G
Transmission/
H
*Power steering fluid, brake fluid, etc. I

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-89 2014 Note
ENGINE UNIT
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY > [HR16DE]
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

ENGINE UNIT
Setting INFOID:0000000009444872
NOTE:
The following procedures explain how to disassemble the engine with the engine stand fastened to the bell
housing. Some steps may be different if using a different type of engine stand.
1. Install engine to engine stand:
a. On (M/T models), remove flywheel.
• Secure flywheel (1) using suitable tool (A) and remove bolts.
Tool number : KV11105210 (J-44716)

CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble flywheel.
• Do not place flywheel with signal plate facing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from
becoming magnetized. MBIB1382E
b. On (CVT models), remove driveplate.

• Secure driveplate (1) using suitable tool (A) and remove bolts.
Tool number : KV11105210 (J-44716)

CAUTION:
• Do not disassemble flywheel.
• Do not place flywheel or drive plate with signal plate fac-
ing down.
• When handling signal plate, take care not to damage or
scratch it.
• Handle signal plate in a manner that prevents it from MBIB1382E
becoming magnetized.
c. Lift the engine with a hoist to install it onto a widely used engine stand.
CAUTION:
• Use the engine stand that has a load capacity approximately 150 kg (331 lb) or more large
enough for supporting the engine weight.
• If the load capacity of stand is not adequate, remove the following parts beforehand to reduce the poten-
tial risk of overturning stand.
- Intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
- Exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, "Removal and Installation".
- Rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
The figure shows an example of widely used engine stand (A)
that can support the mating surface of transaxle with flywheel
removed.
CAUTION:
Before removing the hanging chains, check the engine
stand is stable and there is no risk of overturning.
PBIC3227J

CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-90 2014 Note
ENGINE UNIT
• Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer.
• Do not reuse drain plug washer. A
3. Drain engine coolant by removing water drain plug (1) from
inside of the engine.
EM
: Engine front
Water drain plug : Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View". C

tightening torque
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants". D
AWBIA1607ZZ
Disassembly INFOID:0000000009444873
E
1. Remove intake manifold. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
2. Remove exhaust manifold. Refer to EM-31, "Exploded View".
F
3. Remove oil pan (lower). Refer to EM-34, "Exploded View".
4. Remove ignition coil, spark plug, and rocker cover. Refer to EM-48, "Exploded View".
5. Remove fuel injector and fuel tube. Refer to EM-40, "Exploded View". G
6. Remove front cover and timing chain. Refer to EM-51, "Exploded View".
7. Remove camshaft. Refer to EM-60, "Exploded View".
8. Remove cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, "Exploded View". H
Assembly INFOID:0000000009444874
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. I

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-91 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
CYLINDER BLOCK
AWBIA1621ZZ
1. Crankshaft position sensor cover 2. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 3. O-ring

4. Drain plug 5. Cylinder block 6. Oil level gauge
7. Oil level gauge guide 8. O-ring 9. Knock sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-92 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
10. Oil temperature sensor 11. Oil pressure sensor 12. Oil jet
13. Top ring 14. Second ring 15. Oil ringS A
16. Piston 17. Piston pin 18. Connecting rod
19. Connecting rod bearing (upper) 20. Main bearing (upper) 21. Thrust bearing
22. Crankshaft key 23. Connecting rod bolt 24. Connecting rod cap EM
25. Connecting rod bearing (lower) 26. Main bearing (lower) 27. Crankshaft
28. Pilot converter (CVT models) 29. Signal plate 30. Rear oil seal
31. Drive plate (CVT models) 32. Reinforce plate (CVT models) 33. Flywheel (M/T models) C
34. Main bearing cap 35. Main bearing cap bolt A. Refer to ASSEMBLY
B. Chamfered Crankshaft side
D
DISASSEMBLY E
NOTE:
The following procedures explain how to disassemble the engine with the engine stand fastened to the bell
housing. Some steps may be different if using a different type of engine stand. F
1. Remove cylinder head. Refer to EM-76, "Exploded View".
2. Remove knock sensor.
CAUTION: G
Carefully handle knock sensor avoiding shocks.
3. Remove the crankshaft position sensor cover (3), and then
crankshaft position sensor (POS) (2). H
(1) O-ring
(4) Cylinder block
I
: Engine front
CAUTION:
• Avoid impacts such as a dropping. J
• Do not disassemble.
• Keep sensor away from metal particles. JPBIA4202ZZ
• Do not place the sensor in a location where it is exposed K
to magnetism.
• Do not reuse O-ring.
4. Remove oil pan (upper and lower). Refer to EM-34. L
5. Remove piston and connecting rod assembly:
• Before removing piston and connecting rod assembly, check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to
EM-101, "Inspection".
M
a. Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be removed onto the bottom dead center.
b. Remove connecting rod cap.
c. Using a hammer handle or similar tool, push piston and connect- N
ing rod assembly out through the cylinder head side.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surface with connecting rod cap.
• Do not damage the cylinder wall or crankshaft pin. O
KBIA3365J
6. Remove connecting rod bearings.

CAUTION:
Identify original positions for installation, and store the bearings without mixing them up.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-93 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
7. Remove piston rings from piston.
• Before removing piston rings, check the piston ring side clearance. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".
• Use a suitable tool (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
• When removing piston rings, be careful not to damage
the piston.
• Do not damage piston rings by expanding them exces-
sively.
PBIC3233J
8. Remove piston from connecting rod using the following procedure:

a. Remove snap rings using snap ring pliers (A).
AWBIA1429ZZ
b. Heat piston to 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F) with a heat gun (A).
AWBIA1430ZZ
c. Push out piston pin using a punch of outer diameter approxi-

mately 18 mm (0.71 in).
PBIC0262E
9. Remove the main bearing cap.

• Measure crankshaft end play before loosening main bearing cap bolts. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-94 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
a. Loosen and remove bolts in several steps in reverse of the
numerical order as shown. A
: Engine front
NOTE: EM
When removing or installing signal plate, use socket (size T40).
JPBIA4203ZZ
D
b. Remove the main bearing cap from the cylinder block while tapping lightly with a plastic hammer.
10. Remove crankshaft (2).

E
CAUTION:
• Do not damage or deform signal plate (1) mounted on
crankshaft.
• When setting crankshaft on a flat floor surface, use a F
block of wood to avoid interference between signal plate
and the floor surface.
• Do not remove signal plate unless it is necessary to do
G
so.
NOTE:
When removing or installing signal plate, use socket (size T40).
JPBIA4531ZZ
11. Pull rear oil seal out from rear end of crankshaft. H
12. Remove main bearing (upper/lower) and thrust bearings from cylinder block and main bearing caps.
CAUTION:
Identify original installation positions, and store the bearings without mixing them up. I
13. Remove oil jets.
CAUTION:
Insert the dowel pin of oil jet into the cylinder block dowel pin hole to loosen the bolt. J
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings. K
1. Fully air-blow engine coolant and engine oil passages in cylinder block, cylinder bore and crankcase to
remove any foreign material.
WARNING: L
Use goggles to protect your eyes.
2. Install cylinder block plugs.
• Apply liquid gasket to the thread of water drain plug (3). M
Use Genuine Silicone RTV Sealant, or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
CAUTION: N
(2) : O-ring
O
: Engine front
AWBIA1607ZZ
P
• Tighten each plug as specified below.
Part Washer Tightening torque

(1) Yes 54.0 N·m (5.5 kg-m, 40 ft-lb)
(3) No 9.8 N·m (1.0 kg-m, 87 in-lb)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-95 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
3. Install oil jets.
4. Install main bearings and thrust bearings:
a. Remove dust, dirt, and engine oil on the bearing mating surfaces of cylinder block.
b. Install thrust bearings to the both sides of the No. 3 journal hous-
ing (B) on cylinder block.
: Engine front
• Install thrust bearings with the oil groove (A) facing crankshaft
arm (outside).
PBIC3258J
c. Install the main bearings paying attention to the direction.

• Before installing main bearings, apply new engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not apply
engine oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it.
• When installing, align main bearing to the center position of cylinder block and main bearing cap.
• Ensure the oil holes on cylinder block and oil holes (A) on the
main bearings (1) are aligned.
NOTE:
For assembly, the center position can be visually identified.
• To install the main bearing, obtain a proper fit. Do not allow the
main bearing to lie off the cylinder block chamfer.
• To install the main bearing, obtain a proper fit. Do not allow the
main bearing to lie off bearing cap chamfer.
PBIC3746E
5. Install signal plate to crankshaft if removed.

a. Set the signal plate (1) with the flange facing toward the counter-
weight side (engine front side) to the crankshaft rear surface.
(A) : Dowel pin hole
b. After positioning crankshaft and signal plate with positioning

dowel pin, tighten bolt.
NOTE:
Dowel pin of crankshaft and signal plate is provided as a set for
each.
c. Remove dowel pin. JPBIA4231ZZ
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove dowel pin.
6. Install crankshaft to cylinder block.
• While turning crankshaft by hand, check that it turns smoothly.
CAUTION:
Do not install rear oil seal at this time.
7. Install main bearing caps.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-96 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Install the main bearing cap while referring to the front mark
(B) and the journal number stamp (A). A
: Engine front
NOTE: EM
Main bearing cap cannot be replaced as a single part,
because it is machined together with cylinder block.
C
JPBIA4204ZZ
D
8. Tighten main bearing cap bolts in numerical order as shown with
the following steps:
E
: Engine front
a. Apply new engine oil to threads and seat surfaces of the bolts.
b. Tighten main bearing cap bolts in numerical order. F
Step 1 : 32.4 N·m (3.3 kg-m, 24 ft-lb)

Step 2 : 60° clockwise G
JPBIA4203ZZ
c. Turn main bearing cap bolts 60 degrees clockwise (angle tight-

ening) in numerical order as shown. H
CAUTION:
Check and confirm the tightening angle by using the Tool
(A) or protractor. Do not judge by visual inspection without I
the tool.
Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) J
PBIC3750E
K
• After installing the main bearing cap bolts, check that crankshaft can be rotated smoothly by hand.
• Check crankshaft end play. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".
9. Install piston to connecting rod with the following procedure: L
a. Using a heat gun, heat the piston until the piston pin can be pushed in by hand without excess force
[approximately 60 to 70°C (140 to 158°F)]. From the front to the rear, insert piston pin into piston and con-
necting rod. M
b. Set so that the front mark (A) on the piston head and the cylin-
der number (C) are in the position as shown.
N
(B) : Oil hole
(D) : Connecting rod big end grade
NOTE: O
The symbols without notes are for manufacturing.
CAUTION:
Press-fit the piston so as not to damage it. P
NOTE:
The joint between the connecting rod and the piston pin is a PBIC3766E
press fit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-97 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Press-fit the piston pin (2) from piston surface (A) to the depth
of 2.35 mm (0.092 in) (b).
(1) : Connecting rod

: Press-fit direction
• After finishing work, check that the piston (3) moves freely.
JPBIA2058ZZ
10. Using suitable tool (A), install piston rings.

CAUTION:
• Do not damage piston.
• Do not damage piston rings by expanding them exces-
sively.
PBIC3233J
• Position each ring with the gap as shown referring to the pis-
ton front mark (B).
(A) : Oil ring upper or lower rail gap (either of them)

(C) : Second ring and oil ring spacer gap
(D) : Top ring gap
• Install second ring with the stamped mark (E) facing upward.
Stamped mark:
Top ring : 1R PBIC3752E
Second ring : 2R
11. Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and connecting rod cap.
• When installing connecting rod bearings, apply new engine oil to the bearing surface (inside). Do not
apply engine oil to the back surface, but thoroughly clean it.
• Install the bearing in the center position.
NOTE:
There is no stopper tab.
• Check that the oil holes on connecting rod and connecting rod bearing are aligned.
• Install the connecting rod in the dimension (A) as shown.

(2) : Connecting rod bearing (upper)
(3) : Connecting rod bearing (lower)
(4) : Connecting rod cap
(A) : 1.7 - 2.1 mm (0.067 - 0.083 in)
: Engine front
NOTE:
Install the connecting rod bearing in the center position with PBIC4169E
the dimension as shown. For service operation, the center

position can be checked visually.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-98 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
12. Install piston and connecting rod assembly to crankshaft.
• Position crankshaft pin corresponding to connecting rod to be installed onto the bottom dead center. A
• Apply new engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston and crankshaft pin.
• Match the cylinder position with the cylinder number on connecting rod to install.
• Using Tool (A) or suitable tool, install piston with the front mark
EM
on the piston head facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage mating surface with connecting rod cap.
• Do not damage the cylinder wall or crankshaft pin. C
Tool number : EM03470000 (J-8037)

D
PBIC3765E
E
13. Install connecting rod cap.
• Match the stamped cylinder number marks (C) on connecting
rod with those on connecting rod cap to install. F
(A) : Front mark

(B) : Oil hole
G
(D) : Connecting rod big end grade
PBIC3766E
I
14. Inspect outer diameter of connecting rod bolts. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".
15. Tighten connecting rod bolt:

a. Apply new engine oil to the threads and seats of connecting rod bolts. J
b. Install connecting rod bolts in several steps.
K
Step 1 Tighten to : 27.4 N·m (2.8 kg-m, 20 ft-lb)
Step 2 Completely loosen : 0 N·m (0 kg-m, 0 ft-lb)
Step 3 Tighten to : 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb) L
c. Then turn all connecting rod bolts 60 degrees clockwise (angle tightening).
CAUTION:
Check and confirm the tightening angle by using the Tool (A) or protractor. Avoid judgement by M
visual inspection without the Tool.
Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) N
PBIC3753E
• After tightening connecting rod bolt, check that crankshaft rotates smoothly.
• Check the connecting rod side clearance. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".
16. Install oil pan (upper). Refer to EM-37, "Removal and Installation (Upper Oil Pan)".
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-99 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
Install the rear oil seal after installing the oil pan (upper).
17. Install rear oil seal. Refer to EM-74, "REAR OIL SEAL : Removal and Installation".
18. Install flywheel (M/T models) or drive plate (CVT models).
M/T models
• Secure crankshaft with a stopper plate (A) and tighten bolts
crosswise over several times.
(1) :Flywheel
Tool number : KV11105210 (J-44716)
MBIB1382E
CVT models
• Secure crankshaft with a stopper plate (A) and tighten bolts
crosswise over several times.
(1) :Drive plate
Tool number : KV11105210 (J-44716)
PBIC3226J
CAUTION:
Do not damage or scratch and contact surface for clutch disc of flywheel.
19. Install knock sensor (1).
: Engine front
• Install connectors so that they are positioned toward the rear

of the engine.
CAUTION:
• Do not tighten bolt while holding the connector.
• If any impact by dropping is applied to knock sensor,
replace it with a new one.
NOTE:
PBIC3754E
• Check that there is no foreign material on the cylinder block
mating surface and the back surface of knock sensor.
• Check that knock sensor does not interfere with other parts.
20. Install crankshaft position sensor (POS) (2) and O-ring (1) and
then install the crankshaft position sensor cover (3) on the cylin-
der block (4).
• Tighten bolts with sensor inserted completely.
: Engine front
CAUTION:
• Avoid impacts such as a dropping.
• Do not disassemble.
• Keep sensor away from metal particles.
JPBIA4202ZZ
• Do not place the sensor in a location where it is exposed
to magnetism.
• Do not reuse O-ring.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-100 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
A
21. For the oil level gauge guide (1), secure in position (B) shown to
the water inlet clip (A) after inserting to the cylinder block side.
EM
D
PBIC3755E
22. Assembly of the remaining components is in the reverse order of disassembly.

E
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY F

• Measure the clearance between thrust bearings and crankshaft
arm when crankshaft is moved fully forward or backward using
suitable tool (A). G
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder
Block".
H
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace thrust bearings,
and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft
also.
I
PBIC3762E
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE

• Measure the side clearance between connecting rod and crank- J
shaft arm using suitable tool (A).
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder K

Block".
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod,
and measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft L
also.
M
PBIC3763E
PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE

Piston Pin Hole Diameter N
Measure the inner diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool (A).
Standard : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block". O
PBIC3265J
Piston Pin Outer Diameter

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-101 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin using suitable tool (A).
Standard : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".
PBIC3266J
Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance

(Piston to piston pin oil clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) – (Piston pin outer diameter)

• If oil clearance is out of the standard, replace piston and piston pin assembly.
• When replacing piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
NOTE:
• Piston is available together with piston pin as assembly.
• Piston pin (piston pin hole) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the factory. For service parts, no
grades can be selected. Only grade “0” is available.
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
• Measure the side clearance of piston ring and piston ring groove
with a suitable tool (A).

Block".
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace piston also.
PBIC3280J
PISTON RING END GAP

• Check that cylinder bore inner diameter is within specification. Refer to “PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE
CLEARANCE”.
• Lubricate piston (1) and piston ring (2) with new engine oil and
then insert (A) piston ring until middle of cylinder (B) with piston,
and measure piston ring end gap using feeler gauge (C).

Block".
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, replace piston ring, and
measure again. If it still exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.
PBIC3267J
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-102 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Check using connecting rod aligner.
A
(A) : Bend
(B) : Torsion
(C) : Feeler gauge EM
Limit : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly. C
G
PBIC3268J
CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER

• Install connecting rod cap (1) without connecting rod bearing H
installed, and tightening connecting rod cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-92, "Exploded View".
I
(A) : Example
(B) : Measuring direction of inner diameter
J
• Measure the inner diameter (B) of connecting rod big end using
suitable tool.
PBIC3269J K
• If out of the standard, replace connecting rod assembly.
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE L
Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter

Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bushing using suitable
tool (A). M
Inner diameter : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder

(Standard) Block". N
JPBIA0223ZZ
P
Piston Pin Outer Diameter

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-103 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
Measure the outer diameter of piston pin using micrometer (A).
Outer diameter : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder

(Standard) Block".
JPBIA0218ZZ
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance

(Connecting rod bushing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bushing inner diameter) – (Piston pin outer diame-
ter)
Oil clearance : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".

(Standard and Limit)
• If the measured value is out of the standard range, replace connecting rod assembly and/or piston and pis-
ton pin assembly.
• If replacing piston and piston pin assembly. Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".
• If replacing connecting rod assembly. Refer to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
CYLINDER BLOCK TOP SURFACE DISTORTION

• Using a scraper, remove gasket on the cylinder block surface, and also remove engine oil, scale, carbon, or
other contamination.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow gasket particles to enter engine oil or engine coolant passages.
• Measure the distortion on the cylinder block upper face at different
points in six directions using suitable tool (A / B).
Limit : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace cylinder block.
JPBIA0224ZZ
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER

• Install main bearing cap without main bearings installed, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the specified
torque. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
• Measure the inner diameter of main bearing housing using suitable tool.
• Measure the position shown [5 mm (0.20 in)] backward from main
bearing housing front side in the 2 directions as shown. The
smaller one is the measured value.
(1) : Cylinder block

(2) : Main bearing cap
: Engine front

• If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and main bearing PBIC4005E
caps assembly.
NOTE:
Main bearing caps cannot be replaced individually, because they are machined together with cylinder block.
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-104 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter
• Using a suitable tool, measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-of- A
round and taper at six different points on each cylinder. [(A) and (B)
directions at (C), (D), and (E)] [(A) is in longitudinal direction of
engine]
EM
(f) : 10 mm (0.39 in)
(g) : 60 mm (2.36 in)
(h) : 124 mm (4.88 in)
C
NOTE:
When determining cylinder bore grade, measure the cylinder bore
(B) direction at (D) position. JPBIA2059ZZ D
Standard:
E
Cylinder bore inner diameter
: Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".
F
Limit:
Out-of-round [Difference between (A) and (B)]
Taper [Difference between (C) and (E)] G
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder inner wall,
H
replace cylinder block.
NOTE:
Oversize piston is not available.
I
Piston Skirt Diameter
Measure the outer diameter of piston skirt using suitable tool (A).
Standard : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block". J
PBIC3272J
Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance M

Calculate by piston skirt diameter and cylinder bore inner diameter
[direction (B), position (D)].
N
(A) : Direction A
(C) : Position C
(E) : Position E O
(f) : 10 mm (0.39 in)
(g) : 60 mm (2.36 in)
(h) : 124 mm (4.88 in) P
(Clearance) = (Cylinder bore inner diameter) – (Piston skirt diame- JPBIA2059ZZ
ter)
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-120, "Cylinder Block".

• If it exceeds the limit, replace piston and piston pin assembly and/or cylinder block. Refer to EM-120, "Cylin-
der Block".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-105 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER
• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft main journals using suit-
able tool (A).

• If out of the standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance.
Then use undersize bearing. Refer to EM-123, "Main Bearing".
PBIC3457J
CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER

• Measure the outer diameter of crankshaft pin journal using suitable tool.

• If out of the standard, measure the connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use undersize bearing. Refer
to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
• Measure the dimensions at four different points as shown on each
main journal and pin journal using suitable tool.
• Out-of-round is indicated by the difference in dimensions between
(a) and (b) at (c) and (d).
• Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between (c) and
(d) at (a) and (b).
Limit:
Out-of-round [Difference between (a) and (b)]
Taper [Difference between (c) and (d)]
JPBIA0229ZZ
• If the measured value exceeds the limit, correct or replace crankshaft.
• If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected main journal and/or pin journal. Then select
main bearing and/or connecting rod bearing. Refer to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing" and/or EM-123,
"Main Bearing".
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
• Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft.
• Place a suitable tool (A) straight up on the No. 3 journal.
• While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer on the
suitable tool. (Total indicator reading)

Block".
• If it exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft.
PBIC3458J
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE

Method by Calculation

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-106 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Install connecting rod bearings (2) to connecting rod (3) and con-
necting rod cap (1), and tighten connecting rod cap bolts to the A
specified torque. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
(A) : Example
EM
(B) : Inner diameter measuring direction
• Measure the inner diameter of connecting rod bearing using suit-
able tool. C
(Bearing oil clearance) = (Connecting rod bearing inner diameter)
– (Crankshaft pin journal diameter)
PBIC3275J
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing". D
• If clearance exceeds the limit, select proper connecting rod bearing according to connecting rod big end
diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to EM-124,
"Connecting Rod Bearing". E
Method of Using Plastigage

• Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft pin and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
F
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install connecting rod bearings to connecting rod and cap, and tighten connecting rod cap bolts to the speci-
fied torque. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly". G
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft.
• Remove connecting rod cap and bearing, and using the scale (A) H
on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”. I
PBIC3276J
K
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method by Calculation
L
• Install main bearings (3) to cylinder block (1) and main bearing cap
(2), and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".
M
(A) : Example
(B) : Inner diameter measuring direction
• Measure the inner diameter (B) of main bearing (3) using suitable N
tool.
(Bearing oil clearance) = (Main bearing inner diameter) – (Crank-
shaft main journal diameter) O
PBIC3277J
Standard and Limit : Refer to EM-123, "Main Bearing".

• If clearance exceeds the limit, select proper main bearing according to main bearing inner diameter and P
crankshaft main journal diameter to obtain specified bearing oil clearance. Refer to EM-123, "Main Bearing".
Method of Using Plastigage
• Remove engine oil and dust on crankshaft main journal and the surfaces of each bearing completely.
• Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction, avoiding oil
holes.
• Install main bearings to cylinder block and main bearing cap, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to the spec-
ified torque. Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and Assembly".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-107 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
CAUTION:
Do not rotate crankshaft.
• Remove main bearing cap and bearings, and using the scale (A)
on the plastigage bag, measure the plastigage width.
NOTE:
The procedure when the measured value exceeds the limit is
same as that described in the “Method by Calculation”.
PBIC3278J
MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT

• When main bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with main bearings (1) installed, the tip end of
bearing must protrude (B). Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly and
Assembly".
(A) : Example
Standard : There must be crush height.

• If the standard is not met, replace main bearings.
PBIC3279J
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT

• When connecting rod cap is removed after being tightened to the
specified torque with connecting rod bearings (1) installed, the tip
end of bearing must protrude (B). Refer to EM-93, "Disassembly
and Assembly".
(A) : Example
Standard : There must be crush height.

• If the standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
PBIC3279J
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER

• Measure the outer diameters (d1) and (d2) at two positions as
shown.
(A) : (d1) measuring position

(B) : (d2) measuring position
• If reduction appears in places other than (B) range, regard it as
(d2).
Limit [(d1) – (d2)]: 0.2 mm (0.0078 in)

• If it exceeds the limit (a large difference in dimensions), replace PBIC4015E
main bearing cap bolt with a new one.
CONNECTING ROD CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-108 2014 Note
CYLINDER BLOCK
• Measure the outer diameter (d) at position as shown.
• If reduction appears in a position other than (d), regard it as (d). A
Limit: 7.75 mm (0.3051 in)

• When (d) is less than the limit (when it becomes thinner), replace EM
connecting rod cap bolt with a new one.
PBIC4016E
D
FLYWHEEL DEFLECTION (M/T models)
• Measure the deflection of flywheel contact surface to torque with a
suitable tool (A).
• Measure the deflection at 210 mm (8.27 in) diameter. E
Limit : 0.45 mm (0.0177 in) or less.

• If measured value is out of the standard, replace flywheel. F
• If a trace of burn or discoloration is found on the surface, clean it
with sandpaper.
CAUTION: G
When measuring, keep magnetic fields (such as dial indicator
stand) away from signal plate of the rear end of crankshaft. PBIC4006E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-109 2014 Note
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
Selection points Selection parts Selection items Selection methods

Determined by match of cylin-
der block bearing housing
Between cylinder block and Main bearing grade (bearing grade (inner diameter of hous-
Main bearing
crankshaft thickness) ing) and crankshaft journal
grade (outer diameter of jour-
nal)
Combining service grades for
connecting rod big end diame-
Between crankshaft and con- Connecting rod bearing grade
Connecting rod bearing ter and crankshaft pin outer di-
necting rod (bearing thickness)
ameter determine connecting
rod bearing selection.
• The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new condition.
This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
• For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by comparing the
measurement with the values of each selection table.
• For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards and the selection method of the
selective fitting parts, refer to the text for the appropriate part.
Connecting Rod Bearing INFOID:0000000009444881
WHEN NEW CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE USED

1. Apply connecting rod big end diameter grade stamped (C) on
connecting rod side face to the row in the “Connecting Rod
Bearing Selection Table”.
(A) : Oil hole

(B) : Cylinder number
(D) : Front mark
PBIC3756E
2. Apply crankshaft pin journal diameter grade stamped on crank-

shaft front side to the column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing
Selection Table”.
(A) : Main journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 5 from left)

(B) : Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 4 from left)
PBIC3757E
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table”.
4. Apply the symbol obtained to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table” to select connecting rod bearing.
WHEN CONNECTING ROD AND CRANKSHAFT ARE REUSED
1. Measure the dimensions of the connecting rod big end diameter and crankshaft pin journal diameter indi-
vidually. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-110 2014 Note
2. Apply the measured dimension to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table”.
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Connecting Rod Bearing Selection A
Table”.
4. Apply the symbol obtained to the “Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table” to select connecting rod bearing.
EM
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
JPBIA4823GB
N
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table : Refer to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing". O
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide
• When the specified connecting rod bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod
bearings, use undersize (US) bearings. P
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the connecting rod bearing inner diameter with bearing
installed, and grind the crankshaft pin so that the connecting rod bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-111 2014 Note
In grinding crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the
fillet R (A) [0.8 - 1.2 mm (0.031 - 0.047 in)].
Bearing undersize table:

Refer to EM-124, "Connecting Rod Bearing".
PBIC3263J
Main Bearing INFOID:0000000009444882
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING

When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Used
1. “Main Bearing Selection Table” rows correspond to main bearing
housing grade on left side of cylinder block.
(A) : Basic stamp mark

: Engine front
• If there is a corrected stamp mark (B) on cylinder block, use it

as a correct reference.
PBIC3760E
2. Apply main journal diameter grade stamped on crankshaft front

side to column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
(A) : Main journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 5 from left)

(B) : Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade (No. 1 to 4 from left)
PBIC3757E
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
4. Apply the symbol obtained to the “Main Bearing Grade Table” to select main bearing.
NOTE:
Service part is available as a set of both upper and lower.
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft Are Reused
1. Measure the dimensions of the cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter and crankshaft main
journal diameter individually. Refer to EM-101, "Inspection".
2. Apply the measured dimension to the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of selected row and column in the “Main Bearing Selection Table”.
4. Apply the symbol obtained to the “Main Bearing Grade Table” to select main bearing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-112 2014 Note
Main Bearing Selection Table
A
EM
L
PBIC3759E
Main Bearing Grade Table M
Main Bearing Grade Table : Refer to EM-123, "Main Bearing".

Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide N
• When the specified main bearing oil clearance is not obtained with standard size main bearings, use under-
size (US) bearing.
• When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the main bearing inner diameter with bearing installed, and O
grind main journal so that the main bearing oil clearance satisfies the standard.
CAUTION:
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-113 2014 Note
In grinding crankshaft main journal to use undersize bearings,
keep fillet (A) [0.8 - 1.2 mm (0.031 - 0.047 in)].
Bearing undersize table: Refer to EM-123, "Main Bear-

ing".
PBIC3263J

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-114 2014 Note

General Specification INFOID:0000000009444883
EM
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
C
Engine type HR16DE
Cylinder arrangement In-line 4
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 1,598 (97.51) D
Bore and stroke mm (in) 78.0× 83.6 (3.071 ×3.291)
Valve arrangement DOHC
E
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Compression 2
Number of piston rings
Oil 1 F
Compression ratio 9.8:1
Standard 1,510 (15.4, 219)
Compression pressure G
Minimum 1,270 (12.95, 184)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between cylinders 100 (1.0, 14.5)
Valve Timing H
Unit: degree
J
Valve timing
: Intake valve
: Exhaust valve K
JPBIA4228ZZ
L
a b c d e f
11 (−27) 59 (-21) -1 (49) 37 (-13)
216 228 M
ATDC ABDC ATDC BBDC
( ): Valve timing control “ON”
Drive Belt INFOID:0000000009444884 N
DRIVE BELT
Belt Deflection O
Deflection adjustment * Unit: mm (in)

Location Used belt
New belt P
Limit After adjusted
With A/C 10.0 (0.39) 4.9 - 5.2 (0.19 - 0.20) 4.1 - 4.4 (0.16 - 0.17)
Drive belt
Without A/C 9.1 (0.36) 4.3 - 4.7 (0.17 - 0.19) 3.7 - 3.9 (0.146 - 0.154)
Applied pushing force 98.1 N (10.0 kg-f, 22.0 lb-f)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-115 2014 Note
Belt Tension and Frequency
Unit: N (kg-f,
Tension adjustment * Frequency adjustment * Unit: Hz
lb-f)
Location
Used belt Used belt
New belt New belt
Limit After adjusted Limit After adjusted
881 - 951 1070 - 1138
With A/C (89.9 - 97.0, (109.1 - 116.1, 145.5 230.5 - 239.5 254 - 262
Drive belt 198.0 - 213.8) 240.5 - 255.8)
350 (35.7, 78.7)
876 - 964 1064 - 1152
Without A/C (89.4 - 98.3, (108.5 - 117.5, 162 256.5 - 268.5 282.5 - 293.5
196.9 - 216.7) 239.2 - 259.0)
Spark Plug INFOID:0000000009444885
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
Make NGK
Exhaust Manifold INFOID:0000000009444886
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Unit: mm (in)
Items Limit
Surface distortion 0.3 (0.012)
Camshaft INFOID:0000000009444887
CAMSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
Items Standard Limit

Camshaft runout [TIR*] 0.02 (0.0008) 0.1 (0.0039)
SEM671
Intake 41.705 - 41.895 (1.6419 - 1.6494) 41.505 (1.6341)

Camshaft cam height “A”
Exhaust 40.915 - 41.105 (1.6108 - 1.6183) 40.715 (1.6029)
No. 1 27.935 - 27.955 (1.0998 - 1.1006) —
Camshaft journal outer diameter
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 24.950 - 24.970 (0.9822 - 0.9830) —
No. 1 28.000 - 28.021 (1.1024 - 1.1032) —
Camshaft bracket inner diameter
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 25.000 - 25.021 (0.9842 - 0.9850) —

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-116 2014 Note
A
No. 1 0.045 - 0.086 (0.0018 - 0.0034) —
Camshaft journal oil clearance
No. 2, 3, 4, 5 0.030 - 0.071 (0.0011 - 0.0027) —
Camshaft end play 0.075 - 0.153 (0.0029 - 0.0060) 0.2 (0.0078) EM
Camshaft sprocket runout [TIR*] — 0.1 (0.0039)
*: Total indicator reading
C
VALVE LIFTER
Unit: mm (in)
Items Standard D
Valve lifter outer diameter 29.977 - 29.987 (1.1802 - 1.1806)
Valve lifter hole diameter 28 - 28.4 (1.024 - 1.1181)
Valve lifter clearance 0.013 - 0.044 (0.0005 - 0.0017) E
VALVE CLEARANCE
Unit: mm (in)
F
Cold1 Hot 2
Intake 0.26 - 0.34 (0.010 - 0.013) 0.304 - 0.416 (0.012 - 0.016)
Exhaust 0.29 - 0.37 (0.011 - 0.015) 0.308 - 0.432 (0.012 - 0.017) G
1:Approximately 20°C (68°F)
2:Approximately 80°C (176°F) H
AVAILABLE VALVE LIFTER
Unit: mm (in)
Identification mark (A) Thickness (B)

I
JPBIA0170ZZ
M
300 3.00 (0.1181)
302 3.02 (0.1189)
304 3.04 (0.1197) N
306 3.06 (0.1205)
308 3.08 (0.1213)
O
310 3.10 (0.1220)
312 3.12 (0.1228)
314 3.14 (0.1236) P
316 3.16 (0.1244)
318 3.18 (0.1252)
320 3.20 (0.1260)
322 3.22 (0.1268)
324 3.24 (0.1276)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-117 2014 Note
Identification mark (A) Thickness (B)
326 3.26 (0.1283)
328 3.28 (0.1291)
330 3.30 (0.1299)
332 3.32 (0.1307)
334 3.34 (0.1315)
336 3.36 (0.1323)
338 3.38 (0.1331)
340 3.40 (0.1339)
342 3.42 (0.1346)
344 3.44 (0.1354)
346 3.46 (0.1362)
348 3.48 (0.1370)
350 3.50 (0.1378)
Cylinder head INFOID:0000000009444888
CYLINDER HEAD
Unit: mm (in)
Items Limit
Head surface distortion 0.1 (0.004)
VALVE DIMENSIONS
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC3878E
Intake 31.6 - 31.9 (1.244 - 1.256)

Valve head diameter “D”
Exhaust 25.3 - 25.6 (0.996 - 1.007)
Intake 101.73 (4.01)
Valve length “a”
Exhaust 102.49 (4.04)
Intake 1.0 (0.0393)
“b”
Exhaust 1.0 (0.0393)
Intake 2.1 - 2.8 (0.0826 - 0.1102)
“c”
Exhaust 2.3 - 3.0 (0.0905 - 0.1181)
Intake 3.0 (0.1181)
“c′”
Exhaust –
Intake 4.965 - 4.980 (0.1954 - 0.1960)
“d ”
Exhaust 4.955 - 4.970 (0.1950 - 0.1956)
Intake
Valve seat angle “α” 45°15′ - 45°45′
Exhaust

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-118 2014 Note
VALVE GUIDE
Unit: mm (in) A
EM
PBIC0184E
Items Standard part Service part E

Outer diameter 9.023 - 9.034 (0.3552 - 0.3556) 9.223 - 9.234 (0.3631 - 0.3635)
Valve guide
Inner diameter (Finished size) 5.000 - 5.018 (0.1968 - 0.1975)
F
Cylinder head valve guide hole diameter 8.975 - 9.001 (0.3533 - 0.3544) 9.175 - 9.201 (0.3612 - 0.3622)
Interference fit of valve guide 0.022 - 0.059 (0.0009 - 0.0023)
Items Standard Limit G
Intake 0.020 - 0.053 (0.0008 - 0.0021) 0.1 (0.004)
Valve guide clearance
Exhaust 0.030 - 0.063 (0.0012 - 0.0025) 0.1 (0.004)
H
Projection length “L” 11.4 - 11.8 (0.448 - 0.464)
VALVE SEAT
Unit: mm (in) I
PBIC2745E
Items Standard Oversize [0.5 (0.02)] (Service) M

Intake 29.75 - 30.25 (1.1713 - 1.1909) 30.43 - 30.73 (1.1980 - 1.2098)
Cylinder head seat recess diameter “D”
Exhaust 25.991 - 26.007 (1.0233 - 1.0239) 26.491 - 26.507 (1.0430 - 1.0436)
N
Intake 32.108 - 32.124 (1.2641 - 1.2647) 32.608 - 32.624 (1.2838 - 1.2844)
Valve seat outer diameter “d”
Exhaust 23.65 - 24.15 (.9311 - .9508) 23.69 - 26.007 (.9327 - 1.0239)
Intake 0.081 - 0.124 (0.0032 - 0.0049) O
Valve seat interference fit
Exhaust 0.064 - 0.107 (0.0025 - 0.0042)
Intake 27.8 - 28.2 (1.0945 - 1.1102)
Diameter “d1”*1 P
Exhaust 21.7 - 22.1 (.8543 - .8701)
Intake 31.2 - 31.4 (1.228 - 1.236)
Diameter “d2”*2
Exhaust 24.9 - 25.1 (0.980 - 0.988)
Intake 60°
Angle “α1”
Exhaust 45°

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-119 2014 Note
Intake 88°45′ - 90°15′
Angle “α2”
Exhaust 88°45′ - 90°15′
Intake 120°
Angle “α3”
Exhaust 120°
Intake 1.44 - 2.1 (0.0567 - .0827)
Contacting width “W”*3
Exhaust 1.1 - 1.9 (.0433 - .0748) or 0.9 - 2.1 (.0354 - .0827)
Intake 4.7 (0.185) 4.15 (0.163)
Height “h”
Exhaust 6.0 (0.236) 5.43 (0.213)
Intake 4.7 (0.185)
Depth “H”
Exhaust 6.0 (0.236)
*1: Diameter made by intersection point of conic angles α1 and α2

*2: Diameter made by intersection point of conic angles α2 and α3
*3: Machining data
VALVE SPRING
Free height 46.73 mm (1.8398 in)

Installation height 32.40 mm (1.2756 in)
Installation load 136 - 154 N (13.9 - 15.7 kg, 30.6 - 34.6 lb)
Height during valve open 23.96 mm (0.9433 in)
Load with valve open 242 - 272 N (24.7 - 27.7 kg, 54.4 - 61.1 lb)
Cylinder Block INFOID:0000000009444889
CYLINDER BLOCK
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC3924E
Surface distortion Limit 0.1 (0.004)

Cylinder bore Inner diameter Standard 78.000 - 78.015 (3.0709 - 3.0715)
Wear limit —
Out-of-round (Difference between “X” and “Y”) 0.015 (0.0006)
Limit
Taper (Difference between “A” and “C”) 0.010 (0.0004)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-120 2014 Note
Grade No. A 51.997 - 51.998 (2.0471 - 2.0472)
Grade No. B 51.998 - 51.999 (2.0472 - 2.0472) A
Grade No. C 51.999 - 52.000 (2.0472 - 2.0472)
Grade No. D 52.000 - 52.001 (2.0472 - 2.0473)
Grade No. E 52.001 - 52.002 (2.0473 - 2.0473)
Grade No. F 52.002 - 52.003 (2.0473 - 2.0474) EM
Grade No. G 52.003 - 52.004 (2.0474 - 2.0474)
Grade No. H 52.004 - 52.005 (2.0474 - 2.0474)
Grade No. J 52.005 - 52.006 (2.0474 - 2.0475)
Grade No. K 52.006 - 52.007 (2.0475 - 2.0475)
C
Cylinder block main bearing housing inner diameter grade*
Grade No. L 52.007 - 52.008 (2.0475 - 2.0475)
Grade No. M 52.008 - 52.009 (2.0476 - 2.0476)
Grade No. N 52.009 - 52.010 (2.0476 - 2.0476) D
Grade No. P 52.010 - 52.011 (2.0476 - 2.0477)
Grade No. R 52.011 - 52.012 (2.0477 - 2.0477)
Grade No. S 52.012 - 52.013 (2.0477 - 2.0478)
Grade No. T 52.013 - 52.014 (2.0478 - 2.0478) E
Grade No. U 52.014 - 52.015 (2.0478 - 2.0478)
Grade No. V 52.015 - 52.016 (2.0478 - 2.0479)
Grade No. W 52.016 - 52.017 (2.0479 - 2.0479)
F
Difference in inner diameter between cylinders Standard Less than 0.03 (0.0012)
* : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
AVAILABLE PISTON G
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC0188E K
Piston skirt diameter “A” 77.965 - 77.980 (3.0694 - 3.0700)
Piston height “H” dimension 37.1 (1.460)
L
Piston pin hole diameter 19.006 - 19.012 (0.7482 - 0.7485)
Piston to cylinder bore clearance 0.020 - 0.050 (0.0008 - 0.0020)
PISTON RING M
Unit: mm (in)

N
Top 0.04 - 0.08 (0.0016 - 0.0031) 0.11 (0.0043)
Side clearance 2nd 0.03 - 0.07 (0.0012 - 0.0028) 0.10 (0.0039)
Oil (rail ring) 0.045 - 0.125 (0.0018 - 0.0049) — O
Top 0.20 - 0.30 (0.0079 - 0.0118) —
End gap 2nd 0.35 - 0.50 (0.0138 - 0.0197) —
Oil (rail ring) 0.20 - 0.45 (0.0079 - 0.0177) —
P
PISTON PIN
Unit: mm (in)
Piston pin outer diameter 18.999 - 19.002 (0.7480 - 0.7481)

Piston to piston pin oil clearance Standard 0.010 - 0.014 (0.0004 - 0.0006)
Connecting rod bushing oil clearance Standard –0.018 to –0.044 (–0.0007 to –0.0017)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-121 2014 Note
CONNECTING ROD
Unit: mm (in)
Center distance 129.84 - 129.94 (5.1118 - 5.1157)

Bend [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.15 (0.0059)
Torsion [per 100 (3.94)] Limit 0.30 (0.0118)
Connecting rod bushing inner diameter*1 18.958 - 18.978 (0.7463 - 0.7471)

Side clearance Standard 0.200 - 0.352 (0.0079 - 0.0138)
Grade No. A 43.000 - 43.001 (1.6929 - 1.6929)
Grade No. B 43.001 - 43.002 (1.6929 - 1.6930)
Grade No. C 43.002 - 43.003 (1.6930 - 1.6930)
Grade No. D 43.003 - 43.004 (1 6930 - 1.6931)
Grade No. E 43.004 - 43.005 (1.6931 - 1.6931)
Grade No. F 43.005 - 43.006 (1.6931 - 1.6931)
Connecting rod big end diameter grade*2 Grade No. G 43.006 - 43.007 (1.6931 - 1.6932)
Grade No. H 43.007 - 43.008 (1.6932 - 1.6932)
Grade No. J 43.008 - 43.009 (1.6932 - 1.6933)
Grade No. K 43.009 - 43.010 (1.6933 - 1.6933)
Grade No. L 43.010 - 43.011 (1.6933 - 1.6933)
Grade No. M 43.011 - 43.012 (1.6933 - 1.6934)
Grade No. N 43.012 - 43.013 (1.6934 - 1.6934)
*1 : After installing in connecting rod

*2 : Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
CRANKSHAFT
Unit: mm (in)
PBIC3459J
SEM645
Center distance “r” 41.68 - 41.76 (1.6409 - 1.6441)

Out-of-round Limit 0.003 (0.0001)
Taper Limit 0.004 (0.0002)
Runout [TIR*1] Limit 0.10 (0.0039)

Standard 0.098 - 0.260 (0.0039 - 0.0102)
Crankshaft end play
Limit 0.35 (0.0138)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-122 2014 Note
Grade No. A 39.970 - 39.971 (1.5736 - 1.5737)
Grade No. B 39.969 - 39.970 (1.5736 - 1.5736) A
Grade No. C 39.968 - 39.969 (1.5735 - 1.5736)
Grade No. D 39.967 - 39.968 (1.5735 - 1.5735)
Grade No. E 39.966 - 39.967 (1.5735 - 1.5735)
Grade No. F 39.965 - 39.966 (1.5734 - 1.5735) EM
Grade No. G 39.964 - 39.965 (1.5734 - 1.5734)
Grade No. H 39.963 - 39.964 (1.5733 - 1.5734)
Grade No. J 39.962 - 39.963 (1.5733 - 1.5733)
Crankshaft pin journal diameter grade.*2“Dp”*3 Grade No. K 39.961 - 39.962 (1.5733 - 1.5733)
C
Grade No. L 39.960 - 39.961 (1.5732 - 1.5733)
Grade No. M 39.959 - 39.960 (1.5732 - 1.5732)
Grade No. N 39.958 - 39.959 (1.5731 - 1.5732) D
Grade No. P 39.957 - 39.958 (1.5731 - 1.5731)
Grade No. R 39.956 - 39.957 (1.5731 - 1.5731)
Grade No. S 39.955 - 39.956 (1.5730 - 1.5731)
Grade No. T 39.954 - 39.955 (1.5730 - 1.5730) E
Grade No. U 39.953 - 39.954 (1.5729 - 1.5730)
Grade No. A 47.978 - 47.979 (1.8889 - 1.8889)
Grade No. B 47.977 - 47.978 (1.8889 - 1.8889)
F
Grade No. C 47.976 - 47.977 (1.8888 - 1.8889)
Grade No. D 47.975 - 47.976 (1.8888 - 1.8888)
Grade No. E 47.974 - 47.975 (1.8887 - 1.8888)
Grade No. F 47.973 - 47.974 (1.8887 - 1.8887) G
Grade No. G 47.972 - 47.973 (1.8887 - 1.8887)
Grade No. H 47.971 - 47.972 (1.8886 - 1.8886)
Grade No. J 47.970 - 47.971 (1.8886 - 1.8886)
Crankshaft main journal diameter grade.*2 Grade No. K 47.969 - 47.970 (1.8885 - 1.8886) H
“Dm”*4 Grade No. L 47.968 - 47.969 (1.8885 - 1.8885)
Grade No. M 47.967 - 47.968 (1.8885 - 1.8885)
Grade No. N 47.966 - 47.967 (1.8884 - 1.8885)
Grade No. P 47.965 - 47.966 (1.8884 - 1.8884) I
Grade No. R 47.964 - 47.965 (1.8883 - 1.8884)
Grade No. S 47.963 - 47.964 (1.8883 - 1.8883)
Grade No. T 47.962 - 47.963 (1.8883 - 1.8883)
Grade No. U 47.961 - 47.962 (1.8882 - 1.8883)
J
Grade No. V 47.960 - 47.961 (1.8882 - 1.8882)
Grade No. W 47.959 - 47.960 (1.8881 - 1.8882)
*1: Total indicator reading K
*2: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
*3: Grade No. B through U reflects less than maximum specification.
*4: Grade No. B through W reflects less than maximum specification. L
Main Bearing INFOID:0000000009444890
M
MAIN BEARING

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-123 2014 Note
Unit: mm (in)
SEM685D
Grade number* Thickness Identification color Remarks

0 1.996 - 1.999 (0.0786 - 0.0787) Black
1 1.999 - 2.002 (0.0787 - 0.0788) Brown
2 2.002 - 2.005 (0.0788 - 0.0789) Green Grade and color are the same
3 2.005 - 2.008 (0.0789 - 0.0791) Yellow for upper and lower bearings.
4 2.008 - 2.011 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Blue

5 2.011 - 2.014 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Pink
UPR 1.996 - 1.999 (0.0786 - 0.0787) Black
01
LWR 1.999 - 2.002 (0.0787 - 0.0788) Brown
UPR 1.999 - 2.002 (0.0787 - 0.0788) Brown
12
LWR 2.002 - 2.005 (0.0788 - 0.0789) Green
Grade and color are different
UPR 2.002 - 2.005 (0.0788 - 0.0789) Green for upper and lower bearings.
23
LWR 2.005 - 2.008 (0.0789 - 0.0791) Yellow
UPR 2.005 - 2.008 (0.0789 - 0.0791) Yellow
34
LWR 2.008 - 2.011 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Blue
UPR 2.008 - 2.011 (0.0791 - 0.0792) Blue
45
LWR 2.011 - 2.014 (0.0792 - 0.0793) Pink
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Items Thickness Main journal diameter

US 0.25 (0.0098) 2.126 - 2.134 (0.0837 - 0.0840) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
Bearing Oil Clearance

Unit: mm (in)
Main bearing oil clearance Standard 0.024 - 0.034 (0.0009 - 0.0013)
Connecting Rod Bearing INFOID:0000000009444891
CONNECTING ROD BEARING

Unit: mm (in)
Grade number* Thickness Identification color Remarks

1 1.501 - 1.504 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Brown
2 1.504 - 1.507 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Green
3 1.507 - 1.510 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Yellow
4 1.510 - 1.513 (0.0594 - 0.0596) Blue
5 1.513 - 1.516 (0.0596 - 0.0597) Pink

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-124 2014 Note
UPR 1.501 - 1.504 (0.0591 - 0.0592) Brown
12 A
LWR 1.504 - 1.507 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Green
UPR 1.504 - 1.507 (0.0592 - 0.0593) Green Grade and color are different
23
LWR 1.507 - 1.510 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Yellow between upper and lower bear-
ings.
EM
UPR 1.507 - 1.510 (0.0593 - 0.0594) Yellow
34
LWR 1.510 - 1.513 (0.0594 - 0.0596) Blue
UPR 1.513 - 1.516 (0.0596 - 0.0597) Pink C
56
LWR 1.516 - 1.519 (0.0597 - 0.0598) Purple
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. D
Undersize
Unit: mm (in)
Items Thickness Crankshaft pin journal diameter E

US 0.25 (0.0098) 1.627 - 1.635 (0.0640 - 0.0644) Grind so that bearing clearance is the specified value.
Bearing Oil Clearance F

Unit: mm (in)
Standard 0.020 - 0.030 (0.0008 - 0.0012)

Connecting rod bearing oil clearance
Limit 0.10 (0.0039) G

GETtheMANUALS.org
EM-125 2014 Note
ENGINE
EX
A
EX
SECTION
EXHAUST SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Commercial Service Tool ......................................... 3 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 4

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................. 4
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5 H
PREPARATION ................................................... 3 EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 5

Special Service Tool ................................................. 3 Exploded View .......................................................... 5
I

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
battery and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
EX
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sen-
(J-38365-N1) sors: D
Heated oxygen sensor wrench a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
S-NT636
F

G
Tool name
(J-43897-18) Reconditioning the exhaust system threads
(J-43897-12) before installing a new oxygen sensor (Use H
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner with anti-seize lubricant shown below):
a: J-43897-18 (18 mm dia.) for zirconia ox-
ygen sensor
b: J-43897-12 (12 mm dia.) for titania oxy- I
gen sensor
AEM488
J
Anti-seize lubricant (Permatex 133AR Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning
or equivalent meeting MIL specifica- tool when reconditioning exhaust system
tion MIL-A-907) threads
K
L
AEM489
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-3 2014 Note
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attach-

ment, leaks, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
SMA211A

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-4 2014 Note
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EX
JPBIA6358GB J
1. Seal bearing 2. Spring 3. Heated oxygen sensor 2

4. Front Exhaust tube 5. Seal bearing 6. Mounting rubber
K
7. Center muffler 8. Ring gasket 9. Main muffler
A. To Exhaust manifold
WARNING: L
• Perform the procedures with the exhaust system fully cooled down to avoid injury from the hot
exhaust system.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the insulator edge. M
CAUTION:
Use genuine NISSAN exhaust system parts or equivalent, which are specifically designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
N
REMOVAL
• Disconnect each joint and mounting.
• Remove heated oxygen sensor 2 (1) using Tool (A).
O
Tool number : KV10114400 (J-38365-N1)
P
: Front
ALBIA1136ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-5 2014 Note
EXHAUST SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse gasket.
• Do not reuse seal bearing.
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor 2 which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Use a new one.
• Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor 2, clean exhaust system threads using a suitable tool
and apply anti-seize lubricant.
Oxygen sensor thread cleaner : J-43897-12

Oxygen sensor thread cleaner : J-43897-18
• Do not over tighten heated oxygen sensor 2. Doing so may cause damage to the heated oxygen sen-
sor 2, resulting in the “MIL” coming on.
• Prevent rust preventives from adhering to the sensor body.
• If heat insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the heat
insulator, remove them.
• When installing heat insulator avoid large gaps or interference between heat insulator and each
exhaust pipe.
• Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid
exhaust gas leaks.
• When installing each mounting rubber, use silicon oil to avoid twisting.
• Temporarily tighten nuts and bolts. Check each part for unusual interference and mounting rubber
interference, and then tighten them to the specified torque.
• When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or unusual extension in up/down, front/rear
and right/left directions.
Exhaust Manifold to Exhaust Front Tube
1. Place a piece of wood (A) on seal bearing (2) and securely
insert the seal bearing on the exhaust manifold (1) side, using a
plastic hammer (B).
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the seal bearing surface during insertion.
• If seal bearing is inserted by hammering directly without
using a piece of wood, the seal bearing is deformed and
exhaust gas leaks. To insert seal bearing, always use a
piece of wood and insert straight.
JPBIA6288ZZ
2. Check that seal bearing (1) is in absolute contact (C) with the
flange (A). If there is clearance (B), insert seal bearing straight
by hand to bring the seal bearing into absolute contact with the
flange.
CAUTION:
• Do not use a tool for insertion.
• Do not insert seal bearing by tightening exhaust front
tube.
JPBIA6289ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-6 2014 Note
EXHAUST SYSTEM
3. With spring (3), tighten nut (4).
CAUTION: A
• Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not
sitting on locator dimple (A).
• Be careful that stud bolt does not interfere with mounting
EX
hole of exhaust front tube ( ).
(1) : Spring
C
(2) : Seal bearing
(5) : Bolt
AWBIA1528ZZ
(6) : Front exhaust tube
D
4. After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of exhaust front tube.
Exhaust Front Tube to Center Muffler
1. Securely insert seal bearing (2) into exhaust front tube (1). E
(3) : Spring
(4) : Bolt F
(5) : Center muffler
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage seal bearing surface when install- G
ing.
2. With spring, tighten bolt.
CAUTION: H
AWBIA1529ZZ
• Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not
sitting on locator dimple (A).
• Be careful that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler. I
3. After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler.
• With the engine running, check the exhaust tube joints for exhaust gas leaks and unusual noises. J
• Check that the mounting brackets and mounting insulators are installed properly and free from excessive
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise, leaks, and vibration.
K

GETtheMANUALS.org
EX-7 2014 Note
DRIVER CONTROLS
EXL
A
B
SECTION
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER F
AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description ....10
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe .....................11 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 4 FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM ...................................11
Precaution for Work .................................................. 4 FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Descrip-
tion ...........................................................................12 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 5 FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe ................12
PREPARATION ................................................... 5 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM .......12

I
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description ..................................................13
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 14 J
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6
Component Parts Location ........................................ 6 COMMON ITEM .........................................................14
Daytime Running Light Relay .................................... 7 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
COMMON ITEM) .....................................................14 K
Hazard Switch ........................................................... 7
SYSTEM .............................................................. 8 HEADLAMP ...............................................................14

HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD EXL
HEADLAMP SYSTEM ................................................. 8 LAMP) ......................................................................15
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description ............. 8
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe .............................. 8 FLASHER ...................................................................15
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASH- M
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) ................ 9 ER) ..........................................................................15
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : Sys-
tem Diagram .............................................................. 9 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ................... 17
N
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : Sys- Diagnosis Description ..............................................17
tem Description ......................................................... 9 CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) .............................18
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ........................ 9 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21 O

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System
Description ................................................................ 9
BCM, IPDM E/R ................................................. 21
List of ECU Reference .............................................21
P
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM .................................................................... 10 WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 22
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
HEADLAMP ...................................................... 22
SYSTEM : System Description ............................... 10
Wiring Diagram ........................................................22
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM ................................................ 10
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM ............................... 27
Wiring Diagram ........................................................27

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-1 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP ........................................... 32 FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT ........................... 89
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 32 Component Function Check ................................... 89
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING Component Inspection ............................................ 91
LAMPS ............................................................... 37
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 37 HAZARD SWITCH ............................................. 92
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 92
LAMPS ............................................................... 43
Wiring Diagram-With Daytime Light System ........... 43 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 94
Wiring Diagram-Without Daytime Light System ...... 50
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS... 94
STOP LAMP ...................................................... 57
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ... 94
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 57
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
BACK-UP LAMP ................................................ 61 : Symptom Table ..................................................... 94
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 61
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ........... 95
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) ...... 65 WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 65 Symptom Table ....................................................... 95
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 70 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT

TURNED ON ...................................................... 98
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 70
Work Flow ............................................................... 70 WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ........... 98
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : De-
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 73 scription ................................................................... 98
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Di-
HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT ................................ 73 agnosis Procedure .................................................. 98
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73 WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM ... 98
HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT ............................... 75 : Description ............................................................ 98
Component Function Check ................................... 75 WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 75 : Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 98
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) ...... 77 BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT
Description .............................................................. 77 TURNED ON ..................................................... 100
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 77 Description ............................................................ 100
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CIRCUIT
... 79 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER
Component Function Check ................................... 79 AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON .... 101
Component Inspection ............................................ 80 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101
PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT ................................ 81 BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT
Component Function Check ................................... 81 TURNED ON ..................................................... 102
TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT ......................................... 83
Component Function Check ................................... 83 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...................... 103
HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT .............. 103
LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT .................... 85 Inspection .............................................................. 103
Component Function Check ................................... 85 Aiming Adjustment Procedure .............................. 104
FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT .. 106
TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT ........................ 86 Inspection .............................................................. 106
Component Function Check ................................... 86 Aiming Adjustment Procedure .............................. 106
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 108

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-2 2014 Note
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP ........................ 108 Removal and Installation ....................................... 117
Exploded View ...................................................... 108 Bulb Replacement ................................................. 117 A
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 108 LICENSE PLATE LAMP ................................. 118
Exploded View ....................................................... 118
B
FRONT FOG LAMP .......................................... 110 Removal and Installation ....................................... 118
Exploded View ...................................................... 110 Bulb Replacement ................................................. 118
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 110 UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . 119 C
COMBINATION SWITCH ................................. 112 FRONT COMBINATION LAMP ...................... 119

Removal and Installation ....................................... 112 Exploded View ....................................................... 119
Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 119 D
HAZARD SWITCH ............................................ 113
Exploded View ...................................................... 113 REAR COMBINATION LAMP ......................... 121
Removal and Installation ....................................... 113 Exploded View - Non LED ..................................... 121 E
Disassembly and Assembly - Non LED ................. 121
HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH ........................ 114 Exploded View - LED ............................................. 122
Exploded View ...................................................... 114 Disassembly and Assembly - LED ........................ 122
F
REAR COMBINATION LAMP .......................... 115 (SDS) .......................................................... 123
Exploded View ...................................................... 115 G
Removal and Installation ....................................... 115 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 115 (SDS) ............................................................... 123
Bulb specification ................................................... 123 H
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP ........................ 117
Exploded View ...................................................... 117
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
- Oily dirt:
area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-4 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
TrimTool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-5 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
ALLIA1287ZZ
No. Part Function

Refer to EXL-10, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : Sys-
1. Hazard switch
tem Description".
2. Combination meter Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : System Description".
Combination switch Refer to EXL-10, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : Sys-
3.
(Lighting & turn signal switch) tem Description".
4. Headlamp aiming switch Refer to EXL-9, "HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Description".
5. BCM Refer to BCS-5, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-6 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
No. Part Function
A
• Controls the integrated relay, and supplies voltage to the load according to the re-
quest from BCM (via CAN communication).
6. IPDM E/R
• Refer to PCS-5, "RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description" for detailed
installation location. B
Refer to EXL-10, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP
7. Stop lamp switch
SYSTEM : System Description".
C
Daytime Running Light Relay INFOID:0000000009472850
Daytime running light relay ground circuit is switched according to request from IPDM E/R.
D
Hazard Switch INFOID:0000000009472851
Inputs the hazard switch ON/OFF signal to BCM.

E
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-7 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
HEADLAMP SYSTEM
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009472853
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JPLIA0167GB
OUTLINE
Headlamp is controlled by combination switch reading function and headlamp control function of BCM, and
relay control function of IPDM E/R.
HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition with the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits the low beam request signal to IPDM E/R with CAN communication according to the head-
lamp (LO) ON condition.
Headlamp (LO) ON condition
- Lighting switch 2ND
- Lighting switch AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
- Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON
- Lighting switch PASS
• IPDM E/R turns the integrated headlamp low relay ON, and turns the headlamp ON according to the low
beam request signal.
HEADLAMP (HI) OPERATION
• BCM transmits the high beam request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter with CAN communica-
tion according to the headlamp (HI) ON condition.
Headlamp (HI) ON condition
- Lighting switch HI with the lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
- Lighting switch PASS
- Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON, the ignition switch ON and lighting switch HI
• Combination meter turns the high beam indicator lamp ON according to the high beam request signal.
• IPDM E/R turns the integrated headlamp high relay ON, and turns the headlamp ON according to the high
beam request signal.
HEADLAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009472855
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL

When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-8 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Control part Fail-safe operation A

• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
Headlamp • Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF
B
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL)
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Diagram INFOID:0000000009549365
C
AWLIA0023GB
F
HEADLAMP AIMING SYSTEM (MANUAL) : System Description INFOID:0000000009549366
G
The headlamp aiming system (manual) controls the headlamp light axis height according to input from the
headlamp aiming switch. The variable internal resistance of the headlamp aiming switch controls the signal
ground of the headlamp aiming motors located on the front combination lamp LH and RH. The headlamp aim-
ing system operates when the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is in the 2nd position. H
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009472860 I
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
J
EXL
N
AWLIA2141GB
OUTLINE
• Daytime running lamp is controlled by daytime running lamp control function and combination switch reading O
function of BCM, and relay control function of IPDM E/R.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP OPERATION
P
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM detects the engine condition according to push-button ignition switch
• BCM detects the parking brake condition by the parking brake switch signal received from combination
meter using CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the daytime running lamp request signal to IPDM E/R using CAN communication according
to the daytime running lamp ON condition.
Daytime running light ON condition

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-9 2014 Note
SYSTEM
- Engine running
- Lighting switch OFF or 1ST
- Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function OFF judgment
- Parking brake switch OFF
• IPDM E/R controls the daytime running lamp relay (ground-side) to turn ON according to the daytime run-
ning lamp request signal.
• Power is supplied from the daytime running lamp to the daytime running lamps.
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000009472862
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWLIA1721GB
OUTLINE
Turn signal and the hazard warning lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function, flasher control
function and auto hazard function of BCM.
TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPERATION
• BCM supplies voltage to the right (left) turn signal lamp circuit when the ignition switch is turned ON and the
turn signal switch is in the right (left) position. BCM blinks the turn signal lamp.
HAZARD WARNING LAMP OPERATION
BCM supplies voltage to both turn signal lamp circuit when the hazard switch is turned ON. BCM blinks the
hazard warning lamp.
HIGH FLASHER OPERATION
• BCM detects the turn signal lamp circuit status from the current value.
• BCM increases the turn signal lamp blinking speed if the bulb or harness open is detected with the turn sig-
nal lamp operating.
NOTE:
The blinking speed is normal while operating the hazard warning lamp.
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System De-

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-10 2014 Note
SYSTEM
scription INFOID:0000000009472864
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMLIA1349GB F
OUTLINE
Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps are controlled by combination switch reading function and
headlamp control function of BCM, and relay control function of IPDM E/R. G
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS OPERATION

• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function. H
• BCM transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R and the combination meter via CAN communi-
cation according to the ON/OFF condition of the parking, license plate, side marker (Without Daytime run-
ning lamps) and tail lamps.
I
Parking, license plate, side marker and tail lamps ON condition
- Lighting switch 1ST
- Lighting switch 2ND
J
- Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function ON judgment.
- Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON
• IPDM E/R turns the integrated tail lamp relay ON and turns the parking, license plate, side marker (without
daytime running lamps) and tail lamps ON according to the position light request signal. K
• Combination meter turns the tail lamp indicator lamp ON according to the position light request signal.
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000009472866 EXL

When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN M
N
Control part Fail-safe operation
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp O
• Illumination • Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Tail lamp • Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Side marker lamp (Without day-
time running lamps) P
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-11 2014 Note
SYSTEM
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009472867
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMLIA1154GB
OUTLINE
Front fog lamp is controlled by combination switch reading function, front fog lamp control function of BCM,
and relay control function of IPDM E/R.
FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION
• BCM transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the front
fog lamp ON condition.
Front fog lamp ON condition
- Front fog lamp switch ON, and any of the following condition is satisfied. (except for the high beam ON)
• Lighting switch 2ND
• Lighting switch AUTO (auto light function ON judgment)
IPDM E/R turns the integrated front fog lamp relay ON, and turns the front fog lamp ON according to the front
fog light request signal.
FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : Fail-safe INFOID:0000000009472869

When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
Control part Fail-safe operation

Front fog lamp Front fog lamp relay OFF
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-12 2014 Note
SYSTEM
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009472870
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JPLIA1037GB F
OUTLINE
• Exterior lamp battery saver system is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R.
G
Control by BCM
- Combination switch reading function
- Headlamp control function H
- Exterior lamp battery saver function
Control by IPDM E/R
- Relay control function I
• BCM turns the exterior lamps* OFF after a period of time to prevent the battery from over-discharge when
the ignition switch is turned OFF with the exterior lamps ON.
*: Headlamp (LO/HI), parking lamp, tail lamp, side marker lamp, license plate lamp and front fog lamp
J
EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER ACTIVATION
BCM activates the timer and turns the exterior lamp OFF 5 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from ON
→ OFF with the exterior lamps ON. K
NOTE:
• Headlamp control function turns the exterior lamps ON normally when the ignition switch is turned ACC or
ON (both before and after the exterior lamp battery saver is turned OFF).
• The timer starts at the time that the lighting switch is turned from OFF → 1ST or 2ND with the exterior lamps EXL
OFF.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-13 2014 Note
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION

System Sub System

ECU identification
Configuration
Work support
Data Monitor
Active Test

BCM BCM × × × × ×
HEADLAMP

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-14 2014 Note
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEAD LAMP) INFOID:0000000009578843
A
DATA MONITOR

ENGINE STATE [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] Indicates engine status received from ECM on CAN communication line.
C
TURN SIGNAL L [On/Off] D
TAIL LAMP SW [On/Off]
HI BEAM SW [On/Off]
Indicates condition of combination switch. E
PASSING SW [On/Off] F
FR FOG SW [On/Off]
DOOR SW-AS [On/Off] Indicates condition of front door switch RH. G
DOOR SW-RL [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear door switch LH. H
ACTIVE TEST
I
FR FOG LAMP This test is able to check front fog lamp operation [On/Off].
J
HEAD LAMP This test is able to check head lamp operation [Hi/Low/Off].
ILL DIM SIGNAL This test is able to check head lamp illumination dimming operation [On/Off].
TAIL LAMP This test is able to check tail lamp operation [On/Off]. K
WORK SUPPORT

EXL
On* Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.
BATTERY SAVER SET
Off Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.
M
MODE 8 180 sec.
MODE 7 150 sec.
MODE 6 120 sec. N
MODE 4 60 sec. Sets delay timer function operation time
ILL DELAY SET
MODE 5 90 sec. (All doors closed).
O
MODE 3 30 sec.
MODE 2 OFF
MODE 1* 45 sec. P
*: Initial setting
FLASHER
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) INFOID:0000000009578844
DATA MONITOR

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-15 2014 Note
Monitor Item [Unit]

Description

Indicates condition of turn signal function of combination switch.
HAZARD SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of hazard switch.
ACTIVE TEST

FLASHER This test is able to check turn signal lamp operation [Off/LH/RH].
WORK SUPPORT

Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked with
Lock/Unlock*
Intelligent Key.
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are unlocked with Intelligent
Unlock Only
Key.
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
Hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked with Intelligent
Lock Only
Key.
No hazard warning lamp activation when doors are locked or unlocked
Off
with Intelligent Key.
* : Initial setting

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-16 2014 Note
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
A
AUTO ACTIVE TEST B

Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Front wiper (LO, HI) C
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp D
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan E
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following conditions. F
• Passenger door is open
• CONSULT is connected
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper G
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand. H
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the driver door switch 10 times. Then turn the
ignition switch OFF. I
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
5. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed. J
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-84, K
"Component Function Check".
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following operation sequence is repeated 3 times. EXL
Operation se-
Inspection location Operation
quence
M
1 Front wiper LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
2 10 seconds N
• Tail lamp
• Front fog lamp
3 Headlamp LO for 10 seconds →HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
O
4 A/C compressor (magnet clutch) ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
5 Cooling fan LO for 5 seconds → MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-17 2014 Note
Concept of Auto Active Test
JMMIA0812GB
• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communica-
tion. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.
Diagnosis Chart in Auto Active Test
Symptom Inspection contents Possible cause

Any of the following components do not operate YES BCM signal input circuit
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp Perform auto active test. • Lamp or motor
• Tail lamp Does the applicable system op- • Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Front fog lamp erate? NO • Harness or connector between
• Headlamp (HI, LO) IPDM E/R and applicable system
• Front wiper (HI, LO) • IPDM E/R
• BCM signal input circuit

• CAN communication signal be-
YES tween BCM and ECM
Perform auto active test. • CAN communication signal be-
A/C compressor does not operate Does the magnet clutch oper- tween ECM and IPDM E/R
ate? • Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between
NO
IPDM E/R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R
• ECM signal input circuit
YES • CAN communication signal be-
tween ECM and IPDM E/R
Perform auto active test.
Cooling fan does not operate • Cooling fan motor
Does the cooling fan operate?
• Harness or connector between
NO
IPDM E/R and cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) INFOID:0000000009578846
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.

Ecu Identification The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.
Self Diagnostic Result The IPDM E/R self diagnostic results are displayed.
Data Monitor The IPDM E/R input/output data is displayed in real time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-18 2014 Note
A
Active Test The IPDM E/R activates outputs to test components.
CAN Diag Support Mntr The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication is displayed.
ECU IDENTIFICATION B
The IPDM E/R part number is displayed.
Refer to PCS-20, "DTC Index". C
DATA MONITOR
D
Main
Signals
Indicates cooling fan speed signal received from ECM on CAN communication
MOTOR FAN REQ [%] × E
line
Indicates A/C compressor request signal received from ECM on CAN commu-
AC COMP REQ [On/Off] ×
nication line
F
Indicates position light request signal received from BCM on CAN communica-
TAIL&CLR REQ [On/Off] ×
tion line
Indicates low beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
HL LO REQ [On/Off] × G
line
Indicates high beam request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
HL HI REQ [On/Off] ×
line
H
Indicates front fog light request signal received from BCM on CAN communica-
FR FOG REQ [On/Off] ×
tion line
Indicates front wiper request signal received from BCM on CAN communication
FR WIP REQ [Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi] × I
line
WIP AUTO STOP [STOP P/ACT P] × Indicates condition of front wiper auto stop signal
WIP PROT [Off/BLOCK] × Indicates condition of front wiper fail-safe operation
J
Indicates ignition switch ON signal received from BCM on CAN communication
IGN RLY1 -REQ [On/Off]
line
IGN RLY [On/Off] × Indicates condition of ignition relay
K
PUSH SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of push-button ignition switch
INTER/NP SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of CVT shift position
Indicates starter relay status signal received from BCM on CAN communication EXL
ST RLY CONT [On/Off]
line
Indicates starter control relay signal received from BCM on CAN communication
IHBT RLY -REQ [On/Off]
line M
ST/INHI RLY [Off/ ST /INHI] Indicates condition of starter relay and starter control relay
DETENT SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of CVT shift selector (park position switch)
N
Indicates daytime light request signal received from BCM on CAN communica-
DTRL REQ [Off]
tion line
HOOD SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of hood switch
O
Indicates theft warning horn request signal received from BCM on CAN commu-
THFT HRN REQ [On/Off]
nication line
HORN CHIRP [On/Off] Indicates horn reminder signal received from BCM on CAN communication line
P
ACTIVE TEST

HORN This test is able to check horn operation [On].
FRONT WIPER This test is able to check wiper motor operation [Hi/Lo/Off].

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-19 2014 Note
MOTOR FAN This test is able to check cooling fan operation [4/3/2/1].
EXTERNAL LAMPS This test is able to check external lamp operation [Fog/Hi/Lo/TAIL/Off].

Refer to LAN-12, "CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-20 2014 Note
BCM, IPDM E/R
BCM, IPDM E/R
B
ECU Reference
C
BCS-44, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D
BCS-46, "DTC Index"
PCS-13, "Reference Value"
E
IPDM E/R PCS-18, "Fail-safe"
PCS-20, "DTC Index"
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-21 2014 Note
HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
HEADLAMP
AALWA0624GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-22 2014 Note
HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1369GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-23 2014 Note
HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1370GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-24 2014 Note
HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1371GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-25 2014 Note
HEADLAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1372GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-26 2014 Note
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
EXL
AALWA0643GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-27 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1408GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-28 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1409GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-29 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1410GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-30 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1411GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-31 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
FRONT FOG LAMP
AALWA0631GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-32 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1381GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-33 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1382GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-34 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1383GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-35 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1384GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-36 2014 Note
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
EXL
P
AALWA0634GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-37 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1391GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-38 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1392GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-39 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1393GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-40 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1394GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-41 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1395GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-42 2014 Note
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
Wiring Diagram-With Daytime Light System INFOID:0000000009473002
EXL
P
AALWA0636GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-43 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1402GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-44 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1403GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-45 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1404GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-46 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1405GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-47 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1406GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-48 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1407GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-49 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
Wiring Diagram-Without Daytime Light System INFOID:0000000009473007
AALWA0635GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-50 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1396GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-51 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1397GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-52 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1398GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-53 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1399GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-54 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1400GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-55 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1401GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-56 2014 Note
STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
STOP LAMP
A
EXL
P
AALWA0630GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-57 2014 Note
STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1379GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-58 2014 Note
STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1380GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-59 2014 Note
STOP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ABLIA4894GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-60 2014 Note
BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
BACK-UP LAMP
A
EXL
P
AALWA0622GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-61 2014 Note
BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1364GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-62 2014 Note
BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1365GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-63 2014 Note
BACK-UP LAMP
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1452GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-64 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
EXL
P
AALWA0629GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-65 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1375GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-66 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1376GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-67 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1377GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-68 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
EXL
AALIA1378GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-69 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-70 2014 Note
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A
1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) D
- Erase DTC.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
J
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected K
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DTC INSPECTION PRIORITY CHART, and determine trouble diag-
nosis order. EXL
NOTE:
M
this check.
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". O
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step P
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-71 2014 Note
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-72 2014 Note
HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT
B
1.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OPERATION

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST C
1. Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item.
2. With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (HI) is turned ON.
D
Hi : Headlamp (HI) ON
Off : Headlamp (HI) OFF
NOTE: E
ON/OFF is repeated 1 second each.
YES >> Headlamp (HI) circuit is normal. F
NO >> Refer to EXL-73, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
1.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST H
2. Disconnect headlamp high connector.
4. Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item. I
5. With operating the test items, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
(+) J
Voltage
IPDM E/R (−) Test item
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
K
Hi Battery voltage
RH 25
EXTERNAL Off 0V
E45 Ground
LAMPS Hi Battery voltage EXL
LH 27
Off 0V
M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) OPEN CIRCUIT N
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and headlamp high harness connector. O
IPDM E/R Headlamp high
Continuity
P
E26 (without
RH 27 DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)
E45 1 Yes
E25 (without
LH 25 DTRL)
E74 (with DTRL)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-73 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) FUSE
2. Check that the following fuses are not fusing.
Unit Location Fuse No. Capacity

Headlamp HI (RH) #34
IPDM E/R 10 A
Headlamp HI (LH) #35
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) SHORT CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH 27
E45 No
LH 25
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is fusing again.)
NO >> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse.
5.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect headlamp high connector.
3. Check continuity between headlamp high harness connector and ground.
Headlamp high
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E26 (with DTRL) Ground
RH
E73 (without DTRL)
2 Yes
E25 (without DTRL)
LH
E74 (with DTRL)
YES >> Replace headlamp (HI) bulb. (Bulb socket is abnormal.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-74 2014 Note
HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OPERATION B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
2. With operating the test items, check that the headlamp (LO) is turned ON. C
Lo : Headlamp (LO) ON
Off : Headlamp (LO) OFF D
YES >> Headlamp (LO) is normal.
E
F
1.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
2. Disconnect headlamp low connector.
4. Select “EXTERNAL LAMPS” of IPDM E/R active test item. H
(+)
Voltage I
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Lo Battery voltage J
RH 16
EXTERNAL Off 0V
E44 Ground
LAMPS Lo Battery voltage
LH 14 K
Off 0V
YES >> GO TO 2. EXL
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) OPEN CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and headlamp low harness connector.
N
IPDM E/R Headlamp low
Continuity
E26 (without O
RH 16 DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)
E44 3 Yes
E25 (without P
LH 14 DTRL)
E73 (with DTRL)
YES >> GO TO 5.
3.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) FUSE
GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-75 2014 Note
2. Check that the following fuses are not blown.
Unit Lotion Fuse No. Capacity

Headlamp LO (RH) #40
IPDM E/R 15 A
Headlamp LO (LH) #41
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) SHORT CIRCUIT
IPDM E/R
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH 16
E44 No
LH 14
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if the fuse is blown again.)
5.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect headlamp low connector.
3. Check continuity between headlamp low harness connector and ground.
Headlamp low
Continuity
Connector Terminal
E26 (without DTRL) Ground
RH
E73 (with DTRL)
2 Yes
E25 (without DTRL)
LH
E74 (with DTRL)
YES >> Replace headlamp (LO) bulb. (Bulb socket is abnormal.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-76 2014 Note
A
The manual headlamp aiming system uses a headlamp aiming switch to adjust the axis of the headlamp aim- B
ing motor. The headlamp aiming switch has four settings, each with a different resistance value. The head-
lamp aiming motor adjusts to the proper axis based off the position of the headlamp aiming switch.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009667168 C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to EXL-65, "Wiring Diagram". D
1.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR POWER SUPPLY E

1. Disconnect headlamp aiming motor harness connectors.
3. Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor harness connectors and ground. F
Headlamp aiming motor Voltage

—
Connector Terminal (Approx.) G
E65 (RH)
E66 (LH)
H
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
I
• 10A fuse No. 5 located in the fuse block (J/B).
• Harness for open or short between headlamp aiming motor and fuse block (JB).
2.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH SIGNAL FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT J
1. Disconnect headlamp aiming switch connector M140.
2. Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch harness connector and headlamp aiming motor
harness connector. K
Headlamp aiming switch Front combination lamp

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal EXL
LH E66
M105 3 2 Yes
RH E65
M
3. Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch harness connector and ground.
Headlamp aiming switch

— Continuity N
Connector Terminal
M105 3 Ground No
Are continuity results as specified? O
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> Repair the harness or connector.
3.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT P
Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor and ground.
Front combination lamp

- Continuity
Connector Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-77 2014 Note
LH E66
1 Ground Yes
RH E65
Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 4
4.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH
Check continuity between the headlamp aiming switch terminals 1 and 2 in each switch position.
Component Terminal Switch Position Continuity

0 604 ohms
Headlamp 1 324 ohms

1 3
aiming switch 2 191 ohms
3 130 ohms
Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 5
NO >> Replace the headlamp aiming switch.
5.CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between headlamp aiming switch harness connector and ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity

M105 2 Ground Yes
Is continuity present?
YES >> Inspect headlamp aiming motors.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-78 2014 Note
A
1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT OPERATION B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select “DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT” of BCM (HEADLAMP) active test item.
2. With operating the test items, check that daytime running light operation. C
On : Daytime running light ON

Off : Daytime running light OFF D
YES >> Daytime running light relay circuit is normal.
E
F
1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY FUSE
2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing. G
Unit Fuse No. Capacity

Daytime running light relay #37 10 A H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the fuse after repairing the applicable circuit. I
2.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY POWER SUPPLY
1. Remove daytime running light relay. J
2. Check voltage between daytime running light relay harness connector and ground.
(+)
Voltage K
Daytime running light relay (−)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 EXL
E67 Ground Battery voltage
5
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY N
Check daytime running light relay. Refer to EXL-80, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 4. O
NO >> Replace daytime running light relay.
4.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL OUTPUT
P
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Install daytime running light relay.
3. Select “DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT” of BCM (HEADLAMP) active test item.
4. With operating the test item, check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-79 2014 Note
(+)
Voltage
IPDM E/R (−)
Test item (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
DAYTIME RUN- On 0V
E45 69 Ground
NING LIGHT Off Battery voltage
YES >> Daytime running light relay circuit is OK.
NO-1 (Fixed at 0 V)>>GO TO 5.
NO-2 (Fixed at battery voltage) >>Replace IPDM E/R.
5.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Remove daytime running light relay.
4. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and daytime running light relay harness connec-
tor.
IPDM E/R Daytime running light relay

Continuity
E45 69 E67 1 Yes
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Continuity
E45 69 No
1.CHECK DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT RELAY

2. Remove daytime running light relay.
3. Apply battery voltage to daytime running light relay- between terminals 1 and 2.
4. Check continuity between daytime running light relay terminals.
Daytime running lamp relay

Connector Terminal
3 Apply Yes
E67 Voltage
5 Not Apply No
he inspection result normal?
YES >> Daytime running light relay is normal.
NO >> Replace daytime running light relay.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-80 2014 Note
PARKING LAMP CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK PARKING LAMP OPERATION B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
2. With operating the test items, check that the parking lamp is turned ON. C
TAIL : Parking lamp ON

Off : Parking lamp OFF D
YES >> Parking lamp circuit is normal.
E
F
1.CHECK PARKING LAMP FUSE
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown. G

• Parking lamp
IPDM E/R #37 10 A
H
• Front side marker lamp
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
J
1. Disconnect the following connectors.
- IPDM E/R
- Front combination lamp
- Front side marker lamp K
IPDM E/R EXL

Continuity
E45 23 No
M
YES >> Replace fuse. (Replace IPDM E/R if fuse is blown again.)
N
3.CHECK PARKING LAMP BULB
Check applicable lamp bulb.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace bulb.
4.CHECK PARKING LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE P
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST

1. Disconnect front combination lamp connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-81 2014 Note
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
TAIL Battery voltage
RH
EXTERNAL Off 0V
E45 23 Ground
LAMPS TAIL Battery voltage
LH
Off 0V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R.
5.CHECK PARKING LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R Front combination lamp

Continuity
E28 (Without
RH 7
DTRL)
E27 (Without
LH 7
DTRL)
E30 (Without
RH E45 23 5 Yes
DTRL)
E29 (Without
LH 5
DTRL)
RH E77 (With DTRL) 6
LH E78 (With DTRL) 6
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK PARKING LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front combination lamp harness connector and ground.

Continuity
Connector Terminal
RH E28 (Without DTRL) 8
LH E27 (Without DTRL) 8
Ground
RH E30 (Without DTRL) 6
Yes
LH E29 (Without DTRL) 6
RH E77 (With DTRL) 7
LH E78 (With DTRL) 7
YES >> Check corresponding bulb socket and harness. Repair or replace if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-82 2014 Note
TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPERATION B

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
2. With operating the test items, check that the tail lamp is turned ON. C
TAIL : Tail Lamp ON

Off : Tail lamp OFF D
YES >> Tail lamp circuit is normal.
E
F
1.CHECK TAIL LAMP FUSE
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown. G

• Tail lamp
IPDM E/R #37 10 A
H
• license plate lamp
YES >> GO TO 3. I
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TAIL LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
J
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector, licence plate lamp connector and rear combination lamp connector.
IPDM E/R K
Continuity
E45 23 No
EXL
NO >> Repair or replace harness. And then replace the fuse. M
3.CHECK TAIL LAMP BULB
Check applicable lamp bulb.
N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace bulb.
O
4.CHECK TAIL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-83 2014 Note
TAIL LAMP CIRCUIT
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
EXTERNAL TAIL Battery voltage

E45 23 Ground
LAMPS Off 0V
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R.
5.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and rear combination lamp harness connector.
IPDM E/R Rear combination lamp

Continuity
RH B27
E45 23 1 Yes
LH B25
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK TAIL LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear combination lamp harness connector and ground.
Rear combination lamp

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH B27
6 Yes
LH B25

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-84 2014 Note
LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT
LICENSE PLATE LAMP CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK TAIL LAMP OPERATION B

Check that the tail lamp is turned ON.
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check tail lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-83, "Component Function Check".
2.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP OPERATION D
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
2. With operating the lighting switch, check that the license plate lamp is turned ON. E
TAIL : License plate lamp ON

Off : License plate lamp OFF F
YES >> License plate lamp circuit is normal.
NO >> Refer to EXL-85, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
1.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB H
Check the applicable lamp bulb.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace bulb.
2.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT J
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and license plate lamp connector.
3. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and license plate lamp harness connector. K
IPDM E/R License plate lamp

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal EXL
RH D508
E45 23 1 Yes
LH D507
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. N
3.CHECK LICENSE PLATE LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between license plate lamp harness connector and ground.
O
License plate lamp
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground P
RH D508
2 Yes
LH D507

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-85 2014 Note
TURN SIGNAL LAMP CIRCUIT
1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select “FLASHER” of BCM (FLASHER) active test item.
2. With operating the test items, check that the turn signal lamps is turned ON.
LH : Turn signal lamps (LH) ON

RH : Turn signal lamps (RH) ON
Off : Turn signal lamps OFF
YES >> Turn signal lamp circuit is normal.
1.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP

CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select “FLASHER” of BCM (FLASHER) active test item.
2. With operating the test items, check that the turn signal lamps is turned ON.
LH : Turn signal lamps (LH) ON

RH : Turn signal lamps (RH) ON
Off : Turn signal lamps OFF
Which turn signal lamp does not turn ON?
Side turn signal lamp>>GO TO 3.
Other than side turn signal lamp>>GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Check the applicable lamp bulb.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace bulb.
3.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
2. Disconnect front combination lamp connector, side turn signal lamp connector and rear combination lamp
connector.
4. With operating the turn signal switch, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-86 2014 Note
(+) A
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B
LH
C
LH 60
PKID0926E
D
Turn signal OFF 0V

M99 Ground
switch
E
RH 61 RH
F
PKID0926E
G
OFF 0V
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT I
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front combination lamp, door mirror or rear combi-
nation lamp harness connector. J
Front turn signal lamp

BCM Front combination lamp
Continuity K
RH 61 E30 (Without DTRL)
LH 60 E29 (Without DTRL) EXL
M99 4 Yes
RH 61 E76 (With DTRL)
LH 60 E75 (With DTRL)
M
Rear turn signal lamp
BCM Rear combination lamp
Continuity
N
RH 61 B27
M99 4 Yes
LH 60 B25
YES >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT P
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-87 2014 Note
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH 61
M99 No
LH 60
YES >> (When lamp other than side turn signal lamp does not turn ON) Check each bulb socket for inter-
nal short circuit, and if check result is normal, replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and
Installation".
6.CHECK TURN SIGNAL LAMP GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front combination lamp, door mirror or rear combina-
tion lamp and ground.
Front turn signal lamp
Continuity
Connector Terminal
RH E30 (Without DTRL)
6 Ground
LH E29 (Without DTRL)
Yes
RH E76 (With DTRL)
5
LH E75 (With DTRL)
Rear turn signal lamp

Rear combination lamp
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH B27
6 Yes
LH B25

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-88 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION B

WITHOUT CONSULT
1. Start IPDM E/R auto active test. Refer to PCS-9, "Diagnosis Description".
2. Check that the front fog lamp is turned ON. C
CONSULT
1. Select EXTERNAL LAMPS of IPDM E/R active test item.
2. While operating the test items, check that the front fog lamp is turned ON. D
FOG : Front fog lamp ON

OFF : Front fog lamp OFF E
Is the front fog lamp turned ON?
YES >> Front fog lamp circuit is normal.
NO >> Refer to EXL-89, "Diagnosis Procedure". F
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to EXL-32, "Wiring Diagram".

H
1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP FUSE
I
2. Check that the following fuse is not blown.

J
Front fog lamp 31 15 A
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> GO TO 2. K
NO >> Replace the fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
2.CHECK FOG LAMP BULB
Check the applicable fog lamp bulb to be sure the proper bulb standard is in use and the bulb is not open. EXL
Is the bulb OK?
YES >> GO TO 3.
M
NO >> Replace the bulb.
3.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP OUTPUT VOLTAGE
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST N
2. Disconnect front fog lamp connector.
4. Select EXTERNAL LAMPS of IPDM E/R active test item.
5. While operating the fog lamps, check voltage between front fog lamp harness connector and ground.
(+) P
Voltage
Front fog lamp (−) Test item
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-89 2014 Note
Fog Battery voltage
RH E54
Off 0V
1 Ground EXTERNAL LAMPS
Fog Battery voltage
LH E53
Off 0V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between front fog lamp harness connector and ground.
Front fog lamp

Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH E54
2 Yes
LH E53
YES >> Replace malfunctioning lamp.
NO >> Repair or replace the harness or connector.
5.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY TO FRONT FOG LAMPS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Disconnect front fog lamp relay connector E58.
2. Check continuity between the front fog lamp relay harness connector E58 and the front fog lamp connec-
tors E53 and E54.
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Continuity

E53 1
E58 3 Yes
E54 1
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check the voltage between the front fog lamp relay connector E58 and ground.
(+)
(−) Voltage
Connector Terminal
2
E58 Ground Battery voltage
5
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK IPDM E/R TO FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R connector E46.
2. Check continuity between the front fog lamp relay harness connector E58 and the IPDM E/R connector
E46.
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Continuity

E58 1 E46 71 Yes
YES >> Check the front fog lamp relay. Refer to EXL-91, "Component Inspection".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-90 2014 Note
A
1. CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY B

2. Remove front fog lamp relay.
3. Check the continuity between front fog lamp relay terminals 3 and 5 when voltage is supplied between ter-
minals 1 and 2. C

D
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
3 and 5
No current supply No
NO >> Replace front fog lamp relay.
F
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-91 2014 Note
HAZARD SWITCH
HAZARD SWITCH
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL BY CONSULT

CONSULT DATA MONITOR
2. Select “HAZARD SW” of BCM (FLASHER) data monitor item.
3. With operating the hazard switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item Condition Monitor status

ON On
HAZARD SW Hazard switch
OFF Off
YES >> Hazard switch circuit is normal.
1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT

2. Disconnect hazard switch connector.
3. Check voltage between hazard switch connector and ground.
(+)
Hazard switch (−) Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Hazard switch BCM

Continuity
M55 2 M18 29 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH SIGNAL SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and ground.
Hazard switch
Continuity
M55 2 No

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-92 2014 Note
HAZARD SWITCH
4.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT A
Check continuity between hazard switch harness connector and ground.
Hazard switch
Continuity B
M55 3 Yes
YES >> Replace hazard switch.
D
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-93 2014 Note
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table INFOID:0000000009472912
CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagno-
sis if any DTC is detected.
Symptom Possible cause Inspection item

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (HI)
• Harness between IPDM E/R Headlamp (HI) circuit
One side and headlamp (HI) Refer to EXL-73, "Component
• Harness between headlamp Function Check".
Headlamp (HI) is not (HI) and ground
turned ON. • IPDM E/R
Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Both sides
Refer to EXL-98, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Di-
agnosis Procedure".
High beam indicator lamp is not turned ON. Data monitor “HI-BEAM IND”
Combination meter
[Headlamp (HI) is turned ON.] • BCM (HEAD LAMP)
Active test “HEADLAMP”
• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (LO)
• Harness between IPDM E/R Headlamp (LO) circuit
One side and headlamp lamp (LO) Refer to EXL-75, "Component
Headlamp (LO) is not • Harness between headlamp Function Check".
turned ON. (LO) and ground
• IPDM E/R
Symptom diagnosis
Both sides “BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Fuse
• Parking lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R Parking lamp circuit
Parking lamp is not turned ON. and front combination lamp Refer to EXL-81, "Component
• Harness between front combi- Function Check".
nation lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R
• Front side marker lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R Front side marker lamp circuit
Front side marker lamp is not turned ON. and front side marker lamp Refer to EXL-81, "Component
• Harness between front side Function Check".
marker lamp and ground
• Fuse
• Tail lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R Tail lamp circuit
Tail lamp is not turned ON. and rear combination lamp Refer to EXL-83, "Component
• Harness between rear combi- Function Check".
nation lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R
• License plate lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R License plate lamp circuit
License plate lamp is not turned ON. and license plate lamp Refer to EXL-85, "Component
• Harness between license plate Function Check".
lamp and ground

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-94 2014 Note
A
Symptom diagnosis
Parking lamp, side marker lamp, tail lamp and li- “PARKING, SIDE MARKER, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE
cense plate lamp are not turned ON. NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-101, "Diagnosis Procedure". B
Tail lamp indicator is not turned ON. Data monitor “LIGHT IND”
Combination meter
(Exterior lamps are turned ON.) • BCM (HEADLAMP)
Active test “TAIL LAMP”
C
• Turn signal lamp bulb
Indicator lamp is nor-
• Door mirror
mal. Turn signal lamp circuit D
• Harness between BCM and
(Applicable side per- Refer to EXL-86, "Component
each turn signal lamp
forms high flasher acti- Function Check".
• Harness between each turn sig-
vation.)
nal lamp and ground
E
Turn signal lamp does not Combination meter
blink. Power supply and ground circuit
• Combination switch Refer to EXL-94, "WITHOUT DAY-
Indicator lamp is includ- • Harness between combination TIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : F
ed. switch and BCM Symptom Table"(without DRL) or
• BCM EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME RUN-
NING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table"(with DRL). G
One side Combination meter —
• Turn signal indicator lamp sig- • Combination meter
Both sides nal Data monitor “TURN IND”
H
(Always) • BCM • BCM (FLASHER)
• Combination meter Active test “FLASHER”
Turn signal indicator lamp
does not blink. Combination meter I
(Turn signal lamp is nor- Power supply and ground circuit
Both sides
mal.) Refer to EXL-94, "WITHOUT DAY-
(Only when activating • Combination meter power sup-
TIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
hazard warning lamp ply and ground circuit J
Symptom Table"(without DRL) or
with ignition switch • Combination meter
EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME RUN-
OFF)
Table"(with DRL).
K
• Hazard switch
• Harness between hazard
• Hazard warning lamp does not activate. Hazard switch circuit
switch and BCM
• Hazard warning lamp continues activating. Refer to EXL-92, "Component EXL
(Turn signal is normal.) Function Check".
switch and ground
• BCM
• Front fog lamp bulb M
• Harness between IPDM E/R
Front fog lamp circuit
and front fog lamp
One side Refer to EXL-89, "Component
• Harness between front fog lamp
Front fog lamp is not Function Check". N
and ground
Symptom diagnosis
Both sides “BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON” O
Refer to EXL-102, "Description".
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

P
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table INFOID:0000000009472913
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-95 2014 Note

• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (HI)
• Harness between IPDM E/R Headlamp (HI) circuit
One side and headlamp (HI) Refer to EXL-73, "Component
• Harness between headlamp Function Check".
Headlamp (HI) is not (HI) and ground
Symptom diagnosis
“BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Both sides
Refer to EXL-98, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diag-
nosis Procedure".
High beam indicator lamp is not turned ON. • Combination meter
Combination meter
[Headlamp (HI) is turned ON.] Data monitor “HI-BEAM IND”
• Fuse
• Halogen bulb (LO)
• Harness between IPDM E/R Headlamp (LO) circuit
One side and headlamp lamp (LO) Refer to EXL-79, "Component
Headlamp (LO) is not • Harness between headlamp Function Check".
turned ON. (LO) and ground
• IPDM E/R
Symptom diagnosis
Both sides “BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON”
• Fuse • Daytime running light relay circuit
• Harness between IPDM E/R Refer to EXL-79, "Component
and daytime running light relay Function Check".
• Daytime running light relay • Combination meter
Daytime running light is not turned ON.
• IPDM E/R Data monitor “PKB SW”
• BCM • BCM
• ECM Active test “DAYTIME RUNNING
• Combination meter LIGHT”
• Fuse
• Parking lamp bulb Parking lamp circuit
Parking lamp is not turned ON. • Harness between IPDM E/R Refer to EXL-81, "Component
and front combination lamp Function Check".
• IPDM E/R
• Front side marker lamp bulb
Front side marker lamp circuit
and front side marker lamp
Front side marker lamp is not turned ON. Refer to EXL-81, "Component
• Harness between front side
Function Check".
marker lamp and ground
• IPDM E/R
• Fuse
• Tail lamp bulb
Tail lamp circuit
Tail lamp (Rear side marker lamp) is not turned ON. Refer to EXL-83, "Component
and rear combination lamp
Function Check".
• Harness between and rear
combination lamp and ground
• License plate lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R License plate lamp circuit
License plate lamp is not turned ON. and license plate lamp Refer to EXL-85, "Component
• Harness between license plate Function Check".
lamp and ground
Symptom diagnosis
Parking lamp, side marker lamp, tail lamp and li- “PARKING, SIDE MARKER, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS ARE
cense plate lamp are not turned ON. NOT TURNED ON”

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-96 2014 Note
A
Tail lamp indicator is not turned ON. Data monitor “LIGHT IND”
Combination meter
(Exterior lamps are turned ON.) • BCM (HEADLAMP)
Active test “TAIL LAMP” B
• Turn signal lamp bulb
Indicator lamp is nor-
• Door mirror
mal. Turn signal lamp circuit
• Harness between BCM and
(Applicable side per-
each turn signal lamp
Refer to EXL-86, "Component C
forms high flasher acti- Function Check".
• Harness between each turn sig-
vation.)
nal lamp and ground
Turn signal lamp does not Combination meter D
blink. Power supply and ground circuit
• Combination switch Refer to EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME
Indicator lamp is includ- • Harness between combination RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
ed. switch and BCM Symptom Table" (with DRL) or EXL- E
• BCM 94, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUN-
Table" (without DRL).
F
One side Combination meter —
• Turn signal indicator lamp sig- • Combination meter
Both sides nal Data monitor “TURN IND” G
(Always) • BCM • BCM (FLASHER)
• Combination meter Active test “FLASHER”
Turn signal indicator lamp
does not blink. Combination meter
(Turn signal lamp is nor- Power supply and ground circuit
H
Both sides
mal.) Refer to EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME
(Only when activating • Combination meter power sup-
RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM :
hazard warning lamp ply and ground circuit
Symptom Table" (with DRL) or EXL-
with ignition switch • Combination meter I
94, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUN-
OFF)
Table" (without DRL).
• Hazard switch J
• Hazard warning lamp does not activate. Hazard switch circuit
switch and BCM
• Hazard warning lamp continues activating. Refer to EXL-92, "Component
(Turn signal is normal.) Function Check". K
switch and ground
• BCM
• Front fog lamp bulb
• Harness between IPDM E/R EXL
Front fog lamp circuit
and front fog lamp
One side Refer to EXL-89, "Component
• Harness between front fog lamp
Front fog lamp is not Function Check".
and ground
M
Symptom diagnosis
Both sides “BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON”
Refer to EXL-102, "Diagnosis Procedure". N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-97 2014 Note
BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (HI) ARE NOT TURNED ON
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description INFOID:0000000009472915
Both side headlamps (HI) are not turned ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS.
WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009472916
1.COMBINATION SWITCH INSPECTION

Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1. Select “HL HI REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
2. With operating the lighting switch, check the monitor status.
Lighting switch HI or PASS On

HL HI REQ
(2ND) LO Off
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check headlamp (HI) circuit. Refer to EXL-98, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description".
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Description INFOID:0000000009472917
Both side headlamps (HI) are not turned ON when setting to the lighting switch HI or PASS.
WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009472918

Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-94, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom
Table".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HEADLAMP (HI) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1. Select “HL HI REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
Lighting switch HI or PASS On

HL HI REQ
(2ND) LO Off

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-98 2014 Note
YES >> GO TO 3. A
3.HEADLAMP (HI) CIRCUIT INSPECTION
B
Check headlamp (HI) circuit. Refer to EXL-73, "Component Function Check".
YES >> Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident". C
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-99 2014 Note
BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON
BOTH SIDE HEADLAMPS (LO) ARE NOT TURNED ON
Both side headlamps (LO) are not turned ON in any condition.


Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-95, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table"
(with DRL) or EXL-94, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" (without DRL).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HEADLAMP (LO) REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1. Select “HL LO REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.

2ND On
HL LO REQ Lighting switch
OFF Off
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.HEADLAMP (LO) CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check headlamp (LO) circuit. Refer to EXL-75, "Component Function Check".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-100 2014 Note
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT
TURNED ON
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND TAIL LAMPS ARE NOT
A
TURNED ON
B
The parking, license plate, side marker, tail lamps and each illumination are not turned ON in any condition.
C
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-101, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
Is the combination switch normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. E
2.CHECK TAIL LAMP RELAY REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1. Select “TAIL & CLR REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item. F
Monitor item Condition Monitor status G

1ST On
TAIL & CLR REQ Lighting switch
OFF Off
H
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". I
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-101 2014 Note
BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON
BOTH SIDE FRONT FOG LAMPS ARE NOT TURNED ON
The front fog lamps are not turned ON in any condition.

1.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP FUSE

2. Check that the following fuse is not fusing.

Front fog lamp #31 15 A
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect front fog connector and IPDM E/R connector.
IPDM E/R
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
RH
E46 71 No
LH
Check combination switch. Refer to EXL-102, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FRONT FOG LAMP REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
1. Select “FR FOG REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
2. With operating the front fog lamp switch, check the monitor status.
Front fog lamp switch ON On

FR FOG REQ
(With lighting switch 2ND) OFF Off
Is the item status normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.FRONT FOG LAMP CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check the front fog lamp circuit. Refer to EXL-89, "Component Function Check".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-102 2014 Note
HEADLAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
B
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING

Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following: C
• Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
• Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
• Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
• Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full. D
• Remove cargo and/or luggage to maintain an unloaded vehicle condition.
• Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
• Carefully wipe off any dirt from headlamp lens. E
CAUTION:
Do not use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.)
• Place a driver or equivalent weight of 68.5 kg (150 lb) on the driver seat.
• By hand, bounce the front and rear of the vehicle to settle the suspension and eliminate any static load. F
• Place the front tires in the straight ahead position.
• Confirm headlamp aiming switch is set to "0" (zero) position.
• Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen. G
NOTE:
• For headlamp aiming details, refer to regulations in your area.
• By regulation, no means for horizontal aim adjustment is provided from the factory; only vertical aim is
H
adjustable.
• Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Perform headlamp aiming if:
- The vehicle front body has been repaired. I
- The front combination lamp has been removed or replaced.
- Any outfitting has been installed.
- The vehicle’s standard load condition has been substantially increased.
J
AIMING ADJUSTMENT SCREW
EXL
AWLIA2171ZZ O
A. Headlamp (LH) (UP/DOWN) B. Headlamp (RH) (UP/DOWN)
adjustment screw adjustment screw
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-103 2014 Note
AWLIA2170ZZ
1. Front combination lamp A. Suitable tool (for aiming adjustment) B. Adjusting screw
Aiming Adjustment Procedure INFOID:0000000009445898
1. Use the aiming adjustment screw to adjust the elbow point projected by the low beams on the screen, so
that it is within the aiming adjustment area.
Low beam distribution on the screen
A. : 150 mm (5.91 in)

B. : 100 mm (3.94 in)
C. : 100 mm (3.94 in)
JSLIA0028ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-104 2014 Note
E
JSLIA0029ZZ
C. Vertical center line of headlamp H. Horizontal center line of headlamp L. Distance from headlamp center to screen
F
X. Aiming adjustment area Y. Aiming adjustment area
(lateral) (vertical)
G
Distance from headlamp center to screen (L) : 10 m (33 ft)
Unit: mm (in)
Aiming adjustment area H
Vertical direction (Y) Lateral direction (X)
(Lower side from headlamp center height) (Left side from headlamp center line)
Highest light axis 100 (3.94) I
Target light axis 100 (3.94) 0 - 100 (3.94)
Lowest light axis 150 (5.91)
J
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM
NOTE:
• Basic illuminating area for evaluation and/or adjustment should be within range shown on aiming chart. K
1. Use adjustment screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Ensure fog lamps (if equipped) are turned off.
2. Block the opposite headlamp from projecting a beam pattern onto the adjustment screen, using a suitable EXL
object. Aim each headlamp individually.
CAUTION:
Do not cover the lens surface with tape etc. The lens is made of resin.
M
3. Place the screen on the same level and flat surface as the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Surface should be free of any debris that would cause a difference between the headlamp center and
the adjustment screen. N
4. Face the front of the vehicle to the screen and measure distance between the headlamp center and the
screen surface.
O
Distance (D) between the headlamp center and the screen : 10 m (33 ft)
5. Start the engine and turn the headlamp on.
P
6. Determine the preferred vertical aim range dimensions, using the aiming chart.
7. Measure the projected beam within the aim evaluation segment on the screen.
8. Adjust the beam pattern of each headlamp until the aim evaluation segment (the area relative to both the
highest and lowest cutoff line height) is positioned within the vertical aim range dimensions shown on the
aiming chart.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-105 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP AIMING ADJUSTMENT
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING
Before performing aiming adjustment procedure, check the following:

• Ensure all tires are inflated to correct pressure.
• Place vehicle and screen on level surface.
• Ensure there is no load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
• Coolant and engine oil filled to correct level, and fuel tank full.
• Remove cargo and/or luggage to maintain an unloaded vehicle condition.
• Confirm spare tire, jack and tools are properly stowed.
• Carefully wipe off any dirt from fog lamp lens.
CAUTION:
Do not use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline etc.)
• Place a driver or equivalent weight of 68.5 kg (150 lb) on the driver seat.
• By hand, bounce the front and rear of the vehicle to settle the suspension and eliminate any static load.
• Place the front tires in the straight ahead position.
• Aim each headlamp individually and ensure other headlamp beam pattern is blocked from screen.
NOTE:
• For headlamp aiming details, refer to regulations in your area.
• By regulation, no means for horizontal aim adjustment is provided from the factory; only vertical aim is
adjustable.
• Use adjusting screw to perform aiming adjustment.
• Perform headlamp aiming if:
- The vehicle front body has been repaired.
- The front combination lamp has been removed or replaced.
- Any outfitting has been installed.
- The vehicle’s standard load condition has been substantially increased.
• Turn the aiming adjusting screw using a suitable tool to aim the fog
lamp.
A: UP
B: DOWN
JMLIA2040ZZ
Aiming Adjustment Procedure INFOID:0000000009445909
1. Screen placement.
NOTE:
• Place the screen perpendicular to the level road.
• Position the vehicle facing the screen with 10 m (33 ft) between the front fog lamp center and the
screen.
2. Start the engine. Illuminate the front fog lamp.
CAUTION:
Do not cover the lens surface with a tape etc. The lens are made of resin.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-106 2014 Note
3. Adjust the cutoff line height (A) with the aiming adjustment
screw so that the distance (X) between the horizontal center line A
of front fog lamp (H) and (A) becomes 200 mm (7.87 in).
Front fog lamp light distribution on the screen
• A :Cutoff line
B
• B :High illuminance
• H :Horizontal center line of front fog lamp
• V :Vertical center line of front fog lamp
• X :Cutoff line height C
JPLIA0008ZZ
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-107 2014 Note
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP
JMLIA3217GB
1. Front fender 2. Radiator core upper support 3. Front combination lamp
REMOVAL
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-16, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front combination lamp bolts.
3. Pull front combination lamp forward.
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from front combination lamp and remove.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
After installation, perform headlamp aiming adjustment procedure. Refer to EXL-104, "Aiming Adjustment Pro-
cedure".
Bulb Replacement INFOID:0000000009015734
WARNING:
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to pre-
vent damage to the bulb.
• Do not leave bulb out of lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
HEADLAMP BULB
GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-108 2014 Note
Removal
1. Remove plastic cover. A
2. Remove bulb from the front combination lamp.
Installation
B
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness.
C
SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB
Removal
1. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. D
2. Remove the bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
E
CAUTION:
F
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP BULB
Removal
1. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove. G
2. Remove the bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
H
CAUTION:
I
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-109 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
FRONT FOG LAMP
AWLIA2178ZZ
1. Front fog lamp 2. Front bumper fascia A. Front fog lamp bracket
REMOVAL
1. Partially remove front fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector from front fog lamp.
3. Remove screws and front fog lamp.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
After installation, perform fog lamp aiming adjustment procedure. Refer to EXL-104, "Aiming Adjustment Pro-
cedure".
WARNING:
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
1. Partially remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-24, "Exploded View".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-110 2014 Note
FRONT FOG LAMP
2. Disconnect harness connector (1) from front fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb (2) counterclockwise and remove. A
SKIB8304J
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install the bulb socket securely for watertightness. E
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-111 2014 Note
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
CAUTION:
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not use air or electric tools when removing or installing the combination switch.
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
2. Remove the steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, "Removal and Installation".
3. Rotate steering wheel clockwise to access first combination
switch screw (A) and remove.
ALMIA0648ZZ
4. Rotate steering wheel counter-clockwise to access second com-

bination switch screw (A) and remove.
5. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the combination
switch (1) and remove.
ALMIA0649ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
• In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset with the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory with CONSULT.
• If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair malfunc-
tions. Refer to EXL-70, "Work Flow".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-112 2014 Note
HAZARD SWITCH
HAZARD SWITCH
A
AWLIA2163ZZ
Cluster lid C Hazard switch Pawl G

1. 2.

H
REMOVAL
I
2. Release pawls and remove hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-113 2014 Note
HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH
HEADLAMP AIMING SWITCH
AWLIA2172ZZ
1. Instrument lower panel LH 2. Headlamp aiming switch Pawl
REMOVAL
2. While pressing pawls, push the headlamp aiming switch to remove.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-114 2014 Note
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
A
AWLIA2167ZZ
1. Rear combination lamp A. Grommet B. Clip G

Locating pin

H
REMOVAL
I
1. Remove rear combination lamp bolts.
2. Release the locating pin (A) of the rear combination lamp using
a suitable tool (B) as shown.
J
EXL
AWLIA2169ZZ
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the rear combination lamp and remove. M
INSTALLATION
WARNING: O
Do not touch bulb with bare hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to pre- P
STOP/TAIL LAMP BULB
Removal
1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-115 2014 Note
2. Rotate stop/tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove stop/tail lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
CAUTION:
After installing the bulb, install bulb socket securely for watertightness.
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
Removal
2. Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
CAUTION:
BACK-UP LAMP BULB
Removal
2. Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Installation
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-116 2014 Note
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
A
AWLIA2164ZZ
G
1. High-mounted stop lamp 2. High-mounted stop lamp LED Pawl

H
REMOVAL
1. Release high-mounted stop lamp pawls using a suitable tool.
I
2. Disconnect the harness connector from high-mounted stop lamp and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP BULB K

The high-mounted stop lamp bulb is a LED and is integrated into the high-mounted stop lamp and is serviced
as an assembly. Refer to EXL-117, "Removal and Installation".
EXL

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-117 2014 Note
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
LICENSE PLATE LAMP
AWLIA2173ZZ
1. License plate lamp bulb socket 2. License plate lamp bulb 3. Seal
4. License plate lamp Pawl
REMOVAL
1. Remove back door outer finisher. Refer to EXT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect harness connector from license plate lamp.
3. Release license plate lamp pawl and remove license plate lamp.
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Do not touch bulb with your hand while it is on or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
1. Remove license plate lamp. Refer to EXL-118, "Removal and Installation".
2. Rotate license plate lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove license plate lamp bulb from bulb socket.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-118 2014 Note
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A
B
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP - WITHOUT AIMING MOTOR

C
G
AWLIA2165ZZ
1. Front combination lamp 2. Side marker lamp bulb 3. Side marker lamp socket
4. Headlamp bulb 5. Lock ring 6. Front turn signal/Parking
H
lamp bulb socket
7. Front turn signal/Parking lamp bulb
I
FRONT COMBINATION LAMP - WITH AIMING MOTOR
EXL
JMLIA3219ZZ
O
1. Front combination lamp 2. Side marker lamp bulb 3. Side marker lamp bulb socket
4. Lock ring 5. Front turn signal/parking lamp 6. Front turn signal/parking lamp
bulb socket bulb
P
7. Headlamp Bulb 8. Retaining spring
WARNING:
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-119 2014 Note
• Do not touch glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent
damage to bulb.
• Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of the lamp.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-108, "Removal and Installation".
2. Rotate lock ring counterclockwise and remove.
3. Remove headlamp bulb.
4. Rotate side marker bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
5. Remove the side marker lamp bulb from the side marker bulb socket.
6. Rotate turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.
7. Remove turn signal/parking lamp bulb from turn signal/parking lamp bulb socket.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• After installing the headlamp bulb, be sure to install lock ring securely to ensure watertightness.
• After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-120 2014 Note
A
Exploded View - Non LED INFOID:0000000009670499
REAR COMBINATION LAMP - NON LED B
AWLIA2166ZZ
G
1. Rear combination lamp 2. Rear tail lamp bulb 3. Rear back-up lamp bulb
Rear turn signal lamp bulb Rear combination lamp har-
4. 5.
ness connector
H
Disassembly and Assembly - Non LED INFOID:0000000009670500
REAR COMBINATION LAMP I

WARNING:
CAUTION: J
damage to bulb.
K
Disassembly
1. Remove rear combination lamp. Refer to EXL-115, "Removal and Installation". EXL
2. Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
3. Remove the rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.
4. Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp. M
5. Remove the back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.
6. Rotate stop/tail lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
N
7. Remove the stop/tail lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Assembly
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly. O
CAUTION:
After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-121 2014 Note
Exploded View - LED INFOID:0000000009670501
REAR COMBINATION LAMP - LED
JMLIA3231ZZ
1. Rear combination lamp 2. Rear tail lamp bulb 3. Rear LED lamp harness con-
nector
4. Rear back-up lamp bulb 5. Rear turn signal lamp bulb
Disassembly and Assembly - LED INFOID:0000000009670502

WARNING:
CAUTION:
damage to bulb.
Disassembly
2. Rotate rear turn signal lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
3. Remove the rear turn signal lamp bulb from bulb socket.
4. Rotate back-up lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
5. Remove the back-up lamp bulb from bulb socket.
6. Disconnect the harness connector from the LED lamp.
7. Rotate side marker lamp bulb socket counterclockwise to remove from rear combination lamp.
8. Remove the side marker lamp bulb from bulb socket.
Assembly
CAUTION:
After installing, be sure to install the bulb sockets securely to ensure watertightness.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-122 2014 Note
Bulb specification INFOID:0000000009015753
B
ARGENTINA MODELS ONLY

C
Item Wattage (W)*
Headlamp (HI/LO) 60/55
Front combination Front turn signal lamp 21 D
Side marker lamp 5
Fog lamp (if equipped) 55
E
Daytime running lamp built-in fog lamp 19
Stop lamp LED
Tail lamp 5 F
Rear combination Rear turn signal lamp 21
Back-up lamp 21
License plate lamp 5
G
Normal glass LED

High-mounted stop lamp
Privacy glass LED H
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info.
NON ARGENTINA MODELS I
Item Wattage (W)*

Headlamp (HI/LO) 65/55 J
Front combination Front turn signal/Parking lamp 27/8
Side marker lamp 5
K
Fog lamp (if equipped) 55
Stop/Tail lamp 21/5
Rear combination Rear turn signal lamp 21 EXL
Back-up lamp 21
License plate lamp 5
M
Normal glass LED
High-mounted stop lamp
Privacy glass LED
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info. N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXL-123 2014 Note
EXT
A
B
SECTION
EXTERIOR C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 COWL TOP ....................................................... 22 F
Exploded View .........................................................22
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................23
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- FENDER PROTECTOR .................................... 24
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................24
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover ....................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................24
H
UNDER COVER ................................................ 25
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
FRONT UNDER COVER ............................................25
FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View ..............25 I
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tools .............................................. 4 FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installa-
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 4 tion ...........................................................................25
Exploded View .........................................................26 J
CLIP LIST ............................................................ 5
Descriptions for Clips ................................................ 5 FLOOR UNDER COVER ...........................................26
FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installa-
EXT
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 9 tion ...........................................................................26
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- REAR WIND DEFLECTOR ........................................27

NOSES ................................................................ 9 REAR WIND DEFLECTOR : Removal and Instal- L
Work Flow ................................................................. 9 lation ........................................................................27
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting .......... 10 ROOF SIDE MOLDING ..................................... 28
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 13 M
Exploded View .........................................................28
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 15 Removal and Installation .........................................28
FRONT BUMPER ...............................................15 DOOR SASH TAPE .......................................... 30 N

Exploded View .........................................................30
Exploded View ........................................................ 15
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ............................. 32 O
REAR BUMPER .................................................18
Exploded View .........................................................32
Exploded View ........................................................ 18
Removal and Installation ......................................... 18 Removal and Installation .........................................33
P
FRONT GRILLE .................................................21 BACK DOOR FINISHER ................................... 34
Exploded View ........................................................ 21 Exploded View .........................................................34
Removal and Installation ......................................... 21 Removal and Installation .........................................34

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000009444681
the windshield.
PIIB3706J
- Oily dirt:
GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
area. A
B
EXT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear
SIIA0993E

(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle
Kit
ALJIA1232ZZ

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Tool name
Engine Ear
SIIA0995E

Power tool
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-4 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
CLIP LIST
A
Descriptions for Clips INFOID:0000000009442998
Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation. B
EXT
SIIA0315E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-5 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
SIIA0316E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-6 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
EXT
SIIA0317E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-7 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
ALJIA0564GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-8 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
G
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW H
customer's comments; refer to EXT-13, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs. I
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is J
EXT
defining the noise.
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping. L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity. M
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door) N
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver O
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee) P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-9 2014 Note
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope).
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
Refer to EXT-10, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
ment.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
• The following materials not found in the kit can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
- DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-10 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between: A
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher B
C
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by D
ness.
CAUTION: E
F
CENTER CONSOLE
G
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console. H
DOORS
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise I
J
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise. EXT
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner. L
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment M
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus- N
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following: O
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-11 2014 Note
SEATS
noise.
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
ditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
UNDERHOOD
1. Any component installed to the engine wall
6. Hood striker out of adjustment

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-12 2014 Note
EXT
LAIA0072E
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-13 2014 Note
LAIA0071E

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-14 2014 Note
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER
B
EXT
N
AWKIA2583ZZ
1. Front bumper fascia side bracket 2. Front bumper reinforcement 3. Front energy absorber
(RH) O
4. Front fascia side deflector (RH) 5. Front fog lamp (RH) (if equipped) 6. Tow cover
7. Front license plate bracket 8. Front bumper fascia 9. Front fog lamp (LH) (if equipped)
10. Front fascia side deflector (LH) 11. Front under cover 12. Front bumper fascia side bracket P
(LH)
13. Front bumper reinforcement 14. Front bumper reinforcement A. J nut
bracket (RH) bracket (LH)
B. Front fog lamp bracket Pawl

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-15 2014 Note
FRONT BUMPER
CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Use care when handling to prevent damage. Avoid contact with oily
substances.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grille. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the four front bumper fascia upper clips.
3. Remove the front under cover. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation".
4. Partially remove front fender protectors (LH/RH) at the front edge to access front bumper fascia bolts.
Refer to EXT-24, "Exploded View".
5. Remove front bumper fascia bolts (A) (LH/RH).
JMKIA8017ZZ
6. Remove the front bumper fascia from the front bumper fascia
side brackets (LH/RH) by releasing the pawls as shown.
: Pawl
CAUTION:
When removing front bumper fascia, two people are
required to avoid damaging.
AWKIA1890ZZ
7. Disconnect the harness connectors from the front fog lamps (LH/RH) (if equipped).
8. Remove front bumper fascia.
9. Remove the following parts after removing front bumper fascia (if necessary).
• Tow cover
• Front fog lamps (LH/RH) (if equipped). Refer to EXL-110, "Removal and Installation".
• Front license plate bracket
10. Remove the front energy absorber (if necessary).
11. Remove nuts and front bumper reinforcement (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
Tighten the front bumper reinforcement nuts to specification (if removed). Refer to EXT-15, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation specifications.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-16 2014 Note
FRONT BUMPER
AWKIA2515ZZ H
Section Measurement Minimum Target Value Maximum

A-A Clearance 0.0 (0.00) 2.0 (0.08) 4.0 (0.16)
I
B-B Clearance 2.4 (0.09) 4.4 (0.17) 6.4 (0.25)
B-B Surface height -1.5 (-0.06) 0.5 (0.02) 1.99 (0.08)
C-C Clearance 0.0 (0.00) 2.0 (0.08) 4.0 (0.16) J
D-D Clearance 0.0 (0.00) 1.5 (0.06) 3.0 (0.12)
D-D Surface height 0.0 (0.00) 1.5 (0.06) 3.0 (0.12)
EXT
E-E Clearance 0.01 (0.00) 2.0 (0.08) 4.0 (0.16)
F-F Clearance 0.1 (0.00) 0.3 (0.01) 1.0 (0.04)
F-F Surface height -0.1 (0.00) 0.7 (0.03) 1.7 (0.07) L

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-17 2014 Note
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
AWKIA2520ZZ
1. Rear bumper fascia side 2. Rear bumper reinforcement support 3. Rear bumper closing (LH)
bracket (LH) (LH)
4. Rear bumper fascia 5. Rear bumper finisher 6. Rear bumper fascia spacer
7. Rear bumper reinforcement 8. Rear bumper closing (RH) 9. Rear bumper reinforcement
support (RH)
10. Rear bumper fascia side A. J nut Pawl
bracket (RH)
CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Use care when handling to prevent damage. Avoid contact with oily
substances.
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear combination lamps (LH/RH). Refer to EXL-115, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-18 2014 Note
REAR BUMPER
2. Remove screws (A) and clip (B) from rear bumper closings (1)
(LH/RH). A
ALKIA2525ZZ
D
3. Remove the rear bumper fascia upper bolt (A) (LH/RH) from
each side of the rear bumper fascia (1).
E
G
AWKIA2526ZZ
4. Remove rear bumper fascia lower clips.

H
5. Remove the rear bumper fascia from the rear bumper fascia
side brackets (LH/RH) by releasing the pawls as shown.
: Pawl
I
CAUTION:
When removing rear bumper fascia, two people are
required to avoid damaging.
J
EXT
AWKIA2523ZZ
6. Remove the following parts after removing rear bumper fascia (if necessary).
• Two clips each and rear bumper closings (LH/RH) L
• Two screws and rear bumper finisher
• Rear bumper fascia spacers
• Two bolts each and rear bumper side brackets (LH/RH) M
7. Remove rear bumper reinforcement nuts and rear bumper reinforcement (if necessary).
8. Remove rear bumper reinforcement support nuts from each and the rear bumper reinforcement supports
(LH/RH) (if necessary). N
INSTALLATION
NOTE: O
• The following table shows the specified values for checking normal installation specifications.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be performed.
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-19 2014 Note
REAR BUMPER
ALKIA3207ZZ
Section Measurement Minimum Target Value Maximum

A-A Clearance 0.1 (0.00) 0.3 (0.01) 1.0 (0.04)
B-B Clearance 0.0 (0.00) 1.5 (0.06) 3.5 (0.14)
B-B Surface height -1.5 (-0.06) 0.5 (0.02) 2.5 (0.10)
C-C Clearance 3.0 (0.12) 5.0 (0.20) 7.0 (0.28)
C-C Surface height -2.0 (-0.08) -1.5 (-0.06) 3.5 (0.14)
D-D Clearance 5.0 (0.20) 7.0 (0.28) 9.0 (0.35)

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-20 2014 Note
FRONT GRILLE
FRONT GRILLE
A
I
AWKIA2553ZZ
1. Front grille finisher 2. Front grille 3. Front emblem J

Pawl Clip

EXT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grille finisher clips. L
2. Release pawls using a suitable tool and remove the front grille finisher.
3. Release the clips using a suitable tool, then pull the front grille away from vehicle to release pawls and
remove. M
4. Release pawls and remove front emblem from front grille (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-21 2014 Note
COWL TOP
COWL TOP
AWKIA2518ZZ
1. Cowl top side cover (RH) 2. Front fender seal (RH) 3. Cowl top extension
4. EPT seal [t: 5.0 mm (0.197 in)] 5. Cowl top cover seal 6. Front fender seal (LH)
7. One-way valve 8. Cowl top cover 9. Cowl top cover cap
10. Cowl top side cover (LH) 11. EPT seal [t: 3.0 mm (0.118 in)] 12. EPT seal [t: 15.0 mm (0.591 in)]
Front Clip Pawl

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-22 2014 Note
COWL TOP
A
REMOVAL
1. Remove front wiper arms (LH/RH). Refer to WW-58, "Removal and Installation".
B
2. Remove cowl top side covers (LH/RH).
3. Remove cowl top cover clips.
4. Pull forward to release cowl top cover from windshield. C
CAUTION:
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top
cover, cover the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
to prevent damage to the windshield. D
JMKIA8047ZZ
F
5. Disconnect the washer tube connector and harness clips.
6. Remove cowl top cover.
G
7. Remove the following parts after removing cowl top cover (if necessary).
• EPT seals
• Cowl top cover seal
• Washer tube H
• Washer nozzles (LH/RH). Refer to WW-55, "WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
I
CAUTION:
• Always replace EPT seals with new ones when reusing the cowl top cover.
• When installing EPT seal (2) of portion (A) on cowl top cover (1), install EPT seal by aligning to the J
line of (B) and setting portion (C) in cowl top cover.
EXT
M
JMKIB0738ZZ
• After installing cowl top cover (2), check that side surface of EPT seal (1) makes contact with wind- N
shield glass (3).
JMKIB0739ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-23 2014 Note
FENDER PROTECTOR
FENDER PROTECTOR
AWKIA2513ZZ
1. Front fender protector A. J nut Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove fender protector screws and clips.
2. Remove fender protector.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-24 2014 Note
UNDER COVER
UNDER COVER
A
FRONT UNDER COVER
FRONT UNDER COVER : Exploded View INFOID:0000000009444682
B
EXT
AWKIA2555ZZ
M
1. Front under cover
FRONT UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009444683

N
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-16, "Removal and Installation". O
2. Remove the front under cover clips and nuts.
3. Slide the front under cover forward slightly to release pawls and to allow clearance of studs, then remove
the front under cover. P
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-25 2014 Note
UNDER COVER
JMKIB0581ZZ
1. Rear floor under cover (RH) 2. Rear floor under cover (LH) 3. Grommet
4. Rear wind deflector Front
FLOOR UNDER COVER

FLOOR UNDER COVER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009645125
REMOVAL
Remove the rear floor under cover nuts and the rear floor under cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-26 2014 Note
UNDER COVER
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A
REAR WIND DEFLECTOR
REAR WIND DEFLECTOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009645126 B
REMOVAL
Remove the rear wind deflector screws and the rear wind deflector. C
INSTALLATION
D
EXT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-27 2014 Note
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
AWKIA2556ZZ
1. Roof side molding 2. Roof side molding clip 3. Roof panel

4. Body side outer panel 5. Double-sided tape 6. Double-sided tape
[t: 2.5 mm (0.098 in)] [t: 4.0 mm (0.157 in)]
ROOF SIDE MOLDING

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-28 2014 Note
ROOF SIDE MOLDING
Removal
Lift using a suitable tool (A), then pull the roof side molding from the A
roof panel, starting from the front of vehicle and moving toward the
rear.
: Clip B
AWKIA2560ZZ D
Installation
CAUTION: E
Replace the double-sided tape on the back surface with new double-sided tape when reusing the roof
side molding.
ROOF SIDE MOLDING CLIP F
Removal
1. Remove roof side molding. G
2. Heat double sided tape using a suitable tool, then remove roof side molding clips using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage the body paint. H
Installation
1. Clean tape removed surface with a shop cloth soaked in white gasoline or IPA.
2. Use two-part epoxy adhesive. I
Adhesive : 3M-weld DP–100 or equivalent

J
3. Apply adhesive evenly to clip tape surface.
Thickness : Approximately 0.5 mm (0.02 in) EXT

4. Position clip to the proper location, then sufficiently press-fit until the adhesive protrudes to tape side.
Press-fit limit : 19.6 N (2.0 Kg - 4.41 lb) × 2 seconds L

5. Tape clips after press fit to temporarily hold for specified time based on the following conditions.
M
5 to 10 °C (41 to 50 °F) : 1 hour or more
11 to 23 °C (52 to 73 °F) : 30 minutes or more
24 °C or more (75 °F or more) : 15 minutes or more N
6. Install roof side molding from rear of vehicle to front after removing the temporary hold tape.
CAUTION:
• When installing roof side molding, check that the molding is securely inserted into the clips. O
• Do not wash the vehicle within 24 hours so as to keep adhesive dry.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-29 2014 Note
DOOR SASH TAPE
DOOR SASH TAPE
JMKIB0613ZZ
1. Front door sash front tape 2. Front door sash rear tape 3. Rear door sash front tape
4. Rear door sash rear tape 5. Center pillar tape

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-30 2014 Note
DOOR SASH TAPE
A
REMOVAL
Heat door sash tape surface using a suitable tool and remove door sash tape.
CAUTION: B
Use care not to damage body paint.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: C
• Degrease door assembly surface for sash tape.
• Grit or dust on surface of sash tape may spoil exterior appearance if not removed. Clean the surface
and check that no grit or dust remains before starting the operation. D
• Do not reuse blackout tape.
1. Affix door sash tape (2) to door panel (3) by applying pressure using a squeegee (A) while peeling off
release coated paper (1). E
NOTE:
• Peel release coated paper at distance of 10 – 20 mm (0.4 – 0.8 in) ahead (B) of squeegee and affix
blackout paper.
• To prevent any bubbles from forming, slightly lift the portion not yet affixed using a squeegee, so that F
portion dose not contact with panel surface. Apply pressure and affix at a low and constant speed using
squeegee tilted at 40 – 50° angle (pushing direction) (C) 30 – 45° angle (pulling direction) (D).
G
EXT
JMKIA4862GB
L
2. For small radius portion of hemming part, gradually apply pres-
sure and affix door sash tape (1) using squeegee (A) as shown.
CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle with in 24 hours so as to keep M
adhesive dry.
O
JMKIA4655ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-31 2014 Note
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
AWKIA2517ZZ
1. Front door outside molding 2. Rear door outside molding 3. Front door panel

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-32 2014 Note
4. Rear door panel 5. Rear door glass 6. Front door glass
Pawl A
B
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal
C
1. Lower front door glass fully.
2. Release the pawls using a suitable tool, then rotate front door outside molding toward the outside of the
vehicle and lift up to remove. D
Installation
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING E
Removal
1. Lower rear door glass fully. F
2. Release the pawl using a suitable tool, then rotate rear door outside molding toward the outside of the
vehicle and lift up to remove.
Installation G
EXT

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-33 2014 Note
BACK DOOR FINISHER
BACK DOOR FINISHER
AWKIA2514ZZ
1. Rear camera (if equipped) 2. Back door outer finisher 3. Back door request switch
Clip
REMOVAL
lation".
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from back door request switch.
3. Remove back door outer finisher nuts.
4. Release clips and remove the back door outer finisher.
5. Remove back door request switch from the back door outer finisher (if necessary).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing back door finisher, check that clips are securely placed into body panel holes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EXT-34 2014 Note
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
FAX
A
B
SECTION
FRONT AXLE C
FAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Exploded View .......................................................... 9 F
Removal and Installation .......................................... 9
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................11
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection ................................................................13 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT .......................... 14
Precaution for Drive Shaft ......................................... 2 Exploded View .........................................................14
H
Precautions for Wheel Hub and Knuckle .................. 2
WHEEL SIDE .............................................................14
PREPARATION ............................................ 3 WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation ................15
TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................18 I

PREPARATION ................................................... 3
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation .......18
Inspection ................................................................18
J
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ..................................... 19
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 6
Exploded View .........................................................19
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS Removal and Installation .........................................19
K
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 6
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 21
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 6
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ..................................... 21 L
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7 Exploded View .........................................................21
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 7 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................22
Inspection .................................................................. 7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS M
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ........................................ 8 (SDS) ............................................................ 27
Inspection .................................................................. 8
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS N
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 9 (SDS) ................................................................. 27
Wheel Bearing .........................................................27
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 9 Drive Shaft ...............................................................27
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000009541307
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft.
• Do not disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts.
• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
• Clean the parts, before disassembling and assembling.
• Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location.
• Reassemble disassembled parts carefully in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be
placed over parts.
• Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
• Clean disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with
air or wiping with paper waste.
Precautions for Wheel Hub and Knuckle INFOID:0000000009541308
Observe the following precautions when assembling wheel hub and knuckle.
• Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
• Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
• If any of wheel hub, steering knuckle, wheel bearing, and wheel hub lock nut is dropped, it must not be used.
• Always check that the tools used for press-fit work of wheel hub and wheel bearing have no wear and defor-
mation so that a pressure can be applied vertically.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
KV40104000 Removing and Installing wheel hub lock nut
( — ) a: 85 mm (3.35 in) FAX
Hub lock nut wrench b: 65 mm (2.56 in)
ZZA0802D
F
ST33710000 Removing wheel hub
( — ) a: 30 mm (1.18 in) dia.
Drift b: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.
G
H
ZZA1233D
ST30031000 Removing wheel bearing inner race (outer)

( — )
Puller I
ZZA0700D
ST35321000 • Removing wheel bearing K

( — ) • Installing wheel hub
Drift a: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
L
ZZA1051D
M
ST35271000 Installing wheel bearing
( — ) a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
Drift b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
N
O
ZZA0837D
ST33061000 Installing wheel hub

( — ) a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia. P
Drift b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
ZZA1051D

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV40107300 Installing boot band
( — )
Boot band crimping tool
ZZA1229D
KV40107500 Removing drive shaft

( — )
Drive shaft attachment
ZZA1230D
KV38107900 Installing drive shaft

( — ) a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
Differential side oil seal protector
PDIA1183J

Drive shaft puller Removing drive shaft joint sub-assembly
JPDIG0152ZZ
Sliding hammer Removing drive shaft
ZZA0023D
Ball joint remover Removing wheel stud
NT146

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-4 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
A
Drift • Installing wheel bearing
• Installing splash guard
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
B
C
ZZA0898D
Drift Installing splash guard

a: 95 mm (3.74 in) dia.
FAX
JPDIC0679ZZ
Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts F
PIIB1407E
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-5 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
FSU-20
FSU-6
FAX-7
FAX-7
WT-5
WT-4
BR-7
ST-7
Reference
—
Improper installation, looseness
Wheel bearing damage
FRONT SUSPENSION
Joint sliding resistance
Excessive joint angle
Parts interference
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT AXLE
STEERING
Imbalance
BRAKE
TIRE
DRIVE Noise × × × × × × × × ×
SHAFT Shake × × × × × × × × ×
Noise × × × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × × × ×
Symptom
FRONT Vibration × × × × × × ×
AXLE Shimmy × × × × × × ×
Shudder × × × × × ×
Poor quality ride or handling × × × × ×
×: Applicable

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-6 2014 Note
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
B
COMPONENT PART
• Check that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions C
(wear, damage) are normal.
• Check the axle and suspension parts for excessive play, weary or damage.
• Shake each front wheel to check for excessive play.
FAX
SMA525A
G
FRONT WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Move the wheel bearing in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness in the wheel bearing. H
Axial end play : Refer to FAX-27.
• Rotate the wheel bearing and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are I
any irregular conditions, replace wheel bearing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-7 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

• Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage.
CAUTION:
Replace entire drive shaft when noise or vibration occurs from drive shaft.
• Check boot for cracks and other damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-8 2014 Note
B
FAX
AWDIA1108ZZ J
1. Steering knuckle 2. Splash guard 3. Wheel bearing

4. Snap ring 5. Wheel stud 6. Wheel hub
K
7. Disc brake rotor 8. Wheel hub lock nut 9. Cotter pin

L
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation".
M
2. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
3. Remove brake caliper using power tool, leaving brake hose connected. Reposition brake caliper aside
N
with wire. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
NOTE:
Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put matching marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub, then remove disc brake rotor. O
CAUTION:
• Use paint for matching parts. Do not damage the disc brake rotor or wheel hub.
• Do not drop disc rotor. P
5. Remove and discard cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using Tool.
6. Separate the drive shaft from the wheel hub by lightly tapping the end of the drive shaft using a suitable
tool and a wood block.
NOTE:
GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-9 2014 Note
Use suitable puller if wheel hub and drive shaft cannot be separated after performing the above proce-
dure.
7. Remove wheel hub lock nut.
8. Remove the nut and separate the steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-14, "Exploded
View".
9. Remove the nuts and bolts, then separate the steering knuckle from strut. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded
View".
10. Suspend the drive shaft with suitable wire.
CAUTION:
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Do not allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the
other parts.
11. Remove transverse link outer nut and bolt. Remove steering knuckle from transverse link.
12. If necessary, remove wheel studs (1) from wheel hub using the
suitable tool (A).
CAUTION:
• Remove stud only when necessary.
• Do not hammer the wheel stud or damage to the wheel
bearing may occur.
• Press the wheel stud straight out to avoid damaging the
stud.
JPDIF0299ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of the removal.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse the transverse link outer nut.
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing.
• Do not allow paint to adhere to the wheel bearing seal.
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter, clean
the mounting surface.
• Position the stud (1) to the wheel hub flange. Place a washer (A)
and nut (B) on the opposite end of the stud. Tighten to press the
stud into the wheel hub flange.
CAUTION:
• Check that no clearance exists between wheel hub and
wheel stud after installation.
• Do not reuse wheel stud.
JPDIF0300ZZ
• Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION:
Do not apply lubricating oil to the mating surface of the wheel hub lock nut and the wheel hub.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-10 2014 Note
• Clean the mating surfaces of drive shaft, wheel hub, and wheel
bearing. Apply Molykote M77 to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly. A
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-
assembly.
B
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts infor-
mation.
C
Molykote M77 quantity : FAX-27, "Drive Shaft"
JSDIA2844ZZ
FAX
• When reusing disc rotor, align the matching marks during removal.
• When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the cotter pin to prevent rattles.
CAUTION: E
Do not reuse cotter pin.
F
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove wheel hub using Tool.
G
Tool number : ST33710000 ( — )
2. Remove splash guard from steering knuckle. H
SDIA0758J
J
3. Remove wheel bearing inner race (outer side) from wheel hub
using Tools.
K
L
M
SDIA0759J
4. Remove snap ring from steering knuckle using suitable tool. N

CAUTION:
Do not damage steering knuckle.
5. Remove wheel bearing from steering knuckle using Tool. O

P
SDIA0760J

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-11 2014 Note
ASSEMBLY
1. Install wheel bearing to steering knuckle using the Tool (A) and a
suitable tool (B).

CAUTION:
• Do not reuse wheel bearing.
• Do not apply a cleaning agent or anticorrosive to the
mounting surfaces of the wheel bearing and steering
knuckle.
• Install wheel bearing with the wheel sensor rotor rubber
part (C) faced to the steering knuckle inner side. JPDIF0306ZZ
• The wheel sensor rotor of the wheel bearing must be kept

free of foreign matter.
• The press-fit load must be applied to the wheel bearing outer race and the steering knuckle.
• Do not apply press-fit load to the wheel bearing inner race, the seal (C) on the rubber surface
side (wheel sensor rotor side), and the seal (D) on the metallic surface side. If a press-fit load is
applied, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.
Wheel bearing : Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel

press-fit load Bearing"
2. Install snap ring to steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal.
• The snap ring must be installed evenly into the groove.
3. Press splash guard (1) into the steering knuckle using suitable
tools (A and B).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse splash guard.
JSDIA2728ZZ
4. Install wheel hub using Tools.
Tool number (A) : ST33061000 ( — )

Tool number (B) : ST35321000 ( — )
CAUTION:
• Do not apply lubricating oil to the press-fit surface of the
wheel hub bearing.
• Set wheel hub and wheel bearing horizontally and insert
them vertically.
• The press-fit load must be applied to the wheel hub and
JPDIF0284ZZ
the wheel bearing inner race.
• Do not apply press-fit load to the steering knuckle and the wheel bearing, the seal. If a press-fit
load is applied, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.
• Apply a press-fit load and maintain the loaded state for 30 seconds.
• If the inserted wheel hub is removed again, the wheel bearing must be replaced with a new one.


GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-12 2014 Note
A
• Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage. B
• Check boots of transverse link and steering outer socket ball joint for breakage, axial end play, and swing
torque. Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint" and FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing".
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY C
Wheel Hub
• Check wheel hub for cracks (with magnetic exploration or dye testing). Replace if necessary.
FAX
Steering Knuckle
• Check steering knuckle for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Replace if any non-standard conditions
are found.
E
Snap Rings
• Check snap ring for wear or cracks. Replace if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY F
Check wheel bearing rotating torque as per the following instructions.
NOTE:
The adequacy of turning torque can be judged from a measurement value by a spring balancer. G
1. For a proper fit of the bearing, turn the wheel hub clockwise and counterclockwise, respectively, 10 times
or more with a press-fit load applied.
H
2. Set a spring balance on strut mounting hole (upper). Measure I
rotating torque at an rpm of 8 - 12 rpm.
Rotating torque : Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing". J

Spring balance : Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing".
measurement
K
• If the turning torque cannot be obtained by the above method,
measure the torque, according to the instructions below.
- Install drive shaft and tighten the hub lock nut to the specified
torque. Rotate the wheel hub to fit properly. SDIA0762J
L
- Set a spring balancer to the hub bolt and measure turning torque
at turning speeds of 8 to 12 rpm.
M
Rotating torque : Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing"
Spring balance : Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing"
measurement N
INSPECTION BEFORE INSTALLATION
Check wheel sensor rotor for foreign matter. Clean the rotor, if necessary.
O
1. Check wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded View". P
2. Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Inspection".

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-13 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
(LH)
JPDIF0266ZZ
1. Circular clip 2. Dust shield 3. Slide joint housing

4. Snap ring 5. Spider assembly 6. Boot band
7. Boot 8. Shaft 9. Damper band
10. Dynamic damper 11. Circular clip 12. Joint sub-assembly
Wheel side
(RH)
JPDIF0269ZZ

7. Boot 8. Shaft 9. Damper Band
Wheel side
WHEEL SIDE

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-14 2014 Note
WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009541319
A
REMOVAL
B
2. Remove the brake caliper torque member bolts, leaving the brake hose attached. Position the brake cali-
per aside with wire. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Do not depress the brake pedal while the brake caliper is removed. C
3. Put alignment marks on the disc brake rotor and on the wheel hub. Remove the disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop the disc brake rotor. FAX
4. Remove the wheel sensor bolt. Position the wheel sensor and the wheel sensor harness aside. Refer to
BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove the cotter pin from the drive shaft. E
6. Hold the wheel hub using Tool. Loosen the wheel hub lock nut.
Tool number : KV4010104000 ( — ) F

7. Using a piece of wood and a suitable tool, tap on the wheel hub lock nut to disengage the drive shaft from
the wheel hub.
CAUTION: G
• Do not place the drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide
joint.
• Do not allow the drive shaft to hang down without support. H
NOTE:
Use a suitable puller if the drive shaft cannot be separated from the wheel hub even after performing the
above procedure.
I
8. Remove the wheel hub lock nut.
9. Remove the nut and bolt from the lower ball joint. Disconnect the steering knuckle from the transverse
link.
J
10. Remove the drive shaft from the wheel hub.
11. Remove the boot bands.
12. Separate the boot from the joint sub-assembly. K
13. Screw a suitable tool (A) into the joint sub-assembly screw part
to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support the drive shaft
with one hand and pull out the joint sub-assembly from the shaft. L
CAUTION:
• Align the suitable tool and the drive shaft. Remove the
joint sub-assembly by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If the joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after M
removing the drive shaft from the vehicle. Refer to FAX-
22, "Disassembly and Assembly".
N
JPDIF0258ZZ
14. Remove the circular clip (1) from the shaft. O

15. Remove the outer boot from the shaft.
JPDIF0007ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-15 2014 Note
INSTALLATION
1. Clean the old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper waste.
2. Fill the serration slot on the joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN
genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball
groove become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying the grease, use paper waste to wipe off the
grease that has oozed out.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts
information.
3. Install the outer boot and the boot bands to the shaft.
CAUTION: JPDIF0008ZZ
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape to protect the
boot from damage.
• Do not reuse the boot.
• Do not reuse the boot bands.
4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft.
5. Position the circular clip (1) on the groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip.
NOTE:
A drive joint inserter is recommended when installing the circular
clip.
6. Align the shaft and the joint sub-assembly. Assemble the shaft
with the joint sub-assembly while holding the circular clip.
JPDIF0007ZZ
7. Install the joint sub-assembly (1) to the shaft using a suitable

tool.
CAUTION:
• Make sure the circular clip is properly positioned on the
groove of the joint sub-assembly.
• Confirm that the joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating the drive shaft.
JPDIF0011ZZ
8. Apply the specified amount of grease to the inside of the large diameter side of the boot.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft".

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-16 2014 Note
9. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
as shown. A
CAUTION:
If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or the joint sub-assembly, the
B
boot may come off. Remove all grease from the boot
mounting surfaces.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installa-
tion length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into C
the inside of the boot from the large diameter side of the boot
and discharging the inside air. JSDIA2261ZZ
FAX
Boot installation length (L) : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct. E
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of the suitable tool.
11. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool (A).
CAUTION: F
Do not reuse the boot bands.
Tool number : KV40107300 ( – )

G
JPDIF0012ZZ
I
12. Secure the boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specifica-
tion.
J
Dimension (A) : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft".
13. Attempt to rotate the boot to check whether or not the boot
bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove K
the boot bands, reposition the boot, and install new boot bands.
L
JPDIF0268ZZ
14. Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION: M
Do not apply lubricating oil to these mating surfaces.
15. Clean the mating surfaces of the drive shaft, wheel hub, and
wheel bearing. Apply Molykote M77 lubricant to the surface (A) N
of the joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover the entire flat mating surface
O
of the joint sub-assembly.
Molykote M77 quantity Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft".

P
NOTE:
information. JSDIA2844ZZ
16. Install the drive shaft to the wheel hub. Temporarily install, but do not tighten, the wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-17 2014 Note
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter,
clean the mating surface.
17. Install the transverse link to the steering knuckle with the nut and bolt. Refer to FSU-10, "Exploded View".
18. Hold the wheel hub using a Tool. Tighten the wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use a torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub
lock nut. Do not use a power tool.
• Too much torque causes axle noise. Too little torque causes wheel bearing looseness. Tighten
the wheel hub lock nut to the specification.
Tool number : KV4010104000 ( — )

19. Install the cotter pin. Securely bend the cotter pin to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the cotter pin.
20. Install the wheel sensor, the wheel sensor bolt, and the wheel sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT
WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
21. Align the matching marks on the disc brake rotor and on the wheel hub. Install the disc brake rotor.
CAUTION:
Do not drop the disc brake rotor.
22. Remove the wire from the brake caliper. Install the brake caliper and the brake caliper torque member
bolts. Refer to BR-36, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Do not twist the brake hose.
23. Install the wheel and tire. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation".
24. Complete the inspection. Refer to FAX-18, "Inspection".
TRANSAXLE SIDE
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009541320
Remove boot after drive shaft is removed from the vehicle.

• For drive shaft removal and installation, refer to FAX-19, "Removal and Installation".
• For drive shaft disassembly and assembly, refer to FAX-22, "Disassembly and Assembly".

1. Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-18 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
A
FAX
AWDIA0951GB
E
1. Drive shaft 2. Cotter pin A. Apply Molykote M77
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009541323 F
NOTE:
When removing components such as hoses, tubes, lines, etc., cap or plug openings to prevent fluid from spill-
G
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-69, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
3. Remove brake lock plate from strut. I
4. Remove brake caliper using power tool, leaving brake hose connected. Reposition brake caliper aside
with wire. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
NOTE: J
Do not depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
5. Put matching marks on disc brake rotor and wheel hub, then remove disc brake rotor.
CAUTION: K
• Put matching marks on the wheel hub and the disc brake rotor before removing the disc brake
rotor.
• Do not drop disc brake rotor.
L
6. Remove and discard cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using Tool.

M
7. Separate the drive shaft from the wheel hub by lightly tapping the end of the drive shaft using a suitable
tool and a wood block.
CAUTION: N
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Do not allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the
other parts.
NOTE: O
Use suitable puller if wheel hub and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above pro-
cedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. P
9. Remove the nuts and bolts, then separate the steering knuckle from strut. Refer to FSU-9, "Exploded
View".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-19 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
11. Insert the Tool (A) between the drive shaft and the transaxle.
Insert the suitable tool (B) to the Tool (A). Remove the drive
shaft from the transaxle.

CAUTION:
• Do not place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when
removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend
slide joint.
• Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft.
JPDIF0004ZZ
12. Remove the differential side oil seal. Refer to TM-17, "Removal
and Installation" (5MT:RS5F91R), or TM-243, "Removal and Installation" (CVT:RE0F11A).
INSTALLATION
Transaxle Side
• Install a new differential side oil seal. Refer to TM-17, "Removal and Installation" (5MT:RS5F91R), or TM-
243, "Removal and Installation" (CVT:RE0F11A).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the differential side oil seal.
• Place the Tool (A) onto transaxle to prevent damage to the oil seal
while inserting drive shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap
with a hammer to install securely.

CAUTION:
• Check that circular clip is completely engaged.
• Check the transaxle fluid level. Refer to TM-224, "Inspec-
tion" (5MT), or TM-224, "Inspection" (CVT).
JPDIF0023ZZ
Wheel Hub Side

CAUTION:
• Do not damage the wheel bearing seal. If damage has occurred, replace wheel bearing with a new
one.
• Check each mating surface for water and foreign matter. If there is any water or foreign matter, clean
the mating surface.
• Clean the mating surfaces of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub.
CAUTION:
Do not apply lubricating oil to the mating surface of the wheel hub lock nut and the wheel hub.
• Clean the mating surfaces of drive shaft, wheel hub, and wheel
bearing. Apply Molykote M77 to surface (A) of joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply Molykote M77 to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-
assembly.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts infor-
mation.
Molykote M77 quantity : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive

Shaft". JSDIA2844ZZ
When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the cotter pin to prevent
rattles.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse cotter pin.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-20 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY A
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
B
(LH)
C
FAX
JPDIF0266ZZ
H
7. Boot 8. Shaft 9. Damper band I
Wheel side
J
(RH)
JPDIF0269ZZ
P
7. Boot 8. Shaft 9. Damper Band
Wheel side

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-21 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
DISASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE)

1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, always use aluminum or copper plates between the vise
and the drive shaft.
2. Remove the boot bands and slide the boot back.
3. Screw a suitable tool (A) into the joint sub-assembly screw part
to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more. Support the drive shaft
with one hand and pull out the joint sub-assembly from the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align the suitable tool and the drive shaft. Remove the
joint sub-assembly by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more attempts, replace the shaft and the joint sub-assem-
bly as a set.
4. Remove the circular clip from the shaft.
5. Remove the outer boot from the shaft. JPDIG0151ZZ
6. Inspect the components. Refer to FAX-8, "Inspection".

DISASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE)
1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise.

CAUTION:
When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, always use aluminum or copper plates between the vise
and the drive shaft.
2. Remove the boot bands and slide the boot back.
3. Put matching marks on the slide joint housing and on the shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Do not scratch the surfaces.
4. Remove the slide joint housing from the shaft.
5. Put matching marks (A) on the spider assembly and on the
shaft.
CAUTION:
Use paint or an equivalent for matching marks. Do not
scratch the surfaces.
JPDIF0006ZZ
6. Remove the snap ring (1).

7. Remove the spider assembly from the shaft.
8. Remove the inner boot from the shaft.
JPDIF0014ZZ
9. Remove the dust shield from the slide joint housing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-22 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
10. Remove the circular clip from the slide joint housing.
11. Clean the old grease from the slide joint housing with paper waste. A
12. Remove the damper bands.
13. Remove the dynamic damper from the shaft.
B
14. Inspect the components. Refer to FAX-8, "Inspection".
ASSEMBLY (WHEEL SIDE)
1. Clean the old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper waste. C
2. Fill the serration slot on the joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN
genuine grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball
groove become full to the brim. FAX
CAUTION:
After applying the grease, use paper waste to wipe off the
grease that has oozed out.
NOTE: E
information.
F
JPDIF0008ZZ
3. Install the outer boot and the boot bands to the shaft. G
CAUTION:
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape (A) to protect the
boot from damage.
• Do not reuse the boot. H
4. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft.
I
JPDIF0009ZZ J
5. Position the circular clip (1) on the groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip. K
NOTE:
A drive joint inserter is recommended when installing the circular
clip. L
6. Align the shaft and the joint sub-assembly. Assemble the shaft
with the joint sub-assembly while holding the circular clip.
M
JPDIF0305ZZ
N
7. Install the joint sub-assembly to the shaft using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
• Make sure the circular clip is properly positioned on the
groove of the joint sub-assembly. O
• Confirm that the joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating the drive shaft.
P
RAC0049D
8. Apply the specified amount of grease to the inside of the large diameter side of the boot.
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-23 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft".
as shown.
CAUTION:
mounting surfaces.
tion length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into

CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct.
11. Install new large and small boot bands securely using Tool (A).
CAUTION:
Tool number : KV40107300 ( – )
JPDIF0012ZZ
12. Secure the boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specifica-
tion.

bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove
JPDIF0268ZZ
ASSEMBLY (TRANSAXLE SIDE)
1. Install the dynamic damper using the following procedure:

a. Install the dynamic damper to the shaft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-24 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
b. Secure the dynamic damper in the correct position with new
damper bands. A
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the damper bands.
B
JPDIF0178ZZ
FAX
2. Install the inner boot and the boot bands to the shaft.
CAUTION:
• Wrap the serration on the shaft with tape (A) to protect the
boot from damage. E
• Do not reuse the boot.
3. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on the shaft. F
G
JPDIF0009ZZ
4. Align the matching mark (A) on the spider assembly (1) with the
matching mark on the shaft (2). Install the spider assembly to H
the shaft with the chamfer (B) facing the shaft.
JPDIF0017ZZ
K
5. Secure the spider assembly onto the shaft with the snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the snap ring. L
6. Apply the appropriate amount of grease (Genuine NISSAN
Grease or equivalent) to the spider assembly and to the sliding
surface. M
NOTE:
information.
N
7. Install the slide joint housing onto the spider assembly and pack
the balance of the specified amount grease (Genuine NISSAN JPDIF0014ZZ
Grease or equivalent) into the slide joint housing.

NOTE: O
Grease amount : Refer to FAX-27, "Drive Shaft". P

8. Align the matching marks on the slide joint housing and on the shaft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-25 2014 Note
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
as shown.
CAUTION:
mounting surfaces.
tion length to the specified value by inserting a suitable tool into

CAUTION:
• The boot may break if the boot installation length is not correct.
11. Install the boot bands securely.
CAUTION:
a. Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes for temporary installation.
NOTE:
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at
first.
b. Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band.
JPDIF0157ZZ
c. Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked with
dotted circle) as shown.
bands are securing the boot. If the boot is not secure, remove
JPDIF0158ZZ
13. Install the dust shield to the slide joint housing.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse the dust shield.
14. Install the circular clip to the slide joint housing.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the circular clip.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-26 2014 Note
Wheel Bearing INFOID:0000000009541326
B
Item Standard
C
Axial end play 0.0 mm (0.0 in)
Rotating torque 1.9 N·m (0.19 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less
Spring balance measurement 13.7 N (1.40 kg-f, 3.08 lb-f) or less FAX
Wheel bearing press-fit load 49 kN (4,998.0 kg-f, 11,015.2 lb-f)
Drive Shaft INFOID:0000000009541327

E
Drive Shaft Specifications

F
I
ALDIA0269ZZ ALDIA0268ZZ
Application M/T
Wheel side Transaxle side J
Joint type
(LH) (RH) (LH) (RH)
90 - 100 g 141.1- 157.1 g
Grease quantity* K
(3.17 - 3.53 oz) (4.98 - 5.54 oz)
Boot installed length (L) 135.5 mm (5.33 in) 154 mm (6.06 in)
Molykote M77* 1.0 - 3.0 g (0.04 - 0.10 oz)
L
Application CVT
Wheel side Transaxle side
Joint type
(LH) (RH) (LH) (RH) M
90 - 100 g 132.7 - 148.7 g
Grease quantity*
(3.17 - 3.53 oz) (4.68 - 5.25 oz)
Boot installed length (L) 136.8 mm (5.39 in) 145.5 mm (5.73 in) N
Molykote M77* 1.0 - 3.0 g (0.04 - 0.10 oz)
*Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
O
Dynamic Damper Specifications

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-27 2014 Note
Unit: mm (in)
ALDIA0270ZZ
M/T CVT
Application
(LH) (RH) (LH) (RH)
Dimension (A) 240 ± 3 (9.45 ± 0.1) 457 ± 3 (17.99 ± 0.1) 242.9 ± 3 (9.56 ± 0.1) 457 ± 3 (17.99 ± 0.1)
Dimension (B) 70 (2.76)
Boot Band Specification

Unit: mm (in)
JPDIF0268ZZ
Dimension (A) - maximum 7.0 (0.28)

GETtheMANUALS.org
FAX-28 2014 Note
ENGINE
FL
A
FL
SECTION
FUEL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 F
Inspection ................................................................. 9
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System FUEL TANK ...................................................... 10
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Exploded View .........................................................10
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................10
General Precaution ................................................... 2 Inspection ................................................................13
H
PREPARATION ............................................ 4 EVAP CANISTER .............................................. 14
Exploded View .........................................................14
PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Removal and Installation .........................................14 I
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Inspection ................................................................15
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY .............. 16
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5 J
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT ........................... 16
FUEL SYSTEM .................................................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................16
Inspection .................................................................. 5 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................16 K
Quick Connector ....................................................... 5
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 6 (SDS) ............................................................ 18
L
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY .......................... 6 (SDS) ................................................................. 18
Exploded View .......................................................... 6 Fuel Tank .................................................................18 M

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
General Precaution INFOID:0000000009405642
WARNING:
When replacing fuel line parts, be sure to observe the following.
• Put a “CAUTION: FLAMMABLE” sign in the work area.
• Be sure to work in a well ventilated area and have a CO2 fire extinguisher.
• Do not smoke while working on the fuel system. Keep open flames and sparks away from the work
area.
CAUTION:
• Before removing fuel line parts, carry out the following procedures:
- Put drained fuel in an explosion-proof container and put the lid on securely. Keep the container in
safe area.
- Release fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
- Disconnect the battery ground cable.
• Always replace O-rings and clamps with new ones.
• Do not kink or twist tubes when they are being installed.
• Do not tighten hose clamps excessively to avoid damaging hoses.
Tighten high-pressure rubber hose clamp so that clamp end
is 3 mm (0.12 in) from hose end.
Tightening torque specifications are the same for all rubber
hose clamps.
Ensure that screw does not contact adjacent parts.
MMA104A

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After connecting the fuel tube quick connectors, make sure
the quick connectors are secure. A
Check that the connector and resin tube do not contact any
adjacent parts.
- a) Apply fuel pressure to the fuel system by turning the igni-
FL
tion switch to ON (without starting the engine). Then check for
fuel leaks at the fuel tube connections.
- b) Start the engine and rev the engine, then check for fuel
leaks at the fuel tube connections. C
• After installing the tubes, run the engine and check for fuel
leaks at the connections.
• Use only a Genuine NISSAN fuel filler cap as a replacement. If D
an incorrect fuel filler cap is used, the MIL may come on.
• For servicing “Evaporative Emission System” parts, refer to
EC-336, "Inspection".
E
G
PBIC0199E

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
The actual shape of the Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10119900 Removing and installing fuel tank lock ring
(J-45722)
Lock ring wrench
JPBIA3555ZZ

PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-4 2014 Note
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL SYSTEM
FL
Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap, and fuel tank for improper attach-
ment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterio-
ration. C
(A) : Engine
(B) : Fuel line D
(C) : Fuel tank
If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
E
JPBIA0129ZZ
Quick Connector INFOID:0000000009405644 F
CAUTION:
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs (F)
G
are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than neces-
sary.
(B) : Connection (cross-section) H

(E) : To fuel tank
(G) : Disconnection I
• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
• Keep resin tube (C) away from heat. Be especially careful
when welding near the resin tube. J
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from get-
ting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and discon- K
nection.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or the
equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is replaced.
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is replaced, L
also replace retainer with new one.
M
JPBIA0130ZZ
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid damage N

and foreign materials, cover them completely with plastic
bags (A) or something similar.
O
JPBIA0135ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-5 2014 Note
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
ALBIA1129ZZ
1. Lock ring 2. Fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly 3. O-ring
4. Fuel tank
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, "General Precaution".
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".
2. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
3. Open fuel filler lid.
4. Open fuel filler cap and release the pressure inside fuel tank.
5. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, "SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the inspection hole cover.
NOTE:
Inspection hole cover is held down by an adhesive.
7. Disconnect the harness connector (B), fuel feed tube (C) and
EVAP tube (A).
: Front
ALBIA1150ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-6 2014 Note
Remove the quick connector as follows:
• Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs (B) and pull (A) A
out the tube.
• If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
FL
by pulling.
JPBIA0134ZZ
D
CAUTION:
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs
(F) are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than E
necessary.

F
(E) : To fuel tank
(G) : Disconnection
G
• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector.
when welding near the resin tube. H
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
getting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and dis-
connection. I
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or
the equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is
replaced. J
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is
replaced, also replace retainer with new one.
K
JPBIA0130ZZ
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid dam- L

age and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags (A) or something similar.
M
JPBIA0135ZZ
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-7 2014 Note
8. Remove lock ring for fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel
pump assembly using Tool (A) by turning counterclockwise.
Tool number : KV10119900 (J-45722)
ALBIA1059ZZ
9. Remove fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
CAUTION:
• Do not bend float arm during removal.
• Do not allow contaminants to fall inside of the fuel tank.
• Do not cause impacts such by dropping when handling components.
INSTALLATION
• Install the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly with
the fuel feed tube (C) facing the front of the vehicle as shown. Use
a new O-ring.
CAUTION:
: Front
(A) : EVAP tube
(B) : Harness connector
ALBIA1150ZZ
• Connect the quick connector as follows:

- Check the connection for damage or any foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the tube, then insert the connector straight
into the tube until a click is heard.
• After the tube is connected, make sure the connection is secure by
performing the following checks:
- Pull (A) the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely
connected.
JPBIA0140ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-8 2014 Note
- Visually confirm that the two retainer tabs (F) are connected to the
quick connector (1). A

(C) : Resin tube FL
(E) : To fuel tank
C
(G) : Disconnection
G
JPBIA0130ZZ
H
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying I
fuel pressure to fuel piping.
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.
J

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-9 2014 Note
FUEL TANK
FUEL TANK
AWBIA1594ZZ
1. Fuel tank 2. Fuel tank mounting band (RH) 3. Fuel tank mounting band (LH)
4. Clamp 5. Fuel filler hose 6. Fuel filler tube
7. Grommet 8. Fuel filler cap 9. Clamp
10. Vent hose 11. EVAP vent line
WARNING:
Read “General Precautions” when working on the fuel system. Refer to FL-2, "General Precaution".
NOTE:
ing.
REMOVAL
1. Check the fuel level with the vehicle on a level surface. If the fuel
gauge indicates more than the level as shown (1/2 full), drain
the fuel from the fuel tank until the fuel gauge indicates a level at
or below as shown (1/2 full).
• In case the fuel pump does not operate, use the following pro-
cedure.
a. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler tube.
b. Insert fuel tubing of less than 20 mm (0.79 in) diameter into the
fuel filler tube through the fuel filler opening to drain fuel from the
fuel filler tube.
• As a guide, if the fuel tank is full the fuel level reaches or is ALBIA1130ZZ
less than the level on the fuel gauge as shown, when approxi-
mately 20-1/2 (5-3/8 US gal, 4-1/2 Imp gal) of fuel is drained from a full fuel tank.
2. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to EC-122, "Work Procedure".

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-10 2014 Note
FUEL TANK
3. Open fuel filler lid.
4. Open fuel filler cap and release the pressure inside fuel tank. A
5. Remove the rear seat cushion. Refer to SE-19, "SEAT CUSHION : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the inspection hole cover.
NOTE: FL
Inspection hole cover is held by an adhesive.
7. Disconnect the harness connector (B), fuel feed tube (C) and
EVAP tube (A). C
: Front
D
ALBIA1150ZZ
F
Remove the quick connector as follows:
• Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs (B) and pull (A)
out the tube. G
• If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull
several times until they start to move. Then disconnect them
by pulling.
H
I
JPBIA0134ZZ
CAUTION: J
• Quick connector (1) can be disconnected when the tabs
(F) are depressed completely. Do not twist it more than
necessary. K

L
(E) : To fuel tank
(G) : Disconnection
• Do not use any tools to disconnected quick connector. M
when welding near the resin tube.
• Prevent acid liquid such as battery electrolyte, etc. from
N
getting on resin tube.
• Do not bend or twist resin tube during installation and dis-
connection.
• Do not remove the remaining retainer (2) on hard tube (or O
the equivalent) (A) except when resin tube or retainer is
replaced.
• When resin tube or hard tube (or the equivalent) is
P
replaced, also replace retainer with new one.
Retainer color : Blue JPBIA0130ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-11 2014 Note
FUEL TANK
• To keep the connecting portion clean and to avoid dam-
age and foreign materials, cover them completely with
plastic bags (A) or something similar.
JPBIA0135ZZ
8. Remove center muffler. Refer to EX-5, "Exploded View".

9. Remove nut (A) and remove center floor insulators.
ALBIA1147ZZ
10. Disconnect the rear park brake cable brackets (LH). Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
11. Disconnect fuel filler hose (2) at fuel filler tube (1) side.
12. Disconnect vent hose (3) from fuel tank side.
JPBIA3423ZZ
13. Support the center part of fuel tank (1) using a suitable jack (A).
JPBIA3424ZZ
14. Remove fuel tank mounting bands (LH/RH).

15. Lower suitable jack carefully to remove fuel tank while holding it by hand.
CAUTION:
Fuel tank may be in an unstable condition because of the shape of fuel tank bottom. Be sure to
hold tank securely.
16. If replacing the fuel tank, remove the fuel level sensor unit, fuel filter and fuel pump assembly to transfer to
the new fuel tank.
CAUTION:
GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-12 2014 Note
FUEL TANK
A
INSTALLATION
Fuel Filler Hose FL
• Insert fuel filler hose to the length below.
Fuel filler hose : 35 mm (1.38 in)

C
The other hose : 25 mm (0.98 in)
• Be sure hose clamp is not placed on swelled area of fuel filler tube.
• Install fuel filler hose to fuel tank, paying attention to install mark. D
EVAP Hose
1. Check connections for damage or foreign material.
E
2. Align the matching side connection part with the center of shaft, and insert connector straight until a "click"
sound is heard.
F

Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks. G
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections. H

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-13 2014 Note
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP CANISTER
ALBIA0765ZZ
1. EVAP breather valve 2. EVAP canister drain hose 3. EVAP canister hose
4. EVAP hose 5. EVAP canister assembly A. To EVAP control hose
Front
NOTE:
The EVAP canister vent control valve and EVAP canister system pressure sensor can be removed without
removing the EVAP canister.
REMOVAL
1. Remove battery. Refer to PG-69, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove the TCM (if equipped). Refer to TM-235, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the battery tray.
4. Remove IPDM E/R bracket, IPDM E/R and position aside. Refer to PCS-30, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove EVAP canister cover.
6. Disconnect EVAP canister purge hose, EVAP canister hose and Evap hose from the EVAP canister.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-14 2014 Note
EVAP CANISTER
7. Remove the EVAP canister.
A
INSTALLATION
Inspection INFOID:0000000009634426 FL
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration. C
2. Check EVAP canister as follows:
a. Block port . Orally blow air through port .
Check that air flows freely through port . D
b. Block port . Orally blow air through port .
3. Visually inspect the fuel check valve for cracks, damage, loose E
connections chafing and deterioration.
F
JMBIA0443ZZ
4. Check fuel check valve as follows:

G
a. Blow air through connector on the fuel tank side. A considerable
resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow should be
directed toward the EVAP canister side.
H
b. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side. Air flow
should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
c. If fuel check valve is suspected or not properly functioning in
step 1 and 2 above, replace it. I
JSBIA0080GB
J
5. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick-
ing, etc.
K
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X
N
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/

Pressure: O
cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 bar to –-0.034bar, –0.061 to –
Vacuum:
0.035 kg/cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
P
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-15 2014 Note
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Fuel Level Sensor Unit
ALBIA1152ZZ
1. Fuel filter and pump assembly 2. Float arm assembly 3. Fuel level sensor unit
4. Fuel level sensor unit sensor harness connector
DISASSEMBLY
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit harness connector (1).
NOTE:
Hold connector with your fingers, because there is no tab for
releasing stopper. Pull it out straight downward.
ALBIA1153ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-16 2014 Note
< DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
2. Using a suitable tool push tab (A) in the driection ( ) shown
and remove fuel level sensor unit (2) from fuel filter and fuel A
pump assembly (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor unit. FL
• Do not disassemble fuel filter and fuel pump assembly.
ALBIA1154ZZ
D
ASSEMBLY
1. Check for damage of fuel level sensor unit installation position on the side of fuel filter and pump assem-
bly.
E
2. Slide fuel level sensor unit until it aligns to installation groove, then insert it until it stops.
• After inserting, apply force in reverse direction (removal direction) to ensure it cannot be pulled out.
3. Connect fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
F
Use the following procedure to check for fuel leaks.
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” (with engine stopped), then check fuel system connections for leaks by applying G
2. Start engine and let it idle and check there are no fuel leaks at the fuel system connections.
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-17 2014 Note
Fuel Tank INFOID:0000000009445850
Standard and Limit

Unit: (US gal, lmp gal)
Fuel tank capacity Approx. 41.0 (10-7/8 US gal, 9.0 Imp gal)
Fuel recommendation Refer to MA-12

GETtheMANUALS.org
FL-18 2014 Note
SUSPENSION
FSU
A
B
SECTION
FRONT SUSPENSION C
FSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 10 F
Exploded View .........................................................10
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................10
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Inspection ................................................................10 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 FRONT STABILIZER ........................................ 12
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 2 Exploded View .........................................................12
Removal and Installation .........................................12 H
Precaution for Suspension ........................................ 2
Inspection ................................................................13
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...... 14 I
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ................................................ 3 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 14
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3 Exploded View .........................................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................14 J
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5 Inspection ................................................................15
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 16 K
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5 FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ................ 16
Exploded View .........................................................16
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 6 Disassembly and Assembly .....................................16 L
Inspection ................................................................18
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 6 Disposal ...................................................................19
Inspection .................................................................. 6 M
WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 7
(SDS) ............................................................ 20
Inspection .................................................................. 7
Adjustment ................................................................ 8 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS N
(SDS) ................................................................. 20
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 9
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) .................................20
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT .................. 9 Ball Joint ..................................................................20 O
Exploded View .......................................................... 9 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) ..................................21
Removal and Installation ........................................... 9
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Suspension INFOID:0000000009578925
• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,
tighten as they are.
• When jacking up the vehicle with a floor jack, do not hang the jack on the torque rod.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special tools illustrated here.
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
– Measuring ball joint swinging force
(J-44372) D
Pull Gauge
FSU
LST024
F
ST35652000 Disassembling and assembling strut
( — )
Strut attachment
G
H
ZZA0807D
KV10106700 Disassembling and assembling strut

( — ) mount bearing
Drift a: 25 mm (0.98 in) dia. I
b: 18.5 mm (0.728 in) dia.
ZZA0534D
— Measuring drift and pull K

(J-49286)
Drift and pull gauge
AWEIA0156ZZ
M
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Spring compressor Removing and installing coil spring
S-NT717
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-4 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
FSU-7, FSU-13, FSU-15, FSU-18

FSU-6, FSU-7, FSU-15, FSU-18
C
FSU-18
FSU-18
FSU-13
FSU-7
FAX-6
FAX-6
WT-5
WT-4
BR-7
ST-7
Reference
—
FSU
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection

G
H
Improper installation, looseness
Bushing or mount deterioration
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Incorrect wheel alignment

Suspension looseness
I
Stabilizer bar fatigue

Parts interference
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
FRONT AXLE
Spring fatigue
STEERING
J
BRAKE
TIRE
K
Noise × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Shake × × × × × × × × × × ×
Vibration × × × × × × × × × L
Symptom FRONT SUSPENSION Shimmy × × × × × × × × × ×
Shudder × × × × × × × ×
M
Poor quality ride or
× × × × × × × × × ×
handling
×: Applicable
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-5 2014 Note
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
COMPONENT PART
Check the mount conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component. Verify the component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
Ball Joint Axial End Play
1. Set the front wheels in a straight-ahead position.
2. Hold the axle side of the transverse link, and check the axial end
play by move the transverse link up and down.
Axial end play : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".

CAUTION:
• Do not depress the brake pedal when measuring.
• Do not perform this inspection with the tires on the
ground.
• Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Do not damage
the components by applying excessive force.
JSEIA0444ZZ
STRUT ASSEMBLY
Check for oil leaks or damage. Replace the parts if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-6 2014 Note
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
A
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION B
WARNING:
Always adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: C
If the wheel alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts
before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. “Unladen conditions” D
means that the fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full; the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in
designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. FSU
3. Check the wheels for run out and damage. Refer to WT-4, "Inspection".
4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-27, "Wheel Bearing".
5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or damage. F
6. Check each mount point of the suspension components for any excessive looseness or damage.
7. Check each link, arm, and the suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to FSU-21, "Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)". G
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed. H
• This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
• The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel
is centered.
• The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle. I
• The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
• Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information. J
• Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended Service/Cali-
bration Schedule.
ALIGNMENT PROCESS K
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual. Refer to FSU-21,
"Wheelarch Height (Unladen*)".
• When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or L
minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these indicators may
not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR. M
• Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with "Rolling Compensation" method and optional
"Jacking Compensation" method to "compensate" the alignment targets or head units.
"Rolling Compensation" is the preferred method. N
- If using the "Rolling Compensation" method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull
on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body.
- If using the "Jacking Compensation" method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
O
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn in either direction.
NOTE:
Do not use the "Rolling Compensation" method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment.
• Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you're using for more information. P
CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES INSPECTION
• Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted.
• Before inspection, set the front wheels onto a turning radius gauge. Set the rear wheels onto a pad that has
the same height so the vehicle will remain horizontal.
TOTAL TOE-IN INSPECTION
Measure the total toe-in using the following procedure.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-7 2014 Note
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WARNING:
• Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
• Make sure that no person is in front of vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push on the rear wheel to move the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of each tire at the
same height of hub center. These are measuring points.
AFA050
4. Measure the distance (A) from the rear side.

5. Push on the rear wheel to move the vehicle slowly ahead and to
rotate the wheels 180 degrees (1/2 turn).
CAUTION:
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn),
try the above procedure again from the beginning. Do not
push vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance (B) from the front side.
SFA234AC
7. Use the formula below to calculate total toe-in.
Total toe-in :A-B

Total toe-in specification : Refer to FSU-20, "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)".
• If the total toe-in is outside the specification, adjust the total toe-in. Refer to FSU-8, "Adjustment".
Adjustment INFOID:0000000009578931
TOTAL TOE-IN
Loosen the steering outer socket. Adjust the length using the steering inner socket.
Toe-in : Refer to FSU-20, "Wheel Alignment (Un-

laden*1)".
CAUTION:
• Always evenly adjust toe-in alternately and adjust the difference between the left and right to the
standard.
• Always hold the steering inner socket when tightening the steering outer socket.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-8 2014 Note
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
B
FSU
JPEIA0261GB
H
1. Strut 2. Coil spring 3. Bound bumper
4. Spring upper seat 5. Strut mount bearing 6. Piston rod lock nut
7. Strut mount insulator 8. Stopper insulator 9. Stopper insulator lock nut I
J
REMOVAL
2. Remove brake hose lock plate from strut. K
3. Disconnect stabilizer connecting rod from strut. Refer to FSU-12, "Exploded View".
4. Remove strut bolts and nuts from steering knuckle.
5. Remove stopper insulator lock nut and stopper insulator. L
6. Remove strut.
WEIA0179E
O
INSTALLATION
• Secure the head of strut piston rod to keep it from rotating, then tighten the stopper insulator lock nut to the
specified torque. P
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse stopper insulator lock nut.
• Do not reuse the nuts that secure the strut to the steering knuckle.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-18, "Inspection".
• After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the strut. Refer to FSU-19, "Dis-
posal".

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-9 2014 Note
TRANSVERSE LINK
TRANSVERSE LINK
AWEIA0210GB
1. Front suspension member 2. Transverse link
REMOVAL
2. Remove transverse link from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-10, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the bolts and nut, then remove the transverse link from front suspension member.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the transverse link nuts.
Perform the final tightening of the nuts and bolts under unladen conditions with tires on level ground.

Check the following items and replace the components as necessary.
Transverse link
• Check the transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.
• Check the ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage.
Swing Torque
1. Move the ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement with no binding.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-10 2014 Note
TRANSVERSE LINK
2. Hook the Tool (A) on the ball joint (B). Confirm the measurement
value is within specifications when the ball stud begins moving. A
Tool number : — (J-44372)

B
Swing torque : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".
Rotating torque : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".
C
If swing torque or rotating torque exceeds the specified range,
replace transverse link.
JPEIA0138ZZ
D
Axial End Play
1. Move the ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement with no binding.
2. Move the tip of the ball joint in the axial direction to check for looseness. FSU
Axial end play : Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".

If the axial end play exceeds the specified range, replace transverse link. F
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Inspection".
G

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-11 2014 Note
FRONT STABILIZER
FRONT STABILIZER
JPEIA0272GB
1. Stabilizer bar 2. Stabilizer clamp 3. Stabilizer bushing

4. Stabilizer connecting rod 5. Strut 6. Front suspension member
Front
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. Refer to WT-8, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the nuts, then separate the stabilizer connecting rod from the stabilizer bar.
3. Remove the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove the stabilizer clamp bolts, stabilizer clamps and stabi-
lizer bushings from front suspension member.
5. Remove stabilizer bar.
WEIA0182E
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-12 2014 Note
FRONT STABILIZER
• Install the stabilizer bushing with the slit (A) facing the rear of the
vehicle. A
: Rear
JPEIA0273ZZ
D
• To install stabilizer clamp bolt, temporarily tighten them in numeri-
cal order as shown, then tighten them to the specified torque.
Refer to FSU-12, "Exploded View". FSU
: Front
G
JPEIA0274ZZ
• To connect the stabilizer connecting rod (1), tighten the nut while H
holding the hexagonal part (A) on the stabilizer connecting rod.
K
JPEIA0252ZZ
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts with the vehicle under unladen conditions with tires on level
L
ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-13, "Inspection".
M

Check the stabilizer bar, the stabilizer connecting rod, the stabilizer bushing, and the stabilizer clamp for defor- N
mation, cracks, or damage. Replace components if necessary.
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-7, "Inspection". O

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-13 2014 Note
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
UNIT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AWEIA0210GB
1. Front suspension member 2. Transverse link
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect steering outer sockets from steering knuckles. Refer to ST-14, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect transverse links from steering knuckle. Refer toFSU-10, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect stabilizer connecting rods from stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-12, "Exploded View".
5. Disconnect the lower joint from the steering gear. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".
6. Set suitable jack under front suspension member.
CAUTION:
Do not damage the front suspension member with suitable jack.
7. Remove the engine rear torque rod. Refer to EM-85, "Exploded View".
8. Remove suspension member bolts.
9. Gradually lower the jack to remove front suspension member from vehicle body.
10. If necessary, remove steering gear from front suspension member. Refer to ST-14, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
11. If necessary, remove transverse links. Refer to FSU-10, "Exploded View".
12. If necessary, remove stabilizer bar, stabilizer bar clamps, and stabilizer bushings. Refer to FSU-12,
"Exploded View".
13. Inspect the front suspension member. Refer to FSU-15, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-14 2014 Note
• Install the member stay bolts, the upper link bolts, and the front
suspension member bolts in the order of 1-6 as shown. A
: Front
AWEIA0211ZZ
D
• After installation, perform the final tightening of each part under unladen conditions with tires on level
ground.
• Complete the inspection. FSU-15, "Inspection" FSU
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL F

Check the front suspension member for cracks, wear or damage. Replace components if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION G
1. Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated.
H

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-15 2014 Note
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
JPEIA0261GB
1. Strut 2. Coil spring 3. Bound bumper

4. Spring upper seat 5. Strut mount bearing 6. Piston rod lock nut
7. Strut mount insulator 8. Stopper insulator 9. Stopper insulator lock nut
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Do not damage strut piston rod when removing components from strut.
1. Remove strut mount insulator.
2. Install Tool (A) to the front coil spring and strut.
CAUTION:
When installing Tool (A), wrap a shop cloth around the front
coil spring and strut to protect the parts from damage.

3. Secure Tool (A) in a vise.
JPEIA0006ZZ
4. Slightly loosen the piston rod lock nut.

WARNING:
Do not remove the piston rod lock nut completely. If the piston rod lock nut is removed com-
pletely, the coil spring can jump out and may cause serious damage or injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-16 2014 Note
5. Compress coil spring using a suitable tool (A).
WARNING: A
Make sure that the pawls of the suitable tool are firmly
hooked on the coil spring. The suitable tool must be tight-
ened alternately so as to not tilt the coil spring. B
JPEIA0007ZZ
D
6. Make sure the coil spring is free between the spring upper seat and the strut.
7. Hold the piston rod and remove the piston rod lock nut.
8. Remove strut mount bearing, spring upper seat, and bound bumper as a set. FSU
9. Remove bound bumper from spring upper seat.
10. Gradually release the suitable tool and remove the coil spring.
CAUTION: F
Release the suitable tool while making sure the position of the suitable tool on the coil spring
does not move.
11. Remove the Tool from strut. G

12. If necessary, remove strut mount bearing (1) from spring upper H
seat (2), using a Tool (A).
Tool number : KV10106700 ( — ) I

CAUTION:
Do not disassemble the strut mount bearing unless damage
exists. J
13. Inspect the components. Refer to FSU-18, "Inspection".
K
JPEIA0228ZZ
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: L
Do not damage the piston rod when removing components from the front coil spring and strut.
1. Install Tool (A) to the front coil spring and strut.
CAUTION:
M
When installing Tool (A), wrap a shop cloth around the front
coil spring and strut to protect the parts from damage.
Tool number : ST35652000 N
2. Secure Tool (A) in a vise.

O
JPEIA0006ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-17 2014 Note
3. Compress coil spring using a suitable tool (A).
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the suitable tool are firmly
hooked on the coil spring. The suitable tool must be tight-
ened alternately so as to not tilt the coil spring.
JPEIA0007ZZ
CAUTION:
Face tube side of coil spring (1) downward. Align the lower
end to lower seat (2).
Maximum gap (A) :5 mm (0.2 in)
JPEIA0095ZZ
4. Apply soapy water to bound bumper.

CAUTION:
Do not use machine oil.
5. Insert bound bumper into spring upper seat.
6. Install strut mount bearing, spring upper seat, and bound bumper as a set.
CAUTION:
Do not apply oil, such as grease, when installing the strut mount bearing.
7. Secure piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, then install piston rod lock nut and tighten to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston rod lock nut.
8. Gradually release the suitable tool, and remove the suitable tool from the coil spring.
CAUTION:
Release the suitable tool while making sure the position of the suitable tool on the coil spring
does not move.
9. Remove the Tool (A) from the vise.

10. Remove Tool (A) from the front coil spring and strut.
11. Install strut mount insulator.
12. After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to
discard the old strut. Refer to FSU-19, "Disposal".
JPEIA0006ZZ

Check the following items and replace the parts if necessary.
Strut
• Check the strut for oil leaks, deformation, cracks, or damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-18 2014 Note
• Check the piston rod for damage, uneven wear, or distortion.
Strut Mount Insulator and bound bumper A
Check the strut mount insulator and the bound bumper for cracks, wear, or damage.
Coil Spring
B
Check the coil spring for cracks, wear, or damage.
1. Check the wheel sensor harness to be sure the connectors are fully seated. C
Disposal INFOID:0000000009578944
D
1. Set the strut horizontally with the piston rod fully extended.
2. Drill a 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top FSU
as shown to release gas gradually.
CAUTION:
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves. F
• Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the com-
pressed gas.
NOTE: G
• Drill vertically in this direction ( ).
• Drill directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets.
• The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless. JPEIA0160ZZ
H
(A) : 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in)

3. Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times. I
CAUTION:
Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations.
J

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-19 2014 Note
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000009578945
Minimum −0° 50′ (−0.83°)
Camber Nominal −0° 05′ (−0.08°)


Minimum 3° 00′ (3.00°)
Caster Nominal 3° 45′ (3.75°)


Minimum 11° 00′ (11.00°)
Kingpin inclination
Nominal 11° 45′ (11.75°)
Maximum 12° 30′ (12.50°)
SFA234AC
Minimum 0 mm (0.00 in)

Distance (A - B) Nominal In 1 mm (In 0.04 in)
Maximum In 2 mm (In 0.08 in)
Total toe-in
Minimum 0° 00′ 00″ (0.00°)
Angle (LH and RH)
Degree minute Nominal In 0° 03′ 00″ (In 0.05°)
(Decimal degree)
Maximum In 0° 06′ 00″ (In 0.10°)
*1: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
*2: The difference when assuming the (LH) side is the standard.
Ball Joint INFOID:0000000009578946
Swing torque 0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.05 – 0.35 kg-m, 4 – 30 in-lb)

Rotating torque 15.4 – 104.7 N (1.6 – 10.7 kg-f, 3.5 – 23.5 lb-f)
Axial end play .01 mm (0.004 in)

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-20 2014 Note
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000009578947
A
Unit: mm (in)
LEIA0085E
Tire size 185/65R15 195/55R16 FSU

Front (Hf) 690 (27.17) 687 (27.05)
Rear (Hr) 679 (26.73) 678 (26.69)
F
*: Fuel, engine coolant, and lubricants are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and mats are in designated positions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
FSU-21 2014 Note
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
GI
B
SECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION C
E
CONTENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 3 Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV F
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) .............23
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 3 General Precautions ................................................24
Description ................................................................ 3 Three Way Catalyst .................................................25 G
Terms ........................................................................ 3 Fuel (Regular Unleaded Gasoline Recommend-
Units .......................................................................... 3 ed) HR16DE ............................................................25
Contents .................................................................... 3 Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control
H
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 4 System .....................................................................26
Components .............................................................. 4 Hoses ......................................................................26
Engine Oils ..............................................................27
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ..... 6 Air Conditioning .......................................................27 I
Description ................................................................ 6
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis...... 6 LIFTING POINT ................................................. 28
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Pro- Special Service Tool ................................................28 J
cedures ..................................................................... 7 Garage Jack and Safety Stand ................................28
2-Pole Lift ................................................................29
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS ................ 9 Board-on Lift ............................................................30
Connector Symbols ................................................... 9 K
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- ......................... 10 TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 31
Connector Information ............................................. 12 Tow Truck Towing ...................................................31
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) ...........31 L
ABBREVIATIONS ..............................................14
Abbreviation List ...................................................... 14 VEHICLE INFORMATION ........................... 33
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .................... 33 M
BOLTS ................................................................19 Model Variation ........................................................33
Description .............................................................. 19 Identification Number ...............................................34
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Includ- Engine Serial Number .............................................35 N
ed) ........................................................................... 19 CVT Number ............................................................35
Manual Transaxle Number ......................................35
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS Dimensions ..............................................................36
AND SEALANTS ................................................22 Wheels & Tires ........................................................36 O
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.... 22
PRECAUTION .............................................. 23 P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL
PRECAUTIONS ..................................................23 INCIDENT .......................................................... 37
Description .............................................................. 23 Work Flow ................................................................37
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................37
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- How to Check Terminal ...........................................38
SIONER" ................................................................. 23 Intermittent Incident .................................................41
Procedures without Cowl Top Cover ....................... 23 Circuit Inspection .....................................................44

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-1 2014 Note
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM .............. 49 CONSULT Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit ....... 49
Description .............................................................. 49 Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING
Function and System Application ........................... 49 SYSTEM ................................................................. 51

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-2 2014 Note
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL GI
B
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diag-
noses”.
C
Terms INFOID:0000000009464385
• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle. D
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information. E
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjust-
ment.
F
Units INFOID:0000000009464386
• The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and G
alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the
standard tightening torque.
H
“Example”
Range
I
Outer Socket Lock Nut : 59 - 78 N·m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
Standard J
Drive Shaft Installation Bolt : 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)

K
Contents INFOID:0000000009464387
• A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g. ) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the L
first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
• THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
• THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
• THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section M
and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
• THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of
work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations. N
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-3 2014 Note
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions INFOID:0000000009464388
The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.
SAIA0519E
Components INFOID:0000000009464389
• THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubri-
cation points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appro-
priate PARTS CATALOG.
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is
used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-4 2014 Note
GI
JPFIA0511GB F
1. Cap 2. Bleeder valve 3. Cylinder body

4. Piston seal 5. Piston 6. Piston boot
G
7. Sliding pin 8. Sliding pin boot 9. Bushing
10. Torque member
: Apply rubber grease. H
: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly I
SYMBOLS
J
N
SAIA0749E

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-5 2014 Note
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
• Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section.
• After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
• Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for
identification/location of components and harness connectors.
• When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
• Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-har-
ness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identi-
fication of harness connectors.
• Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
• After accomplishing the Diagnosis Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, make sure that all
harness connectors are reconnected as they were.
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009464391
JPAIA0021GB
1. Test group number and test group title

• Test group number and test group title are shown in the upper portion of each test group.
2. Work and diagnosis procedure
• Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
3. Questions and results
• Questions and required results are indicated in test group.
4. Action
• Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-6 2014 Note
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures INFOID:0000000009464392
GI
I
JPAIA0982GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-7 2014 Note
JSAIA1461GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-8 2014 Note
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
GI
Connector Symbols INFOID:0000000009472879
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. B
• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.
• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a double line and followed by the direction mark. C
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section, D
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
SAIA0257E
I
• Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams. J
SGI363
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-9 2014 Note
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- INFOID:0000000009472880
Each section includes wiring diagrams.
JCAWA0150GB
Description
Number Item Description
1 Power supply • This means the power supply of fusible link or fuse.
2 Fuse • “/” means the fuse.
Current rating of fusible
3 • This means the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
link/fuse
Number of fusible link/
4 • This means the number of fusible link or fuse location.
fuse
5 Fusible link • “X” means the fusible link.
• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
6 Connector number
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.
• This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A posi-
7 Switch
tion. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
8 Circuit (Wiring) • This means the wiring.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-10 2014 Note
GI
9 Shielded line • The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
10 Connectors • This means that a transmission line bypasses two connectors or more.
11 Option abbreviation • This means the vehicle specifications which layouts the circuit between “ ”. B
12 Relay • This shows an internal representation of the relay.
13 Optional splice • The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
C
14 Splice • The shaded circle “ ” means the splice.
15 System branch • This shows that the circuit is branched to other systems.
16 Page crossing • This circuit continues to an adjacent page. D
17 Component name • This shows the name of a component.
18 Terminal number • This means the terminal number of a connector.
E
19 Ground (GND) • This shows the ground connection.
Explanation of option
20 • This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
description
F
SWITCH POSITIONS
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when: G
• ignition switch is “OFF”
• doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed
• pedals are not depressed
• parking brake is released H
SGI860
N
MULTIPLE SWITCH
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
• The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
O

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-11 2014 Note
• The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
JSAIA0017GB
Connector Information INFOID:0000000009472881
HOW TO USE CONNECTOR INFORMATION
JCAWA0152GB
Description
• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
1 Connector number
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.
2 Connector type • This means the connector number.
3 Terminal number • This means the terminal number of a connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-12 2014 Note
GI
• This shows a code for the color of the wire.
B = Black BR = Brown
W = White OR or O = Orange
R = Red P = Pink B
G = Green PU or V (Violet) = Purple
L = Blue GY or GR = Gray
4 Wire color
Y = Yellow SB = Sky Blue
LG = Light Green CH = Dark Brown
C
BG = Beige DG = Dark Green
• When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as
shown below: D
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
• This means the connector information.
5 Connector
• This unit-side is described by the connector symbols. E

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-13 2014 Note
ABBREVIATIONS
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000009464393
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:

A
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION
A/C Air conditioner
A/C Air conditioning
A/F sensor Air fuel ratio sensor
A/T Automatic transaxle/transmission
ABS Anti-lock braking system
ACCS Advance climate control system
ACL Air cleaner
AP Accelerator pedal
APP Accelerator pedal position
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AV Audio visual
AWD All wheel drive
B
BARO Barometric pressure
BCM Body control module
BLSD Brake limited slip differential
BPP Brake pedal position
BSW Blind spot warning
C
CKP Crankshaft position
CL Closed loop
CMP Camshaft position
CPP Clutch pedal position
CTP Closed throttle position
CVT Continuously variable transaxle/transmission
D
D1 Drive range first gear
D2 Drive range second gear
D3 Drive range third gear
D4 Drive range fourth gear
DCA Distance control assist
DDS Downhill drive support
DFI Direct fuel injection system
DLC Data link connector
DTC Diagnostic trouble code

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-14 2014 Note
ABBREVIATIONS
E
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION GI
E/T Exhaust temperature
EBD Electric brake force distribution
EC Engine control
B
ECL Engine coolant level

ECM Engine control module C
ECT Engine coolant temperature
ECV Electrical control valve
EEPROM Electrically erasable programmable read only memory D
EFT Engine fuel temperature
EGR Exhaust gas recirculation
E
EGRT Exhaust gas recirculation temperature
EGT Exhaust gas temperature
EOP Engine oil pressure F
EP Exhaust pressure
EPR Exhaust pressure regulator
G
EPS Electronically controlled power steering
ESP Electronic stability program system
EVAP canister Evaporative emission canister H
EVSE Electric vehicle supply equipment
EXC Exhaust control
I
F
FC Fan control
J
FCW Forward collision warning
FIC Fuel injector control
FP Fuel pump K
FR Front
FRP Fuel rail pressure
L
FRT Fuel rail temperature
FTP Fuel tank pressure
FTT Fuel tank temperature M
G
N
GND Ground
GPS Global positioning system
GST Generic scan tool O
H
HBMC Hydraulic body-motion control system P
HDD Hard disk drive
HO2S Heated oxygen sensor
HOC Heated oxidation catalyst
HPCM Hybrid power train control module

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-15 2014 Note
ABBREVIATIONS
I
I/M Inspection and maintenance
IA Intake air
IAC Idle air control
IAT Intake air temperature
IBA Intelligent brake assist
IC Ignition control
ICC Intelligent cruise control
ICM Ignition control module
IPDM E/R Intelligent power distribution module engine room
ISC Idle speed control
ISS Input shaft speed
K
KS Knock sensor
L
LBC Li-ion battery controller
LCD Liquid crystal display
LCU Local control unit
LDP Lane departure prevention
LDW Lane departure warning
LED Light emitting diode
LH Left-hand
LIN Local interconnect network
M
M/T Manual transaxle/transmission
MAF Mass airflow
MAP Manifold absolute pressure
MDU Multi display unit
MI Malfunction indicator
MIL Malfunction indicator lamp
N
NOX Nitrogen oxides
O
O2 Oxygen
O2S Oxygen sensor
OBD On board diagnostic
OC Oxidation catalytic converter
OD Overdrive
OL Open loop
OSS Output shaft speed

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-16 2014 Note
ABBREVIATIONS
P
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION GI
P/S Power steering
PBR Potentio balance resistor
PCV Positive crankcase ventilation
B
PNP Park/Neutral position

PSP Power steering pressure C
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
PTO Power takeoff
PWM Pulse width modulation D
R
E
RAM Random access memory
RAS Rear active steer
RH Right-hand F
ROM Read only memory
RPM Engine speed
G
RR Rear
S
ABBREVIATION DESCRIPTION H
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SCK Serial clock
SDS Service Data and Specifications I
SRT System readiness test
SST Special Service Tools
J
T
TC Turbocharger K
TCM Transmission control module
TCS Traction control system
L
TCU Telematics communication unit
TP Throttle position
TPMS Tire pressure monitoring system M
TSS Turbine shaft speed
TWC Three way catalytic converter
N
U
USS Uphill start support
O
V
VCM Vehicle control module P
VDC Vehicle dynamics control system
VIN Vehicle identification number
VSS Vehicle speed sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-17 2014 Note
ABBREVIATIONS
W
WOT Wide open throttle
1
11 1st range first gear
12 1st range second gear
1GR First gear
2
21 2nd range first gear
22 2nd range second gear
2GR Second gear
2WD 2-wheel drive
3
3GR Third gear
4
4GR Fourth gear
4WAS Four wheel active steer
4WD Four wheel drive
5
5GR Fifth gear
6
6GR Sixth gear
7
7GR Seventh gear

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-18 2014 Note
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
GI
This vehicle has both new standard based on ISO* and previous standard bolts/nuts. There are some differ- B
ences between these two types of bolts/ nuts; shape of the head, grade of strength, hexagonal width across
flats and the standard tightening torque.
• For guidance in discriminating, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)".
• If the tightening torque is not described in the description or figure, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table C
(New Standard Included)".
*ISO: International Organization for Standardization
D
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) INFOID:0000000009464395
CAUTION:
• The special parts are excluded. E
• The bolts/nuts in these tables have a strength (discrimination) number/symbol assigned to the head
or the like. As to the relation between the strength grade in these tables and the strength (discrimi-
nation) number/symbol, refer to “DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS”.
F
PREVIOUS STANDARD
G
Hexagonal Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Grade Bolt di-
Bolt width Pitch
(Strength ameter Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt
size across flats mm
grade) mm
mm N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb H
M6 6.0 10 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62
1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
M8 8.0 12 I
1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
4T M10 10.0 14
1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — J
1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 —
M14 14.0 19 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
K
M6 6.0 10 1.0 9 0.92 7 80 11 1.1 8 97

1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 — L
M8 8.0 12
1.0 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
1.5 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
7T M10 10.0 14
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 — M
1.75 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
N
M14 14.0 19 1.5 130 13 96 — 170 17 125 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 — O
M8 8.0 12
1.0 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
1.5 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 —
9T M10 10.0 14 P
1.25 55 5.6 41 — 80 8.2 59 —
1.75 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 —
M12 12.0 17
1.25 100 10 74 — 130 13 96 —
M14 14.0 19 1.5 170 17 125 — 210 21 155 —
CAUTION:
The parts with aluminum or the cast iron washer surface/thread surface are excluded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-19 2014 Note
NEW STANDARD BASED ON ISO
Hexagonal Tightening torque

Grade Bolt di-
Bolt width Pitch
(Strength ameter Hexagon head bolt Hexagon flange bolt
size across flats mm
grade) mm
mm N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb N·m kg-m ft-lb in-lb
M6 6.0 10 1.0 5.5 0.56 4 49 7 0.71 5 62
1.25 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 13.5 1.4 10 — 17 1.7 13 —
4.8 1.5 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
(Without M10 10.0 16
lubricant) 1.25 28 2.9 21 — 35 3.6 26 —
1.75 45 4.6 33 — 55 5.6 41 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 45 4.6 33 — 65 6.6 48 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 80 8.2 59 — 100 10 74 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 4 0.41 3 35 5.5 0.56 4 49
1.25 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 11 1.1 8 — 13.5 1.4 10 —
4.8 1.5 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 22 2.2 16 — 28 2.9 21 —
1.75 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 35 3.6 26 — 45 4.6 33 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 65 6.6 48 — 80 8.2 59 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 8 0.82 6 71 10 1.0 7 89
1.25 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 21 2.1 15 — 25 2.6 18 —
8.8 1.5 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 40 4.1 30 — 50 5.1 37 —
1.75 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 70 7.1 52 — 85 8.7 63 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 120 12 89 — 140 14 103 —
M6 6.0 10 1.0 10 1.0 7 89 12 1.2 9 106
1.25 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 —
M8 8.0 13
1.0 27 2.8 20 — 32 3.3 24 —
10.9 1.5 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 —
(With lu- M10 10.0 16
bricant) 1.25 55 5.6 41 — 65 6.6 48 —
1.75 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 —
M12 12.0 18
1.25 95 9.7 70 — 110 11 81 —
M14 14.0 21 1.5 160 16 118 — 180 18 133 —
CAUTION:
1. Use tightening torque with lubricant for the new standard bolts/nuts in principle. Friction coeffi-
cient stabilizer is applied to the new standard bolts/nuts.
2. However, use tightening torque without lubricant for the following cases. Friction coefficient stabi-
lizer is not applied to the following bolts/nuts.
- Grade 4.8, M6 size bolt, Conical spring washer installed
- Paint removing nut (Size M6 and M8) for fixing with weld bolt

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-20 2014 Note
DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS
GI
N
SAIA0453E

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-21 2014 Note
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants INFOID:0000000009464396
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
NISSAN North America NISSAN Canada Part Aftermarket Cross-

Product Description Purpose
Part No. (USA) No. (Canada) reference Part Nos.
Used to permanently re-
Rear View Mirror Adhe-
1 mount rear view mirrors to 999MP-AM000P 99998-50505 Permatex 81844
sive
windows.
For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Anaerobic Liquid Gas- Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015 Permatex 51813 and
2 999MP-AM001P 99998-50503
ket inch) gap and provide in- 51817
stant sealing for most pow-
ertrain applications.
Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
High Performance parallel threaded fitting.
3 999MP-AM002P 999MP-AM002P Permatex 56521
Thread Sealant (Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
• Do not use on plastic.
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
999MP-AM003P 99998-50506 1207,1215, 1216,
4 Silicone RTV Gasket Maker
(Ultra Grey) (Ultra Grey) 1217F, 1217G and
1217H
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
High Temperature,
1307N, 1335,
5 High Strength Thread Threadlocker 999MP-AM004P 999MP-AM004P
1335B, 1363B,
Locking Sealant (Red)
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
Loctite 648
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Medium Strength
Threadlocker (service tool Three Bond 1322,
6 Thread Locking Seal- 999MP-AM005P 999MP-AM005P
removable) 1322N, 1324 D&N,
ant (Blue)
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-22 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION GI
PRECAUTIONS
B
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
C
D
this Service Manual. E
WARNING:
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by F
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag G
ness connectors. H

WARNING: I
serious injury. J
K
Procedures without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000009464413
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc. L
PIIB3706J
O
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
Unit) INFOID:0000000009015320
P
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the igni-
tion switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-23 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without

proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflam-
mable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas,
etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to prop-
erly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
SGI285
• Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire

blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jack-
ing up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at
the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehi-
cle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
• When removing a heavy component such as the engine or tran-
saxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and drop
them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially
the brake tubes and master cylinder.
SGI231
• Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:

Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
• If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
SEF289H
• To prevent serious burns:

Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
• Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an
appropriate manner.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
• Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
SGI233
• Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
• Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
• Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
• Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
• After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
• Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
• Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-24 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended
special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs. GI
• When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leaks.
B
JPAIA0335ZZ
D
• Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint. E
G
SGI234
WARNING: H
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, do not carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of I
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and TM sections.
Three Way Catalyst INFOID:0000000009464415
J
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
• Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst. K
• When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when nec-
essary.
• Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the
catalyst. L
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.
M
Fuel (Regular Unleaded Gasoline Recommended) HR16DE INFOID:0000000009464416
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) may only be used in vehicles specif- N
ically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models).
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst. Do not use E-85
O
fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically designed for E-85 fuel
(i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models). Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect
the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty coverage validity.
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-25 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System INFOID:0000000009464418
• Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the

multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
• Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injec-
tors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
• Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow
sensor.
SGI787
Hoses INFOID:0000000009464419
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

• To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with
tapered tool or screwdriver.
SMA019D
• To reinstall the rubber hose securely, make sure that hose insertion
length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose
stopper.)
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
• If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original posi-
tion (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace
of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at
that position.
• Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
SMA021D

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-26 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of
the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around. GI
SMA022D
D
Engine Oils INFOID:0000000009464420
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil. E
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
• Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils. F
• Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
• Do not put oily rags in pockets.
• Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil. G
• Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regu-
larly.
• First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds. H
• Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
• Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Prepara-
tions containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
• Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin. I
• If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
• Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
• Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face J
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste dis- K
posal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
L
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Air Conditioning INFOID:0000000009464421
M
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
HA-17, "Description".

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-27 2014 Note
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
LIFTING POINT
Tool number
Tool name
LM4086-0200
( - )
Board on attachment
S-NT001
LM4519-0000
( - )
Safety stand attachment
S-NT002
CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a transmis-
sion jack or equivalent.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a transmission jack or
equivalent.
• Be careful not to smash or do anything that would affect piping parts.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand INFOID:0000000009464406
WARNING:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Make sure to avoid damaging pipes, tubes,
etc. under the vehicle.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
• Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-28 2014 Note
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
• Lift at reinforced area of front suspension member where lower control arm attaches, staying in cen-
ter line of wheels. GI
H
ALAIA0040GB
Vehicle front
I
1. Front garage jack points 2. Safety stand points 3. Rear garage jack point
J
2-Pole Lift INFOID:0000000009464407
WARNING:
K
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of the
vehicle are well balanced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-29 2014 Note
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.
ALAIA0039ZZ
Vehicle front
1. Sill 2. Lift pad
Board-on Lift INFOID:0000000009464408
CAUTION:
Make sure vehicle is empty when lifting.
• The board-on lift attachment (LM4086-0200) set at front end of
vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under the front
door opening.
• Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
AGI016

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-30 2014 Note
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
TOW TRUCK TOWING
GI
Tow Truck Towing INFOID:0000000009464409
CAUTION: B
• Never tow a CVT model with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
• Never tow a CVT model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may C
cause serious and expensive damage to the transaxle.
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be towed with the driving
(front) wheels off the ground. D
CAUTION:
• Always release the parking brake when towing the vehicle
with the front wheels raised with the rear wheels on the
ground. E
• When towing manual transaxle models with the front wheels
on the ground (if a towing dolly is not used), turn the ignition
key to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in the F
straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device.
Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.
G
J
SGI986
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) INFOID:0000000009464410
K
FRONT
WARNING:
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. L
• Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury.
Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
CAUTION: M
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle recovery hooks or main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
• Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehi-
cle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks. N
• Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
• Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or
cooling systems. O
• Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or
recovery.
CVT P
To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacture's recommendations when using their product.
If the vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-31 2014 Note
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
Shift back and forth between R (reverse) and D (drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D.
Do not spin the tires above 35 m.p.h. (55 km/h).
4. If the vehicle can not be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehi-
cle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-32 2014 Note
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
VEHICLE INFORMATION GI
Model Variation INFOID:0000000009464398
B
Model Codes
Destination
Body Engine Grade Transmission C
Mexico/LAM Argentina
5 M/T TDTALDF-EJA TDTALDF-ELA
Base (Sense)
CVT TDTALDZ-EJA TDTALDZ-ELA D
Hatchback HR16DE
5 M/T TDTALEF-EJA TDTALEF-ELA
Mid (Advance)
CVT TDTALEZ-EJA TDTALEZ-ELA
E
Prefix and Suffix Designations
Position Character Qualifier Definition
F
1 T Body type T: Hatchback
2
DT Engine DT: HR16DE
3 G
4 A Axle A: 2WD
5 L Drive L: LH
H
D: Base (Sense)
6 D Grade
E: Mid (Advance)
F: 5 M/T
7 F Transmission I
Z: CVT
8
9 E12 Model E12: Note J
10
11 E Intake E: EGI
K
J: Mexico/LAM
12 J Zone
L: Argentina
13 A Equipment A: Standard L
14
15
M
16 XXXXX Option Codes Option Codes
17
18 N

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-33 2014 Note
Identification Number INFOID:0000000009464399
ALAIA0093ZZ
1. Air conditioner specification label 2. Vehicle identification number chas- 3. Emission control information label (if
sis number (right side of bulkhead) equipped)
4. Tire placard
Vehicle Identification Number Arrangement

1
2 3N1 Manufacturer 3N1: NISSAN Passenger Car [Nismex]
3
4 C Engine type C: HR16DE
5
E2 Model series E2: NISSAN Note model code E12
6
7 C Body type C: 4 door hatchback
8 D Restraint system D: Driver and Passenger Air Bags and 3-point manual seat belts
9 * Check digit (0 to 9 or X) The code for the check digit is determined by a mathematical computation
E: 2014
10 E Model year
Z: General exportation
L: Aguascalientes, Mexico
11 L Manufacturing plant
K: Civac, Mexico

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-34 2014 Note
GI
12
13
14 B
XXXXXX Vehicle serial number Chassis number
15
16
17 C
Engine Serial Number INFOID:0000000009464400
D
HR16DE
G
STI0429
: Vehicle front
H
CVT Number INFOID:0000000009464401
LAIA0074E
L
Manual Transaxle Number INFOID:0000000009464402
PCIB1612E
P
: Vehicle front

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-35 2014 Note
Dimensions INFOID:0000000009464403
Unit:mm (in)
Overall length 4,141 (163)

Overall width 1,645 (64.8)
Overall height 1,537 (60.5)
15 inch wheel: 1,480 (58.3)
Front tread
16 inch wheel: 1,470 (57.9)
15 inch wheel: 1,485 (58.5)
Rear tread
16 inch wheel: 1,475 (58.1)
Wheelbase 2,600 (102.4)
Wheels & Tires INFOID:0000000009464404
Conventional Spare
Road wheel/offset mm (in) 15 X 5.5J Aluminum/40 (1.57)
16 X 6.0J Aluminum/45 (1.77)
T125/70D15
P185/65R15
Tire size
P195/55R16

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-36 2014 Note
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
BASIC INSPECTION GI
B
WORK FLOW
C
SGI838
H
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis: I
WHAT Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
STEP 1 WHEN Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
J
WHERE Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
HOW
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed. K
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
STEP 2 Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
L
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
• Power Supply Routing
• System Operation Descriptions
STEP 3
• Applicable Service Manual Sections M
• Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage. N
STEP 4 Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Lay-
outs.
STEP 5 Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
O
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Make sure you have not inad-
STEP 6
vertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
Control Units and Electrical Parts INFOID:0000000009464423 P
PRECAUTIONS
• Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
• Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
• Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts.
• Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-37 2014 Note
• Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hit-
ting it.
• Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid
temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water
is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehi-
cle.
• Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
• Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
• Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper
and lower covers.
SAIA0255E
• When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from
damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
• When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the
specified check adapter.
SEF348N
How to Check Terminal INFOID:0000000009464424
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT

• Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
• The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-38 2014 Note
Tool number GI
Tool name
-
B
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
- C
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
- D
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
- E
(J42992-2000UPD) WAIA0004E WAIA0005E
OBD-II Connector Kit Up-
date
F
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
• Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector dur-
ing circuit checks. G
• The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the
connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alliga-
tor clip.
H
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
• If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, I
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
• Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to
the seal between wire and connector may result. J
SGI841
Probing from Terminal Side L
FEMALE TERMINAL
• There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch. M
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.
N
SEL265V
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-39 2014 Note
• Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make con-
tact space for probing.
SEL266V
MALE TERMINAL
• Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T”
pin.
CAUTION:
Dot not bend terminal.
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal

• An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
• If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged con-
tact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
NOTE:
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
SEL270V
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
CAUTION:
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.
SEL271V

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-40 2014 Note
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not. GI
SEL272V
D
• If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female ter-
minal, replace the female terminal.
E
G
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection

H
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION I
• Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
• The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. J
Whenever connectors are reconnected, make sure the rubber seal
is properly installed on either side of male or female connector.
K
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
• The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a
waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly.
L
SEL275V
Terminal Lock Inspection

Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. M
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
SEL330V P
Intermittent Incident INFOID:0000000009464425
DESCRIPTION
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The fol-

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-41 2014 Note
lowing section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
• Vehicle vibration
• Heat sensitive
• Freezing
• Water intrusion
• Electrical load
• Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem.
VEHICLE VIBRATION
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustra-
tion.
Connector & Harness

Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
Hint
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector termi-
nals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs inter-
mittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
Sensor & Relay
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
SGI839
Engine Compartment
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
• Connectors not fully seated.
• Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
• Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
• Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
• Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
Behind the Instrument Panel
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehi-
cle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
Under Seating Areas

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-42 2014 Note
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or GI
pinching.
HEAT SENSITIVE
• The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car B
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
• To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the C
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
CAUTION:
Do not heat components above 60°C (140°F).
• If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly D
insulate the component.
SGI842
E
FREEZING
• The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freez- F
ing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
• There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Make sure it will get cold G
enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked out-
side overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis
of those electrical components which could be affected. H
• The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
SGI843
replace the component. I
WATER INTRUSION
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intru- J
sion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
CAUTION: K
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
SGI844
M
ELECTRICAL LOAD
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog N
lamps) turned on.
SGI845
COLD OR HOT START UP

On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-43 2014 Note
Circuit Inspection INFOID:0000000009464426
DESCRIPTION
• In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thor-
ough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
• You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring
harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
There are two types of shorts.
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
SHORT • SHORT CIRCUIT
change.
• SHORT TO GROUND When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
NOTE:
Refer to GI-38, "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your work-
ing knowledge of the system.
SGI846-A
Continuity Check Method

The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Make sure to always start
with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
• Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that por-
tion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
• Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit
has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resis-
tance condition. (point B)
• Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infi-
nite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Voltage Check Method
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
• Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
• With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage; open is further down the circuit than SW1.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-44 2014 Note
no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
• Close SW1 and probe at relay. GI
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage; open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
• Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
B
voltage; open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
C
TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
D
F
SGI847-A
Resistance Check Method G

• Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
• Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground. H
• With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1. I
• Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground.
Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay. J
• Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a
known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity; short is between relay and solenoid (point C). K
no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
Voltage Check Method
• Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid discon- L
nected) powered through the fuse.
• Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse ter-
minal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground). M
• With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for N
voltage.
voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no voltage; short is further down the circuit than the relay. O
• With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage; short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
P
GROUND INSPECTION
• Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
• Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can
drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit.
Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-45 2014 Note
• When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure all of the
wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eye-
let make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
• For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
SGI853
VOLTAGE DROP TESTS

• Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
• Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire
will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand
of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will
be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
• Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
• If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method
• Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
• Operate the circuit.
• The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-46 2014 Note
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
GI
SGI974 F
Measuring Voltage Drop — Step-by-Step
• The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those
in “Computer Controlled Systems”). G
• Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
• The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire H
gauge or corrosion.
• The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
SAIA0258E
N
CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST
System Description
• When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
O
CASE 1
MGI034A

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-47 2014 Note
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
In case of high resistance such as single
Input/ Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name strand (V) *
Output
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Ex-
Body Switch ON Battery voltage
1 Switch Input ample)
ground
Switch OFF 0V Approx. 0
Body Switch ON Battery voltage Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)

2 Lamp Output
ground Switch OFF 0V Approx. 0
• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
CASE 2
MGI035A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART

In case of high resistance such as single
Input/ Condition Value (Approx.)
+ − Signal name strand (V) *
Output
Body Switch ON 0V Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)

1 Lamp Output
ground Switch OFF Battery voltage Battery voltage
Body Switch ON 0V Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)

2 Switch Input
ground Switch OFF 5V Approx. 5
• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0V. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the
lamp.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-48 2014 Note
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
GI
NOTE: B
This vehicle is diagnosed using the CONSULT-III plus.
• When CONSULT is connected with a data link connector equipped
on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit
equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnos- C
tic tests.
1 : Hood release handle D

2 : Data link connector
• Refer to “CONSULT-III plus Operation Manual” for more informa-
tion. E
ALAIA0095ZZ
Function and System Application INFOID:0000000009464428 F
TRANSMISSION1
G
METER/M&A
MULTI AV
IPDM E/R
AIR BAG
ENGINE
BCM
ABS
EPS
Diagnosis (All Systems) Description
H
Self Diagnostic Result The ECU self diagnostic results are displayed. x x x x x x x x x
I
Data Monitor The ECU input/output data is displayed in real time. x x x x x x x x x
Work support The settings for ECU functions can be changed. x x x x - x - - -
Active Test The ECU activates outputs to test components. x x - x - - - x - J
ECU identification The ECU part number is displayed. x x - x x x x x x
The status of system monitoring tests and the self diagno-
DTC Work Support x - - - - - - - - K
sis status/results can be confirmed.
Displays the history of the combination meter warning
Warning History - - x - - - - - -
lamp indicators.
Self diagnostic history and trouble diagnosis records in L
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD - - - - x - - - -
ECU are displayed.
This mode displays network diagnostic results of CAN
CAN Diag x x x x x x x x x
communication using a diagram. M
The result of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communi-
CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR x x x x x x x x x
cation is displayed.
• The vehicle specification can be read and saved. N
Configuration • The vehicle specification can be written when replacing - - - x - - - - -
ECU.
CALIB DATA The calibration values of the ECU are displayed. - - - - - x - - - O
The status of system monitoring tests and the self diagno-
SRT & P-DTC Confirmation x - - - - - - - -
sis status/results can be confirmed.
x: Applicable P
1: With continuously variable transmission
CONSULT Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit INFOID:0000000009464429
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
If the CONSULT cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-49 2014 Note
Symptom Check item

CONSULT cannot access any
• CONSULT DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8) and ground circuit (Terminal 4)
system.
• Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
CONSULT cannot access indi- diagram for each system.)
vidual system. (Other systems • Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
can be accessed.) diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NOTE:
The DDL2 circuits and CAN communication lines from DLC pins 6, 7 and 14 may be connected to more than
one system. A short in a DDL circuit or CAN lines connected to a control unit in one system may affect CON-
SULT access to other systems. For a complete DDL circuit layout, refer to GI-51, "Wiring Diagram - CON-
SULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM". For a complete CAN line layout, refer to LAN-31, "Wiring Diagram".

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-50 2014 Note
Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM INFOID:0000000009464430
GI
AAAWA0059GB
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GI-51 2014 Note
GW
A
B
SECTION
GLASS & WINDOW SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................12 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 OPERA WINDOW ............................................. 14

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Exploded View .........................................................14
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Removal and Installation .........................................14
SIONER" ................................................................... 2
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ............................ 2
SIDE WINDOW GLASS .................................... 16
Exploded View .........................................................16 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS ...................... 19
Exploded View .........................................................19 I
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4 Removal and Installation .........................................19
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ..... 21 J
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5 Exploded View .........................................................21
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
NOSES ................................................................ 5 FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR ................. 24 GW
Work Flow ................................................................. 5
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 6 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ....... 25 L
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 9 Exploded View .........................................................25
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR ................... 28 M
WINDSHIELD GLASS ........................................11
Exploded View ........................................................ 11
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Handling for Adhesive and Primer INFOID:0000000009509404
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
• Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found,
do not use it.
• If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with
soap.
• When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.
- Oily dirt:
area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth. A
B
GW

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear
SIIA0993E

(J-50397)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat-
tle Kit
ALJIA1232ZZ

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Tool name
Engine Ear
SIIA0995E
( — ) Holding door glass

Suction Lifter
LIIA1991E

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-4 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
G
SBT842
customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is J
GW
defining the noise.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-5 2014 Note
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.
temporarily.
noise.
Refer to GW-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
ment.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-6 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT PANEL
C
ness.
CAUTION: E
F
CENTER CONSOLE
G
DOORS
J
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise. GW
TRUNK
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-7 2014 Note
SEATS
noise.
UNDERHOOD

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-8 2014 Note
GW
LAIA0072E
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-9 2014 Note
LAIA0071E

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-10 2014 Note
WINDSHIELD GLASS
WINDSHIELD GLASS
B
GW
AWKIA2557ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-11 2014 Note
WINDSHIELD GLASS
1. Windshield glass molding 2. Windshield glass 3. Spacer

4. Spacer 5. Roof 6. Dam rubber
7. Headlining 8. Adhesive 9. Cowl top cover
10. Front pillar finisher 11. Body side outer 12. Body primer
13. Primer D. 3.8 mm (0.15 in) E. 5.0 mm (0.20 in)
F. 8.0 mm (0.31 in) G. 6.2 mm (0.24 in) H. 12.0 - 14.0 mm (0.47 - 0.55 in)
J. 7.0 - 9.0 mm (0.28 - 0.35 in)
REMOVAL
1. Remove front pillar finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-19, "FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Instal-
lation".
2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge).
3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-23, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove inside mirror. Refer to MIR-14, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove windshield glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag (B).
PIIB5779E
• Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
• If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with matching marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help pre-
vent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
• Be careful not to set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
• Apply protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
INSTALLATION
• Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the instructions fur-
nished with it.
• Adhesive shall be continuously applied to assure watertightness. Glass installation shall be finished within
five minutes after applying the adhesive.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
• Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
• Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
• The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-12 2014 Note
WINDSHIELD GLASS
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed A
on the box.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
B
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidity.
C
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR WINDSHIELD GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling windshield glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the
leak. D
• This can be done by applying water to the windshield glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and urethane adhesive to the leak point.
E
GW

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-13 2014 Note
OPERA WINDOW
OPERA WINDOW
AWKIA2460ZZ
1. Opera window glass 2. Adhesive 3. Front pillar finisher

4. Body side outer 5. Body primer 6. Primer
7. Front fender E. 12.0 mm (0.47 in) F. 11.0 mm (0.43 in)
G. 20.0 mm (0.79 in) Clip Pawl
REMOVAL
1. Remove front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-19, "FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the opera window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag
(B).
PIIB5779E
WARNING:

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-14 2014 Note
OPERA WINDOW
When cutting glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands. A
CAUTION:
• Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
B
• Apply protective tape around the opera window glass to protect the painted surface from dam-
age.
INSTALLATION C
nished with it.
five minutes after applying the adhesive. D
• The start and finisher of the urethane adhesive application should be located at the bottom to assure water-
tightness.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out E
F
WARNING:
contact with skin and eyes. G
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive is completely cured may affect the performance of H
the opera window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed I
on the box.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. J
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive is completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time increases under
lower temperature and lower humidity.
GW
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR OPERA WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling opera window glass.
• If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of the L
leak.
• This can be done by applying water to the opera window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
M

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-15 2014 Note
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
AWKIA2558ZZ
1. Spacer 2. Side window glass 3. Adhesive

4. Luggage side upper finisher 5. Primer 6. Body primer
7. Body side outer D. 15.0 mm (0.59 in) E. 22.4 mm (0.88 in)

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-16 2014 Note
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
F. 24.0 mm (0.94 in) G. 12.0 mm (0.47 in) H. 7.0 mm (0.28 in)
Clip A
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side upper finisher. Refer to INT-33, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation". C
2. Remove the side window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag (B).
F
PIIB5779E
WARNING:
When cutting glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to prevent G
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing. H
• Apply protective tape around the side window glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
INSTALLATION I
nished with it.
J
• The start and finisher of the urethane adhesive application should be located at the bottom to assure water-
tightness.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out GW
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity. L
WARNING:
contact with skin and eyes. M
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive is completely cured may affect the performance of N
the side window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed O
on the box.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off. P
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive is completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time increases under
lower temperature and lower humidity.
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR SIDE WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling side window glass.
leak.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-17 2014 Note
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
• This can be done by applying water to the side window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-18 2014 Note
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
A
I
AWKIA2559ZZ
1. Back door window glass weatherstrip 2. Back door window glass locator 3. Back door window glass spacer J
4. Back door window glass

GW
REMOVAL
1. Remove high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to EXL-117, "Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove the back door inner finisher. Refer to INT-34, "BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
3. Remove back door window glass using piano wire or power cutting tool (A) and an inflatable pump bag M
(B).
P
PIIB5779E
• Mark the body and the glass with matching marks if the back door window glass is reused.
• Apply protective tape around the back door window glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help pre-
vent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-19 2014 Note
• Apply protective tape around the back door window glass to protect the painted surface from
damage.
INSTALLATION
nished with it.
• While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced out
• The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
WARNING:
contact with the skin and eyes.
• Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the back door window glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed
on the box.
• Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
• The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will increase
under lower temperatures and lower humidity.
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
• Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling back door window glass.
leak.
• This can be done by applying water to the back door window glass area while pushing glass outward.
• To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and urethane adhesive to the leak point.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-20 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
A
I
AWKIA2561ZZ
1. Front door panel 2. Vapor barrier 3. Front door glass front run J
4. Front door glass rear run 5. Front door glass 6. Front door glass rubber run
7. Front door regulator 8. Front power window motor 9. Front door glass handle grommet
10. Front door glass handle A. With power window B. Without power window GW
L
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove the vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal. N
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the door mirror.
4. Temporarily reconnect both battery terminals and the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (LH
door) or power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH door) to raise/lower the front door glass until the O
bolts can be seen through the access holes (with power window).
5. Temporarily reinstall the front door glass handle and raise/lower the front door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window). P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-21 2014 Note
6. Remove front door glass bolts (A).
ALKIA3164ZZ
7. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and
pull it out of the front door glass front rear toward the outside of
the door to remove.
JMKIA8064ZZ
8. Remove the front door glass front run bolts and remove (if necessary).
9. Remove the front door glass rear run bolts and remove (if necessary).
Installation
CAUTION:
Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the front door glass run groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator bolts, door sash bolts and glass bolts to correct the glass position if the
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the vapor barrier. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Use care not to damage or tear vapor barrier during removal.
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the door mirror.
4. Temporarily reconnect both battery terminals and the main power window and door lock/unlock switch (LH
door) or power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH door) to raise/lower the front door glass until the
bolts can be seen through the access holes (with power window).
5. Temporarily reinstall the front door glass handle and raise/lower the front door glass until the bolts can be
seen through the access holes (without power window).

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-22 2014 Note
6. Remove front door glass bolts (A).
A
ALKIA3164ZZ
D
7. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with a suitable tool or approximately two inches of masking
tape.
8. Remove bolts and front door regulator. E
9. Remove front power window motor from front door regulator (if necessary). Refer to GW-24, "Removal
and Installation".
Inspection After Removal F
Check the front door glass regulator for the following items:
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation G
• Grease condition for each sliding part
If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
The arrows in the figure show the application points of a suitable
multi-purpose grease (if necessary). H
JMKIA4453ZZ
GW
Installation
CAUTION:
L
Tighten front door regulator bolts to specification. Refer to GW-21, "Exploded View".
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the sash groove.
M
N

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-23 2014 Note
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door glass regulator. Refer to GW-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove bolts and front power window motor.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-24 2014 Note
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
A
I
AWKIA2562ZZ
1. Rear door panel 2. Vapor barrier 3. Rear door glass front run J
4. Rear door glass 5. Rear door glass rear run 6. Rear door glass rubber run
7. Rear door corner finisher 8. Rear door glass regulator 9. Rear power window motor
10. Rear door glass handle grommet 11. Rear door glass handle A. With power window GW
B. Without power window Clip
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009509419 L
REAR DOOR GLASS

Removal M
2. Remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, "Exploded View".
CAUTION: N
3. Temporarily reconnect the rear power window switch to raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can
be seen through the access holes (with power window). O
4. Temporarily reinstall the rear door glass handle and raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can be
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-25 2014 Note
5. Remove rear door glass bolts (A) and rear door glass (1).
ALKIA3166ZZ
6. Remove rear door glass front run bolts and remove (if necessary).
7. Remove rear door glass rear run bolts and remove (if necessary).
Installation
CAUTION:
Tighten bolts to specification. Refer to GW-25, "Exploded View".
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the rear door glass run groove.
REAR DOOR GLASS REGULATOR
Removal
2. Remove vapor barrier. Refer to GW-25, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
3. Temporarily reconnect the rear power window switch to raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can
be seen through the access holes (with power window).
4. Temporarily reinstall the rear door glass handle and raise/lower the rear door glass until the bolts can be
5. Remove rear door glass bolts (A).
1: Rear door glass
ALKIA3166ZZ
6. Raise the rear door glass and hold it in place with a suitable tool or approximately two inches of masking
tape.
7. Remove bolts and rear door glass regulator.
8. Remove rear power window motor from rear door glass regulator (if necessary). Refer to GW-28,
Inspection After Removal
Check the rear door glass regulator for the following items:
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
• Grease condition for each sliding part

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-26 2014 Note
If a malfunction is detected, replace or grease it.
The arrows in the figure show the application points of a suitable A
multi-purpose grease (if necessary).
JMKIA7739ZZ D
Installation
CAUTION: E
Tighten rear door regulator bolts to specification. Refer to GW-25, "Exploded View".
Fitting Inspection
• Make sure that the glass fits securely into the sash groove. F
clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel. G
GW

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-27 2014 Note
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door glass regulator. Refer to GW-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove bolts and rear power window motor.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
GW-28 2014 Note
VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
HA
A
B
SECTION
HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 OIL ..................................................................... 21 F
Description ...............................................................21
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 Inspection ................................................................21
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Perform Oil Return Operation ..................................21 G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replace-
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 ment Except Compressor ........................................21
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3 Oil Adjusting Procedure for Compressor Replace- H
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service ............ 3 ment .........................................................................22
Service Equipment .................................................... 6
PERFORMANCE TEST .................................... 23
PREPARATION ............................................ 8 Inspection ................................................................23 HA
PREPARATION ................................................... 8 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 25

Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 8 COMPRESSOR ................................................. 25 J
Sealant and/or Oil ................................................... 10 Exploded View .........................................................25
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 11 Inspection ................................................................25 K
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................11 COOLER PIPE AND HOSE .............................. 27
Component Parts Location ...................................... 11 Exploded View .........................................................27
L
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 12 LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE .........................27
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........12 and Installation ........................................................27 M
Workflow ................................................................. 12
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE ........................28
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 14 HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation ........................................................28 N
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .........14
Trouble Diagnosis For Unusual Pressure ............... 14 HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE ............................................28
Symptom Table ....................................................... 14 HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE : Removal and Installa-
O
tion ...........................................................................28
NOISE .................................................................16
Symptom Table ....................................................... 16 CONDENSER .................................................... 29
Exploded View .........................................................29 P
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ......................... 17
CONDENSER .............................................................29
REFRIGERANT ..................................................17 CONDENSER : Removal and Installation ...............29
Description .............................................................. 17
Leak Test ................................................................ 17 LIQUID TANK ............................................................30
Recycle Refrigerant ................................................. 19 LIQUID TANK : Removal and Installation of Liquid
Charge Refrigerant .................................................. 19 Tank .........................................................................30

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-1 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................... 30 EVAPORATOR .......................................................... 33
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR : Remov- EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation ............. 33
al and Installation .................................................... 30
EXPANSION VALVE ................................................. 33
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY... 31 EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation ... 33
Exploded View ........................................................ 31
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .......... 32 (SDS) .......................................................... 35
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY :
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 35
HEATER CORE ......................................................... 33
Compressor ............................................................ 35
HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation ........... 33
Oil ............................................................................ 35
Refrigerant .............................................................. 35

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the HA
J
windshield. K
M
PIIB3706J
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service INFOID:0000000009667164

N
WORKING WITH HFC-134a (R-134a)

CAUTION: O
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. Compressor mal-
function is likely to occur if the refrigerants are mixed, refer to “CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT”
below. To determine the purity of HFC-134a (R-134a) in the vehicle and recovery tank, use Refriger-
ant recovery/recycling recharging equipment and Refrigerant Identifier. P
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components.
Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if oil other than that specified is used.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
- Cap (seal) the component immediately to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
- Do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrig-
erant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Use only the specified oil from a sealed container. Reseal containers of oil immediately. Oil becomes
moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
- Do not allow oil to come in contact with styrene foam parts. Damage may result.
GENERAL REFRIGERANT PRECAUTION
WARNING:
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) from the A/C system, using certified service equipment meeting require-
ments of SAE J-2210 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment] or J-2209 [HFC-134a (R-134a) recov-
ery equipment]. Ventilate work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs.
Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling recharging equipment to
capture the refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; Place the bottom of the container in a warm
pail of water if container warming is required.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Do not refrigerant away from open flames; poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen; therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffo-
cation.
• Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air condition-
ing systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a) have
been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or
property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manu-
facturers.
REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A new type of refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following locations:
• Expansion valve to evaporator
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.
• Store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle when the compressor is removed. Fail-
ure to do so will cause oil to enter the low-pressure chamber.
• Always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle.
Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connec-
tion.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
• Remove moisture thoroughly from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Apply oil to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration when connecting tube. Be careful not to apply
oil to threaded portion.
• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube.
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-4 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Perform leak test and make sure that there are no leaks from connections after connecting line. Dis-
connect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leaking point is found. Then tighten A
connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
RHA861F
CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT G
Take appropriate steps shown below if a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in
a vehicle:
• Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated refrigerant into H
the atmosphere.
• Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage service equipment and refrigerant sup-
ply.
• Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the contamination may HA
have occurred.
• In case of repairing, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and containers. Do not
recover contaminated refrigerant into the existing service equipment. Contact a local refrigerant prod- J
uct retailer for available service if the facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment. This refrigerant
must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and local regulations. In addition, replacement of all
refrigerant system components on the vehicle is recommended.
• The air conditioner warranty is void if the vehicle is within the warranty period. Please contact Nissan Cus- K
tomer Affairs for further assistance.
COMPRESSOR L
CAUTION:
• Cap or plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• Store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the car when the compressor is removed.
• Follow “Maintenance of Oil Level” exactly when replacing or repairing compressor. Refer to HA-21, M
"Description".
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with thinner if the surface is contaminated with oil. N
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service
operation. This distributes oil equally inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate the
compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• Apply voltage to the new one and check for normal operation after replacing the compressor magnet O
clutch.
LEAK DETECTION DYE
P
CAUTION:
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
• The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electrical leak detector (SST: J-41995).
The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electrical leak detector
(SST: J-41995) to pin-point refrigerant leaks.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-5 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compres-
sor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electrical leak detector (SST:
J-41995).
• Always remove any remaining dye from the leak area after repairs are completed to avoid a misdiag-
nosis during a future service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean imme-
diately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle [1/4 ounce (7.4 cc)] per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunc-
tion occurs.
NOTE:
Identification
• Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
• Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.
Service Equipment INFOID:0000000009667162
RECOVERY/RECYCLING RECHARGING EQUIPMENT

Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Do not
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure. Vacuum
pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is
possible when the pump is switched OFF after evacuation (vacuum-
ing) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hose-
to-pump connection, as per the following.
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-6 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for ser- A
vice hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils.
B
SHA533D
D
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must be equipped with
positive shut-off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of E
the hoses opposite to the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS H
Do not attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
the CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
do not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an HA
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
J
Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve
Clockwise Open
Counterclockwise Close K
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and speci- L
fied oils have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must be 1/
2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.
M
O
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve P
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-7 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Tool name
(J-41425-NIS) Repairing leaks in A/C tubes
Aluminum tube repair kit
ALIIA0390ZZ
(J-38873-A) Installing pulley

Drive plate installer
WJIA0367E
(J-46534) Removing trim components

Trim tool set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Tool name
(J-41810-NI) For checking refrigerant purity and
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R- system contamination
134a)
RJIA0197E

Power tool
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-8 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name A
(J-48710) Refrigerant recovery, recycling and re-
NISSAN ACR2009 RRR Unit charging
B
C
WJIA0293E
(J-41995) Power supply:

Electronic refrigerant leak detector • DC 12V (battery terminal) D
AHA281A
G
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit • DC 12V (battery terminal)
Kit includes:
(J-42220) H
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
HA
Fluorescent leak detection dye
(box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
(J-43872) J
Refrigerant dye cleaner
ZHA200H
(J-39183-C) Identification:
Manifold gauge set (with hoses and • The gauge face indicates R-134a. K
couplers) Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
RJIA0196E
N
Service hoses: Hose color:
• High side hose • Low side hose: Blue with black stripe
(J-39500-72B) • High side hose: Red with black
• Low side hose stripe O
(J-39500-72R) • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
• Utility hose or green with black stripe
(J-39500-72Y) Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME P
S-NT201

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-9 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name
Service couplers Hose fitting to service hose:
• High side coupler • M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or per-
(J-39500-20A) manently attached.
• Low side coupler
(J-39500-24A)
S-NT202
(J-39699) For measuring of refrigerant

Refrigerant weight scale Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT200
(J-39649) Capacity:
Vacuum pump • Air displacement: 4 CFM
(Including the isolator valve) • Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT203
Sealant and/or Oil INFOID:0000000009457705

Tool name
( — ) Container color: Light blue
HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant Container marking: HFC-134a (R-
134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT196
( — ) Type: Poly alkylene glycol (PAG), type

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH- DH-PR (Type R)
PR (Type R) Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) Vane-
rotary compressors
Capacity: 110 - 130 m (3.7 - 4.4 US fl
oz, 3.9 - 4.6 Imp fl oz)
JMIIA1759ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-10 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
B
HA
K
AWIIA1694ZZ
Component Function
1. Compressor Intakes, compresses, discharges and circulates refrigerant.
L
Cools the high-temperature high-pressure refrigerant discharged from the compressor to

2. Condenser
change it into a liquid.
M
3. Liquid tank Filters and stores a reserve of liquid refrigerant.
4. Pressure sensor Senses refrigerant pressure for proper A/C cycle operation.
5. Evaporator Evaporates refrigerant which removes heat from the air lowering its temperature. N
6. Expansion valve Transforms high-pressure liquid refrigerant to low-pressure liquid refrigerant.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-11 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
Workflow INFOID:0000000009477967
OVERALL SEQUENCE
ALIIA0440GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW CUSTOMER
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-12 2014 Note
>> GO TO 2. A
2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify symptoms. B
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FOR DTCS C
With CONSULT
D
2. Select “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Check DTC.
E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM DTC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE F
Perform the diagnostic procedure for the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
>> GO TO 7. G
5.OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, "Work Procedure". H
>> GO TO 6.
6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS HA
Check the symptom diagnosis table. Refer to HA-14, "Symptom Table".
J
>> GO TO 8.
7.VERIFY REPAIR.
K
With CONSULT
3. Check DTC. L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8. M
8.PERFORM FINAL OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, "Work Procedure". N
Does it operate normally?
NO >> GO TO 2. O

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-13 2014 Note
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis For Unusual Pressure INFOID:0000000009014871
Diagnose using a manifold gauge set whenever refrigerant pressures are unusual. The marker above the
gauge scale in the following table indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Refer to HA-23, "Inspection".
Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action

Recover refrigerant, evacuate
The pressure returns to nor- system, and recharge with the
mal soon after sprinkling wa- Overfilled refrigerant. specified amount of refrigerant.
ter on condenser. Refer to HA-19, "Recycle Re-
frigerant".
Insufficient condenser cooling
performance.
Both high and low-pressure sides • Repair or replace malfunc-
• Poor cooling fan rotation.
are too high. Air flow to condenser is insuf- tioning parts.
• Missing and/or improper in-
ficient. • Clean and/or repair condens-
stallation of air guides.
er fins.
• Clogged or dirty condenser
fins.
When compressor stops, Recover refrigerant, evacuate
high-pressure gauge quickly system, and recharge with the
drops by approximately 196 Air mixed with refrigerant. specified amount of refrigerant.
AC359A
kPa (2 kg/cm2, 28 psi), then Refer to HA-19, "Recycle Re-
gradually decreases. frigerant".
• Low-pressure pipe is cooler
than the outlet of evapora- Expansion valve opened too Replace expansion valve. Refer
tor. much (excessive flow of refrig- to HA-33, "EXPANSION VALVE
• Low-pressure pipe is frost- erant). : Removal and Installation".
ed.
High-pressure side is excessively
high and low-pressure side is too
low.
High-pressure pipe and upper
Clogged or crushed high-pres-
side of condenser become Repair or replace the malfunc-
sure pipe located between
hot, however, liquid tank does tioning parts.
compressor and condenser.
not become so hot.
AC360A
High-pressure side is too low and

low-pressure side is too high.
• The readings of both sides Malfunctioning compressor (in-
become equal soon after sufficient compressor pressure
Replace compressor. Refer to
compressor stops. operation).
HA-25, "Removal and Installa-
• There is no temperature dif- • Damaged or broken of inter-
tion".
ference between high and nal components.
low-pressure sides. • Malfunctioning gaskets.
AC356A

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-14 2014 Note
Gauge indication Refrigerant cycle Probable cause Corrective action
A
• The area around evapora-
Clogged expansion valve.
tor outlet does not become
• Breakage of temperature Eliminate foreign material from
cold.
sensor. expansion valve, or replace it.
• The area around evapora- B
• Clogging by foreign material.
tor inlet becomes frosted.
• There is a temperature dif-
ference between the areas Replace condenser (includes
around outlet and inlet Malfunction inside liquid tank liquid tank). Refer to HA-29,
C
Both high and low-pressure sides
are too low. pipes of liquid tank. (clogged strainer). "CONDENSER : Removal and
• Liquid tank becomes frost- Installation".
ed. D
Clogged or crushed low-pres- Repair or replace malfunction-
sure pipe. ing parts.
Evaporator becomes frosted. Check thermo amp. system. E
Malfunctioning thermo amp. Refer to HAC-11, "Component
AC353A Parts Location".
• Check for leaks. Refer to HA-
17, "Leak Test".
F
There is a small temperature • Recover refrigerant, evacu-
• Low refrigerant charge.
difference between the high ate system, and recharge
• Leak or leaks in A/C system.
and low pressure pipes. with the specified amount of G
refrigerant. Refer to HA-19,
"Recycle Refrigerant".
Low-pressure side sometimes be-
comes negative. Recover refrigerant then re- H
• Sometimes the area place condenser (includes liq-
around evaporator outlet • Icing caused by moisture uid tank). Refer to HA-29,
does not become cold. mixed with refrigerant. "CONDENSER : Removal and
• Sometimes the area • Deteriorated dryer material Installation". Evacuate system
HA
around evaporator inlet is in liquid tank. and recharge with the specified
frosted. amount of refrigerant. Refer to
HA-19, "Recycle Refrigerant". J
AC354A

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-15 2014 Note
NOISE
NOISE
Symptom Noise source Probable cause Corrective action

Worn, broken, or clogged internal com- Check compressor oil. Re-
Inside of compressor
ponents. fer to HA-21, "Description".
Check clearance between
Unusual noise from compressor Magnet clutch Contact of clutch disc with pulley. clutch disc and pulley. Refer
when A/C is ON. to HA-25, "Inspection".
Check torque of mounting
Compressor body Loose compressor mounting bolts. bolts. Refer to HA-25, "Ex-
ploded View".
Check installation of cooler
Cooler piping (pipe and Loose or improper installation of clip
Unusual noise from cooler piping. piping. Refer to HA-27, "Ex-
flexible hose) and bracket.
ploded View".
• Check for leaks. Refer to
HA-17, "Leak Test".
• Recover refrigerant,
Low refrigerant charge.
evacuate system, and re-
Unusual noise from expansion charge with the specified
Expansion valve
valve when A/C is ON. amount of refrigerant.
Eliminate foreign material
Worn, broken, or clogged internal com-
from expansion valve, or re-
ponents.
place it.
Check belt tension. Refer to
Loose belt
EM-17, "Adjustment".
Unusual noise from belt. — Replace compressor. Refer
Damaged or broken components in-
to HA-25, "Removal and In-
side compressor.
stallation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-16 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT
B
CONNECTION OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

C
H
JSIIA0239ZZ
1. Shut-off valve 2. A/C service valve 3. Recovery/recycling/recharging

equipment HA
4. Refrigerant container (HFC-134a) 5. Weight scale 6. Vacuum pump
7. Manifold gauge set
A. Preferred (best) method B. Alternative method C. For charging J
Leak Test INFOID:0000000009460334
K
CHECK REFRIGERANT LEAKS USING FLUORESCENT LEAK DETECTION DYE
RJIA3815J
1. Install a fender cover (1).

2. Wear UV safety goggles (2) provided with refrigerant dye leak detection kit.
3. Connect power cable (4) of UV lamp (6) to positive and negative terminals of the battery (3).

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-17 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT
4. Press UV lamp switch (5) and check A/C system for refrigerant leaks. (Where refrigerant leaks occur, flu-
orescent leak detection dye appears green in color.)
WARNING:
Do not look directly into UV lamp light source.
NOTE:
• For continuous operating time of UV lamp, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
• Illuminate pipe joints from different angles using UV lamp to check for leaks.
• Use a mirror in areas that are difficult to see to check for leaks.
• Refrigerant leaks from the evaporator can be detected by soaking a cotton swab or similar material with
drain hose water and illuminating it using the UV lamp.
• Dust, dirt, and packing material adhesives used for condenser, evaporator, and other components may
fluoresce. Be careful not to misidentify leaks.
5. Repair or replace parts where refrigerant leaks occur and wipe off fluorescent leak detection dye.
NOTE:
Completely wipe off fluorescent leak detection dye from gaps between parts, screw threads, and other
components using a cotton swab or similar material.
6. Use a UV lamp to check that no fluorescent leak detection dye remains after finishing work.
WARNING:
Do not look directly into UV lamp light source.
NOTE:
• For continuous operating time of UV lamp, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
• Dust, dirt, and packing material adhesives used for condenser, evaporator, and other components may
fluoresce. Be careful not to misidentify leaks.
CHECK REFRIGERANT LEAKS USING ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
WARNING:
Do not check for refrigerant leaks while the engine is running.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the following items so that inaccurate checks or misidentifications are avoided.
• Do not allow refrigerant vapor, shop chemical vapors, cigarette smoke or other contaminates around
the vehicle.
• Always check refrigerant leaks in a low air flow environment so that refrigerant may not disperse.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment or manifold gauge set to the A/C service valves.
3. Check that A/C refrigerant pressure is 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) or more when temperature is 16°C
(61°F) or more. When pressure is lower than the specified value, recycle refrigerant completely and
recharge refrigerant to the specified level.
NOTE:
Leaks may not be detected if A/C refrigerant pressure is 345 kPa (3.52 kg/cm2, 50 psi) or less when tem-
perature is less than 16°C (61°F).
4. Clean the area where the refrigerant leak check is performed and check for refrigerant leaks along all sur-
faces of pipe connections and A/C system components using electronic leak detector probe.
CAUTION:
• Continue checking once leaks are found. Always continue and complete checking along all pipe
connections and A/C system components for additional leaks.
• When leaks are detected, clean leak area using compressed air and re-check.
• When checking the evaporator for leaks, always clean inside of drain hose so that the probe sur-
face may not be exposed to water or dirt.
NOTE:
• Always check for leaks starting from the high-pressure side and continue to the low-pressure side.
• When checking the evaporator for leaks, operate blower motor for 15 minutes or more at the maximum
speed while the engine is stopped. Insert electronic leak detector probe into drain hose and hold for 10
minutes or more.
• When disconnecting shut-off valve that is connected to A/C service valve, always evacuate remaining
refrigerant so that misidentification can be avoided.
5. Repair or replace parts where refrigerant leaks occur.
6. Start the engine and set A/C control in the following conditions.
• A/C switch: ON

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-18 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT
• Air flow: VENT (ventilation)
• Intake door position: Recirculation A
• Temperature setting: Full cold
• Blower speed: Maximum
7. Run the engine at approximately 1,500 rpm for two minutes or more. B
8. Stop the engine. Check for refrigerant leaks. Go to step 4.
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burned when the engine is hot. C
NOTE:
• Start refrigerant leak check immediately after the engine is
stopped.
• When refrigerant circulation is stopped, pressure on the low- D
pressure side rises gradually and pressure on the high-pres-
sure side falls gradually.
• The higher the pressure is, the easier it is to find refrigerant E
leaks.
SHA839E
Recycle Refrigerant INFOID:0000000009460335 G
WARNING:
• Always use HFC-134a for A/C refrigerant. If CFC-12 is accidentally charged, compressor damage H
may result due to insufficient lubrication.
• Always observe and follow precautions described on refrigerant container. Incorrect handling may
result in an explosion of refrigerant container, frostbite or the loss of eyesight.
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose, or throat. HA
• Do not allow HFC-134a to be exposed to an open flame. Poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant
burns. Keep workshop well ventilated.
1. Perform oil return operation. Refer to HA-21, "Perform Oil Return Operation". (If refrigerant or oil leaks are J
detected in a large amount, omit this step, and go to step 2.)
CAUTION:
Do not perform oil return operation if a large amount of refrigerant or oil has leaked. K
2. Check pressure gauge readings of recovery/recycling/recharging equipment. When remaining pressure
exists, recycle refrigerant from high-pressure hose and low-pressure hose.
NOTE: L
Follow manufacturer instructions for the handling or maintenance of the equipment. Do not fill the equip-
ment with non-specified refrigerant.
3. Remove A/C service valve caps from the vehicle.
M
4. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment to A/C service valves.
5. Operate recovery/recycling/recharging equipment, and recycle refrigerant from the vehicle.
6. Evacuate air for 10 minutes or more to remove any remaining refrigerant integrated in the compressor oil, N
etc.
7. Refrigerant recycle operation is complete.
Charge Refrigerant INFOID:0000000009460336 O
WARNING:
• Always use HFC-134a for A/C refrigerant. If CFC-12 is accidentally charged, compressor damage P
may result due to insufficient lubrication.
• Always observe and follow precautions described on refrigerant container. Incorrect handling may
result in an explosion of refrigerant container, frostbite, or the loss of eyesight.
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure my irritate eyes, nose, or throat.
• Do not allow HFC-134a to be exposed to an open flame. Poisonous gas is produce if refrigerant
burns. Keep workshop well ventilated.
1. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment to the A/C service valves.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-19 2014 Note
REFRIGERANT
2. Operate recovery/recycling/recharging equipment, and evacuate air from A/C system for 25 minutes or
more.
CAUTION:
Evacuate air for 15 minutes or more if parts are replaced.
3. Check the airtightness of A/C system for 25 minutes or more. If pressure raises more than the specified
level, charge A/C system with approximately 200g of refrigerant and check that there are no refrigerant
leaks. Refer to HA-17, "Leak Test".
CAUTION:
Check the airtightness for 15 minutes or more if parts are replaced.
4. If parts other than the compressor are replaced, fill compressor oil according to parts that are replaced.
Refer to HA-21, "Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor".
5. Charge the specified amount of refrigerant into A/C system.
6. Check that the A/C system operates normally.
7. Collect the refrigerant from the high-pressure hose and low-pressure hose of recovery/recycling/recharg-
ing equipment. Disconnect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment.
8. Install A/C service valve caps.
9. Refrigerant charge is complete.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-20 2014 Note
OIL
OIL
A
MAINTENANCE OF OIL LEVEL B

The compressor oil circulates in the system together with the refrigerant. It is necessary to add oil to the com-
pressor when replacing A/C system components or when a large amount of refrigerant leaks from the system.
It is important to always maintain oil level within the specified level. Otherwise, the following conditions may C
occur.
• Insufficient oil amount: Stuck compressor
• Excessive oil amount: Insufficient cooling (caused by insufficient heat exchange)
D
Name A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR
Inspection INFOID:0000000009014866 E
If a compressor is malfunctioning (internal noise, insufficient cooling), check the compressor oil.
1.COMPRESSOR OIL JUDGMENT F
1. Remove the compressor. Refer to HA-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Sample the compressor oil and judge on the figure.
G
HA
JSIIA0927GB
J
Judgement result 1>>Replace compressor only.
Judgement result 2>>Replace compressor and condenser (includes liquid tank).
K
Perform Oil Return Operation INFOID:0000000009014867
CAUTION:
If a large amount of refrigerant or oil leaks from the system, do not perform oil return operation. L
1. Start the engine and set the front air control to the following conditions.
• Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
• A/C switch: ON M
• Blower speed: Maximum
• Intake door position: Recirculation
• Temperature setting: Full cold
N
2. Perform oil return operation for approximately 10 minutes.
3. Stop the engine.
4. Oil return operation is complete. O
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
INFOID:0000000009014868
P
Add the amount of oil that is calculated according to the following conditions.
Example: Oil amount to be added when replacing evaporator [m (Imp fl oz.)] = 35 (1.2) + α
Oil amount to be added to A/C system

Conditions
m (Imp fl oz.)
Replace evaporator 35 (1.2)
Replace condenser (includes liquid tank) 20 (0.7)

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-21 2014 Note
OIL
Conditions
m (Imp fl oz.)
Large amount leakage 30 (1.1)
Refrigerant leak is detected
Small amount leakage —
Oil amount that is recycled together with refrigerant during recycle operation α
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Compressor Replacement INFOID:0000000009014869
1. Drain oil from removed compressor and measure amount drained.

• Drain oil from high-pressure port (A) and low-pressure port (B)
while rotating magnet clutch.
• Measure total amount of oil that is drained from removed com-
pressor.
JMIIA0940ZZ
2. Drain oil from a new compressor that is calculated according to

the following conditions.
Amount to be drained (A) [m (Imp fl oz.)] = F − (D

+ S + R + α)
F: Oil amount that a new compressor contains
[120 (4.2)]
D: Oil amount that is drained from removed com-
pressor
S: Oil amount that remains inside of removed JPIIA1455GB
compressor [20 (0.7)]

R: Oil amount to be added according to compo-
nents that are removed except compressor
α: Oil amount that is recycled together with re-
frigerant during recycle operation
CAUTION:
If oil amount that is drained from removed compressor is less than 60 m (2.1 Imp fl oz.), perform
calculation by setting “D” as 40 m (1.4 Imp fl oz.).

Conditions
m (Imp fl oz.)
Replace evaporator 35 (1.2)
Replace condenser (in-
20 (0.7)
cludes liquid tank)
Example: Oil amount to be drained from a new compressor when replacing compressor [m (Imp fl oz.)]
[D = 60 (2.1), α = 5 (0.2)]
120 (4.2) − [60 (2.1) + 20 (0.7) + 5 (0.2)] = 35 (1.1)
3. Install compressor and check the operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-22 2014 Note
PERFORMANCE TEST
PERFORMANCE TEST
A
INSPECTION PROCEDURE B
1. Connect recovery/recycling/recharging equipment (for HFC-134a) or manifold gauge set.
2. Start the engine, and set to the following condition.
C
Test condition
Surrounding condition In a well-ventilated place away from direct sunlight.
Doors Closed
D
Door glass Closed
Vehicle condition
Hood Open
Engine speed Idle speed E
Temperature control Full cold
A/C switch ON
F
A/C condition (front/rear) Air outlet VENT (ventilation)
Intake door position Recirculation
Blower speed Maximum G
3. Maintain test condition until A/C system becomes stable. (Approximately 10 minutes)
4. Check that test results of “recirculating-to-discharge air temperature” and “ambient air temperature-to-
operating pressure” are within the specified value. H
5. When test results are within the specified value, inspection is complete.
If any test result is out of the specified value, perform diagnosis by manifold gauge set. Refer to HA-14,
"Symptom Table". HA
RECIRCULATING-TO-DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE TABLE
FRONT J
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet

Discharge air temperature from center ventilator
Relative humidity Air temperature °C (°F) K
% °C (°F)
20 (68) 4.7 - 6.7 (40 - 44)
25 (77) 8.6 - 11.1 (47 - 52) L
50 – 60
30 (86) 12.6 - 15.6 (55 - 60)
35 (95) 19.0 - 22.5 (66 - 73)
M
20 (68) 6.7 - 8.7 (44 - 48)
25 (77) 11.1 - 13.6 (52 - 56)
60 – 70
30 (86) 15.6 - 18.6 (60 - 65) N
35 (95) 22.5 - 26.0 (73 - 79)
AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE-TO-OPERATING PRESSURE TABLE O

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-23 2014 Note
PERFORMANCE TEST
Fresh air
High-pressure (Discharge side) Low-pressure (Suction side)
Relative humidity Air temperature kPa (kg/cm2, psi) kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
% °C (°F)
900 - 1,112 159 - 194
25 (77)
(9.2 - 11.3, 130.5 - 161.2) (1.6 - 2.0, 23.1 - 28.1)
1,073 - 1,312 211 - 259
30 (86)
(10.9 - 13.4, 155.6 - 190.2) (2.2 - 3.1, 30.6 - 37.6)
50 – 70
1,445 - 1,766 247 - 300
35 (95)
(14.7 - 18.0, 209.5 - 256.1) (2.5 - 3.1, 35.8 - 43.5)
1,650 - 2,017 290 - 355
40 (104)
(16.8 - 20.6, 239.3 - 292.5) (3.0 - 3.6, 42.1 - 51.5)

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-24 2014 Note
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR
B
JMIIA1211GB
H
1. High-pressure flexible hose 2. O-ring 3. Compressor
4. Low-pressure flexible hose A. To condenser B. To evaporator
HA
REMOVAL J
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, "Recycle Refrigerant".
3. Remove fender protector (RH). Refer to EXT-24, "Removal and Installation". K
4. Remove low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hoses and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to L
avoid the entry of air.
6. Disconnect magnet clutch harness connector. M
7. Remove bolts and compressor.
INSTALLATION N
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to the new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible O
hose for installation.
• Perform oil adjusting procedure before installing new compressor. Refer to HA-22, "Oil Adjusting
Procedure for Compressor Replacement". P
• Check drive belt tension after installing compressor. Refer to EM-17, "Adjustment".
CHECK DISC TO PULLEY CLEARANCE

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-25 2014 Note
COMPRESSOR
Check the clearance (B) between pulley assembly (1) and clutch
disc (2) along the entire periphery with a feeler gauge (A).
Clearance : Refer to HA-35, "Compressor".

If specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting spacer and
readjust.
AWIIA1462ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-26 2014 Note
COOLER PIPE AND HOSE
A
HA
J
AWIIA1685GB
1. Heating and cooling unit assembly 2. O-ring 3. High-pressure pipe K

4. Condenser 5. High-pressure flexible hose 6. Compressor
7. Low-pressure flexible hose
L
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395304
M
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, "Recycle Refrigerant". N
2. Disconnect vacuum hose from intake manifold. Refer to BR-32, "Exploded View".
3. Remove ground wire from engine to radiator core support upper.
4. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". O
5. Remove low-pressure flexible hose nut and bolt, then position lower dash insulator as necessary.
6. Remove bolt and low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve.
CAUTION: P
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl tape
to avoid the entry of air.
7. Remove bolt and low-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-27 2014 Note
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of low-pressure flexible hose for installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, "Leak Test".
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395305
REMOVAL
3. Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
4. Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and compressor with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure flexible hose for installation.
HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE
HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395306
REMOVAL
3. Remove low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-27, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and
Installation".
4. Remove high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-28, "HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation".
5. Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve.
CAUTION:
6. Remove bolt and high-pressure pipe from condenser.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
7. Release clips and remove high-pressure pipe from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure pipe for installation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-28 2014 Note
CONDENSER
CONDENSER
A
HA
AWIIA1695ZZ
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Condenser with liquid tank 3. O-ring J

CONDENSER
CONDENSER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395310 K
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to HA-19, "Recycle Refrigerant". L
3. Remove air guides. Refer to DLK-122, "Exploded View".
M
5. Remove bolt and high-pressure flexible hose from condenser.
N
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
6. Remove bolt and high-pressure pipe from condenser. O
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C piping and condenser with suitable material such as vinyl tape to
avoid the entry of air. P
7. Disconnect the harness connector from the refrigerant pressure sensor and remove condenser.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-29 2014 Note
CONDENSER
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the high-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.
• Perform oil adjusting procedure before installing new condenser. Refer to HA-21, "Oil Adjusting Pro-
cedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor".
LIQUID TANK
LIQUID TANK : Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank INFOID:0000000009395311
The liquid tank is only serviced as part of the condenser. Refer to HA-29, "CONDENSER : Removal and Instal-
lation".
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395312
REMOVAL
3. Remove upper air guide and air guide (LH). Refer to DLK-122, "Exploded View".
4. Clean refrigerant pressure sensor and surrounding area.
CAUTION:
Make sure to clean carefully.
5. Disconnect the harness connector from the refrigerant pressure
sensor.
6. Support liquid tank, then remove refrigerant pressure sensor (1).
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage liquid tank.
• Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser.
• Cap or wrap the joint of the condenser and liquid tank
with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry
of air.
ALIIA0004ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-30 2014 Note
HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
A
HA
AWIIA1689ZZ
K
1. Heating and cooling unit assembly 2. Steering member 3. Cap
4. Bracket Pawl
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-31 2014 Note
AWIIA1696ZZ
1. Intake case 2. Thermo control amp. 3. Evaporator

4. O-ring 5. Expansion valve 6. O-ring
7. Grommet 8. Heater pipe flange 9. Heater core
10. Front blower motor 11. Heating and cooling unit assembly 12. Seal
13. Seal

HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395313
REMOVAL
2. Drain engine coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining Engine Coolant".
3. Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXI-
BLE HOSE : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the A/C hose and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl tape
to avoid the entry of air.
4. Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-28, "HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE :
CAUTION:
5. Disconnect heater hoses from heater core.
6. Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-15, "Removal and Installation".
7. Disconnect evaporator drain hose from heating and cooling unit assembly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-32 2014 Note
8. Disconnect harness connectors, grounds, retainers, etc., and remove bolts required to remove steering
member. A
9. Remove steering member and heating and cooling unit assembly.
10. Remove heating and cooling unit assembly from steering member. Refer to HA-31, "Exploded View".
B
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings. C
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.
• After charging refrigerant, check for leaks. Refer to HA-17, "Leak Test". D
NOTE:
When refilling engine coolant, refer to CO-9, "Refilling".
HEATER CORE E
HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395314
REMOVAL F
1. Remove the heating and cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-32, "HEATING AND COOLING UNIT
ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
G
2. Remove foot duct (LH). Refer to VTL-7, "FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove heater packing.
4. Remove heater pipe flange. H
5. Remove heater core.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. HA
NOTE:
When refilling engine coolant, refer to CO-9, "Refilling".
EVAPORATOR J
EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395315
K
REMOVAL
1. Remove heating and cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-32, "HEATING AND COOLING UNIT ASSEM-
BLY : Removal and Installation". L
2. Remove foot duct (RH). Refer to VTL-7, "FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove intake case. Refer to HA-31, "Exploded View".
4. Remove expansion valve. Refer to HA-33, "EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation". M
5. Remove evaporator cover and evaporator assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings for installation. O
• Perform oil adjusting procedure after installing new evaporator. Refer to HA-21, "Oil Adjusting Pro-
cedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor".
P
EXPANSION VALVE
EXPANSION VALVE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009395316
REMOVAL

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-33 2014 Note
2. Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose from expansion valve. Refer to HA-27, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXI-
BLE HOSE : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect high-pressure pipe from expansion valve. Refer to HA-28, "HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE :
4. Remove bolts and expansion valve.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the evaporator and expansion valve with suitable material such as vinyl
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Apply compressor oil to new O-rings of the low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe for
installation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-34 2014 Note
Compressor INFOID:0000000009014878
B
Model CALSONIC KANSEI CR08b C

Type Vane rotary
Displacement Maximum 83 cm3 (5.1cu in)/rev
D
Direction of rotation Clockwise (viewed from clutch)
Drive belt Poly V
Disc to pulley clearance Standard 0.25 – 0.55 mm (0.010 – 0.022 in) E
Oil INFOID:0000000009014879
F
Name A/C System Oil Type DH-PR (Type R)
Total in system 110 - 130 m (3.9 - 4.6 Imp fl oz) G
Capacity Replacement compressor charging Refer to HA-22, "Oil Adjusting Procedure for
amount Compressor Replacement".
H
Refrigerant INFOID:0000000009014880
HA
Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity 0.4 kg (0.9 lb)

GETtheMANUALS.org
HA-35 2014 Note
VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
HAC
A
B
SECTION
HEATER & AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 20 F
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R ....................................... 20

List of ECU Reference .............................................20 G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 21
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ......... 21 H
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3 Wiring Diagram ........................................................21
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service ............ 4
HAC
Service Equipment .................................................... 6 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 27
Workflow ..................................................................27
PREPARATION ............................................ 8
J
OPERATION INSPECTION .............................. 29
PREPARATION ................................................... 8
Work Procedure .......................................................29
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 8 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 31 K
Sealant and/or Oil ................................................... 10
A/C ON SIGNAL ................................................ 31
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 11 Component Function Check ....................................31 L
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................11
Component Parts Location ...................................... 11
BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL ............................. 34 M
SYSTEM .............................................................13
Component Function Check ....................................34
System Description ................................................. 13
Compressor Control ................................................ 13
Door Control ............................................................ 14 N
A/C INDICATOR ................................................ 36
OPERATION .......................................................17
Switch Name and Function ..................................... 17 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR ............................... 37 O
Description ...............................................................37
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................18
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 18 Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor) ...........39 P
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - Component Inspection (Blower Relay) ....................39
COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 18 Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Re-
sistor) .......................................................................39
AIR CONDITIONER ................................................... 18 Component Inspection (Fan Switch) .......................39
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM -
AIR CONDITIONER) ............................................... 19 MAGNET CLUTCH ........................................... 41
Description ...............................................................41

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-1 2014 Note
Component Function Check ................................... 41 THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER .................... 48
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 41 Removal and Installation ......................................... 48
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 43 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ............ 49

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ......... 43
Symptom Table ...................................................... 43 FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR ............ 50
Exploded View ........................................................ 50
INSUFFICIENT COOLING ................................. 44 Removal and Installation ......................................... 50
Description .............................................................. 44
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44 DOOR CABLE ................................................... 51
Exploded View ........................................................ 51
INSUFFICIENT HEATING ................................. 45
Description .............................................................. 45 INTAKE DOOR CABLE ............................................ 51
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45 INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation
... 51
COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE ........... 46 INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment ..................... 51
Description .............................................................. 46
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46 MODE DOOR CABLE ............................................... 52
MODE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation... 52
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 47 MODE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment ........................ 52
FRONT AIR CONTROL ..................................... 47 AIR MIX DOOR CABLE ............................................ 52

Exploded View ........................................................ 47 AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47 ... 52
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Adjustment ..................... 52

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the HAC
J
windshield. K
M
PIIB3706J

N
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component O
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip. P
- Oily dirt:
GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-3 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
area.
Precautions For Refrigerant System Service INFOID:0000000009515771
GENERAL REFRIGERANT PRECAUTION

WARNING:
• Do not breathe A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant. Venti-
late work area before resuming service if accidental system discharge occurs. Additional health and
safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
• Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling recharging equipment to
capture the refrigerant each time an air conditioning system is discharged.
• Wear always eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or air
conditioning system.
• Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52°C (126°F).
• Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame. Place the bottom of the container in a pail of
warm water if container warming is required.
• Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
• Keep refrigerant away from open flames. Poisonous gas is produced if refrigerant burns.
• Refrigerant displaces oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent suffo-
cation.
• Do not pressure test or leakage test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air condi-
tioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refriger-
ant manufacturers.
WORKING WITH HFC-134a (R-134a)
CAUTION:
• CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. These refrigerants
must never be mixed, even in the smallest amounts. Compressor malfunction is likely occur if the
refrigerants are mixed.
• Use only specified oil for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components.
Compressor malfunction is likely to occur if oil other than that specified is used.
• The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) oil rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following
handling precautions must be observed:
- Cap (seal) immediately the component to minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere when
removing refrigerant components from a vehicle.
- Do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components when installing refrig-
erant components to a vehicle. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to
minimize the entry of moisture into system.
- Use only the specified oil from a sealed container. Reseal immediately containers of oil. Oil becomes
moisture saturated and should not be used without proper sealing.
- Do not allow oil (A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR) to come in contact with styrene foam parts. Damage
may result.
REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following location.
• Expansion valve to evaporator
• Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
WARNING:
Check that all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
CAUTION:
Observe the following when replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-4 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle.
Failure to do so will cause oil to enter the low-pressure chamber. A
• Use always a torque wrench and a back-up wrench when connecting tubes.
• Plug immediately all openings to prevent entry of dust and moisture after disconnecting tubes.
• Connect the pipes at the final stage of the operation when installing an air conditioner in the vehicle.
B
Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for connec-
tion.
• Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components. C
• Remove thoroughly moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
• Replace always used O-rings.
• Apply oil to the O-rings shown in illustrations when connecting tubes. Be careful not to apply oil to D
threaded portion.
Name : A/C System Oil Type: DH-PR

E
• O-ring must be closely attached to the groove portion of tube.
• Be careful not to damage O-ring and tube when replacing the O-ring.
• Connect tube until a click can be heard. Then tighten the nut or bolt by hand. Check that the O-ring is
installed to tube correctly. F
• Perform leak test and make sure there are no leaks from connections after connecting lines. Discon-
nect that line and replace the O-ring when the refrigerant leak point is found. Then tighten connec-
tions of seal seat to the specified torque. G
HAC
L
RHA861F
COMPRESSOR
CAUTION: M
• Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
• When the compressor is removed, store it in the same way as it is when mounted on the vehicle.
• Follow “MAINTENANCE OF OIL LEVEL” exactly when replacing or repairing compressor. Refer to N
HA-21, "Description".
• Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. Wipe them off by using a clean waste cloth
moistened with solvent if the surfaces are contaminated with oil.
• Turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in both directions after compressor service O
operation. This equally distributes oil inside the compressor. Let the engine idle and operate the
compressor for one hour after the compressor is installed.
• After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new clutch to check for normal P
operation.
LEAK DETECTION DYE
CAUTION:
• The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An
ultraviolet (UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
• Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-5 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
• The fluorescent leak detection dye is not a replacement for an electronic leak detector. The fluores-
cent leak detection dye should be used in conjunction with an electronic leak detector to pin-point
refrigerant leaks.
• Read and follow all manufacture’s operating instructions and precautions prior to performing the
work for the purpose of safety and customer’s satisfaction.
• A compressor shaft seal should not necessarily be repaired because of dye seepage. The compres-
sor shaft seal should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic leak detector.
• Always remove any remaining dye from the leak area after repairs are completed to avoid a misdiag-
nosis during a future service.
• Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. Clean imme-
diately with the approved dye cleaner if dye is spilled. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an
extended period of time cannot be removed.
• Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
• Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle [1/4 ounce (7.4 cc)] per A/C system.
• Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system, or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system, or A/C system damage may result.
• The fluorescent properties of the dye remains for three or more years unless a compressor malfunc-
tion occurs.
NOTE:
Identification
• Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
• Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.
Service Equipment INFOID:0000000009515772
RECOVERY/RECYCLING RECHARGING EQUIPMENT

Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Do not
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR
Be certain to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
The oil contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible with the
specified oil for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems. The vent side of
the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure. Vacuum
pump oil may migrate out of the pump into the service hose. This is
possible when the pump is switched OFF after evacuation (vacuum-
ing) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hose-
to-pump connection, as per the following.
• Vacuum pumps usually have a manual isolator valve as part of the
pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the pump.
• Use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump
end for pumps without an isolator. Close the valve to isolate the
hose from the pump.
• Disconnect the hose from the pump if the hose has an automatic
shut-off valve. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is open
and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump’s
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-6 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2″-16 ACME threaded connections for ser- A
vice hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified oils.
B
SHA533D
D
SERVICE HOSES
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described
(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must be equipped with
positive shut-off devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of E
the hoses opposite to the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS H
Do not attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to
the CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers
do not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an HAC
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
J
Shut-off valve rotation A/C service valve
Clockwise Open
Counterclockwise Close K
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and speci- L
fied oils have been used with the scale. The hose fitting must be 1/
2″-16 ACME if the scale controls refrigerant flow electronically.
M
O
RHA274D
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder’s top valve P
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-7 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Tool name
(J-41810-NI) For checking refrigerant purity and
Refrigerant identifier equipment (R- system contamination
134a)
RJIA0197E

Power tool
PIIB1407E
(J-48710) Refrigerant recovery, recycling and re-

NISSAN ACR2009 RRR Unit charging
WJIA0293E

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-8 2014 Note
PREPARATION
Tool name A
Electronic refrigerant leak detector • DC 12V (battery terminal)
B
D
AHA281A

E
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit • DC 12V (battery terminal)
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles F
(J-41459)
Refrigerant dye injector
(J-41447)
Fluorescent leak detection dye G
(box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
ZHA200H H
(J-39183-C) Identification:
Manifold gauge set (with hoses and • The gauge face indicates R-134a.
couplers) Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
HAC
K
RJIA0196E
Service hoses: Hose color:

• High side hose • Low side hose: Blue with black stripe L
(J-39500-72B) • High side hose: Red with black
• Low side hose stripe
(J-39500-72R) • Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe
• Utility hose or green with black stripe
M
(J-39500-72Y) Hose fitting to gauge:
• 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT201
N
Service couplers Hose fitting to service hose:
• High side coupler • M14 x 1.5 fitting is optional or per-
(J-39500-20A) manently attached.
• Low side coupler O
(J-39500-24A)
P
S-NT202

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-9 2014 Note
PREPARATION
Tool name
(J-39699) For measuring of refrigerant
Refrigerant weight scale Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT200
(J-39649) Capacity:
Vacuum pump • Air displacement: 4 CFM
(Including the isolator valve) • Micron rating: 20 microns
• Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz)
Fitting size-Thread size
• 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT203
Sealant and/or Oil INFOID:0000000009643779

Tool name
( — ) Container color: Light blue
HFC-134a (R-134a) Refrigerant Container marking: HFC-134a (R-
134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
• large container 1/2”-16 ACME
S-NT196
( — ) Type: Poly alkylene glycol oil (PAG),

NISSAN A/C System Oil Type DH- type DH-PR
PR Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) Vane-
rotary compressors
Capacity: 110 - 130 m (3.7 - 4.4 US fl
oz, 3.9 - 4.6 Imp fl oz)
JMIIA1759ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-10 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
HAC
ALIIA0811ZZ J
A. RH front of engine compartment B. Behind LH side of front fascia
K
No. Component Description
The ECM sends a compressor ON request to the IPDM E/R based on the status of engine
1. ECM operation and load as well as refrigerant pressure information. If all the conditions are met for L
A/C operation, the ECM transmits the compressor ON request to the IPDM E/R.
A/C relay is integrated in IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R operates A/C relay when receiving A/C com-
2. IPDM E/R
pressor request signal from ECM via CAN communication line. M
Vaporized refrigerant is drawn into the A/C compressor from the evaporator, where it is com-
3. A/C compressor pressed to a high pressure, high temperature vapor. The hot, compressed vapor is then dis-
charged to the condenser.
N
4. Refrigerant pressure sensor Refer to EC-22, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor".

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-11 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
ALIIA0812ZZ
A. LH side of instrument panel B. Behind center of instrument panel C. Center of instrument panel
No. Component Description

The BCM receives the fan ON and A/C ON signals from the front air control and sends a com-
1. BCM
pressor ON request to the ECM.
Located in the passenger compartment, behind the left lower IP, the Fuse Block (J/B) con-
2. Fuse Block (J/B) tains the front blower motor relay and several fuses required for the air conditioner control
system.
The front blower motor relay controls the flow of current to fuse 20, 21 and 22 in the Fuse
3. Front blower motor relay Block (J/B). The relay is connected directly to ground, and is energized when the ignition
switch is in the ON or START position.
4. Front blower motor The front blower motor varies the speed at which the air flows through the ventilation system.
Ground for the blower is supplied through blower resistor and the blower speed switch. As
the switch is moved from position 1 through 4, more current is allowed to flow through the
5. Front blower motor resistor motor, for a higher speed. This is because less resistors are in the path as the switch is
moved to a higher position. When the switch is on the highest position, all resistors are by-
passed.
Thermo control amp. is composed of thermistor and amplifier. When the A/C switch signal is
received from the front air control, the thermo control amp. transmits the A/C ON signal to the
6. Thermo control amp. BCM according to evaporator fin temperature. When the thermistor detecting temperature of
the air that passes through evaporator is extremely low, the thermo control amp. sends the
A/C OFF signal to BCM, and stops the compressor.
7. Front air control The front air control controls the operation of the A/C and heating system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-12 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM B
HAC
ALIIA0477GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION J
• The manual air conditioning system is controlled by a sequence of functions from the front air control, BCM,
ECM, and IPDM E/R.
• The fan speed of the front blower motor is changed by the combination of the fan control dial (fan switch) K
operation and blower resistor control.
Module/Function Door control A/C request signal Compressor control Cooling fan control L
Front air control HAC-14 — HAC-13 —
BCM — BCS-5 — —
M
ECM — — HAC-13 EC-35
IPDM E/R — — HAC-13 EC-35
N
Compressor Control INFOID:0000000009477930
DESCRIPTION
• When A/C switch signal is received from front air control, the thermo control amp. transmits A/C ON signal to O
the BCM according to evaporator fin temperature.
• When the front blower motor is operated, the front air control transmits blower fan ON signal to the BCM.
• BCM transmits the A/C ON signal and blower fan ON signal to ECM via CAN communication line. Refer to P
LAN-24, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description"
• ECM judges the conditions of each sensor (Refrigerant pressure sensor signal, accelerator position signal,
etc.), and transmits the A/C compressor request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication line.
• By receiving the A/C compressor request signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns the A/C relay to ON, and acti-
vates the compressor. Refer to PCS-5, "RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description"
CONTROL BY THERMO CONTROL AMP.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-13 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Low Temperature Protection Control
• When thermo control amp. detects that evaporator fin temperature
is 1.5°C (35°F) or less, thermo control amp. switches A/C ON sig-
nal to OFF and stops the compressor.
When the evaporator fin temperature returns to 3°C (37°F) or
more, the compressor is activated.
JMIIA1228GB
CONTROL BY ECM
Refrigerant Pressure Protection
The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high- or low-pressures by the refrigerant pressure sen-
sor, located on the liquid tank on the condenser. The refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside
the refrigerant line and sends a voltage signal to the ECM. If the system pressure rises above or falls below
the following values, the ECM requests the IPDM E/R to de-energize the A/C relay and disengage the com-
pressor.
• 3.12 MPa (31.82 kg/cm2, 452.4 psi) or more (When the engine speed is less than 1,500 rpm)
• 2.74 MPa (27.95 kg/cm2, 397.3 psi) or more (When the engine speed is 1,500 rpm or more)
• 0.14 MPa (1.43 kg/cm2, 20.3 psi) or less
Compressor Oil Circulation Control
When the engine starts while the engine coolant temperature is 56°C (133°F) or less, ECM activates the com-
pressor for approximately 6 seconds and circulates the compressor oil once.
Air Conditioning Cut Control
When the engine is under a high load condition, the ECM transmits an A/C relay OFF request to IPDM E/R,
and stops the compressor. Refer to EC-33, "AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL : System Description".
Door Control INFOID:0000000009477931
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTIONS

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-14 2014 Note
SYSTEM
H
ALIIA0807ZZ
1. Intake door 2. Blower motor 3. Evaporator

4. Air mix door 5. Heater core 6. Foot door HAC
7. Ventilator and defroster door
Fresh air intake Recirculation air Defroster
J
Center ventilator Side ventilator Foot
Door position K
defroster door
Ventilator and
Air mix door

Intake door
Foot door
Switch/Dial
position L
A M
B
A–B
MODE dial A–B — N

A A–B —
A
O
A
Air intake lever
B
— —
Full cold A P
Temperature control dial —
Full hot B
AIR DISTRIBUTION

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-15 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Discharge air flow

Air outlet/distribution
Mode position indication Ventilator
Foot Defroster
Center Side
50% 50% — —
30% 30% 40% —
— 14% 66% 20%
— 14% 51% 35%
— 22% — 78%

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-16 2014 Note
OPERATION
OPERATION
A
Switch Name and Function INFOID:0000000009477932
CONTROLLER B
JMIIA0933ZZ
H
1. Fan control dial (fan switch) 2. MODE dial 3. Intake lever
4. Temperature control dial 5. A/C switch
SWITCH OPERATION HAC
Fan control dial (fan

Fan speed can be adjusted within a range from 1st to 4th. J
switch)
MODE dial Mode position is selected to an optimal position by operating this dial.
Intake lever The air inlet changes REC ⇔ FRE each time by operation this lever.
K
Temperature control dial The setting temperature can be selected to an optimum temperature by operating this dial.
The compressor control (switch indicator) is turned ON ⇔ OFF each time by pressing this switch
A/C switch
while the blower motor is activated.
L

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-17 2014 Note
COMMON ITEM
APPLICATION ITEM

Configuration
SYSTEM APPLICATION

System Sub System

ECU identification
Configuration
Work support
Data Monitor
Active Test

BCM BCM × × × × ×
AIR CONDITIONER

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-18 2014 Note
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) INFOID:0000000009567627
A
DATA MONITOR

FAN ON SIG [On/Off] Indicates condition of fan switch.
AIR COND SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of A/C switch.
C
HAC

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-19 2014 Note
BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

BCM, ECM, IPDM E/R
ECU Reference
BCS-44, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-46, "DTC Index"
EC-62, "Reference Value"
EC-73, "Fail Safe"
ECM
EC-74, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
EC-76, "DTC Index"
PCS-13, "Reference Value"
IPDM E/R PCS-18, "Fail-safe"
PCS-20, "DTC Index"

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-20 2014 Note
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
HAC
AAIWA0144GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-21 2014 Note
AAIIA0267GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-22 2014 Note
HAC
AAIIA0268GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-23 2014 Note
AAIIA0269GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-24 2014 Note
HAC
AAIIA0270GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-25 2014 Note
AAIIA0271GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-26 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Workflow INFOID:0000000009477940
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
HAC
P
ALIIA0440GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW CUSTOMER
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-27 2014 Note
>> GO TO 2.
2.SYMPTOM CHECK
Verify symptoms.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FOR DTCS
With CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
4.PERFORM DTC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnostic procedure for the detected DTC. Refer to BCS-46, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
>> GO TO 7.
5.OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 6.
6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Check the symptom diagnosis table. Refer to HAC-43, "Symptom Table".
>> GO TO 8.
7.VERIFY REPAIR.
With CONSULT
3. Check DTC.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.PERFORM FINAL OPERATION CHECK
Perform the operation check. Refer to HAC-29, "Work Procedure".
NO >> GO TO 2.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-28 2014 Note
OPERATION INSPECTION
A
The purpose of the operation inspection is to check that the individual system operates normally. B
Check condition : Engine running at normal operating temperature.
1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR C
1. Operate fan control dial.

2. Check that fan speed changes. Check operation for all fan speeds.
D
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 8.
E
2.CHECK DISCHARGE AIR
1. Operate fan control dial to set the fan speed to maximum speed.
2. Operate MODE dial to each position. F
3. Check that air outlets change according to each indicated air outlet by placing a hand in front of the air
outlets. Refer to VTL-4, "System Description".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 8.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR H
1. Operate intake lever to each position.
2. Listen to intake sound and confirm air inlets change.
HAC
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 8.
J
4.CHECK COMPRESSOR
1. Turn fan control dial ON.
2. Press A/C switch. The A/C switch indicator is turns ON. K
3. Check visually and by sound that the compressor operates.
4. Press A/C switch again. The A/C switch indicator is turns OFF.
5. Check that compressor stops.
L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 8.
M
5.CHECK DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
1. Operate temperature control dial.
2. Check that discharge air temperature changes. N
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 8. O
6.CHECK TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Operate compressor.
P
2. Turn temperature control dial to full cold position.
3. Check that cool air blows from the air outlets.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.CHECK TEMPERATURE INCREASE
GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-29 2014 Note
1. Turn temperature control dial to full hot position.
2. Check that warm air blows from air outlets.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
1. Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT.
2. Check that any DTC is detected.
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC.
NO >> Refer to HAC-43, "Symptom Table" and perform the appropriate diagnosis.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-30 2014 Note
A/C ON SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
A/C ON SIGNAL
B
1.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL

With CONSULT C
2. Operate front blower motor.
3. Select “AIR CONDITIONER” of “BCM” using CONSULT. D
4. Select “AIR COND SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check status under the following condition.
Monitor item Condition Status E

ON On
AIR COND SW A/C switch
OFF Off
NO >> Refer to HAC-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
H
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to HAC-21, "Wiring Diagram".
1.CHECK FUSE HAC

2. Check 10A fuse (No. 21, located in fuse block (J/B)]. J
NOTE:
Refer to PG-37, "Terminal Arrangement".
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
2.CHECK THERMO CONTROL AMP. POWER SUPPLY L
2. Disconnect thermo control amp. connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. M
4. Check voltage between thermo control amp. harness connector and ground.
+ N
Voltage (V)
Thermo control amp. −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M42 3 Ground Battery voltage O

YES >> GO TO 3.
P
NO >> Repair harness or connector between thermo control amp. and fuse.
3.CHECK THERMO CONTROL AMP. GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
3. Check continuity between thermo control amp. harness connector and front air control harness connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-31 2014 Note
A/C ON SIGNAL
Thermo control amp. Front air control

Continuity
M42 1 M33 14 Yes
YES >> GO TO 4.
2. Check output waveform between thermo control amp. harness connector and ground with using oscillo-
scope.
+
Thermo control amp. − Output waveform
Connector Terminal
M42 2 Ground
JPMIA0012GB

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHECK FRONT AIR CONTROL
2. Check front air control. Refer to HAC-32, "Component Inspection".
YES >> Replace thermo control amp. Refer to HAC-48, "Removal and Installation".
6.CHECK A/C ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
3. Check continuity between thermo control amp. harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Thermo control amp. BCM

Continuity
M42 2 M18 27 Yes
1.CHECK A/C CONTROL

Check continuity front air control terminals.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-32 2014 Note
A/C ON SIGNAL
Terminal Condition Continuity A

A/C switch: ON
14 6 Yes
Fan control dial: Except OFF position
B
C
HAC

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-33 2014 Note
BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL
1.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL

With CONSULT
2. Select “AIR CONDITIONER” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
3. Select “FAN ON SIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check status under the following condition.

Except OFF position On
FAN ON SIG Fan control dial
OFF position Off

2. Disconnect front air control harness connector.
4. Check output waveform between front air control and ground with using oscilloscope.
+
Front air control − Output waveform
Connector Terminal
M33 5 Ground
PKIB4960J

YES >> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
3. Check continuity front air control harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Front air control BCM

Continuity
M33 5 M18 28 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.
GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-34 2014 Note
3.CHECK BLOWER FAN ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT A
Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground.
B
Front air control
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M33 5 Ground No C
NO >> Repair harness or connector. D
HAC

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-35 2014 Note
A/C INDICATOR
A/C INDICATOR
1.CHECK A/C INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY

2. Check voltage between front air control harness connector and ground.
+
Voltage (V)
Front air control −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> Replace front air control. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector between front air control and fuse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-36 2014 Note
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
A
The front blower motor utilizes a brush-less motor with a rotating magnet. Quietness is improved over previous B
motors where the brush was the point of contact and the coil rotated.

D
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check symptom (A or B). E
Symptom
A Front blower motor does not operate at any dial position
F
Front blower motor does not operate at any dial position other than 4th,
B
or operation speed is not normal.
G
Which symptom is detected?
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 7.
H
2.CHECK FUSE
2. Check 15A fuses (Nos. 20 and 22, located in fuse block (J/B)]. HAC
NOTE:
Refer to PG-37, "Terminal Arrangement".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
3.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR POWER SUPPLY K
1. Disconnect front blower motor connector.
3. Check voltage between front blower motor harness connector and ground. L
+
Voltage (V) M
Front blower motor −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M62 1 Ground Battery voltage N
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. O
4.CHECK BLOWER RELAY
P
2. Check blower relay. Refer to HAC-39, "Component Inspection (Blower Relay)".
YES >> Repair harness or connector between front blower motor and fuse.
NO >> Replace blower relay.
5.CHECK FAN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-37 2014 Note
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector and ground.
Front air control

— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M33 6 Ground Yes
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FAN SWITCH 4TH POSITION CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
Check continuity between front air control harness connector and front blower motor harness connector.
Front air control Front blower motor

Continuity
M33 1 M62 2 Yes
YES >> GO TO 10.
7.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR POWER SUPPLY
2. Disconnect front blower motor resistor connector.
4. Check voltage between front blower motor resistor harness connector and ground.
+
Voltage (V)
Front blower motor resistor −
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair harness or connector between front blower motor resistor and front blower motor.
8.CHECK FAN SWITCH 1ST, 2ND, AND 3RD POSITION CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
2. Disconnect front air control.
3. Check continuity between front air control harness connector and front blower motor resistor.
Front air control Front blower motor resistor

Continuity
2 1
M33 3 M151 4 Yes
4 2
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
Check front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-39, "Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Resistor)".
YES >> GO TO 10.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-38 2014 Note
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
NO >> Replace front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-50, "Removal and Installation".
10.CHECK FAN SWITCH A
Check fan switch. Refer to HAC-39, "Component Inspection (Fan Switch)".

Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to VTL-8, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor) INFOID:0000000009477950 C
1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR

D
1. Connect battery voltage to terminal 1 of front blower motor.
2. Connect ground to terminal 2 of front blower motor.
Does the front blower motor operate?
E
YES >> Intermittent incident. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".
NO >> Replace front blower motor. Refer to VTL-8, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection (Blower Relay) INFOID:0000000009477951
F
1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY

1. Remove blower relay. Refer to PG-37, "Terminal Arrangement". G
2. Check continuity between blower relay terminal 3 and 5 when
the voltage is supplied between terminal 1 and 2.
H
Terminal Voltage Continuity
ON Yes
3 5
OFF No HAC
J
NO >> Replace blower relay.
JSIIA1551ZZ
Component Inspection (Front Blower Motor Resistor) INFOID:0000000009477952

K
1.CHECK FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
1. Disconnect front blower motor resistor connector. L
2. Check resistance between front blower motor resistor terminals. Refer to applicable table for the normal
value.
M
Resistance: Ω
Terminal
(Approx.)
1 0.54
N
3 4 1.56
2 3.07
NO >> Replace front blower motor resistor. Refer to HAC-50, "Removal and Installation".
P
Component Inspection (Fan Switch) INFOID:0000000009477953
1.CHECK FAN SWITCH

1. Remove front air control. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check continuity between front air control terminals.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-39 2014 Note
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
Condition
Terminal Fan control dial (fan Continuity
switch) position
4 1st
3 2nd
6 Yes
2 3rd
1 4th

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-40 2014 Note
MAGNET CLUTCH
MAGNET CLUTCH
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION B
When the blower speed dial is in one of the fan speed positions, the front air control outputs a fan ON signal to
the BCM. When the A/C switch is pressed, the A/C switch LED illuminates and the front air control outputs a
compressor ON signal to the BCM. Any mode control button can be selected. As long as the BCM receives a C
compressor ON signal and a fan ON signal from the front air control, the conditions required for the BCM to
transmit a compressor ON request to the ECM have been met.
The BCM sends a compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line. D
The ECM judges whether the compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pres-
sure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges the compressor can be turned ON, it sends a com- E
pressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.
Upon receipt of a compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns the A/C relay ON to operate the compres-
sor. F
G
1.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION
Perform auto active test of IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-10, "CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)".
HAC
J
1.CHECK FUSE K
Check 10A fuse (No. 42, located in IPDM E/R).

NOTE:
Refer to PG-39, "IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement". L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit. M
2.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
2. Disconnect compressor connector.
3. Directly apply battery voltage to the magnet clutch. Check for operation visually and by sound.
Does it operate normally? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace magnet clutch. Refer to HA-25, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN P
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and compressor harness connector.
IPDM E/R Compressor

Continuity
E45 28 F3 1 Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-41 2014 Note
MAGNET CLUTCH

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-42 2014 Note
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
SYMPTOM TABLE
C
Symptom Reference Page
A/C system does not come on. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System. HAC-29
A/C system cannot be controlled. Go to Self-diagnosis Function. HAC-27 D
Air outlet does not change. Go to Adjustment Procedure for Mode Door. HAC-52
Discharge air temperature does not change. Go to Adjustment Procedure for Air Mix Door. HAC-52
E
Intake door does not change. Go to Adjustment Procedure for Intake Door. HAC-51
Front blower motor operation is malfunction-
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Front Blower Motor. HAC-37
ing.
F
Magnet clutch does not engage. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch. HAC-41
Insufficient cooling. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling. HAC-44
Insufficient heating. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating. HAC-45 G
Noise. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise. HA-16
A/C switch LED does not illuminate. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System. HAC-36
H
Both high- and low-pressure sides are too
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure. HA-14
high.
High-pressure side is too high and low pres-
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure. HA-14 HAC
sure side is too low.
High-pressure side is too low and low-pres-
sure side is too high.
J
Both high- and low-pressure side sometimes
become negative.
Low-pressure side sometimes becomes neg-
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure. HA-14 K
ative.
Low-pressure side becomes negative. Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Abnormal Pressure. HA-14

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-43 2014 Note
INSUFFICIENT COOLING
INSUFFICIENT COOLING
Symptom
• Insufficient cooling
• No cool air comes out. (Air flow volume is normal.)
NOTE:
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or DTC
is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.
2. Turn fan control dial ON.
3. Press A/C switch.
4. Check that A/C indicator turns ON. Check visually and by sound that compressor operates.
5. Press A/C switch again.
6. Check that A/C indicator turns OFF. Check that compressor stops.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check compressor operation. Refer to HAC-46, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK DRIVE BELT
Check tension of drive belt. Refer to EM-17, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Adjust or replace drive belt depending on the inspection results.
3.CHECK REFRIGERANT CYCLE PRESSURE
Connect the recovery/recycling recharging equipment to the vehicle and perform the pressure inspection
using gauge. Refer to HA-14, "Symptom Table".
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results.
4.CHECK AIR LEAKAGE FROM EACH DUCT
Check duct and nozzle, etc. of the air conditioner system for leakage.
YES >> Check air mix door cable installation and air mix door operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-44 2014 Note
INSUFFICIENT HEATING
INSUFFICIENT HEATING
A
B
Symptom
• Insufficient heating
• No warm air comes out. (Air flow volume is normal.)
C
NOTE:
Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or DTC D
is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.
1.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM
E
1. Check engine coolant level and check for leakage. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
2. Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
3. Check water flow sounds of the engine coolant. Refer to CO-9, "Refilling".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refill engine coolant and repair or replace the parts depending on the inspection results.
2.CHECK HEATER HOSE G
Check installation of heater hose by visually or touching.

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HEATER CORE HAC
1. Check temperature of inlet hose and outlet hose of heater core.

2. Check that inlet side of heater core is hot and the outlet side is slightly lower than/almost equal to the inlet
side. J
CAUTION:
Always perform the temperature inspection in a short period of time because the engine coolant
temperature is very hot. K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace heater core. Refer to HA-33, "HEATER CORE : Removal and Installation". L
4.CHECK AIR LEAKAGE FROM EACH DUCT
Check duct and nozzle, etc. of air conditioning system for air leakage.
M
YES >> Check air mix door cable installation and air mix door operation.
NO >> Repair or replace parts depending on the inspection results. N

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-45 2014 Note
COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE
COMPRESSOR DOES NOT OPERATE
SYMPTOM
Compressor does not operate.
NOTE:
• Perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT before performing symptom diagnosis. If any malfunction result or
DTC is detected, perform the corresponding diagnosis.
• Check that refrigerant system is fully charged. If the refrigerant charge is low, perform the inspection for
refrigerant leakage
Check magnet clutch. Refer to HAC-41, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Check refrigerant pressure sensor. Refer to EC-325, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 3.
Check A/C ON signal. Refer to HAC-31, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 4.
Check blower fan ON signal. Refer to HAC-34, "Component Function Check".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts
With CONSULT
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode of “ECM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AIR COND SIG” and “HEATER FAN SW”, and check status under the following conditions.

OFF (A/C indicator: OFF) Off
AIR COND SIG A/C switch
ON (A/C indicator: ON) On
OFF Off
HEATER FAN SW Blower motor
ON On

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-46 2014 Note
FRONT AIR CONTROL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING]

FRONT AIR CONTROL
B
AWIIA1693ZZ
H
1. Front air control 2. Intake door lever knob

HAC
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation". J
2. Remove front air control finisher. Refer to IP-23, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove audio unit or AV control unit. Refer to AV-33, "Removal and Installation" (AUDIO UNIT), or AV-93,
"Removal and Installation" (DISPLAY AUDIO), or AV-178, "Removal and Installation" (NAVIGATION). K
4. Remove air mix door cable, mode door cable, and intake door cable from the heating and cooling unit
assembly.
5. Remove screws and front air control. L
INSTALLATION
M

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-47 2014 Note
THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER
THERMO CONTROL AMPLIFIER
REMOVAL
1. Remove evaporator. Refer to HA-33, "EVAPORATOR : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove thermo control amplifier from evaporator.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-48 2014 Note
A
CAUTION: B
Perform lubricant return operation before each A/C system disassembly. However, if a large amount of
refrigerant or lubricant leaks from the system, do not perform lubricant return operation. Refer to HA-
21, "Perform Oil Return Operation".
C
REMOVAL
2. Remove front grille. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". D
3. Remove upper air guide and air guide (LH). Refer to CO-14, "Exploded View".
4. Clean refrigerant pressure sensor and surrounding area.
CAUTION: E
Make sure to clean carefully.
5. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
6. Support liquid tank, then remove refrigerant pressure sensor (1). F
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to damage liquid tank.
• Be careful not to damage core surface of condenser. G
• Cap or wrap the joint of the condenser and liquid tank
with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry
of air.
H
ALIIA0004ZZ
HAC
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings. J
• Apply compressor oil to new O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor for installation.
K

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-49 2014 Note
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR
AWIIA1465ZZ
1. Heating and cooling unit assembly 2. Front blower motor 3. Front blower motor resistor
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect harness connector from front blower motor resistor.
2. Remove screws and front blower motor resistor.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-50 2014 Note
DOOR CABLE
DOOR CABLE
A
HAC
JMIIA1742ZZ
1. Heating and cooling unit assembly 2. Plate 3. Air mix door linkage 2 J
4. Air mix door linkage 1 5. Air mix door cable 6. Intake door lever
7. Intake door linkage 8. Intake door cable 9. Foot door lever
10. Mode door cable 11. Main linkage 12. Ventilator door rod K
13. Ventilator door lever
A. To front air control
L
INTAKE DOOR CABLE
INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009405619
M
The intake door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
INTAKE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009405620
N
2. Disconnect intake door cable (1) from clip (A).
O
3. Set intake door lever to REC position.
4. Push intake door link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully
pull outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.
P
JMIIA0617ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-51 2014 Note
DOOR CABLE
5. Operate intake door lever to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:
When clipping outer cable, do not move inner cable.
MODE DOOR CABLE
MODE DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009405621
The mode door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
MODE DOOR CABLE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009405622

2. Disconnect mode door cable (1) from clip (A).
3. Set mode dial to VENT position.
4. Push main link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully pull
outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.
JMIIA0618ZZ
5. Operate mode dial to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009405623
The air mix door cable is not serviced separately. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
AIR MIX DOOR CABLE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000009405624
2. Remove foot duct (LH). Refer to VTL-7, "FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect air mix door cable (1) from clip (A).
4. Set temperature dial to full cold position.
5. Push air mix door link (2) in the direction shown, then carefully
pull outer cable to front air control side and connect clip.
JMIIA0619ZZ
6. Operate temperature dial to make sure that inner cable moves smoothly.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
HAC-52 2014 Note
DRIVER CONTROLS
HRN
A
B
SECTION
HORN C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 HORN ................................................................. 3 F
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 6 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2 HORN ................................................................. 6
Exploded View .......................................................... 6
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 3 Removal and Installation .......................................... 6 H
HRN

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-2 2014 Note
HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM A
HORN
B
HRN
AALWA0621GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-3 2014 Note
HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1362GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-4 2014 Note
HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
HRN
AALIA1363GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-5 2014 Note
HORN
HORN
AWLIA2176ZZ
1. Horn A. Connector B. Nut
REMOVAL
2. Disconnect the harness connectors from the horn.
3. Remove horn nut and the horn.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
HRN-6 2014 Note
DRIVER CONTROLS
INL
A
B
SECTION
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 BCM ................................................................... 12 F
List of ECU Reference .............................................12
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 13 G
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
Precaution for Work .................................................. 3 ... 13
Wiring Diagram ........................................................13 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
ILLUMINATION ................................................. 19
PREPARATION ................................................... 4 Wiring Diagram ........................................................19 I
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 26 J
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5 Work Flow ................................................................26
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 28
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7 K
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 28
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 7
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : BODY CONTROL SYSTEM .......................................28 INL
System Description ................................................... 7 BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Proce-
dure .........................................................................28
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM ......................... 8
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUP- M
Description ................................................................ 8 PLY CIRCUIT .................................................... 29
Description ...............................................................29
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 9 Component Function Check ....................................29 N
COMMON ITEM ........................................................... 9
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
COMMON ITEM) ....................................................... 9 ... 31 O
INT LAMP .................................................................... 9 Description ...............................................................31
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT Component Function Check ....................................31
LAMP) ..................................................................... 10 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................31 P
BATTERY SAVER ..................................................... 10 CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT ................ 33

BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - Description ...............................................................33
BATTERY SAVER) ................................................. 10 Component Function Check ....................................33
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 12

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-1 2014 Note
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMI- Removal and Installation ......................................... 39
NATION CIRCUIT .............................................. 34 Bulb Replacement ................................................... 39
Description .............................................................. 34
CARGO ROOM LAMP ...................................... 40
Exploded View ........................................................ 40
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 36 Bulb Replacement ................................................... 40
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 36 SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP ................................. 41

Symptom Table ...................................................... 36 Bulb Replacement ................................................... 41
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 37 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH ............... 42

MAP LAMP ........................................................ 37
Exploded View ........................................................ 37 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Removal and Installation ........................................ 37 (SDS) .......................................................... 43
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 37
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP ................................... 39 (SDS) ................................................................. 43
Exploded View ........................................................ 39 Bulb Specifications .................................................. 43

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
J
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one. INL
N
- Oily dirt:
area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-4 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
COMPONENT PARTS
B
INL
N
ALLIA1296ZZ
A. View right of steering column B. Instrument panel view

O
C. B-pillar LH side (view with door open) D. C-pillar LH side (view with door open)
No. Part Description P

1. Cargo lamp Refer to INL-43, "Bulb Specifications".
2. Interior room lamp Refer to INL-43, "Bulb Specifications".
3. Map lamp Refer to INL-43, "Bulb Specifications".
4. Push-button ignition switch Refer to STR-4, "STARTING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-5 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
No. Part Description
• Activates the interior room lamp timer depending on the vehicle condition to turn the
interior room lamps ON/OFF.
• Operates the interior room lamp battery saver depending on the vehicle condition to
cut the interior room lamp power supply.
• Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
5. BCM
• Judges the illumination lamp ON/OFF status depending on the vehicle condition.
And then it transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination
meter (with CAN communication).
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed
installation location.
6. Front door switch LH (RH side similar) Refer to EXL-6, "Component Parts Location".
7. Rear door switch LH (RH side similar) Refer to EXL-6, "Component Parts Location".
8. Back door switch Refer to EXL-6, "Component Parts Location".

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-6 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
A
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009671253
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
ALLIA1322GB K
OUTLINE
• Interior room lamp is controlled by the interior room lamp timer control function of the BCM.
• Cargo lamp is controlled by the cargo room lamp control function of the BCM. INL
The timer control functions of the BCM activate based on inputs from the key cylinder lock/unlock switch LH,
the door switches, the key switch and door lock/unlock switches.
ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION M
When the interior room lamp switch is in the DOOR position and when all conditions below are met, the BCM
begins timer control (maximum 30 seconds) for interior room lamp ON/OFF.
• When the front door LH is unlocked with key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power N
window and door lock/unlock switch RH or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
• When a door opens → closes and the push-button ignition switch is not pressed (with Intelligent Key).
• When a door opens → closes and the key is not inserted in the ignition switch (without Intelligent Key). O
Timer control is cancelled under the following conditions.
• When the front door LH is locked with key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power win-
dow and door lock/unlock switch RH or front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch).
• A door is opened (door switch turns ON). P
• Ignition switch is turned ON.
Interior lamp operational settings can be changed with the function setting of CONSULT.
INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL

If an interior lamp is left ON and does not turn OFF even when the doors are closed, the BCM turns off power
to the interior lamps automatically to save the battery 15 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-7 2014 Note
SYSTEM
The BCM controls power and ground to all interior lamps.
After the battery saver system turns the lamps OFF, the lamps will illuminate again when
• a signal is received from a key fob, main power window and door lock/unlock switch, power window and
door lock/unlock switch RH or when the front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch) is locked or
unlocked
• a door is opened or closed
• the key is removed from or inserted into the ignition switch (without intelligent key).
The interior lamp battery saver control time period can be changed with the function setting of CONSULT.
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009671255
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
AWLIA2182GB
OUTLINE
The illumination lamps operation is dependent upon the position of the combination switch (lighting and turn
signal switch). When the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is placed in the 1ST or 2ND posi-
tion the BCM (body control module) receives input requesting the parking lamps to illuminate. This input is
communicated to the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room) via the CAN communica-
tion lines. The CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R controls the tail lamp relay coil. When energized,
this relay directs power to the parking and illumination lamps, which then illuminate.
BATTERY SAVER CONTROL
When the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) is in the 1st or 2nd position and the ignition
switch is turned from ON or ACC to OFF, the battery saver control feature is activated. Under this condition,
the illumination lamps remain illuminated for 15 minutes unless the combination switch (lighting and turn signal
switch) position is changed. If the combination switch (lighting and turn signal switch) position is changed, then
the illumination lamps are turned off after a 30 second delay. When the combination switch (lighting and turn
signal switch) is turned from OFF to 1st or 2nd position after illumination lamps have been turned off by the
battery saver control, the illumination lamps illuminate again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-8 2014 Note
A
COMMON ITEM
B
APPLICATION ITEM
C
D
Active Test The BCM activates outputs to test components. E
Configuration
• The vehicle specification can be written when replacing BCM. F
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G

H

I
System Sub System
ECU identification
Configuration
Work support
Data Monitor
J
Active Test
K
Warning chime BUZZER × × INL
M
Air conditioner AIR CONDITIONER × N
BCM BCM × × × × × O
P
INT LAMP

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-9 2014 Note
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP) INFOID:0000000009578848
DATA MONITOR

ACTIVE TEST

WORK SUPPORT

MODE 2 Interior room lamp timer activates with all doors.
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET
MODE 1* Interior room lamp timer activates with the driver door only.
On* Interior room lamp timer function ON.
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
Off Interior room lamp timer function OFF.
MODE 4 30 sec.
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET MODE 3* 15 sec. Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time).
MODE 2 7.5 sec.
*: Initial setting
BATTERY SAVER
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER) INFOID:0000000009578849
DATA MONITOR

PUSH SW [On/Off] Indicates condition push-button ignition switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-10 2014 Note
A
DOOR SW-RL [On/Off] Indicates condition of rear door switch LH. B
CDL UNLOCK SW [On/Off] Indicates condition of unlock signal from door lock and unlock switch. C
D
E
ACTIVE TEST

F
BATTERY SAVER This test is able to check battery saver operation [On/Off].
WORK SUPPORT
G
ON* Exterior lamp battery saver function ON.
BATTERY SAVER SET H
OFF Exterior lamp battery saver function OFF.
MODE 3* 10 min.
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET MODE 2 60 min. Sets interior room lamp battery saver timer operating time.
I
MODE 1 15 min.
*: Initial setting
J
INL

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-11 2014 Note
BCM
BCM
ECU Reference
BCS-44, "Fail-safe"
BCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-12 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM A
B
INL
AALWA0644GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-13 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1413GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-14 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INL
AALIA1414GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-15 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1415GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-16 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INL
AALIA1416GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-17 2014 Note
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1417GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-18 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ILLUMINATION
A
INL
P
AALWA0645GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-19 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALWA0646GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-20 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INL
AALIA1418GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-21 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1419GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-22 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INL
AALIA1420GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-23 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AALIA1421GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-24 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
INL
AALIA1422GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-25 2014 Note
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWLIA1823GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
Interview the symptom to the customer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-26 2014 Note
>> GO TO 2.
2.SYMPTOM CHECK A
Check the symptom from the customer's information.

B
>> GO TO 3.
3.BASIC INSPECTION
C
Check the operation of each part. Check that any symptom occurs other than the interviewed symptom.
>> GO TO 4. D
4.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Check that any DTC is detected.
Is any DTC detected? E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC F
Perform the trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Specify the malfunctioning part.
G
>> GO TO 9.
6.FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION CHECK H
Check that the symptom is applied to the fail-safe activation.
Does the fail-safe activate?
YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> GO TO 8.
7.SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the system diagnosis for the system that the fail-safe activates. Specify the malfunctioning part. J
>> GO TO 9.
K
8.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the symptom diagnosis. Specify the malfunctioning part.
INL
>> GO TO 9.
9.MALFUNCTION PART REPAIR M
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
>> GO TO 10. N
10.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT)
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Check that any DTC is not detected. Erase DTC if DTC is detected O
before the repair. Check that DTC is not detected again.
YES >> GO TO 5. P
NO >> GO TO 11.
11.REPAIR CHECK (OPERATION CHECK)
Check the operation of each part.
NO >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-27 2014 Note
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009671216


57 12 (10A)
Battery power supply
70 G (40A)
Is the fuse blown?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect BCM connector M99.
BCM
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
57
70
YES >> GO TO 3.
BCM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
M99 67 — Yes

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-28 2014 Note
BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
A
Provides the battery saver output/power supply. Also cuts the power supply when the interior lamp battery B
saver is activated.
C
1.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY FUNCTION
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
2. Turn each interior lamp to the ON position.
- Interior room lamp
- Map lamp E
- Cargo lamp
3. Select BATTERY SAVER of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
4. While operating the test item, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.
F
OFF : Interior room lamp OFF
ON : Interior room lamp ON
G
YES >> Battery saver output/power supply circuit is normal.
NO >> Refer to INL-29, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
I
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to INL-13, "Wiring Diagram".
J
1.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
CONSULT
2. Select BATTERY SAVER of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
3. While operating the test item, check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
INL
(+) Test item
(-) Voltage
Connector Terminal BATTERY SAVER
M
OFF 0V
M99 56 Ground
ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to volt-
age. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation". O
2.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect the following connectors. P
- BCM
- Interior room lamp
- Map lamp
- Cargo lamp
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and each interior lamp connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-29 2014 Note
BCM Each interior lamp

Continuity
Interior room lamp R7 2
M99 56 Map lamp R2 4 Yes
Cargo lamp B21 1
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BATTERY SAVER OUTPUT/POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity

M99 56 Ground No
YES >> Check that each interior room lamp has no internal short circuit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-30 2014 Note
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
A
Controls each interior room lamp (ground side) by PWM signal. B

NOTE:
PWM signal control period is approximately 250 Hz (in the gradual brightening/dimming).
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000009671206 C
CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal.
• Interior room lamp power supply D
• Map lamp bulb
• Room lamp bulb
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION E
CONSULT
1. Switch the map lamp switch or interior room lamp switch to DOOR. F
3. Select INT LAMP of BCM (INT LAMP) ACTIVE TEST item.
4. While operating the test item, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.
G
On : Interior room lamp gradual brightening
Off : Interior room lamp gradual dimming
H
Does the interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming)?
YES >> Interior room lamp control circuit is normal.
NO >> Refer to INL-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
J
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT K
CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. INL
2. Remove all the bulbs of map lamp and interior room lamp.
4. Select INT LAMP of BCM (INT LAMP) ACTIVE TEST item.
5. While operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. M
BCM
Test item Continuity N
Connector Terminal
Ground
On Yes
M99 63 INT LAMP
Off No
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3. P
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to volt-
age. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector and map lamp connector or interior room lamp connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and map lamp harness connector or interior room
lamp harness connector.
GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-31 2014 Note
With map lamp
BCM Map lamp
Continuity
M99 63 R2 2 Yes
BCM Interior room lamp

Continuity
M99 63 R7 3 Yes
YES >> Check that map lamp or interior room lamp has no internal open circuit.
3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT
BCM
Continuity
M99 63 No
YES >> Replace BCM after making sure battery saver output/power supply circuit is not shorted to volt-
age. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect interior room lamp connector or map lamp connector.
BCM
Continuity
M99 63 No
YES >> Check that map lamp or interior room lamp has no internal short circuit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-32 2014 Note
CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
CARGO LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
A
Controls the cargo lamp (ground side) to turn the cargo lamp ON and OFF. B
CAUTION: C
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.
• Battery saver output/power supply
• Cargo lamp bulb
D
E
1.CHECK CARGO LAMP OUTPUT F

2. Remove the cargo bulb.
G
BCM
Condition Continuity H
Connector Terminal
Ground
Open Yes
M100 49 Back door
Closed No I
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3. J
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK CARGO ROOM LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
K
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and cargo lamp harness connector.
BCM Cargo lamp

Continuity INL
M100 49 B21 4 Yes
YES >> Replace cargo lamp. Refer to INL-40, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK CARGO LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect BCM harness connector.
O
BCM
Continuity
P
M100 49 No

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-33 2014 Note
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
Provides the power supply and the ground to control the push-button ignition switch illumination.
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION

CONSULT
2. Select ENGINE SW ILLUMI of BCM (INTELLGENT KEY) active test item.
3. While operating the test item, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF
ON : Push-button ignition switch illumination ON

OFF : Push-button ignition switch illumination OFF
YES >> Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit is normal.
NO >> Refer to INL-34, "Diagnosis Procedure".
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION

CONSULT
2. Select ENGINE SW ILLUMI of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item.
3. While operating the test item, check voltage between push-button ignition switch connector and ground.
Terminals
Test item
(+) (-) Voltage
Push-button ignition switch (Approx.)
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Connector Terminal
Ground
ON 5V
M25 5
OFF 0V
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect BCM connector M98 and push-button ignition switch connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM connector and push-button ignition switch connector.
BCM Push-button ignition switch

Continuity
M98 90 M25 5 Yes
YES >> GO TO 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-34 2014 Note
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT A
Check continuity between BCM connector and ground.
BCM B
Continuity
M98 90 No
C
D
4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF
2. Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector. E
3. Check continuity between push-button ignition switch connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch F

Continuity
M25 6 Yes
G
YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch. Refer to PCS-74, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repiar or replace harness.
H
INL

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-35 2014 Note
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
CAUTION:

All the following lamps do not turn ON. Interior room lamp power supply cir-
• Harness between BCM and each
• Map lamp cuit
interior room lamp
• Interior room lamp Refer to INL-31, "Component Func-
• BCM
• Cargo lamp tion Check".
• Interior room lamp does not turn ON even Door switch circuit
• Harness between BCM and each Refer to INL-31, "Diagnosis Proce-
though the door is open.
door switch dure".
(It turns ON when turning the interior room
• Harness between BCM and each
lamp ON.) Interior room lamp control circuit
interior room lamp
• Interior room lamp does not turn OFF even Refer to INL-31, "Diagnosis Proce-
• BCM
though the door is closed. dure".
Check the interior room lamp setting.
Interior room lamp timer does not activate.
— Refer to INL-10, "INT LAMP : CON-
(It turns ON/ OFF when the door opens/closes.)
SULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP)".
• Harness between BCM and back
door switch Cargo lamp circuit
Cargo lamp does not turn ON even though the
• Harness between BCM and cargo Refer to INL-31, "Diagnosis Proce-
back door is open.
lamp dure".
• BCM
Push-button ignition switch illumina-
• Harness between BCM and push-
Push-button ignition switch illumination does not tion circuit
button ignition switch
illuminate. Refer to INL-31, "Component Func-
• BCM
tion Check".
Replace BCM.
Interior room lamp battery saver does not acti-
BCM Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and In-
vate.
stallation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-36 2014 Note
MAP LAMP
MAP LAMP
B
AWLIA2175ZZ
G
1. Map lamp 2. Bulb 3. Lens

Pawl H
I
REMOVAL
1. Release lens pawls using a suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Pawl J
INL
AWLIA2150ZZ
M
2. Release map lamp pawl using suitable tool (A).
: Pawl
3. Disconnect the harness connector from map lamp and remove. N
P
AWLIA2144ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-37 2014 Note
MAP LAMP
Do not touch bulb while it is lit or right after being turned OFF. Burning may result.
CAUTION:
vent damage to bulb.
the performance of lamp.
REMOVAL
1. Release lens pawls using suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Pawl
AWLIA2150ZZ
2. Remove the bulb.

INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-38 2014 Note
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
A
AWLIA2174ZZ
1. Interior room lamp 2. Bulb 3. Lens G

A. Pawls to release first for lens removal B. Pawl to install first for lens installation Pawl
Metal clip H
I
REMOVAL
1. Release interior room lamp metal clips using a suitable tool.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from room lamp and remove. J
INSTALLATION
K
WARNING:
INL
CAUTION:
vent damage to bulb. M
REMOVAL N
1. Release interior room lamp lens pawls using a suitable tool and remove.
2. Remove bulb.
O
INSTALLATION
NOTE: P
Insert the lens hook end RH side first when installing lens.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-39 2014 Note
CARGO ROOM LAMP
CARGO ROOM LAMP
AWLIA2148ZZ
1. Cargo room lamp 2. Bulb 3. Lens

Front Pawl
REMOVAL
1. Release cargo room lamp pawl with a suitable tool (A)
: Pawl
: Front
2. Disconnect harness connector from cargo room lamp and
remove.
AWLIA2149ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
CAUTION:
vent damage to bulb.
REMOVAL
1. Release cargo room lamp lens pawl using a suitable tool.
2. Remove the bulb.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-40 2014 Note
SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP
SHIFT SELECTOR LAMP
A
WARNING: B
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to pro-
C
tect damage to bulb.
D
REMOVAL
2. Remove shift selector lamp bulb from bulb socket (1). E
: Front
AWLIA2147ZZ H
INSTALLATION
I
INL

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-41 2014 Note
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
The illumination control switch is part of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-42 2014 Note
Bulb Specifications INFOID:0000000009541369
B
Item Wattage (W)*

C
Map lamp (if equipped) 5
Interior room lamp 8
Cargo room lamp 5 D
Shift selector lamp —
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts info.
E
INL

GETtheMANUALS.org
INL-43 2014 Note
BODY INTERIOR
INT
A
B
SECTION
INTERIOR C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3 KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation ...........20 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3 DASH SIDE FINISHER ..............................................22

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation
G
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- ....22
SIONER" ................................................................... 3 BODY SIDE WELT .....................................................22
Precaution for Work .................................................. 3 BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation ........22 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 4 CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER .......................23
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal
PREPARATION ................................................... 4 I
and Installation ........................................................23
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4 CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER ........................23
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : Removal
CLIP LIST ............................................................ 5 INT
Descriptions for Clips ................................................ 5
FLOOR TRIM .................................................... 25
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 9 Exploded View .........................................................25 K
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- Removal and Installation .........................................25
NOSES ................................................................ 9 HEADLINING .................................................... 28
Work Flow ................................................................. 9 L
Exploded View .........................................................28
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting .......... 10 Removal and Installation .........................................29
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 13
LUGGAGE TRIM ............................................... 31 M
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 15 Exploded View .........................................................31
FRONT DOOR FINISHER ..................................15 LUGGAGE REAR PLATE .........................................31
Exploded View ........................................................ 15 LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installa- N
Removal and Installation ......................................... 15 tion ...........................................................................32
REAR DOOR FINISHER ....................................17 LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER ........................32
O
Exploded View ........................................................ 17 LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
Removal and Installation ......................................... 17 and Installation ........................................................32
BODY SIDE TRIM ..............................................19 LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER .........................33 P

Exploded View ........................................................ 19 LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER ....................................... 19
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Instal- BACK DOOR TRIM ........................................... 34
lation ........................................................................ 19 Exploded View .........................................................34
KICKING PLATE ....................................................... 20 BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER ...............................34

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-1 2014 Note
BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE .................................. 34
Installation .............................................................. 34 BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE : Removal and In-
stallation .................................................................. 34

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-2 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
INT
L
N
- Oily dirt:
area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-3 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J-39570)
Chassis Ear
SIIA0993E

(J-50397)
Kit
ALJIA1232ZZ

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

Tool name
Engine Ear
SIIA0995E

Power tools
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-4 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
CLIP LIST
A
Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation. B
INT
SIIA0315E

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-5 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
SIIA0316E

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-6 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
INT
SIIA0317E

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-7 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
ALJIA0564GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-8 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
G
SBT842
customer's comments; refer to INT-13, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is INT
K
defining the noise.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-9 2014 Note
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.
temporarily.
noise.
Refer to INT-10, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
ment.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-10 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT PANEL
C
ness.
CAUTION: E
F
CENTER CONSOLE
G
DOORS
INT
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise. K
TRUNK
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-11 2014 Note
SEATS
noise.
UNDERHOOD

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-12 2014 Note
INT
LAIA0072E
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-13 2014 Note
LAIA0071E

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-14 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR FINISHER
FRONT DOOR FINISHER
B
AWJIA1139ZZ INT
1. Front door panel 2. Front door finisher 3. Front door inside seal
4. Power window and door 5. Door pull handle escutcheon A. Grommet
lock/unlock switch (RH) fin-
K
isher
Clip Pawl
L
NOTE:
RH side door shown; LH side door similar.
M
REMOVAL
1. Remove door pull handle escutcheon using a suitable tool. N
2. Remove screw (B) from power window and door lock/unlock
switch (RH) finisher.
O
3. Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) fin-
isher (1) using a suitable tool (A).
: Pawl
P
AWKIA2505ZZ
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH).

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-15 2014 Note
FRONT DOOR FINISHER
5. Remove front door finisher bolt (A).
JMJIA6023ZZ
6. Release clips using a suitable tool (A) remove front door finisher
as shown.
: Clip
AWJIA1122ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips and pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing front door finisher, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into door panel
holes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-16 2014 Note
REAR DOOR FINISHER
REAR DOOR FINISHER
A
I
AWJIA1099ZZ
1. Rear door panel 2. Rear door finisher 3. Rear door corner finisher INT
4. Rear door pull handle escutch- 5. Rear power window switch fin- A. Grommet
eon isher
Pawl Clip
K
L
REMOVAL
1. Release rear door corner finisher clip using a suitable tool.
2. Remove rear door pull handle escutcheon using a suitable tool. M
3. Remove screw (B) from power window and door lock/unlock
switch (RH) finisher.
4. Remove power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH) fin- N
isher (1) using a suitable tool (A).
: Pawl
O
P
AWKIA2505ZZ
5. Disconnect the harness connector from the power window and door lock/unlock switch (RH).

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-17 2014 Note
REAR DOOR FINISHER
6. Remove rear door finisher bolt (A).
JMJIA6028ZZ
7. Release rear door finisher clips using a suitable tool (A) and
remove rear door finisher as shown.
: Clip
AWJIA1121ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When installing rear door finisher, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into door panel
holes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-18 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
BODY SIDE TRIM
A
INT
AWJIA1141ZZ
N
1. Center pillar upper finisher (RH) 2. Front body side welt (RH) 3. Front pillar finisher (RH)
4. Dash side finisher (RH) 5. Front kicking plate (RH) 6. Center pillar lower finisher (RH)
7. Rear kicking plate (RH) 8. Rear body side welt (RH) Front O
Clip Pawl
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER P
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016041
REMOVAL
1. Remove front pillar portion of front body side welt.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-19 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
2. Pull front pillar finisher downward as shown to release the front
pillar finisher clip (bottom).
: Clip
: Pawl
AWJIA1124ZZ
3. Cut and discard front pillar finisher tether clips.

4. Remove the remaining piece of the tether clip (B) using a suit-
able tool (A).
AWJIA1111ZZ
INSTALLATION
1. Install new front pillar finisher tether clips (A) to the front pillar
finisher by inserting clip end and rotating 90 degrees to fit.
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse tether clips. Replace with new part after
removal.
• Make sure to install tether clip to front pillar finisher
before installing front pillar finisher.
• When installing tether clip to front pillar finisher, be sure
to install by aligning to the cutout.
• Visually check the clip for deformation and damage dur-
ing installation. Replace with new one if necessary.
AWJIA1088ZZ
• When installing front pillar finisher, check that clip and
tether clips are securely placed into body panel holes.
2. Install the front pillar finisher to the front pillar.
KICKING PLATE
KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016043
FRONT KICKING PLATE

Removal

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-20 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
1. Release front kicking plate pawls and metal clip using a suitable
tool (A) and remove front kicking plate as shown. A
: Pawl
: Metal clip
B
G
AWJIA1123ZZ
Installation
H
CAUTION:
• When installing front kicking plate, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into body panel I
holes.
REAR KICKING PLATE
INT
Removal
1. Remove rear seat cushion. Refer toSE-32, "Seat Cushion".
2. Lift rear end of rear kicking plate to release metal clip, then K
rotate front end of rear kicking plate to release pawls and
remove.
: Pawl L
: Metal clip
AWJIA1091ZZ
Installation
GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-21 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
CAUTION:
• When installing rear kicking plate, check that clips and pawls are securely placed into body panel
holes.
DASH SIDE FINISHER
DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016044
REMOVAL
1. Remove front kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation".
2. Lift up rear end of dash side finisher to release pawls.
: Pawl
AWJIA1092ZZ
3. Pull back dash side finisher to release dash side finisher from
stud and remove.
AWJIA1093ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Visually check the pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing, check that finisher is aligned with stud bolt located on floor panel.
• When installing dash side finisher, check that pawls are securely placed into body panel holes.
BODY SIDE WELT
BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016045
FRONT BODY SIDE WELT

Removal
1. Remove the dash side finisher. Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front body side welt.
Installation
REAR BODY SIDE WELT
Removal
1. Remove rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear body side welt.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-22 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. A
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016046
B
REMOVAL
1. Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-20, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and C
Installation".
2. Remove center pillar lower finisher as shown.
D
JMJIA6045ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: H
• Visually check the pawls and clips for deformation and damage during installation. Replace compo-
nent if necessary.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER I
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016047
REMOVAL INT
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to apply excessive force when removing center pillar upper finisher. Otherwise, clip
may be damaged and fragments may drop in body panels. K
1. Slide front seat to the full forward position.
2. Release pawls, using a suitable tool and remove the seat belt
height adjuster finisher (1). L
: Pawl
AWHIA0539ZZ
O
3. Remove front D-ring anchor bolt.
CAUTION:
Before removing D-ring anchor bolt note the positions of washers and spacers for correct installa-
P
tion.
4. Remove front body side welt and rear body side welt. Refer to INT-22, "BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and
Installation".
and Installation".
6. Release center pillar upper finisher upper clip using a suitable tool as shown.
CAUTION:

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-23 2014 Note
BODY SIDE TRIM
When releasing molded in clip, follow the steps as shown to prevent finisher or clip damage.
PIIB2600J
7. Release center pillar upper finisher lower clip using a suitable

tool (A) and remove.
: Clip
CAUTION:
Do not reuse center pillar upper finisher.
AWJIA1094ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse center pillar upper finisher. Replace with new part for installation.
• When installing center pillar upper finisher, check that clips are securely placed in body panel holes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-24 2014 Note
FLOOR TRIM
FLOOR TRIM
A
INT
AWJIA1142ZZ
1. Harness clip A 2. Harness clip B 3. Floor trim K

4. Carpet hook 5. Front floor spacer (RH) 6. Front floor spacer (LH)
7. Rear floor spacer (LH) 8. Rear floor spacer (RH) Front
L
Clip

M
WARNING:
• Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals then wait at
least three minutes. N
• Do not drop the seat belt retractor. Always handle it with care.
• Always point pretensioner cylinder away from body when handling.
REMOVAL O
1. Remove front seats. Refer to SE-14, "DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (Driver side) and SE-16,
"PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation" (Passenger side).
2. Remove rear seatback hinge. Refer to SE-20, "SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation". P
4. Remove dash side finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installa-
tion".
5. Remove center pillar lower finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-23, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER :

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-25 2014 Note
FLOOR TRIM
6. Disconnect negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69,
WARNING:
Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals then wait
at least three minutes.
7. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from the seat belt retrac-
tor (1).
WARNING:
• Do not drop the seat belt retractor. Always handle it with
care.
• Always point pretensioner cylinder away from body when
handling.
ALHIA0316ZZ
CAUTION:
• For removing/installing the shoulder belt pre-tensioner
harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, then lift the lock and remove the har-
ness connector as shown.
• Install the harness connector with the lock raised, and
push the lock into the harness connector as shown.
• After installing the harness connector, check that the lock
is pushed in securely.
PHIA0953J
8. Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.

CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt lower anchor bolt, note the positions of washers and spacers for
correct installation.
9. Remove diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-21, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove shift selector. Refer to (5MT) or TM-227, "Removal and Installation" (CVT)
11. Remove A/C unit assembly bolt (C) and bracket (1) from vehicle.
12. Remove instrument panel lower bracket bolt (B) and screw (A)
and reposition bracket as necessary to remove floor trim.
ALJIA0712ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-26 2014 Note
FLOOR TRIM
13. Release carpet hook clips with a suitable tool (A) and remove.
: Clip A
AWJIA0736ZZ
D
14. Release pawls using a suitable tool (A) and open the harness
clips.
: Pawl E
G
AWJIA0737ZZ
15. Remove floor trim.

H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: I
• Replace harness protector B with a new part after removal. Do not reuse harness protector B.
INT

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-27 2014 Note
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
AWJIA1143ZZ
1. Headlining 2. Rear assist grip (RH) 3. Front assist grip (RH)

4. Microphone (if equipped) 5. Sun visor holder (RH) 6. Sun visor holder (LH)
7. Map lamp (if equipped) 8. Sun visor (RH) 9. Sun visor (LH)
10. Interior room lamp 11. Rear assist grip (LH) A. Headlining clip
Pawl

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-28 2014 Note
HEADLINING
A
REMOVAL
lation". B
2. Remove sun visor screws and sun visorS (LH/RH).
3. Remove map lamp (if equipped). Refer to INL-37, "Removal and Installation".
C
4. Remove interior room lamp. Refer to INL-39, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove microphone (if equipped). Refer to AV-101, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove center pillar upper finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-23, "CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER : D
7. Remove luggage side upper finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-33, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER :
E
8. Insert a suitable tool (A) at approximately a 30 degree angle into
the sun visor holder notch on the front of the sun visor holder (1)
and press in the locking tab (B) to release it. While holding in
lock tab (B), rotate the sun visor holder (1) 90 degrees to release F
it from the headlining.
: Front
CAUTION: G
Do not force the sun visor holder when removing as the
locking tab may be damaged if the suitable tool is not posi-
tioned correctly. H
NOTE:
If the sun visor holder (1) does not fully rotate, make sure that
the suitable tool (A) is pressing in on the locking tab (B) and is
not positioned under locking tab (B). Reinsert the suitable tool I
(A) as necessary to release the locking tab (B).
INT
ALJIA0537ZZ
L
9. Release assist grip pawls and remove bolt (A) using a suitable
tool and remove all assist grips.
:Pawl M
10. Remove headlining clips.
11. Remove headlining through the back door.
CAUTION: N
• Do not reuse headlining.
O
AWJIA1126ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. P
CAUTION:
• Remove all remaining adhesive from roof panel.
• Do not reuse headlining. Replace with new part after removal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-29 2014 Note
HEADLINING
• Apply adhesive as shown before installing headlining.
AWJIA1102ZZ
1. Headlining A. Adhesive application location

B. Adhesive C. 8 mm
D. 5 mm
• Do not bend headlining when installing.

• When installing headlining, start by installing both sun visor holders and headlining clips to hold
headlining in position.
• Be careful that the surface is not wrinkled when installing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-30 2014 Note
LUGGAGE TRIM
LUGGAGE TRIM
A
INT
AWJIA1129ZZ
N
1. Parcel shelf finisher 2. Luggage floor board (if equipped) 3. Luggage side upper finisher (LH)
4. Luggage side front reinforcement (LH) 5. Luggage side rear reinforcement (LH) 6. Luggage side lower finisher (LH)
7. Luggage rear plate 8. Luggage side lower finisher (RH) 9. Luggage side rear reinforcement (RH) O
10. Luggage side front reinforcement 11. Luggage side upper finisher (RH) 12. Luggage side front cover (RH)
(RH)
13. Luggage side clip 14. Luggage side rear cover (RH) 15. Luggage floor box
P
16. Luggage side rear cover (LH) 17. Luggage side front cover (LH) 18. Luggage floor trim
Pawl Metal clip Clip
Front
LUGGAGE REAR PLATE

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-31 2014 Note
LUGGAGE TRIM
LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016053
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage floor board (if equipped).
2. Remove luggage floor trim.
3. Remove luggage rear plate clips (A).
AWJIA1127ZZ
4. Release luggage rear plate clips using a suitable tool (A) and
remove luggage rear plate as shown.
: Clip
AWJIA1128ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• When installing luggage rear plate, check that clips are securely placed into body holes.
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016054
REMOVAL
1. Partially remove rear body side welt. Refer to INT-22, "BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove luggage floor board (if equipped).
3. Remove luggage floor trim.
4. Remove seat back hinge. Refer to SE-20, "SEATBACK HINGE : Removal and Installation".
5. Release rear parcel shelf finisher clips using a suitable tool and remove rear parcel shelf finisher (if
equipped).
6. Remove luggage side lower finisher pawls using a suitable tool.

GETtheMANUALS.org
I N T - 3 2 2014 Note
LUGGAGE TRIM
: Pawl
A
AWJIA1095ZZ
D
7. Release the harness connector from cargo room lamp (RH only) and remove luggage side lower finisher.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. E
CAUTION:
• When installing luggage side clip, press luggage side clip so that upper side stamp mark faces F
toward passenger room, and then completely engage luggage side clip pawls.
LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER
LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016055
G
REMOVAL
H
1. Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-32, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
2. Remove seat belt lower anchor bolt.
I
3. Release luggage side upper finisher clips using a suitable tool
and remove luggage side upper finisher.
: Clip
INT
L
AWJIA1097ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing luggage side upper finisher, check that clips are placed in body holes. N

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-33 2014 Note
BACK DOOR TRIM
BACK DOOR TRIM
AWJIA1103ZZ
1. Back door inner finisher 2. Back door panel 3. Back door pull handle
Clip Pawl
BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER

BACK DOOR INNER FINISHER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016057
REMOVAL
1. Release back door inner finisher clips using a suitable tool and remove.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Visually check the clips for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing back door inner finisher, check that locate pin and clips are placed in body panel
holes.
BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE
BACK DOOR PULL HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009016058
REMOVAL
1. Release pawls using a suitable tool and remove.
INSTALLATION
GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-34 2014 Note
BACK DOOR TRIM
CAUTION: A
• Visually check the pawls for deformation and damage during installation.
• When installing, confirm upper and lower orientation of back door pull handle, then install it.
• When installing back door pull handle, check that pawls are placed in body panel holes.
B
INT

GETtheMANUALS.org
INT-35 2014 Note
BODY INTERIOR
IP
A
B
SECTION
INSTRUMENT PANEL C
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2 Removal and Installation .........................................15 F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2 STEERING COLUMN COVERS ....................... 17

Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Removal and Installation .........................................17
G
SIONER" ................................................................... 2
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY .................... 18
Exploded View .........................................................18
Removal and Installation .........................................18 H
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
CENTER CONSOLE LOWER ........................... 20
PREPARATION ................................................... 3 Removal and Installation .........................................20
I
Special Service Tools .............................................. 3
CLUSTER LID A ............................................... 21
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 3
CLIP LIST ............................................................ 4 IP
CLUSTER LID C ............................................... 22
Descriptions for Clips ................................................ 4
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 8 FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER ................... 23 K
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG- Removal and Installation .........................................23
NOSES ................................................................ 8 INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH .................. 24
Work Flow ................................................................. 8 L
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ............ 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 12 GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY ................................ 25
Removal and Installation .........................................25 M
UPPER GLOVE BOX ........................................ 26
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ..................14 Removal and Installation .........................................26
Exploded View ........................................................ 14 N

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-1 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
- Oily dirt:
area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-2 2014 Note
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(Kent-Moore No.) C
Tool name
(J-39570) D
Chassis Ear
SIIA0993E
F
(J-50397)
Kit G
H
ALJIA1232ZZ

(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set I
IP
AWJIA0483ZZ
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000009472928 K
(Kent-Moore No.) Description L

Tool name
Engine Ear
M
SIIA0995E
( — ) Loosening nuts, screws and bolts O

Power Tool
PIIB1407E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-3 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
CLIP LIST
Replace any clips which are damaged during removal or installation.
SIIA0315E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-4 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
IP
SIIA0316E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-5 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
SIIA0317E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-6 2014 Note
CLIP LIST
< PREPARATION >
ALJIA0564GB I
IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-7 2014 Note
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
customer's comments; refer to IP-12, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer is
defining the noise.
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping.
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
• Buzz—(Like a bumble bee)

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-8 2014 Note
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to A
B
1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”. C
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. D
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS E
F
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear: J-39565 and mechanic's stethoscope). G
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be H
temporarily. I
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise. IP
Refer to IP-9, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting".
REPAIR THE CAUSE K
- separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. L
ment.
CAUTION: M
NOTE:
• Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. N
- SILICONE GREASE: Use instead of UHMW tape that will be visible or does not fit. The silicone grease will O
- DUCT TAPE: Use to eliminate movement. P
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-9 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
3. Instrument panel to front pillar finisher
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
ness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-50397) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-10 2014 Note
2. Front console map/reading lamp lens loose. A
SEATS B
noise.
Cause of seat noise include: C
D
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. E
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then F
G
4. Loose radiator installation pins H
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best I
insulating the component causing the noise. IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-11 2014 Note
LAIA0072E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-12 2014 Note
IP
LAIA0071E

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-13 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY
AWJIA1105ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-14 2014 Note
1. Instrument side finisher (RH) 2. Passenger air bag module 3. Instrument panel assembly A
4. Instrument side finisher (LH) 5. Side ventilator grille (LH) 6. Combination meter
7. Cluster lid A 8. Instrument lower panel LH 9. Steering column upper cover
10. Steering column lower cover 11. Steering lock escutcheon 12. Center console lower B
13. Front air control finisher 14. Front air control 15. Center ventilator grille (RH)
16. Center ventilator grille (LH) 17. Cluster lid C 18. Audio unit/AV control unit
19. Glove box lid 20. Glove box assembly 21. Glove box striker C
22. Side ventilator grille (RH) 23. Upper glove box Pawl
Metal clip Clip
D
CAUTION: E
• Be careful not to scratch instrument panel pad or other parts.
• Before servicing, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least
three minutes.
• Do not tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance. F
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative and positive battery terminals, then wait at least three minutes. Refer to PG-69, G
lation". H
3. Remove dash side finishers (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installa-
tion".
4. Partially remove front body side welts (LH/RH). Refer to INT-22, "BODY SIDE WELT : Removal and I
Installation".
5. Release the pawls using a suitable tool (A) and then remove
instrument side finisher (LH) as shown.
IP
: Pawl
AWJIA1130ZZ
M
6. Release the pawls using a suitable tool (A) and then remove
instrument side finisher (RH) as shown.
: Pawl
N
P
AWJIA1131ZZ

8. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-8, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove combination switch. Refer to EXL-112, "Removal and Installation".
11. Remove combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".
GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-15 2014 Note
12. Remove audio unit. Refer to AV-33, "Removal and Installation" (BASE AUDIO) or AV-93, "Removal and
Installation" (DISPLAY AUDIO).
13. Remove AV control unit (NAVIGATION). Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
14. Remove front air control. Refer to HAC-47, "Removal and Installation".
16. Remove front passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation".
17. Remove instrument panel assembly.
a. Remove instrument panel assembly screws (A).
ALJIA1252ZZ
b. Disconnect the harness connectors from the instrument panel assembly.

c. Remove instrument panel assembly through passenger door opening.
CAUTION:
• Cover shift selector assembly with a shop cloth to prevent damage to instrument panel assem-
bly.
• When removing instrument panel assembly, two people are required to prevent from damage.
18. Removal of the following components is only necessary if replacing the instrument panel assembly.
• Side ventilator grille (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-6, "SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation".
• Center ventilator duct (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-6, "CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installa-
tion".
• Side defroster duct (LH/RH): Refer to VTL-7, "SIDE DEFROSTER DUCT : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
If replacing instrument panel, transfer all the necessary parts to the new instrument panel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-16 2014 Note
STEERING COLUMN COVERS
STEERING COLUMN COVERS
A
REMOVAL B
2. Remove steering column cover screws (A).
NOTE: C
Rotate steering wheel to access steering column cover screws.
3. Pull steering column upper cover (1) upward to disengage steer-
ing column upper cover pawls. D
: Pawl
4. Remove steering column upper cover (1) and lower cover (2).
E
AWJIA0707ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-17 2014 Note
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
TYPE 1
AWJIA1134ZZ
1. Shift selector boot (5MT: RS5F91R) 2. Center console assembly 3. USB connector (if equipped)
4. Power socket A. Clip B. Screw
TYPE 2
AWJIA1135ZZ
1. Shift selector boot (5MT: RS5F91R) 2. Center console assembly 3. Power socket
4. USB connector (if equipped) 5. Heated seat switch (RH) (if equipped) 6. Heated seat switch (LH)
(if equipped)
A. Clip B. Screw
REMOVAL
1. Move shift selector to “N” position (CVT: RE0F11A).
2. Remove shift selector handle (5MT: RS5F91R). Refer to TM-19, "Exploded View".
3. Raise parking brake lever.

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-18 2014 Note
4. Remove center console assembly clips (A).
A
JMJIA6093ZZ
D
5. Remove the center console assembly rear screws.
6. Slide driver side seat to the full rearward position and recline.
7. Slide passenger side seat to the full rearward position and recline. E
8. Lift rear right corner of center console assembly, rotating slightly,
making sure to lift assembly upward over the parking brake han-
dle.
F
9. Disconnect the harness connectors from the center console
assembly.
10. Remove center console assembly.
G
H
AWJIA0695ZZ
INSTALLATION
IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-19 2014 Note
CENTER CONSOLE LOWER
CENTER CONSOLE LOWER
REMOVAL
1. Remove center console assembly. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center console lower.
a. Remove center console lower clips (LH/RH) (A).
JMJIA6052ZZ
b. Release center console lower pawls using a suitable tool and

remove.
: Pawl
AWJIA0706ZZ
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-20 2014 Note
CLUSTER LID A
CLUSTER LID A
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove steering column covers. Refer to IP-17, "Removal and Installation".
C
3. Remove cluster lid A.
AWJIA1075ZZ
F
Pawl Metal clip

G
a. Remove combination meter finisher and cluster lid A as an assembly by pulling rearward to release pawls
and metal clips.
b. Disconnect the harness connector and remove cluster lid A. H
c. Separate cluster lid A (2) from combination meter finisher (1) by releasing the metal clips (If necessary).
INSTALLATION
IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-21 2014 Note
CLUSTER LID C
CLUSTER LID C
REMOVAL
1. Release the cluster lid C (1) clips using a suitable tool.
: Metal clip
ALJIA1231ZZ
2. Disconnect harness connectors from cluster lid C and remove.

INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-22 2014 Note
FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER
FRONT AIR CONTROL FINISHER
A
REMOVAL B
2. Remove intake door lever knob (2).
C
3. Release the front air control finisher (1) clips using a suitable
tool and remove.
: Metal clip
D
ALJIA1234ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-23 2014 Note
INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH
INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL LH
REMOVAL
1. Remove data link connector from instrument lower panel LH.
2. Remove bolts (A) and position hood lock/fuel filler door release
handle aside.
JMKIA7998ZZ
3. Remove instrument lower panel LH.

a. Release instrument lower panel LH metal clips and pawls using a suitable tool.
CAUTION:
Release pawls and metal clips slowly so that they are not damaged.
b. Disconnect the harness connectors from instrument lower panel LH and remove.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-24 2014 Note
GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY
GLOVE BOX ASSEMBLY
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove glove box lid.
a. Open glove box lid.
C
b. Pull glove box lid rearward and glove box lid hinges down and
rearward to release, then remove the glove box lid.
E
JMJIA6060ZZ
2. Remove glove box assembly. F

a. Remove glove box assembly screws (A).
b. Pull glove box assembly rearward to release pawls and remove.
: Pawl G
AWJIA0714ZZ I
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. IP

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-25 2014 Note
UPPER GLOVE BOX
UPPER GLOVE BOX
REMOVAL
1. Remove upper glove box screws (A).
ALJIA1253ZZ
2. Release the clips and pawls using a suitable tool and remove upper glove box.
INSTALLATION

GETtheMANUALS.org
IP-26 2014 Note
LAN
A
B
SECTION
LAN SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
CAN FUNDAMENTAL HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ......................... 20 F
Information ...............................................................20
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 4 Abbreviation List ......................................................20
G
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION ............................ 4 PRECAUTION .............................................. 21
Information ................................................................ 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 21
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System H
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5 SIONER" .................................................................21
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ............................ 5 Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis ..........................21 I
Precautions for Harness Repair ................................ 5 Precautions for Harness Repair ..............................21
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 23
J
SYSTEM .............................................................. 6 COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 23
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................. 6 Component Parts Location ......................................23
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System De- K
SYSTEM ............................................................ 24
scription ..................................................................... 6
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ............................24
DIAG ON CAN ............................................................. 6
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System De- L
DIAG ON CAN : System Description ........................ 6
scription ...................................................................24
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 8 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Com-
Component Description ............................................. 8 munication Control Circuit .......................................27 LAN
Condition of Error Detection ...................................... 8 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN System
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communi- Specification Chart ..................................................28
cation System ............................................................ 9 CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Com-
munication Signal Chart ..........................................29 N
CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT .............................. 11
Self-Diagnosis ......................................................... 12
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 31
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor ............................ 12
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart ...... 14 O
CAN SYSTEM ................................................... 31
Wiring Diagram ........................................................31
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 36 P
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........15
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart ................................. 15 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 36
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 15 Interview Sheet ........................................................36
CAN
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..................... 20
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART ........................ 37

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-1 2014 Note
Main Line ................................................................ 37 EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 57
Branch Line ............................................................ 37 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57
Short Circuit ............................................................ 37
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 58
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 38
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 38 BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 59
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 39
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 39 CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ................... 60
ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 40 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 504)
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 62
IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 41
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 41 MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 62
TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 42 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 62
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 43 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63
ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 64
AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................. 44 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 45 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 65
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 66
EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 46 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 66
AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................. 67
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 47 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 68
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 48 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68
EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 69
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT .................... 49 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 69
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503) M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 70
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 71
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 71
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 51
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51 CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ................... 72
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 52 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 505)
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 74
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 74
IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 54 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 55 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ........................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-2 2014 Note
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................87
A
TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................78 ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 88
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................79 IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..................... 89 B
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................80 TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 90
C
EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................81 A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...................... 91
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................91 D
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..........................82 AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ............................ 92

E
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ..........................83 DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 93
F
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ....................84 EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT .......................... 94
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 506)
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 95 G
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 86 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................95
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ......................... 96
H
CIRCUIT .............................................................86 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................96
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 86 CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT ................... 97
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT ...........................87 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................97 I
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-3 2014 Note
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [CAN FUNDAMENTAL]

• “CAN FUNDAMENTAL” of LAN Section describes the basic knowledge of the CAN communication system
and the method of trouble diagnosis.
• For information peculiar to a vehicle and inspection procedure, refer to “CAN”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-4 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009014720
B
CAUTION:
Follow the instructions listed below. Failure to do this may cause damage to parts:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. C
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness. D
Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000009014721
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. E
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
F
SKIB8766E H
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.

NOTE: I
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost. J
SKIB8767E
L
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-
tion line.
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-5 2014 Note
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009014722
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DIAG ON CAN
DIAG ON CAN : System Description INFOID:0000000009014723
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSMIA0526GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-6 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Name Harness Description A

Tx For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for control-
DDL1
Rx ling)
For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are used for control- B
DDL2 K-LINE
ling)
CAN-H For communications with the diagnostic tool. (CAN-H and CAN-L are also used for con-
Diag on CAN
CAN-L trol and diagnoses.) C
DESCRIPTION
“Diag on CAN” is a diagnosis method which uses the CAN communication line for the communication between
the control unit and the diagnostic tool. D
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-7 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Component Description INFOID:0000000009014724
JSMIA0527GB
Component Description
Main line CAN communication line between splices
Branch line CAN communication line between splice and a control unit
Splice A point connecting a branch line with a main line
Termination circuit Circuit connected across the CAN communication system. (Resistor)
Condition of Error Detection INFOID:0000000009014725
DTC (e.g. U1000 and U1001) of CAN communication is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT if a
CAN communication signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR
• CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
• CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)
• Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line
WHEN DTC OF CAN COMMUNICATION IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM IS NORMAL
• Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN communication unit
and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN communication may be
detected.)
• Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.
• Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the ignition
switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN communication,
malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
• Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.
NOTE:
CAN communication system is normal if DTC of CAN communication is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS of
CONSULT under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of each control unit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-8 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System INFOID:0000000009014726
A
In CAN communication system, multiple control units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each control unit
cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this condition, mul-
tiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode. B
ERROR EXAMPLE
NOTE:
Each vehicle differs in symptom of each control unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line wiring. C
Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Open Circuit
JSMIA0442GB
I
Unit name Major symptom
ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
• Reverse warning buzzer does not sound. J
BCM • The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front wip-
er switch being in the intermittent position.
EPS control unit The steering effort increases. K
• The shift position indicator and OD OFF indicator turn OFF.
Combination meter • The speedometer is inoperative.
• The odo/trip meter stops.
L
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) Normal operation.
TCM No impact on operation.
When the ignition switch is ON, LAN
IPDM E/R • The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-9 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Example: TCM Branch Line Open Circuit
JSMIA0443GB
Unit name Major symptom

ECM Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
BCM Reverse warning buzzer does not sound.
EPS control unit Normal operation.
• Shift position indicator and O/D OFF indicator turn OFF.
Combination meter
• Warning lamps turn ON.
TCM No impact on operation.
IPDM E/R Normal operation.
NOTE:
The model (all control units on CAN communication system are Diag on CAN) cannot perform CAN diagnosis
with CONSULT if the following error occurs. The error is judged by the symptom.
Error Difference of symptom

Data link connector branch line open circuit Normal operation.
Most of the control units which are connected to the CAN commu-
CAN-H, CAN-L harness short-circuit
nication system enter fail-safe mode or are deactivated.
Example: Data Link Connector Branch Line Open Circuit
JSMIA0444GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-10 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Unit name Major symptom A

ECM
BCM
EPS control unit
B
Combination meter Normal operation.

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) C
TCM
IPDM E/R
NOTE: D
When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication signals are
not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning circuit.
E
Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit
J
JSMIA0445GB
Unit name Major symptom K

• Engine torque limiting is affected, and shift harshness increases.
ECM
• Engine speed drops.
• Reverse warning buzzer does not sound. L
• The front wiper moves under continuous operation mode even though the front
wiper switch being in the intermittent position.
• The room lamp does not turn ON.
BCM LAN
• The engine does not start (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning the igni-
tion switch OFF.)
• The steering lock does not release (if an error or malfunction occurs while turning
the ignition switch OFF.)
N
EPS control unit The steering effort increases.
• The tachometer and the speedometer do not move.
Combination meter • Warning lamps turn ON. O
• Indicator lamps do not turn ON.
TCM No impact on operation. P
When the ignition switch is ON,
IPDM E/R • The headlamps (Lo) turn ON.
• The cooling fan continues to rotate.
CAN Diagnosis with CONSULT INFOID:0000000009014727
CAN diagnosis on CONSULT extracts the root cause by receiving the following information.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-11 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
• Response to the system call
• Control unit diagnosis information
• Self-diagnosis
• CAN diagnostic support monitor
Self-Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009014728
If communication signals cannot be transmitted or received among control units communicating via CAN com-
munication line, CAN communication-related DTC is displayed on the CONSULT “Self Diagnostic Result”
screen.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples of CAN communication-related DTC. For other DTC, refer to the applica-
ble sections.
Self-diagnosis item
DTC DTC detection condition Inspection/Action
(CONSULT indication)
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN
ECM communication signal of OBD (emission-relat-
ed diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.
When a control unit (except for ECM) is not
Except Start the inspection. Re-
transmitting or receiving CAN communication
for ECM fer to the applicable sec-
signal for 2 seconds or more.
tion of the indicated
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN communi- control unit.
U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT cation signal other than OBD (emission-related diagnosis)
for 2 seconds or more.
When a control unit is not transmitting or receiving CAN
U1002 SYSTEM COMM
communication signal for 2 seconds or less.
When an error is detected during the initial diagnosis for Replace the control unit
U1010 CONTROL UNIT(CAN)
CAN controller of each control unit. indicating “U1010”.
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor INFOID:0000000009014729
MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT)

Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication
JSMIA0964GB
Without PAST
Item PRESENT Description

OK Normal at present
Initial diagnosis
NG Control unit error (Except for some control units)

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-12 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Item PRESENT Description
A
Transmission diagnosis Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more.
UNKWN
Diagnosis not performed B
Control unit name Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more.

(Reception diagnosis) UNKWN Diagnosis not performed C
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)
With PAST D
Item PRESENT PAST Description

OK Normal at present and in the past E
OK Normal at present, but unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more
Transmission diagnosis 1 – 39 in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
from OFF to ON.) F
UNKWN 0 Unable to transmit signals for 2 seconds or more at present.
OK Normal at present and in the past
Normal at present, but unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more G
OK
1 – 39 in the past. (The number indicates the number of ignition switch cycles
Control unit name from OFF to ON.)
(Reception diagnosis) H
UNKWN 0 Unable to receive signals for 2 seconds or more at present.
Diagnosis not performed.
Not diagnosed –
No control unit for receiving signals. (No applicable optional parts)
I
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-13 2014 Note
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000009014730
The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals transmitted/received among control units. It is useful for
detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission and recep-
tion unit.
JSMIA0446GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-14 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CAN FUNDAMENTAL]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart INFOID:0000000009014731
B
L
JSMIA0528GB
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009014732

LAN
INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER

Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause of CAN communication system errors and to N
understand vehicle condition and symptoms for proper trouble diagnosis.
Points in interview
O
• What: Parts name, system name
• When: Date, Frequency
• Where: Road condition, Place
• In what condition: Driving condition/environment P
• Result: Symptom
Notes for checking error symptoms:
• Check normal units as well as error symptoms.
- Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer indicates
tachometer functions normally.
• When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go into fail-
safe mode.
GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-15 2014 Note
• Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most obvious to
the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.
SKIB8717E
INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION

Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not.
NOTE:
Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The error may
temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.
CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)
Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment.
NOTE:
• This chart is used if CONSULT does not automatically recognize CAN system type.
• There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of available sys-
tem types, either style A or style B may be used.
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-16 2014 Note
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.
A
LAN
N
JSMIA0529GB
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)

O
NOTE:

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-17 2014 Note
CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information shown in the chart.
JSMIA0530GB
CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET

Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition, and CAN system type on the interview
sheet.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-18 2014 Note
Interview Sheet (Example)
A
L
JSMIA0531GB
DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE LAN

CAN diagnosis function of CONSULT detects the root cause.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-19 2014 Note
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL > [CAN]

• “CAN” of LAN Section describes information peculiar to a vehicle and inspection procedures.
• For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart" of “CAN FUNDAMEN-
TAL”.
Abbreviation List INFOID:0000000009014734
Unit name abbreviations in CONSULT CAN diagnosis and in this section are as per the following list.
Abbreviation Unit name

A-BAG Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
ABS ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
AV AV control unit
BCM BCM
DLC Data link connector
ECM ECM
EPS EPS control unit
IPDM-E IPDM E/R
M&A Combination meter
TCM TCM

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-20 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CAN]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: D
F
ness connectors.
G
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precautions for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009014736
J
CAUTION:
Follow the instructions listed below. Failure to do this may cause damage to parts:
• Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal. K
• Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
L
Precautions for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000009014737
• Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area. LAN
NOTE:
A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
SKIB8766E
P

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-21 2014 Note
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [CAN]
• Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE:
Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The
spliced wire becomes separated and the characteristics of twisted
line are lost.
SKIB8767E
• Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN communica-
tion line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-22 2014 Note
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [CAN]
COMPONENT PARTS
B
ALMIA0651ZZ J
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit Combination meter ABS actuator and electric unit (con-
trol unit)
AV control unit EPS control unit Data link connector
K
TCM IPDM E/R ECM

BCM L
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-23 2014 Note
SYSTEM
SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000009014739
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSMIA1476GB
DESCRIPTION
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
CAN Communication Signal Generation
• Termination circuits (resistors) are connected across the CAN communication system. When transmitting a
CAN communication signal, each control unit passes a current to the CAN-H line and the current returns to
the CAN-L line.
JSMIA0450GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-24 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• The current flows separately into the termination circuits connected
across the CAN communication system and the termination cir- A
cuits drop voltage to generate a potential difference between the
CAN-H line and the CAN-L line.
NOTE:
B
A signal with no current passage is called “Recessive” and one
with current passage is called “Dominant”.
JSMIA0543GB
D
• The system produces digital signals for signal communications, by
using the potential difference.
E
G
JSMIA0544ZZ
The Construction of CAN Communication Signal (Message)

H
JSMIA0545ZZ
K
No. Message name Description
1 Start of frame (1 bit) Start of message.
L
Priorities of message-sending are shown when there is a pos-
2 Arbitration of field (11 bit)
sibility that multiple messages are sent at the same time.
3 Control field (6 bit) Signal quantity in data field is shown.
LAN
4 Data field (0-64 bit) Actual signal is shown.
• The transmitting control unit calculates sending data in ad-
vance and writes the calculated value in a message.
N
5 CRC field (16 bit) • The receiving control unit calculates received data and judg-
es that the data reception is normal when the calculated val-
ue is the same as the value written in the sent data.
The completion of normal reception is sent to the transmitting O
6 ACK field (2 bit)
unit.
7 End of frame (7 bit) End of message.
P
CAN Communication Line

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-25 2014 Note
SYSTEM
The CAN communication line is a twisted pair wire consisting of
strands of CAN-H (1) and CAN-L (2) and has noise immunity.
JSMIA0382ZZ
NOTE:
The CAN communication system has the characteristics of noise-resistant because this system produces dig-
ital signals by using the potential difference between the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line and has the twisted
pair wire structure.
Since the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line are always adjacent to
each other, the same degree of noise occurs, respectively, when a
noise (1) occurs. Although the noise changes the voltage, the poten-
tial difference (2) between the CAN-H line and the CAN-L line is
insensitive to noise. Therefore, noise-resistant signals can be
obtained.
JSMIA0383ZZ
CAN Signal Communications

Each control unit of the CAN communication system transmits signals through the CAN communication con-
trol circuit included in the control unit and receives only necessary signals from each control unit to perform
various kinds of control.
• Example: Transmitted signals
JSMIA0576GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-26 2014 Note
SYSTEM
• Example: Received signals
A
H
JSMIA0577GB
NOTE:
The above signal names and signal communications are provided for reference purposes. For CAN communi-
cations signals of this vehicle, refer to LAN-29, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication I
Signal Chart".
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Control Circuit INFOID:0000000009014740
J
CAN communication control circuit is incorporated into the control unit and transmits/receives CAN communi-
cation signals.
K
LAN
JSMIA0453GB
P
Component System description

CAN controller It controls CAN communication signal transmission and reception, error detection, etc.
It converts digital signal into CAN communication signal, and CAN communication signal into digital
Transceiver IC
signal.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-27 2014 Note
SYSTEM
Component System description
Noise filter It eliminates noise of CAN communication signal.
Termination circuit* Generates a potential difference between CAN-H and CAN-L.

(Resistance of approx. 120 Ω)
*: These are the only control units wired with both ends of CAN communication system.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN System Specification Chart INFOID:0000000009014741
Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart.

NOTE:
Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" for how to use CAN system specification chart.
Body type Hatch back

Axle 2WD
Engine HR16DE
Transmission M/T CVT
Brake control ABS
Navigation system × ×
CAN system type 503 504 505 506
CAN communication control unit
ECM × × × ×
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) × × × ×
IPDM E/R × × × ×
TCM × ×
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit × × × ×
AV control unit × ×
Data link connector × × × ×
EPS control unit × × × ×
Combination meter × × × ×
BCM × × × ×
×: Applicable
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION

NOTE:
Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.
ALMIA0645ZZ

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-28 2014 Note
SYSTEM
NAVI switches A
With navigation system
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart INFOID:0000000009014742 B
Refer to LAN-14, "How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart" for how to use CAN communication signal
chart.
NOTE: C
• Refer to LAN-20, "Abbreviation List" for the abbreviations of the connecting units.
• The air bag diagnosis sensor unit and AV control unit uses CAN communication only for communicating with
the diagnostic tool (not with other connected control units). D
T: Transmit R: Receive
IPDM-E
ECM
BCM
TCM
M&A
ABS
EPS
Signal name E
Accelerator pedal position signal T R R

A/C compressor request signal T R F
Closed throttle position signal T R
Cooling fan speed request signal T R
ECO pedal guide signal T R
G
T R R
Engine and CVT integrated control signal
R T H
Engine coolant temperature signal T R R R
Engine speed signal T R R R
Engine status signal T R R R I
T R
N idle instruction signal
R T
J
T R
Malfunctioning indicator lamp signal
R T
Power generation command value signal T R K
ABS malfunction signal T R
ABS operation signal T R
L
ABS warning lamp signal T R
VDC warning lamp signal T R
VDC OFF indicator lamp signal T R LAN
Vehicle speed signal (ABS) T R R R R
Brake warning lamp signal T R
N
Detention switch signal T R
Front wiper stop position signal T R
High beam status signal R T O
T R
Ignition switch ON signal
R T
T R P
Interlock/PNP switch signal
R T
Low beam status signal R T
Push-button ignition switch status signal T R
T R R
Oil pressure switch signal
R T

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-29 2014 Note
SYSTEM
IPDM-E
ECM
BCM
M&A
TCM
ABS
EPS
Signal name
T R
Starter control relay signal
R T
T R
Starter relay status signal
R T
T R
Steering lock relay signal
R T
Steering lock unit status signal T R
T R
Sleep-ready signal
T R
R T
Rear window defogger control signal
R T
Wake up signal T R
Input shaft revolution signal R T
OD OFF indicator signal T R
Output shaft revolution signal R T
Shift position signal T R R
Target gear ratio signal R T
EPS operation signal R T
EPS warning lamp signal T R
Odometer signal T R
Overdrive control switch signal R T
Vehicle speed signal (Meter) R R T R
Wake up signal T R
A/C ON signal R T
Blower fan ON signal R T
Buzzer output signal R T
Dimmer signal R T
Door switch signal R R T
Engine start operation indicator lamp signal R T
Front wiper request signal R T
High beam request signal R R T
Key warning lamp signal R T
Low beam request signal R R T
Position light request signal R R T
Shift P warning lamp signal R T
Sleep wake up signal R R T
Stop lamp switch signal R T
Turn indicator signal R R T

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-30 2014 Note
CAN SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [CAN]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
CAN SYSTEM
B
LAN
ABMWA1993GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-31 2014 Note
CAN SYSTEM
ABMIA4638GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-32 2014 Note
CAN SYSTEM
LAN
ABMIA4639GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-33 2014 Note
CAN SYSTEM
ABMIA4640GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-34 2014 Note
CAN SYSTEM
LAN
ABMIA4641GB

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-35 2014 Note
< BASIC INSPECTION > [CAN]
BASIC INSPECTION
Interview Sheet INFOID:0000000009014744
NOTE:
Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Procedure" for how to use interview sheet.
SKIB8898E

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-36 2014 Note
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CAN]
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
Main Line INFOID:0000000009014745
B
Malfunction area Reference

C
Main line between IPDM E/R and data link connector LAN-38, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Branch Line INFOID:0000000009014746

D
Malfunction area Reference

ECM branch line circuit LAN-39, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line circuit LAN-40, "Diagnosis Procedure"
IPDM E/R branch line circuit LAN-41, "Diagnosis Procedure"
F
TCM branch line circuit LAN-42, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Air bag diognosis sensor unit branch line ciecuit LAN-43, "Diagnosis Procedure"
AV control unit branch line circuit LAN-44, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
Data link connector branch line circuit LAN-45, "Diagnosis Procedure"
EPS control unit branch line circuit LAN-46, "Diagnosis Procedure"
H
Combination meter branch line circuit LAN-47, "Diagnosis Procedure"
BCM branch line circuit LAN-48, "Diagnosis Procedure"
I
Short Circuit INFOID:0000000009014747
Malfunction area Reference J

CAN communication circuit LAN-49, "Diagnosis Procedure"
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-37 2014 Note
MAIN LINE BETWEEN IPDM-E AND DLC CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
- Harness connector E7
- Harness connector M69
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.
1. Disconnect the following harness connectors.
- IPDM E/R
- Harness connectors E7 and M69
2. Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector Harness connector

Continuity
Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.
62 21A Existed
E46 E7
61 20A Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the main line between the IPDM E/R and the harness connector E7.
Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Harness connector Data link connector

Continuity
Connector No. Terminal No. Connector No. Terminal No.
21A 6 Existed
M69 M22
20A 14 Existed
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the main line between the IPDM E/R and the data link connector.
NO >> Repair the main line between the harness connector M69 and the data link connector.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-38 2014 Note
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK CONNECTOR B
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ECM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and C
connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
E
1. Disconnect the connector of ECM.
2. Check the resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM harness connector F

Resistance (Ω)
Connector No. Terminal No.
E16 84 83 Approx. 108 – 132
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the ECM branch line. H
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to EC-137, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ECM. Refer to EC-338, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ECM branch line.
NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. J
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-39 2014 Note
ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector termi-
nals.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector

Resistance (Ω)
E33 11 10 Approx. 54 – 66
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to
BRC-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES (Present error)>>Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to BRC-73, "Removal
and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch line.
NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-40 2014 Note
IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK CONNECTOR B
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side C
and connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2. D
E
1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R.
2. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
IPDM E/R harness connector F

Resistance (Ω)
E46 62 61 Approx. 54 – 66
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the IPDM E/R branch line. H
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-29, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
YES (Present error)>>Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-30, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the IPDM E/R branch line.
NO >> Repair the power supply and the ground circuit. J
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-41 2014 Note
TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and con-
nector side).
- TCM
- Harness connector F8
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect the connector of TCM.
2. Check the resistance between the TCM harness connector terminals.
TCM harness connector

Resistance (Ω)
F44 33 23 Approx. 54 – 66
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the TCM branch line.
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to TM-211, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES (Present error)>>Replace the TCM. Refer to TM-235, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the TCM branch line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-42 2014 Note
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A-BAG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A
WARNING: B
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
C
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. D
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit for damage, bend and loose con-
nection (unit side and connector side). E
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the main harness. F
2.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRC-21, "Work Flow".
YES >> Replace the main harness.
NO >> Replace parts whose air bag system has a malfunction.
H
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-43 2014 Note
AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
AV BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the AV control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect the connector of AV control unit.
2. Check the resistance between the AV control unit harness connector terminals.
AV control unit harness connector

Resistance (Ω)
M70 8 17 Approx. 54 – 66
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the AV control unit branch line.
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the AV control unit. Refer to AV-153, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure".
YES (Present error)>>Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-178, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the AV control unit branch line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-44 2014 Note
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK CONNECTOR B
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection C
(connector side and harness side).
YES >> GO TO 2. D
E
Check the resistance between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector

Resistance (Ω) F
M22 6 14 Approx. 54 – 66
Is the measurement value within the specification? G
YES (Present error)>>Check CAN system type decision again.
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit.
NO >> Repair the data link connector branch line. H
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-45 2014 Note
EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
EPS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the EPS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (unit
side and connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect the connector of EPS control unit.
2. Check the resistance between the EPS control unit harness connector terminals.
EPS control unit harness connector

Resistance (Ω)
M53 2 1 Approx. 54 – 66
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the EPS control unit branch line.
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Proce-
dure".
YES (Present error)>>Replace the EPS control unit. Refer to STC-37, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the EPS control unit branch line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-46 2014 Note
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
M&A BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
A
1.CHECK CONNECTOR B
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection C
(unit side and connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2. D
E
1. Disconnect the connector of combination meter.
2. Check the resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Combination meter harness connector F

Resistance (Ω)
M24 1 2 Approx. 54 – 66
G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the combination meter branch line. H
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the combination meter. Refer to MWI-39, "COMBINATION
METER : Diagnosis Procedure". I
YES (Present error)>>Replace the combination meter. Refer to MWI-48, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the combination meter branch line. J
LAN

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-47 2014 Note
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect the connector of BCM.
2. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
BCM harness connector

Resistance (Ω)
M18 39 40 Approx. 108 – 132
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair the BCM branch line.
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to BCS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES (Present error)>>Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "Removal and Installation".
YES (Past error)>>Error was detected in the BCM branch line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-48 2014 Note
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
A
1.CONNECTOR INSPECTION B
3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. C
4. Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection.
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
E
Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Data link connector

Continuity F
M22 6 14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) H
Check the continuity between the data link connector and the ground.
Data link connector I

Continuity
Ground
6 Not existed
M22 J
14 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 4. K
NO >> Check the harness and repair the root cause.
4.CHECK ECM AND BCM TERMINATION CIRCUIT L
1. Remove the ECM and the BCM.
2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
LAN
ECM
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
84 83 Approx. 108 – 132 N
3. Check the resistance between the BCM terminals.
BCM
O
Resistance (Ω)
Terminal No.
39 40 Approx. 108 – 132 P
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace the ECM and/or the BCM.
5.CHECK SYMPTOM
Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom (Results from interview with
customer)” are reproduced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-49 2014 Note
Inspection result
Reproduced>>GO TO 6.
Non-reproduced>>Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble diagnosis procedure when past error is
detected.
6.CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION
Perform the reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit.
3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors of CAN communication system.
NOTE:
ECM and BCM have a termination circuit. Check other units first.
4. Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the “Symptom
(Results from interview with customer)” are reproduced.
NOTE:
Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result
Reproduced>>Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above procedure.
Non-reproduced>>Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LAN-50 2014 Note
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 503)]
B
1.CHECK CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. C
3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side
and harness side).
D
- Harness connector M69
E
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) F
1. Disconnect the following harness connectors.
- IPDM E/R
- Harness connectors E7 and M69 G
2. Check the continuity between the IPDM E/R harness connector and the harness connector.
IPDM E/R harness connector Harness connector

Continuity H
Co

2013 Nissan Note E12 SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Nissan Note E12 SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Edition: April 2013 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX

I VENTILATION, HEATER &

All information in this manual is based on the latest product information

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

SERVICE MANUAL: Model: Year:

DATE: YOUR NAME: POSITION:

QUICK REFERENCE CHART: NOTE

Engine type HR16DE

Drive Belt INFOID:0000000009725685

Deflection adjustment * Unit: mm (in)

Spark Plug INFOID:0000000009725686

SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)

Front Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000009725683

Minimum −0° 50′ (−0.83°)

Camber Nominal −0° 05′ (−0.08°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2 –0° 45′ (–0.75°) - 0° 45′ (0.75°)

Caster Nominal 3° 45′ (3.75°)

(LH) and (RH) difference*2 –0° 45′ (–0.75°) - 0° 45′ (0.75°)

Minimum 0 mm (0.00 in)

Rear Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1) INFOID:0000000009725681

Minimum −1° 55′ (−1.92°)

Minimum Out 2.0 mm (Out 0.079 in)

Wheelarch Height (Unladen*) INFOID:0000000009725682

Tire size 185/65R15 195/55R16

Brake Specifications INFOID:0000000009725679

Cylinder bore diameter 54.025 (2.13)

Brake Pedal INFOID:0000000009725680

Front Disc Brake INFOID:0000000009725677

Rear Drum Brake INFOID:0000000009725678

Fluids and Lubricants INFOID:0000000009725676

Engine oil With oil filter change 3.5 3-3/4 qt 3-1/8 qt

CVT 7.3 7-3/4 qt 6-3/8 qt

Reservoir tank 0.7 3/4 qt 5/8 qt

With oil cooler 7.1 7-1/2 qt 6-1/4 qt

Manual transaxle fluid gear oil 2.67 5-5/8 pt 4-3/4 pt

Air conditioner system refrigerant 0.4 0.88 lb 0.88 lb

Revision: April 2013

Revision: April 2013

INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION P

Revision: April 2013

Accelerator pedal stroke (A) : Refer to ACC-5, "Accel-

• Check the accelerator pedal height.

Accelerator pedal height : Refer to ACC-5, "Acceler-

Revision: April 2013

Revision: April 2013

Revision: April 2013

PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 38 AUDIO UNIT .............................................................. 72

WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 121 U12AD AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 147

Revision: April 2013

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 160 GPS ANTENNA ................................................ 186

STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 162 ROD ANTENNA ................................................ 187

Revision: April 2013

Revision: April 2013

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000009640322

Tool name Description

Revision: April 2013

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER

Revision: April 2013

REAR DOOR SPEAKER

Rod Antenna, Antenna Amp. and Antenna Feeder INFOID:0000000009509280

ANTENNA FEEDER LAYOUT

Revision: April 2013

1. Antenna base (antenna amp.) 2. Rod Antenna 3. M351